Autoipe PDF

AutoPIPE Help Desk Page 1 of 770
Bentley AutoPIPE V8i SELECTseries 4 Edition

Help last updated: 1 November 2012
Context-sensitive help may be displayed for any AutoPIPE menu command by selecting the command in the menu and pressing F1. You can also get field-level context-sensitive help from inside any
dialog by pressing F1 or by pressing the ? button in the dialog then selecting the desired field. This second method has the advantage of being able to access help related to grayed-out (disabled) items.
Additionally, from within a dialog you can always press the Help button to access overview information related to that dialog.
The following help categories are available:
Getting Started Introduction to the program and AutoPIPE interface, covering installation and configuration, and features included in this version
as well as historical versions (starting with v6.2). A full complement of on-line Tutorial demos is provided, which demonstrate
specific features of the AutoPIPE interface and basic modeling procedures.
Tutorials A full complement of on-line Tutorial demos is provided, which demonstrate specific features of the AutoPIPE interface and basic
modeling procedures. Clicking this link will display these offerings in a separate help viewer window.
Command Reference Organized similar to the structure of the main AutoPIPE menu to enable you to quickly locate help on a particular command or
function set. A Toolbar Command Reference topic is also provided to enable you to quickly locate within this Command
Reference for that toolbar item.
Input Grids Reference Describes the Input Grids, which provide a spreadsheet interface to review/edit model input data as an alternative to the modify
menu functions or the graphic interface.
Result Grids Reference Describes the Result Grids, which provide a spreadsheet interface to review the output results for the complete model as an
alternative to the Result menu functions.
Export Input and Results
Describes the process of exporting the Input and Results Grids.
Reference
Batch Input Reference AutoPIPE provides a comprehensive, keyword-oriented input format that enables users to specify the geometry of a piping system
in ASCII text files. The structure of these files is covered here.
File Reference Reference to the relevant files installed by AutoPIPE.
Stress Isometric Describes the process of generating a Stress Isometric.
AutoPIPE Report Viewer Describes the AutoPIPE Report Viewer.
Frequently Asked
A list of frequently asked questions.
Questions
Reference Information Reference information related to the calculations used by AutoPIPE, tables of components data, etc.
Modeling Approaches Set of practical examples arranged in procedural "How To" style. This area contains modeling and stress scenarios which you are
likely to encounter, and the procedure for modeling these elements in AutoPIPE.
Technical Support Contact numbers for technical support personnel and automated services.
Be Communities Steps for joining the official Bentley Community for the AutoPIPE, StressISO, AutoPIPE Nozzle, PlantFLOW, and PULS
products
Getting Started
file:///C:/Users/thatquang.ton/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh5317.htm 2/2/2020
Getting Started with AutoPIPE

This section is designed to quickly get you acquainted with the AutoPIPE environment and component placement procedures. Click one of the topic areas below to display the help.
Features Contains a partial list of AutoPIPE features.

Revision History Contains a list of features added in different versions of AutoPIPE, starting with v6.20.09 (released 4/12/2002)
AutoPIPE versus Provides a table which illustrates the different capabilities of the standard version of AutoPIPE and AutoPIPE PLUS.
AutoPIPE Plus
AutoPIPE Contains a list of the AutoPIPE features which are considered as "Nuclear Safety Related"
functionality for QA
Approvals
Installation Provides a description of the AutoPIPE installation procedure.
Authorization After installation, AutoPIPE will run in Demo Mode until it is properly authorized. To ensure compliance with the terms of your purchase agreement, a security system is
utilized. All software authorization for new Bentley products is handled by the new Bentley Security Manager. This topic provides an overview of this application. Further
information click on the link for AutoPIPE QuickStart Guide.
Loading a System Describes how to define a new system and how to load an existing system.
Interface Contains a general introduction to the AutoPIPE interface, including toolbars, the menu system, the drawing area, and dialogs.
AutoPIPE Modeling Provides an introduction to the main concepts involved in producing and editing models. Discussions are provided on the Active Point, the concept of segments, and general
Concepts review and editing techniques.
Basic Tasks This section describes how to perform basic AutoPIPE tasks such as executing commands; selecting, inserting, modifying, and deleting components; and selecting a range of
components.
Create a Stress This section describes how to create a fully dimensioned isometric showing the pipe stress model and customizable input and result data. Add-on license is required.
Isometric
Getting Started
Feature Overview
Bentley AutoPIPE is a stand-alone computer aided engineering (CAE) program for calculation of piping stresses, flange analysis, pipe support design, and equipment nozzle loading analysis under static
and dynamic loading conditions. In addition to 24 piping codes, AutoPIPE incorporates ASME, British Standard, API, NEMA, ANSI, ASCE, AISC, UBC, and WRC guidelines and design limits to
provide a comprehensive analysis of the entire system. AutoPIPE is available for Windows XP/Vista and can be licensed across networks.
There are three versions of AutoPIPE: Standard, Plus, and Nuclear. The Plus version offers several advanced analysis capabilities not available in the Standard version which are detailed later in this
chapter. The Nuclear version offers all of the features of the Plus version with the addition of all the features for ASME class 1 design. A KHK2 Add-On option is also available for the Plus or Nuclear
version that allows use of the Japanese KHK Level 2 piping code in addition to all the features of the Plus or Nuclear version. AutoPIPE is a proven, well established program which has been
commercially available since 1986. AutoPIPE’s rigorous quality assurance practices have withstood numerous on-site audits, making AutoPIPE one of the few PC based piping programs approved for
use in nuclear safety applications.
Overview
Developed to meet the needs of companies involved in industrial piping system design, AutoPIPE utilizes Windows-standard commands, object oriented graphics technology, and CAD interfaces to
enable users to create, modify, and review piping and structural models and their results quickly and easily.
AutoPIPE is a recognized leader in analyzing piping systems for many applications including but not limited to the Nuclear Power industry, Process and Chemical plants, Offshore FPSO Platform and
Riser design, Fire protection systems, Oil Refineries, cross-country gas and oil pipelines, FRP piping and building services piping.
A graphical representation of the model is displayed as it is being developed, providing instant visual feedback. AutoPIPE performs extensive error checking as the data is being entered and alerts the user
if the model does not comply with the regulatory standards of piping design.
Using AutoPIPE’s object oriented graphical select options, users can insert, delete, or modify pipe properties, supports, or offsets across an entire range of points with one command. Graphical selection
of ranges is also used for cut, copy, & paste operations.
Feature Summary
The following is a partial list of the features and capabilities of AutoPIPE. Refer to the on-line help for a complete reference of features and functionality.
Properties And Component Libraries
AutoPIPE contains a comprehensive and extensible library of material properties and piping & structural components including pipes, reducers, tees, valves, flanges, beams, flexible connectors and other
items. Supports include: anchors, spring and constant force hangers, one-way restraints, limit stops, guides, snubbers and tie-rods.
The material library includes temperature dependent properties and code dependent allowables. AutoPIPE provides component libraries for ASME/ANSI, JIS, DIN, and Nordic standards.
Hanger Design
AutoPIPE performs spring hanger design for one or more operating conditions. The program selects hangers from a customizable manufacturer's library, which includes: Grinnell, Bergen-Patterson,
Lisega, NPS, and others.
Structural Modeling In Autopipe
AutoPIPE provides built-in structural analysis with beam elements to enable users to consider the mass and flexibility of structural supports as part of their piping analysis. AutoPIPE provides structural
modeling options for user specified beta angles to orient beam local cross-section axes with global axes, rigid end lengths to account for the connectivity of end points to other members in the structural
system, and end releases to model pinned connections. AutoPIPE’s unique two point support elements allow the user to define the connection between pipe and structural steel using gaps and friction at
the same point if required.
The AISC structural library with cross sectional properties and a database of properties of commonly used structural steel materials is included within AutoPIPE. Users can easily define their own beam
elements and steel materials to model beam elements not included in the AutoPIPE’s database.
Frame structures are created and modified in interactive mode using AutoPIPE’s graphical interface. In this manner, users can graphically copy, paste, or modify structures with one operation using
AutoPIPE’s graphical select options or by clicking on a particular beam element.
Bi-Directional Integration Between STAAD & AutoPIPE
AutoPIPE provides tight integration between piping and structural analysis using PipeLink, an advanced structural model data exchange used to exchange model data with STAAD.Pro. AutoPIPE can
automatically transfer pipe support loads as well as import complete structures to and from STAAD.Pro, the number 1 structural program, saving weeks of design time and providing safer, more realistic
engineered designs.
Non-Linear Analysis Options
AutoPIPE provides directional supports, gaps, friction, bilinear spring supports and nonlinear buried pipeline analysis. Users can specify both gaps and friction at a support point to simulate real world
boundary conditions. AutoPIPE provides 2-point restraint functionality to define tie rods with gaps, pipe/structure interaction, and other connectivity between any 2 points in the system.
AutoPIPE provides unique capabilities for nonlinear load sequencing. Users can, for example, specify that wind, seismic, or other occasional loads are analyzed in sequence immediately after the gravity
load or specify that the occasional loads are analyzed after thermal. In this manner, users can accurately calculate loads and stresses for occasional loads acting on the operating position of the piping or
the ambient position of the piping. Load sequencing options also allow the user to calculate gravity and thermal loads using nonlinear analysis and seismic loads using linear analysis (as recommended by
UBC and other design standards) in the same run.
Local Stress Calculations
AutoPIPE provides a link to AutoPIPE Nozzle for calculations of local shell stresses per British Standard 5500, Welding Research Council bulletin 107, 297, and 368, using stress allowables and load
combinations as specified by ASME Sec. VIII, Div. 1 and 2. Various piping load combinations on tanks can be examined in accordance with the API 650 code.
Further, AutoPIPE provides unique options for hillside nozzles and reinforcing pad calculations. These are available for cylinders, spheres, cones, semi-ellipses, and torispheres. The automatic importing
of AutoPIPE piping loads saves time and minimizes user errors.
Finite Element Theory
AutoPIPE is a finite element program used to analyze piping and structural systems subjected to static and dynamic loads. Use of intelligent defaults allows the user to analyze complex systems without
in-depth knowledge of finite element theory.
Dynamic Analysis
Dynamic analysis capabilities include mode shapes and natural frequencies, response spectra, phased harmonic load analysis, time history dynamic analysis and force spectra analysis. For modal analysis,
AutoPIPE can automatically insert mass points along elements. Missing mass and zero period acceleration may be applied in dynamic analysis. AutoPIPE satisfies NUREG/CR-1677 benchmark
problems and provides built-in NRC spectra, seismic anchor movements, and code case N411 capability.
AutoPIPE provides built-in fluid transient synthesizers for calculation of waterhammer, steamhammer, and relief valve forces, which are integrated with time history dynamic analysis. Utilizing the
Bentley PULS program, users can calculate flow induced vibrations, or pulsations associated with reciprocating equipment, and automatically transfer those harmonic loads directly into AutoPIPE to
calculate dynamic piping responses.
Equivalent Linear Analysis
Equivalent linear analysis capabilities are provided for the Japanese KHK Seismic Level 2 Add On. The KHK Level 2 piping code is a seismic requirement in Japan primarily intended to address
industrial piping systems that may be subjected to large deformation with high local plasticity concentrated on the elbows (bends) as a result of an earthquake similar to the Kobe earthquake in January
1995. In this analysis each combination will undergo an iteration process until the flexibility factors converge within a specified tolerance for all bends. During each iteration, a linear analysis is
performed for each combination in which the stiffness matrix is recalculated based on the modified bend flexibility factors.
Post Processing
After analyzing a system, users can click on the graphics model to instantly view stresses, loads, deflections, or mode shapes at any point. Color coded stresses, animated vibrations, and pop-up windows
enable the engineer to more quickly identify and investigate critical areas without having to review a voluminous amount of batch output data.
Output report options allow users to pick and choose which reports to generate, with or without filters, for on-screen review or printing. Code stress combinations are performed automatically. Unique
filter options allow the user to generate custom output reports based on user defined stress, deflection, or load criteria. AutoPIPE enables users to analyze multiple thermal, wind, seismic, wave, and
dynamic loads all in one analysis with Min/Max load summaries.
Using AutoPIPE’s graphical select options, users can graphically select points to be included in the output report. As an example, a user could generate an output report for only 2 points in a 1,000 point
model.
Piping Code Compliance
AutoPIPE checks and generates code compliance reports for the following piping codes:
l ASME B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, B31.8
l ASME Section III Class 1, 2 & 3
l Canadian CAN/CSA - Z662
l British Standards BS 806 and BS 7159 (GRP Piping Code)
l Swedish Piping Code (SPC), Method 2
l Norwegian Det Norske Veritas (DNV) and TBK 5-6
l Dutch Stoomwezen D1101
l Japanese MITI 501, Class 3 piping, Japanese General Fire Protection code, and Japanese KHK Seismic Levels 1 & 2
l French RCC-M and SNCT
l European piping code standard EN 13480
l B31.4 Offshore, B31.8 Offshore & CSA_Z662 Offshore codes
l SNiP Russian 2.05.06-85 Oil & Gas
l International Standard ISO 14692 (GRP Piping Code)
CAD Interfaces
AutoPIPE can import CAD piping models from AutoPlant, AutoPlant Designer/Isometrics, ProPIPE, and Intergraph PDS plant design systems. In addition, AutoPIPE can import structural steel models
from Bentley Multi-Steel if the Multi-Steel model is composed of AISC structural elements in order to consider mass and flexibilities of structural supports as part of the piping analysis.
AutoPIPE can export models back into AutoPlant or export models in DXF format into AutoCAD or MicroStation. Import and export of piping models between CAD and AutoPIPE can save man hours
in the creation and checking of piping and structural models and prevent errors associated with manual entry of piping models.
Advanced Capabilities For Varied Piping Environments
AutoPIPE provides unique capabilities for underground and subsea pipeline analysis, dynamic loadings, nonlinear restraints, and orthotropic piping analysis. Following is a summary of advanced
AutoPIPE capabilities:
Built-in wave loading, buried pipeline analysis, pipe/structure interaction, calculation of local stresses, thermal bowing analysis, time history dynamic analysis, thru-wall thermal transient analysis, fluid
transient synthesizers, gaps & friction, relief valve load calculator, FRP/GRP pipe analysis, jacketed piping, and 24 piping codes.
New Features In AutoPIPE V8i (SELECTseries 4) v9.5.0

The following is a list of new significant features and updates in Bentley AutoPIPE V8i (SELECTseries 4) Edition:
Analysis
n Displacement time history analysis
n Piecewise exact integration option to time history
n Displacement, acceleration and velocity input to harmonic loading for Equipment and Acoustic vibration loadings
n Fluid density factor to each static analysis set
n Fluid density for SAM and Modal Analysis
n Add button to convert period to frequency or vice versa in spectrum files
n Flange Analysis
n Add NPS, rating, and notation to flange report
n Selected flange highlighted on plot
n Double-click first column of row to open the "Flange" dialog
n "Restore sort order" option to hide missing data flanges
n Default "Material Library" based on "Analysis method selected
n "Hide Incomplete Flanges" option to hide flanges with missing data
n Option "Highlight Incomplete Flanges" in the options menu
n Ability to user-define Pmax for ANSI Check
n "Consider Bolt Spacing Correction" option to Analysis TAB
n Update the FLAA card in ntl to write all data
n Improve the loading time of the "Select Material" dialog
Modeling
n Support attachment ID to Support Grid/dialog
n Input grid for RIGID options element
n Option to show/hide pressure, temperature columns on Press & Temp input grid
n Allow entering polar/cylindrical coordinates using radius, angle and elevation
n Limit buoyancy to select segments
n Time History dialog updates
n Pipe Identifier Tag
n Convert dialogs for Response/Force Spectrum dialogs to grid input
Graphics
n View/Show color options using 256 colors
n More color plots for pipe properties
n View/Show all segments with different colors on the model
n Update displacement and modal plots when result dialog shown
n Add an option to show/hide connected segments
n Show Reference Point tag on Plot
n Option to plot modal frequency as function of mode number
Import / Export
n Flange Analysis: Update the FLAA card in ntl to write all flange analysis data
n New NTL card RVER to change ntl version
n Intelligent mapping of Caesar RIGID 'flanges'
n Retain PXF/PCF flange length
n CII import to show the new name for Node number > 9999 in the message file
n PCF Translator: Add support to import Line Number and Line Class
n New import menu option "AutoDesk Plant 3D (*.pcf)
n PCF Translator: Add support to import Flex Joint Component
n PCF Translator: Add support to import Cross component from PCF File
Interoperability
n Export model data, graphics, results and deflected plot to DGN
n CAD export JSM/DGN option to automatically convert to Z Up vertical axis
Libraries
n Add B16.5 data to flange analysis mat. and dim. database for ANSI Check use
Piping Codes
n Enable Max Thermal range to work across analysis sets for JSME 2008
n FRP piping code ISO 14692 for petroleum and gas industries
n Add JSME/JEAC PPC 2008 code
n Option to "Use min (f,fcr) for hoop" for EN13480 code
Post Processing
n Soil Overburden and Seismic Wave Stress for buried piping
n Increase number of combinations to 1000 each for code and non-code
n Resizing and Maximizing for Combinations Dialog
n Resizing and Maximizing for Stress Summary Dialog
Reports
n Add Rigid support / anchor stiffness settings to analysis summary report
n Summary report for rotating equipment
General
n Option to hide the 'cross-hairs' cursor
n Input grid: Optimize performance of segment grid
n Replace View/Show menu with a View/Show dialog
n Migrate to a modern installer (WIX) for program and bootstrapper for pre-reqs
n APIPView: Add features (save settings dialog, drag and drop open and others)
n Online Help: Add the TTA Film Coefficient Calculation
n Resizing and Maximizing for Stress ISO STS Editor Dialog
Getting Started
Revision History
The following is a list of features included in AutoPIPE releases, starting with v6.2 (4/15/2002) thru the latest release:
AutoPIPE v6.2.0.09 (4/15/2002)
AutoPIPE v6.3.0.11 (4/11/2003)
AutoPIPE v8.5.0.11 (7/26/2004)
AutoPIPE v8.6.0.12 (12/23/2005)
AutoPIPE XM v8.9.0.14 (9/20/2006)
AutoPIPE XM SR1 v9.0.0.8 (6/5/2007)
AutoPIPE V8i v9.1.1.2 (11/10/2008)
AutoPIPE V8i SELECTseries 1 v9.2.1.7 (3/10/2010)
AutoPIPE V8i SELECTseries 2 v9.3.1.7 & v9.3.2.5 (1/21/2011 & 2/28/2011)
AutoPIPE V8i SELECTseries 3 v9.4.0.x
AutoPIPE v6.2.0.09 (4/15/2002)

General
n Allow Windows long file name convention for model names
n Option to open AutoPIPE model from a list of the most recent used models (up to 10)
Modeling
n Added a 10-line general description for the model
n Option to replace temperature or pressure value across entire model
n I-node in the Beam dialog defaults to the current point in the model
n Added Pseudo rigid pipe with thermal expansion
n Display only unused Pipe Ids in selection list when deleting Pipe Ids
n Option to Pan/Zoom/Rotate in current graphic mode instead of wire-frame
Model Verification
n Improved organization of information in model list report
n Option to view color-coded model based on pipe identifiers, temperatures, or pressures
n Use same color for a given temperature or pressure across all operating load cases
n Added selection list and logical OR & AND when viewing or selecting User pipe properties
n Display distance from current point to previous point in F-3 text dialog
n Allow users to specify number of digits after decimal for modulus values
n Report both date and time of printing in report headers
Codes and Standards
n Updated ASME B31.1a-1998 piping code to 2001 edition
n Updated ASME B31.3-1999 piping code to 2001 Addendum (b)
n Updated ASCE 7-95 design wind loads to ASCE 7-98 code
n Updated UBC 1994 design wind loads to UBC 1997 code
n Added ground elevation definition relative to model for wind loadings
n Added automatic force coefficient Cf as height dependent for ASCE wind loads
n Print wind pressure vs. height in the Analysis Summary for ASCE & UBC codes
n Added AU-Type 317 materials to the pipe material library
Analysis & Results
n Allow entry for rise time and load pattern for fluid transient loads
n Use of dynamic memory in time history analysis for large models
n Report percent of included mass and missing mass for dynamic analyses
n Print ratio of equivalent pressure to allowable pressure in flange report
Back to Top
AutoPIPE v6.3.0.11 (4/11/2003)

n European piping code standard EN 13480-2002
n ASME Code Update - ASME B31.3-2002 edition
n ASME Code Update - ASME B31.8a-2000 addenda
n ASME Code Update - ASME BPV-III-1-NC-2001 edition
n ASME Code Update - ASME BPV-III-1-ND-2001 edition
n Update CSA-Z662 piping code (Oil and Gas pipeline systems) to 1999 edition
n Edit length field when modifying run, bend or tee point
n Increase number of spring hanger ranges from 4 to 5
n Added variable spring supports from British manufacturer QPS
n Added HYDRA variable spring supports from German manufacture Witzenmann
n Added Bergen-Power variable catalog 2V spring supports
n Added Grinnell hanger ranges triple & quadruple and sizes 00 & 000
n Added hanger data from Mitsubishi, NHK, Sanwa Tekki & Yamashita
n Updated Lisega hanger data to Standard Supports 2010 Catalog (10/2001)
n Option to specify relative offset of equipment suction or discharge nozzle
n Option to delete rotating equipment data
n Option to delete wave loading data
n Added new sub-reports to model input list report
n Added flange and valve DIN pressure ratings for 6, 64, 100, 160, 250, 320 & 400
n Added ANSI B16.5a-1998, Group 1.15 to the ANSI flange material library
n Updated hardware security to software security (RSSL/PSCM)
Back to Top
AutoPIPE v8.5.0.11 (7/26/2004)

n New graphical interface with OpenGL with Rendering and Quad Viewport
n New Toolbar/Toolbox buttons
n Added Input grid for checking and editing model data in a spreadsheet
n Added Result grid for viewing, filtering and sorting results interactively
n Increase number of cases per load type and during analysis including 20 thermal and 20 User cases, 10 cases each for wind, seismic and dynamic loads for the Plus version (standard version limit =
5 for both static and dynamic).
n Increased number of load combinations to 250 code and 250 non-code combinations
n Automatic update of default combinations
n Set default non-code combinations based on load sequence
n Added Max Range combination for thermal loads
n Added an option to display/print thermal ranges
n Enable European code EN13480 to run in AutoPIPE Standard
n Added ASME B31.8-2000 Chapter VIII - Offshore Gas Transmission piping code
n Added ASME B31.4-2002Chapter IX - Offshore Liquid Piping Systems piping code
n Added CSA Z662 section 11 - "Offshore Steel Pipelines" piping code
n Added signed maximum combination for restraint loads
n Improved selection of support and flange components
n Add an to option to join disconnected piping in the AutoPLANT PXF file
n Allow import of several PXF files combined into one
n Improved AutoPLANT PXF to AutoPIPE integration to include pipe naming schemes, insulation, material grade, corrosion and support friction & gaps.
n Improved PXF import of Flanges
n Flange connection to default to Flange type
n Added support friction acting during gravity load case
n Added API5L , duplex stainless, A671 and A672 materials to B31.3 library
n Update ASME B31.4-1998 piping code to 2002 edition
n Added option to generate default non-code combination with negative occasional load cases
n Added options for setting initial state defaults in the non-linear analysis
n Added option to modify thermal expansion in the Pressure & Temperature dialog
n Added option to override hot modulus in the Pressure & Temperature dialog
n Convert Help files to HTML format
Back to Top
AutoPIPE v8.6.0.12 (12/23/2005)

Analysis
n Produce a more accurate force spectrum response when using same SPC spectrum
n Added an option to include N411 damping for response spectrum
n Added ability to envelope several response spectra
n Added CQC and Signed Doublesum modal combinations to response spectrum analysis
Caesar
n Ability to import CAESAR2 models with BS7159 piping code
Combinations
n Added 'Maximum Stress' combination method to User code Combination dialog
n Added 'Apply changes' option in User code and Non-code Combination dialogs
Graphics
n Added an option to toggle beam names on the screen
n Enable zoom and pan using mouse wheel
n Improve the behavior of switching and saving between viewports
n Allow user to switch between normal and large size cursor
Input Grids
n Supports/xtra data/anchors at frame points are now shown in the Input report & Grids
n Enable editing of Input Grid pipe properties for EN13480 and BS7159 piping codes
n Dynamically show the automatic calculated Tee SIF's in the Tee Input Grid
n Add option to"Apply offset to all following points" on some input grids to slide components along the pipe
n Provide ANSI flange fields in the Flange Input Grid
n Added Beam input grid
n Added Soil ID input grid
n Added Soil input grid
n Added an option to not show zero's in the Input Grids
n Right click option to hide/unhide columns in the Input Grids
n Added 'Fit to Page' print option on right click menu in the Input Grids
n Added option to not show rows with thermal anchor movements with all zero's
n Added option to show column headings A, B, C etc as a topmost row in the Input Grids
n Save and restore size and position of Input Grids window on startup
n Show data in the Input Grids for visible segments only
Interoperability
n Save the model as version 6.3 DAT file
Libraries
n Added WAVISTRONG GFK FRP manufacturer to the AUTOFRP library
n Added Chinese NorthWest and HuaDong Spring Manufacturers
n Added Indian Sarathi Spring Manufacturer
n Added Spanish PiHasa Spring Manufacturer
n Enable BS7159 piping code to read custom FRP libraries
Modeling
n Added menu option to delete unused soil identifiers
n Enable the vertical axis to be changed for an existing model
n Added option to set a default upward gap for V-stops and guides
n Added option to set default support gap setting i.e. weightless or As-Built
n Added option to override the BS7159 pressure multiplier
Piping codes
n Allow user-defined B1 & B2 factors for ASME NC & ND piping codes
n Update ASME B31.8a-2000 piping code to B31.8-2003 edition
n Added ASME NC & ND 1992 piping code
n Update B31.1 piping code to 2004 edition
n Added ASME B31.1 piping code 1992 edition
n Update ASME III NC & ND :2001 piping code to 2004 edition
n Apply limit check of 1.5xSy for occasional allowable stress for ASME NC, ND
n Added stress category for single nonrepeated anchor movements for ASME NC,ND
n Added branch connection tee type to ASME NC & ND piping codes
n Added branch & run moments summation method per NB-3683-1(d) for ASME NC & ND piping codes
Print/Plot
n Added print 'Graphics' toolbar button
n Save a screen capture of the result plot to BMP or PNG graphic format with new toolbar button
n Printed graphics title to include filename, company name, model version and project information
n Added "Print Title" option to the View /settings dialog
Reports
n Provide clear pass/fail indication in the rotating equipment reports
n Added frame points to acceleration reports
Back to Top
AutoPIPE XM v8.9.0.14 (9/20/2006)

Analysis
n Add thermal bowing effect on piping
Graphics
n Click color legend to change colors for View/show options or code stress
n Allow user scaling of supports & anchors in 3D solid and wireframe view modes
n Add ability to see different graphical representations of springs and V-stops
n View/Show /Tee Type
n Save screen shot as JPEG file
n Allow user to select and save default iso view direction
n Allow Supports on vertical pipes to be visible in solid mode
Interoperability
n Add a Note/Tag field to the component dialogs e.g. Support and anchor CAD tags
n Add ability to export PCF files
Modeling
n Display offset distance between any two points
n Allow ability to specify & report element end results at a 'Reference point'
n Provide input for end type connections for every piping component
Piping codes
n Update B31.3 code to 2004 edition
Combinations
n Provide an option to not generate default combinations
Post Processing
n Add option to use SIF, 0.75*SIF or 1.0 for sustained & occasional stresses
n Generate a Stress Isometric
Reports
n Provide "Approved by" fields in the General model options dialog
Security
n Update to Bentley XM licensing
n Add-on license for StressISO
Back to Top
AutoPIPE XM SR1 v9.0.0.8 (6/5/2007)

Analysis
Add option to activate dampers in the wind cases
Interoperability
Save as version 8.6 & 6.3 DAT files from version 9.0
Export AutoPIPE model and support loads to STAAD
Write Caesar cii neutral file
StressISO: Add decimal control to Anchor & Support loads and stresses
Save as version 8.9 DAT files from version 9.0
Modeling
Add option to input numeric point names only
Option to paste using actual coordinates relative to origin
Automatically update point names defined in rotating equipment data
Automatically update point names defined in steam relief load data
Automatically update point names defined in fluid transient load data
Automatically update 'connected to' point name defined in support data
Reports
Add minimum 2 page description option to model input listing
Piping Codes
Update ASME B31.1 2005 addenda code
Libraries
Add Haynes 556 material to ASME B31.3 library
Add Al-6XN material to ASME B31.3 material library
Add ductile iron A395 and A571 to ASME B31.3 material library
Update Euromat library properties down to 0degC
Add China Petrochemical Spring Manufacturer
Extend A790 S31803 to -20F in ASME B31.3 library
Add A269 Stainless material grades TP304, TP304L, TP316, TP316L to B31.3 library
Add A335-P92 to ASME B31.1 material library
Add B423 & B705 NO8825 materials grades to ASME B31.3 library
Add copper and socket weld schedules CT2 and SKT to component library
Add B88-C12200 copper pipe material to ASME B31.3 library
Add 6061, 5083 & 5154 aluminum materials to B31.3 library
Add STAAD.pro structural section libraries
Add Chinese GB material library
Add B619 UNS N06022 Hastelloy C22 material to ASME B31.3 library
Post Processing
'E827-3. Buffer Size Exceeded' for interactive code scan on large model
Add user pref flag for use of automatic sustained load margin check
Back to Top
AutoPIPE V8i 9.1.1.2 (11/10/2008)

Analysis
n Add an option to set rigid anchor/support stiffness values
n Decouple pressure stiffening in modal analysis from one in static analysis
n Add absolute sum method for modal summation of missing mass modes
n Perform multiple analyses using Analysis sets with different hot moduli
n Add thermal transient analysis (TTA) for ASME Class 1
n Allow Ec/Eh ratio for expansion stresses to include all piping codes
n Add 'Analyze All' option to run user selected analyses
n Delete Analysis results
Communication
n Add RSS news feed screen
Graphical Interface
n Consolidate code and non-code combinations into one Grid interface
Import /Export
n Standalone Translator to import PCF files e.g. SmartPlant (not included with AutoPIPE)
n Update Caesar translator to read v5.1 format
Interoperability
n Save as version 9.0 DAT files from version 9.1
n Add Vista Compatability ('Works with Vista')
Libraries
n Update Yamashita hanger data in EQUIP.LIB file with Lisega hanger data
n Add Chinese GD material and pipe libraries
n Add API5L materials to ASME B31.1 material library
n Add low alloy material 1.4901 to European material library
n Add B366, B619, B622, & B464 materials to ASME B31.3 material library
Modeling
n Ability to combine segments and reverse segment direction
n Ability to split a segment into 2 segments
n Allow inserting and editing line numbers
n Add an option to renumber segments
n Add reference node note to Rotating equipment dialog
n Add 'Fillet welded' and 'Double-welded slip-on' joint end types
n Add actuator with COG weight to Valve
n Increase number of thermal and User load cases
n Add "Pulled" option to bend type
n Add Bolt weight to Flange dialog
n Generate multiple xtra data
n Enter spring figure and size on the spring hanger support dialog
n Connectivity Checker for unconnected co-incident nodes
n Hide operating cases on the Pressure /Temperature input grid
Piping codes
n Support for multiple code years
n Issue a warning for high D/T ratio for certain codes
n Add ASME III Class 1 Nuclear piping code
n Add JSME S NC1-PPC 2005 piping code (Japanese Nuclear Class 2)
n Update ASME B31.4-2002 piping code to 2006 edition
n Update ASME B31.3 piping code to 2006 edition
n Update ASME B31.1 to 2007 edition
Post Processing
n Option to display continuous string dimensioning including supports
n Add batch processing switch to export the results MDB file
n 1992 + 93 Addenda NB NC ND
n Improvements to Stressiso edition 1.0 (Show line number, JSIF and Tee data, save to DGN)
Reports
n Allow more than 80 columns for printed reports
n Print the occasional k-factor in the output report
n Add support Tag to spring hanger report
n Add interpolation method and damping ratio to output report
Security
n Add nuclear license for ASME III Class 1 piping code
Back to Top
AutoPIPE V8i SELECTseries 1 9.2.1.7 (3/10/2010)

Analysis
n Multiple response spectrum analysis
n New Troubleshooting tool for fatal error unstable systems
n Increase response spectrum load cases to 50
n Improve interactive code stress performance for one Analysis set
n Add alpha and beta factor for mass and stiffness proportional damping
n Add Hot modulus and Pressure Stiffening cases for SAM analysis
n New productive Dynamic Analysis dialog with grids
n Add an option to select Total or Relative accel for uniform response spectrum
n Analysis Set: Description of duplicate record to be blank
n Provide a warning when non-linear tolerance settings are above a certain value
n Report non-fatal errors at the end of Analyze all command
n Ask user to analyze model after saving changes in static analysis sets dialog
Graphics
n Show X, Y, Z direction on Displacement and Mode Shape plots
n User hydrodynamic factors are not shown graphically
n Tee arrow position and size to be a factor of pipe diameter
n Allow user to hide tee arrows from the model
Import/export
n Increase maximum number of line numbers from 2500 to 20000 in linelist.txt
n CAESAR Import to read units from .cii file instead of c2u file
n Integrated ADLPipe, SmartPlant and Strait PDS Translators
Interoperability
n Save as version 9.1 DAT files from 9.2
n Windows 7 32 & 64 bit compatibility
n ProjectWise Integration
n Comprehensive Network file Caching
n Integration with new Structural Dashboard
Libraries
n Extend Stainless Steel 304 thermal expansion to -425F
n Updated Japanese AUTOJISM material library to JIS B 8265
n Add additional cryogenic materials to B31.3 material library
n Add A106GrB material to AUTODINM material library
n Block editing of Material libraries and remove password protection
n Add A182F304L and A403WP304L materials to AUTOB313 library
n Add B88-C12200 copper pipe material to b311-05 and b311-07 material libraries
n Update B311-07 material lib. to include Inconel 625 materials
n Update the material library source to accept lower case letters
Modeling
n Add column to Segment grid to apply wind
n Add Restraint Type column to Imposed Displacement input grid
n Input grids column headers to be copied with data to Excel
Piping Codes
n Add nuclear high energy & leakage crack criteria
n Add ASME B31.8-2007 piping code
n Allow pressure stiffening effect for ASME Class 2 and 3
n Add 1989 NB, NC, ND code year
n Add B31.1 1986 edition
n Add ASME NB, NC, and ND 2001, with 2003 addenda, edition
Post-Processing
n Add mode shape and frequency result grids
n Result Grids: Add sort option for internal column C ("Point Order")
n Hide the Full verification combinations for ASME NB, NC, ND
n Update code stress legend to show stresses instead of ratio to max stress
n Enable printing of branch tee stress when rigid option is enabled on branch pipe
n Print Local support displacements
Reports
n Print Frequency cut-off and spectrum reports
n New APIPVIEW Viewer with page and printing controls
n Improve apipview load speed or show progress bar when launched first time
General
n RSS feed to sort news items chronologically
n RSS Feed Client to launch by default first time AutoPIPE is loaded
n Add new menu "Online Resources" including BE Community link
n Update Applicability of Indices table in online help for ASME NB
n Option to display the Welcome screen on Startup
n RSS: The about window of RSS client says 1.0
n Making the distinction between force and weight units
n Follow product name decoration guidelines for AutoPIPE Select Series 1
n Report non-fatal errors at the end of Analyze all command
n RSS Client does not work on clients using a proxy server for internet access
Security
n Add Academic Licensing
StressISO
n Use the complete Drawing Frame for plotting if Data Tables are not selected
Back to Top
AutoPIPE V8i SELECTseries 1 9.2.2.9 (6/15/2010)

Modeling
n Add nominal size to all input grids (where applicable)
n Extrapolate thermal expansion
Post Processing
n Add a Tag field to the support tab and anchor tab of the results grid
n Hydrotest check for ASME NB/NC/ND codes
Analysis
n Favor global directions when determining mode shapes for cantilever models
n Consider effect of attached valves on bend flexibility
n Add an option to ignore flange effect on bend flexibility
n Set default to include pressure extension for KHK
Piping Codes
n Add indices for 'User' joint type and 'Other' tee for ASME Nuclear codes
n Set no. of thermal ranges to 5 by default for ASME B31.3 Appendix P
Import/Export
n PXFImport should default flange type to Weldneck for Blinds and Orifice Plates
General
n File > Open Recent models list need to be increaded to 20 entries
StressISO
n StressISO: Two non collinear valves should be exported as an Angled Valve (AV)
n Add an option on Stress ISO dialog to enable/disable drawing of pipe flow arrows
n Increase Reference Items list to 50 items for Stress ISO
n Change Stress ISO viewer selection to a dynamically filled dropdown list
Back to Top

Analysis
n Add option “Show Hanger Report”
Graphics
n Show node points on beams in the plot
n Improve graphics loading performance for model with large number of beams
Import/Export
n Export input grid data to MDB file
Interoperability
n Implement PipeLink to improve STAAD Integration
Libraries
n Include Czech hanger libraries Gradior and LPS
n Add JSME 2008 material library
n Update Section Libraries and use Torsion Inertia value from library when >=0.1
n Add Russian piping component library
n Add A671-CC70-22 to ASME2004 material library
n Add SA515 60, SA515 65, SA182F22 cl.1 and SA387 22 cl.1 to ASME2004 library
n Update material 1.4901 to 2007 values in Euromat library
n Add ASME II 2009 addenda material library
Modeling
n Add ability to split frame members into multiple elements
n Add 3D and 5D options to the Bend radius field
n Ability to change the default bend radius
n Option for stand double angle & double channel is to be provided in profile dlg
n Add user defined fatigue curves
n Add fluid type GAS to fluid transient fluids
n Add ASME III 2009 User Fatigue Curves
Piping Codes
n Add B31.1 2009 Addenda edition
n Update ASME B31.3 to 2008 edition
n Add CSA-Z662 piping code 2007 edition (including Offshore)
Post Processing
n Stress Summary: Show warning if any combination missing in Level C/D Rev. Dyn.
Reports
n Reduce reports width to allow for page margins
n Output Report: Indicate in report that results are outdated with model
n Print original ADLPipe Thermal Transient Analysis results file in SI units
General
n Localize input grid messages to external resource files
n Reorganize open/save and import/export options under file menu
n Online Help: Hoop or Long pressure does not work on nested combination
n Change the word 'frame' to 'beam' to make it consistent
n Add 4 new File > Import PCF menu options
n Add translator selection dialog to installer
n Installer: Install dot net framework 2.0 SP2 with program
n Move AutoPIPE program shortcuts to Bentley Engineering program folder
Security
n Restrict Nuclear Piping codes to Nuclear Edition only
Back to Top
AutoPIPE V8i SELECTseries 2 v9.3.1.7 & v9.3.2.5 (1/21/2011 & 2/28/2011)

Modeling
n Use thermal bowing instantaneous alpha for ASME NB, NC & ND codes
Graphics
n Toolbar buttons to hide selected/unselected beams and show all beams
Analysis
n Update TTA routine to define up to 50 PIPEs
n Increase Time history load cases to 50
n Add Load > Convert to Response Spectrum command
n Increase the limit on the size of generated C411 spectrum to 20000
Piping Codes
n Add ASME NB, NC and ND 2007 code
Reports
n Add additional pipe insulation and lining input parameters to the input listing
n Print the B31.1 E/W factors from the pipe properties dialog in the input listing
n The Fatigue report should show Code with year, and segment name with node
Libraries
n Add 11 new materials to B313 material libraries
General
n Update any references for "WinNOZL" to "AutoPIPE Nozzle" in program and help
n Update EULA to revision 2010-09-15 in Installer and Program Folder
StressISO
n Stress ISO: Add option to relocate North arrow & "DRG No"
n Provide option to plot bend type, radius and thickness on the StressISO
n Plot the cold spring (Cut-Short) on the Stress ISO
n Add option to customize the STS file before ISOGEN
n Stress ISO: Increase the number of breakpoints
Import / Export
n PXF import: Import Line Stop, Guide, Constant supports even if dir. vector is 0
Interoperability
n Provide an option to remove imported structural model data from AutoPIPE model
n Provide an option to save exported PipeLink file with a different name
Miscellaneous
n Use B2b=0.75*ib for reinforced tee in Japanese JSME 2005 code
n Include AutoPIPE Quick Reference Guide with program
n Update DIN_EN_10216-5:2008 Euro material 1.4571 at 1.0% Proof Stress
Back to Top
Analysis
n Retain inclusion of Cut short in analysis dialog
n Add option to perform flange analysis to ASME VIII Division 1 or 2
n Add Thermal Bowing by Segment
n Provide option to create multiple analysis set for all piping codes
n Create multiple analysis sets based on hot modulus for Euro Code by default
Modeling
n Add weight of insulation cladding to pipe
n Implement an automatic soil property generator, per Appx B
n Ability to perform simple design checks on the model
n Add feature to automatically insert flanges with a flanged valve
n Apply Fatigue Range Reduction Factor by material
n Add option to graphically show Pipe Insulation
n Input Grids for Static & Member Earthquake factors
n Increase max number of flange/valve pres. ratings picked by program to 20
n Option to include a factor of the flange weight for bolt/nut weight
n Add an option to select connected segments
n Option to display flanged flexible joint
n Option to automatically insert flanges with a flanged flexible joint
n Find a node based on entering coordinates
n Add Valve Tag
n Update distributed load data on insert/delete point(s) across distributed load.
n Correct corrupted distributed loads in older models
n Add a tag field to flange
n Add a line class to pipe properties
n Add Apply button in Soil Properties dialog
n Default input grid to Press & Temp grid and reduce the horizontal slider
n Allow reference point to be defined in any equipment dialog
n View > Show thermal anchor displacement with imposed displacements
Graphics
n Improve performance of window selection operation
Import / Export
n PXF Export should retain original supports class and properties as imported
n Import GUID from NTL for piping, supports, beams etc
n Add a dialog to link AutoPIPE components fields with pcf attributes
n Export reference point loads to AP Nozzle
n NTL: Add support for import/export of Time history data to NTL format
n Import CAESAR v.5.3 neutral files
Input Grids
n Add input grid for distributed loads
n Add input grid for Reference node
n Inadequate no# of significant digits for design strain on input grid
n Input Grid: add Xtra data Hydrodynamic Data tab
Interoperability
n Export JSM data, graphics and deflect plot
Libraries
n Add new valve type library; butterfly and ball valve
n Update Pipe Supports Spring Hanger (Comet) to match the updated catalog
Piping Codes
n Add an option to apply corrosion allowance to the Hoop stress only
n Add Russian SNiP 2.05.06-85 Oil & gas code
n Add back ASME B31.3 - 2004 into AutoPIPE V8i
n Add B31.8 : 2010 code
n Add B31.1 2010 edition
n Enable circum. weld w factor for B31.3-2008 and B31.1-2009 codes
n Add B31.3 : 2010 code
n Add EN13480 : 2010 piping code update
Post Processing
n Add manufacturer multiplier for NEMA SM23 and API 617
n Preserve user descriptions for non-code combinations
n Add option to hide non printed combinations on combinations dialog
n Add a new option in result menu to show lift-off supports
n Add option to import Combination CMB file information between models
Reports
n Add center of gravity (COG) calculations for Structure & Piping
n Allow print preview to work for LOG file to view nonlinear iterations
n Add Flow Rate, Pressure Rise and Sound Speed to Fluid Transient report
StressISO
n Externalize stress iso data table titles and column titles to .tst file
n Stress ISO: Create Bore equivalence file for nominal units mapping
n Update to latest ISOGEN (ver 10.2.0 - build 18)
General
n Retain window/toolbar/file size/location settings in next program session
n Reset window size and location for input grid, results grid & APIPE viewer
n Archive associated files with the AutoPIPE input file
n RSS Feed: Show only recent news by default
n Show thumbnail preview in open dialog and explorer
n Increase number of string groups limit from 500 to 800 in autopipe.tst
n Program version and documentation updates
n Update program title to SELECTseries 3
n StressISO: Add an option to show/hide bend information.
n Move MFC resources into a separate DLL
Back to Top

Analysis
n Displacement time history analysis
n Piecewise exact integration option to time history
n Displacement, acceleration and velocity input to harmonic loading for Equipment and Acoustic vibration loadings
n Fluid density factor to each static analysis set
n Fluid density for SAM and Modal Analysis
n Add button to convert period to frequency or vice versa in spectrum files
n Flange Analysis
n Add NPS, rating, and notation to flange report
n Selected flange highlighted on plot
n Double-click first column of row to open the "Flange" dialog
n "Restore sort order" option to hide missing data flanges
n Option "Highlight Incomplete Flanges" in the options menu
n Ability to user-define Pmax for ANSI Check
n "Consider Bolt Spacing Correction" option to Analysis TAB
n Update the FLAA card in ntl to write all data
n Improve the loading time of the "Select Material" dialog
Modeling
n Support attachment ID to Support Grid/dialog
n Input grid for RIGID options element
n Option to show/hide pressure, temperature columns on Press & Temp input grid
n Allow entering polar/cylindrical coordinates using radius, angle and elevation
n Limit buoyancy to select segments
n Time History dialog updates
n Pipe Identifier Tag
n Convert dialogs for Response/Force Spectrum dialogs to grid input
Graphics
n View/Show color options using 256 colors
n More color plots for pipe properties
n View/Show all segments with different colors on the model
n Update displacement and modal plots when result dialog shown
n Add an option to show/hide connected segments
n Show Reference Point tag on Plot
n Option to plot modal frequency as function of mode number
Import / Export
n Flange Analysis: Update the FLAA card in ntl to write all flange analysis data
n New NTL card RVER to change ntl version
n Intelligent mapping of Caesar RIGID 'flanges'
n Retain PXF/PCF flange length
n CII import to show the new name for Node number > 9999 in the message file
n PCF Translator: Add support to import Line Number and Line Class
n New import menu option "AutoDesk Plant 3D (*.pcf)
n PCF Translator: Add support to import Flex Joint Component
n PCF Translator: Add support to import Cross component from PCF File
Interoperability
n Export model data, graphics, results and deflected plot to DGN
n CAD export JSM/DGN option to automatically convert to Z Up vertical axis
Libraries
n Add B16.5 data to flange analysis mat. and dim. database for ANSI Check use
Piping Codes
n Enable Max Thermal range to work across analysis sets for JSME 2008
n FRP piping code ISO 14692 for petroleum and gas industries
n Add JSME/JEAC PPC 2008 code
n Option to "Use min (f,fcr) for hoop" for EN13480 code
Post Processing
n Soil Overburden and Seismic Wave Stress for buried piping
n Increase number of combinations to 1000 each for code and non-code
n Resizing and Maximizing for Combinations Dialog
n Resizing and Maximizing for Stress Summary Dialog
Reports
n Add Rigid support / anchor stiffness settings to analysis summary report
n Summary report for rotating equipment
General
n Option to hide the 'cross-hairs' cursor
n Input grid: Optimize performance of segment grid
n Replace View/Show menu with a View/Show dialog
n Migrate to a modern installer (WIX) for program and bootstrapper for pre-reqs
n Online Help: Add the TTA Film Coefficient Calculation
n Resizing and Maximizing for Stress ISO STS Editor Dialog
Back to Top
Getting Started
AutoPIPE V8i Standard vs PLUS vs Nuclear

Feature AutoPIPE AutoPIPE Plus Nuclear
Hanger ü ü ü
Static Linear ü ü ü
Static Nonlinear ü ü ü
Modal ü ü ü
Response Spectrum (Uniform & Multiple Support) ü (Note 3) ü ü
(SRSS combination method - Standard version
only)
Harmonic ü ü
Force Spectrum ü ü
Time History ü ü
SAM ü ü
Buried pipe w/ automatic Soil Calculator ü ü
NUREG combinations and ü ü
Code case 411 spectrum
Static correction - ü ü
Missing mass correction and ZPA
50 Response Spectrum load cases ü ü
Static earthquake ü ü ü
Wind - ASCE, UBC and User Profile ü ü ü
Thermal Bowing ü ü ü
Wave loading and buoyancy ü ü
Fluid Transient Loads ü ü
Relief Valve Loads ü ü
Thermal Transient Analysis ü
Fatigue Analysis (class 1) ü
High Energy Leakage and Crack Criteria (ASME ü
Class 1, 2, 3)
ASME B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, and B31.8 ü (Note 2) ü ü
European piping code EN13480 ü (Note 2) ü ü
B31.4 Offshore, A31.8 Offshore & CSA_Z662 ü ü
Offshore codes
ASME III Class 2 and Class 3 (multiple years) ü
ASME III Class 1 (multiple years) ü
JSME S NC1-PPC ü
ASME B31.1-1967 ü ü
Canadian piping codes ü ü
Russian SNIP 2.05.06-85 Oil & Gas ü ü
International piping codes ü ü
KHK Level 1 piping code ü ü
KHK Level 2 piping code üNote 1 üNote 1
Analysis Sets for multiple static analyses ü ü ü
General piping code ü ü ü
Rotating Equipment reports ü ü ü
Large model size ü ü ü
Beam elements for modeling frames and supports ü ü ü
Material and Component Library utilities ü ü ü

STAAD Structural Libraries (17 countries) ü ü ü
Flange Analysis, ASME Section VIII Div 1 ü ü
Flange Analysis, ASME Section VIII Div 2 ü ü
Flange Analysis, Appendix XI ü ü
Flange Analysis, ANSI Check ü ü ü
Plus features only Nuclear features only
Notes:
1. A KHK 2 Add-On option is required to access this feature (Available for Plus & Nuclear editions).
2. Multiple years are available in Plus and Nuclear editions. Standard edition only supports latest code year.
3. Multiple support response spectrum analysis only available in Plus & Nuclear editions
Maximum defined static and dynamic load cases:
Load Cases Standard 9.4 Plus 9.4 Nuclear 9.4

Gravity 1 1 1
Hydrotest 1 1 1
Thermal 5 100 100
Pressure 5 100 100
Static Earthquake 5 10 10
Wind 5 10 10
User 5 140 140
Response 5 50 50
Spectrum
Harmonic Not Available 10 10
Seismic Anchor Not Available 10 10
Movement
Force Spectrum Not Available 10 10
Time History Not Available 50 50
Static Analysis 27 [Note 1] 82 [Note 1] 82 [Note 1]

Cases
Note: Maximum number of load cases that can be analyzed in a single analysis set during a static analysis run in v9.1 and later. However an unlimited number of analysis sets can be run in a single static
analysis in v9.1 and later.
= Gravity (1) + Hydrotest (1) + Thermal (20) + Pressure (20) + Static Earthquake (10) + Wind (10) + User (20)
= 82 cases for Plus & Nuclear (27 for Standard)
Up to 100 different thermal loadings can be defined and analyzed in a single static analysis. Only 20 thermal load cases per analysis set e.g. if want to run 50 thermal cases then define across 3 analysis
sets. Since each analysis set can have analyze up to 82 static cases, so literally 100’s of loads can be analyzed in different scenarios with different options, linear, non-linear, hot or cold modulus etc in the
same static analysis run.
Additional CAE Integrated Analysis & Design Ancillary Products:
CAE Integrated Analysis & Design Standard 9.4 Plus 9.4 Nuclear 9.4
Ancillary Products
PipeLink (Advanced structural Included Included Included
model/piping data exchange with
STAAD.Pro structural analysis)
StressISO (Customizable dimensioned Add License Add License Add License
digital stress isometric)
AutoPIPE Nozzle (local stresses Add License Add License Add License
calculations at nozzle/vessel junctions per
WRC 107/297/368, PD500, API650, and
KHK)
PlantFlow (Network flow analysis) Add License Add License Add License
Puls (Acoustic and pulsation simulations Add License Add License Add License
per API 618)
See Also:
Limits of Standard vs Plus
Piping Codes by Program Editions
AutoPIPE functionality for QA Approvals

The following AutoPIPE features are considered as "Nuclear Safety Related":
1. Modeling - all features
2. Codes supported
a. ASME NB, NC, and ND - all years listed
b. ASME B31.1 and B31.3 - all years listed
c. JSME - all years listed
d. MITI
3. Libraries
a. Materials
i. ASME1986, 1992, 2001, 2004, 2007, and 2009
ii. AUTO1967
iii. AUTOB313, B313-04, 06, 08, and 10
iv. B311-86, 92, 04, 05, 07, 09, and 10
v. AUTOJSME
vi. AUTOMITI
b. Component
i. AUTOPIPE
ii. AUTOJIS
c. Flanges
d. Gaskets
4. Analysis
a. Static Analysis with the exception of Hydrotest
b. Dynamic Analysis
c. Thermal Transient Analysis (TTA)
d. Seismic Anchor Movements
e. Flange Analysis (ASME Section VIII – Div1 & Div2, Section III – Appendix XI)
5. Loading Conditions
a. Loading Conditions include, but are not limited to, pressure, temperature, seismic, wind, fluid transient, steam relief, and thermal bowing
b. Soil Overburden, Building Settlement, and Seismic wave loads for buried pipes (ASME NC & ND – 2004 to 2007, B31.1 – 2004 to 2010)
6. Pre Processing for piping codes above
a. Automatic Soil Properties Generator
7. Post Processing for piping codes above
a. Code and Non-code Load Combinations for piping codes above
b. Stress Summaries (Leakage, Rupture and Buried Pipe options included) for ASME Nuclear piping codes
c. Onscreen Results
d. Output reports
8. Integration with STAAD Pro
9. Unit Conversion
Getting Started
Installation
Before you can run AutoPIPE, the software must be installed properly and have an authorized software lock. This section covers the process of installing the AutoPIPE software.
System Requirements
Before installing AutoPIPE, be sure your computer meets the following, minimum requirements:
l Platform: AutoPIPE is designed to run on the following platforms/operating systems. At a minimum, your computer should meet the minimum requirements for that system; for example, the
amount of RAM required by AutoPIPE depends on the RAM requirements of the environment in which you will be working:
- Windows XP Professional (with latest service pack) OR
- Windows Vista Business or higher (with latest service pack)
- Windows 7 Professional or higher (with latest service pack)
l Hard disk space: Approximately 250 MB
l Graphics Card: OpenGL 3D graphics supported
l Processor: Intel Pentium III or higher
l RAM: minimum 256 MB
l Web Browser: Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or greater
Package Contents
Your AutoPIPE package should include the following contents:
l Documentation: AutoPIPE Tutorial
l Web link to Open Error Reports
l License Agreement
l Product Registration Card: If you have not filled out your card yet, you should do so now.
The License Agreement and Product Registration Card are issued to first time users of AutoPIPE only. Others upgrading may not receive these items.
Applications Included in the Install Package

AutoPIPE Standard, AutoPIPE Plus, AutoPIPE Nuclear, and add-ons are installed from one executable.
AutoPIPE Standard - The standard configuration of AutoPIPE includes these features:
n Hanger selection, static linear and non-linear, modal, and response spectrum (SRSS combination method only)
n Static Earthquake, Wind - ASCE, UBC and User profile
n ASME B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, B31.8, European EN13480, and General piping code
n Rotating equipment reports
n Beam elements for modeling frames and supports
n Library utilities
AutoPIPE Plus - Incorporates all of the features of the Standard version, as listed above with the following additions:
n Harmonic, Force spectrum, Time history, and SAM
n Buried pipe
n NUREG combinations and code case 411 spectrum
n Static correction - Missing mass correction and ZPA
n Wave loading and buoyancy, fluid transient loads, and relief valve loads
n ASME B31.1-1967
n Offshore piping codes: ASME B31.4 Chap. IX, ASME B31.8 Chap. VIII, CSA-Z662 Sect. 11
n International piping codes
AutoPIPE Nuclear - Incorporates all of the features of the Plus version, as listed above with the following additions for class 1, 2, and 3, and JSME piping:
n ASME Class 1, 2, and 3 design
n Thermal transient analysis (TTA)
n Ovality, Gross discontinuity, Delta T1, T2 loadings
n JSME S NC1-PPC
KHK2 Add-on for AutoPIPE Plus or Nuclear - allows the use of the Japanese KHK Level 2 piping code in the Plus or Nuclear version.
StressISO Add-on - allows the use of the stress isometric generation feature
Intergraph PDS, SmartPlant and ADLPipe Translators - This release installs three standalone translators to help bring models from other applications to AutoPIPE.
n Intergraph PDS, SmartPlant and ADLPipe translators included
n AutoPIPE File > Open menu updated to include 3 new options
n A new program group "Bentley AutoPIPE Translators" added with shortcuts to launch translators
n Easy to locate installation directory; all installed under "c:\Bentley\AutoPIPE Translators"
n Installers included as part of package at location shown below
|_autopipe
|_09050008en
|_install
|_Translators - This folder contains translator installers
Note: For further information on translators, please refer to their respective readme files.
Installation Procedure
The installation procedure is done through web downloads from Bentley SELECT Services Online at the following link:
http://selectservices.bentley.com/downloads/index.htm
You can select Web download or MySELECT CD options for installation.
l Web Downloads-- Online access to Bentley files and applications. Enhancements, updates and products can be downloaded via the Internet.
l MySELECT CD-- Create customized CDs via the Web. You can put the files and Bentley products you want on a CD and have it shipped to you via UPS.
Follows the instructions on the web for installing the AutoPIPE software.
Review the Readme_autopipe.htm file, which may contain updates and information related to AutoPIPE not available at the time this documentation was written.
Licensing
Bentley SELECT Server licensing is required to run the software in unlimited mode either as node locked license (specific to one computer) or via a SELECT Server licensing which can be hosted locally
or by Bentley.
Notes:
1. Academic Licensing is available for students that are interested in using AutoPIPE.
2. A Trial License is available for first time users of AutoPIPE.
Network Considerations
Network drives are only supported for data files.
n AutoPIPE software must be installed on a local client workstation.
n AutoPIPE data files (*.DAT) must have full read/write access to be opened and edited.
Release Notes
The latest program release information and changes to the program that are not included in the manual are listed in the readme_autopipe.htm file located in the AutoPIPE program directory. This file can be
opened from the 'AutoPIPE Readme' option in the 'Bentley AutoPIPE V8i SELECTseries 4' folder in the Start Menu.
Getting Started
Authorization
Starting with AutoPIPE V8i (v9.1) a new software security called the XM licensing with IEG Security service will replace the Select Server licensing. Full authorization of this application requires a valid
Bentley Serial Number, site server name and activation code. The Serial Number you received when you purchased the application is used to obtain a License File to complete the authorization process.
Further information click on the link for AutoPIPE QuickStart Guide.
Obtaining the SELECT Server License

Common User Story: "I manage an existing SELECT Account and I want to move to a deployed SELECT Server Edition."
1. Request desire to move to SELECT Server Edition to Bentley Sales Support (formerly Bentley Administration Center) by email, phone, or FAX.
Bentley Sales Support will:
n Create a new SELECT Server entry for the desired Site(s) in the CRM system;
n Issue a unique Serial Number and server Activation Key for the account’s SELECT Server;
n Email the SS Serial Number and server Activation Key and the product Activation Key(s) for the requested Site(s) to the account’s system administrator;
n Change account’s contract status to note deployment of SELECT Server Edition.
2. System Administrator will install SELECT Server Edition on the desired server with an established Internet connection.
3. Activate the SELECT Server by inputting the Serial Number and server Activation Key and downloading the license for the Site(s).
4. Install and activate a SELECT Server Gateway service for pre-V8i applications, as required.
5. Activate any V8i applications directly to deployed SELECT Server licensing using SELECT Server machine name and Site-specific product Activation Key provided by Bentley Sales Support.
Note: SELECT Server Edition is required for V8i-based applications, such as MicroStation V8i Edition or ProjectWise V8i Edition. It can also manage pre-V8i applications, such as the XM Edition.
Note: If you have any questions related to the installation or use of AutoPIPE, you can contact Technical Support
StressISO (ISOGEN) Licensing

The latest version of ISOGEN is packaged with AutoPIPE to be deployed automatically during the AutoPIPE setup. It will check for any previous installation of ISOGEN and only install if an older
version is found. An add-on StressISO license is required to activate the full capabilities of the Stress Isometric using the ISOGEN engine (Alias product).
How to Activate AutoPIPE V8i Edition

Product activation is achieved by connecting to a SELECT Server and receiving a verification that your SELECT Server Name and Activation Key are correct. This document describes how to configure
AutoPIPE V8i Edition for activation. After initial configuration, AutoPIPE V8i Edition automatically and transparently tries to activate each time it runs, after its last successful activation.
If your organization chooses to run SELECT Server
First access the Options dialog box of AutoPIPE V8i Edition's License Management Tool. You can do so in two ways:
1. The License Management Tool's Option dialog box displays if Go to Start | Programs | Bentley AutoPIPE V8i| License Management Tool. Choose Tools > Options to open the Options dialog box.
OR
2. From the Tools menu in AutoPIPE V8i Edition, choose Tools > Settings > License Management Tool to open the License Management Tool. Choose Tools > Options to open the Options dialog box.
Secondly, in the SELECT Server tab of the License Management Tool's Options dialog, enter the server name of your SELECT Server installation as well as your Site Activation Key. This information,
along with any possible Proxy Configuration information, can be obtained from your Site Administrator.
Important note for System Administrators: AutoPIPE V8i Edition requires Bentley SELECT Server Edition and will not run with Bentley SELECT Server 2004 Edition (V8.5.2 and earlier). Bentley
SELECT Server Edition can be obtained from the Downloads/MySELECT CD area of SELECTservices Online. Please note that you need to obtain a new license file for Bentley SELECT Server
Edition. Contact the Bentley Administration Center that services your area for information on upgrading your current Bentley SELECT Server XM Edition license file.
If your organization does NOT run SELECT Server
If your organization does not run SELECT Server, then you need to activate AutoPIPE V8i Edition online against a server hosted by Bentley. Please note that this requires an active Internet connection at
least for the initial activation.
First, access the AutoPIPE V8i Edition's License Management Tool's Option dialog box via one of the two methods described in the "If your organization runs SELECT Server" section.
Secondly, in the SELECT Server tab of the License Management Tool's Options dialog, enter the URL and the Site Activation Key provided to you by the Bentley Administration Center. Additional
configuration may be necessary if you are running a Proxy server.
Important note: If the workstation on which AutoPIPE V8i Edition will be running does not have regular access to the Internet for periodic activation, then consider utilizing a checked-out termed license
from the Bentley hosted server. AutoPIPE V8i Edition will not attempt to activate for the duration of the termed license. Please see the AutoPIPE V8i Edition documentation for details on obtaining a
checked out license.
See Also:
License Management Tool [Important details on activation and license check-out]
Releasing Licenses
Activate Pre-XM Applications

Getting Started
License Management Tool

Used to check out application and program licenses that are under concurrent license control of the SELECT Server XM License Manager to systems that are not continually connected to a network with
access to SELECT Server, such as workstations, laptops, and portables. This enables users dependent of the SELECT Server License Manager (LM) concurrent licensing feature to use LM-managed
application licenses on remote systems for extended periods of time.
Go to "Start/Program/Bentley AutoPIPE V8i/License Management Tool" from the Start menu or select "Tools/Settings/ License Management Tool" from within AutoPIPE. Enter the SELECT server
name and the site Activation key in SELECT Server pane in the Options dialog below. This dialog will not appear if the server name and the site Activation key have been previously verified.
The remotely-used application can reside on the remote system continually, even when its license is not active. The only physical requirement for use is that the remote system is connected to a network
with access to SELECT Server during the time that the license is being requested and transferred from the License Management Tool utility.
Once the license is checked out, the system can be disconnected from the network, and the application for which the license was checked out can be operated at anytime during the valid check-out period.
After the check-out period has expired, the application will no longer operate until a new license for that application is checked out. If the application is no longer needed, either temporarily or
permanently, the license can be checked in, making it available to other users who can use the license either within the network or remotely. Once the license checkout period expires, the License
Management Tool utility automatically "checks in" the license and makes it available to other users.
The license is stored locally and is valid for the requested time period. The default is 90 days, but this is configurable in SELECT Server.
Pressing the "Test Connection" button will validate the entered information.
Press OK. Wait for few seconds and all licensed products list will appear in the License Management Tool dialog below.
The security is now in place. The installation is complete and AutoPIPE is ready for use.
Note: In Floating or concurrent licensing mode, the client computer is connected to a Bentley hosted (via internet) or company local network server with IEG Security service running in the background
which will always try to maintain a checked out license for 48hrs while connected or even disconnected from the server.
License Options
Available licenses list box
Lists product licenses that are available to be checked out. For each such license, the term is specified. To check out a license, you must first select it.
Check Out
Checks out license selected in the list of available licenses above.
Check In
Checks in the license selected in the list of checked out licenses below, thereby making that license available to be checked out by another user. If a license is not selected, the first license in the list will
be checked in.
Checked out licenses list box
Lists product licenses that are checked out. For each such license, the expiration is specified. If you do not select a license before clicking Check In, the utility will check in the first license in the list.
File > Import
Opens the Import License File dialog box which allows you to import a license file (*.XML) into the program. This can be used if you do not have Internet access.
File > Backup
While clicked on a checked out license, you can click on File Backup to open the Save License File As dialog box in order to create a backup copy of the license file.
File > Exit
Closes the License Management Tool dialog box.
View > Refresh
Refreshes the license availability on the License Management Tool dialog box.
Tools > Options
Opens the Options dialog box, which is used to enter or edit your SELECT Server Settings, Protocol and/or Proxy Configuration.
Checking Out a SELECT License

1. Select the product you want to check out the license for and select "CheckOut".
2. Enter your e-mail address and product version in the Checkout Settings dialog below.
Press OK and the license will be checked out on your local machine as shown in the License Management Tool dialog below.
Adding a Standalone License File

You will need your Bentley SELECT license file (*.XML), which has been supplied. If you do not have it please contact your Bentley software supplier.
Copy the license file in your hard disk. Go to Start > All Programs > Bentley AutoPIPE V8i > SELECT License Management Tool.
If this is being set for the first time, then the following message is displayed.
Click on the ’OK’ button and the following dialog box is displayed
As this is for a local license, click on the ’Cancel’ button to cancel the Options dialog box and the License Management Tool dialog is displayed:
Click on the menu item ’File/Import…’ to open the Import License File dialog box, thus:
Browse to the location of the license file (.xml) file, select it and click on the ’Open’ button to import the license file. If the file is successfully imported, the available licenses are displayed thus:
The security is now in place. The installation is complete and AutoPIPE is ready for use.
See Also:

Getting Started
How to run 2004 Edition applications with SELECT Server XM?

You do NOT have to be running XM Edition applications to take advantage of the new SSXM system. You could choose to run the new server with Gateways even if you are not running any XM
applications. With that said, you have three different options for activating and licensing XM Edition applications:
l Deploy and manage your own SELECT Server XM Edition - This would include the deployment of SSXM Gateways for accounts that are using our products today. The Gateway acts as a proxy
for the existing SELECT Server and allows for existing applications (i.e., 2004E) to work as they do today without having to re-license them for the new SELECT Server XM (as long as the
Gateway is installed on the same machine they are using today). In addition, desktop applications and the deployed SELECT Server are designed to connect and post usage logs daily. But such
postings are only required once per month to maintain activation. So the connectivity requirements are: a) constant connection between pre-XM applications and their Gateway; b) at least one
(LAN) connection every 30 days between an XM app (including a Gateway) and a deployed SELECT Server; and c) at least one Internet connection every 30 days between a deployed SSXM and
Bentley's back office. In cases where a deployed SSXM can never have a connection to the Internet, we have a manual alternative for posting logs and getting license updates.
l Bentley Hosted Licensing - Alternatively, users of XM applications can have Bentley host licensing for them. In this case, we provide a hosted SELECT Server Site(s) for the account that they
activate their XM applications against. The only requirement that is different than above is that they would have to allow Internet connectivity at least once monthly for each machine that is running
an XM Edition application, including servers.
l Non-SELECT users - Non-SELECT users of Bentley XM Edition applications will activate their products against a hosted activation site. This requires a one-time Internet connection in order to
download a license, thereby activating the product.
Setup the Gateway Configuration

After installing the SELECT Server XM Edition software.
Go to Start | Programs | Bentley | SELECT Server | SELECT Server Gateway Configuration
Enter the Server Name and site activation code the press Verify. No warning messages indicates successful gateway established.
Start the Gateway Service
Go to Start | Control Panel | Administrative Tools | Services
Check the Bentley SELECT Server Gateway is started, if not open the service and click the Start button
Getting Started
The following licensing scenarios will be available on executing "File/Save Stress Isometric" or toolbar icon
1. When first launching this option after installing the AutoPIPE program, StressISO will by default be running in Demo mode OR if StressISO had previously been set to run in Demo mode.
a. If AutoPIPE is NOT running in Demo mode then the "Welcome to AutoPIPE…" dialog will appear allowing the User to select either the StressISO ’Demo’ or ’Add-on’ options.
i. If the User selects the StressISO ’Demo’ option or Window Close then StressISO will stay in DEMO mode and the ’Stress Isometric Options’ dialog will open. The Top Banner on the dialog will show
"Stress Isometric Options Demo".
ii. If the User selects the StressISO ’Add-on’ option and a valid StressISO full license is found then the Stress Isometric Options dialog will open. The Top Banner on the dialog will show "Stress
Isometric Options".
b. If AutoPIPE is running in Demo mode, then StressISO will automatically be set to Demo mode and the ’Stress Isometric Options’ dialog will open. The Top Banner on the dialog will show "Stress
Isometric Options Demo"
2. If a StressISO license was previously checked out without closing AutoPIPE then StressISO with full Isogen functions will be available. The Stress Isometric Options dialog will open. The Top Banner
on the dialog will show "Stress Isometric Options".
Notes:
1. All buttons will be disabled (greyed out) except the StressISO Demo and "StressISO Add-on" buttons.
2. StressISO will NOT run in full license mode but switch to ISOGEN DEMO mode if AutoPIPE (any edition) is running in DEMO mode.
Execute Tools > Settings > Edition from the main menu , then the "Welcome to AutoPIPE…" dialog will appear.
a. If AutoPIPE is NOT running in Demo mode.
i. If the User selects the StressISO ’Demo’ option then StressISO Demo mode is set.
ii. If the User selects the StressISO ’Add-on’ option and if a valid StressISO is found then it is checked out and the full StressISO license mode is set.
b. If AutoPIPE is running in Demo mode.
i. If the User selects the StressISO ’Demo’ option then Demo mode is set.
ii. If the User selects the StressISO ’Add-on’ option then a message will appear "Requires a valid license of AutoPIPE"
Note: If StressISO was previously running in full license mode, then its license was returned to the server. When "File/Save As StressISO" is selected again if a StressISO license cannot be found e.g.
disconnected from the server then a warning message will be displayed.
Note: "If AutoPIPE is running in DEMO (stressISO automatically set to DEMO) then File save as StressISO will NOT display the Welcome dialog and will not display any warning message."
Getting Started
Academic Licensing
AutoPIPE supports SELECT Server academic licensing. When a student or Educational Institute purchase Bentley software, the program will automatically detect the academic license and show "For
Academic use only" on the program titlebar, and any printed report will show, "[Academic License. Not For Commercial Use]".
The following is an example of the AutoPIPE titlebar, when using an academic license:
The following is an example of the header from an output report, when using an academic license:
Getting Started
Trial License
A trial license is available to allow full-feature access for a single 15-day period. The trial license can be activated only once per workstation. If the program is opened and a valid license is not available,
the program will prompt the user with a choice to either activate the trial period (if available) or continue in Demo mode. The number of days left for the trial period is shown every time the program is
opened. After the trial license expires, running the program without a valid license will display the message 'Your 15 day trial license has expired or it is not set up properly.'
Getting Started
Loading a System Overview

After opening AutoPIPE, the next step is to either create/define a new system or to load an existing one. Both procedures are provided below.
Defining a New System
Loading an Existing System

Getting Started
Defining a New System

1. Select File/New to open
i the New dialog.
2. Indicate the path where the file will be stored using standard Windows file selection techniques (i.e., highlight the appropriate drive, then the directory where the file will be stored).
3. After the path information is specified, type the name of the model in the File name field, then press Save.
The next several steps will present a series of dialogs for the definition of the model and its operating parameters. Each of these dialogs is discussed briefly below for the purpose of demonstrating
the sequence of steps required to create a new model. In the next chapter we’ll take a closer look at the definition of model properties. As always, you can also refer to the on-line help for
comprehensive dialog information.
4. The General Model Options dialog is displayed.
5. Complete each of the fields to adequately describe your model. Of particular note is the Piping Code selection list, which allows you to choose from a variety of pre-defined piping codes. After
completing the dialog, press OK.
6. The Segment dialog is displayed for the definition of the initial segment that will be used as the starting point of your model. Define the starting point name, any offset values, and a pipe identifier
that will be associated with all components which belong to that segment. As components are placed on the line, point names are generated. The default point names always begin with the segment
name ("A" in the example below) to which they belong. After completing the dialog, press OK.
7. The Pipe Properties dialog is displayed. From this location you define the initial pipe properties of the model. This dialog will be explained in the next chapter. After completing the dialog, press
OK.
8. The Pressure & Temperature dialog is displayed for the definition of operating loads. Enter values in each of the fields as required by the demands of your system, then press OK to close the dialog.
9. The setup of the new model is complete. You can now add a component to the first point (A00) in the system (or insert an offset distance from this point). In the next chapter, we’ll create a new
model and demonstrate methods for placing and connecting components.
See Also
Creating a new model

Getting Started

1. Select File/Open . A standard
i Windows file selection dialog is displayed.
2. Navigate to the directory where the file is stored. Locate the filename in the "Files" list, select it, then press OK. The previously saved model and its data are now available for editing or report generation.
See Also
Creating a New System
Opening an existing model

Getting Started
Interface
The AutoPIPE interface is designed to simplify the task of creating, modifying, and reviewing models of any complexity.
Screen Layout
Take some time to familiarize yourself with AutoPIPE’s interface by examining the areas of the screen annotated below.
image\ebd_140.gif
Dialogs
Dialogs present and request information.
l Press OK to accept the values in a dialog
l Some fields have an associated list of options from which the user can select. For example, there is a limited set of piping codes, and the user can always select the appropriate code from a list when
the cursor is in the Piping Code field. This list is contained inside the dialog itself, and is opened by pressing on the ò adjacent to that field.
l The units which apply to a particular field are displayed in the status bar in the bottom right hand corner of the screen.
l To advance from field to field in a dialog, press the Tab key. Pressing Enter from the dialog is the equivalent of pressing OK. You can also advance the cursor by simply using the mouse to select the
desired location.
l Options which are toggled ON are indicated by a ü. The ON/OFF state is toggled simply by positioning the cursor in that field and pressing the left mouse button.
l Press F1 on any dialog field to obtain help on a particular field or parameter. To obtain "big picture" dialog help, press the Help button.
Keyboard Equivalents
As you begin creating a model, you’ll soon become familiar with AutoPIPE’s use of dialogs to gather information from the user. Although the mouse can be used to navigate through the fields of a
dialog, many users prefer the keyboard alternatives.
Menu Structure
All AutoPIPE commands can be accessed from the menu system. For a detailed description of the capabilities and functionality of a specific command, refer to the AutoPIPE On-line Help Menu
Reference. The top menu that is displayed above the drawing area depends on the current mode of the program:
l The standard Menu is displayed when building or editing a model
l AutoPIPE input grids can display a model’s data in excel-like spreadsheet format.
Note that each of these menus has a toolbar associated with it.
Toolbars
AutoPIPE has two types of toolbars: command and components. Command toolbars are always docked directly beneath the main menu, and cannot be moved from this location. The component toolbar,
on the other hand, can be moved from its position along the right side of the screen and positioned as a "floating toolbar" in the modeling area of the screen. To reposition it, simply "drag" the title bar of
the toolbar into the screen area. The toolbar will resize.
If you forget the use of a particular button, position your cursor over it and wait a second or two. A tooltip description is displayed beneath the button.
Hotkeys
A number of AutoPIPE commands can be accessed directly from the keyboard using hotkeys. In AutoPIPE hotkeys are executed by holding down the control and then pressing a letter key. Additionally,
AutoPIPE also uses the function keys for some operations. Note that these hotkeys are displayed in the AutoPIPE pull-down menus next to the item it executes.
Getting Started
Units Format
image\ebd_141.gif
Only the coordinates in "Offset" fields (i.e., "Length," "DX/DY/DZ") use architectural units.
Note: Also refer to Tools/ Model options /Edit > "Use feet-inches display format" option
Getting Started
AutoPIPE Modeling Concepts Overview

Experienced users of AutoPIPE have come to appreciate the speed and efficiency with which detailed, data-rich models can be created. If you are a novice user, it is important to understand some basic
concepts of the program.
l Models are created from individual pipe segments
l Components are attached to the active point
l The piping system’s geometry can be modified
Select from the following topics provided below to review these important concepts:
Understanding Pipe Segments
Rules for Defining Segments
Graphical Tee Element
Understanding Bends
Understanding the Active Point
Controlling the Active Point with the Keyboard
Modification of Piping Geometry

Getting Started
Understanding Pipe Segments

Each piping system is divided into a number of segments. As an example, the sample model shown below contains two segments labeled A and B. Piping models are entered into the program, segment by
segment. They may be extended or modified at any time by either adding more segments or changing existing ones. The segments are labeled automatically (A to B in the example). If more than twenty-
six segments are entered, the additional ones are labeled AA, AB, AC and so on.
image\segment.gif
Although most of the piping segment definition is handled automatically with AutoPIPE, in some circumstances it is advantageous to plan the model in advance and divide it into logical "segments"
before creating the system (see ’Rules for defining Pipe Segments’). Typically, a segment would begin and end at anchor points or a branch connection. However, a pipeline may be divided into two or
more contiguous segments. Whenever a tee/branch is inserted, AutoPIPE automatically assigns a new segment identifier. Each new segment begins with a different alpha character, making it easier for
node numbering and easier to keep track of segments when reviewing input listings or output results.
When defining a new system, AutoPIPE automatically displays the first Segment screen (the first segment is segment A). In this screen, the user must specify starting X,Y, Z coordinates of the Segment
and input a Pipe identifier name. A Pipe identifier is used to assign properties. The Pipe identifier can be any name that the user wishes to use. It is a good idea to choose a meaningful name such as the
first few letters of a line ID or something like 8"std (indicating 8" nominal diameter, standard schedule wall thickness) to help you keep track of pipe properties when reviewing the model.
These properties will be applied to all components attached to that pipe identifier until otherwise specified by inputting a new pipe identifier name in one of the component dialogue screens. After
inputting a new Pipe identifier name, the Pipe properties screen will automatically be displayed for input. For example, if you define a Pipe identifier as a 4-inch line, then all following components will
default to those same properties until the user types in a new Pipe identifier name on a component dialogue. A segment can be made up of multiple pipe identifiers.
Existing Pipe properties can be easily modified using either Modify/Properties of Pipe Identifier (which modifies that Pipe Identifier throughout the entire model, wherever it was used) or by graphical
selection of a range of points and Modify/Pipe Properties Over Range.
AutoPIPE makes extensive use of dialogs to obtain user input. A discussion of techniques for navigating throughout the fields of a dialog is provided later in this chapter.
Click here to open an example piping system window

Getting Started
Rules for Defining Segments

A number of rules govern the definition of piping segments; they are listed as follows:
1. Each segment has a forward and backward direction and is entered as a sequence of points. AutoPIPE automatically keeps track of the local axis of the segment, making it convenient to insert intermediate points or components using the Length field. These points
are automatically assigned alphanumeric names (which the user can override), with a maximum of four characters each. For example, in Figure 1, segment B is defined by points A03, B01, B02, B03, B04, and B05, all of which have default names. The default
increment in point names is 1. This increment can be changed under Tools/Model Options/Edit. AutoPIPE can automatically renumber point names after editing using the Renumber button or Edit/Renumber.
2. Wind loads and Hydrotest can be turned on and off on a segment by segment basis, so keep that in mind when creating your model. Also, AutoPIPE provides options to view the model, graphically select, delete, or view output results on a segment by segment
basis.
3. Global coordinates must be entered for the first point of the first segment (default global coordinates of Segment A is 0,0,0). AutoPIPE automatically displays the first segment screen for the user. This is point A00 in the Figure. Then, each point along the
segment is typically located by offsets from the preceding point, until the whole segment has been defined (e.g. points A00 to A06 for segment A).
4. Subsequent segments typically begin at points which have been defined previously (point A03 in segment B is an example). These points are either branch points or continuation points (see #6 below). Since these points have already been defined, entering
coordinate data for them is not necessary.
5. Although Subsequent segments typically begin or end at an existing point, this is not necessary for the program to function correctly. It is often more convenient to start a disconnected segment in space using Insert/Segment or clicking on the Segment button,
typing in the name of the first point (in this case, make sure that the name of the first point on the segment is not the name of a previously defined point), and assigning the starting X,Y,Z coordinates of that new Segment. For example, it may be more convenient
to define suction and discharge sections as disconnected segments without having to model the equipment (see Pump Modeling Example in AutoPIPE on-line help). Also, the ability to handle disconnected segments is a big advantage when importing sections
from a CAD model.
6. A continuation point is established when a new segment is defined to begin at the end point of an existing segment (see point D02 in the Figure). This is typically done to divide a long length of pipe into shorter segments or to turn on and off wind loads or
hydrotest on a segment by segment basis.
7. A tee branch connection point is any point which joins two or more pipe segments, and requires a multiple pipe connection (see points A03, and B05 in the Figure) such as a tee or cross. A continuation point can be made into a branch point using Modify/Convert
Point to/Tee.
8. Cut and paste automatically creates a new segment.
When defining a segment, proceed from point to point along the segment. Check that everything at the current point has been specified before moving on to the next point.
Getting Started
Graphical Tee Element
In AutoPIPE version 5.0 and earlier, users would have to insert a new segment at an existing run point in order to insert a tee branch connection. With the Tee element in v6.0 and later , this procedure is
no longer required (although users can still input a tee branch by inserting a segment at a run point if desired).
The Tee element automates the insertion of tees and includes the offset distance from the previous point. For example, if a user wishes to insert a tee point on a header 5 feet away from his current point
(active point), he clicks on the Tee button or Insert/Tee and inputs an offset of 5 feet as well as the tee type information for stress intensification purposes. The Tee element will automatically assign a new
segment once the user begins to input new components on the branch. AutoPIPE will keep this point a tee for stress intensification, even if the user does not create a branch. In some cases, users may
choose not to input small diameter vent or drain pipe branches, but still want the stress intensification factor at the tee connection point. AutoPIPE displays a graphical symbol at Tee points enabling users
to visually review tee locations. Users can also click on Tee arrows to easily switch between the header and branch side of the tee e.g. to build a branch click on the branch tee arrow and select Insert/Run.
Users can convert an existing run point to a Tee using Modify/Convert point to/Tee command.
Getting Started
Understanding Bends
A bend is a unique component in AutoPIPE because it must be offset a specified distance from an existing point, and because the orientation of the bend is determined by the location of the next
component placed in the model. Refer to the graphic below.
image\ubends.gif
In AutoPIPE, defining a bend is easy because the location of the two tangent end points are automatically calculated by the program. The user simply specifies the bend radius and location of its tangent
intersection point (TIP). The bend radius and TIP location are typically specified on piping drawings.
Note: The TIP is defined as the intersection of the tangent lines constructed from the tangent end points of the bend. In AutoPIPE, the bend point and the TIP are synonymous.
l To insert a bend
1. Select Insert/Bend . The Bend Point dialog is displayed.
2. Indicate the offset distance from the previous point. This becomes the point where the TIP of the bend will be placed (offset distances are respective of the coordinate system displayed in the lower
right of the modeling area). Press OK to close the dialog.
3. AutoPIPE now displays the TIP of the bend at its new point (i.e., A01). However, the bend cannot be drawn because AutoPIPE needs to know the run direction of the segment in order to properly
orient the elbow. In other words, does the elbow turn up, down, left, or right?
4. Define the next point. This can be another bend, another segment point, or a new component point. After AutoPIPE knows the location of this point, the first bend is drawn.
Getting Started
Understanding the Active Point

After defining and inserting a segment, you’ll notice that a small crosshair appears in the drawing area. These crosshairs represent the currently active point. The active point is also displayed in the status
area immediately below the drawing area.
image\acpoint.gif
When placing components, you should remain aware of the active point. After selecting a component type for insertion, AutoPIPE will automatically assume that you want the starting point of the
component to be inserted at the active point. By default AutoPIPE will increment the point to the next value and concatenate this with the letter that defines the current segment. For example, if you are
inserting a run point on Segment A which contains nothing but an anchor point, the &rsquoRun Point’ dialog will contain the value A01 in the "Starting Point" field.
To designate an existing point as the active point, simply select it with the mouse. The crosshairs should redisplay over that point and the Active Point status area should reflect the new point as well. You
can also use the cursor keys to control the location of the active point.
Getting Started
Controlling the Active Point with the Keyboard

As an alternative to the mouse, the "Active Point" crosshairs can be controlled using the keyboard.
Getting Started
Modification of Piping Geometry

It is not necessary for a piping system to be defined completely in a single AutoPIPE session, because AutoPIPE allows a wide variety of additions, deletions, and changes to be made. In particular:
1. New segments can be added at any time.
2. Previously defined segments can be extended at any time.
3. Existing segments can be modified, or can be deleted and replaced.
4. A complete system, or sections of a system, can be copied within the same job or between separate jobs with automatic renumbering.
5. Components can be inserted, deleted, or modified at any time.
6. As noted in the following sections, changes in data can lead to a variety of inconsistencies. AutoPIPE will detect most inconsistencies, and will display warning or error messages. However,
AutoPIPE may not detect all of the possible inconsistencies. Users must take care in making changes, and must review the changes carefully, to insure that the modified geometry and properties are
correct.
Command Reference
Understanding Support Symbols

Some of the support symbols in single line/wireframe/solid model views have changed in appearance from version 6.X to version 8.X since the introduction of the new OpenGL graphics. Various parts of
the support symbol now have a special meaning.
The graphic below summarizes the available support types and their corresponding symbols in single line and solid model view.
A typical V-stop is shown below with a small e.g 1" gap above the pipe.
Note: The ground symbol is not shown if the "Connected To" point is not "Ground" i.e. is a pipe or beam point e.g. as shown for the Tie/link above.
Enter a large gap e.g 100 above the pipe
Then the support symbol is plotted as below.
Tie/link supports
Supports on horizontal vs Vertical lines
The sample model below shows various supports on vertical and horizontal pipes and whose directions are parallel to the pipe axis. Since the support directions relative to the pipe axis is less than 45
degrees a thin line is extended outside the pipe and the support symbol is attached to it.
A03: Incline support parallel to horizontal pipe
A04: Line stop parallel to horizontal pipe
A05: Damper parallel to horizontal pipe
A07: Rotation parallel to horizontal pipe
B01: Spring hanger parallel to vertical pipe
C01: V-stop parallel to vertical pipe
D01: Incline parallel to vertical pipe
E01: Line stop parallel to vertical pipe
F01: Damper parallel to vertical pipe
G01: Constant hanger parallel to vertical pipe
H01: Rotation parallel to vertical pipe
The sample model below shows various supports whose directions are 45 degrees from the pipe axis. Since the support directions relative to the pipe axis is equal to 45 degrees the support is attached to
the centerline of the pipe except for a line stop. For the line stop, note that the extension line is now perpendicular to the pipe axis. In pre-8.9 versions, the extension line was along the global Y axis.
Support Considerations
Support Notes
Modeling Examples
Support Analysis Considerations
Getting Started
Basic Tasks Overview

This section lists simple techniques for accomplishing the following:
l Executing a command
l Selecting a component
l Inserting a component
l Modifying points or component
l Deleting a component
l Selecting a range of components (creating a selection set)
Getting Started
Executing a Command
Commands can be executed in one of three ways:
l Click on one of the buttons in a toolbar.
l Select a command from the menu system
l Key-in the command. The hotkey for each command is underlined in the menu system. As an example, to insert a bend, simply type I to go into insert mode, then B. The key-in command option
requires memorization of certain hotkeys, but is an extremely efficient method of input.
Getting Started
Selecting a Component
There are two methods for selecting a component.
l Click on it with the mouse. By clicking on the outer edge of a component, the component turns red to indicate that it is selected. If it is a two-point component such as a valve or flexible joint, the
red indicates that the beginning point and end point of a two point component have been selected.
l Graphically select a range of points (see following &rsquoSelecting a Range of Points’ section)
Getting Started
Inserting a Component
The following techniques may be used to insert a component:
l Position the cursor on the desired point by clicking on it, then click on one of the component buttons from the toolbar. To insert an intermediate run point, or multiple run points, click on the pipe
run button.
l Position the cursor on the insertion point, then select the desired component from the Insert menu.
l Users can graphically select a range to insert across ranges of points with one command (see Selecting a Range)
l Place the cursor on the desired point, then use the keyboard equivalent menu commands to key-in the insertion
l Position the cursor over the desired button, press and hold the left mouse button, then "drag" the button off the toolbar and "drop" it onto the desired point by releasing the mouse button. This is
known as the "drag and drop" technique.
Getting Started
Modifying a Component
Use one of the techniques below to modify the definition of an existing component:
l Using the mouse, double click on the graphical representation of the component to open its associated dialog. Double click on a point to modify point offsets.
l Position the cursor on one of the points, or select a range of points, then right-click the component to be modified from the toolbar.
l Click on one of the points associated with the component, then select the component name from the Modify menu.
l Users can graphically select a range to modify across a range of points with one command (see &rsquoSelecting a Range’)
Getting Started
Deleting a Component
Use on of the techniques below to delete an existing component:
l Select the unwanted component with the mouse then press the Delete key on the keyboard.
l Select the unwanted component then press Delete on the

i command toolbar.
l Position the cursor on one of the points, or select a range of points, then hold down the Shift and right-click the component to be deleted from the toolbar.
l Graphically select a range, then select the corresponding component name from the Delete menu to delete across an entire range of points with one command (see Selecting a Range).
l Select the unwanted component then select the Edit/Delete menu command.
l Select it with the mouse or position the active point at that location, then select the corresponding component name from the Delete menu.
Changing the Legend Colors
Change the colors on the legend contour for View/Show Options (Pressure, Temperature, Pipe Properties, Rigid Options, and Soil Properties, code stress contours, and bend angular distortion contours)
by double-clicking the contour on the legend and assigning different RGB color values.
Note: Alternatively, the colors on the legend contour can be configured using the Colors Dialog under Tools/Settings/Colors.
The legend contour colors are saved to the "autopipe.rgb" file in the program directory. Stress contour colors are defined separately from View/Show contour colors.
After changing the legend contour colors, the contour colors will be automatically refreshed on the legend and model.
Dynamically change any Legend Color
Double-clicking the contour on the legends above will display the Color dialog below with a color palette to change the assigned color to the selected contour. The basic color palette is shown below.
See Also :
Tools/Settings/Colors Command
Getting Started
Range Selection Overview

Selection of ranges is a powerful tool within AutoPIPE that users should become familiar with. By graphically selecting ranges of points, users can insert, modify, or delete components, properties, loads,
and other data across ranges of points with one command or graphically select points to be included in the output reports. Also, selection of ranges is required in order to graphically cut, copy, or paste.
There are several methods available to graphically select ranges of points. By using buttons or the Select menu, users can select by a number of different criteria such as by segment, point names,
component type, pipe diameter and other parameters. In addition, users can create a mouse zoom box Window and click on the Select all points in Window button to select a range. Another common
method used to select a range is to click on the first point in the range, press and hold the [Shift] key, then click on the last point in the range. The selection set will highlight in red. This is the same
technique used to select ranges in Word, Excel, and other popular Windows programs.
To create a selection set that includes components that are not part of a contiguous run, use the [Ctrl] key as follows: To add more components to this set, or delete points from this set press and hold the
[Ctrl] key and select additional elements. The [Ctrl] selection method allows you to select a set of components that are not continuous. Alternatively, Select/Point enables buttons which can add or subtract
from the selection set on a point by point basis.
The Select/Range command, another method of creating a selection set, allows the user to input "From" and "To" points inside a dialog.
l Three modes are available when creating a selection set that apply to most select operations.
Add to Highlighted Selection button enables only adding to the selection set. This is the default mode.
Remove from Highlighted Selection button enables only removing from the selection set.
Toggle Highlighted Selection button enables an operation to toggle the selection, for example selected items will be deselected and deselected items will be selected. This mode is not supported by
the Result/Filter operation and will be reset to Add mode following a Result/Filer operation.
Changing of the current mode is also supported during most operations. For example, you can change from Add to Remove mode without finishing a Select/Segment operation.
Graphically selecting a range
Graphically selecting all points in a window
Specifying point names to select a range
Adding entire segments to a range
Adding elements which match user-specified pipe properties
Selecting all components
Clearing the selected range

Getting Started
Graphically selecting a range (1 of 3)
image\range01.gif
Prev Next
See Also:
Graphically selecting a non-continuous range

Getting Started
Graphically selecting a non-continuous range

Sometimes you may want to define a range of components which are not continuous along a pipe run.
l To create a non-continuous range:
1. Select the first portion of the range as described previously (point A00 to A03 in the example shown below).
2. Press the Ctrl key and select the next point where the range should continue (A07 in the Figure).
3. Press the Shift key and select the next downstream point (point A10 in the Figure).
image\rangenon.gif
Note that two areas of the piping system are highlighted. A range is defined to include points A00-A03 and A07-A10. You could continue adding additional points to the range by repeating the Ctrl key
selection technique.
Getting Started
Specifying point names to select a range

1. Select Select/Point. A control dialog opens.
2. In the From point field, input (or select graphically from the model) the point which defines the start of the range.
3. In the to point field, input (or select graphically from the model) the last point in the range.
4. The range is highlighted in the model. If the range is sufficiently defined, press OK to close the dialog. To continue defining points, input a new starting point in the From point field. Using this technique, you can build a range definition which includes non-
continuous sections of the piping model.
Select/Point Option to add Anchors
Getting Started
Adding entire segments to a range
In some cases, you may want to define a range which includes one or more segments.
1. Select Select/Segment.
2. In the Select segments to add field, input the desired segment name, then press Select.
3. Continue adding as many segments to the range as desired by inputting the segment name in the field provided, then pressing Select.
4. When the range is complete, press Finish.
5. An alternative to using the Select Segment dialog is to first click a point on the segment to be selected and then press the toolbar button.
Getting Started
Adding elements which match user-specified pipe properties

AutoPIPE allows you to create a filter-based range from objects which share known pipe properties.
1. Select Select/Pipe Property Points. The Select Pipe Property Points dialog shown below is displayed.
image\rangepi.gif
2. Define the desired pipe properties in the dialog, then press OK. Objects in the model which match ALL the criteria specified in the dialog will be adding to the range.
Select Range by Pipe Identifier
Getting Started
Selecting all components

To easily include ALL the components in the model, select Select/All Points.
Note that all components of a specific type can also be selected using the Select menu options.
Getting Started
Clearing the selected range

There are two methods for clearing the selected range:
l Graphically click any point in the model without the Control or Shift key depressed.
l Select Select/Clear.
Getting Started
Analyze & Review Results
The following workflow shows the program instructions for performing a static analysis and reviewing results after the model is defined.
This includes viewing automatic load combinations or creating user defined combinations.
Hint: If both dynamic and static analyses have been previously run, then use the Analyze > All command to re-execute all or selected static and dynamic analyses.
See Also:
Understanding Load Sequencing
Non-linear Static Analysis Overview
FAQ: Checking for Support Lift-off

Command Reference
Command Reference
This area of the help is organized similar to the structure of the main AutoPIPE menu to enable you to quickly locate help on a particular command or function set. A special Toolbar Command Reference
topic is also provided to enable you to quickly locate within this Command Reference for that toolbar item.
File Commands
Edit Commands
View Commands
Select Commands
Model Creation & Editing Commands (Insert, Modify, and Delete)
Load Commands
Analysis Commands
Tools & Utility Commands
Result Commands
Help Menu
Toolbar Command Reference

Command Reference
File Commands
The following File menu options are provided:
Creating a New Model
Opening an Existing Model
Opening a Recently Used Model
The Close Command
The Save Command
The Save As Command
Save Screen Plot
Generating a Stress DXF file
Inserting a Model
Importing a Model
Exporting a Model
Print Preview
Printing
Permanent Lock
Properties
Model Management
ProjectWise
Structural Dashboard
Exiting AutoPIPE
Command Reference
Creating a New Model

Once you have entered AutoPIPE, select File/New fromi the pull-down menu to start a new model.
This calls up a blank File selection dialog: type in a File Name , specify the drive and directory where the new file should be stored, then press Save to exit the dialog and proceed to the next step.
After naming a file and saving it, the General Model Options dialog will open automatically.
If you enter a name that already exists, a dialog will appear warning you that the "<Filename> already exists. Do you want to replace it?". A Yes response will overwrite the existing file. A No response
will trigger a prompt for you to enter a new filename.
If the Tools/Model Options/Save Defaults was perviously executed, then those defaults will be listed in the General Model Options dialog.
Create a New System
Command Reference
Opening an Existing Model

Select File/Open from the pull-down menu to open a previously saved system model.
The Open dialog is identical to the New dialog; however, to open a file, the user proceeds differently by first selecting the drive and directory where the file is located, then selecting the desired File
Name from the selection list. To open a file, either double-click on it in the file list area, or highlight its name then press the OK button.
You can also use this dialog to open the following AutoPIPE input file types:
l AutoPIPE Backup (BAK): The The ability to recover the model database backup file is especially useful in cases where the current model database has
recently been corrupted or in cases of a program or operating crash. As you create or work with a model, a BAK file is created automatically every 20
minutes.
l AutoPIPE Batch (NTL)
The File Name must adhere to Windows naming convention.
Opening of models created prior to AutoPIPE 6.0 will convert whenever possible allowables on the Pressure & Temperature dialog to Automatic. The Automatic status is assigned to the allowables for
the entire model, but the allowables are not updated to the current library values. User defined allowables will be overridden only if the Modify/Pressure & Temperature is accepted over a range of a
points and then the change only applies to the points in the range.
l To insure that user defined allowables are left intact in AutoPIPE 8.5x
1. Select a ranges which has user defined allowables
2. Select the Modify/Pressure & Temperature dialog
3. Set the allowable status to User, but do not update the allowables. Note that the Apply Blues Changes field should be enabled prior to selecting OK. Response to the subsequent confirmation dialogs will determine the extent of the changes.
l To update all allowables of a model to the current library values
1. Select all points in the model with Select/All.
2. Select the Modify/Pressure & Temperature dialog and press OK without modifying any fields. Note that the Apply Blues Changes field should be enabled prior to selecting OK.
3. Accept the defaults for any subsequent confirmation dialogs.
Opening of models created prior to AutoPIPE 6.0 will not covert old Tees to the new Tees.
l To convert existing tees to the new tees
1. Select the Select/Tee Points option.
2. Select the Modify/Convert Point to/Tee option.
Note: Models created in version 6.2 are not directly backward compatible with versions of AutoPIPE 6.1 or older. To open a 6.2 model in AutoPIPE 6.1, the 6.2 model must be converted to a 6.1 model. To do this, first open the model in AutoPIPE 6.2 or 6.3 and
select File/Save As/AutoPIPE 6.1 Model . Then open the converted model in AutoPIPE 6.1.
Warning: Models created in pre v8.50 versions CAN be opened in v8.5x but then are automatically saved in v8.50 format. These models are then not directly backward compatible nor cannot be saved to an earlier version of AutoPIPE 6.x. However models can
be saved to AutoPIPE 6.3 format using AutoPIPE v8.60 using the command File/Save As/AutoPIPE 6.3 Model.
3. Opening Plus models in the Standard version or changing edition from Plus to standard can display a Standard vs Plus limit message.
Command Reference
Opening a Recently Used Model
Select File/Open Recent Model to display the Recent Models dialog, which enables the user to open a recently used AutoPIPE model. A maximum of 10 models can be listed in descending order of most to
least recently used. The number of entries is initially set to 4, but it can be reset by the user.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the dialog:
Select model
Command Reference
The Close Command

Selecting File/Close removes the current model from memory without exiting AutoPIPE. If modifications have been made to the current file when File/Close is selected, the user is automatically offered the
chance to save the model. Respond Yes to simultaneously save and close it, or press No close the model without saving any changes, preserving the original file.
Note: To save modifications to a file without overwriting the original, use the Save as command and save the modified file under a new file name.
Command Reference
The Save Command

Selecting File/Save fromi the pull-down menu saves the model in the current working directory.
Note: It is recommended that you use the Save command on a regular basis during each work session to minimize the loss of data and time in case your system crashes for any reason. For Windows users,
quick access to the Save command can be gained by pressing the Save button on the top toolbar.
Command Reference
The Save as Command

Selecting the File/Save As command will call up a dialog enabling the user to rename the current file. This dialog is virtually identical to the New dialog.
Select the drive and directory where the new copy of the model is to be saved, type in a unique File Name (or select an existing filename), then press Save or OK to exit the dialog. AutoPIPE will save the
model without closing the file.
The File Name , which must adhere to Windows naming, will alert the user if an existing filename is specified. A Yes response will overwrite the original file with the modified file. A No response will
return you to the Save As dialog and prompt you for a new filename.
Note: Use the Save as command to save the modified file under a new File Name if you want to save modifications to a file but do not wish to overwrite the original.
Warning: In general, models created in newer versions of AutoPIPE are not backward compatible with older versions of AutoPIPE. Opening a model that was created in a newer version of AutoPIPE in
an older version of AutoPIPE, without first converting it to that specific version, may yield incorrect results. On the other hand, models created in previous versions CAN be opened in newer versions of
AutoPIPE since AutoPIPE automatically converts the model data to the newer format. Recent versions of AutoPIPE include the ability to convert the model data to a specific earlier versions of
AutoPIPE, e.g. v9.2, v9.1, v9.0, v8.9, v.8.6, and v6.3 models are compatible and can be opened in either version.
You can also save a AutoPIPE Batch (*.ntl) file version or file versions compatible with older versions of AutoPIPE by following the procedure below:
1. Select File/Save As. The Save As dialog is displayed.
2. From the dialog, open the Save as Type selection list, and choose from the following file types:
¡ AutoPIPE Database (DAT)
¡ AutoPIPE Batch (NTL)
¡ AutoPIPE 9.3 Model (DAT)
3. Name the file in the File name field; and, optionally, select the desired drive and directory if different from the current.
4. Press Save to apply the changes.
Exporting an AutoPIPE Batch file

1. To generate an NTL version of the current system, select File/Save As/AutoPIPE Batch (*ntl).
2. When the Save As dialog appears, select the drive and directory where this file should be stored, then type a name in the "File Name" field. The NTL extension will be added automatically.
See Also:
Importing an AutoPIPE Batch File
Batch card format

Command Reference
Generating an AutoPIPE v9.4 Model DAT file
1. To generate a version 9.4 of the current system, select File/Save As/AutoPIPE 9.4 Model (*.dat).
2. When the Save As dialog appears, select the drive and directory where this file should be stored, then type a name in the "File Name" field. The DAT extension will be added automatically.
3. The default model name will be the current model name with "_V94" appended to it. For example, if the current v9.4 or later model name is WALKTHRU, then the default model name in the File name field of the Save As dialog will be WALKTHRU_V94.
4. Pressing Save in the Save As dialog causes the Confirm dialog below to be displayed. The Confirm dialog message warns the user about possible model data changes during the conversion process and to allow the user to abort the process if needed. When exporting a
model which has unsaved changes, the model will be automatically saved before generating the 9.4 model.
Pressing No or Cancel in the Confirm dialog terminates the entire Save As process. Pressing Yes in the dialog causes the process to continue. When the process is completed the Confirm dialog below is
displayed. The warning messages in the <ModelName>.MSG file are designed to provide information to the user about the specific changes that the program made to the model during the conversion
process.
Pressing No or Cancel in the Confirm dialog above instructs the program not to display the message file (*.msg). Pressing Yes in the dialog instructs the program to display the message file (*.msg). A
list of all the possible warning messages is shown below. The warning messages are intended to inform the user about changes in the model that occur when saving to v9.4. Note that warnings will not be
provided for minor changes to the graphics and post-processing options that are not supported in v9.4.
* * * * Save As AutoPIPE 9.4 Model Message File * * * *
Model name: XXXXXXXX
W2183-32 Reset piping code from JSME PPC 2008 to JSME PPC 2005.
W2183-33 Reset material library to AUTOJSME.
W2183-34 Fluid density factor has been removed from static & modal analysis set(s).
W2183-35 Pipe tags removed.
W2183-36 Support attachment ID removed.
W2183-37 Buoyancy is applied to all segments in the model.
W2183-38 Reset piping code from ISO 14692 to BS 7159.
W2183-39 Hoop allowable will be based on f instead of min(f, fcr).
W2183-40 Buried pipe options, soil overburden and seismic wave data removed.
*** AutoPIPE 9.4 DAT file creation complete ***
Number of warnings = XX
After the "File/Save As/AutoPIPE 9.4 model (*.dat)" process is completed, the program resets the current path back to the original path before the "File/Save As/AutoPIPE 9.4 model (*.dat)" command
was executed. Hence, the current model in v9.5 will be saved to the expected current folder and not to the folder that the v9.4 model was saved.
Note: The default path for the Open and Save As dialogs will use the default path selected during the File/Save As/AutoPIPE 9.4 model (*.dat) operation. This is a known limitation for these system
dialogs, which manages the default path from information stored in the computer's registry.
Conversion Rules
In general, model data that are related to a feature that is not supported will be removed from the model database during conversion. Also, if an option is not supported, then the option will be reset to one
that is supported. For some features, part of the model data will be used. The following rules below will be applied when converting a v9.5 model to a v9.4 model. Once data in the v9.5 model is deleted
during the conversion process to a v9.4 model, it will not be recoverable even when the v9.4 model is opened in v9.5 or later again.
n JSME 2008 - The JSME 2008 is new code in v9.5. When saving the 9.5 model to 9.4, the requirements below will be applied to models created under the JSME piping code:
¡ Reset JSME S NC1-2008 CLASS 2 to JSME 2005
¡ Reset material library to AUTOJSME
¡ Reset Results Model default options to JSME 2005 (especially apply modulus ratio will be unchecked)
n ISO 14692 - ISO 14692 is new code in v9.5. When saving the 9.5 model to 9.4, the requirements below will be applied to models created under the ISO 14692 piping code:
¡ Reset ISO 14692 piping code to BS 7159 piping code.
¡ Reset Code year to 1989
¡ Reset Component library to AUTOGRPP
¡ Reset Material library to AUTOGRPM
¡ Initialized Design strain field used in BS7159 to its default value 1.0
¡ Qualified Stress, Biaxial Ratio, Qualified Component are removed from bends, tees and joint Type & User SIF.
¡ Biaxial Type is removed from bends.
n Hoop allowable - Hoop allowable in v9.4 will be based on “f” instead of “min(f, fcr)”.
n Support attachment ID - Support attachment ID will be removed.
n Pipe tag - Pipe identifier tag will be removed.
n Apply Buoyancy to segment - Apply buoyancy to segment flag will be removed.
n Load combination in flange analysis - Reset internal IDs of special load combinations (Max Force, Max Moment and Max Force and Moment) used in flange analysis.
n Fluid density factor - Fluid density factor will be removed from analysis sets.
n Soil overburden - Buried pipe options, soil overburden and seismic wave loads data will be removed.
n Combination file - Combination file will not be converted to 9.4 and all combination will be reset to defaults for 9.4 models. Number of combinations will be reset to 250 for 9.4 models.
Command Reference

process.
W2183-1: Reset piping code from SNIP 2.05.06-85 to B31.4 Liquid Trans,2006
W2183-2: Reset piping properties long weld. & circ weld to zero.
W2183-3: Reset Kh factor for Press/Temp to zero.
W2183-4: Removed extra information associated with the Flange.
W2183-5: Applied thermal bowing to all segments in the model.
W2183-6: Reset piping code from B31.3 2004 to B31.3 2006
W2183-7: Reset material library from B313-04 to B313-06
W2183-10: Removed "Stress Range factor"/"Range reduction factor" from pipes.
W2183-11: Flange tags removed.
W2183-12: Valve tags removed.
W2183-13: Cladding data (material, density & thickness) removed from pipes.
W2183-14: Line class data removed from pipes.
W2183-15: User Circumferential Weld factor reset to 1.0
W2183-16: User Circumferential Weld "W" factor reset to 1.0
W2183-18: Reset piping code from B31.8 Offshore 2010 to B31.8 Offshore 2007
W2183-19: Reset piping code from EN13480 2010 to EN13480 2002
W2183-20: Reset material library from EURO2009 to EUROMAT
W2183-21: Reset material library from EURO2002 to EUROMAT
W2183-22: Removed manufacturer allowable multiplier data.
W2183-23: Removed soil parameters, virtual anchor and SNIP soil data.
W2183-24: Removed load factors data.
W2183-25: Reset component library to AUTOB314.
W2183-26: Reset material library to AUTOPIPE.
W2183-27: Flange bolt/nut weight factor has been removed.
W2183-28: Removed all rotating equipments that were using reference points.
W2183-29: Reset piping code from B31.3-2010 to B31.1-2008
W2183-31: Reset result option Set Sus/Occ SIF=0.75i to Unchecked
After the "File/Save As/AutoPIPE 9.3 model (*.dat)" process is completed, the program resets the current path back to the original path before "File/Save As/AutoPIPE 9.3 model (*.dat)" command was
executed. Hence, the current model in v9.3 will be saved to the expected current folder and not to the folder that the v9.3 model was saved.
Conversion Rules
In general, model data that is related to a feature that is not supported will be removed from the model database during conversion. Also, if an option is not supported, then the option will be reset to one
n Flange Data - All the data related to flange analysis will be deleted.
n Pipe Insulation Cladding Data - Cladding density, weight, thickness and material will be removed from pipes.
n Pipe Line Class - Line class string will be removed from pipes.
n Soil Data - Soil parameters and virtual anchors will be removed from model.
n Manufacturer multiplier - Manufacturer allowable multiplier data will be removed.
n Fatigue range reduction factor - Fatigue range reduction factor will be removed from pipes for B31.1 and B31.3 and the default value will be reset which is applied to the whole model.
n Thermal Bowing by Segment - The option "Apply thermal bowing by segment" will be removed and thermal bowing will be applied to all segments.
n Piping Code Year and Library Updates - New code years introduced in v9.4 will be changed to earlier codes supported by v9.3. The library files will be updated accordingly. Some code year
updates are:
¡ Russian SNIP 2.05.06-85 piping code will be reset to B31.4 Liquid Trans, code year 2006
¡ B31.3 - 2004 will be reset to B31.3 - 2006
¡ B31.8 offshore - 2010 will be reset to B31.8 offshore - 2007
¡ EN13480 2010 will be reset to EN13480 2002
n Flange bolt/nut weight factor - Flange bolt/nut weight factor will be removed.
n Weld Factors - Circum. weld w factor for B31.3-2008 and B31.1-2009 codes will be reset.
n Flange and Valve Tags - Flange and valve tags will be removed.
n Display flanged flexible joint - Option to display flanged flexible joint will be removed.
n Rotating equipment - All rotating equipment that uses reference points will be deleted.
Notes:
1. The default path for the Open and Save As dialogs will use the default path selected during "File/Save As/AutoPIPE 9.3 model (*.dat)" operation. This is a known limitation for these system dialogs
which manages the default path from information stored in the computer’s registry.
2. The v9.4 CMB file will not be converted to v9.3 CMB file but the v9.4 CMB file is compatible with v9.3, v9.2, and v9.1, but NOT compatible with v9.0 and older.
Command Reference

process.
W699-171: Changed double channel section type from standard to non-standard
W699-172: Changed double angle section type from standard to non-standard
W699-174: Changed shape type of double channel FR to double channel DC
W699-178: Reset material library from B313-08 to AUTOB313
W699-182: Removed Ratchet C4 values
W699-183: Removed hydrotest load data
W699-184: Removed suppress low temperature warning settings
W699-185: Removed user defined fatigue curve data
W699-186: Reduced Beam ID length to 4 characters
W699-187: Reset flange to bend distance
W699-188: Removed extra indices from user joint type and tee points
W699-189: Reset material library from B313-06 to AUTOB313
W699-190: Converted offset beam(s) to standard beam(s)
W699-191: Removed GUIDs for components and model
W699-192: Removed reference to parent beam from a split beam
W699-193: Removed show hanger report flag
W699-194: Changed shape type of double angle DS to double angle DL
W699-195: Changed fluid transient: fluid type GAS to STEAM
Conversion Rules
In general, model data that is related to a feature that is not supported will be removed from the model database during conversion. Also, if an option is not supported, then the option will be reset to one
n Beam Name - Beams having a name greater than 4 characters will be seat to 4 characters. To avoid duplicate names, new names may be generated.
n GUIDs - GUID information for components and the model will be removed.
n Ignore Load Case Extra Data Type - The ignore load case extra data type was changed and would get updated. No message will be shown for this change.
n Double Angle and Double Channel Section -
n For all channels, spacing value will be lost
n Double Channel FR will be converted to Double Channel DC
n Double Angle (Shor Leg) will be converted to Double Angle (Long Leg)
n Spacing field for Double Angle will be updated
n Standard Double Angle and Double Channel sections will be converted to NS
n Fatigue Curves and Environmental Factor - Fatigue curves will be removed for ASME NB.
n Hydrotest for ASME Nuclear Piping Codes - Hydrotest would be turned off for ASME Nuclear piping codes.
n Suppress Low Temp Warnings - Extrapolated thermal expansion related data will be removed from pipe properties.
n Indices User Joint Type and Other Tee - Extra indices from user joint and other tee points will be removed.
n Reset Flange to Bend Distance - The flange to bend distance will be set according to AutoPIPE v9.2
n Piping Code Year and Library Updates - New code years introduced for B31.1 and B31.3 will be changed to the earlier codes supported by v9.2. The library files will be updated accordingly.
n Offset Beams - Beams defined as offset beams will be converted to standard beams and will no longer be drawn as a dotted line.
n Parent Beam Pointer in Split Beams - After splitting a beam, the beam nodes retain a reference to the parent beam in v9.3. This reference will be removed.
n Show Hanger Report Flag - The flag for showing the hanger report is not supported in v9.2. It will be removed.
n Transient Fluids (GAS) - Gas would be changed to STEAM for transient fluid in water hammer data.
Notes:
2. The v9.3 CMB file will not be converted to v9.2 CMB file but the v9.3 CMB file is compatible with v9.2, and v9.1, but NOT compatible with v9.0 and older.
Command Reference

1. To generate an version 9.1 of the current system, select File/Save As/AutoPIPE 9.1 Model (*.dat).
Pressing No or Cancel in the Confirm dialog terminates the entire Save As process. Pressing Yes in the dialog causes the process to continue. When the process is completed with no warnings, the Note
dialog below is displayed.
If there are warning messages, then the Confirm dialog below is displayed instead. The warning messages in the MSG file are designed to provide information to the user about the specific changes that
the program made to the model during the conversion process.
W699-160 Removed multiple support response spectrum cases
W699-161 Reduced number of response spectrum cases to 10
W699-162 Updated load case IDs in ignore flags for load cases
W699-163 Removed last saved by username from model
W699-164 Changed piping code edition to 2001
W699-165 Changed material library to ASME2000
W699-166 Removed revision numbers of dynamic load cases
W699-167 Removed description numbers from dynamic load cases
W699-169 Changed material library to B311-92
Conversion Rules
The following rules below will be applied when converting a v9.2 model to a v9.1 model. Once data in the v9.2 model is deleted during the conversion process to a v9.1 model, it will not be recoverable
even when the v9.1 model is opened in v9.2 or later again.
n Response Spectrum - Following changes will be made to response spectrum
n Multiple Support Response Spectrum - All MSRS cases will be removed
n Number of Cases: Uniform Support cases beyond 10 will also be removed
n Last Saved By Username - The last saved by username field will be cleared
n Dynamic Load Cases - Following information will be removed from all dynamic load cases (Response Spectrum, Force Spectrum, Harmonic, Time History)
n Revision Numbers: Internal revision number to track updated case
n Description: 40 character description of load case
n Piping Code and Years - The following piping codes defined in v9.1 will get changed when the model is saved in v9.0 or earlier:
9.2 9.1
Piping Code Year Library Piping Code Year Library
ASME NC/ND 2001 + 2003 ASME2004 ASME NC/ND 2001 ASME2000
addenda
ASME 1986 + 1988 ASME1986 ASME 1986 + 1988 ASME1986
NB/NC/ND addenda / 1989 NB/NC/ND addenda
ASME B31.1 1986 B311-86 ASME B31.1 1992 B311-92
ASME B31.8 2007 AUTOB318 ASME B31.8 2003 AUTOB318
ASME B31.8 2007 AUTOB318 ASME B31.8 2003 AUTOB318
Offshore Offshore
n User-Defined SIFs - The following user-defined SIFs were added in v9.2. When saving to v9.1 these SIFs will be calculated automatically:
Piping Code SIFs

ASME NB B2', B2r', B2b', Ratchet C4
ASME NC/ND B2', B2r', B2b', C2, C2r, C2b
Notes:
2. The v9.2 CMB file will not be converted to v9.1 CMB file but the v9.2 CMB file is compatible with v9.1 but NOT compatible with v9.0 and older.
Command Reference

list of all the possible warning messages is shown below. The warning messages are intended for changes that affect the analysis results in v9.0. Note that warnings will not be provided for minor changes
to the graphics and post-processing options that are not supported in v9.0.
W699-121 Reset JSME S NC1-2005 CLASS 2 to W699-MITI 501 - CLASS 3 (1980)
W699-122 Reset material library to AUTOMITI
W699-123 Reset input & output units to SI
W699-124 Reset Results Model default options to MITI 501 - CLASS 3 (1980)
W699-125 - Removed concave option from Flange data
W699-126 - Removed concave option from Valve data
W699-127 - Removed concave option from Joint Type & User SIF data
W699-128 Removed ignore flags for load cases
W699-129 Removed line number information from segments
W699-130 Removed design pressure/temperature data from all points
W699-131 Removed valve mid points and transformed valve actuators
W699-132 Removed gross discontinuity from points
W699-133 Removed out of roundness from points
W699-134 Removed static analysis set(s)
W699-135 Reduced active static cases for static analysis set
W699-136 Removed concentrated force(s) due to unavailable load case
W699-137 Removed imposed displacement(s) due to unavailable load case
W699-138 Removed cut short(s) due to unavailable load case
W699-139 Reduced number of operating cases to 20
Conversion Rules
n Valve Actuator and Mid-Point - The valve actuator and mid-point were introduced in v9.1. We try to transform data into v9.0 format by creating two valves and attaching a beam with weight to
represent the actuator. The following two cases describe what occurs with the Auto Option Enabled or Disabled:
n Auto Option Enabled - This valve represents the valve of v9.0. The valve mid-point will be removed if the Auto flag is turned on. The valve will appear as a single valve. There will be no
additional weight or beam attached to the valve. Note: Any anchor, support or xtra data placed on the mid-point will be removed. And any support connected to the mid-point will get
connected to ground
n Auto Option Disabled - Having the Auto option disabled indicates the use of some of the new functionality. Once the file has been saved as v9.0 and is then read back into v9.1, there will be
differences in the number of valves.
The valve will be split into two, back-to-back valves. The mid-point becomes the far point of the first valve and the near point of the second valve. The name of the point is changed (alphanumeric only).
The new name is generated to avoid duplicating names. Both valves will have the same properties (rating, weight, joint end type, etc.) as the original valve. Any anchor, support or xtra data placed at
the mid-point will stay. And supports connected to the mid-point will not be effected.
A rigid beam is created if the valve actuator offsets are non-zero. The rigid beam represents the valve actuator. The beam is actually already present in the model, it just becomes visible. A weight is
added to the driver point if the actuator weight was defined on the valve. The weight has no offsets and the value of the weight is the same as the actuator weight
n Bend Flexibility Factor - The Bend Flexibility Factor is moved from the Bend Point dialog to the Joint Type & User SIF dialog.
n Segment - Line Number - Line number information is defined in the model from scratch or imported from a PXD file that gets generated during an AutoPlant import. Line numbers do not get
written out to the PXD. If an older PXD is present, it can be used with v9.0. The PXD will not be updated with new line number information; it may be old or out of sync with the model.
Otherwise, the text information is lost.
n Analysis Set - Older versions only allow one analysis set. Only the first static analysis set is kept. The name/number of the analysis set is not retained. And the result files cannot be used. If there
is a specific set that you would like to keep, all other analysis sets should be deleted before saving as v9.0.
n Piping Code and Years - The following piping codes defined in v9.1 will get changed when the model is saved in v9.0 or earlier:
9.1 9.0
Piping Code Year Piping Code Library
B31.1 Power 2007 B31.1 a-Power B311-05
NB All ASME NC 2004 AUTOASME
NC/ND 1995-2001 ASME NC 2004 AUTOASME
NC/ND 1983-1994 ASME NC 2004/ASME ASME1992
ND 2004
NC/ND 1972-1982 ASME NC 81W/ASME ASME1986
ND 82S
JSME PPC All MITI 3 AUTOMITI
n Design Pressure/Temperature - Design pressure/temperature data is removed.
n Ignore Load Cases - Load cases will be removed.
n Stress Summary - The release version should not have stress summary information in the model, so it would not need to be cleared out. The summary report is still deleted and will not be
accessible if and when the model is opened in v9.1.
n Gross Discontinuity - Gross discontinuity objects will be deleted where defined on piping points.
n Out of Roundness - Out of roundness objects will be deleted where defined on piping points.
n Joint End Types - The following 3 schemes are defined for joint end types:
1. AutoPIPE v9.0 (and before) - All Piping Codes and AutoPIPE v9.1 - Non ASME Nuclear
2. AutoPIPE v9.1 ASME NB Nuclear
3. AutoPIPE v9.1 ASME NC/ND Nuclear
The following table shows how the Joint End Types will be changed:
JOINT END TYPE MAPPINGS

Number Save as 9.0 or NON ASME v9.1 ASME NB v9.1 ASME NC,ND v9.1
1 User-Defined None None
2 User-Defined User-Defined User-Defined
3 Butt Weld As Welded Butt Weld As Welded Butt Weld

4 Double-Welded Slip-On Socket/Fillet Weld Socket/Fillet Weld
5 Socket or Fillet Weld Socket/Fillet Weld Socket/Fillet Weld
6 Lap Joint As-Welded Butt Weld As-Welded Butt Weld
7 Threaded Joint As-Welded Butt Weld Threaded Joints
8 Weld Neck As-Welded Butt Weld As-Welded Butt Weld
As-Welded Butt Weld NB 4250 ANSI B16.25 30o Tapered
9 Butt Weld Transition Transition Transition
10 Socket or Fillet Weld (no undercut) Socket/Fillet Weld Socket/Fillet Weld
11 Butt Weld Flush Butt Weld Flush Butt Weld
ANSI B16.25 30o Tapered
12 Butt Weld Transition Flush Butt Weld NB 4250 Transition Transition
13 Butt Weld Transition As-Welded Butt Weld 1:3 Transition Transition
14 Butt Weld Transition Flush Butt Weld 1:3 Transition Transition
n Number of Load Cases -Load case indices need to be updated in the following places:
n The number of operating cases must be less than or equal to 20. Set it to 20 if it exceeds.
n Analysis Set - Only convert the load cases for the first set of analysis. Other analysis sets will be discarded. Cases that are not present in the new load cases are deactivated.
n Xtra Data on Piping Points and Beam Nodes - The following xtra data needs to be updated or removed. If the load case specified is valid for v9.0 then we only update the load case index.
Otherwise the xtra data object is removed:
n Concentrated force/moment
n Imposed displacement
n Linear loads
n Cutshort
Note: Cut short cannot be inserted on beam node.
n Thermal Bowing Data - Both load cases defined in the thermal bowing data are converted. If a case is invalid for the older version, it will be removed.
n Wave Load Data - Load cases defined in the wave load data are converted. If a case is invalid for the older version, it will be removed.
n MITI Seismic Load Data - Load case defined in the MIT I Seismic Load data are converted. If a case is invalid for the older version, it will be removed.
Notes:
2. The v9.1 CMB file will not be converted to v9.0 CMB file but the v9.1 CMB file is compatible with v9.0 but NOT compatible with v6.3.
Command Reference

i
4. Pressing Save in the Save As dialog causes the Confirm dialog below to be displayed. The Confirm dialog message warns the user about possible model data changes during the conversion process and to allow the user to abort the process if needed.
5. When exporting a model which has unsaved changes, the model will be automatically saved before generating the 8.9 model.
Note: Warnings will not be provided for changes to the graphics that are not supported in v8.9 as listed below.
- User-defined scaling of supports, anchors, and other selected symbols
- Visibility of vertical direction supports on a vertical pipe
- Different graphical representations for spring hangers, constant hangers, and V-stops
*** Warning: Removed sustain load margin option
*** Warning: Removed numeric option for default point name format
*** Warning: Reset B31.1a-2005 to B31.1-2004
*** Warning: Reset material library from B311-04 to AUTOB311
*** Warning: Reset material library from B311-05 to AUTOB311
*** Warning: Reset model description to 10 lines of 40 characters
*** Warning: Removed auto-update of point names in rotating equipment data
*** Warning: Removed wind load option for seismic dampers
*** Warning: Removed auto-update of connect point name for support data
*** Warning: Removed auto-update of point names in fluid transient data
*** Warning: Removed auto-update of point names in steam relief data
*** Warning: Some beam section and material names may not be supported in "autofram.lib"
l The default path for the Open and Save As dialogs will use the default path selected during "File/Save As/AutoPIPE 8.9 model (*.dat)" operation. This is a known limitation for these system
dialogs which manages the default path from information stored in the computer’s registry.
l The v9.0 CMB file will not be converted to v8.9 CMB file but the v9.0 CMB file is compatible with v8.9 but NOT compatible with v6.3.
Conversion Rules
n If the model description exceeds 10 lines with maximum of 40 characters per line, the remaining text will be deleted.
Command Reference

Note: Warnings will not be provided for changes to the graphics that are not supported in v8.6 as listed below.
- User-defined scaling of supports, anchors, and other selected symbols
- Visibility of vertical direction supports on a vertical pipe
- Different graphical representations for spring hangers, constant hangers, and V-stops
*** Warning: Removed thermal bowing data
*** Warning: Removed user circumferential weld factor for B31.3
*** Warning: Removed reference points
*** Warning: Removed Stress Isometric reference items
*** Warning: Removed Stress Isometric annotations
*** Warning: Removed 1st & 2nd Approver names; Reset Preparer & Checker names
*** Warning: Removed anchor tag numbers
*** Warning: Removed support tag numbers
*** Warning: Removed support symbols for spring, constant, and v-stop supports
*** Warning: Converted BWT to BW with taper at flanges
*** Warning: Converted BWT to BW with taper at valves
*** Warning: Converted SWN to SW at flanges
*** Warning: Converted SWN to SW at valves
*** Warning: Reset all joint end types to User-defined
*** Warning: Reset B31.3-2004 to B31.3-2002
*** Warning: Removed B31.3-2004 Appendix P option
*** Warning: Removed B31.3-2004 Code Case 178 option
*** Warning: Disabled option to use alternate allowable occasional stress
*** Warning: Disabled option to set Sustained & Occasional SIF to 0.75i
*** Warning: Enabled default code combinations to be always automatic
*** Warning: Enabled default non-code combinations to be always automatic
*** Warning: Removed Long weld E & W factors from all pipe IDs for B31.3-2004
l The v9.0 CMB file will not be converted to v8.6 CMB file but the v9.0 CMB file is compatible with v8.6 but NOT compatible with v6.3.
Conversion Rules
n Certain features like StressISO, thermal bowing, B31.3 appendix P and circumferential weld reduction factor, B31.3 code case 178 will be removed as noted in the warning messages above.
n Other features like Joint end types will be converted for flanges and valves will be converted and User joint types will be reset to user defined as noted in the warning messages above.
n If the "Prepare by" or "Checked by" name exceeds 13 characters, they will be truncated to 13 characters.
Command Reference

Note: When converting a v9.0 model to a v6.3 model, the program should satisfy the following requirements:
- Convert the v9.0 model to a v8.6 model as an internal intermediate step. Then convert the intermediate v8.6 model to a v6.3 model
- Provide warning messages of model changes after conversion process is completed including changes from v9.0 to v8.6 and as well as changes from v8.6 to v6.3.
Note: Additional warning messages for saving to v8.6 will be shown also
*** Warning: Reset piping code from CSA-Z662 Offshore to CSA-Z662 Oil & Gas
*** Warning: Reset piping code from B31.4 Offshore to B31.4 Liquid Trans
*** Warning: Reset piping code from B31.8 Offshore to B31.8 Gas Trans & Dist
*** Warning: Removed invalid load cases from static analysis
*** Warning: Reset invalid load cases to gravity case for initial states
*** Warning: Reset number of wind load cases to maximum of 3
*** Warning: Reset number of static earthquake load cases to maximum of 3
*** Warning: Reset number of response spectrum load cases to maximum of 10
*** Warning: Reset number of harmonic load cases to maximum of 3
*** Warning: Reset number of force spectrum load cases to maximum of 3
*** Warning: Reset number of time history load cases to maximum of 3
*** Warning: Reset static analysis pressure stiffening case to None
*** Warning: Reset hot modulus case used in all analyses to None
*** Warning: Reset pressure load case in hydrotest load to P1
*** Warning: Reset temperature load case in hydrotest load to None
*** Warning: Removed invalid load cases from Force & Moment data
*** Warning: Removed invalid load cases from Imposed Displacement data
*** Warning: Removed invalid load cases from Distributed Load data
*** Warning: Removed invalid load cases from Cut Short data
*** Warning: Removed invalid load cases from Wave Load data
*** Warning: Removed invalid load cases from MITI seismic level data
*** Warning: Reset number of operating load cases to maximum of 3
l The v9.0 CMB file will not be converted to v6.3 CMB file and the v9.0 CMB file is NOT compatible with v6.3.
Conversion Rules
l In general, load cases that are not supported in v6.3 will be deleted from the v9.0 model during the conversion process. Specifically, when the number of cases for each load type in the v9.0 model
exceeds the limits listed below for v6.3, then the number will be reset to the limits for v6.3 and all related load data for the cases greater than the v6.3 limit will be deleted. This includes load cases
assigned to concentrated forces, imposed support displacements, cut shorts, distributed loads and wave loads
Load Cases AutoPIPE 6.3
Gravity 1
Hydrotest 1
Thermal 3
Pressure 3
Static Earthquake 3
Wind 3
User 3
Response Spectrum 10
Harmonic 3
Seismic Anchor Movement 3
Force Spectrum 3
Time History 3
l For linear static analysis, load cases that are not supported in v6.3 will be deleted from the static analysis data.
l For non-linear static analysis, load cases that are not supported in v6.3 will be deleted from the load sequence data. Additionally, load cases assigned to the initial states that are not supported in
v6.3 will be replaced by gravity as the initial state.
l If the piping code option is set to "B31.4 Offshore" in the v9.0 model, then it will be reset to "B31.4 Liquid Trans." in the v6.3 model.
l If the piping code option is set to "B31.8 Offshore" in the v9.0 model, then it will be reset to "B31.8 Gas Trans. & Dist." in the v6.3 model.
l If the piping code option is set to "CSA-Z662 Offshore" in the v9.0 model, then it will be reset to "CSA-Z662" in the v6.3 model.
l If the piping code option is set to "ASME B31.1-1992 Power Piping" in the v9.0 model, then it will be reset to "ASME B31.1 Power Piping" in the v6.3 model.
l Since the piping code option "ASME NC-1992" in the v9.0 model is not support in v6.3, it will be reset to "ASME NC Div 1, Class 2" in the v6.3 model. Similarly, "ASME ND-1992" in the v9.0
model will be reset to "ASME ND Div 1, Class 3" in the v6.3 model.
l The view vector in the v9.0 model will be reset to the default view vector in the v6.3 model.
l The anchor and support scale factors for line view mode in the v9.0 model will be reset to 1.0 in the v6.3 model.
l If the pressure stiffening case used in the static analysis (Static Load Cases dialog) in the v9.0 model is not supported in v6.3, it will be reset to "0" in the v6.3 model
l If the hot modulus case used in all analyses (Edit Model Options dialog) in the v9.0 model is not supported in v6.3, it will be reset to "0" in the v6.3 model.
l If the pressure load case used in the hydrotest load (Hydrotest dialog) in the v9.0 model is not supported in v6.3, it will be reset to "1" in the v6.3 model.
l If the temperature load case used in the hydrotest load (Hydrotest dialog) in the v9.0 model is not supported in v6.3, it will be reset to "0" in the v6.3 model.
l If a load case specified in the Seismic Level dialog (piping code = MITI-3) in the v9.0 model is not supported in v6.3, it will be reset to "NONE" in the v6.3 model.
l Since the default load case for the initial state of the default occasional load cases in the v9.0 model is not supported in v6.3, it will be deleted in the v6.3 model.
l Since the number of active thermal cases used in generating the default thermal range combinations in the v9.0 model is not supported in v6.3, it will be deleted in the v6.3 model.
l Since the pressure before temperature option for the default load sequences in the v9.0 model is not supported in v6.3, it will be deleted in the v6.3 model.
l Since the branch connection tee type in v9.0 is not supported in v6.3, all branch connection tees will be converted to "Other" tee type in the v6.3 model. The single tee SIF in the v6.3 model will be
set to the larger of the branch and header SIF from v9.0 and the B1 and B2 values will then be automatically calculated in the v6.3 model.
l Since the user B1 and B2 stress indices in a v9.0 model is not supported in v6.3, these values and corresponding Override options will be deleted from the v6.3 model.
l Since the branch and run moment summation procedure in section NB-3683.1(d) of the ASME BP&V piping code in v9.0 is not supported in v6.3, this option will be deleted from the v6.3 model.
l The piping code option "ASME NC-2004" in the v9.0 model is not supported in v6.3, it will be reset to "ASME NC Div 1, Class 2" (2001 edition) in the v6.3 model. Similarly, "ASME ND-
2004" (2001 edition) in the v9.0 model will be reset to "ASME ND Div 1, Class 3" in the v6.3 model. The default material library will be reset to "ASME2000.LIB".
Command Reference
Save Screen Plot

The File /Save Screen Plot command
t displays a windows "Save As" dialog. Select either Joint Photographic Experts Group (*.JPEG) , Portable Network Graphics (*.PNG), Windows Bitmap (*.bmp)
(Default setting) or Targa (*.TGA) graphics file format.
Enter a filename (no extension) and the current plot window will be saved to the selected format.
Portable Network Graphics file format (*.PNG) is supported by MS Word and most graphics programs and is a compressed file format. The windows bitmap (*.bmp) file format is more common and is
also supported by most programs but can be larger in file size.
PNG is an extensible file format for the lossless, portable, well-compressed storage of raster images. PNG provides a patent-free replacement for GIF and can also replace many common uses of TIFF.
Indexed-color, grayscale, and truecolor images are supported, plus an optional alpha channel for transparency. Sample depths range from 1 to 16 bits per component (up to 48bit images for RGB, or 64bit
for RGBA).
The JPEG format uses a method of compression that reduces image file size by selectively reducing the amount of detail contained in the image and by transforming the image data into a format that is
better suited for compression. Images with fewer details compress extremely well, while pictures with a high degree of random detail do not compress as well, or suffer some degree of image degradation.
The relative amount of detail removed can be specified in most applications. At the default value of 75, relatively little picture degradation will take place, but a significant amount of compression will be
obtained. At lower values you will experience still better compression, but with a marked loss of image quality. JPEG images are either true color or grayscale (256 shades of gray). The default file
extension for JPEG files is ".JPG".
The Truevision Targa format was originally developed by Truevision Inc. for use with their line of graphic display cards. The Targa format is used by several high-end paint and CAD programs. Color
resolutions range from 256 color, 32768 (16-bit) color, 24-bit true color and 32-bit true color formats. The 32-bit Targa format contains 24 bits of color data as well as 8 bits of transparency (overlay)
data. Targa images exist in both compressed and uncompressed formats. The default file extension for Targa files is ".TGA".
Note:
1. Both BMP and PNG file formats are saved as 24 pixel depth and 16 million colors.
2. For quad and double view-ports only the current view-port is saved.
3. The toolbar button allows
t the results plot e.g. for displaced shape, code stress or modal displaced shape to be saved to a JPG, BMP, TGA, or PNG file.
4. File/Save Screen Plot will reset any result plot.
Generating a Stress Isometric DXF, DWG, or DGN file

DXF & DWG are file formats supported by AutoCAD and Microstation, DGN is a file format supported by Microstation. and all three are recognized by a wide variety of other engineering and CAD
software.
To create a stress isometric of the model into DXF or DWG format:
1. Select File/Save Stress Isometric
2. When the Save Stress Isometric dialog appears, select the drive, directory where this file should be stored, and whether it should be saved as a DXF, DWG, or DGN file type, then type a name in the "File
name" field.
3. Accepting the dialog displays the Stress Isometric Options dialog
4. AutoPIPE performs a consistency check, then generates the file. If any or warnings occurred during the transfer, these are displayed so they may be reviewed by the user.
Note:
1. The complete model is saved to the PCF file unless a) Segments are hidden b) Use Selected Range Option
2. Only the pipe points displayed within the current model are saved to the PCF and resulting DXF, DWG, and DGN files since ISOGEN does not support beam points.
Note:
1. If the path and filename to the Isogen option file (*.opl) is not found as defined in the stressiso.ini file then the following error message will be displayed and a valid options file will need to be selected
on the Isogen Options dialog.
If click ok to the Stress isometric options dialog then the following error message is shown and the stress isometric will be not be created.
AutoCAD/DXF related topics
See Also :
Generating a Stress Isometric
Generating a ISOGEN PCF file

Command Reference
Inserting a Model
Select File/Insert Model from the pull-down menu to insert AutoPIPE models and other input file types into AutoPIPE.
The following files can inserted into AutoPIPE:
l AutoPIPE Model (*.dat)
l Model From STAAD Using PipeLink (*.pipelink)
Command Reference
Inserting Other AutoPIPE Models

An existing AutoPIPE model can be inserted into the current model, allowing you to quickly add common configurations of components. The procedure for inserting and placing an AutoPIPE drawing is
provided below
1. Open the parent model.
2. The model can be inserted with respect to an existing point in the current model. If you want the model to attach to an existing point, select it now.
3. Select File/Insert Model/AutoPIPE Model (*.dat).
4. The Insert Model dialog is displayed. Select the drive and directory containing the model to be inserted, highlight it in the file list, then press OK.
5. The model which will be inserted is opened, and the prompt
Select base point
is displayed. Specify the base point by selecting it with your mouse, or input the point name in the panel which appears near the command line.
6. A Consistency check is performed, then the Paste dialog is displayed.
7. If you will be attaching the inserted model to a point specified in Step 2, enable the "Connect to selected points" option. Otherwise, disable this option and input the distance the inserted model
should be offset from the point of origin in the existing model. Remember that the base point of the inserted model will be inserted at the point specified in Step 2 (or a specified offset from this
point). Press OK when done.
8. The model is inserted at the location specified.
Note: When inserting a segment into a model as a branch, a welding tee is created by default.
Segment rules apply when using the insert model command, and files may not be inserted at either bends or component start points.
Insert an AutoPIPE Model
Command Reference
Model From STAAD Using PipeLink

With the use of PipeLink, an advanced structural model data exchange, model data can be exchanged between STAAD.Pro and AutoPIPE (for more information on using PipeLink please refer to the
PipeLink Tutorial). PipeLink provides a plug-in interface in STAAD.Pro for the exchange of structural information, e.g. structural geometry, boundary conditions, load information, and displacement
information to an intermediate database file (*.pipelink), which can then be read by AutoPIPE. The process of inserting a model from STAAD.Pro into an existing AutoPIPE model is described below.
1. Open the parent model (*.dat) in AutoPIPE.
2. Select File/Insert Model/Model From STAAD Using PipeLink (*.pipelink).
3. Select the data exchange file (*.pipelink) to be inserted in the AutoPIPE model using the Browse File dialog.
4. The Import File Information dialog is displayed. Press the Revision History button to view the full history of the model in the Revision History dialog.
5. Select the options for importing the data exchange file (*.pipelink) using the Import Options dialog.
6. After selecting the import options, the model will begin importing into AutoPIPE. The progress can be viewed in the Import Progress dialog.
7. Press the "Finish" button to complete the insertion of the model from STAAD using PipeLink.
Notes:
1. Member loads cannot be imported for beams.

2. Only dead loads for beam nodes can be imported, all other loads are ignored.
3. Unsupported beam sections will be imported as Non-Standard and drawn as an I-beam.
4. Only one structural model can be inserted into a model. Inserting a second model will remove the earlier inserted model.
5. When importing beam releases, AutoPIPE is limited to three degrees of freedom, i.e. axial (translation), Y-Y and Z-Z (rotational). Moreover, AutoPIPE cannot handle partial beam releases. Therefore,
any beam releases that do not fall into those degrees of freedom, or are partially released, will be ignored.
PipeLink: Data Exchange Diagram
See Also:
PipeLink Tutorial
Browse File
Import File Information
Revision History
Import Options
Import Progress
Review Support Connections
Delete Structural Model

Command Reference
Importing a Model
Select File/Import from the pull-down menu to import other input file types into AutoPIPE.
The following files can imported into AutoPIPE:
l AutoPLANT (PXF)
l OpenPLANT Modeler (PXF)
l Caesar II Neutral (CII)
l Aveva PDMS (CII)
l Intergraph PDS (N)
l ADLPipe (ADI)
l Smart Plant (PCF)
l CADWorx (PCF)
l SolidWorks (PCF)
l AutoDesk Inventor (PCF)
l CATIA (PCF)
l Autodesk Plant 3D (PCF)
Open an AutoPLANT PXF Model

Command Reference
Importing AutoPLANT/OpenPLANT Modeler (PXF) files into AutoPIPE

1. After preparing your AutoPLANT 97 drawings , select File/Import/AutoPlant (*.pxf) or after exporting PXF file from OpenPLANT Modeler, select File/Import/OpenPLANT Modeler (*.pxf) from the AutoPIPE menu. When the dialog displays, select Autoplant/OPM(*.pxf)as
the file type, then press Open.
2. The General Model Options dialog is displayed. Complete the dialog with appropriate system parameters.
3. The Import AutoPLANT dialog is displayed. This dialog contains rules to apply when converting the drawing. Complete the field values in this dialog. Select from a topic below for more information on the fields:
Importing multiple PXF files
Append segment name to point name
Add anchor at free end
Use rigid pipe for undefined components
Specific gravity of contents
Use material spec map
Use material grade map
Pipe material
Use insulation map
Insulation thickness
Insulation material
Insulation density
Corrosion allowance
Join disconnected pipe
Connectivity tolerance
Pressure-Temperature Operating Cases
4. During import process, the Update AutoPLANT Mapping dialog will come up when missing class, schedule, rating or unit mapping is detected.
5. After completing the Import dialog, the model is imported into the current system. If any or warnings occurred during the transfer, these are displayed so they may be reviewed by the user.
Notes:
1. It should be noted that the Automated System Processing approach can be used with PXF Input files so that AutoPIPE need not be entered manually.
2. Importing a PXF file sets the view direction from the Default Iso view setting is stored in the autopipe.ini file.
3. The original PXF record id for each support in the model database will be maintained when importing the PXF file. If the support is modified, i.e. the type is changed in AutoPIPE, that original record
id is lost. This will help maintain the original support type defined in AutoPLANT. This option can be disabled by changing the setting "RETAIN_SUPPORT" to 0 in the PFXFOUT.MAP file.
See Also:
Preparing an AutoPLANT 97 Model for Import
Conversion limitations
PXF Import Options

Command Reference
Importing a Caesar II Neutral (CII) File

The File/Import/Caesar II Neutral (*.cii) command is a means for opening CII neutral files created from Caesar II models. These drawing must first be prepared in their native program before being imported into
AutoPIPE. The process involves two main steps:
1. Export the model as a CII neutral file in Caesar II.
2. Importing a Caesar II Generated Neutral File
¡ Caesar II uses various types of elements to create a model, whereas AutoPIPE model is built by defining a series of piping points. However, both approaches result in the same model and hence components can be mapped from one to another. Caesar II
neutral files do not contain all the information defined by the user. The missing information cannot be translated into AutoPIPE. In general, all data on the Caesar II main spreadsheet and all auxiliary spreadsheets is translated into AutoPIPE. This includes
all piping geometry (except fiberglass), supports, pressure and temperature loading, forces and moments, displacements etc. Occasional loads (wind, earthquake and dynamic load) cannot be translated and should be redefined in AutoPIPE.
¡ In certain situations, the translator may create extra points next to bends, valves and flexible joints. These points are created to allow multiple elements to connect to a component. The length of adjacent component may be adjusted slightly to make room
for these additional points, however, the overall dimension of the component is not affected and the resulting model is analytically similar as Caesar II model.
¡ Due to limitations in the CII neutral file, it may be necessary to set the insulation density to 1 in metric CII unit files (*.c2u).
¡ It should be noted that the Automated System Processing approach can be used with Caesar II Input files so that AutoPIPE need not be entered manually.
¡ If the imported Caesar model has more than 9999 nodes, nodes 10,000 and higher shall be represented using the following alphanumeric combinations.
¡ A Caesar II Import Flange Settings dialog will be displayed once during the CAESAR import process. This dialog will allow the user to specify the filter criteria to use when searching the flange dimensions library (FlangeDimLib.mdb) for a standard
flange type and flange rating to apply to the imported model. The imported flange components will have the same length and outer diameter as mentioned in the Caesar II neutral file to make it consistent with Caesar II model.
3. Importing a BS7159 model the following transformations rules are followed:
¡ Set longitudinal weld factor = 1.0 in pipe properties dialog
¡ Calculate hoop modulus Eh from Ea*(Eh/Ea) value
¡ Calculate design strain eD from Sc/Ea1 or Sh/Ea1 (where Ea1= Axial modulus for PIPE1, Sc and Sh are cold and hot allowable stresses in CII) which is assumed for both hot and cold design
strains.
¡ Convert Caesar outside diameter to inside diameter and read default laminate type for pipe.
¡ Convert thermal coefficient to thermal expansion e.g. in/in/deg to in/100ft.
¡ A new pipe identifier is created for bends which have a different laminate reference than for upstream pipe.
¡ A new pipe identifier is created for bends which have a different thickness than for the upstream pipe.
¡ Calculate the longitudinal poisson’s ratio v = Vh/a = Eh/Ea * (Ea/Eh*Vh/a) where (Ea/Eh*Vh/a) or Va/h is entered into Caesar. Autopipe poisson's ratio Vh/a defines the strain in the
longitudinal direction caused by stress in the circumferential direction.
Note: AutoPIPE is currently capable of imported Caesar II v5.3 files, and earlier.
Caesar II to AutoPIPE Mapping Files

Command Reference
Importing a Aveva PDMS (CII) File

Refer to Importing a Caesar II Generated Neutral File.
Aveva PDMS has a module called PDMS StressC which generates Caesar neutral files (*.cii).
Command Reference
Importing an Intergraph PDS (N) File

Selecting File/Import/Intergraph (*.n) opens the STRAIT translator. The STRAIT translator converts a Intergraph PDS file (*.n) into an AutoPIPE neutral file (*.ntl).
Note: When the STRAIT translator is closed a new instance of AutoPIPE will automatically open, and the neutral file (*.ntl) will be converted to an AutoPIPE model file (*.dat).
Command Reference
Importing an ADLPipe (ADI) File

Selecting File/Import/ADLPipe (*.adi) the ADLPipe translator. The ADLPipe translator converts a ADLPipe ADI file (*.pcf) into an AutoPIPE neutral file (*.ntl).
Note: When the ADLPipe translator is closed a new instance of AutoPIPE will automatically open, and the neutral file (*.ntl) will be converted to an AutoPIPE model file (*.dat).
Command Reference
Importing a Smart Plant (PCF) File

Selecting File/Import/Smart Plant (*.pcf) opens the Bentley PCF Translator. The Bentley PCF Translator converts a PCF file (*.pcf) into an AutoPIPE neutral file (*.ntl).
Note: When the Bentley PCF Translator is closed a new instance of AutoPIPE will automatically open, and the neutral file (*.ntl) will be converted to an AutoPIPE model file (*.dat).
See Also:
Importing a CADWorx (PCF) File
Importing a SolidWorks (PCF) File
Importing an AutoDesk Inventor (PCF) File
Importing a CATIA (PCF) File

Command Reference
Importing a CADWorx (PCF) File

Selecting File/Import/CADWorx (*.pcf) opens the Bentley PCF Tanslator. The Bentley PCF Translator converts a PCF file (*.pcf) into an AutoPIPE neutral file (*.ntl).
Command Reference
Importing a SolidWorks (PCF) File

Selecting File/Import/SolidWorks (*.pcf) opens the Bentley PCF Translator. The Bentley PCF Translator converts a PCF file (*.pcf) into an AutoPIPE neutral file (*.ntl).
Command Reference
Importing an AutoDesk Inventor (PCF) File

Selecting File/Import/AutoDesk (*.pcf) opens the Bentley PCF Translator. The Bentley PCF Translator converts a PCF file (*.pcf) into an AutoPIPE neutral file (*.ntl).
Command Reference
Importing a CATIA (PCF) File

Selecting File/Import/CATIA (*.pcf) opens the Bentley PCF Translator. The Bentley PCF Translator converts a PCF file (*.pcf) into an AutoPIPE neutral file (*.ntl).
Command Reference
Importing an Autodesk Plant 3D (PCF) File

Selecting File/Import/Autodesk Plant 3D (*.pcf) opens the Bentley PCF Translator. The Bentley PCF Translator converts a PCF file (*.pcf) into an AutoPIPE neutral file (*.ntl).
Command Reference
Exporting a Model
Select File/Export from the pull-down menu to export an AutoPIPE model to a new file format.
The following files can exported from AutoPIPE:
l AutoPLANT (PXF) - Geometry/Results
l AutoCAD (DXF)
l Caesar II neutral (*.cii)
l Isogen (*.pcf)
l JSpace Model (*.jsm)
l DGN Model (*.dgn)
l Input Database (*.mdb)
l Results Database (*.mdb)
l Nozzle Loads to AutoPIPE Nozzle
l Model to STAAD Using PipeLink (*.pipelink)
The File Name must adhere to Windows naming convention. Select the desired drive and directory, if different from the current.
Generating a PXF File (Geometry/Results)

The File/Export/AutoPLANT (*.pxf) command is a means for generating PXF files for conversion into AutoPLANT 97 PIPING and/or ISOMETRICS drawings and also to enable integration of
AutoPIPE into post-processing tools. The option to generate results in PXF format to an ASCII text file has been added. Result data includes: displacements, support reactions, restraint reactions, pipe
force and moments, stresses for code compliance, general stresses, and bend angular distortions. These options are very similar to the Result/Output Report sub-reports. All result information for
elements, i.e. force, moments, and stresses has been output in the form of I and J node values to more easily fit into most post-processors. This I and J format is in contrast to AutoPIPE's normal reporting
method of "+/-" sides of points. All other options in the Result/Output Report are not reported to the PXF file and must still be parsed from the specific sub-reports.
l Exporting Geometry and Results to a PXF File
1. If results are to be exported also, then perform the necessary analyses before preceding.
2. Select File/Export/AutoPLANT (*.pxf) from the AutoPIPE menu. When the Export dialog displays, select AutoPLANT PXF(*.pxf) as the file type, modify the name if necessary, then press Save.
3. The PXF Batch Result dialog is displayed. This dialog contains options to select whether to export geometry data and specific results. Enable the appropriate field values in this dialog. The result fields may be closed to input if the results are not available. Select
from a topic below for more information on the fields:
Displacement
Restraint
Support
Forces & Moments
Code Compliance and General Stress
Bend Angular Distortion
Geometry
4. After completing and accepting the Export dialog, a message is displayed notifying that the export process is completed.
Notes:
1. The information in the PXF codes 1080, 1081, and 1082 in the ASCII text file applies to the Results only. Code 1080 defines the vertical axis direction of the stress analysis model from which the
results were generated. Code 1081 defines the unit type of the results. Code 1082 defines the piping design code used to generate the results.
2. The original PXF record id for each support in the model database will be maintained when importing the PXF file. If the support is modified, i.e. the type is changed in AutoPIPE, that original record
id is lost. This will help maintain the original support type defined in AutoPLANT. This option can be disabled by changing the setting "RETAIN_SUPPORT" to 0 in the PFXFOUT.MAP file.
AutoPIPE to AutoPLANT Mapping Files
Generating a DXF file

DXF is a file format supported by AutoCAD and Microstation, and is recognized by a wide variety of other engineering and CAD software.
l There are two ways to generate a DXF graphics file :
The first method is to generate a 3D double-line DXF file using this option with the additional setting Tools/Setting/DXF Export Drawing Border , Include 3D Model field disabled. The second method is
to generate a 3D solid DXF file using this option with the additional setting Tools/Setting/DXF Export Drawing Border , Include 3D Model field enabled.
To export the model into DXF format:
1. Select File/Export/AutoCAD (*.dxf)
2. When the Export dialog appears, select the drive and directory where this file should be stored, then type a name in the "File name" field. The DXF extension will be added automatically.
4. Only the pipe or beam points displayed within the current plot view port are saved to the DXF file. And the following rules apply if components lie within the current view port :
- Any one of the pipe end points of an element.
- Any one of the beam nodes on a beam element.
- Base point of supports, xtra data and anchors.
AutoCAD/DXF related topics
Generating a Caesar CII file

CII is a neutral file format supported by the Caesar program.
To export the model into CII format:
1. Select File/Export/Caesar II Neutral (*.cii)
2. When the Export dialog appears, select the drive and directory where this file should be stored, then type a name in the "File name" field. The CII extension will be added automatically.
3. Accepting the dialog generates a Caesar neutral file (filename.cii)
Note:
1. The complete model is saved to the CII file.
2. Only the pipe points displayed within the current model are saved to the CII since beam points are not supported by the cii format.
3. If AutoPIPE is in Demo mode, a CII file cannot be generated.
See Also :
Generating a ISOGEN PCF file

PCF is a file format supported by the Alias ISOGEN program, and is recognized by a wide variety of other engineering and CAD software.
To export the model into PCF format:
1. Select File/Export/Isogen (*.pcf)
2. When the Export dialog appears, select the drive and directory where this file should be stored, then type a name in the "File name" field. The PCF extension will be added automatically.
3. Accepting the dialog displays the PCF Options dialog. This dialog is similar to the Stress Isometric Options dialog except only the plot options are available and ISOGEN, Ref Items and Annotation buttons are
disabled.
Note:
1. The complete model is saved to the PCF file unless a) Segments are hidden b) Use Selected Range Option
2. Only the pipe points displayed within the current model are saved to the PCF and resulting DXF or DWG files since ISOGEN does not support beam points.
See Also :
Generating a StressISO DXF or DWG file
Command Reference
JSpace Model (*.jsm)

The Export/JSpace Model (*.jsm) command will to enable the user to export model data, results, and graphics in line mode and solid mode. Additionally, it will allow export of a deflected
model for a selected non-code combination. The Jspace model is exported inside the model directory with a filename <modelname>.jsm. Selecting this option will show the following dialog to select
graphics export options.
The following fields/parameters are available on the Export JSM dialog:
File Path
Center Line Graphics
Solid Graphics
Deflected Model Graphics
Automatically set Vertical to Z
Load Combination
Notes:
1. Deflected model graphics can be exported for only one load combination at a time.
2. If the Show Pipe Insulation option is enabled, the exported model will include pipe insulation.
Graphics Object Levels

In the JSM file being exported, each graphics mode is exported into a separate "Level". The level name depends on the graphics mode selected. For each mode, the levels are further divided by
component type. For example, anchors are exported to a separate level, and supports another level.
For pipes, each segment will be exported into its own level based on the segment name or line number. If line numbers are defined, then those will be used and the names will start with "LINENO_{line
number}_", otherwise the segment name will be used, i.e. "SEG_{segment name}_".
If all three render modes are selected, i.e. Center Line Graphics, Solid Graphics, and Deflected Model Graphics, they will be exported into the same JSM file in their respective levels. Model data will be
exported only once irrespective of the number of graphics modes selected for export, as model data will the same for all modes.
Limitations
1. Component colors are limited to 15-bit
2. Transparency information is not exported for pipe insulation
3. Deflected model export will only be in solid mode
4. Animation is not supported
5. Vertical up axis cannot be rotated after export, iModel Composer and Navigator only have vertical up as Z
6. The complete model is exported, i.e. all piping, beams, supports, loads, etc.
Command Reference
DGN Model (*.dgn)

The Export/DGN Model (*.dgn) command will to enable the user to export model data, results, and graphics in line mode and solid mode. Additionally, it will allow export of a deflected
model for a selected non-code combination. The DGN model is exported inside the model directory with a filename <modelname>.dgn. Selecting this option will show the following dialog to select
graphics export options.
The following fields/parameters are available on the Export DGN dialog:
File Path
Center Line Graphics
Solid Graphics
Deflected Model Graphics
Automatically set Vertical to Z
Load Combination
Notes:
1. Deflected model graphics can be exported for only one load combination at a time.
2. If the Show Pipe Insulation option is enabled, the exported model will include pipe insulation.
Graphics Object Levels

In the DGN file being exported, each graphics mode is exported into a separate "Level". The level name depends on the graphics mode selected. For each mode, the levels are further divided by
component type. For example, anchors are exported to a separate level, and supports another level.
For pipes, each segment will be exported into its own level based on the segment name or line number. If line numbers are defined, then those will be used and the names will start with "LINENO_{line
number}_", otherwise the segment name will be used, i.e. "SEG_{segment name}_".
If all three render modes are selected, i.e. Center Line Graphics, Solid Graphics, and Deflected Model Graphics, they will be exported into the same DGN file in their respective levels. Model data will
be exported only once irrespective of the number of graphics modes selected for export, as model data will the same for all modes.
Limitations
1. Deflected model export will only be in solid mode
2. Animation is not supported
3. The complete model is exported, i.e. all piping, beams, supports, loads, etc.
4. Billboard style is not available with text and may not face user
5. Line mode valves, reducers, flex joints, supports and other such components may not face user
Command Reference
Input Database (*.mdb)

The Export/Input Database (*.mdb) command will to enable the user to save a "snap shot" of the current model input to a specified filename. When this command is executed, the input
data for all input types, i.e. Press/Temp/PipeID, Pipe Properties, Segment, Point, etc., is written to the MDB file. The program will automatically append the file extension "MDB" to the filename after
accepting the dialog.
l The Default MDB filename is the current model filename, with "_INPUT" appended to it, in the current directory.
l Saving the MDB inputs to a different directory from the current directory will not change the MDB file in the current directory.
l The created MDB file will always replace the current model MDB file (in the current directory), if the names are the same, to avoid creating the MDB inputs multiple times.
Related Topics:
Input Grids Overview

Command Reference
Results Database (*.mdb)

The Export/Results Database (*.mdb) command will to enable the user to save a "snap shot" of the current model results to a specified filename. When this command is executed, the result
data for all five results types i.e. Displacement, Force/Moment, Anchor, Support, and Code Stresses is written to the MDB file. However if MDB filename is the same as the model filename it will
replace the current model MDB file to avoid creating the MDB results multiple times. The program will automatically append the file extension "MDB" to the filename after accepting the dialog.
l The Default MDB filename is the current model filename in the current directory.
l Saving the MDB results to the current model name in the current directory is not recommended since the program dynamically updates the results in the MDB file with the current model name.
l Saving the MDB results to a different directory from the current directory will not change the MDB file in the current directory.
l The created MDB file will always replace the current model MDB file (in the current directory) to avoid creating the MDB results multiple times.
Related Topics:
Result Grids Overview
Command Reference
Nozzle Loads to AutoPIPE Nozzle

i
Select the Export/Nozzle Loads to AutoPIPE Nozzle option to execute AutoPIPE Nozzle, AutoPIPE’s Local Shell Stress Analysis program. All anchors in the model with the Report anchor results to
AutoPIPE Nozzle field enabled will be available to AutoPIPE Nozzle. All reference points in the model with the Report Reference Point Results to AutoPIPE Nozzle field enabled will be available to
AutoPIPE Nozzle. Information exported to AutoPIPE Nozzle for each anchor is described in PXF Export Restraints. Once exported, additional information will be required in AutoPIPE Nozzle, for
example vessel details and vessel orientation.
Note: All exported information comes from the pipe identifier and not from the nozzle element dialog.
Standalone AutoPIPE Nozzle users must install AutoPIPE Nozzle to the \AutoPIPE Nozzle sub-directory of AutoPIPE, e.g. C:\Bentley\AutoPIPE\AutoPIPE Nozzle
Command Reference
Model to STAAD Using PipeLink

The Export/Model to STAAD Using PipeLink (*.pipelink) command will enable the user to export piping support data along with its connection and loading using PipeLink, an
advanced structural model data exchange used to exchange model data with STAAD.Pro (for more information on using PipeLink please refer to the PipeLink Tutorial). PipeLink will create a file
<model_name>.pipelink in the model directory. This file can be imported in STAAD to view the piping model and transfer pipe support loads automatically to the STAAD structure.
If the AutoPIPE analysis has not been executed, then a note will be added to the PipeLink Export dialog, and the Export Support Loads checkbox will be unchecked and disabled. The user can select to
cancel the process or export the piping geometry only for review in STAAD.
The following data will be exported:
l PipeLink revision information
l Model information
l Piping Geometry as an ADI
l Pipe Supports
l Pipe Support Connections
l Supports
l Support Loads
l Anchors
l Anchor Loads
Notes:
1. Any changes in structural nodes and members are not exported and will be lost on a subsequent import.
PipeLink: Data Exchange Diagram
Models can be exported to STAAD using the PipeLink Export dialog:
The following fields/parameters are available on the PipeLink Export dialog:
Export File
Revision Comments
Export Support Loads
Pressing 'OK' to start exporting the model will prompt the following Log Messages dialog:
The following export log messages may be delivered in the Log Messages dialog while exporting the model:
l Model data exported successfully - The model was exported successfully.
l Model data not exported - Errors occurred while exporting the model data.
l Revision history exported successfully - The model revision history was exported successfully.
l Revision history not exported - Errors occurred while exporting the revision history.
l n support(s) exported successfully - Total number of supports exported to the database.
l n support(s) updated successfully - Total number of support properties updated in the database.
l Supports not exported - Errors occurred while exporting the support data.
l Support loads exported successfully - Support loads were exported to the database.
l n anchor(s) exported successfully - Total number of anchors exported to the database.
l n anchor(s) updated successfully - Total number of anchor properties updated in the database.
l Anchors not exported - Errors occurred while exporting anchors to the database.
l Anchor loads exported successfully - Anchor loads were exported successfully to the database.
l Export to STAAD is completed for support loads & model geometry data - The program exported supports data along with the model geometry.
l Export to STAAD is completed for model geometry data only - The program exported only the model geometry data.
See Also:
PipeLink Tutorial
Command Reference
Print Preview
Output reports created by AutoPIPE can be reviewed on-screen using the File/Print Preview command.
When the Print Preview dialog appears, select the reports you want to view. Only those reports which have been previously generated on the current model are available. After pressing OK the reports are
opened in a separate window using the AutoPIPE Report Viewer.
Command Reference
Printing
Model graphics or reports can be sent to an attached printer using the procedure outlined below.
1. Select File/Print/Report or Graphics

i to open the Print dialog.
Note: The Output type selection list, you can change whether "Graphics" or "Reports" are to be printed. This field is set by default depending on the selected menu option. The "Graphics" option will plot or print the drawing of the model. The "Reports" option will
send the selected output reports to the printer.
2. If "Reports" was chosen, you can check-off the report types which should be sent to the printer. (If "Graphics was specified in Step 2, these options are disabled.)
Note: Only reports which have been previously generated on that model are available.
3. If you have not yet generated an output report, select Result/Report and check which output reports you wish to generate. Please note that users have the option to minimize the size of output reports by graphically highlighting a range of points and then selecting the
option in Result/Report to generate reports only for those points in the highlighted selection set.
4. If "Graphics" was chosen as the Output type, specify where to "Send output to." The options are as follows:
5. Printer: Select this option to send a hard copy of the model graphic to a connected printer.
6. Plotter: Select this option to send the model graphics to an attached plotter.
7. File: Select this option to create a file named {modelname}.PLT in a user-specified directory.
If printer is selected then a Plot title dialog appears after every graphic print request, i.e. File/Graphics, stress plot, displacement plot, and mode shape plot and shows 3 additional 3 lines of text which are
printed on the plot
Printer plot Header will appear as follows:
Left Margin Right Margin

Model Name Company Name
Project line 1 [general model options] Date/time stamp
Project line 2 [general model options] Model revision

Plot title line 1 [Plot title dialog] Prepared by
Plot title line 2 [Plot title dialog] Checked by
Plot title line 3 [Plot title dialog]
1. If "Reports" was specified, they are printed immediately. If "Graphics" was selected, one of the following occurs:
2. If the output was directed to an attached device, a Print dialog is displayed. Specify the printer and other options as desired, then press OK. The image is sent to the printer.
3. If the output was directed to a PLT file, the Output dialog is displayed. Indicate where the file should be created and its filename. The appropriate extension will be added automatically.
Note: You can also view these reports on-line rather than printing them. Use the File/Print Preview command.
Command Reference
Permanent Lock
This menu option is used for restricting access to a model to only one user at a time. The permanent lock will restrict access to the model based on the Username that acquired the lock. The purpose of
the permanent lock is to ensure, even after the model has been closed, that no other user can edit that model until the permanent lock is removed. If the permanent lock has not been released, and another
user tries to open the model from the same machine or another machine, or the same user tries to open the model in another AutoPIPE session, an error message will be delivered and the option of saving
the model to a new directory will be provided. The permanent lock will remain in place until the user that acquired the lock has released it.
Acquire
Acquires a Permanent Lock for the model that is currently open in AutoPIPE.
Release
Releases the Permanent Lock associated with the model that is currently open in AutoPIPE.
Temporary Lock
Every time a model is opened a temporary lock is created to restrict access to the model to a single AutoPIPE session for that computer and user. When the model has been closed the temporary lock will
be removed and will no longer restrict access to the model from other computers or users.
Note: A fundamental difference between the temporary and permanent lock is when a model is closed the temporary lock is removed, whereas the permanent lock remains in place.
OS Lock
An operating system (OS) writing lock restricts access to a computer file by only allowing one user or process access at any specific time. The OS lock is used to help prevent access to the file through
other programs, e.g. Windows Explorer.
Local Caching
When a model is opened, all model files from the model directory (which can be on a local machine or over a network) will be synchronously copied to a temporary directory. This will protect the user
from losing model files in the case of a network failure. Whenever changes are made to the model files, they will be asynchronously copied back to the original location. When the model is saved all
model files are synchronously copied back to the original location.
Lock File
The following is an example of a lock file created when a model is opened in AutoPIPE:
The <model_name>.lck file will save the information for the user, i.e. username and computer name, that has opened the model along with the type of lock, i.e. temporary or permanent.
For when the model can be opened and when it cannot, please see the related topic, "How Specific Scenarios are Handled for Network File Access".
Related Topics:
How Specific Scenarios are Handled for Network File Access
Model Properties
Locating and Deleting the Temporary Directory

Command Reference
Properties
Displays the Model File Properties dialog. The Model File Properties dialog includes:
1. General information about the model, i.e. model name, the username that was the last to save the model, and the model revision number.
2. Time information associated with the model, i.e. when it was created, modified, and last accessed.
3. Disk information, which provides the file location, and size of the model file.
Note: Enable the "Always show the dialog while opening the model" option to display the Model File Properties dialog when opening a model.
Command Reference
Model Management
Select File/Model Management from the pull-down menu to delete, backup, or restore AutoPIPE models:
Deleting a Model
Backing Up a Model
Restoring a Model
Save Archive
Open Archive
Command Reference
Deleting a File
Select File/Model Management/Delete Model to open the Delete dialog. This command enables the user to delete models and auxiliary files associated with the model. This feature is especially useful for
"cleaning up" directories by deleting files that are no longer needed once a session is completed, freeing up disk space. It should also be noted that simply deleting the "DAT" file associated with the
model will not remove associated files such as report and result files. To ensure that all files associated with a model are removed, use the File/Model Management/Delete Model command.
When File/Model Management/Delete Model is selected, the user is prompted with a file dialog. The current model name will appear as the default in the "File name" field. To delete the files associated with
the current model, accept the dialog. To delete files associated with a different model, select or input the unwanted model filename .
The user is presented with a list of file types associated with the model in the Delete Files dialog. Mark the file types which should be deleted, then press OK to close the dialog and delete the files.
Command Reference
Backing Up a File
Backing up the files associated with a model helps to minimize data loss which might occur during power outages, file corruption, accidental deletions, etc. The Backup function is also extremely useful
for creating an archive at the end of a project.
An automatic backup is performed by AutoPIPE every five minutes, creating a {modelname}.BAK file in the current directory. The automatic backup feature only backs up the model database (*.DAT
file). None of the auxiliary files are included in this operation. The File/Model Management/Backup Model command enables the user to elect to back up not only the model database, but the combination file,
the result files and the output files as well. To backup associated files, use the File/Model Management/Backup Model command as outlined below.
1. Select File/Model Management/Backup Model. A file selection dialog is displayed. If a file is currently open, the file name appears as the default in the "Filename" field. Otherwise, designate the drive and directory where the file is located, then select the appropriate
File Name from the list. Press OK after specifying the file for which the backup is to be performed.
2. The Backup Files dialog is displayed. Enable the file types which should be backed up along with the model (a table of these types follows this procedure).
3. The last field in the dialog is "Destination." Type the full path where the backup files should be stored, then press OK.
Note: The destination directory must exist; AutoPIPE will not create it for you.
4. To restore files which have been backed up, use the File/Model Management/Restore Model command.
5. Click on OK after specifying the backup options. AutoPIPE will then copy backup of all selected file types to the user-defined drive/directory.
The following file types are available for backup:
l Model database: Enable this option to backup the model’s DAT, BAK, THL, SPC, HMF .FS? .files.
l Combination file: Enable this option to backup the model’s CMB files.
l Result files: Enable this option to backup result reports associated with the model ( LIN, EIG, FSP, HRM, RSP, SAM, TIM)
l Output files: Enabling this option will backup CHK, HGR, OUT, RPT, WKS, LOG files.
See Also:
Backing up LIB files

Command Reference
Restoring a Model
The File/Model Management/Restore Model command copies backups of files (.BAK) from the user-specified backup directory to the current working directory. If a system is not already loaded, the model
(.DAT) will be loaded into AutoPIPE.
The ability to restore files which have been backed up is especially useful in cases where files in the current working directory have been corrupted, or where the File/Model Management/Delete Model
command was used to inadvertently delete files which were needed.
Command Reference
Save Archive
The File/Model Management/Save Archive command opens the Archive Model dialog, which is used to select the file types saved in an AutoPIPE compressed (*.APC) file. The ability to compress all model
files into a single file is especially useful when sharing a model between multiple users.
The following table lists the file extensions included with each 'file type' option available in the Archive Model dialog:
Input Result Reports Unit Lib

.CMB .MDB .LOG .UNT .LIB
.XML .RSP .TSS
.FLT .SAM .TTO
.TTC .HGR .TDL
.TTP .STS .TSM
.TTI .FSP .RPT
.TPP .TIM .BAK
.GDL .HRM .CHK
.TIH .FLX .OUT
.THL .EIG .SUM
.SPC .MOD .TXT
.FS1 .ENV
.HMF .OPL
.PWS .L*
Note: The AutoPIPE Database (*.DAT) file will always be included in the compressed (*.APC) file.
See Also:
Open Archive
Command Reference
Open Archive
The File/Model Management/Open Archive command opens the Open dialog, with the filename extension limited to the AutoPIPE compressed file, *.APC. Selecting an AutoPIPE compressed file, and pressing
'OK', will extract all of the compressed file types into a new folder by the same name, and open the model. The ability to open a compressed model file is especially useful when sharing a model between
multiple users.
See Also:
Save Archive
Command Reference
ProjectWise
The following ProjectWise menu options are provided:
Open Model
Update Model
Add to ProjectWise
Publish
Model Properties
Log In
Log Out
Note: AutoPIPE is compatible with ProjectWise version 8.11 or later. AutoPIPE is not compatible with ProjectWise version 8.9.
See Also:
ProjectWise Integration
Command Reference
ProjectWise Open Model

Selecting File\ProjectWise\Open Model displays the Open Document dialog. The Open Document dialog is used to open a model from the ProjectWise server for editing or as Read-Only in AutoPIPE.
Note: The Read-Only mode will not lock the file and any local changes made and saved will not be updated on to the server automatically.
Related Topics:
Permanent Lock
Command Reference
ProjectWise Update Model

Selecting File\ProjectWise\Update Model displays the Check In dialog. The Check In dialog provides the option to check-in, update the server copy, or free the lock associated with the current model. A
new version can also be specified when checking-in using the Create a new version during Check In checkbox.
Check In
Checks in the model and all associated model files.
Note: A model can only be checked-in if it is already checked-out by the same user. Also, it can only be checked-in onto the same server it was checked-out from.
Update Server Copy
Performs a check-in and a check-out function one after another. This maintains the lock with the user and updates the server copy.
Free
Frees the currently checked-out model files and releases the acquired lock allowing other users to check-out the model.
Related Topics:
Permanent Lock
Command Reference
Add to ProjectWise
Selecting File\ProjectWise\Add to ProjectWise displays the Add Model to ProjectWise Server dialog. The Add Model to ProjectWise Server dialog is used to add the model to the ProjectWise server for
the first time. Thereafter the File\ProjectWise\Update Model command is used to update the model. All files associated with the model are also checked in as part of a set using the ProjectWise
"Document Set" feature.
Note: A new folder can be created anywhere in the tree control by right clicking on a folder and selecting New Folder.
Related Topics:
Document Set & Supported AutoPIPE Files

Command Reference
ProjectWise Publish
Selecting File\ProjectWise\Publish displays the Select Files to Publish dialog. The Select Files to Publish dialog can be used to select which files need to go into ProjectWise along with the model.
Note: The ProjectWise folder selection only appears if the Publish option is being performed for the first time (per model). When Publish is selected again (for the same model) the same ProjectWise
folder will be used.
Related Topics:
List of ProjectWise Publish Files

Command Reference
ProjectWise Model Properties

Selecting File\ProjectWise\Model Properties opens the Model Properties dialog. The Model Properties dialog shows the settings of the currently loaded model, including its folder properties and
document properties. The folder name, description, and location are given. And the document name, description, status, version number, node name, out directory (local working directory), data source
server path, and connection are given.
Command Reference
ProjectWise Log In
Selecting File\ProjectWise\Log In displays the ProjectWise Log in dialog for logging into the ProjectWise server. An option to use Windows Single Sign-On authentication is also available.
Note: If a user is already logged-in and selects this, a prompt will be shown to ask if the user wants to log-out or not. If the user logs off, the ProjectWise Log in dialog will be shown again to set up a
new session.
Command Reference
ProjectWise Log Out

Selecting File\ProjectWise\Log Out logs out any user that is currently logged-in to ProjectWise.
Command Reference
Structural Dashboard
Structural Dashboard is an information center to learn more about Bentley's Structural products and how they interoperate with each other in different industry workflows.
The license status of these products can be observed in the following states:
l Orange - Installed & Licensed
l Yellow - Installed & No License Available
l Gray - Not Installed
If installed & licensed (Orange), then the product can be launched by double-clicking on the product box.
Other features include:
l Easy access to open "Recently Opened model files" for any installed structural product
l See folder and file details filtered by structural product
l RSS News Feeds and Favorite or Project Folders for any structural product
l Quick links to the Be Community website, SELECT Services, logging a support issue, or contacting Bentley Sales
l Project Notes to include quick links to specifications, design documents and project web sites or embed pictures, spreadsheets or add notes like project billing codes, contacts, etc.
Command Reference
Exiting AutoPIPE
To close AutoPIPE, select File/Exit. If a model is currently open that has unsaved changes, you are offered the chance of saving the model before closing the application.
Command Reference
Edit Commands
The following Edit commands are provided:
Undo
Redo
Cut
Copy
Paste
Delete
Move/Stretch
Rotate
Scale
Goto Point
Goto Beam
Next Beam/Prev Beam
Segment Hide Selected
Segment Hide Unselected
Segment Show All
Segment Reorder
Segment Reverse
Segment Split
Segment Join
Renumbering a Segment
Renumbering All
Beam Hide Selected
Beam Hide Unselected
Beam Show All

Command Reference
Undo
This command will "undo" the previous command. If pressed multiple times, it can remove a sequence of commands, allowing you to restore your model to a previous state. The number of times the
undo button can be pressed depends on the number of commands performed and the number of levels of undo defined in the Tools/Model Options/Edit dialog.
To display the next command to be undone in a tooltip, place the mouse over the Undo toolbar button. For example, if the last operation was to delete a point, the Undo button tooltip will display, "Undo
point delete." If there are no commands to undo the tooltip will display, "Undo empty." When performing an undo step following an analysis, the message "and analysis" is appended to the tooltip. This
message informs you that the analysis results will be invalidated as well as undoing the last model modification.
Use the Edit/Redo command to reverse the effects of an Undo.
Most commands that modify a model can be undone. These commands include all Edit, Select, Insert, Modify, and Delete menu commands which change the model or the current selection set. Also
included are the View/Show menu commands Pipe Properties and Soil; the Load menu commands Hydrotest, Static Earthquake, Wind, Buoyancy, and Wave; and the Tools menu commands Model
Options(all) and Rotating Equipment..
Since View menu commands cannot be undone, the model view will not change during an undo operation. Also, since the current view may not contain the area of the model for which the undo is
changing, there may be no apparent change to the model upon selecting Undo.
Most File menu commands clear the Undo except Save
Undo can be disabled by setting the number of levels of undo defined in the Tools/Model Options/Edit dialog to zero. Undo is cleared if the Levels of undo field is changed.
Edit Controls
Command Reference
Redo
The Redo command reverses the effect of one or more Undo commands. To display the next command to be redone in a tooltip place the mouse over the Redo toolbar. For example, if the last operation
was to delete a point, the Redo button tooltip will display, "Redo point delete." If there are no commands to be redone, then the tooltip will display, "Redo empty."
For example, assume that you delete a point from the model. By placing the cursor over the Undo button on the toolbar a tooltip will display, "Undo point delete." You then click the Undo button to
restore the deleted point. You can now restore the deleted point by clicking on the Redo button which will now display the tooltip, "Redo point delete." Redo is also useful if you inadvertently pressed
Undo one too many times, for example deleting a valve from the model that you wish to restore. Press Redo to reverse the effect of the Undo.
A Redo can only be performed immediately following an Undo.
Any change to the model which follows an Undo command will disable Redo and display "Redo empty" in the redo button tooltip.
Edit Controls
Command Reference
Cut
The Edit/Cut command enables the user to copy a selection set of points to a clipboard file, while deleting the same set of points from the current model. Both piping points and beam members may be
specified by the selection of points. However, the Cut command will not work with a single point or when either end point of the selected range is part of a bend. The program will display a warning and
cancel the Cut command. The procedure below explains how to cut a range of points from a system.
1. Select the range of points in the model that you want to cut.
2. Select Edit/Cut .
3. Respond to the prompt:
Select base point:
by clicking on the point in the range which defines the points’ base. Press OK after the desired range has been selected.
Note: The base point can also be input manually.
4. A dialog appears asking if you’d like to delete the range from the model. Press Yes.
A section which has been cut from a model and placed into a clipboard file will be converted into new segments and all points will be renamed. This "cut" section will remain in the clipboard until either the Cut or the Copy command
i is selected again,
when it will be replaced with the new selection set.
The Cut command is used in combination with the Paste command to move selected portions of a model to another location, although it can be used to remove a selected portion entirely.
Note: If the range contains a two point support, then the support is copied only if the first point is contained within the range. Further, if the second point of the two point support is not contained in the
range, then the second point is assumed to be set to ground in the clipboard.
Note: The cut/paste operation for distributed loads data on a point/member is not supported.
Copy and Paste
Command Reference
Copy
The Edit/Copy command enables the user to copy a selection set of points to a clipboard file without deleting the same set of points from the current model. Both piping points and beam members may
be specified by the selection of points. However, the Copy command will not work with a single point or when either end point of the selected range is part of a bend. The program will display a warning
and cancel the Copy command. The procedure below explains how to copy a range of points.
1. Select the range of points that you want copied from the model.
2. Select Edit/Copy .
3. The prompt
Select base point:
is displayed. Respond by selecting the base point in the drawing (you can also manually input the point name in the prompt dialog). Press OK when the desired range of points is highlighted in the
model.
4. The selected points are copied to the clipboard file. This "copied" section will remain in the clipboard until the Cut or Copy command is selected again, when it will be replaced with the new
selection set. The Copy command is used in combination with the Paste command to easily and quickly duplicate selection sets without having to go through the tedious process of creating
another pipe segment or beam member.
Note: If the range contains a two point support, then the support is copied only if the first point is contained within the range. Further, if the second point of the two point support is not contained in
the range, then the second point is assumed to be set to ground in the clipboard.
Note: The copy/paste operation for distributed loads data on a point/member is not supported.
Copy and Paste
Command Reference
Paste
After using either the Cut or Copy
i command to place a portion of the model on the clipboard, the Paste command can be used to place those objects in any open model at a specified point. The
points are renamed using the default naming conventions of the segment into which they are placed. The following rules apply when pasting the contents of the clipboard:
l If no range has been selected:
¡ If "Connect to selected points" is enabled, the clipboard contents will be pasted and connected to the current point
¡ If an offset is specified, the clipboard contents will be pasted at the specified offset from the origin (0,0,0).
l if a range of points has been selected:
¡ If "Connect to selected points" is specified, the clipboard contents will be repeatedly pasted and connected at each of the points in the selected range.
¡ If an offset is specified, the clipboard contents will be repeatedly pasted at the specified offset from each point in the selected range.
Hint: Select the option "Use Actual Coordinates" to paste using real world coordinates e.g. a structural model into a piping model
The following procedure explains how to paste a segment into a model:
1. First Cut or Copy the desired range using the techniques described previously.
2. Open the model in which the selection range is to be pasted.
3. Select the point(s) where the range should be inserted (see bulleted notes, above), then select Edit/Paste . to open the Paste dialog.
4. To place the selected range at the specified point, enable the "Connect to selected points" option, then press OK. To place the range with respect to the origin enable the "Connect to origin (0,0,0)" option. both of these options can be used with the "Apply offset
from selected points or origin" option then enter offset values as desired. After specifying the insertion location, press OK to close the dialog and place the segment in the model.
Note: The range of points will be inserted into the model as a new segment. If the selected range belonged to more than one segment, new segments are created for each.
When pasting a segment into a model as a branch, a welding tee is created by default.
Segment rules apply when using the Paste command,

i and clipboard files may not be copied at either bends or component start points.
Copy and Paste
Command Reference
Delete
The currently selected item can be removed from the model using the Edit/Delete command.
i If the current selection consists of one or more points, all components associated with the point are deleted.
Components (and associated data) removed using this command are removed from the system, and cannot be retrieved from the clipboard. Because the deletion is permanent, a confirmation dialog is
displayed requesting you to acknowledge that the selected point(s) will be removed from the system.
For more discretionary deletion operations, it is recommended that the Delete pull-down menu be used, as it enables the user to pick and choose exactly which components or attached data to delete
without removing the entire point or set of points.
Edit Controls
See Also:
Defining a Range
Command Reference
Move/Stretch
The Edit/Move/Stretch command enables the user to modify the coordinates of a range of points by changing the offsets of the selected points in the X, Y and Z directions.
Modify the X, Y and Z offsets as appropriate, then press OK to apply the changes. If a branch or continuation point is moved, the alignments of all segments containing the point will be adjusted
automatically.
Scale, Move, and Stretch
Command Reference
Rotate
A selected range of components can be rotated a specified angle using the Edit/Rotate command. The procedure below describes the process of rotating a selected set of points.
1. Select the range of components which you would like to rotate.
2. Select Edit/Rotate.
3. AutoPIPE prompts for the base point on the selection set. The base point is the point about which the selection set will be rotated. Either select this point from the model by clicking on it (the
default is the the first point of the selection set), or manually input it in the "Select Base point" field, then press OK. The Rotate dialog is displayed.
4. Specify a rotation angle in the X,Y, and/or Z offset fields as desired, Note that you are not restricted to rotating the selection set along a single axis.
5. Press OK to apply the rotation values.
Note: When rotating a portion of the model, is it possible to disconnect the selection set from the rest of the model. If this occurs, use the Undo command to reverse the action.
Command Reference
Scale
The Edit/Scale command enables the user to multiply point offsets in a range by a user-defined scale factor. The procedure below explains how to scale a selected ranges offset values.
1. Select the range of components whose offset values are to be scaled.
2. Select EditScale to display to the Scale dialog.
3. Input scale factors in the X, Y, and Z fields as desired, then press OK.
Note: Negative values will mirror the points along the specified axis.
Beams and piping are scaled differently and therefore may no move together. This difference occurs because piping points are scaled with respect to offsets while beams are scaled with respect to their global coordinates. To correct the offsets for beams after a
scale operation, select the beams and use the Edit / Move/Stretch feature.
Scale, Move, and Stretch
Command Reference
Segment Hide Selected

Edit > Segment > Hide Selected will hide all selected segments in the model.
Hint: Useful to remove some segments which clutter the model
Related Topics:
Select/Unselect all segments

Command Reference
Segment Hide Unselected

Edit > Segment > Hide Unselected will hide all unselected segments in the model.
Hint: Useful to isolate a few segments only to view and work on in the model
Related Topics:
Select/Unselect all segments

Command Reference
Segment Show All

Edit > Segment > Show All will make all segments visible in the model
Hint: Useful to quickly view the complete model
Command Reference
Segment Reorder
The Edit > Segment > Reorder dialog now allows reordering segments, by typing in numbers in the Order column and clicking the Re-order button will Re-Name the segments. E.g. for 2
segments A and B which appear as order 1 and 2 respectively. To make segment A be B and vice versa, simply enter Seg A order = 3 or higher than Seg B order = 2. Clicking the Reorder button will re-
sort the segment naming. When changing an Order number to an existing number, then this existing number and all subsequent higher numbers increase by 1. E.g. order is 1,2, 3, 4, 5, 6...change 4 to 2
then order becomes 1,3,4,2,5,6 before clicking Reorder button. After clicking the Reorder button the order will show 1,2, 3, 4, 5, 6 but the segments have been renamed.
Note:
1. This is very useful when importing CAD models, when often the sequence the CAD model was built in a unorganized manner which means the segment numbering is also not well organized when
imported into AutoPIPE. It is desirable to re-order the segments into an easier to understand the 'flow' of the model where adjacent segments have similar sequential order.
2. Reordering re-uses any deleted segment names. If a model has segment A and C only (B was deleted). After reordering the new segment names will be A and B.
See Also:
Segment Split
Segment Reverse
Segment Join
Command Reference
Segment Reverse
Edit > Segment > Reverse will reverse the direction of the current segment and renumber if it has alphanumeric numbering.
Rules:
1. Numeric numbered segments are not renumbered. Note: Edit>Renumber>All will renumber the reversed segment
2. User point names are not renumbered if the option Replace all point names on renumber is unchecked (Tools>model options>Edit)
3. The reverse segment operation may delete valve, flex joint or reducer, if far point of the element is an end point of segment or a continuation/tee point.
4. Soil defined over the segment will not be disturbed.
Hint: This is very useful when importing CAD models, when often the sequence the CAD model was built in a unorganised manner. Reversing segments also improves the ease of working with a model
(e.g. imported from CAD), such as inserting components in a ’forward’ segment direction.
See Also:
Segment Split
Segment Join
Segment Reorder
Command Reference
Segment Split
Edit > Segment > Split will split the existing point (common segment) into 2 segments.
Rules:
1. Cannot be applied at the following points:
• Bend near, far or midpoint,
• Valve near or midpoint,
• Flex joint near point
• Reducer near point
• Nozzle near point
• Tee Run (if 2 segments on header side) or branch point (start or end of segment)
2. If split is at a point with a support, anchor, xtra data, or flanges then this data gets placed on the existing segment side.
3. The new segment created will have the next unused sequential segment name.
4. Warning messages for invalid operations
"This operation cannot be applied at the current point"
"This operation cannot be applied to first or last point of a segment"
Hint: Operations like split segments enables users to easily model piping which is or not subjected to wind loading e.g. indoor vs outdoor piping into one single model. It can be used to 'Break' the model
e.g. split the segments then delete the point on one of the segments
See Also:
Segment Reorder
Segment Reverse
Segment Join
Command Reference
Segment Join
Edit > Segment > Join will merge two segments at a junction/continuation point.
Rules:
1. Join cannot be performed if it is causing creation of closed loop in a segment
2. It cannot be applied at a point which connects more than two segments.
3. The points must be start or end points of segments.
4. If both of the points are start or if both are end points then one of the segments will be reversed first before the join operation.
5. The segment getting reversed will lose any valve/reducer/flex joint at the end of segment or before the continuation point (i.e. same behavior as Edit > Reverse Segment). After the reverse operation,
the segment that was first created will have its end point at the joint while later created segment will have the start point. Reverse operation is not needed when the junction point already has one start
point and one end point.
6. Joining involved removing one of the junction points. The start point of later segment is retained whereas the end point of first segment gets deleted, along with the anchor, support, flange and xtra data
are lost along with that point.
7. The name of first created segment will be retained. Say we merge A and B. Then the new segment will be named A. That means if we have segment A, B, C and we merge A and B. After the merge
operation we will have only A and C. The newly created segment is renumbered only if alpha numeric numbering exists.
8. User point names are not renumbered if the option Replace all point names on renumber is unchecked (Tools>model options>Edit)
9. For this operation, each segment needs to have more than one point.
Hint: Merging segments allows less segments and simplifies the model when segments have been reconnected back at junction/continuation points
See Also:
Segment Split
Segment Reverse
Segment Reorder
Command Reference
Renumbering a Segment
The Edit/Renumber/Segment command enables the user to renumber the points in a single or multiple selected segments. Points are renamed based on the current segment name and point offset. The
procedure below explains how to renumber selected segments.
1. Select Edit/Renumber/Segment to display to the Renumber dialog.
2. Click on each segment or enter a segment name in the dialog and press the Select button whose points are to be renumbered. When a segment is selected it will be highlighted.
3. When all of the desired segments are highlighted, press Finish.
Note: Points in a segment which have user specified names, i.e. do not begin with the letter in the current segment, can be left unchanged or overridden during the renumber using the Replace all points on renumber field in the Edit Model Options dialog.
The current offset between point names can also be changed in Edit Model Options dialog
Command Reference
Renumbering All
The Edit/Renumber/All command enables the user to renumber all points in the current model. Points are renamed based on the current segment name and point offset.
Note: Points which have user specified names, i.e. do not begin with the letter in the current segment, can be left unchanged or overridden during the renumber using the Replace all points on renumber
field in the Edit Model Options dialog.
The current offset between point names can also be changed in Edit Model Options dialog
Renumber Points
Command Reference
Goto Point
The Edit/Goto Point command displays the Goto Point dialog. A point can be looked up using two different options:
By Name
Input the Point Name in the Point Name field provided, then press OK. The cursor is moved to the specified point .
By Coordinates
Enter the X,Y,Z coordinates for the point and provide a tolerance value, then press OK. If a point is available on the specified coordinates and within the specified tolerance, the cursor is moved to the
point.
A warning appears on the dialog if no point is found.
Origin
Selecting this option and pressing OK moves the cursor to the origin.
Command Reference
Beam Hide Selected

Edit > Beam > Hide Selected will hide all selected beams in the model.
Hint: Useful to remove some beams which clutter the model.

Command Reference
Beam Hide Unselected

Edit > Beam > Hide Unselected will hide all unselected beams in the model.
Hint: Useful to isolate a few beams only to view and work on in the model.
Command Reference
Beam Show All

Edit > Beam > Show All will make all beams visible in the model
Hint: Useful
Command to quickly view the complete model.
Reference
Goto Beam
The Edit/Goto Beam command displays the Goto Beam dialog. Input the Beam ID in the field provided, then press OK. The cursor is moved to the starting point of the specified beam.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Next Beam/Prev Beam

The Next Beam and Prev Beam commands allow users to view the next/previous beam in the sequence in which they were defined.
Related Topics
Command Reference
View Commands
As a model becomes more complex, it will become necessary to adjust how the model is displayed as you work with different portions of it. The commands in the View menu allow you to control the
perspective and magnification of the objects in a model, and to toggle ON/OFF various supplemental types of point information. The following View options are provided:
Default View
Default View All
Default Iso View
Resetting the "Show" Options
Show Options
View All
Pan-Zoom-Rotate Command
Box Zoom Command
Vector View
Previous View
Display Mode
Display Viewport
View Point Properties
View Point Offsets
View AutoPLANT PXF Data
Transparency
Hide Components
Show all Components
Level of Detail
View Settings
Note: View > Segments has been replaced by Edit > Segment and Segment input Grid in v9.1 or later
Command Reference
Default View
The View/Default command is a means for restoring the view of a model to default values. When executed, the Default command redisplays the model using the following (default) viewing values listed
below:
l The extents of the model are displayed
l the model is presented in isometric view
Command Reference
Default View All

The View/Default All command is a means for restoring the view of a model to default values for all Viewports. When executed, the Default All command redisplays the model using the following (default)
viewing values listed below:
l The extents of the model are displayed
l the model is presented in SE isometric view (Single Viewport)
l Double Viewport:
Right = SE Iso
left = Front
l Quad Viewport:
Top right = SE Iso
Top left = Front
bottom left = Top
Bottom right = Right
l The active view panel is consistent between Double and Quad Viewports i.e. Double = right , Quad = top right.
Command Reference
Default Iso View

The View/Default Iso View command is a means for setting the default isometric view for all Viewports. The following isometric options are available:
n Iso (0 deg): Resets the current viewing perspective to the isometric view that looks toward the origin through the point (1,1,1). This isometric view is the default system view.
n Iso (90 deg): Resets the current viewing perspective to the isometric view that looks toward the origin through the point (-1,1,1).
n Iso (180 deg): Resets the current viewing perspective to the isometric view that looks toward the origin through the point (-1,1,-1).
n Iso (270 deg): Resets the current viewing perspective to the isometric view that looks toward the origin through the point (1,1,-1).
If View >Default or View > Default All or click on the ISO view toolbar icon is selected then the Plot will be restored to the isometric view orientation as defined under View/ Default Iso View.
Command Reference
Resetting the "Show" Options

The View/Reset Show Options command resets all of the options in the Show submenu to their default values and re-displays the model. In contrast to the View/Default option, this command only resets the
Show options and will not affect the other view settings (i.e., vector or line settings).
The View/Reset Show Options command is especially useful for clearing highlighted (contrasting) portions of the piping system resulting from the selection of some of the other Show menu commands.
The Show commands default to the following states:
l Temperature (pipe re-coloration) is toggled OFF
l Pressure (pipe re-coloration) is toggled OFF
l Flange data is toggled OFF
l Valve data is toggled OFF
l Weight data is toggled OFF
l Concentrated Force arrows are toggled ON
l Soil data (pipe re-coloration) is toggled OFF
l Names of points are toggled ON
l Points are toggled ON
l Beam names are toggled ON
l Length data is toggled OFF
l Center of Gravity symbol and legend is toggled OFF
Command Reference
Show Options
This dialog provides a number of options to plot data/components in the model.
View Show Rules
Properties
Point Names
Beam Names
Point Symbol
Length
Support Tag
Components
Valve
Flange
Tee
Xtra Data
Weight
Concentrated Forces
Imposed Displacements
Thermal Anchor Movements
Joint Type
User Weld Efficiency Factor
Point Static Earth Quake Factor
Reference Point
Gross Discontinuity [available ASME NB code only]
Color Plot
Design Temperature [available ASME NB/NC/ND codes only]
Design Pressure [available ASME NB/NC/ND codes only]
Operating Temperature
Operating Pressure
Delta T1 [available ASME NB code only]
Delta T2 [available ASME NB code only]
Hydrodynamic Data
Member Static Earth Quake Factor
Pipes with Rigid Options
Soil Properties
Pipe Insulation
Center of Gravity
Segments
Note: The color plot data options are exclusive. At one time, only one option can be selected.
Pipe Properties
Pipe Identifier
Material
Schedule
Nominal Diameter
Actual OD
Thickness
Corrosion
Insulation Thickness
Clad Thickness
Filter Pipe Properties
Show Connected Segments

Select this TAB to toggle on/off the display of all or individual segment groups.
Preview: Pressing this button updates the model plot and shows or hides the options selected by the user.
Reset Show Options: Pressing this button resets all the options selected from above available options.
Command Reference
View All
The View/All command searches for the extents of the current drawing, and adjusts the display so that the entire model is in view. This command can be used to reset the display to show the entire
system after having zoomed in on a small portion of the model.
Note: For post v6.3 versions, if segments have been turned off using View/Segment then View/all does not plot all segments. View/show all components will show all segments.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Pan-Zoom-rotate Command
AutoPIPE provides several useful tools which enable the user to control how the model is displayed. While a variety of these commands are available in the View menu, the Pan-Zoom-Rotate command is
probably the most versatile.
There are two ways in which this command can be used. The fastest method of zooming into a particular area is to define a zoom-region using your pointing device (mouse). Position the cursor at one
corner of the desired viewing perimeter, press and hold the left mouse button, then "drag" a box to the opposite corner. The selected region is marked by a box. The next step is to select View/Pan-Zoom-
Rotate or to press the right mouse key. AutoPIPE immediately zooms into the selected area.
Windowed Zoom
The second method of using the Pan-Zoom-Rotate command allows the user to scale, rotate, magnify, and pan the model in real time. If no selection window is defined when View/Pan-Zoom-Rotate is
selected or the right mouse key is pressed, the panel shown below is displayed near the bottom of the screen, over the command line. The mouse cursor changes to a hand indicating Pan view mode. 2nd
right mouse click changes to magnifying glass shape i.e. dynamic zoom mode and 3rd right mouse click changes to rotate arrow for dynamic rotate mode.
image\ap-u0504.gif
Notes:
1. During the pan-zoom-rotate operations, if in solid model view mode the regeneration of the graphics may be slow but to improve the regeneration speed, select one or more the options under
View/level of detail in particular the "Switch to line mode" option. When the pan-zoom-rotate operation is complete, the model will revert back to its original settings.
2. Right click on the model to enter zoom mode or zoom into a zoom window. This uses the center of screen as a reference point.
3. Double click the mouse to exit zoom mode.
im
4. During the pan-zoom-rotate operations, switching to different view modes is possible using the buttons on the view toolbar.
The following options/buttons can be performed with the Zoom panel active:
image\ap-vbut.gif
Zooming In and Out
Click and hold down the toolbar zoom buttons or right click until the cursor has a magnifying glass shape. When the cursor has a magnifying glass shape, dragging up and down with the mouse button
depressed interactively zooms in and out of the model using the center of screen as a reference point.
Press [Pg Up] and [Pg Dn] to Zoom In and Out, respectively.
Note: Mouse scroll wheel is available for Zoom In/Out i.e. Zoom in = forward, Zoom-out = backward to the on-screen mouse cursor.
Rotating
Click and hold down the toolbar rotate buttons or right click until the cursor has a rotate shape. When the cursor has a magnifying glass shape, dragging up and down with the mouse button depressed
interactively zooms in and out of the model.
Use the cursor keys ([LEFT],[RIGHT]), to rotate the drawing left and right around the models north axis with the origin point at center. Use the cursor keys ([UP],[DOWN]), to rotate the drawing up and down
around the perpendicular to the model's north axis with the origin point at center.
Panning
After executing the View/Pan-Zoom-Rotate command, the model can be panned by using the mouse "grab" a portion of the model and reposition it. Panning is particularly useful for keeping a portion of
the model centered in the screen before zooming in or rotating. The [Shift] + [Left] and [Shift] + [Right] keys can also be used to pan the model.
Note: Click and hold the mouse wheel button down to switch to a PAN 'hand' cursor for dynamic panning.
Rotate and Pan
Related Topics
Command Reference
Box Zoom Command

Similar to the View/Pan-Zoom-Rotate option, the Box zoom command provides a close-up view of a region of interest on the piping system.
Select View/Box zoom to display the Zoom panel. Note that a box is imposed in the display area. The size of this box can be adjusted, then moved over the desired viewing area. To increase or decrease the
size of the window use Page Up and Page Down keys. The user may move the zoom box over the region of interest by using the arrow keys or by dragging it into position using the mouse.
The same set of commands are available for controlling the display as in the Zoom command panel.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Vector View
The View/Vector command allows the user to select the perspective in which the model is viewed. Specify a "View Direction" by selecting an option from the list. If User is selected, input values in the
X/Y/Z fields to establish a custom isometric viewing plane.
View Direction options:
(the perspectives shown assumes that "Y" is defined as the vertical axis):
l Iso (0 deg): Resets the current viewing perspective to the isometric view that looks toward the origin through the point (1,1,1). This isometric view is the default system view.
l Iso (90 deg): Resets the current viewing perspective to the isometric view that looks toward the origin through the point (-1,1,1).
l Iso (180 deg): Resets the current viewing perspective to the isometric view that looks toward the origin through the point (-1,1,-1).
l Iso (270 deg): Resets the current viewing perspective to the isometric view that looks toward the origin through the point (1,1,-1).
l Y-View: Resets the current viewing perspective to display the X-Z plane. This view looks along the Y axis towards the origin.
l X-View: Resets the current viewing perspective to display the Y-Z plane. This view looks along the X axis towards the origin.
l Z-View: Resets the current viewing perspective to display the X-Y plane. This view looks along the Z axis towards the origin.
l User: If User is selected, the offsets fields become available for input. The user may then define a view by constructing a vector from the origin of the global coordinate system to the location of the
viewer (who is at an infinite distance from the origin). When the View Vector dialog is accepted, the screen view will be displayed looking along the vector towards the global coordinate system
origin.
Model View Options
Related Topics
Command Reference
Previous View
The View/Previous command restores the previous view of the model. For example, if the user is zoomed into a defined area of a model and wants to glance at the model as a whole, the View/All
command would be selected. To return to the previously defined view, select View/Previous.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Display Mode
AutoPIPE models can be represented in three different modes: Single Line ( View/Single Line View), Double Line ( View/Wire-Frame View) , and 3D (View/Solid
Model View). Select one of the links below to view an example of each. While Single Line ("Stick" view) is the default, the user may work exclusively in any of
the modes, or toggle between them for best results.
l View/Single Line
l View/Wire-Frame
l View/Solid Model
Note: The number of wires represented in Wire-Frame view can be changed under View/settings.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Display Viewport
AutoPIPE models can be represented in three different view-ports: Single ( View/Single Viewport), Double (2) ( View/Double Viewports) , and Quad (4) (View/Quad Viewports). Select one of the links
below to view an example of each. While Single View-port is the default, the user may work exclusively in any of the other viewports, or toggle between them for best results.
Each view-port hosts its own camera thus allowing the user to view the model through different angles in each view-port.
In multiple view-ports, left mouse clicking in a view-port window selects that view-port.
l View/Single Viewport
l View/Double Viewport
l View/Quad Viewport
Switching Viewports will follow the rules below:

1. Switching from Quad to Double/Single and Double to Single will retain the view orientation from the previous Viewport.
2. Switching from Single to Double/Quad and Double to Quad will bring the previous view orientation to the selected Viewport
3. View/ Default All Viewports resets all the Viewports to default views and the active view panels are consistent i.e. Double Viewport = right panel, Quad Viewport = top right panel.
4. View / Default resets to active panel view corresponding to current Viewport.
6. Switching from Quad to Double Viewport sets the active 2 views (either top two or bottom two views) from the Quad Viewport. The active panel view will be consistent with the Quad Viewport.
Note: All displayed View-ports can be printed however the title is not printed on Double or Quad Viewports.
Related Topics
Command Reference
View Point Properties

The View/Point Properties command opens a floating window which contains additional information about the selected (active) point.
You may leave this information window open during a modeling session to display detailed point information. The Text window can also be opened by pressing (or [F3]). To close it, press [F3] again,
or re-select View/Point Properties.
Scrolling through the operating cases

Press Ctrl -> to scroll to the next 3 operating cases. Press Ctrl <- to scroll to the previous 3 operating cases. Continuing past the last 3 cases returns to the first 3 cases, and vice-versa. The first 3 operating
cases will be the default range after initially opening the Point Properties dialog. After closing the dialog, the current range is saved as the default range for the next time the Point Properties dialog is
opened. The current range is not saved upon exiting the program.
The total number of scrollable operating cases is specified in the General Options dialog. If some of the operating cases in the current range are outside of the total number of operating cases, the
corresponding columns will be displayed as blanks in the panel.
Command Reference
View Point Offsets

The View/Point Offsets command opens the Point Offsets dialog. The command allows you to review the offset values of the currently selected segment. If there is more than one page of information, use
[Pg Up] and [Pg Dn]. The ñ and ò keys can be used to switch between segments.
Command Reference
View AutoPLANT PXF Data

When the user invokes the (View/AutoPLANT PXF data), AutoPIPE will find the corresponding PXF component and display the information via a text file viewer (apipview). Since the raw AutoPLANT
PXF component data is not very readable, this command will replace the line item number with a more descriptive text, for example it will replace "2100" with "Class name " and so forth.
The PXF file is copied to a PXH file in order to avoid overwriting by AutoPIPE Nozzle File/Export/Nozzle Loads to AutoPIPE Nozzle or File/Export/AutoPLANT (*.pxf) and this PXH file is used for
viewing the data.
The first time this command is executed, it will create a readable version of the PXF, called PXG, which can be used for model investigations. For this reason, it will be slower the first time, when PXG is
not present.
Users are advised not to use File/Save As PXF, as the created model will not be similar to the original AutoPLANT model and some data like gaskets and bolts will be lost. The created file should only be
used to compare with original model and check for changes to the model, e.g., by overlaying the two models.
The PXH and PXD files are essential to displaying the PXF data. These files are created during PXF import. Once this command is executed, another file, PXI, is created and displayed. If the PXG file is
not present, it will also be created.
Node renumbering will not affect the results of this view command. For new nodes, there will be no PXF data to view.
If the point includes a support, then the support parent PXF record is printed first, followed by the support PXF record. If other supports are present at the same location, they will be shown as well, even
if they were deleted in AutoPIPE or during the import process.
The original PXF record for any supports in the model can be viewed using the View/AutoPLANT PXF Data menu command by selecting a support that has not been modified, i.e. the type has not been
changed since it was imported.
If a gasket, bolts or weld gaps or other deleted components ("DEL " in cadap.map file) are merged with an adjacent component like a valve or a flange, then the gasket or "DEL " component will be
shown as well.
The displayed data correspond to the component before or after the current point and may not be consistent with AutoPIPE convention of displaying data after the current point.
This feature does not currently display data for all user selected points and instead it uses the current point to display the data.
Other header information printed for each record are the node name, PXF/PXG line number, AutoPIPE axes mapping and point A00 coordinate shift from AutoPLANT coordinates. The PXF unit
dependent file (UNI) is read and the basic unit labels are shown as legends.
The displayed PXF data can be customized by the user through editing the AutoPLANT Visual Basic script file: \Rebis\xchg\pxf\opxfhdr.ebs (AutoPLANT version 2 or older) or \AutoPLANT
3D\xchg\pxf\opxfhdr.ebs (AutoPLANT version 3 or later). Care should be taken when editing the script file. The user should not remove or re-order existing data. User should assign numbers in the range
9000-9999 when writing customized data. Customized data will be displayed as is with the line item number and no descriptive text.
Field NAME DESCRIPTION

AutoPIPE Node Current point at cursor
Name
PXF Line Number Location where PXF record starts in .PXF File
AutoPIPE Axes Mapping between AutoPIPE and AutoPLANT Axes. This depends on the selected vertical axis upon import. It also depends on a flag in the CADAP.MAP. The flag is on the second
line under [ORIGIN] group. This flag will invert X and Z axis when Y is vertical.
A00 Coordinate This is the shift in coordinates performed during PXF import. A00 is the actual node name for the first point on segment A. If the name is different that A00, actual name is shown.
Shift When the user modifies A00 coordinates, the shift is updated accordingly.
This shift is zero when the ’SHIFT ORIGIN’ option is set to ’N’ in the [OPTIONS] section of CADAP.MAP file. If a small non-zero shift value is reported, when ’SHIFT ORIGIN’
flag is ’N’, it is due to coordinates truncation in the NTL file. Coordinate shift is typically performed to avoid loss of accuracy in coordinates. When X,Y and Z shifts are zero,
AutoPIPE and AutoPLANT global coordinates are the same (except for transformation shown under AutoPIPE axes). AutoPIPE and AutoPLANT coordinates are identical when the
’SHIFT ORIGIN’ flag is set to ’N’ and the vertical axis is Z in AutoPIPE. The units for this shift is the same as AutoPLANT units. You can shift the coordinates in AutoPIPE by
clicking at A00, use Modify/Point and select the option "Apply offsets to all following points". Make sure to convert the coordinates from inches to ft for English units or use the inch
symbol ( " ) when entering values.
PXF Units These are some of the units in the unit dependent .UNI file. Refer to UNI file for more units. (APENG.UNI for ENGLISH, APMET.UNI for metric and APMM.UNI for mixed metric
units).
DATA Title This is the title corresponding to a number field in the PXF file. If the field is new or user defined through a customized AutoPLANT script file \Rebis\xchg\pxf\opxfhdr.ebs
(AutoPLANT version 2 or older) or \AutoPLANT 3D\xchg\pxf\opxfhdr.ebs (AutoPLANT version 3 or later), actual number as in PXF file is displayed.
A sample PXF viewer data is shown below:
image\pxi_1.gif
Viewing current point Line Number using Point Properties screen
For imported PXF models, the line number is shown in the Point Properties screen as shown below:
image\f3line.gif
Display of PXF information in input and output reports
Note that the input listing and output reports will include AutoPLANT line number information. Also supports Mark and Tag numbers are shown in the new input listing format as well as in the
Restraints output report as shown below:
Version 6.1 input listing format:
H O T M O D U L U S (E6 psi)
POINT
NAME CASE 1 CASE 2 CASE 3
----- ---------- ---------- ----------
*** SEGMENT A , LINE # L200
A00 28.404 27.300
A14 28.404 27.300
*** SEGMENT B , LINE # L200
A11 28.404 27.300
B10 28.404 27.300
Output report:
*** Segment A begin *** Line # L200
A09 Max P (3a) HOOP 2090 16000
GR + Max P 84 34 1.00 1.00 (18) SUST 1287 16000
Cold to T1 105 87 581 1.00 1.00 (17) DISP 2229 24000
*** Segment A end *** Line # L200
*** Segment B begin *** Line # L200
A11 Max P (3a) HOOP 2090 16000
GR + Max P 22 12 1.34 1.45 (18) SUST 1076 16000
Cold to T1 70 343 94 1.34 1.45 (17) DISP 1921 24000
New Input Listing:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C O M P O N E N T D A T A L I S T I N G
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
From A05 to A06, DZ= -3.17 ft Bend
COMPONENT DATA (Bend, TIP= A05, Near= A05 N, Far= A05 F):
Long Elbow, Radius= 9.00 inch, Bend angle= 90.00 deg, End flanges= 0,
Flex= 6.590, SIFI= 2.27, SIFO= 1.89
A05, Coordinates, X= -5.75 ft, Y= 7.83 ft, Z= 0.00 ft
A05 N, Coordinates, X= -5.75 ft, Y= 7.08 ft, Z= 0.00 ft
A05 F, Coordinates, X= -5.75 ft, Y= 7.83 ft, Z= -0.75 ft
SUPPORT DATA:
A05 N, Variable Spring Hanger, Support Id= A05 N1, Connected to Ground,
Mark= SUPSH-6, Tag#= HANG#2, CompID= AT_BLID6SI5_F1, 1 hanger(s),
Undesigned
Restraint report
R E S T R A I N T R E A C T I O N S
Point Load FORCES (lb ) MOMENTS (ft-lb )
name combination X Y Z Result X Y Z Result
------ ----------- ------ ------ ------ ------ ------- ------- ------- -------
A00 Anchor
GR -6 -25 -265 267 85 -1119 149 1133
T1 463 -879 354 1055 569 1298 2806 3144
A05 N Spring [ID: A05 N1] Mark: SUPSH-6 Tag#: HANG#2
GR 0 0 -281 281 0 0 0 0
T1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
A07 Guide [ID: A07 1] Mark: SUPUB-6 Tag#: UBOLT#1
GR 0 45 68 82 0 0 0 0
T1 0 927 -324 982 0 0 0 0
A13 Guide [ID: A13 1] Mark: SUPUB-4 Tag#: UBOLT#2
GR 0 -49 91 104 0 0 0 0
T1 0 589 -187 617 0 0 0 0
If the PXD file is not present, this data will not be shown. Note that this line number and support data is stored in the PXD file. It is essential that you move or copy this PXD file in addition to the PXH
file every time you move the model to a different location, or when you are sending your model to Bentley Technical Support staff at support@bentley.com.
Tag Number Processing
The support tag numbers are unique for each imported support. Even after updating (changing support type or other data) or deleting some of the supports at the same location, the tag number should not
change.
The user has the option the set the tag number for imported supports with no tag numbers. In this case, AutoPIPE uses the first nonblank Tag number at the same point location. Refer to the [OPTIONS]
section in CADAP.MAP for this option.
If a new support is added in AutoPIPE at a point with imported support(s). The new support will have undefined MARK, but will take the first nonblank tag number at the point. This occurs as long as the
point is not deleted from the model. Node renumbering should not affect support Tags.
If a support point is deleted and added again, all supports at the point will have no tags or marks. This occurs even if the new point has the same name as before.
To remove Mark and Tag from the input and output reports, you would need to move or remove the PXD file containing this data.
Support Mark Number
The support Mark indicate the type of support in AutoPLANT. If the Mark is undefined, this indicates that this support is not an original AutoPLANT support. The Mark is part of SPEC database in
AutoPLANT. In the example above the Mark SUPSH-6 indicates a 6" spring hanger support, and SUPUB-4 refers to a 4" U-BOLT support.
To remove Mark and Tag from the input and output reports, you would need to move or remove the PXD file containing this data.
Command Reference
Transparency
The View/Transparency command displays a dialog to toggle ON/OFF the transparency (blending) of any component. This provides a useful feature to 'see-through' a component to observe the piping
system in the background.
Note: Some transparent components under a black background may be difficult to view.
Any component color can be modified under Tools/Settings/colors
Select/Unselect All
Command Reference
Hide Components
The View/Hide Components command displays a dialog to toggle ON/OFF the hiding of any component from the model plot. All the checkboxes are OFF by default so all components are visible.
Note: All components can also be displayed using View/Show All Components.
Select/Unselect All
Command Reference
View Show All Components

The View /Show All Components command performs two operations a) resets all segments = ON b) resets all the components on the Hide components dialog to make them visible.
Command Reference
Level of Detail
The View/Level of Detail command displays a dialog with the following options designed to speed up the viewing frame rate during zoom, pan or rotate operations by decreasing some of the model
details from the view. All the checkboxes are OFF by default except Draw Visible Objects Only.
Options for Pan/Zoom/Rotate

Hide Text
If this option is enabled then no text is displayed during pan, rotate or zoom operations.
Switch to Line Mode
If this option is enabled then plot changes to a single line view during pan, rotate or zoom operations.
Disable Lighting
If this option is enabled then the lighting and shading is disabled during pan, rotate or zoom operations.
Less Level of detail
If this option is enabled then the further from the camera, the less object detail can be seen.
Draw Visible Objects Only
If this option is enabled then only those objects inside the current view-port are processed. Any object beyond the current view-port is hidden.
Command Reference
View Settings
The View/Settings > Scale Factors Tab shows scale factors for single line and solid viewed components
The View/Settings > General Tab command displays a dialog with the following global view preferences.
Axes
Show If this option is enabled then Global axes are displayed on the screen.
Size (default = 7)
Enter a axes size between 1 and 20 inclusive.
Location (default = Bottom Left)
Select the location of the axes symbol from one of the four corners of the screen (Top Left, Top Right, Bottom Left and Bottom Right).
Text
Print Title If this option is enabled then the Titles are printed (default = ON).
Size (default = 10)
Enter a font size between 8 and 36 inclusive.
Distance (default = 2)
Enter a distance between 0 and 10 inclusive to plot the text for point name and lengths from the pipe or beams. The distance is proportional to the radius of the pipe/beam.
Font (default = Arial)
Enter a windows font type from the drop-down list.
Title Location (default = Top Left)
Select the location for the Title (Plot Title) from one of the four corners of the screen (Top Left, Top Right, Bottom Left and Bottom Right). This setting aligns the model name to the selected location
and other plot titles are aligned accordingly.
Support Gap Scale (default = 1)

Enter a value between 0.1 and 50 inclusive.
If any support gap is greater than the support gap scale factor x pipe OD then the support symbol in the gap direction only is hidden. This provides the user visual feedback that the support is probably not
active in this gap direction.
A warning message will be displayed if all gaps exceed the support gap limit then the complete support symbol will be hidden and the global consistency check will show this message with the location
of the gapped support.
Note: A gapped support will also show a line (single line view) or plate (solid model view) drawn a short distance from the pipe in the gap direction only.
Line Width (1 point)

Enter a value between 1 and 20 inclusive to change the line width for 1 point components e.g. support, anchors, concentrated forces, weight, xtra data, imposed support displacement and flanges
Line Width (2 point)

Enter a value between 1 and 20 inclusive to change the line width for 2 point components, e.g. pipe, valves, flex joints, nozzles, reducers, rigids and beams.
No. of Wires
Enter the number of wires represented in wire-frame view mode, default value = 8.
Cursor Thickness
Enter the line width thickness for the cursor "hollow box" symbol, default value = 1.
Large Cursor Size

Enter the size of the cursor "hollow box" symbol, default value = 10. (Valid sizes 0.1 to 100)
Show Origin
If this option is enabled, the origin of the model X,Y,Z = (0,0,0) is shown in the model, marked by a 'lollipop' symbol.
Show Tee Arrows

If this option is enabled then the tee arrows will be shown on the model, and can be selected. If this option is disabled then the tee arrows will not be shown on the model, and cannot be selected. This
option is intended to make it easier to select points near a tee. Having the tee arrows present sometimes makes it more difficult to select any points near a tee. Removing the tee arrows will make it easier
to select those points near a tee. This option is enabled by default.
Mouse Over for Point Symbols

If this option is enabled then the mouse over a point symbol is highlighted RED, at a bend all three point symbols , near, far and tip points are highlighted RED. When the mouse moves away the point
symbol reverts to the original color. Default = Enabled.
This feature provides the user assistance in selecting points on the model.
Point Symbols Mouse Over All Nodes On Mouse Over

Off Off Not Visible Do nothing
Off On Not Visible Make Visible (Highlighted RED)
On Off Visible Do nothing
On On Visible Highlight symbols RED
Note: If the point symbol is changed to a red color then this mouse over feature will not be visible.
Interpolate Colors in Code Compliance

If this option is enabled then colors associated with a stress or stress ratio shown on the code compliance check are interpolated along the element, otherwise if disabled the complete element is colored
based on the highest stress found at either end of the element. Default = Enabled.
Note: An element is defined between any 2 run points, any reducer or bend. Stresses are not calculated at flex joints, valves or flanges hence are shown as a grey color.
Hardware Acceleration
If this option is enabled then the level of acceleration and graphics performance is set to its highest level based on the graphics card. By default = Disabled.
Note: Disabling this option may be necessary or improve performance if the graphics video card does not support Open GL graphics and hardware acceleration.
Note: Restarting the application is required for any changes in this option to take effect.
Command Reference
Select Commands
The following options are provided in the Select menu:
Select Points
Defining a Range
Defining a Range by Segments
Select Connected Segments
Select Elevation Range
Selecting All Components in the Model
Clearing the Selected Range
Defining a Range by Pipe Properties
Select Anchors
Select Supports
Select Bends
Select Tee Points
Select Flanges
Select Valves
Select Flexible Joints
Select Reducers
Select Nozzles
Select Pipes with Rigid Options
Select Soil Points
Select Distributed Load Points
Select Beams
Select Line Number
Select Xtra Data Commands
Command Reference
Select Points
In some cases, you may want to define a range which includes one or more discrete points. Selecting a series of contiguous points will form a range comprising all components contained in the range.
Note: Alternatively, the Control key selection method allows you to select a set of components that are not continuous. To create a selection set that includes components that are not part of a contiguous
run, use the Control key as follows: To add more components to this set, or delete points from this set press and hold the Control key and select additional elements.
l How To select single points:
1. Select Select/Point to open the Point control window.
2. Designate the point in the range by typing the point name in the "Point" field, or by selecting a point in the drawing with the mouse.
3. Press TAB to select the point if it was typed in. The point is highlighted in red.
4. The selection dialog is re-displayed, allowing you to add additional points to the selection set. Repeat the step above until the selection set is defined as desired, then press Ok.
Note: You may use the following toolbar buttons while the Point control window is displayed to Add to, Remove from or Togglei the highlighted selection.
Select > Point Option to Add Anchors
Getting Started: Ranges
Further Considerations
Related Topics
Command Reference
Defining a Range
In AutoPIPE, a range is a group of contiguous points determined by a beginning or "From" point and an ending or "To" point. A series of ranges may be designated and combined to form a "selection
set", which will be the highlighted portion of the model to be manipulated.
Before undertaking any editing functions (i.e., Cut, Copy, Paste, Delete, Scale, Rotate), it is necessary to first define a range of points to be acted upon. When selecting a continuous range, the easiest
method is usually to select the first point with a mouse, then press and hold down the Shift key while selecting the last point. The range is highlighted in red. As an alternative to this method, ranges can
also be defined using one of the commands in the Select menu to create a set of components based on defined points, pipe property, segment, component type, and other properties.
l How To select a range:
1. Select Select/Range to open the Range control window.
2. Designate the first point in the range by typing the point name in the "From point" field, or by selecting a point in the drawing with the mouse.
3. Designate the last point in the range by typing the point name in the "to point" field, or by selecting it with the mouse.
4. Press OK to select the range of points that lie between these values. The range is highlighted in red.
5. The selection dialog is re-displayed, allowing you to add additional points to the selection set. Repeat the step above until the selection set is defined as desired, then press Cancel.
Note: You may use the following toolbar buttons while the Range control window is displayed to Add to, Remove from or Toggle the highlighted selection.
Note: Select Range (F6) cannot be applied for selecting beams
Related Topics
Command Reference
Defining a Range by Segments

i
In some cases, you may want to define a range which includes one or more segments.
l How To select segments:
1. Select Select/Segment.
image\ranges.gif
2. In the to add field, input the desired segment name, then press Select.
3. Continue adding as many segments to the range as desired by inputting the segment name in the field provided, then pressing Select.
4. When the range is complete, press Finish.
Note: You may use the following toolbar buttons while the Segment control window is displayed to Add to, Remove from or Toggle the highlighted selection.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Select Connected Segments

The Select/Connected Segments command opens the Select Connected Segments dialog. This dialog can be used to select one or more groups of connected segments. In bigger models with complex
piping, the user may want to view the pipeline segments which are connected to each other. Selecting the connected segments also becomes very helpful in the case where the user wants to export some
selected pipeline to Stress ISO.
Note: Stress ISO in AutoPIPE does not export disconnected pipelines. This option makes it easier for the user to select connected piping segments and export to Stress ISO without any disconnected
pipeline errors.
Every group of connected segments is listed in the Select Connected Segments dialog with a group tag, i.e. "Group1", "Group2", etc. The names of the segments included in each group are listed under
the group tag.
Note: Any points that were selected in the model before using the Select/Connected Segments menu command will remain selected, unless the Clear Selection button is pressed. A warning message
appears at bottom of the dialog if any points are already selected in the model when entering the dialog.
See Also:
Select Points
Command Reference
Select Elevation Range

In some cases, you may want to define a range which includes all points and components between two elevations. This feature can be useful when defining Static Earthquake Scale Factors.
l How To select all points and components between two elevations:
1. Select Select/Elevation.
2. Designate the first elevation by typing the elevation in the "From elevation" field, or by selecting a point at the desired elevation in the drawing with the mouse.
3. Designate the second elevation by typing the elevation in the "to elevation" field, or by selecting a point at the desired elevation in the drawing with the mouse. Click Ok to show the highlighted elevation range.
4. Continue adding as many elevation ranges as desired by repeating steps 1 to 3 provided toolbar button is depressed.
Note: You may use the following toolbar buttons while the Elevation control window is displayed to Add to, Remove from or Toggle the highlighted selection.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Selecting All Components in the Model

Select all components in the model. Every component in the model will be highlighted.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Clearing the Selection Set

Use this option to deselect all components in the model. This will disable highlighting of all points and components in the model.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Defining a Selection by Pipe Properties

AutoPIPE allows you to create a filter-based selection from components which share known pipe properties.
l How To select components with specified pipe properties:
1. Select Select/Pipe Property Points to display the Select Pipe Property Points dialog.
2. Define the desired pipe properties in the dialog, then press OK. Objects in the model which match ALL the criteria specified in the dialog will be added to the selection.
Note: You may use the following toolbar buttons before entering the Select Pipe Property Points window is displayed to Add to, Remove from or Toggle the highlighted selection.
The following fields are available:
Pipe Identifier
Logical Method
Nominal dia
Schedule
Outside dia
Thickness
Material
Related Topics
Command Reference
Select Anchors
Selects all anchors in the model.
Note: Prior to executing this command, you may use the following toolbar buttons to Add to, Remove from or Toggle the highlighted selection.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Select Supports
Selecting Select/Supports displays the Select Supports dialog. The Select Supports dialog can be used to select supports in the model. Supports can be selected based on the support type and connection.
The Select All option can be used to select/unselect every support type in the Select Supports dialog. However, if the connection type is specified as "Grounded" or "Connected" using the Support
Connection Type field, only those that have the specified connection are selected.
Note: You may use the following toolbar buttons prior to executing this command to Add to, Remove from or Toggle the highlighted selection.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Select Bends
Selects all bend components in the model.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Select Tee Points

Selects all tee points in the model.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Select Flanges
Selects all flanges in the model.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Select Valves
Selects all valve components in the model.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Select Flexible Joints

Selects all flexible joint components in the model.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Select Reducers
Selects all reducer components in the model.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Select Nozzles
Selects all nozzle components in the model.
Related Topics
Command Reference

Selects all components with any rigid options in the model or components for a given rigid option.
l How To select all points with a specified rigid option:
1. Select Select/Pipes with rigid options. The Select Rigid Options dialog is displayed.
2. Select a rigid option from the list, then press OK.
The following field is available:
Rigid Options
See Also
Rigid Options Over Range

Command Reference
Select Soil Points

Selects all soil points in the model or soil points for a given soil id.
l How To select all points with a specified soil id:
1. Select Select/Soil Points. The Select Soil Points dialog is displayed.
2. Select a soil id from the list or (ALL) in the dialog, then press OK. If (ALL) is selected all points with soil will be selected. If a soil Id is specified, only points in the model which have the soil id will be selected.
Soil ID
Related Topics
Command Reference
Select Distributed Load Points

Selects all points with a distributed load in the model.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Select Beams
Selects all beams in the model.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Select Line Number

This utility allows selecting a single Line Number for imported PXF models. . A dropdown list of line numbers will be shown. Only valid line numbers will be listed in the dropdown list. Any deleted
lines will not be part of the list. Once a line number is selected, current selection is cleared and the line is highlighted. You cannot select multiple Line Numbers using this function but can be done using
the segment grid
Once the line is selected the user can modify or delete the selection. One common thing to do is to update design pressure/temperature data for the line. Temperature data can also be imported during PXF
import, using an external LINELIST.TXT file that include the operating data for the whole system. Please refer the file LINELIST.EX1 for a sample LINELIST.TXT file.
Line Numbers are printed in the Model input listing and in the output reports for imported models. The View/Point Properties (F3) command, displays the Line Number for the current point.
Note: AutoPIPE does allow editing Line Numbers in the segment grid
See Also:
Segment line number
Segment grid
Command Reference

The following Select Xtra Data Commands are provided:
Select Xtra Data Points: User SIF & Flexibility
Select Xtra Data Points: Additional Weight
Select Xtra Data Points: Concentrated Force
Select Xtra Data Points: Imposed Support Displacement
Select Xtra Data Points: Hydrodynamic Data
Select Xtra Data Points: Cut Short
Select Xtra Data Points: User Weld Efficiency Factor
Select Xtra Data Points: Static Earthquake Scale Factor
Select Xtra Data Points: Reference Point
Command Reference
Select Xtra Data Points: User SIF & Flexibility

Selects all points with a User SIF & Flexibility in the model.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Select Xtra Data Points: Additional Weight

Selects all points with an Additional Weight in the model.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Select Xtra Data Points: Concentrated Force

Selects all points with a Concentrated Force in the model.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Select Xtra Data Points: Imposed Support Displacement

Selects all points with an Imposed Support Displacement in the model.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Select Xtra Data Points: Hydrodynamic Data
Selects all points with Hydrodynamic Data in the model.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Select Xtra Data Points: Cut Short

Selects all points with a Cut Short in the model.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Select Xtra Data Points: User Weld Efficiency Factor

Selects all points with a User Weld Efficiency Factor in the model.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Select Xtra Data Points/Members: Static Earthquake Scale Factor

Selects all points with a Static Earthquake Scale Factors for Points or Members in the model.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Select Xtra Data Points: Reference Point

Selects all points with a Reference Point in the model.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Model Creation & Editing Commands

The Insert, Modify and Delete menus define, develop and build a new model or make modifications to an existing one. Note that these three menus present nearly the same list of options.
l To insert a component at the active point, simply select it from the Insert menu and define its properties in the subsequent dialog. Windows users may also press a component icon on the toolbar.
More Info
l To modify an existing component, select its corresponding description from the Modify menu. A dialog opens which allows you to edit the object’s properties. You may also double-click on any
component to edit its values.
More Info
l To delete a component, select its name from the Delete menu.
More Info
Note: Different techniques are available to perform these same operations. For example, press on any component in the toolbar to insert it at the current point. Double click on any component in a model
to edit it. Select a component then press the Del key to remove it.
Pipe Properties
Table of Pipe Materials
Modify Properties of Pipe Identifier
Delete Unused Pipe ID
Converting a Point Type
Pressure & Temperature (Operating Loads)
Replace Pressure & Temperature
Soil Properties
Distributed Loads
Segment
Delete Rotating Equipment
Delete Wave Data
Command Reference
Converting a Point Type

The Modify/Convert Point to commands enable the user to quickly convert a selected point to one of the following types:
l Run
l Bend
l Tee
Convert a Run Point Junction to Bend
Convert a Run Point to a Tee
Bend Considerations:
If a run point is being converted to a bend point, AutoPIPE assumes the standard defaults (long radius elbow, with no midpoint) when creating the bend. If a bend point is being converted to a run point,
the near and far bend points are deleted, and the TIP is converted to the run point.
Tee Considerations:
If a run point is being converted to a tee point, AutoPIPE assumes the standard defaults (welding) when creating the tee. If a Tee point is being converted to a run point, the arrows associated with the new
tee are deleted, and the run point reverts to an old tee.
Note: A segment cannot be inserted at the near point of a two point component (such as Valve, Reducer, Flexible Joint, or Nozzle). With the functions "Convert to Tee" or "Convert to Point" the
component is first removed and the near point is converted to a Tee point or Run point respectively.
Command Reference

Select Delete/Structural Model to remove all Beams, their associated data and imposed displacements imported using PipeLink exchange file (File > Insert Model
> Model from STAAD Using PipeLink (*.pipelink)). The following will be removed from the model:
n Beams and associated nodes that were created in AutoPIPE or imported via PipeLink
n X Section IDs and Material Data (Standard and user-defined)
n Anchors placed on beams
n Supports placed on beams, except the ones connected to piping points
n Xtra Data and loads defined on beams and beam nodes, including Point Loads imported via PipeLink
n Imposed displacements on supported piping points imported using PipeLink
Notes:
1. Supports placed on piping points, and connected to beam nodes, will be grounded.
2. Supports placed on beams connected to piping points will be placed on corresponding piping points and grounded.
3. PipeLink data files will get removed.
4. Subsequent export using PipeLink would not have any previous revision record, unless an import has been performed
When this option is selected the user will be prompted with the following confirmation dialog:
Pressing the 'No' or 'Cancel' buttons will stop the program from deleting any of the model data described above. The undo/redo option will apply to the Delete/Structural Model command.
See Also:
Model from STAAD Using PipeLink (*.pipelink)
Model to STAAD Using PipeLink (*.pipelink)

Command Reference

Select Delete/Rotating Equipment to display the Delete Rotating Equipment dialog, which enables the user to delete rotating equipment data in the model. If there are no rotating equipment data in the model,
this dialog will not be displayed. Instead, A note message will be displayed to indicate that no rotating equipment data were found.
Rotating equipment ID
Rotating Equipment
Command Reference

Select Delete/Unused Pipe Identifier to display the Delete Unused Pipe ID dialog, which enables the user to delete unused pipe identifiers in the model. If there are no unused pipe identifiers in the model, this
dialog will not be displayed. Instead, A note message will be displayed to indicate that no unused pipe identifiers were found.
Unused Pipe ID
Command Reference
Delete Unused Section ID

Select Delete/Unused Section Identifier to display the Delete Unused Section ID dialog, which enables the user to delete unused section identifiers in the model. If there are no unused section identifiers in the
model, this dialog will not be displayed. Instead, A note message will be displayed to indicate that no unused section identifiers were found.
Unused Section ID
Command Reference
Delete Unused Soil ID

Select Delete/Unused Soil Identifier to display the Delete Unused Soil ID dialog, which enables the user to delete unused soil identifiers in the model. If there are no unused soil identifiers in the model, this
dialog will not be displayed. Instead, A note message will be displayed to indicate that no unused soil identifiers were found.
Unused Soil ID
Command Reference
Delete Wave Data

Select Delete/Wave Data to display the Delete Wave Data dialog, which enables the user to delete wave data in the model. If there are no wave data in the model, this dialog will not be displayed.
Instead, A note message will be displayed to indicate that no wave data were found.
Wave data name
Wave Loads
AutoPIPE Reference Information
Design Pressure & Temperature

The Design Pressure & Temperature dialog is used to define the design pressure, temperature, and stress intensity for ASME NB, NC, and ND piping codes only.
Current Point
Design Pressure
Peak Pressure
Design Temperature
Design Sm
Auto - Design Sm
Design Sh
Auto - Design Sh
Design Sy
Auto - Design Sy
Apply only blue changes

Command Reference
Distributed Loads
The Distributed Load command enables the user to define a linearly distributed load over a specified range of points. The loading can be added to any one of the defined static load cases.
1. To insert a linearly distributed load over a specified range of points, select Distributed Load from the Insert pull-down menu to display the Distributed Loads dialog.
2. Complete the fields in the dialog.
3. Press OK to distribute the load along the specified range.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Linear Loads dialog:
Load Case to combine with
Forces in (units)
Note: Distributed loads can only be modified or deleted using the input grids. An error message will be delivered when the Modify/Distributed Load or Delete/Distributed Load menu commands are
selected.
Command Reference
Modify Properties of Pipe Identifier

The Modify/Properties of Pipe Identifier command is a powerful AutoPIPE feature, with it you can modify the pipe properties of every component assigned to a particular pipe identifier. Select
Modify/Properties of Pipe Identifier from the menu to display the dialog. Select one of the Pipe IDs from the selection list.
The Pipe dialog is displayed. Modify the properties as desired, then press OK to apply the changes. Every component associated with the ID will now share the newly defined properties.
Note: A new pipe identifier cannot be created using this command. Instead, use the Modify/Pipe Properties over Range command.
If the Delete/Pipe Properties command is selected, the user is prompted to select from a list of defined Pipe Identifiers. If the Pipe ID is currently assigned to objects in the model, the user will be prevented
from deleting it; otherwise, the ID will be deleted from the system.
Modify a Pipe Identifier
Modify Pipe ID (Input Grids)
Command Reference
Pipe Properties
Every object placed in a model is associated with a particular set of pipe properties. You can define new pipe properties to begin at a selected point by utilizing the Insert/Pipe Properties command.
During the model creation process, these values may be modified by selecting a range in the model then issuing the Modify/Properties of Pipe Identifier command.
i Unused pipe identifiers can be deleted
from the model by selecting the Delete/Pipe Properties command.
After opening the dialog, modify any values as desired, then press OK to apply the changes to the selected range of pipe. The manner in which this dialog is updated depends on the piping code in use;
while other values are updated based on the cross-reference definitions established in AutoPIPE libraries.
Note: You should not use the Pipe command to modify the Pipe identifier, or to globally modify the properties of every element associated with a given Pipe ID. For either of these tasks, utilize the
Modify/Properties of Pipe Identifier command. You can also use the Modify/Pipe Properties over Range command.
Note: Select View/Show/Pipe Properties or press Ctrl+J to (1) display the model in contrasting colors for all pipe identifiers, or (2) highlight pipes which have a specified pipe identifier, or (3) filter the
display so that pipe with defined properties is accented.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Pipe dialog. Some of these fields are dependant on the current piping code (as noted in the links below):
Pipe Identifier Density (Insulation) Cold allow (Sc)
Tag No. Clad thickness Ratchet C4
Nominal: (diameter) / Schedule Clad material Min. yield (Sy)
Actual O.D. and Thickness Clad density %Proof-Room (SPFc)
Corrosion Lining (thickness) Ultimate(Su)
Mill Tol Density (Lining) Room Design (f)
Insulation Line Class Long. Modulus
Material (Insulation) Long. weld factor Hoop Modulus
Circ. weld factor Shear Modulus
Specific gravity of contents Density
Suppress low temp warnings Poisson's Ratio
Material Thermal Exp.
Composition
Notes:
1. The program will update the pipe material data when loading pre- B31.8:2003 models in order to populate the Su value used by the B31.8:2003 and later code, however the existing defined yield stress
will be used.
2. AutoPIPE will automatically extrapolate thermal expansion data (including the thermal coefficients for ASME NB) when the operating or ambient temperature is above or below the material library
data.
Additional Fields for ASME B31.1 and B31.3 Appendix P (2004 Only)
Range reduction factor
Additional Fields for ASME B31.3 (except for 2004 Appendix P)

Stress range factor
Additional Fields for ASME B31.3 and the 2009 Addenda of B31.1
Long Weld E Fact
Long Weld W Fact
Additional Fields for BS7159

If BS7159 is entered as the piping code in the General Model Options dialog, the Pipe Properties dialog will display a unique set of fields which are specific to this piping code.
l Lam. Type
l Lam. ref.
l Actual I.D
l Design Thk
l Cold des.strain
Note: If the Laminate reference = NS, then the pipe material drop down list is available and for standard BS7159 laminates e.g. L25, L40 etc, the longitudinal, hoop and shear modulus values are
calculated from the Unit modulus (read from the material library) & design thickness entered - this assumes material has defined composition code = 0. For non-standard BS7159 FRP materials e.g.
Ameron , provided the composition code = 1 in defined in the material library then longitudinal, hoop and shear modulus values are read from library and inserted directly into the pipe properties dialog
or grid.
Note: When the composition value = 0, the Long. And Circ. Moduli are displayed but non-editable for laminate types 1 & 2 but only the long. modulus is non-editable for laminate type 3. When the
composition value = 1, the Long., Circ. And Shear Moduli are displayed but all non-editable. When the Pipe Material = NS, the Long., Circ. And Shear Moduli are displayed and all editable.
Additional Fields for EN13480

If EN13480 is entered as the piping code in the General Model Options dialog, the Pipe Properties dialog will display a unique set of fields which are specific to this piping code.
l Product
l Source
l Elongation Al (%)
l Elongation At (%)
l Rp0.2 or ReH
l Rp1.0 (A>=30)
l Rm
Note: For piping code = 'EN13480 European Code', selecting a material source other than 'EURO', 'PHYS', or 'NS' in the Pipe Properties dialog will cause the program to display the warning message
below.
"W31-91: The selected non-EN material source has verified mechanical
properties from non-EN sources but European certifying bodies
typically complete an independent appraisal for these materials
and therefore may set different design values. "
Additional Fields for ASME III NB, NC, ND

l Long. Weld Type
Additional Fields for ASME III NB only

l Fatigue Curve
l Environmental Factor
Additional Fields for SNIP 2.05.06-85 Oil & Gas code

n Yield (R2H)
n Ultimate (R1H)
n Safety Factor K1
n Safety Factor K2
n Category Factor m
Note: When using the SNiP code, the labels for Minimum Yield and Ultimate are changed to Yield (R2H) and Ultimate (R1H).
Additional Fields for ISO 14692 code

n Actual I.D
n Sigma al (0:1)
n Sigma al (2:1)
n Sigma hl (2:1)=Qs
n Sigma al (1:1)
n Sigma hl (1:1)
n Poisson's Vmin=Vha
n A2 Chem Resist
n A3 Cyc. Service
Modify a Pipe Identifier
See Also:
Standard Pipe Cross Sections from Libraries
Command Reference
Pressure and Temperature (Operating Loads)

When Pressure and Termperature is selected from the Insert or Modify pull-down menu, the Pressure & Temperature dialog is displayed.
The Pressure & Temperature dialog enables the user to define specific temperature and pressure data for each operating load condition (initialized in the General Model Options dialog; maximum of 100
permitted), beginning at the current point displayed in the dialog, or over a range of selected points. This dialog is automatically displayed during the definition of a new system, but must be selected
manually if a new segment inserted into the model operates under different loads than the original segment.
Additional functionality is provided in the Modify/Pressure & Temperature menu option. Click Modifying Pressure and Temperature Over a Range for a detailed discussion of the following features:
l Identify with gray if field values differ over the selected range.
l To apply only blue changes to the currently selected range of points.
l To interactively review the updating of allowables.
l To control whether user defined allowables are overridden.
Note: When modifying over a range, the default pressure and temperature data are for the point displayed in the dialog.
Pressure & temperatures are not applied to beam members.
Select View/Show/Temperature or press Ctrl+T to display the model in contrasting colors for all temperature values, or to highlight pipes which have a specified temperature value. Select View/Show/Pressure
or press Ctrl+U to display the model in contrasting colors for all pressure values, or to highlight pipes which have a specified pressure value.
The program only activates the input fields for the number of operating (or thermal) load conditions specified in the System dialog (i.e., one load condition specified would activate the Load 1 input
fields, while the other are closed to input).
Five(5) operating cases that can be displayed in the Pressure & Temperature dialog at one time. To handle a maximum of 100 operating cases, the dialog will be capable of scrolling 5 cases at a time
using the "Select cases" checkboxes in the dialog.
Select cases (1 to 5, 6 to 10, 11 to 15, 16 to 20, 21 to 25, 26 to 30, 31 to 35, 36 to 40, 41 to 45, 46 to 50, ... ,91 to 95, 96 to 100):
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Pressure & Temperature dialog:
Pressure Design (f) and Design (fe)
Temperature Yield (Sy)
Auto Ultimate (Su)
Expansion Hot Design
Hot modulus Apply only blue changes
Hot allow.(Sh) Delta T's
%Proof- Hot (SPFh)
Design (SD)
Ave. rupture (SAR)

If BS7159 is entered as the piping code in the General Model Options dialog, the Pipe Properties dialog will display a unique set of fields which are specific to this piping code.
l Design Strain
l Temp. k-fac
Note: Only the hot longitudinal modulus is displayed for BS7159

If EN13480 is entered as the piping code in the General Model Options dialog, the Pipe Properties dialog will display a unique set of fields which are specific to this piping code.
l Rp0.2t or ReHt
l Rp1.0t (A>=30)
l Tensile (Rmt)
l Creep (fcr)
l Hot allow. (fh)
Additional Fields for Russian SNIP

If SNIP 2.05.06-85 Oil & Gas is entered as the piping code in the General Model Options dialog, the Pipe Properties dialog will display a unique set of fields which are specific to this piping code.
l Kh
Additional Fields for ISO 14692

If ISO 14692 is entered as the piping code in the General Model Options dialog, the Pipe Properties dialog will display a unique set of fields which are specific to this piping code.
n Temp A1-fac.
n Temp. k-fac.
n Poissons Vmin
Set New Pressure and Temperature
Modify Pressure and Temperature Loads
Graphically Review Press Temp Loads
Command Reference
Replace Pressure & Temperature

Select Modify/ Operating Load by Value to display the Replace Pressure & Temperature dialog, which enables the user to replace an existing temperature or pressure over the entire model for a single or all
operating load cases. If temperatures are replaced, all temperature dependent material properties will be automatically updated based on new temperature.
Operating Load Case
Pressure value Replace with (pressure)
Temperature value Replace with (temperature)

Command Reference

Selecting Rigid Options Over Range from either the Insert or Modify menu enables the user to create/modify rigid properties for piping components over the selected range. The Rigid options can only be
applied to runs, bends and reducers. A component or a range of components must first be selected. When Rigid Options Over Range is selected from the Insert or Modify, the Rigid Options dialog is
displayed. Press OK to accept the rigid options. The components with rigid options are graphically displayed in magenta on the model. Rigid options will not be applied to valves, flexible joints, and
nozzles. During the analysis, the material elastic modulus of the rigid components will be increased by a rigid stiffness factor (typically 1000). The rigid stiffness factor can be modified by selecting
Tools/Model Options/Edit.
The Insert operation defines rigid options for all applicable components in the selected range. The specified rigid options will be override any previous rigid options. For the first instance of inserting
Rigid Options, the default values for the "Include weight" and "Include thermal expansion" fields in the Rigid Options dialog will be set to "No" and "Yes", respectively. The default values for subsequent
entries will be set to the values from the previous entry. If the selected range does not contain any components that can be set to rigid, i.e. runs, bends or reducers, then the following an error message will
be displayed. Also, if no range was selected before inserting, then an error message will be displayed.
The Modify operation updates only the components that already have rigid options defined. The default values for the "Include weight" and "Include thermal expansion" fields in the Rigid Options dialog
will be set to the values of the first rigid component in the selected range. If there are no rigid components in the selected range to modify, then an error message will be displayed. Also, if no range was
selected before inserting, then an error message will be displayed.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Rigid Options dialog:
Include Weight
Include Thermal Expansion
Note: Starting with version 6.20, the pre-defined pipe identifier named "RIGID" will no longer be available when creating new models. When opening Pre-6.20 models, the "RIGID" pipe identifier will
be removed from the model database if it has not been assigned to any components in the model. If the "RIGID" pipe identifier has been assigned to a component in a pre-6.20 model, the pipe identifier
will be converted to a normal pipe identifier that can be edited by the user.
See Also
Rigid Options Modeling Considerations
Rigid Stiffness Factor
Delete Rigid Options
Show Pipes with Rigid Options

Command Reference
SAM / MSRS Support Group

Selecting SAM / MSRS Support Group from the Insert menu will display the SAM / MSRS Support Group dialog. The SAM / MSRS Support Group dialog can be used to select a SAM case, i.e. S1 to
S10, and assign a support group number, i.e. 1 to 20. All supports found in the currently highlighted points will be assigned the support group number and SAM case selected.
Note: Any support assigned a support group number and SAM case using the SAM / MSRS Support Group dialog will appear on the Imposed Disp. tab on the Input Grid. The SAM displacements will
be set to 0 by default.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the SAM / MSRS Support Group dialog:
SAM Case Number
Support Group No.
See Also:
MSRS / ISM Response Spectrum Theory
Seismic Anchor Movement Analysis

Command Reference
Segment
In AutoPIPE, segments are used to define logical portions of piping, and all piping points must be associated with at least one segment. Segments can stand alone, or they can be connected to other
segments at a branch or junction point. In the second case, a point in the model will belong to both segments. Judicious layout of segments in a piping system model can greatly aid in the manipulation of
the model itself. This is why many AutoPIPE command sequences are geared to the segment, or a portion thereof.
Note: The new Tee component in AutoPIPE automatically creates segments and eliminates the necessity for using the Segment dialog. This new tee does not replace the segment approach but provides
an additional method for defining segments.
The concept of "Segments" in AutoPIPE is can be thought of as equivalent to the "Line Number" terminology used in piping drawings and CAD applications.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Segment dialog:
Segment name
Name of first point
Offset from which point
Offsets (X, Y, Z)
Pipe Data Identifier
Create a New Disconnected Segment
Edit Controls
l To insert a new segment
To insert a new segment, select Insert/Segment from the menu. After completing the dialog, press OK. If a new Pipe ID was entered, the Pipe dialog is displayed. After defining these properties, the
crosshairs are positioned at the starting point of the new segment.
l To delete a segment (and all the components placed on it):
1. Place the crosshairs on any point along that segment. Check the status bar to ensure that the Segment which should be deleted is the active one.
2. Select Delete/Segment from the menu.
3. A dialog is displayed requesting confirmation. Press OK to remove the entire segment from the model.
See Also:
Understanding Pipe Segments (Getting Started)
Command Reference
Table of Pipe Materials

AutoPIPE has material libraries containing generic and code-dependent pipe materials. Refer to Standard Pipe Materials for the names and properties of these materials. When the name of a code material
is specified by selecting the desired name from the selection list, AutoPIPE will automatically recover the code-dependent cold and hot allowable stress values, along with the properties for the associated
standard material (see table).
Standard Description
Material ID
AL Aluminum
AU Austenitic Stainless
BR Brass
BZ Bronze
CI Gray Cast Iron
CM Carbon-Moly
CN Copper-Nickel
CR Straight Chrome
CS Low Carbon
MC Medium Chrome Moly

HC High Carbon
IC Intermediate Chrome
Moly
KM K-Monel
LC Low Chrome
MO Monel
NI Nickel
NS Non-standard
ST Type 310 Stainless
Pipe Material Notes (Standard Piping Codes)
Pipe Materials Notes for Piping Code BS 7159

Command Reference
Soil Properties
The Soil Properties command
i enables the user to define soil properties in order to model the support restraint offered by a soil surrounding sections of buried piping.
Note: Refer to the PipeSOIL Appendix for a detailed discussion of modeling buried pipe systems and estimating soil properties.
The Soil Properties command appears in the Insert, Modify and Delete menus. To insert soil properties, a range must first be selected in the model. Modification of Soil properties can be accomplished by
selecting Modify > Properties of Soil Identifier command and specifying the "Soil identifier" to recall previous values. The properties of soil can be generated using the 'Enter Soil Properties' button. A
soil calculator dialog is presented to the user which calculates three sets (low, high and average) of soil stiffness properties using the input parameters provided by the user.
Note: Using the Modify/Soil Properties Over Range menu command will apply the new soil properties (from previously defined properties using the drop-down list, or entering new soil properties) to the
total selected range.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Soil Properties dialog:
Soil Identifier
Maximum spacing
Enter Soil Properties
Soil Stiffness
The following read only soil stiffness properties are provided in four different directions discussed in the end of the section. These properties can be modified using 'Enter Soil Properties' button and
making desired changes to the input parameters used for calculation of these properties.
Auto
k1, lb/in/ft
p1, lb/ft
k2, lb/in/ft
Yield Disp., inch
These properties can be used for the following directions:
Trans Horizontal
Longitudinal
Trans Vertical Up
Trans Vertical Dn
The following virtual anchor length read-only fields are available:
Lm, ft
La, ft
Lb, ft
See Also:
Soil Considerations
Pipe Soil Interaction: Transition Example
Soil Insertion Procedure
Soil Modification Procedure
Soil overburden stresses application on AutoPIPE piping points
Edit Soil Properties

The edit soil properties dialog generates the soil stiffness values by using a number of input parameters. There are two grids in the dialog. The top grid contains set of parameters which are needed for
calculating the stiffness values. The bottom grid contains the calculated values for a certain set of parameters. These stiffness values can be overwritten by the user.
Following fields are available in the Edit Soil Properties dialog:
Soil Identifier (read only)
SNIP Soil Data
Calculation Methods
Soil Type
Pipe Direction
Following input parameters are used for soil stiffness calculations, these parameters are in three sets low, high and average.
Outside Diameter, D, in
Depth to Centerline, H, in
Effective Unit Weight, above pipe, [lb/ft^3]
Effective Unit Weight below pipe, [lb/ft^3]
Total Unit Weight below pipe, [lb/ft^3]
Soil Cohesion, c
Friction Angle, φ, [deg]
Coating Factor, f
Coefficient of Pressure at Rest, K0
ASCE only parameters
Horizontal Yield Displacement, dp [inch]
Longitudinal Yield Displacement, dt [inch]
Vertical Up Yield Displacement, dqu [inch]
Vertical Dn Yield Displacement, dqd [inch]
AutoPIPE only parameters
Undrained Shear Strength, Su
Horizontal Stiffness Parameter, ki
Longitudinal Yield Displacement, y1L [inch]
Vertical Up Yield Displacement, y1u [inch]
Vertical Dn Yield Displacement, y1d [inch]
The following parameters are available on the grid however, they are used in the calculation of soil overburden loads and through wall bending stresses only.
Height of water on top of pipe [inch]
Soil adhesion, Ca [psf]
Generate
Stiffness
The following soil stiffness properties are provided in four different directions discussed later in the section.
Auto
k1, lb/in/ft
p1, lb/ft
k2, lb/in/ft
Yield Disp.,inch
These properties can be used for the following directions:
Trans Horizontal
Longitudinal
Trans Vertical Up
Trans Vertical Dn
Virtual Anchor Length
The following virtual anchor length read-only fields are available:
Lm, ft
La, ft
Lb, ft
Soil overburden loads
The following soil overburden read only field is available:
f (bending stress)
Seismic Wave data
The seismic wave data read-only field is available:
dT
See Also:
Soil Considerations
Pipe Soil Interaction: Transition Example
Command Reference
SNIP Soil Data

The following dialog helps the user add/modify the soil properties related to Russian SNIP piping code.
The dialog has following available fields (English units used):
SNIP Soil Type
Seismic Wave Velocity Cs (in/sec)
Soil Restraint Factor m0
Earthquake Magnitude
Auto (Seismic Acceleration)
Seismic Acceleration (in/s/s)
Pipeline responsibility factor k0
Earthquake recurrence factor kr
Soil Period T0 (sec)
Virtual Anchor Length Dialog

The virtual anchor length dialog calculates the virtual anchor lengths La, Lm and Lb. The user is required to select a certain pipe identifier, a point name that uses the pipe properties selected earlier and
an operating case from which the thermal properties are obtained. The data is used to calculate the respective variables for virtual anchor length.
Whenever any selection of the fields (Pipe Identifier, Point Name or Operating Case) is changed, the virtual anchor length is recalculated. The thermal expansion, temperature change and operating
pressure are read only fields. They fields only show the values related to the currently selected operating case. Once the user presses 'OK' button, these values are transferred to the soil calculator dialog.
The following fields are available in this dialog:
Pipe Identifier
Point Name
Operating Case
Thermal Expansion (read only)
Temperature Change (read only)
Operating Pressure (read only)
Lm (read only)
La (read only)
Lb (read only)
See Also
Soil Calculator
Soil Properties
Soil Overburden Loads

Soil overburden loads dialog os used for specifying the data used in the overburden & through wall bending stresses calculations.
The following fields are available with the dialog:
Pipe Identifier
Surface live load type
Pressure on pipe due to surface area
Trench laying condition
Modulus of passive soil fill reaction E'
Bending moment coefficient Kb
Deflection coefficient Kx
Deflection lag factor DI
Bedding constant K
Note: This dialog is available for B31.1-2004 or higher and ASME NC/ND 2004 or higher piping code years.
See also:
Soil overburden stresses application on AutoPIPE piping points

Command Reference
Seismic wave data

This dialog is used for entering the data related to seismic wave loads.
This dialog has following fields available:
Soil Identifier
Pipe Identifier
Soil input parameters
Seismic wave type
Seismic wave coefficient aw
Seismic wave curvature coefficient ak
Wave length of seismic wave
Seismic wave velocity at pipeline
Peak ground acceleration PGA
Peak ground velocity PGV
Assign seismic wave data above to all Soil Identifiers
Add axial and bending strain for calculation of temperature
Note: AutoPIPE calculates coefficient of expansion values based on expansion values of the material at ambient temperature + 10 deg F. In case of non standard (NS) material, the expansion values are
not available from the library. In this case AutoPIPE uses the expansion value for steel taken as 6.5E-6 in/in/deg F.
Command Reference
Component Reference
The following component reference help topics are available:
Placing and modifying points
Run Points
Bend Points
Tee
Flange
Valve
Flexible Joint
Reducer
Segment
Anchors
Nozzles
Supports
Xtra Data
Beams
Command Reference
Placing and modifying points

Insertion of a point in a new or existing system is done using the Run or Bend options in the Insert pull-down menu. Run points usually define a straight piping run, but can also be used to indicate the
location of a support or other element which exists along an otherwise straight section of pipe. Run points also mark the location of the TIP of a bend.
Selecting the Point option from the Modify menu enables the user to modify the coordinates of the specified point. This is an "intelligent" command that, when selected, will automatically bring up either
the Run Point dialog or the Bend Point dialog, as appropriate for the current point. (As an alternative, the user may specify Modify/Bend, although the same dialog is opened using either method.)
Selecting the Point option from the Delete menu enables the user to delete the specified point and all components and data associated with it. If a run point is deleted, the length and properties of that point
will be automatically added to the next point in the segment, thus preserving the overall structure of the segment. If a bend point is deleted, the bend is removed (including its tip, near & far points, as well
as intermediate nodes); however, no properties will be transferred to the next point as occurs with the deletion of a run point.
Insert Concentrated Load
Build a Branch from a Tee
Command Reference
Run Points
When Run is selected from the Insert or Modify menu, the Run Point dialog is displayed.
A run point defines a point on a straight section of the pipe system, and is intended to be collinear with the established pipe direction. However, if the run point is not collinear, a warning will be issued
when a global consistency check is performed, alerting the user that a kink has been introduced in the system. Kinks are allowed to exist, as they may be necessary to properly model the system.
However, if a kink wasn't intended, the user should adjust the point coordinates.
To exit the dialog and insert or modify the run point, click on the OK button. A section of pipe is drawn from the previous point to the newly defined run point.
Note: The Length field is useful for defining points along a skewed direction in space. However, note that the direction of a segment is not known when the current point is at the beginning of a segment
and immediately after a bend point.
Selecting the Point option from the Delete menu enables the user to delete the specified point and all components and data associated with it. If a run point is deleted, the length and properties of that point
will be automatically added to the next point in the segment, thus preserving the overall structure of the segment. If a bend point is deleted, the bend is removed (including its tip, near & far points, as well
as intermediate nodes); however, no properties will be transferred to the next point as occurs with the deletion of a run point.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Run Point dialog:
Add point Before/ After
Name of point
Offset from which point (O=Origin)
Generate Points
Use cylindrical coordinates system
Length (optional)
Offsets
Theta, Rad & Elv
Apply offsets to all following points
Pipe data identifier
Insert a Run
Insert Intermediate Run Points
Edit Controls
Connect to Another Segment
Create a New Disconnected Segment
Convert a Run Point Junction to Bend
Insert a Support
See Also
General Point Information
Command Reference
Bend Points
When Bend is selected from the Insert menu, the Bend Point dialog is displayed.
Note: Understanding how bends are drawn and modeled is an important AutoPIPE concept. For a description of TIPs and how bends are modeled, refer to the link below:
Understanding Bends
A bend indicates a change in piping direction. For each bend in a system, there are at least three points placed in the model by AutoPIPE. The most important of these, and the only one defined by the
user, is the tangent intersection point (TIP). The tangent points at the beginning and end of the bend are located automatically based on the location of the TIP.
To exit the dialog, click on the OK button. Unlike other AutoPIPE components, bends cannot be placed in a drawing until its orientation is known. Since the far bend point coordinates cannot be
calculated until the location of the next point is defined, the elbow cannot be drawn yet. A line extends from the previous point to the bends TIP as shown below.
image\ap-u0441.gif
The point represented is the TIP of the elbow. The next step is to orient the elbow along and axis by placing the next run point. After determining the bend’s orientation, it is drawn as shown below.
image\ap-u0442.gif
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Bend Point dialog:
Name of point
Add Point Before/After
Bend radius
Offset from which point (0=Origin)
Bend type
Cuts
Length (optional)
Offsets
Theta, Rad & Elv
Apply offset to all following points
Midpoint
Percentage around the bend
Flexibility Factor
Qualified Stress
Biaxial Type
Biaxial Ratio -r
Qualified Component
Insert Bends
Insert a Point on an Elbow for a Support
Bend Considerations
Modeling Examples
See Also
Command Reference
Tee
Tees can now be associated with any run point in a model. Depending on the layout, this will involve as few as one segment or as many as four segments, but is more commonly composed of two: the
header and the branch.
Note: The Tee component for AutoPIPE represents a new approach to dealing with segments. This new tee does not replace the segment approach but allows an additional method for defining tees. To
convert all tees in an older model to new tees refer to Opening an Existing Model .
The following actions are available for tees:
l Inserting a Tee: AutoPIPE allows for direct input of a tee using Insert/Tee or conversion of an existing point/tee into a new tee using Modify/Convert Point to/Tee . Once a point is defined as a new
Tee, it is drawn with arrows on each existing segment and additional arrows for undefined segments. Following along the conventions of the Run and Bend dialogs, the new Tee dialog defines a
new point to be inserted into the model as well as tee specific data, which includes a point name, offset, pipe-id, component type, orientation, and type of tee. A bitmap in the upper right hand
corner is displayed to show orientation of the Before or After point with respect to the new tee point.
l Navigating Tees: Unlike old tees, once defined the cursor can be placed at the center of a new tee. The current segment is displayed by highlighting the arrow on an existing or undefined leg. The
current segment or highlighted arrow can be changed using the arrow keys.
l Building off a Tee: It is unnecessary to insert a segment at a new tee, instead click on any arrow at the tee not associated with an existing leg, i.e. floating in space, and insert a new Run, Bend, or Tee.
AutoPIPE will automatically create a new segment and insert the desired component.
l Modifying a Tee: Select Modify/Tee or double click the center of a tee or any tee arrow to display the Tee Point dialog for modification. The modification of a tee or branch enables the user to also
change the tee type and, if appropriate, edit supplemental information required to calculate the stress intensification factor (SIF). When connecting two segments at the same point, or when
executing the Modify/Tee command, the Tee dialog is automatically displayed. Note that the name of the point where the tee will be inserted in provided at the top of this dialog. After a Tee type is
specified, the remainder of the dialog filters according to the values associated with that type of Tee.
Troubleshooting
It is important to check the connectivity at a tee to ensure a stable model. It maybe be disconnected from the model and if 2 segments cross and appear to intersect on the plot does not mean they are
connected.
l Check the tee arrows are all aligned to the pipe (i.e. if one tee arrow is floating in space the tee may be disconnected.)
l Using mouse cursor navigation i.e. click on the branch tee arrow should highlight red similarly clicking on the header tee arrows.
l Using keyboard navigation i.e. When the cursor is at the tee point then use UP or DOWN keys to 'jump' or toggle between the branch to header segment. The highlighted tee arrow will change.
l Check for overlapping point names on the plot i.e. if the point name at a tee cannot be clearly read, it usually indicates 2 coincident points which are not connected.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Tee Point dialog:
Add Point Before/After
Offset from which point
Length
Offsets
Theta, Rad & Elv
Apply offset to all downstream points
Tee component
Orientation
Use same segment name along header
Qualified Stress
Biaxial Ratio -r
Qualified Component
The other fields/parameters available in this dialog depend on the type of tee selected.
See related topics:
ASME B31.3 SIF requirements for Welding Tees and Contour Inserts
Insert a Tee
Build a Branch from a Tee
Connect to Another Segment
Tee Considerations
Incomplete Tee SIF Calculation
Command Reference
Flange
i
When Flange is selected from either the Insert or Modify menus, AutoPIPE will display the Flange dialog, enabling the user to apply a pipe flange to the current point in a system or modify an existing
flange. Standard flange data can be recalled from the component library or a nonstandard (user-defined) flange can be created. Selecting Flange from the Delete menu enables the user to easily delete a
flange.
Once all the data is entered as desired, press OK to create/modify the flange. An example of a flange is shown below.
The following fields/parameters are

provided in the Flange dialog:
Tag No. Weld Size
Flange Type Joint SIF
Pressure rating Series A/B
Weight Use weight factor

for bolt/nut weight
Bolt/Nut Weight
Insert Mating
Joint End Type Flange
Concave
Offset - Joint
Offset - Avg
Offset - Max
Additional Fields for Imported PXF/PCF Files

CAD Length
Note:
1. User-defined B1 and B2 values at flanges must be specified using the Joint Type & User SIF dialog. For ASME NB, NC, and ND there are no "User defined" Joint End Types for flanges or valves.
To apply user defined stress indices for ASME NB, NC, and ND, select Insert>Xtra Data>Joint Type & User SIF, and choose "User" in the Joint Type field.
2. When applicable the user-defined stress indices will override any calculated stress indices based on the Joint End Type in the Valve.
3. Flanges inserted on the first point of a new segment may not be plotted correctly until the next point is defined so the direction is known.
Insert a Flange
See Also:
Joint End Type Rules
Weld Size and Joint Offset Considerations
Flange Considerations
Xtra Data Commands

Command Reference
Valve
image\ap- When Valve is selected from either the Insert or Modify pull-downs, the Valve dialog is displayed. A variety of standard and non-standard valves may be inserted in an
u0444.gif AutoPIPE model. Based on a valve’s rating and type, many parameters can be recalled from the component library to reduce the need for extensive user-input.
Once all the data is entered as desired, press OK to create/modify the valve. A valve is represented graphically in AutoPIPE as shown at left.
In the nuclear industry there is a mandatory requirement to meet seismic acceleration criteria of 4g and 5g for valve COG points. To achieve this the valve actuator information
can be easily entered and the program plots on the screen.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Valve dialog:
Add Valve Before/After
Name of point at far end
Tag No.
Valve Type
Press. rating
Length
Offsets
Theta, Rad & Elv
Apply offset to all following points
Valve Weight
Surface area factor
Actuator Auto
Symbol
Actuator Weight
Actuator DX, DY, DZ offsets
Joint End Type
Concave
Joint SIF
Offset-joint
Offset - Avg
Offset - Max
Weld Size
Socket welding type
Insert flanges on both end
Note:
1. The Valve and Actuator (rigid beam) will behave as one object graphically i.e. when edited or deleted, both elements will be be modified or deleted. Double clicking the Actuator (rigid beam) or valve
symbol will display the valve dialog.
2. For earlier models built with version prior to version 9.1, will have the Actuator Auto option checked and Actuator offset fields set to 0 and Actuator weight = 0. All the weight will be entered under
valve weight. The mid point will be automatically created, however, the actuator point and beam will not be created.
3. For ASME NB, NC, and ND there are no "User defined" Joint End Types for flanges or valves. To apply user defined stress indices for ASME NB, NC, and ND, select Insert>Xtra Data>Joint Type &
User SIF, and choose "User" in the Joint Type field.
4. When applicable the user-defined stress indices will override any calculated stress indices based on the Joint End Type in the Valve.
Insert a Valve
Valve Placement Considerations
Modeling Examples
View Standard Valves in Library
See Also:
Valve Actuator Modeling
Weld Size and Joint Offset Considerations

Command Reference
Flexible Joint
Selecting Flex joint from either the Insert or Modify menu enables the user to custom design/modify a flexible (expansion) joint in the piping system. The tie-link support element can be used with
flexible joints to consider various tie-rod configurations.
Note: When modifying a flexible joint, if the current point is the far end of the joint, the user will be prompted for a length to the near end and vice-versa. In both cases, the coordinates of the opposite
end of the flexible joint will be changed.
Once all the data is entered as desired, press OK to create/modify the flexible joint. A flexible joint is represented graphically in AutoPIPE as shown below.
The following fields/parameters

are provided in the Flexible Joint
dialog: Flexible Joint Example
Add flexible joint Before/ After image\flexjt.gif
Name of Point
Use cylindrical coordinates

system
Length
Offsets
Theta, Rad & Elv
Joint End Type
Insert flanges on both ends
Flanged
Apply offsets to all following

points
Axial stiffness
Y-shear stiffness
Z-shear stiffness
Torsional stiffness
Y-bending stiffness
Z-bending stiffness
Weight
Pressure thrust area
Flexible Joint Placement Considerations
Modeling Examples
See Also
Flexible Joint Dialog Explained
Flexible Joint Analytical Implementation

Command Reference
Reducer
Selecting Reducer from either the Insert or Modify menu enables the user to define a pipe reducer. The reducer can be concentric with the current segment direction, or it can be defined as eccentric. The
pipe size at the far end of the reducer can be smaller or larger than the pipe at the near end.
Note: When modifying a reducer, if the current point is the far end of the reducer, the user will be prompted for a length to the near end of the reducer. If the current point is the near end of the reducer,
the user will be prompted for a length to the far end of the reducer. In both cases, the coordinates of the opposite end of the reducer will be changed.
Once all the data is entered as desired, press OK to create/modify the reducer. A reducer is represented graphically in AutoPIPE as shown below.

provided in the Reducer dialog:
Reducer Example
Add reducer Before/ After image\reducer.gif
Name of point
Length
Offsets
Theta, Rad & Elv
With knuckles
Use maximum SIF of 2.0
Cone angle
Weld mismatch
Pipe identifier
Insert a Reducer
Reducer Placement Considerations
Modeling Examples
See Also
Reducer - Class 1
Command Reference
Reducer - Class 1
Selecting Reducer from either the Insert or Modify menu enables the user to define a pipe reducer. The reducer can be concentric with the current segment direction, or it can be defined as eccentric. The
pipe size at the far end of the reducer can be smaller or larger than the pipe at the near end.
Note: When modifying a reducer, if the current point is the far end of the reducer, the user will be prompted for a length to the near end of the reducer. If the current point is the near end of the reducer,
the user will be prompted for a length to the far end of the reducer. In both cases, the coordinates of the opposite end of the reducer will be changed.
Once all the data is entered as desired, press OK to create/modify the reducer. A reducer is represented graphically in AutoPIPE as shown below.

provided in the Reducer dialog:
Reducer Example
Add reducer Before/ After image\reducer.gif
Name of point
Length
Offsets
Theta, Rad & Elv
Use maximum SIF
Cone angle
Flare Radius
Length of Cylindrical portion
Pipe identifier
Insert a Reducer
Reducer Placement Considerations
Modeling Examples
See Also
Command Reference
Anchors
Select Anchor from either the Insert or Modify menu to display the Anchor dialog. Anchors may be added or modified at any point; however, only one anchor may be defined at a single point.
When all of the data is entered, accept the dialog by clicking on OK; the anchor symbol will then drawn at the specified point as shown.
image\ap-u0411.gif
Note: The analytical implications of placing a rigid anchor at any point other than an end point should be considered.
The following fields/parameters are available from the Anchors dialog:
Point Name
Tag No
Anchor type
Trans. Stiff / Rot. stiff.
Release for hanger selection
Thermal anchor movements
Select cases
Report anchor results to AutoPIPE Nozzle
Insert an Anchor
Other Anchor-related Topics
Modeling Examples
How to Interpret Anchor Results
Command Reference
Nozzle Overview
image\ex-nozzl.gif Selecting Nozzle from either the Insert or Modify menu should be done
only if the user wants to consider local flexibilities of the nozzle/vessel
connection as part of the piping analysis.
The first five fields of the nozzle dialog are common to all types of
nozzles. However, the remaining fields in the dialog are updated to
include only those options which apply to the particular value selected
from the "Flexibility method" field. Select one of the flexibility types
from the list below for more information.
Note: A nozzle can only be placed after the current point. The "Add point Before/ After" option is not available.
Since AutoPIPE converts the nozzle flexibilities into a flexible joint, the flexible joint symbol is used as the nozzle symbol.
Flexibility Types:
ASME
API 650
WRC-297 and Bijlaard
Spherical
User
Insert Nozzle/Vessel Flexibility
Nozzle Placement Considerations
Modeling Examples
See Also
Nozzle Flexibility Calculations
ASME
When ASME is selected as the nozzle’s flexibility type, the dialog is updated. The additional fields are related to Figure NB-3643.3(A)-1 of the ASME Class 1 code.
Note: AutoPIPE does not check slope angle limits for Configuration "A" as required by the code.
The additional fields provided when this flexibility method is selected are:
l Configuration A/B/C/D
l Length (L1)
l Slope Offset
l Slope Angle
l Nozzle stiffnesses
l Direction of Vessel Axis
When ASME is selected as the nozzle’s flexibility type, the dialog is updated. The additional fields are related to Figure NB-3643.3(A)-1 of the ASME Class 1 code.
AutoPIPE does not check slope angle limits for Configuration "A" as required by the code.
The additional fields provided when this flexibility method is selected are:
API 650
When API 650 is selected as the nozzle’s flexibility type, the dialog is updated to include the following fields:
l Reinforcement on Nozzle/Shell
l Vessel at Near/ Far
l Filling Height
l Nozzle Height
l Liquid sp gr
l Nozzle stiffnesses
l Direction of Vessel Axis
WRC-297 and Bijlaard

When either WRC-297 or Bijlaard is selected as the nozzle’s flexibility type, the dialog is updated to include the following fields:
l L1
l L2
l Nozzle Stiffnesses
l Direction of vessel axis
Spherical
When Spherical is selected as the nozzle’s flexibility type, the dialog is updated to include the following fields:
l Nozzle diameter
User
When User is selected as the nozzle’s flexibility type, the dialog is updated to include the following fields:
l Direction of vessel axis
Command Reference
Supports Overview
Select Support from the Insert or Modify menu to display the Support dialog. A support may be added at any point in the piping (or framing) system, and more than one support is allowed at a point.
Once the "Support Type" is specified, the dialog is updated to provide additional fields which are unique to the type of support requested.
Select one of the available support types hyper-links from the table below for more information.
Support Options
Category Support Type Description Bearing Direction
Spring Rate Stiffness Gaps Direction Friction
Hanger
Spring Spring (variable) hanger Vertical only
Constant Constant force hanger Vertical only

Restraint assumed
V-stop Rigid stop Vertical only
rigid
Incline Skewed support User-specified
Line stop Axial restraint Parallel to pipe
Guide Lateral restraint Perpendicular to pipe
Rotation Rotational restraint User-specified

Vibration damper or
Damper User-specified
snubber
see "Considerations"
Link Tie/link 2-point Support
below
Note: Only when the first support is entered into a model does the dialog have any default values. Each successive support inserted afterwards, the dialog recalls the previous settings.
Related Topics:
Support Connection
Insert a Support
Support Considerations
Support Notes
Modeling Examples
Support Analysis Considerations
Command Reference
Support Connection
Selecting Modify/Support Connection opens the Support Connection dialog. The Support Connection dialog can be used to automatically connect any currently selected 'grounded' or 'connected'
supports to the closest beam node included in the selected beam list. Since the closest point can be anywhere on the beam (not necessarily an end point) the program will split the beam to make a new
beam node and use it as a connection point. The same beam can be split multiple times to have multiple support connections. Selecting Delete/Support Connection will remove the connection made for
the selected support(s).
The following fields/parameters are available on the Support Connection dialog:
All
Categorized by SectionID
Categorized by Angle
Include offset beams
Available Beams
Selected Beams
Support Connection Direction
Do not split beams
Notes:
1. Press the '>' button to move the highlighted beam(s) in the available beams list over to the selected beams list. Or press the '>>' button to move all available beams over to the selected beams list.
2. Press the '<' button to move the highlighted beam(s) in the selected beams list over to the available beams list. Or press the '<<' button to move all selected beams over to the available beams list.
See Also:
Model From STAAD Using PipeLink (*.pipelink)

Command Reference
Spring Hanger
When Spring is entered in the Support type field, the Support dialog is updated to include additional fields. When all of the data is entered, accept the dialog by clicking on OK; the spring hanger symbol
will then be drawn at the specified point as shown.
Note: A spring hanger always acts in the vertical direction.
If a spring hanger has been specified as undesigned and a Hanger run has been performed, the Cold load and Spring rate fields will display the values calculated by the program upon subsequent entry to
the Support dialog. However, access to these fields is possible only if the spring is defined as designed. Refer to Hanger Selection Procedure , for more information.

are provided when Spring is
selected as the support type: Spring Hanger Example Spring Can Example
Support ID
Tag No
Attachment ID
Point Name
Connected-to
Support type
Hanger / Can
Undesigned
Cold load
Spring rate
Number of hangers
Size
Figure
Two Springs shown below (number of springs > 1):
Spring Hanger Example Spring Can Example
See Also : Understanding Support Symbols
Spring Hanger Related Topics
Command Reference
Constant Force Hanger

When Constant is entered in the Support type field, the Support dialog is updated to include the fields/parameters shown below. When all of the data is entered, accept the dialog by clicking on OK; the
constant force hanger will then be drawn at the specified point as shown.
Note: A constant force hanger always acts in the vertical direction.
If a constant force hanger has been specified as undesigned and a hanger run has been performed, the Cold load field will display the value calculated by the program upon subsequent entry to the Support
dialog. However, access to this field is possible only if the hanger is specified as designed. Refer to Hanger Selection Procedure for more information.

are provided when Constant is
selected as the support type:
Constant Force Hanger Example

Support ID
Tag No
Attachment ID
Point Name
Connected-to
Support type
Hanger / Can
Cold load
Number of hangers
Two Constant Supports shown below (number of constants > 1):
Constant Force Hanger Example
Command Reference
V-Stop
V-stops (vertical stops) are assumed to be rigid. When V-stop is entered in the Support type field, the Support dialog is updated. If gap and friction effects are not desired, no other input is required.
Note: A V-stop restrains vertical movement of the pipe in both the downward and upward directions, only after the corresponding gap has closed. For insertion of pipe shoes, pipe racks, or other supports
which allow the pipe to lift off, input a large gap above the pipe. AutoPIPE will automatically default to the previously defined restraint, including gaps and friction when the support element is selected
again during the same job.
Since most real bearing springs (with no gap) will develop a reaction under gravity loading, AutoPIPE automatically resets a bearing spring with either gap defined as zero to the weightless state even if
the gaps were specified as-built. A bearing spring can be forced to be as-built by entering a small gap value (0.002" minimum) in place of the zero gap(s). Refer to the discussion of Analysis
Considerations for more details.
Note: Even though gaps and a friction coefficient can be defined in the system model in the Support dialog, their nonlinear effect will be ignored in a static analysis unless the Gaps/Friction/Soil option has
been enabled by checking the box at the bottom of the Analysis/Static dialog. If this option is not enabled and the user attempts to run a static analysis with nonlinear restraints, AutoPIPE will display a
warning that gaps and friction have been defined in the model. Refer to the discussion of Static Analysis for more information.
For the version 8.5 or later, the V-stop symbol was modified to show the restraint symbol below and above the pipe based on the below and above gap values, respectively. In most cases, the V-stop
provides restraint below the pipe only. Therefore, the default gap above the pipe will be set to 100.0 inches and 0 inches below for the initial V-stop or when the support type is changed from a non-
vertical stop support to a V-stop support in the support dialog. Prior to version 8.50, the V-stop below and above gaps = 0 by default.
Note: See Also : Understanding Support Symbols
The following
fields/parameters are
provided when V-Stop is V-Stop Bi-Direction V-Stop Rod Hanger V-Stop Shoe Example
selected as the support type: Example Example
Support ID
Tag No
Attachment ID
Point Name
Connected-to
Support type
Bi-Direction/Rod
Hanger/Shoe
Gap below/above pipe
Friction coefficient
Gaps setting
Command Reference
Inclined Support
When Incline is entered in the Support type field, the Support dialog is updated to include additional fields. An inclined support is a general restraint with the bearing spring oriented along the specified
direction. When all of the data is entered, accept the dialog by clicking on OK to draw the Inclined support.
The following fields/parameters are provided when Incline is selected as the support type:

are provided when Inclined is
Inclined Example
Support ID
Tag No
Attachment ID
Point Name
Connected-to
Support type
Spring Rate
Gap backward/ Gap forward
Gaps setting
Direction
Related Topics :
Inclined Support Considerations
Command Reference
Line Stop
When Line stop is entered in the Support type field, the Support dialog is updated to include additional fields. A line stop restricts movement of the pipe along the pipe axis.
When all of the data is entered, accept the dialog by clicking on OK; the Line Stop symbol will then be drawn at the specified point as shown below.

are provided when Line Stop is
Line Stop Example

Support ID image\ap-
u0420.gif
Tag No
Attachment ID
Point Name
Connected-to
Support type
Stiffness
Gap backward/ Gap forward
Gaps setting
Related Topics :
Line Stop Support Considerations

Command Reference
Guide
When Guide is entered in the Support type field, the Support dialog is updated to include additional fields. A guide restricts movement of the pipe normal to the pipe axis, and is the only support type
which uses two separate bearing springs (one for up/down, one for left/right).
When all of the data is entered, accept the dialog by clicking on OK; the Guide symbol will then be drawn at the specified point as shown below.

are provided when Guide is
Guide Example
u0422.gif
Tag No
Attachment ID
Point Name
Connected-to
Support type
Stiffness
Gap down/ Gap up/Gap left/Gap

right/Gap global
Gaps setting
Related Topics :
Guide Support Considerations
Guide-Related Topics
Rotation Restraint
When Rotation is entered in the Support type field, the Support dialog is updated to include additional fields. A rotation restraint restricts rotation of the pipe about the specified axis (or direction).
When all of the data is entered, accept the dialog by clicking on OK; the Inclined symbol will then be drawn at the specified point as shown below.
Note: If a Connected-to point has been defined, the support direction must still be specified. The bearing spring direction is about this specified direction, not necessarily about the direction between the
connected points.

are provided when Rotation is
Rotation Restraint Example
u0424.gif
Tag No
Attachment ID
Point Name
Connected-to
Support type
Stiffness
Direction
Related Topics :
Command Reference
Damper
When Damper is entered in the Support type field, the Support dialog is updated to include additional fields. Vibration dampers are active only for static seismic and dynamic load cases (E1 - E10, R1-
R50, S1-S10, F1-F10, H1-H10, M1-M50); they have zero stiffness for all other load cases. A damper may act along one of the global axes or in a specified direction. When all of the data is entered,
accept the dialog by clicking on OK; the Damper support symbol will then be drawn at the specified point as shown.
If a Connected-to point has been defined, the support direction must still be specified. The bearing spring direction is this specified direction, not necessarily the direction between the connected points.

are provided when Damper is
Damper Example
u0426.gif
Tag No
Attachment ID
Point Name
Connected-to
Support type
Activate damper for wind
Stiffness
Direction
Command Reference
Tie/Link
When Tie/link is entered in the Support type field, the Support dialog is updated to include additional fields. If friction is not present, the connected points are restrained only in a direction towards or away
from each other. Friction provides restraining forces normal to this direction. A tie/link may be used to model a pipe hanging from another pipe, a pipe supported by a beam member, or it may be used to
simulate the tie rod of a bellows.When all of the data is entered, accept the dialog by clicking on OK; the Tie/link symbol will then be drawn at the specified point as shown.
Note: The direction of a tie is always defined by the coordinates of the connected points; therefore, the length of a tie cannot be zero.

are provided when Tie/Link is
Tie/Link Example
u0428.gif
Tag No
Attachment ID
Point Name
Connected-to
Support type
Gaps setting
Related Topics :
Tie/Link Considerations
Xtra Data
The following topics are available:
User SIF & Flexibility
Additional Weight
Concentrated Force
Imposed Support Displacement
Hydrodynamic Data
Cut Short
Static Earthquake Scale Factor
Reference Point
Out of Roundness
Gross Discontinuity
Command Reference
Joint Type & User SIF

When Xtra data/Joint Type & User SIF is selected from either the Insert or Modify menu, the Joint Type & User SIF dialog is displayed.
The Joint Type & User SIF command enables the user to specify/modify SIF and flexibility factor values at non-standard connections or components. Note that the flexibility for bends and the SIF's for
typical components (e.g., bends, valves, flanges, tees, etc.) is computed automatically. Hence, this command is only needed in special situations.
To use this command, it is necessary to define the pipe plane. A pipe plane is defined only for components whose inlet and outlet are not collinear (e.g. bends, tees, etc.), and does not apply to straight
components (where the inlet and outlet are collinear). For pipe bends, the pipe plane is defined by the pipe centerline and the center of the bend radius (local x-y plane ). For multiple pipe connections, the
pipe plane is defined by the centerline of each pipe branch.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Joint Type & User SIF dialog:
For all piping codes:
Joint End Type
Flexibility Factor
Additional fields for "Double-Welded Slip-On" and "Socket or Fillet Weld" joints for JSME PPC piping code:
Concave
Additional fields for "Double-Welded Slip-On" and "Socket or Fillet Weld" joints for the ASME NC/ND ( 1992, 2004) and JSME PPC piping codes:
Weld Size
Additional fields for butt welds with and without taper for the B31.1, B31.8, , SPC-2, TBK, Stoomwezen, MITI-3, RCC-M, EN13480, and JSME PPC piping codes:
Offset - Joint
Offset - Avg
Offset - Max
Additional fields for the JSME PPC piping codes:
SIF
B1
B2
Override all other B1 factors at this point
Override all other B2 factors at this point
Additional fields for the ASME NC/ND piping codes:
SIF
B1
B2
B2'
C2
Additional fields for the ASME NB piping code:
B1
B2
B2'
C1
C2
C3
K1
K2
K3
C3'
Additional fields for the BS 7159 and ISO 14692 piping codes:
In-plane SIF
Out-plane SIF
Circ. In-plane SIF
Circ. Out-plane SIF
Pressure Multiplier
Additional fields for the ISO 14692 piping code:
Set SIF Values
Override all other SIF's at this point
Set Qualified Stress Value
Qualified Stress
Override Other Qualified Stresses
Set Biaxial Ratio Value
Biaxial Ratio
Override Other Biaxial Ratios
Set Pressure Multiplier Value
Qualified Component
Additional fields for all remaining piping codes requiring In-plane and Out-plane SIFs:
In-plane SIF
Out-plane SIF
Additional fields for all remaining piping codes requiring a single SIF (B31.1, B31.1-1992, SPC-2, TBK, Stoomwezen, MITI-3, and RCC-M):
SIF
SIF for Tee Component (ISO 14692 only)
Override all other SIFs at this point
Note:
1. Circ In-plane and Circ. out-plane SIF's and Pressure Multiplier fields only active for BS7159 and ISO 14692 bend points (Near , Far, Mid) only.
2. For ASME NB, NC, and ND there will be no "User defined" Joint Type for flanges or valves. To apply user defined stress indices for ASME NB, NC, and ND, select Insert>Xtra Data>Joint Type &
User SIF, and choose "User" in the Joint Type field. The user-defined stress indices will override any calculated stress indices based on the Joint End Type in the Valve.
User Flexibility Considerations
Xtra Data Commands

Command Reference
Additional Weight
The Additional Weight command enables the user to define the weight (point load) of a nonstandard, or special component at the current point. The weight is automatically included in the gravity (GR) load
case, and always acts vertically downward as specified in the General Model Options dialog (Vertical axis direction field). Weight does not have to be defined at the pipe centerline.
When Xtra data /Additional Weight is selected from either the Insert or Modify menu, the Weight dialog is displayed.
The Weight component is modeled without mass cross-coupling terms in a modal analysis. If the effect of these terms is determined to be important, a rigid beam element should be used to define the
point represented in the DX, DY and DZ fields (which, in this case, should contain zeros). The weight should then be attached to the point at the free end of the rigid beam.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Weight dialog:
Weight
Offsets (DX/DY/DZ)
Xtra Data Commands

Command Reference
Concentrated Force
When Xtra data/Concentrated force is selected from either the Insert or Modify menu, the Forces and Moments dialog is displayed.
The Concentrated force command enables the user to define external forces and moments to be applied at the current point in each of the (global) X, Y and Z directions. Sets of forces and moments can be
included in any available load case (if a load case did not previously exist, it is created upon acceptance of the dialog).
Once the dialog is accepted, each force/moment will be displayed on the system plot. Forces are represented by single-headed arrows; moments are represented by double-headed arrows, as illustrated
below.

are available in the Forces and
Moments dialog:
Force/Moment Example
Load case to combine with image\ap-u0434.gif
Load case to generate forces
Forces (units) X/Y/Z
Moments (units) X/Y/Z
Insert Concentrated Load
Xtra Data Commands
Command Reference
Imposed Support Displacement

i
The Imposed Support Displacement command enables the user to define imposed anchor or support displacements at the current point in each of the global X, Y and Z directions. Support displacements are
included by load case (if a load case did not previously exist, it is created upon acceptance of the dialog). By including imposed displacements by load case, a user can accurately model, for example,
equipment with different displacements for each different wind load direction, as well as different displacements for each thermal case all at the same point. AutoPIPE will automatically consider the
displacement as part of the code stresses and operating loads. Displacements for wind loads, for example, would be considered in the occasional load combination, not as part of the sustained stresses.
Displacements are imposed at the base of the support and not at the support-pipe connection point.
Note: If a bearing spring has been defined in the direction of an imposed displacement, the point displacement may be (at least partially) absorbed by the spring. Imposed displacements can effect gaps
defined at a support.
If no anchor or support is present at the point, the imposed displacement will not be transmitted to the piping (or beam) system, and AutoPIPE will issue a warning in the Forces and Displacements sub-
report.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Displacements dialog:
Load case to combine with
Load case to generate displacements
Support Group No.
Direction (X/Z)
Translation (X/Y/Z)
Rotation (X/Y/Z)
Xtra Data Commands
Anchor-related Topics
Imposed Hanger Displacement Example

Command Reference
Hydrodynamic Data
When Xtra data/ Hydrodynamic Data is selected from either the Insert or Modify menu, the Hydrodynamic Data dialog is displayed.
The Hydrodynamic Data command enables the user to override the hydrodynamic factors (Cm, Cd and Cl) determined automatically by AutoPIPE when calculating wave forces at a current point.
Note: Default hydrodynamic factors are defined in the Wave Load dialog.
Once hydrodynamic data has been defined in the current modeling session, subsequent display of the Hydrodynamic Factors dialog will present the last defined hydrodynamic data as a default. If
AutoPIPE is exited, the default hydrodynamic factors are not stored.
Note: Hydrodynamic factors are not applicable to beam members.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Hydrodynamic Factors dialog:
Mass coefficient (Cm)
Drag coefficient (Cd)
Lift coefficient (Cl)
Note: Hydrodynamic data cannot be set for mass points. User would need to enter actual nodes for setting these hydrodynamic factors.
Xtra Data Commands
See Also:
Hydrodynamic Forces
Hydrodynamic Loading Analysis Considerations
Command Reference
Cut Short
The Xtra Data/Cut Short command enables the user to insert/modify a cut at the current point so that a length of pipe preceding the cut can be deleted (cut-short), or inserted (cut-long) and the pipe ends
joined, thus allowing longitudinal thermal displacements of the pipe due to the temperature change between the ambient and operating conditions to be counteracted.
Note: A cut-short is not permitted at the first point in a segment, at bend points (near, far, mid and tip), nor at points defining the far end of a component (valve, reducer, etc.).
When a cut is specified, the specified cut length is applied to the preceding pipe (this is why certain points are not allowed). The cut-short induces a pretensioning load on the pipe, which affects the rest
of the system in both directions until it is restrained by a support or anchor. If the pipe bends prior to being restrained, the pretension is carried around the bend as a combination of tension and bending
(e.g. for a 90° bend - 0% tension, 100% bending). A cut-long induces a pre-compression load on the pipe, which is handled in the same way as the cut-short.
Even though a cut is defined in the system model with the acceptance of the Cut Short dialog, the effect of the cut will not be included in a static analysis unless a cut-short analysis has been specified as
part of a static analysis. Refer to the discussion of Static Analysis for details.
Note: Cut-short cannot be defined for beam members.
Recommended procedure for performing cut short analysis:
Most piping codes, if not all, do not allow using cut-short in evaluating piping stresses. They do however allow using cut short in reducing hot and cold reaction loads on supports and nozzles. For this
reason it is recommended that a cut short be added to a User case that is not used for other loads, e.g. U1. After adding cut short to U1, the following should be done:
1. Enable cut short in the analysis set
2. Enable U1 in the same analysis set
3. Add a user non-code combination GR+U1 for the analysis set with cut short. This is used to evaluate cold loads with cut short. AutoPIPE usually adds a non-code combination GRTP1+U1 and that
can be used for hot load with cut short
4. Delete or disable printing for any default code combination with U1 such as Sus+U1
The following fields/parameters are available in the Cut Short dialog:
Load case to combine with
Enter amount of cut short
Xtra Data Commands
Modeling Examples
Command Reference

When Xtra data/User Weld Efficiency Factor is selected from either the Insert or Modify pull-down menus, the User Weld Factor dialog is displayed.
The User Weld Efficiency Factor command enables the user to specify weld efficiency factors at a selected point to aid in the code stresses. This command is designed for non-standard welded pipes and
fittings for which the weld efficiency factors specified in the Pipe dialog do not apply.
Note: The weld efficiency factors for typical welded pipes are specified in the Pipe dialog, so this command will only be needed in special situations.
Only certain codes actually require application of these weld efficiency factors in stress calculations. For those codes not using either or both of these factors, it is recommended that the default value (1.0)
be used for the non-applicable factor(s).
The following fields/parameters are provided in the User Weld Factor dialog:
Long. weld factor
Circ. weld factor
Override all other weld factors at this point
Notes:
1. For ASME B31.3 the "Long. weld factor" option is disabled.
2. For ASME B31.1 (2009 edition or later), "Long. weld factor" is disabled.
3. For the SNIP Russian 2.05.06-85 Oil & Gas, this menu option is not available.
ASME B31.3 and B31.1 (2009 Edition or Later):
Circ. Weld "W" factor
The following table shows which weld factors are applicable to which editions of the ASME B31.1 and B31.3 piping codes:
Code - Year ZL - Long. Weld Factor ZC - Circ. Weld Factor WC - Circ. Weld "W" Factor
B31.1 - 2009 and later No Yes Yes
B31.1 - 2007 and earlier Yes Yes No
B31.3 - all years No Yes Yes
See Also:
Entering Weld Factors
B31.1 Weld Quality Factors
B31.3 Weld Factors
B31.4 Longitudinal Weld Factors
B31.8 Longitudinal Weld Factors
CSA-Z662 Longitudinal Weld Factors
Xtra Data Commands

Command Reference
Point/Member Static Earthquake Scale Factor

Certain codes requires localized scaling of the static earthquake loads in the piping model. This feature allows you to define scale factors at selected points and over members that will be applied to the
static earthquake loads defined in the Load\Static Earthquake dialog. Static earthquake scale factors for points and members are reported for piping and beam points in the Piping Static Earthquake Scale
Factor, and Beam Static Earthquake Scale Factor sub-reports of the Tools/Model Input Listing report.
Note: Only one set of point and member scale factors can be defined at a point, thus inserting scale factors will overwrite any previously defined scale factors.
When deleting static earthquake scale factors, point scale factors are deleted if the points are in the highlighted set while member scale factors are deleted if the members are in the highlighted set.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Static Earthquake Scale Factor dialog:
X,Y,Z Factor
Static earthquake forces are generated as multiples of gravity loads in the global X, Y and Z directions. The gravity loads are either lumped at a point or uniformly distributed between two consecutive
points. The term "member" shall be used in discussing gravity loads between two points. The program handles the two types of gravity loads individually during the static earthquake analysis.
Point scale factors are applied only to lumped gravity loads at the specified point and they include added weight and flange weight. Member scale factors are applied only to uniformly distributed gravity
loads between two consecutive points and they include material, insulation, lining, content, and buoyancy forces.
Command Reference
Reference Point
When Xtra data/Reference Point is selected from either the Insert or Modify menu, the Reference Point dialog is displayed.
The Reference Point command enables the user to specify/modify or select a Reference Point at any point in the model except Bend N+, mid and F- points.
This feature is very useful to create a comparative load/ratio report for any nozzle or connection to a vessel or rotating equipment respectively which has manufacturer
defined limits.
The reference data point is a special single point component that allows the user to specify element end results at a point. For example, a run point has a - and + side in which the element end forces and
moments have been calculated. If there are concentrated loads acting at a point, the forces and moments will be different on each side. With this feature the user can specify the side for which the actual
and allowable loads will be reported.
At any given point on the model, there are four sets of element end results. First, there are two sets of results, one on the - side of the point and another on the + side. Then on each side, there are two sets
of results based on which half of the free body diagram being considered. The magnitude of the results will be the same between the two free body diagrams, but the signs will be opposite. Hence, the
reference data point definition should allow the user to select any one of four sets of member end results.
The following options are available:
l Specify element end results from either the - or + side of a point.
l Specify the direction towards which the loads are applied.
l Specify element end results at a point in either local or global coordinate system..
l Define allowable loads for the element end results.
Note: More than one reference point can be specified at a point.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Reference Point dialog:
Reference ID
Tag No.
Reference Side
Report actual loads
Load Direction
Load Coordinate System
Report allowable loads
Allowable Forces, FX, FY, FZ, FR
Allowable Moments, MX, MY, MZ, MR
Report Reference Points results to AutoPIPE Nozzle
Example:
Walkthru Model : Two vessels TK101 at A00 and TK102 at A10. Actual manufacturer Loads provided at A01 and A11 shown below.
Reference point at A01 - reference side = After (since A00 is before A01 in the segment direction), Load direction = "Loads acting towards A00"
Reference point at A11 - reference side = Before , Load direction = "Loads acting towards A12"
Notice the expected correct -ve sign for gravity FY (vertical) loads acting on the vessel nozzle
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
WALK1
08/13/2006 AUTOPIPE WALK THROUGH EXAMPLE BENTLEY
11:59 AM AutoPIPE+8.90 RESULT PAGE 3
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
REFERENCE POINT LOADS
Load FORCES (N ) MOMENTS (N-m )
Combination Actual Allow. Ratio Actual Allow. Ratio
----------- -------- -------- ------ --------- --------- ------
Tag No.: <None>
Ref. ID: A01-1 [After A01, Seg A, Global loads applied towards A00]
GR FX 21 1000 0.02 MX -2003 2000 1.00* FAIL
FY -4770 1100 4.34* MY -14 3000 0.00 FAIL
FZ 379 1200 0.32 MZ -3 4000 0.00
FR 4785 None MR 2003 None
Tag No.: TANK TK102
Ref. ID: A11-1 [Before A11, Seg A, Global loads applied towards A12]
GR FX -21 1000 0.02 MX -1999 2000 1.00
FY -4757 1100 4.32* MY 15 3000 0.00 FAIL
FZ 377 1200 0.31 MZ 2 4000 0.00
FR 4772 None MR 1999 None
Command Reference
Out of Roundness (ASME NB only)

When Xtra data/Out of Roundness is selected from either the Insert or Modify menu, the Out of Roundness dialog is displayed.
Out-of-roundness type
(Dmax-Dmin)/t ratio
Dependencies:
Method #1 (No discontinuity)
l Operating pressure
l Cold modulus
l Do, t
Method #2 - discontinuity e.g flat spot
l Design pressure
l Hot Sy at design temp
l Do, t
Command Reference
Gross Discontinuity Stress (ASME NB only)

When Xtra data/Gross Discontinuity is selected from either the Insert or Modify menu, the Gross Discontinuity dialog is displayed.
Thermal Case
Select the operating load thermal case for which the gross discontinuity stress will be applied. Only valid operating cases will be included in the selection list up to the limit defined in General model
options.
Gross Discontinuity Stress

Enter the gross discontinuity stress (GRDS) which could be positive or negative to distinguish up and down transients. AutoPIPE will use the absolute value of gross discontinuity stress in ASME NB
code Equation 11. The default is zero.
Note:
1. This command will be blocked across a range of points.
2. At a Tee, 2 GRDS must be defined, one for the branch and one for the header side
2. Gross discontinuity stresses (GRDS) are calculated by the Thermal Transient Analysis (TTA)
See Also:
Thermal Transient Analysis
ASME B&PV III-1-NB (1972 - 2007)
Beams
Beam properties need to be defined first with a unique Section ID then beams can be inserted with the selected Section ID's.
The following beam topics are available:
Adding, modifying and deleting beam properties
Adding, modifying and deleting beams
Split Beams
Beam Orientation Example
Standard Structural Shapes
Beta Angle: General Case
Beta Angle: Special Case
Command Reference

The Beam Section Properties dialog defines the beam section ID's for use in the model including standard or non-standard section properties and material properties. As with other AutoPIPE dialogs,
beam information is tied to a library which can automatically obtain data for cross section and material properties.
The comprehensive section libraries are based on STAAD pro with 31 different worldwide libraries and providing tighter integration for transferring structural models from STAAD to AutoPIPE. Once
section ID's have been defined then insert beams with an assigned section ID.
Note: Modify/Beam Section ID

This is identical to the Insert function except that the Section ID is a dropdown list. User can select any section id and modify and click the Apply button . Apply will be disabled when pressed until
another field is updated.
Notes:
1. Renaming Section IDs can be done in the new Section ID grid.
2. Older beam models with standard sections will be assigned American
3. A tool tip shows the units for the current field
4. Rigid beams are plotted as 10" W shape.
5. Opening older models, flange and web thickness is set to 0 since this dimensional data was not stored previously. The pre-9.0 program always used a thickness of 1" for plotting beam sections.
6. First Section ID "0" is reserved for RIGID section. The name RIGID and material name RIGID will not be editable. Other properties for RIGID section can be edited.
7. Cold formed, Timber and Joist sections are not supported in AutoPIPE. Unsupported sections will show a warning message and have" _???" added to the name and areas will be assumed 1.0 in2 and
inertias 1.0 in4.
The following fields/parameters are available:
Section ID
Section Type:
Standard
If Standard is selected then the Select button is enabled to allow any standard beam section to be selected.
Non Standard
If Non-Standard is selected then the Select button is disabled. All the section properties, section dimensions, shape and section name are open for data entry.
For pipe and solid circular sections the outside diameter and thickness (pipe only) fields will be enabled such that any value entered will automatically update the section properties
Select button
Country
Shape
Section Name
Section dimensions:
These dimensions are used for plotting of section shapes only
Depth/OD
Width
Web Thickness
Flange Thickness
Spacing
Section Properties:
Axial Area, Y-Y, and Z-Z Shear (areas)
Torsion Inertia
Y-Y / Z-Z Bending
Material:
Material Name
Modulus
Poisson Ratio
Density
Limitations
1. Old section library AUTOFRAM.LIB cannot be read
2. Joist sections are not be supported
Plotting of Shapes
n All new shapes will be plotted.
n Solid and hollow pipe will appear solid, but rectangular section will plotted hollow or solid depending on type. Actual thickness will be used for plotting.
n Hat sections will be plotted as a rotated channel with Web facing up.
n Rigid beams are plotted as 10" W shape.
n General sections will be plotted as an I-shape with given web and flange data.
n Zee with lips will be drawn same as Zee, similarly Channel with lips will be drawn same as channel.
n Double angles will be plotted like a tee with double the web thickness. Double channels will be plotted like a W shape with double the web thickness.
n Double channel FR will be plotted like a rectangular tube, except for the case when the depth (web length) of the corresponding single channel is twice its width (flange length). In that case, double
channel FR will be plotted like a square tube since the flange length, after being double, will equal the depth.
Insert a Beam
Add Anchors to a Beam
Solid Model Beam View
Connect a Beam to Pipe
Related Topics
Modeling Examples
Command Reference
Adding, modifying and deleting beams

The Beam dialog defines the beam’s location, connection points and material properties. As with other AutoPIPE dialogs, beam information is tied to a library which can automatically obtain data for
cross section and material properties.
Autopipe provides the ability to analyze structural beams as part of the piping analysis. With this capability, users can automatically consider the mass and flexibility of support structures. In some
instances, the flexibility of the support structure can significantly effect piping loads on equipment and supports, piping stresses, and piping dynamic results.
Beam members may be used to model pipe supports, pipe racks, plant structures or special components (i.e., tied bellows).
Beam Members CANNOT:

l be supported by the soil;
l be submerged in a fluid (no buoyancy, current or wave loads)
l be subject to pipe operating conditions (no temperature, pressure or "cut-short" effects;
l be exposed to a wind.
l be subjected to steam/ water hammer transient effects.
The following fields/parameters are available:
Beam ID
From Point I
To Point J
Section ID
Shape
Material Name
Beta Angle
Offset
Rigid Length End-I: and End-J
End Releases: End-I/J Axial (translation), Y-Y and Z-Z
Insert a Beam
Add Anchors to a Beam
Solid Model Beam View
Connect a Beam to Pipe
See Also
Related Topics
Modeling Examples
Command Reference
Split Beam
The Modify/Split Beam command is a convenient way to split existing beams into two or more.
Split Beam Dialog

When one beam element is selected the Modify/Split Beam command will open the Split Beam dialog.
The following fields/buttons are available on the Split Beam dialog:
New Insertion Point
Distance
Proportion
Add New Point
Notes:
1. The distance will be automatically calculated if a value is entered in the Proportion field, and vice versa.
2. The distance and/or proportion entered cannot create beam members smaller than the current Split beam tolerance entered in the Supports Settings dialog (Tools > Settings > Supports).
Insertion Points
Insertion Points
Remove
Add Mid Point
Multiple Insertion Points
Add n Points
Notes:
1. The value of 'n' entered cannot create a beam member smaller than the current Split beam tolerance entered in the Supports Settings dialog (Tools > Settings > Supports).
Split Beams Dialog

When two or more beam elements are selected the Modify/Split Beam command will open the Split Beams dialog.
The following fields/buttons are available on the Split Beams dialog:
New Point by Distance
New Point by Proportion
Add 'n' Points
Add Mid Point

Command Reference
Beam Orientation Example

image\fig6-3.gif
Note: This local system does not coincide with the principal axes for sections that are not doubly symmetric.
Coordinates of points that currently exist in the piping system cannot be modified.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Standard Structural Shapes
The following STAAD country structural libraries are available
Note: Timber and cold formed libraries are not available in AutoPIPE
1 American US
2 Australian AU
3 British GB
4 Canadian CA
5 Chinese CN
6 Dutch NL
7 European EU
8 French FR
9 German DE
10 Indian IN
11 Japanese JP
12 Russian RU
13 SouthAfrican ZA
14 Spanish ES
15 Venezuelan VE
16 Korean KR
17 Aluminum AL
18 AmericanColdFormed AC
19 IndianColdFormed IC
20 Mexican MX
21 AmericanSteelJoist AJ
22 AITCTimber AT
23 LysaghtColdFormed LC
24 BritishColdFormed BC
25 CanadianTimber CT
26 ButlerColdFormed BC
27 KingspanColdFormed KC
28 RCecoColdFormed RC
The following standard steel structural shapes are provided in the American library (examples are shown in parenthesis):
W Wide Flange sections (Depth X

Weight - W36X300)
M Miscellaneous sections (Depth X
Weight - M14X18)
S American Standard Beams (Depth
X Weight - S24X121)
HP Bearing Piles (Depth X Weight -
HP14X117)
B B923017
C American Standard Channels
(Depth X Weight - C15X50)
MC Miscellaneous channels (Depth X
Weight - MC18X58)
WT Tees cut from W sections (Depth X
Weight - WT4X33.5)
Angle Single angles (Long X Short X
Thickness - L9X4X1/2)
Tube Rectangular tubes (Depth X Width
X Thickness-T10X6X.5)
Pipe Pipe section - Standard weight, XS
& XXS strength (Outside nominal
diameter - P1)
HSSRectangle Hollow structural section rectangles
(HSS20X12X5/16)
HSSRound Hollow structural section rounds
(HSS16X.438)
Related Topics
Command Reference
Beta Angle: General Case

General Case: Beam local x axis is not parallel to the global vertical axis
Refer to the Figure, below. The reference orientation for this beam (which corresponds to Beta = 0.0°) is defined as:
l The local z-axis of the beam lies on a global horizontal plane (all points on the local z-axis have a constant value on the global vertical axis).
l the local (positive) + y-axis of the beam is oriented in the direction of the global (positive) + vertical axis.
image\fig6-4a.gif
In this case, a non-zero beta is defined as the angle (measured from its reference position, in a positive "right hand rule" sense about the local x axis) through which the local y axis must be rotated, to
achieve its final orientation.
The following figure is an example of a wide flange with Beta = 90°.
image\fig6-4b.gif
Related Topics
Command Reference
Beta Angle: Special Case

Special Case Beam local x axis is parallel to the global Vertical axis
The reference orientation for this beam (which corresponds to Beta = 0.0°) is defined as:
l the local z axis of the beam is parallel to the third global axis ("Z" if "Y" is defined as the vertical axis); and
l the projection of the local z axis of the beam upon the third global axis is in the same positive direction as the third global axis.
In this case, a non-zero Beta is defined as the angle (measured from its reference position in a positive right-handed sense about the local x axis), through which the beam local z axis must be rotated to
achieve its final orientation. See the following figure for examples of a symmetric member and an unsymmetric member.
image\fig6-5.gif
Note: AutoPIPE assumes that the local x axis of a beam is parallel to the global vertical axis if the projection of the beam's length on the perpendicular plane is less than 0.0001 of its length.
The figure shown below presents several examples of member orientations for Beta angles of 0° and 90°.
image\fig6-6.gif
Related Topics
Command Reference
Load Commands
The following Load topics are available:
Static Analysis Sets
Dynamic Analysis
Hydrotest Loads
Static Earthquake Loads
Wind Loads
Thermal Bowing
Response/Force Spectrum Loads
C411 Spectrum Loads
Envelope Spectrum
Harmonic Loads
Time History Profile
Time History Location
Convert to Force Spectrum
Convert to Response Spectrum
Buoyancy Loads
Wave Loads
Fluid Transient Loads
Steam Relief Loads
Thermal Transient Analysis [ASME NB only]
Command Reference
Analysis Sets
The Load/Static Analysis Sets command allows the user to define multiple static analyses (analysis sets) and provide references to these results from separate analyses during post-processing. Analyze > Static or will analyze all selected
static analysis sets.
This is a mandatory requirement of the Nuclear class NB piping code which requires that different hot moduli be applied to different thermal analysis sets. A hot modulus static analysis does allow the user to calculate hot stresses corrected to
ambient or cold modulus condition while support and equipment loads are calculated with a hot modulus i.e. hot operating condition.
Hint: Different linear vs non-linear scenarios, hot vs cold modulus, and pressure vs no pressure stiffening can be examined.
Note: The JSME PPC (2005) and KHK Level 1 piping codes are limited to only 1 analysis set.
The Static option in the Analyze menu enables the user to perform all the selected static analysis sets considering any scenarios of gravity and thermal expansion loads, plus wind loads and/or static
earthquake loads if they have been defined.
This command permits the user to have specific control over
l Which load cases are to be included in the analysis,
l The type of static analysis to be performed, and
l Other options for static analysis e.g. pressure stiffening, non-linear etc
Analysis - Post Processing Workflow
Each Analysis set can be defined or modified with the Static Load Cases dialog
Field Title Type Description Comments

Analysis set Edit Box Sequential Analysis set number This field is unique. Only numbers
No. which is editable between 1 and 999 (inclusive) are
permitted in this field.
Fill down is not allowed in this

column. Duplicate numbers are
blocked.
Analyze Check Box Select this box to include this
Analysis set in static analysis
Results Check Box This box is checked if analysis
results i.e. LIN file exists for the
Non-editable analysis set
Pressure Drop Down Select the pressure stiffening case This field is available for input
Stiffness List used for the analysis set. Pressure when piping codes ASME NB,
stiffening will change bend NC, ND, B31.1, B31.3, B31.4,
flexibility and stress intensification B31.8, TBK, Stoomwezen, SNCT,
factors for all load cases in the BS 7159, EN13480, JSME PPC or
analysis set including the gravity ISO 14692 are selected. The
case. default is set to 'None' for all those
piping codes except BS 7159,
JSME PPC, and ISO 14692,
which is set to P1 by default. For
all other piping codes this field is
read-only and is set to 'None'.
Hot Modulus Drop Down Select the hot modulus case used When this option is selected for
List for the analysis set. The hot ISO 14692 code, hot Poisson's
modulus will affect the element ratio entered in Pressure &
stiffness and calculated Temperature dialog will be used
displacements and would apply to for calculation of hot shear
all load cases including the gravity modulus.
case.
If None, then use cold modulus or

modulus at ambient temperature,
this is the default for all piping
codes except class NB.
Pressure Ext. Check Box Select this box, if pressure This option will be checked by
extension is to be considered for default when the KHK Level 1,
the associated thermal load cases. B31.3 (2010 edition and when
Enabling pressure extension will Code Case 178 or Appendix P
force AutoPIPE to analyze options are enabled), B31.4, B31.8
pressure cases P1, P2, etc., or ISO 14692 piping codes are
corresponding to analyzed thermal selected.
cases. Pressure extension will
always account for pipe extension Since axial forces and torsion
and bend extension/rotation caused from pressure is included in
by pressure. The Bourdon sustained stresses for 2010 edition
rotational effect for bends can be of B31.3, and when the Code Case
applied if needed in the 178 or Appendix P options are
Tools/Model Options/Edit, but that enabled, this option should be
is not recommended for most checked. When this option is
cases. Pressure extension is unchecked for any of those
required for buried piping and for scenarios a warning message will
piping with flexible joints. be delivered.
When pressure extension is

enabled, AutoPIPE applies equal
and opposite pressure forces (P*A)
on each side of the flexible joint
(where A is the pressure area of the
flexible joint or bellow). To
disable this additional (P*A) force,
which is not recommended in most
cases, the pressure area may be set
to zero.
Fluid Density Edit Box Enter the fluid density factor of Disabled if weight of contents is
Factor contents for the analysis set not included in the analysis set.
Non-Linear Check Box Select this box, If gaps, friction Turning this option on will set
and soil yielding are considered for maximum number of iterations to
the analysis set analysis case 30.
Soil Stiffness Drop Down Select the set of soil stiffness If no soil is present in the model,
List values to be used in the analysis this option will be disabled.
(None, Low, High, Average)
Ignore friction Check Box Select this box, to ignore friction
E? for all static seismic cases E1, E2
etc defined in the model
Ignore friction Check Box Select this box, to ignore friction
GR for the gravity load case
Initial State Drop Down List contains GR and Operating Blank and disabled when Non-
Occasional List Cases corresponding to each Linear is unchecked.
thermal case selected. These may
be different in each row.
Load Cases Edit Box List (comma delimited) of load Always Read Only
cases for the analysis set analysis
case Edit using Analysis set dialog
Description Edit Box Description of Analysis set 40 character limit
Notes:
1. Any column (on row 1) can be double clicked to sort the column and double click row 1 col 1 will restore the default sort order.
2. Check or uncheck the options on Analyze and Non-linear columns (row 2 ) to check or uncheck all options in the column.
3. All undefined Analysis sets will not be analyzed i.e. no load cases defined.
4. If no analysis sets are defined and the static analysis is performed then a warning message will be displayed "No Analysis set defined" and stop the analysis
5. Local Undo / Redo (Ctrl Z / Ctrl Y) will be available in the Grid but this is not linked to the Model undo/redo.
6. The dialog can be re-sized and maximized.
Color Legend
Results are outdated with the model revision and the appropriate analysis needs to be re-run.
Changes have been made to the Analysis sets and results are outdated with the analysis set definition.
Changes in the Analysis Set grid have not been saved. Press the Apply or Ok buttons.
Buttons
New
Click this button to create a new row with new sequential number. Following message is shown if there are 999 analysis sets already defined.
"Maximum number of analysis sets defined. Please remove an entry to create new analysis set"
Deleting and renaming Analysis set may create gaps in analysis set sequence. These gaps will not be filled unless analysis set 999 is already present. When Analysis set No. 999 is not present, the
program will get the greatest analysis set number and increment it by one.
For ASME NB then the option Calculate pressure extension cases e.g. P1, P2 : will be checked by default.
Modify
Click this button to modify the current analysis set (i.e. shown with arrow in column 1) and display the Static Load Cases dialog
Following message is shown if the button is clicked while no record is selected
"No analysis set selected."
Edited analysis set records need to be applied before showing the modify dialog. The following message will be shown if the changes are not saved.
"Changes made in this grid will be saved. Do you wish to continue?"
Continuing will apply changes and show the Analysis set dialog for selected row.
Note: Double click first column of the row will also display the Static load cases dialog.
Selecting multiple rows will show modify dialog for only the first analysis set.
Delete Selected
Select Analysis set row or rows then click this button to delete them. No warning message will be displayed
Note:
• If a analysis set is deleted then any associated stress summary equation 9 or 10 which has a load case from this analysis set will be set to "NONE" i.e. this case will be skipped for post processing.
• If analysis set is deleted then this unused analysis set number will be available as the next new analysis set defined. However it may not be used until analysis set 999 is defined.
Following message is shown if the button is clicked while no record is selected
"No analysis set selected."
Note: The analysis set(s) will only be permanently deleted if the Apply button is selected. This will also remove the results files (LIN) for the deleted analysis set from the current model folder. If
the Cancel button is selected before the Apply button then returning to the Analysis Set dialog the analysis sets will be restored.
Delete All
Delete all Analysis sets in the grid. A warning message will be displayed "Do you wish to delete all Analysis sets?"
Note: The analysis set(s) will only be permanently deleted if the Apply button is selected. This will remove all results files (LIN) from the current model folder. If the Cancel button is selected before the
Apply button then returning to the Analysis Set dialog the analysis sets will be restored.
Delete Results
Select the Analysis Sets by selecting the row then click this button to delete the selected result files (LIN files)
The boxes in the Results column will be unchecked for the selected analysis sets
Note: The result (LIN) files will only be permanently deleted if the Apply button is selected.
Create Default sets
Click this button and select from one of the following three options to create default analysis set(s):
1. Single analysis set - Creates a single analysis set that includes all static, thermal, and occasional cases defined in the model. If occasional cases are included, and a non-linear system is detected, the
"Non-Linear" option will be checked and the Initial State for Occasional will be set to gravity ("GR") to simulate the shutdown condition.
2. Multiple analysis sets - Creates a separate analysis set for every thermal load case defined in the model. The first analysis set will be reserved for gravity ("GR") and all occasional load cases (if any
are defined), with Hot Modulus = None. The Hot Modulus for the rest of the analysis sets will be according to the thermal case number. These additional analysis sets will be non-linear with 30
iterations and will include only the thermal case and the corresponding pressure case. Consistent pressure stiffening may also be applied for the particular code. No occasional cases will be defined
except in the first analysis set with initial state set to GR. This means occasional cases will be evaluated in the shutdown or non-operating case only.
3. Multiple analysis sets (One GR) - Same as above option no. 4 except no 'GR' load case is added with the created load sets by default. Only the first created analysis set contains the 'GR' load case. This
is recommended for ASME NB stress summaries
4. Multiple analysis sets with OCC - Creates a separate analysis set for every thermal load case defined in the model, and includes all the occasional loads in every one of the analysis sets. The first
analysis set will be reserved for the gravity ("GR") and occasional load cases (if any are defined), with the Hot Modulus = None. The Hot Modulus for the rest of the analysis sets will be according to the
thermal case number. These cases will be non-linear with 30 iterations and Initial State for Occasional set to the operating case corresponding to the selected thermal case. This way occasional cases will
be evaluated under both the operating and non-operating condition.
Click this button to create a separate analysis set for every thermal load case defined in the model. Two load cases Gr and T? will be selected for each analysis set. The 1st analysis set will be reserved for
GR only with hot modulus = None. Hot Modulus for rest of cases will be according to the thermal case number. These cases will be non-linear with 30 iterations and Initial Occasional State set to
operating case corresponding to selected thermal case.
5. Multiple analysis sets with OCC (One GR) - Same as the above option no. 4 except no 'GR' load case is added with the created load sets by default. Only the first created analysis set contains the 'GR'
load case.
Note:
1. Clicking this button will uncheck ALL boxes in the Results column. The result (LIN) files will only be permanently deleted if the Apply button is selected.
2. For the ASME NB, NC, and ND piping codes, the Pressure Stiffening for the first analysis set will be set to "Design". The user may need to set the hot modulus case for consistency, since
"Design" is not an option for hot modulus.
Renumber
Click this button to renumber sequentially the analysis set number starting at 1. Renumbering cannot be undone. Renumbering is done according to the sequence in the dialog. Sorting maybe used to
number analysis sets according to some specific field. Renumbering will not update the description and may cause inconsistency between name and description.
Note:
1. Clicking this button will uncheck ALL boxes in the Results column. The result (LIN) files will only be permanently deleted if the Apply button is selected.
2. The load combinations with associated analysis set numbers will correspondingly be updated when the static analysis is executed
Duplicate current set to set #
Enter the valid analysis set number or 0 then press the Duplicate button to copy or duplicate all the current analysis set data to the selected analysis set. If 0 is entered then a new analysis set will be
duplicated at the end of the grid.
Note: The Results option will be unselected for the new analysis set.
Following error message will be shown if analysis set number if not found.
"Analysis set XXX not found. Please specify an exiting analysis set number."
Where XXX is the number of analysis set.
Following message will be shown if 0 is specified and number of analysis sets is equal to 999 then Analysis set %s not found. Maximum number of analysis sets defined. Please remove an entry to
create new analysis set.
When Duplicate current set to Set # then the set # copied to, the LIN results file will be copied to Set #., e.g. duplicate set 2 to 4 , (then copy LIN file for #2 to set #4). The Result checkbox for #4
is checked
Ok
Click Ok will save the Analysis set table information and close the dialog and analyze all Analysis sets marked for static analysis.
Apply
Click Apply to save the Analysis set table information to the database
Note:
1. This button will be disabled (grayed out) until a field is modified in the grid or one of the analysis options or load cases is modified not shown in the grid.
2. The modified analysis set number cell will be changed from blue to yellow
Cancel
Click Cancel will exit the dialog with no current changes saved.
Note: No message shown if there are some unsaved changes.
Related Topics:
Linear Static Analysis
Non-linear Static Analysis Overview
Combinations
Code Combination
Non-Code Combinations
Loadcase Names
Command Reference
Dynamic Analysis
The Load/Dynamic Analysis command allows the user to define load cases for dynamic analysis including Modal, Response Spectrum, Harmonic, Time History and Force Spectrum.
Dynamic Analysis TABs
For more information about the individual dynamic analyses TABs, please click on one of the following topics:
Modal Analysis
Response Spectrum Analysis
Harmonic Analysis
Time History Analysis
Force Spectrum Analysis
Dynamic Analysis Workflow
Each dynamic analysis load case can be defined or modified with the Dynamic Analysis dialog:
Notes:
1. Any column (on row 1) can be double clicked to sort the column and double click row 1 column 1 will restore the default sort order.
2. Check or uncheck the options on columns (row 2) to check or uncheck all options in the column.
4. All buttons on the top of the dialog, except for the 'Delete Results' button, are disabled if the Modal TAB is selected.
5. When the Dynamic Analysis dialog is opened and changes are made to a record(s) and the Apply or OK button is pressed, the model will be automatically saved and the user will be prompted if he
wants to analyze the model, once the dialog is closed. If the user presses 'Yes' on the prompt, the Analyze All dialog will be shown
6. TABs for which the results are outdated with the model will be displayed as pink.
7. If the location of the model file (*.DAT) has been changed, but the associated dynamic analysis input files (*.SPC, *.HMF, *.THL, *.TIH) have not also been moved to the new location, these files will
still be present in the drop-down lists, but highlighted red. That input file will remain red in the drop-down list until it has been moved to the new location of the model file, or a different input file, that
exists in the new model location, has been selected. If a new input file is selected the old input file will be removed from the drop-down list, and the field will no longer be red.
8. The dialog can be re-sized and maximized.
Color Legend
Results are outdated with the model revision and the appropriate analysis needs to be re-run.
Changes have been made to the Analysis sets and results are outdated with the analysis set definition.
Changes in the Analysis Set grid have not been saved. Press the Apply or Ok buttons.
Buttons
New
Click this button to create a new row with a new sequential number. The following message is shown if there are 50 load cases already defined for the Response Spectrum, or 10 load cases for the
Harmonic, Time History, or Force Spectrum analyses:
"Maximum number of load cases defined. Please remove an entry to create a new load case."
Deleting and renaming a load case will not create gaps in the load case sequence. For example, if there are 5 load cases in the Harmonic tab, and the 3rd load case was deleted. The 4th load case will be
renamed to the 3rd, and the 5th will be renamed to the 4th. The results will be updated after running the respective analysis.
Delete Selected
Select a load case row or rows, then click this button to delete them. No warning message will be displayed.
Note: The load case(s) will only be permanently deleted if the Apply button is selected. This will not remove the results files (*.RSP, *.TIM, *.HRM, *.FSP) for the deleted load case from the
current model folder. If the Cancel button is selected before the Apply button then the deleted load cases will be restored when returning to the Dynamic Analysis dialog.
Delete All
Deletes all load cases in the current tab. The following warning message will be displayed:
"Do you wish to delete all load cases?"
Note: The load case(s) will only be permanently deleted if the Apply button is selected. This will not remove the results files (*.RSP, *.TIM, *.HRM, *.FSP) for the deleted load case from the
current model folder. If the Cancel button is selected before the Apply button then the deleted load case will be restored when returning to the Dynamic Analysis dialog.
Delete Results
Deletes the results for all cases in the current tab. No confirmation message is shown before deleting the results.
Duplicate Current Load Case to Load Case #
Enter a valid load case number or 0 then press the Duplicate button to copy or duplicate all the current load case data to the selected load case. If 0 is entered then a new load case will be created at the
end of the grid, and the data will be duplicated to this new load case.
The following error message will be shown if the load case number can not be found:
"Load case XX not found. Please specify an existing load case number or 0 to create a new one."
Where XX is the number of the load case.
The following message will be shown if 0 is specified and the number of load cases already defined is equal to the maximum number of load cases allowed:
"Maximum number of load cases defined. Please remove an entry to create a new load case."
The following message will be shown when the record to be duplicated is not selected:
"No XXX case selected."
Where XXX can be any of the following: response spectrum, time history, harmonic, or force spectrum.
When duplicating the current load case to load case # XX, the *.RSP, *.TIM, *.HRM, or *.FSP results files will NOT be updated. The user needs to run the analysis to see the results for the updated or
new load case.
The description of the newly created analysis set will always be blank.
OK
Clicking OK will save the dynamic load cases information and close the dialog.
Apply
Click Apply to save the dynamic load cases information to the database.
Note: This button will be disabled (grayed out) until a field is modified in the grid. The modified load case cell number will be changed from blue to yellow.
Cancel
Clicking Cancel will exit the dialog with no current changes saved.
Note: No message will be shown if there are any unsaved changes.
Related Topics:
Modal Analysis Theory
Response Spectrum Analysis Theory
MSRS Analysis Theory
Harmonic Analysis Theory
Time History Analysis Theory
Force Spectrum Analysis Theory

Command Reference
Load Factors
This dialog box is used to define the load safety factors related to particular load sets.
Notes:
This dialog box is available for SNIP Russian 2.05.06-85 Oil & Gas piping code only.
The following fields are available on this dialog:
Gravity (High) Load safety factor for gravity(high) load case. Default is 1.10.
Gravity (Low) Load safety factor for gravity(low). Default is 0.95. This low gravity factor is not in use.
Thermal Load safety factor for thermal load case. Default is 1.00.
Earthquake Load safety factor for earthquake load case. Default is 1.00.
Wind Load safety factor for wind load case. Default is 1.20.
Pressure Load safety factor for pressure load case. Default is 1.15.
User Load safety factor for user load case. Default is 1.00.
Harmonic Load safety factor for harmonic load case. Default is 1.00.
SAM Load safety factor for SAM load case. Default is 1.00.
Response Spectrum Load safety factor for response spectrum load case. Default is 1.00.
Force Spectrum Load safety factor for force spectrum load case. Default is 1.00.
Time History Load safety factor for time history load case. Default is 1.00.
Defaults Sets the default values for all the above fields.
The valid values for load factors should be non-zero and between -1000.0 and 1000.0. The values entered in the fields on the new Load Factors dialog controls the ‘Factor’ field in the User Code
Combinations dialog.
Command Reference
Hydrotest Loads
The Load/Hydrotest command enables the user to define the hydrotest conditions of a piping system. A hydrotest is a common method for testing the integrity of a piping system before it is put into
service. In this test, the piping system is filled with pressurized water and checked for leakage, etc. The Hydrotest option permits a simulation of this scenario. Please note that the AutoPIPE Hydrotest
option automatically converts all spring hangers into rigid supports to simulate the holding pin which is still in the spring hanger during the hydrotest.
There are two steps involved in performing a hydrotest:
1. Specify the conditions (pressure, temperature, etc.) by using the Load/Hydrotest command.
2. Analyze the system by enabling the Hydrotest option in the Static Load Cases dialog. To access the Static Load Cases dialog select and modify an analysis set.
Note: A non-linear static analysis cannot be performed on the hydrotest loadcase i.e. friction, support gaps and soil yielding are ignored.
Note: The following gravity loads are automatically included in the Hydrotest load case: all 2-point components plus contents (pipe, valve, beam, etc.), all single point components and loads (flange,
added weight, imposed displacement, thermal anchor movement, etc.), and distributed loads. Similarly, single point loads, thermal anchor movements and distributed loads defined for thermal and
pressure load cases are also included for the specified thermal and pressure load cases in the Hydrotest load.
The Hydrotest default code combination is named 'Hydrotest'. It is included in the occasional stress category. This allows the use of the occasional load factor which will be set to the default value of 0.9
for all piping codes even though some codes may allow for 1.0. The occasional load factor can be modified with the Tools/Combinations command. Also, the allowable stress for the Hydrotest
combination uses the material min. yield strength if which is specified in the Pipe Properties dialog. If the min. yield strength is set to zero, no allowable stress will be calculated for this combination. For
piping codes MITI-3, KHK, JSME PPC, and GENERAL, there is no default hydrotest code combination created. For BS806, the %proof stress at room temperature is equivalent to the min. yield
strength.
For ASME NB, NC, and ND

AutoPIPE will calculate a hydrotest load case and combination that have the following loads (or moments):
GR(HY) + Factor*P + Factor*T
GR(HY) is a special case were hangers are replaced by V-stops and insulation and contents are changed as per hydrotest conditions, i.e. no insulation and contents based on specific gravity of fluid
defined in the Hydrotest dialog. P and T are the pressure and temperature cases associated with the hydrotest, i.e. the cases selected in the Hydrotest dialog.
If 'Design' or 'None' is used for the pressure case, and 'None' for the temperature case, then the moments are calculated from:
GR(HY)
The moment stress is calculated using Equation 9:
Moment Stress = B2*MB/Z
Where,
MB is the resultant moment as per the hydrotest case.
And the pressure thrust stress is added, also using Equation 9:
Axial thrust = Factor*B1*Do/(2*t)
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Hydrotest Analysis dialog:
Specific gravity of fluid
Pressure load case/Factor
Temperature load case/ Factor
Include Insulation and cladding
Include all segments
Related Topics:
Code Combination
Loadcase Names
Hydrotest method for Offshore codes
Hydrotest Non-linear Method
Command Reference
Static Earthquake Loads

When Load/Static Earthquake is selected, the Static Earthquake dialog is displayed. This dialog enables the user to define static earthquake load cases (E1 - E10) where forces are generated as multiples of
gravity load in the (global) X, Y and Z directions.
Note: Since earthquake loads are bi-directional, separate cases may be required to consider the effect in both directions, especially if gaps are considered in the analysis.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Static Earthquake dialog:
Number of earthquake load cases
Case 1 to 10
Assign Static Earthquake Loads
Related Topics
Related Topics:
Code Combination
Loadcase Names
Command Reference
Wind Loads Overview

The Load/Wind command enables the user to define static wind load cases (W1 - W3) by generating wind pressure vs. (system) height profiles, or according to ASCE 7-98, or Uniform Building Code
(UBC-97) requirements.
The wind force is applied as uniform loads in the local coordinate system of the straight pipe or bend element. The equivalent wind force is assumed to act through the centroid of the element.
In order to exclude piping inside a building from wind loads, the piping inside should be entered as a separate segment(s) from the piping outside the building.
Once the Wind dialog has been accepted, the Wind Profile dialog is displayed . If more than one wind case was specified, the Wind Profile dialog will re-display for each wind case.
Initially, the Wind Profile dialog contains only one field: "Wind specification type." After the type is selected, the information requested in the Wind Profile dialog depends on the code to be used in
generating the profile. AutoPIPE allows specification of wind according to the ASCE 7-98 code, the UBC-97 code, or a user-defined pressure vs. height profile.
Note: Beam members are not subjected to wind loads.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Wind dialog:
Number of wind cases
Ground elevation for wind
Wind shape factor multiplier
All segments exposed to wind
Wind exposure factor for soils
Wind application method
Wind Specification Type
Wind Profiles
Related Topics:
Code Combination
Loadcase Names
Command Reference
ASCE Wind Profiles

ASCE Wind Profiles act on the system model per the requirements of the ASCE 7-98 code. When ASCE is selected as the "Wind specification type" the Wind Profile dialog is filtered to provide the
following additional fields.
Basic wind speed at 33ft (10m)
Exposure category
Exposure case for Kz
Gust effect factor
Force coefficient Cf
Importance factor
Wind direction
Note that AutoPIPE ignores the effect of speed-up over hills, that is, it assumes the pipe not to be on an isolated hill and for that it assumes Kzt = 1. For piping on isolated hills, please refer to ASCE 7-98
Section 6.5.7.2. Amplify the gust factor to account for speed up over hills.
AutoPIPE assumes that load combinations defined in section 2.3 and 2.4 of ASCE 7-98 are not used. For this reason the wind directionality factor "Kd" is not accounted for and Kd is assumed 1.0. Please
refer to section 6.5.4.4 of ASCE 7-98 for more information.
The procedure implemented in AutoPIPE follows section 6.5 of ASCE 7-98 "Method 2 - Analytical Procedure". Note also that ASCE procedure accounts only for along wind forces and does not account
for across wind forces like those generated by vortex shedding, galloping or flutter (see section 6.5.1.2 of ASCE 7-98).
ASCE Wind profile as a function of height is printed in the load summary sub-report in the input listing .RPT file.
Command Reference
UBC Wind Profiles

UBC Wind Profiles generate a wind load which acts on the system model per the requirements of the UBC-97 code (Uniform Building Code, Section 2311). When UBC is selected as the "Wind
specification type" the Wind Profile dialog is filtered to provide the following additional fields:
Basic wind speed at 33 ft (10m)
Ce factor - Table 16-G
Pressure coefficient - Table 16-H
Wind Pressure - Table 16-F
Importance factor
Wind Direction
UBC Wind profile as a function of height is printed in the load summary sub-report in the input listing .RPT file.
Command Reference
User-defined Profiles
Select Profile to generate a user-defined, (step-wise) pressure vs. system height wind profile which acts on the system model. When Profile is selected as the Wind specification type the Wind Profile dialog is
filtered to provide the following additional fields:
Height and Wind Pressure
Wind Direction
Note: The wind pressure is constant within each height zone specified (it varies step-wise with height).
Command Reference
Thermal Bowing Overview

The Load/Thermal Bowing command enables the user to calculate thermal bowing separately or included with all or one thermal load case which can cause severe stresses on the piping. Thermal bowing
typically occurs when transporting fluid on a partially filled pipe but can also occur in exposed pipes in hot climates where one side of the pipe is exposed to the sun and the other side is in the shade. In
this case, the top and bottom of the pipe section can experience a significant temperature differential. This temperature differential causes pipe thermal strains which produce pipe curvature.
To simplify the problem, AutoPIPE assumes a linear thermal strain distribution across the pipe. With this assumption residual stresses vanish and only pipe curvature stresses exists.
The assumptions in AutoPIPE are:
1. Linear thermal strain distribution
2. Apply only to horizontal or near horizontal pipes with bowing in the local vertical plane
3. Same thermal gradient or temperature change is applied to all pipes
Note:
1. Beam members, pipe bends, flexible joints or nozzles are not subjected to thermal bowing loads.
2. To be consistent with the assumed linear temperature distribution, the design temperature should be specified as (T1 +T2)/2 .
3. The maximum inclination can be used capture bowing effects on vertically skewed pipes and even pipes close to vertical
4. If the option to add thermal bowing to all thermal cases is checked, thermal ranges like T1 to T2 may have the thermal bowing effect cancelled out. If thermal bowing is to be added to such a range, it
should be added to a single temperature or user case only.
Limitations:
1. Cannot specify different thermal bowing temperatures for different pipes.
2. Selection of pipes is limited to pipe slope and the ambient temperature.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Thermal Bowing dialog:
Temperature difference (top to bottom of pipe)
Maximum inclination for horizontal pipe |DY|/L
Apply thermal bowing to all segments
Add thermal bowing to all thermal cases
Load case to add thermal bowing to
Thermal case for expansion coefficient
Instantaneous expansion coeff. For NS materials
Related Topics:
Batch Input for thermal bowing
Thermal Bowing Analysis Theory

Command Reference
Generate seismic thermal load case

This dialog is used to assign temperature and expansion properties to a certain soil identifier using a certain thermal load case.
The dialog contains the following fields:
Thermal case to modify
Soil ID
Soil input parameters set to be used for calculations
Temperature assigned to selected soil ID points
Expansion assigned to selected soil ID points
Set temperature to ambient (no expansion) for
Add axial and bending strain for calculation of temperature
Note: AutoPIPE calculates coefficient of expansion values based on expansion values of the material at ambient temperature 10 deg F. In case of non standard (NS) material, the expansion values are not
available from the library. In this case AutoPIPE uses the expansion value for steel taken as 6.5E-6 in/in/deg F.
Command Reference
Response/Force Spectrum Loads

The Load/Response/Force Spectrum command is selected from the Load menu, the Response/Force Spectrum dialog is displayed. Spectrums are used by the response spectrum and force spectrum analyses to
define loads on the structure.
l Spectrum data can be input directly on the dialog provided, or
l an ASCII text file (*.SPC) can be generated using standard text editor software
Note: To create a Force spectrum file, select the Force option in the Acc/G/Vel/Disp/Force field.
A force spectrum file can also be generated from a time history file (*.TIH) using the force spectrum method. For more information, refer to Analyze/Force Spectrum .
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Spectrum dialog:
Spectrum filename
Interpolation method
Damping ratio (%)
Data Type (Freq/Per)
Acc/G/Vel/Disp/Force
Spectrum Data
Notes:
1. The chart on the right side shows the selected input (e.g. Acceleration, Gravity, Velocity, Displacement and Force) against the Frequency/Period. The graph is updated dynamically on every input in
the grid.
2. The grid for spectrum data displays the data in sorted order. The data is sorted once the grid contents have been saved either by pressing OK or Apply button.
3. If data has been entered for the data type selected and the data type is switched, i.e. from frequency to period, or vice versa, an option will be provided to either convert the data or not.
See Also:
Creating an ASCII Spectrum File
Performing a Response Spectrum Analysis
Acceleration Load Topics
Related Topics:
Code Combination
Loadcase Names
Command Reference
C411 Spectrum Loads

The Load/ C411 Spectrum command generates a Case N411 spectrum from existing 2% and 5% damping spectrum files. The procedure used to generate the spectrum is described in NRC Regulatory Guide
1.61. Once defined, the spectrum name can be specified for use in a response spectrum analysis.
Note:
1. If the input spectrum files are defined in frequency units, the output C411 file will be in frequency units also. If the input spectrum files are defined in period units, the output C411 file will be in
frequency units (not period units).
2. The C411 spectrum can include up to 20000 points.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the C411 Spectrum dialog:
C411 Spectrum name
2% damping Spectrum
5% damping Spectrum
See Also:
Related Topics:
Code Combination
Loadcase Names
Command Reference
Envelope Spectrum
The Load/ Envelope Spectrum command allows the user to envelope up to 30 spectrum file names. A drop down list of ENV files will be shown when entering the envelope spectrum name. After
entering all the data on the dialog and pressing OK, the new .SPC file will be created and the data shown on the spectrum envelope dialog is saved to the ENV File. If more than 30 spectra need to be
enveloped, the resulting envelope SPC file can be used in a second envelope to produce an envelope of 30+29=59 spectra. Once defined, the spectrum name can be used in a response spectrum analysis.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Envelope Spectrum dialog:
Spectrum Envelope
The following fields are always grayed out but will display the information for the first spectrum selected in the drop down list:
N411 Damping
Damping ratio (%)
Interpolation method
Data type (Freq/Per)
Acc/G/Vel/Disp/Force
The following fields are editable:
Use Sampling
Freq/period increment
Spectrum
Scale
Note: If response spectra have the same frequency or period scale, then no sampling is required. In this case the new spectrum will have the same frequency scale as any other spectrum. Force data can
only be combined with force data. An error message will be shown if the spectra have incompatible data types.
Note: All the selected spectra must have the same properties i.e. N411 damping, damping ratio, data type and spectrum type, except for interpolation method, a warning message will be shown if a
spectrum is selected and it does not have the same properties.
Note: Some spectrums may be extrapolated so all spectrums have the same range of frequency or period. If a spectrum must be extrapolated then a constant data value is assume above the last frequency
or below the first period.
See Also:
Envelope Spectrum Method
Creating an Envelope Spectrum File
Related Topics:
Code Combination
Loadcase Names
Command Reference
Harmonic Loads
Load/Harmonic command is used during Harmonic Analysis to define harmonic loads which act at specific points in the piping system. Harmonic load data can be input directly in the Harmonic Load
dialog, or an ASCII text file (*.HMF) can be generated using standard text editor software (described later in this section).
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Harmonic Load dialog:
File name
Input
Damping
Plot Node
Frequency
Direction
Point
Freq
Phase
Fx/Dx/Vx/Ax/Gx
Fy/Dy/Vy/Ay/Gy
Fz/Dz/Vz/Az/Gz
See Also:
Creating an ASCII Harmonic Load File
Related Topics:
Code Combination
Loadcase Names
Command Reference
Time History Profile
Select Load/Time History Profile command is used to define short and long duration dynamic loads such as earthquake, water hammer loads, relief valve blowout, etc.
l Time history data can be input directly on the dialog provided, or
l an ASCII text file (*.TIH) can be generated using standard text editor software.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Time History dialog:
File name
Input
Time
Ground Acc. (Gravity)/Ground Acc./Force/Imposed Displacement
Save as Image
See Also:
Creating an ASCII Time History (TIH) File
Related Topics
Related Topics:
Code Combination
Loadcase Names
Command Reference
Time History Location

The Load/Time History Location command generates a THL file using the time history files (TIH) and the points at which they are applied. The THL file can then be used as the input for a time history
analysis.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Time History Location dialog:
Time history load name
Point
Select History
Scale
DX/DY/DZ
Start
See Also:
Creating an ASCII Time History Load File (THL)
Related Topics
Related Topics:
Code Combination
Loadcase Names
Command Reference
Convert to Force Spectrum

The Load/Convert to Force Spectrum command generates a force spectrum file (*.SPC) from a time history file (*.TIH), which can then be used as the input for a Force (Spectrum) Analysis .
The following fields/parameters are provided in the the Force Spectrum dialog:
Force spectrum name
Time History name
Maximum frequency (Hz)
Number of points
Damping ratio
Command Reference
Convert to Response Spectrum

The Load/Convert to Response Spectrum command generates a response spectrum file (*.SPC) from a time history file (*.TIH), which can then be used as the input for a Response (Spectrum) Analysis.
Exact integration is used assuming linear acceleration input. The method is called "Piecewise Exact Method". See Clough & Penzien, Dynamics of structures 2nd edition. This method is used to calculate
the maximum response for each frequency and the maximum response values are accumulated.
The time history may have a fixed time increment or variable increment. If the TIH does not have a fixed time step, a fixed time step is calculated as the minimum of:
1. Minimum step in the TIH file
2. 1/100 seconds
3. 1/(2*Maximum Frequency)
The interpolated or fixed step function will be appended with zeros so that the total time is at least 50% of the period.
NOTE: For design calculations a single ground motion response spectrum is not recommended. Design spectra are usually created by averaging response spectra of different earthquakes. Some codes
have special procedure for generating design response spectrum. Some of these procedures may involve spectrum widening to widen the peaks.
The response spectrum header information will explain the type of the spectrum and the acceleration record used as follows:
Displacement Response Spectrum generated from: ELCENT
Interpolation method will be assumed as Log-Log
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Convert to Response Spectrum dialog:
Ground acceleration file name
Generated response spectrum name
Generated response spectrum type
Maximum frequency
Number of points
Damping ratio (%)

Command Reference
Buoyancy Loads
The Load/Buoyancy command enables the user to model the piping system as partially or fully submerged in a fluid (usually sea water) by defining a height of fluid (and related properties) in which the
piping system is partially or fully submerged. The buoyant force applies an upward pressure on the system, effectively reducing the weight of the submerged piping. AutoPIPE includes the buoyancy load
in the gravity load case (GR) for analysis.
Note: Beam members cannot be submerged in a fluid.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Buoyancy dialog:
Water surface elevation
Specific gravity of water
Added mass coeff (Ca)
Wind exposure factor
Apply buoyancy to all segments
See Also:
Buoyancy/Hydrostatic Loading
Related Topics:
Code Combination
Loadcase Names
Command Reference
Wave Loads
The Load/Wave command enables the user to model the effect of ocean waves impacting a partially submerged piping system.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Wave Load dialog:
Wave data name
Wave type
Load case
Water - Elev.
Water Depth
Water density
Phase
Wave - Height and Period
Coeff. - Drag and Inertia
Direction - DX, DY, DZ
Depth Fields
Wave Notes
Delete Wave Data
Wave Theory
See Also:
Buoyancy/Hydrostatic Loading
Hydrodynamic Loading
Dynamic Analysis Considerations

Command Reference
Fluid Transient Loads

Piping systems transporting fluids are susceptible to pressure transients. The Load/Fluid Transient command can be used to analyze the effect of such an event on the piping system. The fluid transient utility
automatically creates the relevant force-time histories (see Analyze/Time History ) and can handle either a positive or negative shock wave.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Fluid Transient dialog:
Name From Point
Fluid To Point
Density Flow Rate
Specific Heat ratio Pressure Rise
Bulk Mod Sound Speed
Specific Gravity
Start Time
Rise Time
Linear/Sine rise
See Also:
Defining the Fluid Transient
Fluid Transient Example
Fluid Transient Analysis
Fluid Transient Method
Related Topics:
Code Combination
Loadcase Names
Command Reference
Steam Relief Loads

The Load/Steam Relief command enables the user to define the thrust loads at steam exit points due to a discharge through a safety relief valve. Any water effects introduced should be analyzed separately
using the Fluid Transients command.
If a steam relief system has been previously defined for the database, the dialog will display the data for the first system in the database as default values for all the prompts.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Steam Relief dialog:
Valve Exit Point Enthalpy
Open/Closed Discharge Quality
Pipe/Vent Interface Specific Heat Ratio

Point
Mass Flow Rate
Vent points,
Inlet/Outlet Time
Vent Discharge Generate report

Direction
Size Vent
Manifold pressure
See Also:
Steam Relief Method
Steam Relief Analysis Topics
Related Topics:
Code Combination
Loadcase Names
Command Reference
Thermal Transient Analysis
The Load > Thermal Transient Analysis command shows the TTA dialog for defining and analyzing the thermal transient temperature distribution for computing both linear and non-linear thermal stresses
across the pipe wall thickness. This option is only available for ASME Section III, Class 1, Subsection NB only.
Note:
1. This module computes the one dimensional transient temperature distribution and resolves the distribution into average, linear, and non-linear components.
2. Up to 50 pipes can be analyzed at a time.
3. ASME Section III NB and ANSI B31.3 require consideration of through-the-wall-thickness effects of thermal transient loads. ANSI B31.3 does not specify in detail how this loading shall be
performed but ASME Section III NB does.
Add/Modify TTA
Add/Modify TTA Profile
Pipe & Insulation Properties
Gross Discontinuity Locations
Analyze
Review Results
View Summary Report
Delete
The definition of the TTA files is as follows:
File Name Description

[modelname].ttl Control File - Contains list of .tti files, their revision numbers, and associated profile files
[modelname].gdl Contains Gross Discontinuity Locations definition: Point Name, Pipe1, Pipe2
[modelname].tpp Contains Global Pipe Properties for the model
[ttaname].tti TTA input file
[ttaname].ttp Transient profile file (Transient and Solution)
[ttaname].tto Original ADLPipe output report. NOTE: If non-English units are selected for the model, a
second original ADLPipe output report file will be created, using the following file naming
convention: [ttaname]_si.tto
[ttaname].tdl Delta T results extracted from the original ADLPipe output report (*.tto)
[ttaname].tsm Delta T Summary Report for the TTA. This is what you see when you click the Review
Results button
[modelname].tsm Overall Summary Report for all of the TTA's. Includes all Delta T Summary Reports for all
of the TTA's, as well as the Gross Discontinuity reports. This what you see when you click
the View Summary Report button on the main Thermal Transient Analysis dialog.
Related Topics:
Thermal Transient Analysis Theory
Gross Discontinuity
Application of Delta T's using the Operating Pressure & Temperature Dialog
ASME B&PV III-1-NB (1972 - 2004)

Command Reference
Analysis Commands
After the model is built, a variety of loads can be defined and then the model analyzed under varying conditions. The set of commands included in the Analyze menu accomplish this task.
Note: The Save command is automatically performed by AutoPIPE each time one of the commands in the Analyze menu is executed. This feature has been included in order to help minimize the loss of
data due to an abnormal exit from AutoPIPE.
Analyze All
Delete Analysis Results
Hanger Selection
Static Analysis
Modal Analysis
Harmonic Analysis
Equivalent Linear Analysis [KHK only]
Command Reference
Analyze All
The Analyze/Analyze All command is a convenient method to re-analyze all static and dynamic analyses at once instead of one at a time.
Pressing OK will execute the selected options.
Note:
1. When opening a Pre-9.1 model, the program will set the option to select all analyses automatically to 'Yes' for the Analyze All command.
2. When creating a new model, the program will set the option to select all analyses automatically to 'Yes' for the Analyze All command. Also, the default number of modes for the modal analysis will be
set to zero instead of 12. This change is to allow users to execute "Analyze All" command for new models without also running the modal analysis using the default settings.
Select analyses automatically
Analyze All fields/parameters
See Also:

Command Reference

Delete Analysis Results provides the opportunity to select all or individual analysis results to be deleted for the current model. After deleting analysis results, the default code and non-code combinations
shall be automatically updated when "Auto" update is "on" for the code and non-code-combinations.
Select/Unselect all analyses...
Selection Criteria For Delete Analysis Results
Note: This option is not available for the KHK Level 2
Command Reference
Hanger Selection Overview

The Analyze/Hanger Selection command provides automatic selection of springs for each hanger support specified as undesigned by the user from the Spring and Constant Support dialogs, or for each
hanger (spring and constant force) that was AutoPIPE-designed in a previous hanger run (For details on the automated process, refer to the Hanger Selection Procedure ).
Note: If anchors have been defined to model special equipment (i.e., vessels, pumps, exchangers, etc.), the appropriate anchor DOF's should be released for hanger selection prior to performing the
hanger run. This allows springs to be sized so that special equipment does not support gravity loads.
Updating the input parameters for the Hanger selection analysis (including non-linear effects) will not affect the input parameters for the static load case analysis, and vice-versa.
A hanger run consisting of gravity and operating load conditions is performed first. The hanger design procedure produces a file named SYSNAME.HGR.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Hanger dialog:
Select/Unselect all cases
Rigid hanger criteria
Load variation (ratio)
Spring hanger manufacturer
Design operating cases
Include pipe content weight
Include cutshort in design
Gaps/Friction/Soil
Show hanger report
Related Topics:
Producing the Hanger Analysis Report
Hanger Report (Sample)
Modifying the Design Status of a Hanger
Hanger Analysis Related Topics
Command Reference
Producing the Hanger Analysis Report

The Show hanger report option must be checked to generate the hanger analysis report. Once the Hanger (and Nonlinear Analysis, if requested) dialog has been accepted, with the show hanger report
option checked, the hanger design run begins the process described in the Hanger Selection Procedure, starting with an analysis and continuing with the creation of an external ASCII text file,
SYSNAME.HGR, containing the pertinent data for each hanger.
The file will be opened in AutoPIPE’s notepad, where you can view the report and optionally print it using the File/Print command.
Click here to view a sample section of a hanger report.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Hanger Report (Sample)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
WALKTHRU
04:31 PM AutoPIPE+9.10 HANGER PAGE 1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rigid hanger displacement criteria : 0.10 in
Permissible load variation : 0.25
Spring manufacturer : Anvil/Grinnell
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
WALKTHRU
04:31 PM AutoPIPE+9.10 HANGER PAGE 2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SPRING SELECTION RESULTS
Point Thermal Hot Cold Spring Load Spring Range Total

Name Movement Load Load Rate Variation Size I.D. # Reqd.
(inch) (lb ) (lb ) (lb/in) (Percent)
----- -------- ------- ------ ------- --------- ------ ----------- -------
B01 Tag No.: <None>

0.204 1975.0 2158.2 900.0 9.28 12 FIG 82 1 *
0.204 1975.0 2066.6 450.0 4.64 12 FIG B-268 1
0.204 1975.0 2009.6 170.0 1.75 11 FIG 98 1
0.204 1975.0 1998.0 113.0 1.16 11 Triple 1
0.204 1975.0 1992.3 85.0 0.88 11 Quadruple 1
NOTE Reference
Command : * - Selected Spring
Modifying the Design Status of a Hanger

Once a hanger is specified as undesigned , it will always be redesigned upon execution of subsequent hanger runs. Only hangers specified as designed by the user are excluded from a hanger run. To
include or exclude a hanger from hanger design runs, the design status should be set appropriately.
l To modify the design status of a hanger
1. Position the crosshairs on the point supported by the hanger.
2. Select Modify/Support .
3. Move the cursor to the "Undesigned" field and set the design status. If the option is disabled, the hanger will be designated as "Designed", and it will not be modified in any subsequent hanger runs. If the option is enabled, the hanger is defined as "Undesigned"
and it will be redesigned every time a hanger run is performed.
Related Topics
Command Reference
Static
Runs a linear static analysis based on one or more predefined static analysis sets.
Note: In version 9.0 and earlier, the Static Load Cases dialog was displayed when selecting this command. Starting with version 9.1, the static analysis input data is defined under the Load>Analysis Sets
menu command. To access the Static Load Cases dialog, select and modify an analysis set.
See Also:
Analyze & Review Results

Command Reference
Linear Static Analysis

1. Define the options in the Static Loads Cases dialog as desired. Be sure to disable the "Gaps/Friction/Soil" option.
2. After reviewing the settings to ensure they are correct, press OK. The analysis process begins. During this procedure, messages will be displayed showing the analysis progress.
3. Press OK to close the dialog. The analysis results may then be examined using the options found in the Result menu.
Related Topics
Unstable System Error

AutoPIPE will show the unstable error and will identify the location of such instability with the following error message:
E801-1: *** FATAL ERROR : Unstable system. Need support at node A01 Dir X
This happens when there are not enough restraints to restrain all nodal degrees of freedom. When the instability direction is inclined, relative to the global axes, the direction shown may not be correct.
Local Instability
Sometimes the instability may be caused by local instability, such as releases in a beam element or zero stiffness in back to back expansion joints. In the latter case, supports may not be needed.
1. For instability caused by releases in a structural beam element, remove the release from the beam. If an anchor exists at the beam node, the release may be added to the anchor instead.
Imported truss members from STAAD may cause instability since these have many rotational releases. Truss elements may be modeled as a nonstandard section, with an axial area of the member, but
with very small bending and torsional inertias.
2. For instability caused by two expansion joints, either connected or separated by pipe elements, replace the zero torsional or axial stiffness by a small non-zero value.
Command Reference
Non-Linear Static Analysis Overview

To perform a non-linear analysis, define the options in the Static Loads Cases dialog as desired. Be sure to enable the "Gaps/Friction/Soil" option. After reviewing the settings to ensure they are correct,
press OK. The Nonlinear Analysis dialog is then automatically displayed. This dialog prompts for the specification of nonlinear analysis control parameters, and the order in which the individual load
cases are to be sequenced.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Nonlinear Analysis dialog:
Maximum Iterations
Displacement Tolerance
Force Tolerance
Friction tolerance (ratio)
Friction scale factor
Ignore Friction E1 to E10
Ignore friction in GR case
Use default sequence
Pressure before Temperature
Initial case for Occ. loads
Related Topics
Nonlinear Analysis Considerations
Default Sequence
Defining Initial States
Command Reference
Default Sequence
If the "Use default sequence" option is enabled, the following load sequence is assumed:
1. Gravity load is applied, and the displaced position of each point in the system model is the end state for the gravity load case (GR).
2. The end state for the gravity load case is set as the initial state for each thermal operating load case; that is, GR is the default for T1 to T100 (if each has been defined and switched on for the analysis). Thus, the displaced position of each point in the system model
is the end state for the corresponding operating load condition (T1 to T100) and the gravity load case (GR) combined.
3. If a pressure extension analysis was selected in the &rsquoStatic Load Cases’ dialog, the end state of each temperature load case is set as the initial state for each corresponding pressure case; T1 (GR+T1) will be the initial state for P1; T2 (GR+T2) will be the
initial state for P2, etc.
4. The end state for the gravity load case is set as the initial state for each occasional load case; that is, GR is the initial state for all earthquake, wind and user load cases. The default occasional load analysis type is nonlinear.
If the "Use default sequence" option is disabled, the &rsquoInitial States’ dialog will be displayed (the use of which is covered in the next section) once the &rsquoNonlinear Analysis’ dialog has been
accepted.
Static Analysis Topics
See also:
Nonlinear Solution Load Case Sequence
Command Reference

The Initial States dialog enables the user to specify variations in the sequence of analyzed load cases, as well as to select the method to be used for the analysis of the occasional type load cases. It only
appears if the "Gaps/Friction/Soil" option was enabled in the 'Static Load Cases' dialog AND the "Use default sequence" option was disabled in the 'Nonlinear Analysis' dialog.
The maximum number of displayed checkboxes for each load type in the standard version is 5.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Initial States dialog:
Thermal cases T1 to T100
Pressure cases P1 to P100
Analysis type
Earthquake cases E1 to E10
Wind cases W1 to W10
User cases U1 to U140
Note:
1. For the nonlinear analysis, the program will automatically reset any the initial load case to the default case if it exceeds the Standard edition limits.
2. User cases U1, U2 etc are treated as occasional load cases and cannot be defined as initial states for T1, T2...P1, P2...
See also:

Command Reference
Click on the link below to view Load Sequencing PDF file which explains how load sequencing works and interpreting the results.
See also:
Command Reference
Modal
Runs a modal analysis based on the parameters defined in the Modal TAB of the Dynamic Analysis dialog.
Note: In version 9.1 and earlier, the Modal Analysis dialog was displayed when selecting this command. Starting with version 9.2, the modal analysis input data is defined under the Load/Dynamic
Analysis menu command. To access the modal analysis fields, select the Modal TAB.
Modal Analysis
When the Modal TAB is selected in the Dynamic Analysis dialog, the Modal analysis input fields are displayed. Once the fields/parameters are entered into the Modal TAB of the Dynamic Analysis
dialog the Modal option in the Analyze menu enables the user to calculate the natural frequencies and mode shapes for piping (and framing) systems. Mode shapes and frequencies must be calculated
before a response spectrum, force spectrum, harmonic, or time history analysis can be executed.
Note: The Analyze/Analyze All command can also be used to run the modal analysis.
The calculated mode shapes and frequencies are saved in an external binary file named SYSNAME.EIG (where SYSNAME is the name of the current system). Response spectrum, harmonic, force
spectrum, and time history analyses all use an EIG file to compute results. Therefore, the file must exist before these analyses can be performed. These analyses should be re-run every time a new modal
analysis is performed.
Note: AutoPIPE employs mass normalization of the intermodal translation displacement values. Thus, these values are dimensionless.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Modal TAB of the Dynamic Analysis dialog:
Analyze up to Cutoff
Maximum number of modes
Fluid density factor
Cutoff frequency (Hz)
Print Frequency after Cutoff
Hot Modulus Case
Pressure stiffening case
Soil Stiffness
Include contents
Favor global XYZ modes if direction is not defined, e.g. cantilever models
See Also:
Mass Discretization
Command Reference
Response Spectrum
Runs a Response Spectrum analysis based on the parameters defined in the Response Spectrum TAB of the Dynamic Analysis dialog.
The Response option in the Analyze menu enables the user to perform a response spectrum analysis. Previously stored Modal Analysis results and Response Spectrum Files are used to calculate earthquake
forces and moments. Up to fifty response spectrum load cases (R1-R50) may be defined. Each time a response spectrum analysis is performed, the results from any previous response spectrum analysis
are overwritten.
Note: In version 9.1 and earlier, the Response Spectrum dialog was displayed when selecting this command. Starting with version 9.2, the Response Spectrum input data is defined under the
Load/Dynamic Analysis menu command. To access the Response Spectrum fields, select the Response Spectrum TAB.

Response Spectrum Analysis load cases can be input using the Response TAB of the Dynamic Analysis dialog.
Up to 50 Response Spectrum load cases can be defined.
Note: Only the AutoPIPE Plus and Nuclear versions will allow specification of fifty response spectrum cases. The standard version of AutoPIPE will allow a maximum of five response spectrum cases.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Response Spectrum Analysis dialog:

Case No. Edit Box Response Analysis case number This field is unique. Only numbers between 1 and
50 (inclusive) are permitted in this field.
This field is read-only and grayed-out.

Analyze Check Box Select this box to include this load case in the
Response Spectrum analysis
MSRS Check Box Select this box if independent support motion For an example of using MSRS Analysis, please
analysis is to be performed refer to the 'AutoPIPE_MSRS_Example1.pdf' in
the 'Examples' folder located within the program
folder
This option will be disabled and unchecked for

the JSME PPC (2005) and MITI piping codes.
SAM Case Drop-Down List List shows the defined SAM cases S1 to S10 Blank and disabled when MSRS is unchecked
Analyze Support Group Drop-Down List Select either 'All' or one of the support groups. Blank and disabled when MSRS is unchecked
Drop-Down list of the available support groups This field is set to 'All' by default
from the selected SAM case
Spectra Button Clicking Define opens the Response Spectrum -
Support Group dialog
ZPA Check Box Select this box to include the Zero Period
Acceleration correction
Missing Mass Check Box Select this box to include the Missing Mass or
Rigid mode correction
M. Mass Combination Drop-Down List List contains SRSS, ABS or Modal (USRS only) Blank and disabled when Missing Mass is
disabled (unchecked)
Modal Combination List contains SRSS, Grouping, Ten pct., ABS DS,
Signed DS ABS CQC, Signed CQC
Group before Modes Check Box Select this box to determine the order of the Only available for MSRS with modal combination
combination method set to SRSS.
Default is checked.
Seismic Duration Edit Box Enter time duration for seismic or earthquake
event
Close Mode Ratio % Edit Box Enter close mode ratio value e.g. 10, where Applies to grouping and Ten pct modal
closely spaced modes are divided into groups that combination method
include all modes having frequencies lying
between the lowest frequency in the group and a
frequency value 10% higher. Default is 10.
N411 Check Box Select this box for N411 (PVRC) damping to be Available for DoubleSum and CQC intermodal
consistent with N411 spectrum combination methods only. Default is unchecked
Damping Ratio % Edit Box Enter the constant damping ratio as a percentage
applied to all modes
Combination Across Groups Drop-Down List List contains Sum, Abs. Sum, and SRSS. The 'Sum' option should not be used in regular
MSRS analysis. The 'Sum' option has been added
Default is SRSS, combining responses across to simulate uniform response spectrum using
support groups MSRS, by assigning the same spectra to all
support groups. The 'Sum' option may also be
used to simulate uniform spectrum with different
factors to different supports, if these are assumed
to move in phase (this is similar to applying static
earthquake factors with uniform spectrum, but is
more accurate).
Blank and disabled when MSRS is unchecked.

Total Acc. Check Box Total Acceleration = Relative Acceleration + ABS If unchecked then the relative acceleration is used
(Maximum Ground Acceleration)
Editable for USRS, read-only and disabled for
MSRS
Print Modal Results Check Box Select this box to include the modal results in the
Modal Output report
Description Edit Box Description of the load case 40 character limit
For Grouping method:
Close Mode Ratio
For Double Sum combination method:
Earthquake Duration
For Double Sum and CQC combination methods:
Use N411 Damping
Damping Ratio (%)
See Also:
Dynamic Support Forces
MSRS Analysis Theory
For an example of using MSRS Analysis, please refer to the 'AutoPIPE_MSRS_Example1.pdf' in the 'Examples' folder located within the program folder
Command Reference
Force Spectrum
Runs a force spectrum analysis based on the parameters defined in the Force Spectrum TAB of the Dynamic Analysis dialog.
The Force Spectrum option in the Analyze menu enables the user to perform a force spectrum analysis using previously stored Modal Analysis results and Force Spectrum files to calculate forces and
moments due to short duration loads. Up to three force spectrum load cases (F1 - F3) may be defined. Unlike its other dynamic analyses, AutoPIPE stores the load case information defined on each Force
Spectrum dialog in an ASCII text file, SYSNAME.FS? (where "?" is the number 1, 2 or 3).
In a force spectrum analysis, AutoPIPE begins by combining the intermodal results using the SRSS combination method. Then the interspatial spectrums are applied using the absolute summation
method, in order to create the F1, F2, and F3 load case results. The analysis results are stored in the file SYSNAME.FSP.
Note: The analysis results may be reviewed using the options available in the Result menu.
Note: In version 9.1 and earlier, the Force Spectrum dialog was displayed when selecting this command. Starting with version 9.2, the force spectrum input data is defined under the Load/Dynamic
Analysis menu command. To access the Force Spectrum fields, select the Force Spectrum TAB.

Force spectrum load cases can be input directly using the Force Spectrum TAB of the Dynamic Analysis dialog provided, or an ASCII text file can be generated using any standard text editor software
(described later in this section). Each time a force spectrum analysis is performed, the results from any previous force spectrum analysis will be overwritten.
Up to 10 Force Spectrum load cases can be defined.
A force spectrum load case may be also created or modified using standard text editor software (described in the next section).
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Force Spectrum TAB of the Dynamic Analysis dialog:

Case No. Edit Box Force Spectrum case number This field is unique. Only numbers between 1 and 10 (inclusive)
are permitted in this field.
This field is read-only and grayed-out.

Analyze Check Box Select this box to include this Load Case in the Force Spectrum
Analysis
Spectra Button Opens the Force Spectrum Points dialog
ZPA Check Box Select this box to include the Zero Period Acceleration correction
Missing Mass Check Box Select this box to include the Missing Mass or Rigid Mode
correction
Description Edit Box Description of the Load Case 40 character limit
Note: While AutoPIPE permits both Missing Mass and ZPA corrections to be included at the same time, it is not recommended.
Note: In case of an error during the force spectrum analysis, all force spectrum case results are skipped. E.g. If the spectrum file provided by user is not a force spectrum, an error will be generated during
the force spectrum analysis.
See Also:
Creating an ASCII Force Spectrum Load Case File
Force Spectrum Analysis Theory

Command Reference
Time History
Runs a Time History analysis based on the parameters defined in the Time History TAB of the Dynamic Analysis dialog.
The Time History option in the Analyze menu enables the user to perform a time history analysis using:
l previously stored modal analysis results (Analyze/Modal), and
l Time History data files (Analyze/Load/Time ). If the time history loads are to be applied at specific points in the model, then these must also be defined using the Analyze/Load/App time
command. Up to fifty time history analysis cases (M1-M50) may be defined. Each time a time history analysis is performed, the results from any previous time history analyses are over-written.
The analysis results are stored in the file SYSNAME.TIM.
Note: The analysis results may be reviewed using the options available in the Result menu.
Note: In version 9.1 and earlier, the Time History dialog was displayed when selecting this command. Starting with version 9.2, the Time History input data is defined under the Load/Dynamic Analysis
menu command. To access the Time History fields, select the Time History TAB.

Time History load cases can be input using the Time History TAB of the Dynamic Analysis dialog.
Up to 50 Time History load cases can be defined.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Time History TAB of the Dynamic Analysis dialog:

Case No. Edit Box Time History case number This field is unique. Only numbers between 1 and
50 (inclusive) are permitted in this field.
This field is read-only and grayed out.

Time History analysis
Ground Motion Check Box Select this box if ground motion analysis is to be Modify the Time History case to enter the ground
performed motion data
History File Button Click to display the Time History Analysis - Blank and disabled when Ground Motion option
Ground Motion dialog is checked
File 1 to File 4 Drop-Down List List shows the THL files in the current working Blank and disabled when Ground Motion option
folder is checked
Integration Method Drop-Down List List shows available options for numerical Piecewise Exact is the default method of
integration method: Piecewise Exact method or integration.
Wilson Theta method.
Duration Edit Box Enter duration of time history event
Analysis Step Edit Box Enter analysis time step If Automatic is entered the program will
automatically use a time step size of 1/10 of the
period corresponding to the highest mode
calculated for the system
Output Step Edit Box Enter output time step If Automatic is entered the program will
automatically use a time step size of 1/10 of the
period corresponding to the highest mode
calculated for the system. The output time step
size must be greater than or equal to the analysis
time step
# Time Steps Edit Box The number of time steps # Time Steps = The Duration/Analysis Steps
Read-only and grayed out

Constant Damping Check Box Select this box to enter constant damping If unchecked Alpha and Beta values are editable
Alpha Edit Box Damping Alpha value Editable if constant damping unselected,
otherwise blank and grayed out. Can enter
numeric or scientific format
Beta Edit Box Damping Beta value Editable if constant damping unselected,
otherwise blank and grayed out. Can enter
numeric or scientific format
Damping Ratio % Edit Box Enter constant damping ratio as percentage Editable if constant damping selected, otherwise
applied to all modes blank and grayed out
Description Edit Box Desription of Load Case 40 character limit
See Also:
Fluid Transient Analysis
Steam Relief Method
Alpha and Beta Damping

Command Reference
Harmonic
Runs a harmonic analysis based on the parameters defined in the Harmonic TAB of the Dynamic Analysis dialog.
The Harmonic option in the Analyze menu enables the user to perform a harmonic analysis using previously stored Modal Analysis results and Harmonic Loads to calculate forces and moments due to
harmonic forces. Up to Ten (10) harmonic load cases (H1-H10) may be defined. Each time a harmonic analysis is performed, the results from any previous harmonic analysis are overwritten.
Note: In version 9.1 and earlier, the Harmonic Analysis dialog was displayed when selecting this command. Starting with version 9.2, the harmonic analysis input data is defined under the Load/Dynamic
Analysis menu command. To access the harmonic analysis fields, select the Harmonic TAB.
Harmonic Analysis
Harmonic Analysis load cases can be input using the Harmonic Analysis TAB of the Dynamic Analysis dialog.
Up to 10 Harmonic Analysis load cases can be defined.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Harmonic TAB of the Dynamic Analysis dialog:

Case No. Edit Box Harmonic analysis case number This field is unique. Only numbers between 1 and
10 (inclusive) are permitted in this field
This field is read-only and grayed out.

Harmonic Analysis
DataSet Drop-Down List Select the HMF filename from the drop-down list Refreshes list when Harmonic TAB is selected
in the current working folder
Comb Method Drop-Down List List contains RMS, Max
Missing Mass Check Box Select this box to include the Missing Mass or
Rigid mode correction
Description Edit Box Description of harmonic load case 40 character limit
See Also:

Command Reference
Seismic Anchor Movement Analysis (Performing)

The Seismic Anchor Movement option in the Analyze menu enables the user to perform a seismic anchor movement (SAM) analysis for the currently defined SAM cases. A SAM load case consists of
imposed support displacements and is defined using the Insert/Xtra data/Imposed Support Displacement command. The primary feature of a SAM analysis is the ability to group (or phase) individual
imposed support displacements so that they act at the same time. For example, floors of buildings (or buildings) are said to be in phase if all points on each floor (or the entire building) move in the same
direction at the same time during a seismic event.
When Seismic Anchor Movement is selected from the Analyze menu, the SAM Analysis dialog is displayed.
The SAM Analysis dialog prompts for the user to include or ignore each of the SAM cases (1-10) in the analysis. Once the dialog has been accepted, the analysis will begin. Messages will be displayed
on the screen indicating the progress of the analysis. Refer to Seismic Anchor Movement Analysis Considerations for details concerning the processes employed by AutoPIPE in a SAM analysis. The
analysis results may be reviewed using the options available in the Result menu.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the SAM Analysis dialog:
Hot modulus case
Pressure stiffening case
Soil Stiffness
Other Acceleration Load Topics
Other Anchor-related Topics
See Also:

Command Reference
Equivalent Linear Analysis Overview

The Equivalent Linear’ option in the Analyze menu enables the user to perform an equivalent linear analysis considering gravity, pressure, static earthquake loads and and/or ground movement if they
have been defined. Upon completion of this dialog the Select Load Combinations dialog is displayed.
Note: This option is only available when the code is set to KHK Seismic Level 2.
This command permits the user to have specific control over
l which operating case to use for hot modulus,
l whether or not to use corroded thickness,
l which load cases are to be included in the analysis,
l error tolerance ratio to determine solution convergence, and
l maximum number of iterations to perform in order to reach solution convergence
The following fields/parameters are provided in the &rsquoEquivalent Linear Analysis’ dialog:
Use corroded thickness Earthquake cases E1, E2

and E3
Gravity
Support Disp. cases S1
Contents and S2
Pressure & modulus case Ground Mov. cases U1
Include pressure analysis Gravity
Pressure stiffening Error tolerance ratio
Cut-short analysis Maximum iterations
See Also:
Performing an Equivalent Linear Analysis
Select Load Combinations
Set Iterations
Equivalent Linear Analysis Overview (AutoPIPE Reference Information)
KHK Level 2 Code Compliance Calculations

Command Reference
Performing an Equivalent Linear Analysis

1. Define the options in the Equivalent Linear Analysis dialog as desired. Note that support gaps and friction are ignored during this analysis. A warning message will be displayed if support gaps and
frictions have been defined in the model.
2. After reviewing the settings to ensure they are correct, press OK. The Select Load Combinations dialog will be automatically displayed next. This dialog enables quicker solution time by analyzing
only selected combinations. It is useful for reviewing combinations that have difficulty in converging.
3. After enabling/disabling the combinations, press OK. The analysis process begins. During this procedure, messages will be displayed showing the analysis progress.
4. If the analysis converges successfully within the specified number of iterations, press OK to close the Equivalent Linear Analysis dialog. If the analysis did not converge within the specified
number of iterations, a confirmation dialog will be displayed requesting whether or not to continue iterating. A "yes" selection will allow the user to specify an additional number of iterations to
perform. A "no" selection will display another confirmation dialog requesting whether or not to display the error log file (*.LOG). Press OK to close the Equivalent Linear Analysis dialog.
5. The analysis results may be examined using the options found in the Result menu whether or not the analysis converged successfully. In the case in which the analysis did not converge, an error
message will be displayed after selecting any Result menu option (except Filter Criteria) indicating that the analysis did not converge. In addition, a double asterisks is printed before the
combination names in the Code Compliance Combinations listing and Other User Combinations listing in the Load summary sub-report indicating that the analysis results for those marked
combinations did not converge.
Select Load Combinations

After accepting the Equivalent Linear Analysis dialog, the Select Load Combinations dialog will be automatically displayed next. This dialog enables quicker solution times by analyzing only selected
combinations instead of all 25 combinations. It is useful for reviewing combinations that have difficulty in converging. The 25 load combinations that can be enabled/disabled are listed below. By default,
all 25 combinations are enabled.
Sus. + Inertia:
PW+X+Y PW-X+Y PW+Z+Y PW-Z+Y
PW+X-Y PW-X-Y PW+Z-Y PW-Z-Y
Inertia + Support Displacements:
+X+Y+DX -X+Y+DX +X+Y-DX -X+Y-DX
+X-Y+DX -X-Y+DX +X-Y-DX -X-Y-DX
+Z+Y+DZ -Z+Y+DZ +Z+Y-DZ -Z+Y-DZ
+Z-Y+DZ -Z-Y+DZ +Z-Y-DZ -Z-Y-DZ
Ground Movement:
GMOVE
Command Reference
Tools & Utility Commands

AutoPIPE utilities are provided in the Tools pull-down menu. This menu has two main functions:
l Access System (General), model and post-processing configuration options
l To allow the user to set default and user-defined code & non-code combinations which can then be reviewed using the command in the Result menu, and
l Display a model input listing (input echo) with 2 different formats available.
l Perform a manual consistency check on the defined model. Automatic consistency checks are performed prior to an analysis, and opening older models.
l Create, modify or print post processing load combinations
l Launch On-Screen Distance Calculator
l Modify the structural section database
l Configure rotating equipment reports.
l To provide access to AutoPIPE utilities which allow the user to request drawing accounting information, review AutoPIPE libraries, setup and configure printing and plotting parameters.
Model Options
Model Input Listing
Model Consistency Check
Model Compaction
Coincident Node Check
Design Check
Combinations
Seismic Level
Stress Summary
Distance Calculator
Modify Section Database
Rotating Equipment Overview
Accounting Information
Library Files Overview
Settings
Model Options Commands

The following Model Options menu options are provided:
General Model Options
Model Description
GUID
Model Edit Options
Buried Pipe Result Model Options
Model Result Options
Save Defaults
Command Reference
General Model Options

When a new model database is created, the user is automatically prompted with the General Model Options dialog, which permits the user to define the basic (control) parameters used for describing the
new piping model.
It is also possible to edit a model’s system properties by selecting the Tools/Model Options/General command. The current system values appear in the General Model Options dialog and may be edited, then
applied to all subsequent components placed in the system.
Of particular note is the Piping Code , as AutoPIPE filters several other dialogs to apply directly to the code entered here.
Once the General Model Options dialog is completed, click on OK to accept the input. If you are defining a new system, the next step is to insert the model’s first segment and define its pipe properties
and operating loads. If you are editing an existing system, subsequent components placed in the model will share the edited system values.
Note: When editing a system from the BS 7159 code to another piping code or vice-versa, all code-related data (i.e., pipe, operating load, code dependent, etc.) must be re-specified.
Use the Tools/Model Options/Save Defaults menu option to make these the default values for all newly created models.
The following fields are available:
Project ID
Prepared by
Checked by
1st Approver
2nd Approver
Piping Code
Edition
Use Appendix P (B31.3)
Seismic Level
Lifetime (hrs)
Lifetime monitoring system
SIF Code
Units file name - Input: / Output
Vertical axis direction
Ambient temperature
Number of operating load conditions
Libraries - Component / Material
Note: For EN13480 European code, only Euro material libraries can be selected. The Euro material libraries are not available for other piping codes.
Related Topics:
Model Description
Model Edit Options
Save Defaults
Other Topics Related to Creating New Systems

Command Reference
Model Description
Select Tools/Model Options/Model Description to display the Model Description dialog, which enables the user to enter approximately 2 page (about 8000 characters with spaces) description of the piping system.
This description can be selected to print after the AutoPIPE System Information page of the model input list reports and output reports.
Navigation
n TAB will switch between the text window to the control buttons on the dialog.
n Ctrl + Enter in the text window will create a new line
n Ctrl + Tab will insert a tab in the text window
Reading older models
The 10 lines of description fields in Pre v9.0 models will be converted into the new text string (2 page) format and displayed as 10 separate lines in the new text description window.
Command Reference
GUID
Select Tools/Model Options/GUID to display the Model GUID dialog. The Model GUID dialog displays the globally unique identifier or GUID associated with the model. The GUID is required for the data
exchange solution PipeLink, which requires a unique identifier for every AutoPIPE element and model.
Note: Press the "Generate GUID" to auto-generate a new random model GUID.
See Also:
Model From STAAD Using PipeLink (*.pipelink)

Command Reference
Model Edit Options

AutoPIPE allows the user to establish and save defaults for controlling parameters like the number of significant decimals to allow when defining offset values. To open the Edit Model Options dialog,
select Tools/Model Options/Edit.
Note: The dialog defaults are active for all system databases until modified by the user. Modifications to the User Preferences are stored in the .DAT file only after a Save has been performed.
The ’Use proposed B31.3, h = 3.1*T/r’ option is no longer provided in the Edit Model Options dialog. AutoPIPE is now applying the new ASME B31.3 requirement for welding tees and contour inserts.
The User Preferences dialog enables the user to define the following parameters according project needs or company standards:
Digits after decimal for coordinates
Default point name format
Default point name offset
Replace all point names on renumber
Use feet-inches display format
Mass points per span
Cutoff frequency
Use corroded thickness in all analyses
Suppress analysis warning prompts
Ignore flange effect on bend stiffness
Distance L/D from flange/valve to bend
Include Bourdon rotational effect
Pipe radius for Bourdon calculation
Coincident Node Tolerance (0-no check)
Levels of Undo
Rigid stiffness factor
Flange bolt/nut weight factor
Support Rigid Stiffness - Translation & Rotation
Anchor Rigid Stiffness - Translation & Rotation

Command Reference
Buried Pipe Result Model Options

The buried pipe result model options dialog is used to specify the options required in calculating soil overburden loads and through wall bending stresses.
The dialog contains following fields:
Soil Overburden Category

Circ. wall bending stress calculation method
Soil input parameters set to be used for calculations
Add Circ. Bending stress to Sustained
Use min(Sh-SL, Sh-f) as sustained margin
Ring Bucking allowable safety factor
ASCE 2001
Display circ. wall bending & ring buckling in code compliance
Seismic + Thermal Category

Thermal case used for seismic wave propagation load
SAM case combined with seismic wave propagation
Seismic + thermal allowable factor
Display seismic + thermal combinations in code compliance
Building Settlement Category

Building settlement load case
Display building settlement category in code compliance
Command Reference

The Tools/Model Options/Result command allows the user to customize system parameters which set the format for the batch report file (SYSNAME.OUT), the screen scale factor for deflected system plots (for
interactive scanning, and pen plotter dumps), and various factors related to code stress calculations.
Note: The options which are available in the User Preference dialog, and the specific field default values, depend on the piping code in use. The complete set of User Preference options shown below may
not be available. If changes are made to these settings, the new values are stored in the DAT file only after a File/Save has been performed.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Result Model Options dialog:
Format (Node/Combin) Displacement Scale
Force (Global/Local) Range reduction factor
Include axial force Weld efficiency factor
Overwrite output file Y Factor
Use nominal thickness Design factor F
Use nom. thk. for Hoop Temperature derating factor
Set SUS SIF =1 no bends Design Pressure factor
Single SIF at point Minimum Stress Ratio
Set Sus/Occ SIF = 1 Hoop safety factor
Set Sus/Occ = 0.75i Long. safety factor
Include torsion Shear allowable factor
Single SIF at tees Total allowable factor
Apply all K-factors Interm. stress points
Include results desc No. of thermal ranges
Include bend ovaling Include Max Range comb
Include hoop bending Use code case 178
Direct Shear (N/R/A) Include Axial,Pcase in Sustained
Total stress(Oct/Max) Use Alt Occ Allowable
Apply modulus ratio Apply circ w factor
Apply tee summation Use theoretical Sec Mod
Sustain Margin (Y/N/E) Show rigid tee stress
Use min. sustained margin
Long. Pressure (P/A/M/N)
Digits after decimal
Additional Fields for B31.3 2010 edition.

Set Occasional SIF=0.75i
Additional Fields for B31.4 Offshore and B31.8 Offshore.

Hoop Design Factor - F1
Long. Design Factor - F2
Combined Dsgn Factor - F3
Additional Fields for CSA-Z662 Offshore.

Func. Design Factor - F1
Func+Env Dsgn Factor - F2
Additional Fields for SNiP 2.05.06-85 Oil & Gas.
Use Axial in Hoop Allow
Additional Fields for EN13480 European code.

Use min(f;fcr) for Hoop

Set Hoop SIF = 1 (bends)
Sustained Factor-f2
Sus.+Thermal Factor-f2
Occasional Factor-f2
Command Reference
Save Defaults
The Tools/Model Options/Save Defaults command allows the user to save all customized system parameters in the current model as defaults for all newly created models in the current directory using the
File/New menu option. Options which are saved in the defaults file (AUTOPIPE.DFL) include the General, Edit, and Results Tools/Model Options dialogs. If a new model is created in a working directory, the
defaults file in the working directory will be used first. If the defaults file does not exist in the working directory, then the defaults file in the program directory (if existing) will be used instead.
Note: To revert to the original AutoPIPE defaults for a new model, delete the AUTOPIPE.DFL file from the AutoPIPE program directory.
Command Reference
Model Input Listing

When Tools/Model Input Listing is selected, the Model Input List Report dialog is displayed. After selecting the report options and the types of sub-reports to include in the model input list report, AutoPIPE
creates an ASCII text report file, SYSNAME.RPT in the working directory that contains an output listing of the system geometry and properties, including a summary page and tables for pipe element, beam,
point, material, and load data. In addition, AutoPIPE displays the model input list report on-screen in a text editor (AutoPIPE Report Viewer) that can be used to view, save, and/or print the report.
Checking each sub-report field creates a separate section in the report. The report can be limited to selected (highlighted) points. All the sub-report fields will be initially checked by default for new
models and after importing models created from version 6.1 or older. The "Use version 6.1 report format" field is initially unchecked by default for new models only. The "Limit reports to highlighted
points" field will be initially unchecked for new models and after importing models created from version 6.1 or older. It is disabled if "Use version 6.1 report format" field is checked.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Model Input List Report dialog:
File Name
Use version 6.1 report format
Limit reports to highlighted points
Include Description
Select/Unselect all reports
Extended Component (Point in v6.1) Earthquake Scale Factors
Coordinates (Component in v6.1) Soil Properties
Pipe Properties Load Summary
Material Properties Support
Material Allowables Bend
Temperature & Pressure Tee
Beam Valve
Forces & Displacements Flange
Thermal Anchor Movements User SIF
Seismic Anchor Movements Reducer
Center of Gravity Rigid Pipe
Reference Points
Segments Data
For Field Descriptions in the Extended Component Sub-report, See Also
Offset Data Field Descriptions
Component Data Field Descriptions
Pipe_Data_Field_Descriptions
Operating Data Field Descriptions
Point Data Field Descriptions
Support Data Field Descriptions
Soil Data Field Descriptions
Note: For ASME NB, NC, and ND piping codes only, the design pressure and temperature data are not reported in the Component data listing of the Input Listing report. However, they are reported
separately in the Design Pressure & Temperature data listing.
Command Reference
Model Consistency Check

At any stage of the modeling process, a user may instruct AutoPIPE to perform a global consistency check by selecting Tools/Model Consistency Check. AutoPIPE will check the system and report any
abnormalities or conditions that will cause problems during system analyses. This command is also automatically performed before an analysis can be performed.
As part of the global consistency check, the following modeling data is updated by the program:
l Near and far points for bends.
l Stress intensification factors at tees and reducers.
l Nozzle stiffnesses (if required).
l Intermediate soil points.
l Distributed loads.
In addition, the program provides warnings when the following modeling conditions are detected:
l Invalid piping code.
l Undefined bends.
l Illegal reducer length, angle, end diameters and D/t ratio.
l Zero length for tie/link support.
l Undefined connection for the tie/link support.
l Kinks along straight run.
l Near zero length elements.
l Sudden pipe property change without a reducer.
l Inconsistencies in coordinates at tees.
l The branch outside diameter is larger than the header outside diameter.
l Branch and header are not perpendicular.
l More than 3 branches at a junction.
l A segment not connected to any other segment.
l An unconnected segment with no anchors.
l No anchors in the current system.
l Buried piping is defined but soil option is not available.
l Version limitation exceeded.
l Beam members are defined but beam option is not available.
l Flanges defined at widely-spaced miter bends.
l The pipe operating temperature exceeds the material allowable's temperature range.
l The pipe operating loads or size exceeds the material allowable limits, if any.
Command Reference
Model Compaction
This command is useful only for imported PXF models. This function is done automatically during Model Consistency Check for non-imported models. The PXD file is created during PXF import and
contains mapping data between AutoPIPE points and AutoPLANT components. When compaction is done, the node pointers in the PXD file are updated. However any undo/redo could mess up the
mapping. For this reason, the undo stack is cleared and the model is saved. The user is warned about this possible action.
The Tools/Model Compaction was typically done during Model Consistency Check. In version 6.20 model compaction will continue to be done in global consistency check when the model is not an
imported PXF model. For imported PXF models, model compaction should be performed using Tools/Model Compaction and only if the PXD file exists and matches the time stamp and revision
numbers stored in the DAT file. The command can be performed for non imported models as well.
When the Model Compaction is performed for imported PXF models, a warning message will be given to notify the user that the model will be saved and the undo stack will be removed and no further
undo is possible.
The compaction checks if there are intermediate unused node space and will compact these spaces. The file size will not be reduced, but this allows the space to be reused by new elements.
The file revision number is incremented after compaction, and this revision number is stored in the PXD file and also in the DAT file. This is the only time the PXD revision is incremented. The time
stamp is saved in the PXD and DAT files during PXF import.
The following messages will come up if the PXD file is not consistent with the DAT file.
W722-4 Cannot compact imported PXF file when PXD file is not present
Please place PXD file in same directory as DAT file
W722-6 AutoPLANT PXD file is not consistent with model, compaction aborted.
This compaction process will also blank all unconnected piping points. User can undo model compaction, if PXD file revision is not changed.
Coincident Node Check

Select this option to perform a coincident node check on the complete model based on the tolerance under Tools>Model options >Edit (Coincident Node Tolerance (0- no check))
What is a Coincident node check?
It is the maximum distance used to determine the proximity of a point from another given point. This criteria is used to identify points that are "coincident" but not connected. Once the tolerance is set, a
coincident node check can be run
Command Reference
Design Check
Select Tools/Design Check to scan the model and report any of the following warnings:
l More than two flanges at run/bend at point...
l More than one flanges at valve/reducer/flexible joint end at point...
l Valve/reducer/flex joint should have flanges at both ends. Point...
l Single flange at point...
l Imposed displacement exist but there is no support at point...
l More than one weight at point...
l More than one user SIF at point...
l More than one hydrodynamic data at point...
l More than one Spring supports at point...
l More than one Y-Stop supports at point...
l More than one Constant supports at point...
l More than one Line Stop supports at point...
l More than one Inclined supports in same direction at point...
l More than one Guide supports at point...
l More than one Damper supports in same direction at point...
l More than one supports in same direction at point...
l More than one Rotational supports in same direction at point...
l More than one Soil supports at point...
l More than one Tie/Link supports at point...
l More than one displacement in same direction and load case at point...
l More than one forces in same direction and load case at point...
l Pressure rating on mating flanges is not the same at point...
l Pressure rating on mating flange to valve is not the same at point...
l Flange joint end type is not the same as flanged valve at point...
l Flanged valve/flexible joint should have mating flange/flanged component at Point...
l Flange(s) found at middle point of back to back flanged valve/flex joint at point...
l In case of back to back flanged valve/flex joint, one flange should be on near point of first valve/flex joint and second flange should be on far point of last valve/flex joint.
l More than one User Weld Efficiency Factor at point...
Command Reference
Combinations Overview
AutoPIPE provides automatic default code and non-code combinations but provides the user the flexibility to define their own user-defined combinations. A maximum of 1000 code and 1000 non-code
combinations (including the default and user defined combinations) are available, for a possible total of 2000 combinations in the result grids and output reports. If a user combination has the same name
as a default combination, the program will convert the user combination to a default combination with 'Automatic Update' toggled off, and all other combination data will remain the same.
Note: It should be noted that extensive configuration of the load combinations is usually NOT necessary in particular the code combinations, as AutoPIPE automatically sets up the required combinations
based on the currently analyzed load cases.
A flexible open grid interface provides the ability create, modify, delete and select code and non-code combinations for post processing.
Code Combinations
These are combinations which provide strict code stress compliance with the selected piping code and are grouped in code stress categories e.g. Sustained, Expansion, Occasional and Hoop.
The defaults for "Code" combinations are based on the selected piping code and the load cases which have been analyzed.
l Hoop is not always an explicit code stress case but AutoPIPE always provides it by default.
l Default code combinations include bending stresses due to the analyzed load cases and longitudinal and/or hoop pressure stress as required by the piping code e.g.
GR+MaxP represents sustained stress due to Gravity bending stress + maximum longitudinal pressure stress.
SUS+E1 - Maximum sustained stresses + stress due to seimic case E1.
Cold to T1 - Expansion stress for ambient to temperature T1.
T1 to T2 - Expansion stress range from temperature case T1 to T2
l Common Abbreviations :
SUS - Maximum sustained stresses (all sustained cases)
EXP - Maximum thermal stress (all thermal cases)
LONG - Maximum Longitudinal pressure stress (all pressure cases)
HOOP - Maximum Hoop pressure stress (all pressure cases)
Note: The longitudinal pressure stress can only be determined when individual pressure or thermal load cases are combined, i.e. GR+P1+E1 = GR*Factor + P1*Factor + E1*Factor. The pressure cannot
be determined for nested combinations, i.e. GRP1+E1 = (GR+P1)*Factor + E1*Factor.
These are combinations used to check combined load displacements and resultant loads on anchors, supports, rotating equipment or vessels.
The defaults for "Non-Code" combinations follow the rules defined in "Add Default Non-code combination" which provide common operating and operating + occasional load cases (e.g. wind and
seismic loadings) as used in engineering practice.
Consistency Check
The combination consistency check will be performed after the program automatically updates the default combinations e.g. Before the Output report is generated or any of the combination operations are
performed e.g. Tools /Combinations.
The consistency check will be applied to the code and non-code combinations separately. The program displays the following warning message when a code combination includes unanalyzed load cases
or combinations that include unanalyzed load cases. By pressing "Yes" (default), the program will deactivate all the combinations with unanalyzed load cases or combinations that include unanalyzed
load cases. Similar message for non-code combinations.
"Code combinations with unanalyzed load cases were found. The results
for these combinations will not be complete. to see additional details,
see the Analysis Summary report (Result /Output report). Would you like
to deactivate all code combinations with unanalyzed load cases?"
AutoPIPE stores combination information in the external system combination file SYSNAME.CMB. All code and non-code combination information is read and written to this file.
Upon performing any post-processing load combinations operations in the program e.g. Tools/Combinations, the program detects whether or not the CMB file was created from a pre-8.5 version of the
program. If it was, then the existing CMB will be automatically backed up to a ~CM file before being converted to the v8.5 CMB file.
Note: There is only local Undo/Redo option for combinations operations in code or non-code combinations grids.
For KHK Level 2 code option, the number of combinations has no impact to that code option since the combinations are pre-defined for KHK Level 2.
Related Topics:
Grid User Interface
Grids Undo/Redo
Grids Right Mouse Menu
Command Reference
Combinations
To review, modify or print new post processing combinations defined for the current model, select Tools/Combinations. The exact list of combinations will depend on the active load cases analyzed
and the code associated with the current system.
There are four distinct TAB GRIDS appearing on the Combination dialog:
Load Cases
All the analyzed static and dynamic load cases are displayed for each analysis set in the grid.
The "Load Cases" grid display a read-only description for each analyzed load case.
Code Comb.
The "Code Compliance" grid displays the combination set defined for piping code compliance (both the default combinations and user-defined sets). Any default code combination may be modified,
deleted or reset and any new user combination created and modified in the same grid.
Non-Code Comb.
The "Non-Code" grid displays the active load case combination set defined for any purpose other than code compliance (e.g. displacement and support results). Any default non-code combination may be
modified, deleted or reset and any new user combination created and modified in the same grid.
User Allowable
The "User Allowable" grid displays the allowable stresses to be used in the pre-verification and stress summary reports (ASME NB, NC, and ND codes only). The user may leave the field set to
"Automatic", which will have the program use the allowable stress specified in the current nuclear piping code edition, or a user-defined allowable stress can be entered.
Seismic Level
Displays the Seismic Level dialog, which can be used to define the seismic load cases to be combined and used in the JSME and MITI seismic stress calculations.
Combination Options
Options are available to create different default non-code combinations and lock or freeze code or non-code combinations from being changed automatically by the program.
Combination Editing Buttons

Buttons for operations of creating new combinations, modify, duplicate or delete existing combinations and resetting default combinations for the selected piping code.
Color Legend
Results are outdated with the model revision and the appropriate analysis needs to be re-run. (Load Cases Grid only)
Code Combination is used in the Stress Summary for ASME NB, NC or ND piping codes only
User combination is used in another User combination and therefore cannot be deleted
Invalid code or non-code combinations since results are missing for one or more components contained in the combination
Note: "Non-code" combinations are used for all numeric result batch report sections and General Stress report except Code Compliance.
Note: User-defined allowable stress can be specified only if the "Auto Update" is unchecked for the default combination
The Tools/Combinations (Click combination options button) option "Add default Non-code combination" will automatically create default non-code combinations based on the analyzed load cases.
See Also:
Automatic Update of Default Combinations
Input Grids Reference
Load Cases Grid

The following input columns are available :
Column Field Input Editable Comments

Select stress category from the drop
Analysis Set # No
down list
Analyzed Load Read only list of the load cases
No
Case from all analyzed Analysis Sets
Default = checked
Note: Only available for ASME

NB, NC, and ND nuclear piping
codes
Select this box to ignore this load
Ignore for case for all default non-code and Note: This load case will be still be
Yes, No
Comb. code combinations. If checked then available for user defined
no default combinations created. combinations
e.g. useful for class 1 when have

many gravity cases (non-linear
analysis) from many analysis sets
which can be ignored
Description Hard wired description of load case No
Note: All buttons are disabled except Combination Options
Notes:
2. Check or uncheck the options on Dynamic or Print or Auto Update columns (row 2) to check or uncheck all options in the column.
3. Select a combination method from the drop down list on Combination Method column (row 2) to apply to all cells in the column.
4. Select Automatic on Allowable Stress column (row 2 ) to apply to all cells in the column.
5. Select Combination Method column (row 2) to apply same method to all combinations.
6. Select Code Combinations TAB will refresh the Duplicate combination drop down list with the current code combinations.
Results are outdated with the model revision and the appropriate analysis needs to be re-run. (Load Cases Grid only)
Related Topics:
Code Combination Grid
Non-Code Combination Grid
User Allowable Grid



Read only list of the non-code Enter a name for User defined
combinations (automatic) and combinations up to 24 characters.
Combination Yes, No
editable user defined combination Maximum of 1000 code
names. combinations can be created.
Select stress category from the drop
Category Yes
down list
Default = unchecked, except for
Category = 'Occasion' or
'SAM' (ASME NB only). Only
available for ASME class NB, NC,
ND. ASME NB, NC, ND
combinations will appear in
equations 9 & 10 drop down list.
Reversing Select this box to flag this Code
Hidden for other piping codes
Combination as a dynamic type for Yes, No
Dynamic calculating stress and allowable
Please refer to the section on
Including SAM Load Case in
Equation 10 of the Stress Summary
help page for more information
about properly using reversing
dynamic SAM load cases for
ASME NB.
Select this box to included this Non-
Code Combination in the report or
Print Yes, No Default = Checked
result grid or interactive on-screen
results
If the combination type is "Default",

then the "Automatic Update:"
option is enabled and initially
checked by default. If the
Automatic Update:" option is
unchecked, then the program will

not automatically update the
combination. If the combination
type is "User-Defined", then the
Auto Update "Automatic Update:" field is Yes, No Default = Checked
disabled (grayed out) since "User-
Defined" combinations are never
updated by the program only by the
user.
Combination Select combination method from
Yes, No
Method drop down list of 1 to 10 methods
A combination can be created by
either the program (default) or by
Combination Display either "Default" (Automatic
Yes, No the user combination can be
Type combination) or "User-Defined"
created by either the program
(default) or by the user
Available for the ISO 14692 piping
code only.
Notes: 1. No f2 factor is displayed

for expansion stress category as
expansion allowable is not
Displays the part factor for the provided by the ISO 14692 piping
f2 Factor Yes, No
corresponding category code. 2. This field becomes
editable when the "Auto Update"
option is unchecked.
For more details on the f2 factors

see Part Factor for Loading, f2 in
the Reference Information.
Available for Russian SNIP
Seismic Stress Check this option to include SNIP
Yes, No 2.05.06-85 Oil & Gas piping code
Q seismic stress for the combination
only
Allow. Stress Enter the allowable stress above
Above Ground+ ground in + direction
only & Auto Update flag off
Allow. Stress Enter the allowable stress above
Above Ground- ground in - direction
Allow. Stress Enter the allowable stress under
Under Ground+ ground in + direction
Allow. Stress Enter the allowable stress under
Under Ground- ground in -direction
This field is not editable unless

"Auto Update" is unchecked.
Allowable
Enter occasional stress K factor Yes,
This field is only editable for
(K) Factor
occasional stress category
combinations. The default value
will be dependent on the piping
code e.g. B31.3, K=1.33. It is

hidden for ASME NB/NC/ND
codes since teh allowable factors
are automatically calculated for
each service level and each year.
Default = Automatic. This option is closed
to input for the General, B31.4 offshore,
B31.8 offshore and B31.8 (restrained
combinations), NB, NC, and ND piping
code options.
Allowable
Select Automatic or enter value Yes
Stress This option is only editable when the Auto
Update option is unchecked.
This field is not available for the BS7159

and ISO 14692 piping codes.
Default = Automatic. Available for
Hoop, codes General, B31.8, BS7159, and
Select Automatic or enter value Yes
Longitudinal ISO 14692 only otherwise
disabled.
Shear Stress Select Automatic or enter value Yes code B31.8 & General only
otherwise disabled.
General. Also Available for code
Total Stress Select Automatic or enter value Yes B31.4 and B31.8 offshore but
renamed to Combined. Otherwise
disabled.
Enter up to 40 character description
Description Yes
of the code combination
Code Combination is used in the Stress Summary for ASME NB, NC or ND piping codes only
Note: All buttons are enabled and active
Notes:
2. Check or uncheck the options on Dynamic or Print or Auto Update columns (row 2) to check or uncheck all options in the column.
3. If the combination and category are grayed out then these combinations cannot be edited
Related Topics:
Load Cases Grid
User Allowable Grid
Combination Options
Longitudinal Pressure [Use this option to change from thin to thick wall longitudinal pressure stress calculation]
Seismic Level [Used for MITI and JSME PPC codes only]


Read only list of the non-code Enter a name for User defined
combinations (automatic) and combinations up to 24 characters.
Combination Yes, No
editable user defined combination Maximum of 1000 code
names. combinations can be created.
Select this box to included this Non-
Code Combination in the report or
Print Yes Default = Checked
result grid or interactive on-screen
results
If the combination type is "Default",

then the "Automatic Update:"
option is enabled and initially
checked by default. If the
Automatic Update:" option is
Auto Update unchecked, then the program will Yes Default = Checked
not automatically update the
combination. If the combination
type is "User-Defined", then the
"Automatic Update:" field is
disabled (grayed out) since "User-
Defined" combinations are never

updated by the program only by the
user.
Combination Select combination method from
Yes
Method drop down list of 1 to 10 methods
Combination Display either "Default" (Automatic
No
Type combination) or "User-Defined"
Available for SNIP Russian
SNIP Seismic Check this option to include SNIP
Stress Seismic stress with the combination
only
The description for thermal,
seismic and wind load cases can be
Enter up to 40 character description generated automatically by
Description Yes
of the non-code combination choosing the combination option
'Generate default non-code
descriptions'.
Note: All buttons are enable and active.
Notes:
2. Check or uncheck the options on Auto Update or Print column (row 2 ) to check or uncheck all options in the column.
4. Default non-combinations consist of the following:
• Loads from analyzed Combinations e.g. GR, T1, T2 etc from each Analysis Set
• Analyzed Dynamic cases
• Follow existing rules for linear and non-linear non-code combinations
• { } - combination with components from this analysis set number
Related Topics:
Load Cases Grid
User Allowable Grid
Combination Options
Command Reference
User-Defined Code Combinations

Select the Tools/Combinations to define a new, user-defined code compliance combination or modify an existing one. A user-defined combination may consist of any existing load case and/or code
compliance combination; however, a combination cannot be included in itself.
Note: Starting with AutoPIPE version 9.1.0.18, the user code expansion combinations are evaluated as part of the thermal stress range. The user expansion cases, although included in the Max Range in
AutoPIPE V8i, are considered as a range by themselves and hence are not ranged with other regular thermal cases. We simply take the maximum stress from the user expansion case and envelope that
with the Max Range of all regular thermal cases (T1 to Tn).
The following fields/parameters are available from the User Combination dialog:
Combination name
Combination Type - Displays "Default" or "User-Defined"
A combination can be created by either the program (default) or by the user combination can be created by either the program (default) or by the user
Automatic Update
Combination method
Category
Case/comb
Factor
M/S
Apply changes to current combination
See Also:
Guidelines for Creating Combinations
Display Load Combinations
User Defined Load Combinations
Other Algebraic Summation Topics
Command Reference
User Defined Non-Code Combinations

The Tools/Combinations command allows you to define or modify a user-defined "Non-code" combination. This command functions in the same manner as described for the Code Compliance combinations.
The exceptions being that the User Combination dialog for the "Non-code" Combinations set does not contain the Category input field, nor the ability to include predefined stress categories in the
combination. See the note below concerning an automatic save.
Note: Enable the "Add default Non-Code combination" option in the Tools/Combinations dialog (click Combination Options button), to save time in creating default combinations manually. By default
this option is disabled and only the single load cases analyzed are included in the default combinations list. By enabling this option, the existing default list of load combinations will also include all the
"typical" load combinations possible with the currently analyzed load cases.
See Also:
Guidelines for Creating Combinations
Overriding or supplementing AutoPIPE’s automatic combination of loads for code compliance calculations
Display Load Combinations
User Defined Load Combinations
Other Algebraic Summation Topics
User Allowable Grid

The following input columns are available for ASME NB/NC/ND codes only :

Shows the Combination that will
Combination correspond with that row of user No
allowable stresses
Shows the Category that will
Category correspond with that row of user No
allowable stresses
Enter an allowable stress, or leave
as 'Automatic' to use the allowable
stress defined for service level A.
Preliminary
This will also determine the Yes, No
Level A
allowable stress used in the pre-
verification report (Results/Output
Report/Preliminary Stress).
Level B
as 'Automatic' to use the allowable Yes, No
Allowable
stress defined for service level B.
Level C
Allowable
stress defined for service level C.
Level D
Allowable
stress defined for service level D.
Note:
1. All buttons are disabled except Reset Defaults Only and Combination Options.
2. The Reset Defaults Only button will cause all allowable stresses to be reset to 'Automatic'.
3. For ASME NB, Equations 11 and 14 have no allowable stress so these are disabled.
4. Equation 11a will only show for years NC/ND 1994-2005.
5. For ASME NB/NC/ND, the last 4 rows apply to reversing dynamic stress summaries and these are valid for levels C and D only. Therefore, the columns for level A and B will be disabled for the last 4
rows. Additionally, all 4 rows will be disabled for 1993 and earlier, since reversing dynamic stress summaries are not applicable for these code years.
Related Topics:
Load Case Grid

Command Reference
Seismic Level (JSME 2008)

From the Load Combination dialog, select the Code Comb. tab, then press the Seismic Level button to display the Seismic Level dialog. The Seismic Level option is available only for the MITI and JSME
PPC codes, and will not be enabled when other piping codes are selected. It enables the user to define the seismic level and seismic load cases for forming the default seismic load combinations according
to the MITI or JSME PPC code.
Note: Global-Y must be the vertical axis to use this feature.
There are three types of seismic loads defined by the MITI and JSME PPC codes: static seismic, dynamic seismic and seismic anchor movement loads.
For each load type, the direction and type of earthquake must be defined. The remaining fields enable the user to define the AutoPIPE load case names for each type of seismic load. Depending on the
seismic level entered, only the appropriate load type fields will be open. A partial list of the AutoPIPE load case names is provided in a selection list; however, any valid AutoPIPE load case name can be
entered. If NONE is entered for a load type, AutoPIPE will ignore that load type when forming the default seismic load combinations.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Seismic Level dialog:
Level (2008)
Option
Gravity
Occasional
Static Seismic (2008)
Dynamic Seismic (2008)
Seismic Anchor Movement (2008)
Apply 3 dir. at the same time
H/V combination
Reset load combinations

Command Reference
Seismic Level (JSME 2005 and MITI)

From the Load Combination dialog, select the Code Comb. tab, then press the Seismic Level button to display the Seismic Level dialog. The Seismic Level option is available only for the MITI and JSME
PPC codes, and will not be enabled when other piping codes are selected. It enables the user to define the seismic level and seismic load cases for forming the default seismic load combinations according
to the MITI or JSME PPC code.
Note: Global-Y must be the vertical axis to use this feature.
There are three types of seismic loads defined by the MITI and JSME PPC codes: static seismic, dynamic seismic and seismic anchor movement loads.
For each load type, the direction and type of earthquake must be defined. The remaining fields enable the user to define the AutoPIPE load case names for each type of seismic load. Depending on the
seismic level entered, only the appropriate load type fields will be open. A partial list of the AutoPIPE load case names is provided in a selection list; however, any valid AutoPIPE load case name can be
entered. If NONE is entered for a load type, AutoPIPE will ignore that load type when forming the default seismic load combinations.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Seismic Level dialog:
Level (2005)
Option
Static Seismic (2005)
Dynamic Seismic (2005)
Seismic Anchor Movement (2005)
Reset load combinations

Combination Options
The following options are available on the combination dialog:
Add default Non-Code combination
This option will add to the existing default list of "Non-Code" load combinations all the "typical" load combinations possible with the currently selected analyzed load cases, saving the user from having
to enter the combinations manually. Default = unchecked. Disabled when ’Disable Auto Non-Code Combination’ checked. Enabled for all codes besides KHK Level 1. Enabled for KHK Level 2
Add Negative Occasional Cases
If this option is selected, the program will generate default Non-Code combinations for negative occasional load cases in addition to the default Non-Code combinations for positive occasional load cases
of seismic and wind only, i.e. GRTP1+W1, GRTP1-W1, GRTP1+E1, GRTP1-E1, etc. The default state is unchecked. This option will be disabled (grayed out) if the "Add default Non-Code
combination" option is unchecked or if the static analysis = non-linear.
Some behaviors:
• Disabled when 'Disable Auto Non-Code Combination' checked
• Always Enabled for B31.8, B31.4 Offset, B31.8 Offset, CSA Z662 Offset
• KHK (Enabled only for level 2)
• All other codes (Enabled when one or more load sets are linear)
Disable Auto Code Combinations
This field is active for all codes. When this option is selected, the existing default code combinations in the CMB file will no longer be updated dynamically and new default code combinations will not
be generated. Also, the "No. of thermal ranges" and "Include Max Range comb" check boxes are unchecked and made non-editable. All code combinations are expected to be managed by the user.
After checking the 'Disable auto Code comb' option, none of the current code combinations will be deleted by the program based on the 'Automatic update' setting. Additionally, the program will ignore
the 'Automatic update' setting for the current code combinations and treat every code combination as if they were 'user-defined'. Also, the 'Automatic update' checkbox will be disabled in the User Code
Combination dialog.
Disable Auto Non Code Combinations
Similar as code combinations
Note: If the Disable auto code or non-code combinations options are unchecked then when analysis sets are changed and re-analyzed then the default combinations will be automatically updated.
Do not show set 1 in name
If this option is selected then the analysis set number 1 will not be shown. e.g. GR[1] will be shown as GR
This display format is similar to pre-version 9.1 which only had one analysis set.
Generate default non-code descriptions
If this option is selected, default description is generated for the load cases as follows:
l Thermal case: temperature of thermal case e.g. '232.22 deg C'
l Seismic case: X, Y, Z coordinates for the case
l Wind case: X, Y, Z coordinates for the wind direction
The description can be overwritten by the user. The description can be reverted to 'Auto' description by setting description to blank and performing reset on non-code combinations.
Hide non printed combinations
If this option is selected, then all those code and non-code combinations whose printed flag is turned off are hidden and not shown in the combinations grid.
Import Combination File
This option allows user code and non-code combinations to be imported from one model to another model. See Import Combinations for more details.
Related Topics:
Load Cases Grid
Command Reference
Import Combinations
In AutoPIPE, the combinations (code/non-code) for a model are stored in the *.cmb files. The option "Import combinations from file" allows the user to create the user combinations based on the user
combinationss from a different model. The option invokes a File Open dialog. The user can select a *.cmb file from a different model whose combinations are to be brought in the current model. The
combinations can either be from code & non-code type.
Some points to consider:
n If the load cases used in the combinations of source model are not available in the current model, the combination will be marked invalid as per legend in the dialog
n All the existing combinations are removed before importing the new combinations, a confirmation message is presented to the user
Related Topics:
Load Cases Grid
Command Reference
Stress Summary
To review, modify or print post processing ASME III Class 1, 2, or 3 Stress Summary equation loadings defined for the current model, select Tools/Stress Summary. 999 Stress summaries
can be defined for any service level and each gives full code stress verification including Fatigue to class 1, 2 or 3. This option is unavailable for all other piping
codes.
Important Notes:
1. Switching code years from pre 1994 to post 1994 or vice versa will delete all stress summaries.
2. Switching to or from the 2007 edition of class 1, 2, or 3 will delete all stress summaries.
3. Switching between class 1 to class 2/3 will delete all stress summaries defined.
The following table applies to both Class 1, 2, and 3 stress summaries.
Column Title Type Description Comments

Stress Drop Drop-down list of read-only stress Up to 999 stress summaries
Summary No. Down List summary numbers
Description Editable Enter the text describing the

text box current stress summary up to 80
characters
Service Level Drop Select the service level from the For ASME NB Class 1 piping,
Down List drop-down list. the Rupture Method is
incorporated into the Service
Level field.
Reversing Checkbox When this checkbox is enabled Available for Class 1, 2, and 3,
Dynamic (checked) the alternate for service levels C and D. This
evaluation method described in field is disabled for piping codes
NB-3655(b), NC-3654(b), or ND- prior to 1994 addenda.
3654(b) for service level C, or
NB-3656(b), NC-3655(b), or ND- This option is not available when
3655(b) for service level D shall the Hydrotest option is checked
be used. If the checkbox is for the stress summary.
disabled (unchecked) the
evaluation method described in Disabled if buried piping method
NB-3655(a), NC-3654(a), or ND- is set to 'Adams. et. Al.'.
3654(a) for service level C, or
NB-3656(a), NC-3655(a), or ND-
3655(a) for service level D shall
be used.
Only one equation is available

per stress summary with 3
loadings available, which are
sustained, reversing dynamic
and anchor motion.
Consider 2 x Checkbox Checking this option will add a Only available for ASME NC and
SAM in Eqn. 10 third moment case to consider: ND. It applies to every code
2*SAM, when determining the year, and service level (without
moment to be used in Equation 10. reversing dynamic).
Print Checkbox Select this box to include this
stress summary in the output
report, interactive code scan and
Result grid.
Rupture Drop Select a criteria for evaluating the This field is available for Class 2,
Allowable Down List potential of rupture due to high- and 3 only. However, the a
energy stress Rupture Method can be applied to
Class 1 by selecting either

'Rupture - 1981' or 'Rupture -
1987' in the Service Level field.
Disabled if buried piping method

is set to 'Adams. et. Al.'.
Leakage Drop Select a criteria for evaluating the Available for Class 1, 2, and 3
Allowable Down List potential of leakage cracks due to
moderate-energy stress Disabled if buried piping method
Buried Piping Drop Select the option to be applied for Available for Class 2 and 3 only.
Down List calculation of soil overburden
loads on buried piping
Hydrotest Checkbox Checking this option will create a Available for Class 1, 2, and 3.
stress summary specifically for a
hydrotest This option is not available when
the Reversing Dynamic option is
checked for the stress summary.
When this option is checked none

of the equations are editable, and
no new equations can be defined.

Hydrotest Editable Enter the allowable to be used for Enabled when the Hydrotest
Allowable text box the hydrotest stress summary option is checked.

Allowable case Drop Design, Ambient, analyzed Disabled if buried piping method
for Sh, Sy in Eqn. Down List thermal cases T1, T2, T3 etc.; The is set to 'Adams. et. Al.'.
9 temperature selected shall be used
to determine the material
allowable stress, Sh, and material
yield strength, Sy to be used in
equation.
Equation index Read only Equation index is the sequential
field number of the equation in stress
summary
Equation No. Drop Equation Number denotes the type
Down List of stress verification criteria. For
Class 1, Equation 9 represents the
Primary Stress Intensity and
Equation 10 for primary plus
secondary stress intensity. For
Class 2 and 3, Equation 8
represents stresses due to
sustained loads, Equation 9 for
stresses due to occasional loads,
Equation 10 for thermal expansion
stress range, Equation 10a for
single non-repeated support

movement, Equation 11 for
sustained loads and thermal
expansion requirement, and
Equation 11a for reversing
dynamic loads.
Number of Editable Enter the number of cycles from 1 Only available for class 1
Cycles text box to 1000000. The number of cycles
indicate the total number of times
the set of load combinations
constituting a particular transient
is repeated during the plant life
time.
Combinations 1 Drop Select a combination from the
to 6 Down List drop down list. Up to six load
combinations including the zero
moment-zero pressure case can
constitute a transient. The zero
moment case can only be selected
from combination 1 drop down
list. These combinations are setup
by default or user defined under
Tools > Combinations under the
Code Combinations TAB
Stress Summary Editing Buttons
Buttons for consistency check and creating new, modify, duplicate or delete existing stress summaries.
Class 1 Equations : Define loadings for sustained equation 9 and transient equation 10
A. All service levels except C or D with Reversing dynamic (1994 addenda or later)
Eqn index Equation No. No of cycles Combination1 Combination2 Combination3 Combination4 Combination5 Combination6
1 9 Gravity Occasional
2 10 cycles Thermal1 or Occasional Thermal2 or Occasional Thermal3 or Occasional None None None
Equation 9 only 2 combinations are available, combination1 is always a sustained category code combination and combination2 always an occasional code combination (Tools > Combinations)
including static or dynamic combinations e.g. Static Seismic 1 [2], Static Seismic 2 [3] etc, Response 1 etc. Any sustained or occasional user defined code combination will be available for combination
1 or 2 respectively.
ASME NB defines Sy as the yield strength value taken at the average fluid temperature of the transient under consideration. However, AutoPIPE does not calculate the average fluid temperature of the
transient under consideration. Therefore, AutoPIPE will conservatively use the design yield stress for calculating the Equation 9 allowable at every point in the model.
Note: Equation 9 allowable can be overridden under Tools > Load Combinations > User Allowable
Equation 10 Up to 6 thermal, occasional (both static and dynamic) or SAM code combinations or any equation 10 user-defined code combinations (thermal or occasional categories) are available
including zero moment-zero pressure case (combination 1 only)
Combining multiple reversing dynamic load cases in Equation 10
In order to combine multiple reversing dynamic load cases a user-defined combination should be created, with the combination method set to Abs Sum.
Including SAM load case in Equation 10
When a SAM load case is included in Equation 10 it is recommended that it has the Reversing Dynamic option checked. This is because of how the thermal load case is combined with other load cases.
For example, if Equation 10 was defined with a thermal case, SAM case (non-reversing dynamic), and a response case, the load cases would be combined as follows: (T1+S1) +/- |R1|. Whereas, if the
SAM case had the reversing dynamic option enabled, and a user-defined combination was created that included the response and SAM cases, the load cases would be combined as follows: T1 +/-
(|R1|+|S1|).
Note: Equation 10, 12, 13, and 14 are the maximum stresses from all load set pairs. Equation 11 stress is computed from Equation 14 using the code relation: EQ14 = EQ11*Ke/2.0.
B. Service level C or D with Reversing dynamic (1994 addenda or later)
Reverse
Eqn Sustained Anchor Motion
Dynamic Combination4 Combination5 Combination6
index Load due to Rev. Dy.
Load
1 Gravity Rev Dyn SAM
Sustained Load Any pressure or gravity loads or equation 9 user code combination are available in the dropdown list
Reverse Dynamic Load Any dynamic or static earthquake (Static Seismic 1 [2], Static Seismic 2 [3] etc, Response 1 etc.) or any selected reversing dynamic code combination are available in the
dropdown list
Anchor Motion due to Rev. Dy. Only SAM cases S.A.M. 1, S.A.M. 2 etc are available in the dropdown list
Class 2 and 3 Equations (Regular NC/ND):
A. For code years before 1992 + 1994 Addenda, the following loads cases are associated with the equations in the summary.
Eqn Equation
Combination1 Combination2 Combination3 Combination4 Combination5 Combination6
index No.
1 8 Gravity
Non-repeated
3 10a Support
Motion
Thermal1 or Thermal2 or Thermal3 or
4 10 None None None
Occasional Occasional Occasional
Equation 8 The sustained design load set, including the design pressure. Only 1 combination is available, i.e. always a gravity load with design pressure or any user defined equation 8 code combination.
Equation 9 The sustained load set and the occasional load set from such conditions as thrusts from relief/safety valve loads, from pressure and flow transients, and earthquake (using the Peak Pressure).
Effects of seismic anchor motion (SAM) may be excluded from EQUATION 9 if they are included in EQUATION 10. Only 2 combinations are available, combination1 always a gravity load with peak
pressure and combination2 always an occasional code combination e.g. Static Seismic 1 [2], Static Seismic 2 [3] etc, Response 1 etc. Any equation 9 user defined code combination will be available for
combination 1 or 2.
Equation 10 (10a in the 2007 edition) Any expansion or SAM category code combination, e.g. Thermal 1, Thermal 2, SAM 1, SAM 2 etc., are available in the drop-down list, to be selected for
EQUATION 10 in accordance with the ASME NC/ND code. EQUATION 10 is for evaluation of thermal expansion effects where, "Mc = range of resultant moments due to thermal expansion, in-lb (N-
m); also include moment effects of anchor displacements due to non-reversing dynamic loads if anchor displacement effects were omitted from Eq. (9)(NC-3653.1)"
Note: If any other type of loading, e.g. static seismic or user loading, wants to be considered in EQUATION 10 stress evaluation, then define a User code combination and set the Combination Method =
SUM, Category = Expansion and select the load cases or combinations to be included.
See Defining User Code Combinations
Equation 10a (10b in the 2007 edition) Not available at this time. Single Non repeated Anchor Movement. Any code combination e.g. User case User 1, User 2 etc or any user-defined code
combinations (under support movement stress category) are available (combination 1 only). Not available in Full verification report but is available in pre-verification report.
B. For 1992 + 1994 Addenda and later code years, Level A and B with or without reversing dynamic loads and Level C and D without reversing dynamic loads.
Eqn Equation
Combination1 Combination2 Combination3 Combination4 Combination5 Combination6
index No.
1 8 Gravity
Non-repeated
3 10a Support
Motion
4 11a Rev Dyn SAM
Thermal1 or Thermal2 or Thermal3 or
5 10 None None None
Occasional Occasional Occasional
Equations 8, 9 , 10 and 10a same as above for code years before 1992 + 1994 Addenda
Equation 11a Evaluation of dynamic inertia and/or any anchor motion load set due to the effects of reversing dynamic loads.
Note: Equation 11a is defined automatically from the definitions of the other equations. Equation 11a was removed in the 2006 addenda, and therefore is disabled when the 2007 edition is selected.
C. For 1992 + 1994 Addenda and later code years, Level C and D with reversing dynamic loads.
Reverse
Combination4 Combination5 Combination6
Eqn Sustained Dynamic Anchor Motion
index Load Load due to Rev. Dy.

1 Gravity Rev Dyn SAM
Sustained Load Any pressure or gravity loads or equation 9 user code combination are available in the dropdown list
Reverse Dynamic Load Any dynamic or static earthquake (Static Seismic 1 [2], Static Seismic 2 [3] etc, Response 1 etc.) or any selected reversing dynamic code combination are available in the
dropdown list
Anchor Motion due to Rev. Dy. Only SAM cases S.A.M. 1, S.A.M. 2 etc are available in the dropdown list
Note: For the 2003 addenda, 2004, and 2007 editions of ASME NC/ND, tee moment summation, based on NB-3683.1(d), is used for reversing dynamic stress summaries.
D. For 2004 and onwards, with buried piping method 'Adams Et. Al'.
SAM
Eqn Thermal Load Seismic
Thermal Load Load Combination4 Combination5 Combination6
index Case Case Case
1 Thermal Thermal SAM
Color Legend
Invalid code combinations since results are missing for one or more components contained in the combination
Notes:
1. When a stress summary is deleted then all the stress summaries are automatically renumbered.
2. Any time one or more equation(s) is deleted then all the equation index numbers in the current stress summary are automatically renumbered.
3. For ASME NB, one equation 9 is always created for each new stress summary i.e. equation index 1 is always reserved for equation 9.
4. For ASME NB, Equation 9 cannot be deleted
7. Fifty(50) Equation 10 instructions (Each with up to 6 code combinations) are allowed per stress summary.
8. The stress summary is saved to an external XML file and must be archived with the model DAT file.
See Also:
Combinations
Combinations Overview
Stress Summary Consistency Check
Command Reference
Distance Calculator
The Distance option in the Tools menu and toolbar icon is a "toggle" command which, when enabled, calculates the distance between any two points in the model and displays a Red arrow on the
graphic plot.
Either click on a pipe or beam point in the plot or enter the point name for the ’From Point’, Tab then click on the ’To point ’ field then click on a pipe or beam point in the plot or enter the point name.
Clicking in the plot would toggle the focus between From/To fields. If point name is entered manually, the program needs to check if the point is valid. This would make the current distance invalid and
hence turn the offset/distance text to blue. Pressing the Calculate button would display the new offsets DX, DY, DZ and Distance. The distance field will always be read-only (non-editable) but the user
can copy any of this text and paste to another source e.g. text file, XLS or Word doc.
l The direct distance and DX, DY, DZ offsets between any two points can be calculated by either clicking on the plot node points or entering the point names for the ’From point’ then ’to point’, then
press the Calculate button.
l If the distance has not been calculated for a change in the point name then the distance and offsets will be shown in blue color. When the Calculate button is pressed then the distance and offsets
will be recalculated and shown in a black font color.
l A red colored arrow would appear on the plot between from and to points. The arrow would point towards the "To point" and appear in single/double or Quad view ports. If the model is moved
under pan/zoom/rotate (Toolbar icons or mouse functions) or scroll bars then the distance arrow will move dynamically with the plot.
l The distance and offsets will always be displayed in fixed format as shown below. The number of decimal points is controlled by tools/model options/Edit option "Digits after decimal for
coordinates" similar to View /show length. Fixed format display DX = 8.0000, DY = -10000000000.0000, DZ = -8.0000, Dist = 9999999956.6899
l Tabbing or mouse click between the ’From’ and ’To’ fields does NOT re-calculate the offsets & distance.
l If any of the view functions are selected from the View menu then the distance calculator window will close.
l The Distance dialog will not be closed when the following actions are taken:
¡ Switching render mode between Solid/Wire/Line mode from the view toolbar
¡ Changing the number of view-ports and switch between multiple view ports
¡ Making a zoom window box by selection and mouse right click
¡ Pan/zoom/rotate (Toolbar icons or mouse functions) or scroll bar
l The Close button or standard windows command Alt+F4 will close the dialog and hide the distance arrow.
Note: The distance dialog will be hidden when using any of the Pan/zoom/rotate (Toolbar icons or mouse functions only) when the Pan/zoom/rotate window is shown but will re-appear in the same state
when the Pan/zoom/rotate window is closed.
Note: The offset and distance units are the same as the current INPUT units and shown in the right corner of the status bar.
Limitations:
l Selecting a point in grid will not update the distance dialog.
l The distance text field is right aligned.
l The arrow color cannot be customized.
l The Distance command window may overlap the unit text in some cases.
l Activating any other dialog (modify dialogs etc.), input or result grid or command window (e.g. Select/Range etc.) will close the distance dialog.
Command Reference
Section DB Manager
Selecting Tools > Modify section database allows the User to edit the database using STAAD tool SectiondbManager.exe. This program is installed in the AutoPIPE main directory.
Both existing sections and new ones can be added.
Command Reference
Rotating Equipment Overview

To define rotating equipment in the model, select Tools/Rotating Equipment. The Equipment command enables the user to define rotating equipment and to evaluate the forces at nozzle and reference points
using API 610, API 617, and SM NEMA standards. In addition, AutoPIPE provides a user rotating equipment option to evaluate piping loads using vendor supplied allowables.
Once the equipment type is specified (turbine, compressor, pump, etc.), point names can be assigned to locations where the piping system meets the device.. The equipment can then be evaluated to
determine whether these forces are within the range allowed by the rotating equipment code. Refer to Rotating Equipment Calculations for more information.
The process is to first specify an "Equipment ID," then select a "Type" and decide whether or not a report should be generated. AutoPIPE then filters the dialog to include fields related to the type of
equipment selected. The following fields/parameters are commons to all equipment types:
Equipment ID
Type
Generate Report
Equipment Types
Turbine or Compressor
Pump
User-Defined
Rotating Equipment Compliance
API 610 Pump Analysis
API 617 Compressor Analysis
Modeling Examples
Using reference point with Rotating Equipment
Turbine or Compressor
When either Turbine or Compress is entered in the Equipment "Type" field, the dialog is filtered to provide additional fields.
Notes:
1. The figure shows Turbine selected as the equipment type. However, the input fields are identical for both Turbines and Compressors, and the manner in which data is expected to be entered is identical.
2. For turbines and compressors, the rotating equipment code calculations according to NEMA SM23 and API 617, respectively, are based only in English and SI units, but not in Metric units. Hence, the
rotating equipment report for turbines and compressors will be restricted to output units in either English and SI units as specified in the "System" dialog.
3. Both anchor and reference points can be entered as the suction, discharge, ext. 1, and ext. 2 points. However, in-line anchors (anchors with piping on both sides) can not be used as nozzle points as this
may make it difficult to define the proper face for forces. Reference points should be used in such a case. When an anchor and reference point is present at the same location, AutoPIPE will use the
reference point. Warning messages will be shown when an in-line anchor is used with no reference point present.
4. Reference points used in rotating equipment should always have Load Coordinate System as Global. AutoPIPE will transform forces to equipment local axis before doing the nozzle checks. AutoPIPE
would give a warning message in Global Consistency Check if a reference point used with a rotating equipment has a Load Coordinate System as Local.
5. Only one reference point should be present at nozzle location to insure proper data is being used. A warning message is displayed in Global Consistency Check if a point used with a rotating equipment
has more than one reference point. Two reference points may be used if there are two segments joining at the same point.
6. Reference points that are used with a rotating equipment cannot be deleted.
After a Turbine or Compressor is selected as the Equipment Type, the dialog filters to provide the following additional fields/parameters:
Manufacturer Allowable Multiplier
Suction Point
N/F/Seg
Discharge Point
Ext. 1 Point
Ext. 2 Point
Shaft axis
Override Nozzle Coordinates
Reference Point
Suction Point Offsets
Discharge Point Offsets
Ext. 1 Point Offsets
Ext. 2 Point Offsets
Turbine and Compressor Modeling Examples
Pump
When Pump is entered in the Equipment "Type" field, the dialog is filtered to provide the additional fields/parameters listed below.
Manufacturer Allowable Multiplier
Location
Table 2 Factor
Orientation
Shaft axis/Nozzle axis
Override Nozzle Coordinates
Reference point
Center Point Offsets
Suction Point Offsets
Discharge Point Offsets
Notes:
1. AutoPIPE can only calculate equipment reports for vertical and horizontal pumps. For vertical pumps, the Shaft axis is along the global vertical axis. For a horizontal pump, the Shaft axis may lie in
any orientation within the horizontal plane, however, the vertical components of the direction cosine must be zero.
2. In-line anchors (anchors with piping on both sides) can not be used as nozzle points as this may make it difficult to define the proper face for forces. Reference points should be used in such a case.
When an anchor and reference point is present at the same location, AutoPIPE will use the reference point. Warning messages will be shown when an in-line anchor is used with no reference point
present.
Pump Modeling Example
User-Defined Rotating Equipment

When USER is entered in the Equipment "Type" field, the dialog is filtered to provide the following additional fields/parameters:
Point
Allowable Forces and Moments
Ref. Point
Notes:
1. In-line anchors (anchors with piping on both sides) can not be used as nozzle points as this may make it difficult to define the proper face for forces. Reference points should be used in such a case.
When an anchor and reference point is present at the same location, AutoPIPE will use the reference point. Warning messages will be shown when an in-line anchor is used with no reference point
present.
Command Reference
Flange Analysis
When Flange Analysis is selected from Tools menu, AutoPIPE will display the Flange Analysis dialog, enabling the user to apply several different flange analysis methods on every flange in the model.
Standard flange data can be recalled from dimension and material libraries. For nonstandard (user-defined or NS) flange dimensions and material allowable stresses can be provided by the user.
The Flange Analysis dialog can be used to analyze any flange in the model based on one of the following four analysis method options:
1. ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Mandatory Appendix 2, Rules for Bolted Flange Connections with Ring Type Gaskets
2. ASME Section VIII, Division 2, Section 4.16, Design Rules for Flanged Joints
3. ASME Section III, Appendix XI, Rules for Bolted Flange Connections for Class 2 and 3 Components and Class MC Vessels
4. ANSI Flange Loading Check
Note: The methods ASME Section VIII, Division 1 Method, ASME Section VIII, Division 2 Method and ASME Section III, Appendix XI Method are available in Plus/Nuclear editions only.
Notes:
1. Any column can be double clicked on the field title to sort the column and double click the blank field in the first column to restore the default sort order.
2. Double-clicking the first column of any flange row will open up the Flange dialog for the flange corresponding with that flange number.
3. If the model results are outdated, i.e. any changes have been made to the model, and existing static analysis results are outdated, the following warning will be delivered in the analysis tab: "Results are
outdated for the model. Please re-run static analysis to use the latest loads."
4. If "ANSI Check" is selected as the 'Analysis Method', the rows corresponding with that flange number on the ASME related tabs, i.e. 'Load', 'Flange', 'Pipe', 'Bolts', and 'Gasket' tabs, will be grayed-out.
If "ANSI Check" is NOT selected as the 'Analysis Method', then the row corresponding with that flange number on the 'ANSI Check' tab ONLY, will be grayed-out.
5. f model results are not available, the following warning appears when load tab is selected "Model results are not available. Please analyze the model using Analyze option."
Tabs
Similar to the Input Grids, the Flange Analysis dialog has a spreadsheet interface for entering the various flange input data required for executing the flange analysis. The Flange Analysis dialog includes
the following tabs:
Analysis
Load
Flange
Pipe
Bolts
Gasket
ANSI Check
Checkboxes/Buttons
More Options
Pressing the More Options button displays the following miscellaneous options in a drop-down menu:
Hide Duplicate Flanges
Selecting this option will hide any flange that has a second flange of the same type and rating inserted at the same point, also known as "mating" flanges typically defined using the Insert Mating Flange
option in the Flange dialog.
Hide Incomplete Flanges
Selecting this option will hide any flange that has missing or incomplete data.
Restore Sort Order
Selecting this option will restore the default sort order, based on the Flange Number. This option has the same behavior as double-clicking the first column, first row of the flange analysis grid.
Highlight Incomplete Flanges
Selecting this option will highlight any flanges that have missing or incomplete data. When a flange row is selected that is highlighted as having missing or incomplete data the tabs that have missing
data are also highlighted to help pinpoint the location of missing or incomplete data.
Show Tag
Displays the Flange Tag. The flange tag can be edited from the Flange dialog, the input grid, and the Flange Analysis dialog when on the 'Analysis' tab only.
Show Sketch
Check this option to display a sketch related to the currently selected flange and input tab. This option is available for the 'Analysis', 'Flange', 'Bolts', and Gasket' tabs only. For the 'Analysis' and 'Flange'
tabs a sketch of the flange type will be shown. For the 'Bolts' tab a sketch of the bolt circle diameter will be shown. For the 'Gasket' tab a sketch of the gasket configuration for determining the basic
gasket seating, bo, will be shown.
Analyze
Pressing the Analyze button will run the analysis of any flanges that have the 'Analyze' option enabled.
Note: If the model results are outdated the following message will be delivered: "Result are outdated for the model. Please re-run static analysis to use the latest loads."
Show Report
Displays a flange analysis summary report for the flanges that have been analyzed.
Note: Only flanges that have the 'Analyze' option checked, and were analyzed, will be included in the report.
Duplicate Current Flange to Flange #
Enter the valid flange number then press the Duplicate button to copy or duplicate all the current flange analysis data to the selected flange.
Material Prp.
Click the Material Prp. button to open the ASME Material Properties dialog.
Note: Accessing the ASME Material Properties dialog from the 'Material Prp.' button will allow searching through the entire material library database. Whereas, pressing the 'Select' button from the
flange, pipe, and bolt material fields will only allow searching through the database associated with the current selection in the 'Material Library' field.
Ok
Clicking Ok will save the Flange Analysis data and close the dialog.
Cancel
Clicking Cancel will exit the dialog with no current changes saved.
Note: No message will be shown if there are some unsaved changes.
Related Topics:
ASME Section VIII, Division 1 Method
ASME Section VIII, Division 2 Method
ASME Section III, Appendix XI Method
ANSI Flange Loading Check

Command Reference
Accounting Information
The Tools/Accounting command generates a list of each system database file (the DAT files located in the current working directory) and indicates:
l the date the file was created,
l the date the file was accessed last,
l the elapsed time (working in AutoPIPE) which has accrued, and
l the Project Identifier (the description input in the "Project ID" field of the System dialog.
The accounting information is stored in the ASCII text file AUTOPIPE.ACT, which is also located in the current working directory. The figure shown below is a sample of an accounting report.
image\08-m-01.gif
Note: As with all commands which produce a report, DOS users will be prompted for the report destination: Disk, Screen, or Printer. Indicate your preference at the prompt.
Command Reference
Library Files Overview

AutoPIPE facilitates model building by retrieving data for standard piping components and materials from its libraries. The Tools/Library command allows the contents of a material and component
library file (*.LIB) to be printed, scanned interactively, or modified. Refer to Libraries for more information on the contents of a particular library file.
The process is to select a table for viewing, then the library name associated with it. In most cases, the "Library name" association will default automatically to the component or material type associated
with the current model (specified in the System dialog when the model was created). However, it should be noted that any library may be viewed and/or edited with this function, not only those associated
with the model. In fact, the Tools/Library command may even be launched without opening a model.
Finally, the user specifies whether the library is to be viewed on-screen, sent to the printer, or updated.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Library dialog:
Table Type
Library Name
Action
See Also
Building a Custom Library
Backing up *.LIB files.

Command Reference
Backing up *.LIB files

If it is necessary to modify B31.1 or B31.3 material library, it is suggested that the original .LIB file be kept intact. Thus, the following steps are recommended to insure that the original library is not
corrupted:
1. Make a copy the original library file, giving it a new name (be sure to retain the original, *.LIB, extension). For example, to create a library file named "MYLIBS" using the DOS command line, type: copy autob313.lib mylibs.lib
Note: In Windows, this same task can be accomplished by highlighting the original library name inside the File Manager, selecting File/Copy, then typing mylibs.lib in the "To" field.
2. Follow the procedures described in Building a Custom Library.
3. Start AutoPIPE, then select Tools/Library . The newly created files are available in the "Library Name" selection list.
Command Reference
Settings
Plotter Setup
Printer Setup
Recent Models
Model Version
Changing the Company Name
Edition
Color Preferences
White Background
Black Background
PCF CAD Mapping
Grids Settings
Supports Settings
Default Bend Radius
Isogen
Deflected Plot Preferences
DXF Export Drawing Border
DXF Export Layers
DXF Export 3D Symbols
Command Reference
Plotter Setup
Select Tools/Settings/Plotter to display the Plotter Setup dialog.
The fields in this dialog allow you to configure your plotter for use with AutoPIPE. By default, a plotter is not configured and it is assumed that you will want to direct all output to either a printer or a
file. If you have a plotter available from your workstation, select HP-plot from the "Plotter type" selection list (as of this release, AutoPIPE only supports HP plotters). You can also choose to use your
printer as a plotter by selecting the HP-Print option. When a selection is made in this list, the remaining fields of the dialog are completed with default values. If an HP printer is selected, most of the
options are closed.
The plotter options can be modified to match the particular configuration of your plotter. Refer to your plotter’s documentation for Data Bits, Parity, Stops, and Baud rate settings.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Plotter Setup dialog:
Plotter Type
Text Height
Number of Pens
Port
Baud Rate
Parity
Bits
Stop
Command Reference
Printer Setup
Select Tools/Settings/Printer offers a way to set the font used for printing, set the number of lines on a page, and open the Print Setup dialog. The font and printer setup buttons display standard Windows
dialogs which allows you to select the font, to select any of the printers currently configured to run in Windows, to set the page orientation, and to specify the paper size in use.
Command Reference
Recent Models
Select Tools/Setting/Recent Models to display the Set Recent Models List dialog, which enables the user enter the maximum number of entries than can be displayed when Opening a Recently Used Models.
Note: After installing program, the default maximum number of entries that can be displayed in the recent model selection list is 20.
Number of entries
Command Reference
Model Version
A note message is displayed when a model is opened if this feature is enabled. The note message contains what version that the model was first created, last modified, and the current product version
being used.
There are three options for the displaying the model version information:
Never - The model version is not displayed when a new model is opened
Older model version only - The model version is displayed only when the model was created in an older version of AutoPIPE
Always - Every time a model is opened the note is displayed
Note: The model version options apply to models that were last modified in an older or same version as the current program. For models that were last modified in a newer version than the current
program, the model version will always be displayed.
The following message is displayed when the model version is the same as the program version:
The following message is displayed when the model version is older than the program version:
Command Reference
Changing the Company Name

The company name appears on page headers of all output files generated by AutoPIPE. To change this name, select Tools/Settings/Company, input the "Company Name" in the field provided, then press
OK.
Command Reference
Edition
Selecting this option displays the Welcome to AutoPIPE Licensing dialog. Select the authorized version which is available, either Nuclear edition, Plus edition, Standard edition, or a Demo version (no
security) of AutoPIPE . If Nuclear, Plus, Standard, or KHK 2 Add On is selected and AutoPIPE can not find an authorized version, the user will be asked if they would like to use a trial license. If the trial
license has expired AutoPIPE will revert to demo mode. This feature is available for both network and single application locks, but depends on the available editions in either case. For example on a
network with Nuclear, Plus and Standard editions available, specific users can choose which edition they would prefer to use.
Note: The current edition of AutoPIPE (or demo mode) is displayed in the title bar of the AutoPIPE window.
Changes made to this form take effect immediately. The choice applies to all subsequent executions of AutoPIPE until this form has been changed again.
If the AutoPIPE Demo option is selected, this dialog will be displayed each time AutoPIPE is executed, and the Show Welcome Screen on startup option will be ignored.
If StressISO 'Demo' option is selected then StressISO Demo mode is set.
The 'KHK 2 Add-On' option is enabled when the AutoPIPE Plus or Nuclear edition is selected.
The edition selection process in AutoPIPE V8i is the same as AutoPIPE XM
KHK 2 Add-on Edition

If the "KHK 2 Add-on" edition is selected, AutoPIPE will first check for the KHK 2 SELECT License and then the AutoPIPE Plus SELECT License.
If the KHK 2 SELECT License is not found, the following dialog will be displayed:
If 'Yes' is pressed the program will attempt to go into Trial License mode. If the Trial License has expired the following dialog will be displayed:
Pressing 'OK' will send the program into Demo mode.
AutoPIPE then checks for the AutoPIPE Plus or Nuclear SELECT License. The following scenarios are checked during the Edition selection process:
Scenario 1 - no success: If no KHK 2 and no AutoPIPE Plus or Nuclear SELECT License are found it reverts to DEMO.
Scenario 2a - partial success: If a KHK 2 SELECT License is found, but no AutoPIPE Plus or Nuclear SELECT License is found, then the program reverts back to the previous SELECT License.
Scenario 2b - partial success: If an AutoPIPE plus or Nuclear SELECT License is found but no KHK 2 SELECT License is found, then AutoPIPE will convert to AutoPIPE Plus or nuclear mode
whichever was last accessed. Note that the KHK 2 option will not be listed in the Tools/Model Options/General dialog.
Scenario 3 - success: If an authorized KHK 2 SELECT License and AutoPIPE Plus SELECT License are found, then the AutoPIPE title will show up as "AutoPIPE Plus & KHK 2 Add-on". Similarly if
an authorized KHK 2 SELECT License and AutoPIPE Nuclear SELECT License are found, then the AutoPIPE title will show up as "AutoPIPE Nuclear & KHK 2 Add-on"
Plus Edition
If the "AutoPIPE Plus" edition is selected, and the AutoPIPE Plus SELECT License is found, then the AutoPIPE title will show up as "AutoPIPE Plus"
If the AutoPIPE Plus SELECT License is not found, the user will be asked if they would like to enter Trial License mode. If a valid Trial License has expired the program will go into Demo mode.
Standard Edition
If the "AutoPIPE" edition is selected, and the AutoPIPE SELECT License is found, then the AutoPIPE title will show up as "AutoPIPE"
If the AutoPIPE SELECT License is not found, the user will be asked if they would like to enter Trial License mode. If a valid Trial License has expired the program will go into Demo mode.
Nuclear Edition
If the "AutoPIPE Nuclear" edition is selected, and the AutoPIPE Nuclear SELECT License is found, then the AutoPIPE title will show up as "AutoPIPE Nuclear"
If the AutoPIPE Nuclear SELECT License is not found, the user will be asked if they would like to enter Trial License mode. If a valid Trial License has expired the program will go into Demo mode.
See Also:
Academic License
Trial License
Demo Mode

Command Reference
Color Preferences
The Tools/Settings/Colors command enables the user to define specific colors for the varied components and data that are displayed on the screen and also
specify the background color for the screen.
Note: All the component color settings are stored in the program directory file AUTOPIPE.RGB. When the user makes changes in the Color dialog (Tools/settings/colors), these files are overwritten. Any changes made become the default settings
for the current and future modeling sessions until changed again.
The user may also use the menu option View/Hide Components to hide or not display a specific element.
See Also:
Color Preferences Fields
Black Default Background
White Default Background

Command Reference
White Background Defaults

The Tools/Settings/White Background command resets the displayed screen background color for AutoPIPE to white as well as setting the default component
and data colors for a white background. Use the background color field in the Tools/Settings/Colors dialog to manually change the background color without
changing the component and data colors.
Note: Background, component and data color settings are stored in the program directory file AUTOPIPE.WHT and are loaded into the AUTOPIPE.RGB file which become the
default settings for the current and future modeling sessions until changed again.
Command Reference
Black Background
The Tools/Settings/Black Background command resets the background color for AutoPIPE to black as well as setting the default component colors for a black
background. The background can also be set to a custom color in the Tools/Settings/Colors dialog.
Note: Background, component and data color settings are stored in the program directory file AUTOPIPE.BLK and are loaded into the AUTOPIPE.RGB file which become the default settings for the current
and future modeling sessions until changed again.
Command Reference
PCF CAD Mapping

Select Tools/Settings/PCF CAD Mapping to open the PCF CAD Mapping dialog. The PCF CAD Mapping dialog can be used to map the segment line numbers and pipe line classes to any of the
following PCF attributes:
n PIPING-SPEC
n MISC-SPEC1
n MISC-SPEC2
n MISC-SPEC3
The following fields/parameters are available on the PCF CAD Mapping dialog:
Line Number
Line Class
PIPELINE-REFERENCE
See Also:
Generating a PCF File

Command Reference
Grids Settings
Select Tools/Settings/Grids to display the Grids Settings dialog. This dialog allows you to change the following input grid settings:
Show input grid after opening the program (Default = ON)
Show input grid tabs with no data (Default = ON)
Show zero values in input grids (Default = OFF)
Show rows with zero thermal anchor movements (Default = OFF)
Show additional column headings (Default = OFF)
Show component guids column in input grid (Default = OFF)

Command Reference
Supports Settings
Select Tools/Settings/Supports to display the Supports Settings dialog. This dialog allows you to change the following support settings:
Gap above pipe-vstop
Gap above pipe-guide
Gaps setting
Split beam tolerance
Maximum support connection distance
Vertical support connection tolerance
Note: There is no Undo/Redo operation available for these settings.
Bend radius
The bend radius defines the near and far points of the bend. The options for this field are: Long (radii 1.5 times the nominal pipe diameter), Short (radii 1.0 times the nominal pipe diameter), 3D (radii 3.0
times the nominal pipe diameter), and 5D (radii 5.0 times the nominal pipe diameter). Users can also input a custom, non-standard radius. For all codes but BS 7159, the default is Long. For BS 7159
code, the default is Short. However, the bend radius default can be changed using the Default Bend Radius dialog (Tools > Settings > Default Bend Radius). When a NS pipe is used, and the pipe has an
OD less than or equal to 13", the closest lower nominal value available is used for calculating the bend radius. If the value for the OD is higher than 13", then the actual OD value is used for calculating
the bend radius.
l The program automatically sets Long bend radius to 1.50" for 1/2" and 3/4" nominal size elbows as per ANSI B16.9. However smaller nominal diameter ASME/ANSI pipe sizes (i.e. 1/8", 1/4",
and 3/8" pipes) have a long radius bend equal to 1.5 * nominal size.
Stress Isometric Reference
ISOGEN Options - General

Click on the Isogen Settings command button on the Stress Isometric Options dialog, or select the Tools > Settings > Isogen menu command to show the Isogen Settings dialog.
Note:
1. OPT = Isogen Options switch number located in the OPL file.
2. Only positive integer values are permitted in the Height,Width,X,Y,Left,Right,Top,Bottom fields.
General
Option Description Editable Opt Comments
Path and filename to ISOGEN Browse button. Filename read from
Isogen Options options file (default = Yes, No the autopipe.ini which stores all the
apipe.opl) ISOGEN options
Check the vertical axis direction
from the DAT file and set the
Select direction of north arrow appropriate dropdown list e.g. if
North Arrow on the plot relative to global Yes vertical = +Y, then dropdown list
axis. shows +X, -X, +Z & -Z, The North
arrow vs global axes setting is saved
in the stressiso.ini
Select one of 4 directions in
Drawing drop down list, Top left, Top
Yes 42
Viewport Right, Bottom Left, Bottom
Right
AutoCAD units Inch or mm Yes 92
If User Defined enter the height and
width for the units selected.
Selecting a drawing size will update
the drawing frame filename for the
Select the paper size from the
appropriate drawing size. E.g. DBord
Drawing size drop down list for the Yes 14
is standard drawing frame for D
AutoCAD units selected.
drawing size.
Note: Border size is generally

smaller
Enter the custom height of Non-editable if the drawing size is
Height (mm) Yes, No 15
drawing not user defined
Enter the custom width of Non-editable if the drawing size is
Width (mm) Yes, No 16
drawing not user defined
Drawing
Frame When checked, either browse to a
Options: Check this box to open the custom drawing frame or enter a
drawing frame file box and filename & path in the box.
Yes, No
enable the browse button
User Defined
If Unchecked then the drawing frame
Yes, No
Check this box to plot the filename and path are not written to
Plot Frame
drawing frame the isogen.fls file. Grayed out for
dwg isometric format.
Browse button to override the

standard drawing frame filename.
Note: Option 71 = 4004 by default
i.e. DXF ascii format and 17017 for
acad 2000 dwg format. Standard
Drawing Frame Path and filename of the drawing frame filenames e.g. Abord,
Yes 18,71
File drawing frame file Bbord, .. A0bord, A1bord
&ldots;A4bord are located in "\
pisogen\borders" sub-folder . The
drawing frame has the same
extension as the selected stressiso
file format i.e. dxf or dwg
This is written into the final.ddf file
Hide /show the global axis on
Plot Global axis Yes, No (pisogen\projects\apipeproj\final)
the plot
under SYMBOL-KEYS item.
Check this box to open the X
(mm), Y(mm) coordinates
User Yes, No
boxes to plot the global axis at
a user location.
If User option = unchecked
then grayed out and shows
X (mm), Y automatic global axis
Yes, No Editable only if User = checked
(mm) coordinates for the drawing
size selected. If open then
enter user defined coordinates
Data table
Select radio button to locate
printed on left Yes, No 25
the Data table
or right side
Enter margins Top, bottom
Drawing
and left or right dependent on Yes 10-13 All margins are open and editable
Margins
the location of Data table.
Update the Iso viewer path and
filename if selected Iso Viewer
found in the registry otherwise gives
a warning message e.g. "Autocad not
found"
Bentley Redline
Select the default Iso Viewer. Select Other will open the Iso
and Autocad Yes, No
Default = Redline. Viewer box and enable the browse
radio buttons
button, otherwise grayed out.
Select None will blank out the Iso

viewer filename field and no Iso
viewer will be launched after the
stressiso is created.
Browse button to find the Iso viewer
executable. Saved to stressiso.ini.
Path and filename of the Iso
Iso Viewer Yes, No This field is set to 'None' by default.
viewer executable.
Note: The Iso viewer only opens the first created
isometric file.
Command Reference
Deflected Plot Preferences

Select Tools/Settings/Deflected Plot Preferences to display the Deflected Plot Preferences dialog. This dialog allows you to change the following deflected plot settings:
Show XYZ direction lines on plot
XYZ Line Color
XYZ Line Style
XYZ Line Width
Note: The settings of this dialog are written to a configuration file. This saves the user preferences in the working folder, which makes those preferences affect models opened in that current working
folder. However, if the model is opened in another working folder, the preferences shall be those that are described by the configuration file in that working folder, i.e. if the user chooses a line style, the
program retains the style for the user. But none of these settings are saved with the model.
Command Reference
DXF Export Drawing Border

Select Tools/Settings/DXF Export Drawing Border to display the Drawing Border dialog. This dialog allows you to control elements of the border that is created when the AutoPIPE SYSNAME.DAT file is
converted into an AutoCAD-compatible DXF file.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Drawing Border dialog:
Symbol Directory Drawing Margins
AutoCAD Units Drawing Scale
Drawing Size Line width
Border File Text Height
Length Include 3D Model
Width Include Drawing Border
Command Reference
DXF Export Layers

Select Tools/Settings/DXF Export Drawing Layers to display the Layer Names dialog.
This dialog allows you to control the layer on which component graphics and attributes are placed when a piping system is exported into the DXF file format. Each AutoPIPE element which has a graphic
associated with it is included in this dialog. In the "Symbol" column, specify the name of the layer on which the AutoPIPE symbol should be placed. In the "Attribute" column, specify the layer on which
the attribute associated with that component type should be placed.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Layer Names dialog:
Symbol
Attribute
Command Reference
DXF Export 3D Symbols

Select Tools/Settings/DXF Export 3Dsymbol to display the 3D Symbols dialog.
The symbols listed in these fields are the DXF files located in AutoPIPE’s SYM\3D sub-directory. Select the symbol which should be used to represent an AutoPIPE component when the file is exported.
Use the default symbols provided with AutoPIPE, or create your own and store them in the SYM\3D subdirectory. The name of the DXF files must be less than or equal to 8 characters.
Command Reference
Result Commands
The options offered in the Result menu enable the user to review and manipulate the analyzed piping system results. (Default and user-defined load combinations are assigned through the command in the
Tools menu.) After these combinations are created, they can be manipulated for interactive scan or batch report reviewing.
Tips for Interactive Review

When viewing interactive results, a panel is displayed near the command line which specifies the active point. There are many techniques for specifying and displaying point information as noted below.
It is particularly useful when reviewing point information to leave the text window [F3] open. Doing so displays a variety of detailed information regarding that point.
Methods for selecting points:
l Graphically: Simply select any point in the display with your pointing device. If the text window is in the way, either drag it to a new location or adjust the position of the model using the View
commands.
l Keyboard: Use the same techniques for selecting the active point as you do when building a model (i.e., cursor keys control selection along a given segment, refer to Controlling the Active Point
with the Keyboard for more information). Additional keystrokes are as follows: [Home] = most stressed point; [End] = least stressed point; Ctrl + left arrow = next less-stressed point in sequence;
Ctrl + right arrow = next higher stressed point in sequence. [Pg Up] = next load in sequence; [Pg Dn] = previous load in sequence
l Toolbar: Four additional toolbar buttons are made available when using one of the interactive review commands. These buttons allow you to view sequentially stressed points in the model as
explained above.
Anchor Results
Support Results
Displacement Results
Force and Moments Results
Code Stress Results
Bend Angular Distortion Results
Mode Shape Results
Soil Results
Result Grids
Show lift-off supports
Mode Range Selection
Output Report
Filter Criteria
Define Result Model Options
Perform a Static Analysis (w/Frame)
Review Interactive Displacement Results
Review Displacement Results (Result Grids)
Apply Result Filter Criteria
Command Reference
Restraint Results
The Result/Restraint command will display forces for each of the "Non-Code" combinations at any point with a defined anchor or support.
Note: These are the piping loads exerted onto the support or anchor i.e. same as support loads.
Command Reference
Support Results
The Result/Support command will display support forces for each of the "Non-Code" combinations at any point with a defined support.
Note: To select a specific support from multiple supports of the same type at a point using the mouse, click repetitively on one of the supports to cycle through all supports under the mouse.
Command Reference
Displacement Results
The Result/Displacement command produces a deflected shape plot of the current system for a specific "Non-Code" combination. Individual points can also be reviewed for displacement and rotation
information by selecting a point and examining the data in the Text Window. A summary of maximum displacements is also produced for each point.
Select Result/Displacement to display the Deflected Shape dialog. Choose a combination set (or Scan Only) from the selection list, and the destination (screen or printer). Users also have the option of
animating the load case. Each of these options is explained in the following table.
After the dialog is accepted, AutoPIPE will plot the deflected shape of the system if a combination name was specified in the dialog. The figure below shows a plot of the tutorial model under load case
T1.
image\07-i-04.gif
Once the deflected system plot has been processed, press the VCR buttons on the toolbar to scroll through other modes or press the left mouse button to exit. The Point Name panel appears near the
command line. Select a point then open a Text Window. Scroll through the points in the system using the cursor keys. Different loads can be examined by using the [Pg Up] and [Pg Dn] keys. Press
Cancel to exit.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Deflected Shape dialog:
Load Combination
Animate load case
Send output to
Define Result Model Options
Perform a Static Analysis (w/Beam)
Review Interactive Displacement Results
Command Reference
Force and Moment Results

i
The Result/Force and Moment command will run an analysis on Forces and Moments data for each of the "Other" combinations at any point in the system. A summary of maximum forces (and moments)
is also produced for each piping point.
Command Reference
Code Stress Results

The Result/Code Stresses command produces a color coded plot of user-specified stress ratios between piping points for the load combinations associated with the model. A legend appears to the left of
the model area, making it easy to quickly identify ranges of values along a piping system. As with the other interactive options in the Result menu, the crosshairs can also be positioned at any point to
calculate the code stress data associated with an individual point.
If a plot is requested, the crosshairs are placed on the point with the maximum stress or stress ratio, depending on the selected option. It may be useful to open the Text Window at this point [F3]. Use the
cursor keys or the toolbar to move sequentially between stressed points.
Note: For KHK Seismic Level 2 code, the code compliance stress results at bends are not required and hence, not displayed in the color-coded plot. Instead, the bends are evaluated by angular distortion.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Code Stresses dialog:
Stress - Ratio
Combination
Stress type
Output Destination
Stress Summary No.
See Also : Changing the Legend Colors
Note: If the "Apply NB-3683.1(d):" option in the Result Model Options dialog is unchecked for ASME NC-1981, NC-1992, and ND-1992, the note "( x not per ASME NB-3683.1(d))" will be displayed
for tee points (both branch and header) in the Stresses dialog below (Result/Code Stresses).
Command Reference
Bend Angular Distortion Results

The Result/Bend Angular Distortion command produces a color-coded plot of the calculated angular distortion ratios at bend points for the load combinations associated with the model. A legend appears
to the left of the model area, making it easy to quickly identify ranges of values along a piping system. As with the other interactive options in the Result menu, the crosshairs can also be positioned at any
point to calculate the angular distortion data associated with an individual bend.
If a plot is requested, the crosshairs are placed on the point with the maximum angular distortion or angular distortion ratio, depending on the selected option. It may be useful to open the Text Window at
this point [F3]. Use the cursor keys or the toolbar to move sequentially to bend points.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Bend Angular Distortion dialog:
Ratio - Angle
Combination
Output Destination
See Also : Changing the Legend Colors

Command Reference
Mode Shape Results

The Modes dialog is displayed when Result/Mode Shape is selected.
i The Modes command produces a plot of the displaced system (on the screen, or to a plotter) due to the effect of a mode shape. Like
the other interactive commands, the user may also review displacement and rotation data associated with individual points.
A legend of mode number and frequency appears to the left of the model area, making it easy to quickly identify ranges of values along a piping system.
After the dialog is accepted, AutoPIPE will plot the deflected mode shape of the system along with the mode number and frequency corresponding to the mode number specified in the dialog. The figure
below shows a plot of the tutorial model with a mode number of 1 specified.
Once the deflected system plot has been processed, press the VCR buttons on the toolbar to scroll through other modes or the left mouse button to exit. The Point Name panel appears near the command
line. Select a point and open a Text Window. Scroll through the points in the system using the cursor keys. Different modes can be examined by using the [Pg Up] and [Pg Dn] keys. Press Cancel to exit.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Modes dialog:
Mode shape number
Animate mode shape
Send output to
Command Reference
Soil Results
The Result/Soil command allows the user to review pipe-soil interface force and deformation data for each of the "Other" combinations at any point in the system which has a set of soil properties
defined. In addition, intermediate soil support data (defined by the soil spacing) may be reviewed.
If the piping model contains intermediate soil points and the Soil Spring Loads result dialog is displayed then pressing the left and right arrow keys will display soil results associated with the
intermediate soil point although the current point cross hair remains on the upstream piping point.
Command Reference
Result Grids
The Result/Grids command
i will display a dynamic spreadsheet interface to review the output results for Displacement, Force/Moment, Anchor, Support, and Code Stresses.
Related Topics:
Command Reference
Show lift-off supports

The same filtering criteria defined by using the Select lift-off support option in the Support Result Filter dialog (Result > Filter Criteria > Support) will be applied. In addition, an output report for the
supports selected will be automatically generated. The support filtering criteria is as follows:
n Logical Method = Or
n Vstop = Checked
n Guide = Checked
n DY = Checked (if Z vertical, then DZ would be checked)
n Abs = Unchecked
n Value Greater than 0.001
Note: Previously selected points or components will be cleared when this menu option is selected, and only points that have lift-off supports will be selected.
Command Reference
Mode Range Selection

The Result/Mode Range Selection command is a setting which determines the range (or subset) of the existing mode shapes and frequencies that will be included when a batch report is generated.
A typical use of this command is illustrated in the following situation: The modal analysis that was performed on the AutoPIPE Tutorial extracted twelve modes. If a Mode Shapes report is to be
generated, output of modal displacements for all 12 modes would be quite lengthy. The size of this report can be greatly reduced by restricting the print out to the first five modes with the acceptance of
the Modal Range dialog.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Modal Range dialog:
From mode shape
To mode shape
Command Reference
Output Reports
When Result/Output Report is selected, the Batch Report dialog is displayed. Note the "File name" and "Report Title" fields are completed automatically. Either of these values can be changed to specify
the report name or to include an unique title in the header of the report. The remaining options determine the types of analyses which will be included in the report. If an option is not applicable to the
current model, it will be closed to input.
The Report command permits the user to specify the level of detail included on reports generated on the current model. The report can be limited to selected (highlighted) points or criteria specified in
the Result/Filter options. In addition, the report will be generated in consideration of the current load combinations and the modal range.
After specifying the options which should be included in the report, and pressing the OK button, the report is displayed on-screen, and an ASCII text report file, SYSNAME.OUT, is created in the
working directory.
It is important to remember that in addition to the choices made from this dialog, the contents of the report are dependent not only on the load combinations, but the Result Model Options options as well.
Enabling each option creates a separate section in the report.
Upon acceptance of the Batch Report dialog, generation of the report will begin. During report generation, a plot of the system is shown in the Display Window. When the report has been generated, it
will displayed using the AutoPIPE Report Viewer.
Note: Each time a batch report is requested for the current model, the new output is appended to the end of the existing OUT file. This option can be changed in the Result Model Options dialog.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Batch Report dialog:
Filename Restraint General stress
Limit results to Forces & Moments Accelerations

highlighted points
Code Compliance Flange
Apply Filter Criteria
(Result/Filter) Frequency Model listing
Include Description Mode shapes Stress Summary
Select/Unselect all Equipment Result summary

reports
Soil Analysis summary
Report Title
Bend Angular Distortion Sort Stresses
Displacement Stress Indices Steam Relief
Support Beam forces Reference Loads
Tee Plastic Strain Preliminary Stress Fatigue
Output Report
Command Reference
Filter Criteria
Displacement Filter
Support Filter
Restraint Filter
Force and Moment Filter
Code Compliance Filter
Save Default Filters
Command Reference
Displacement Filter
The Result/Filter Criteria/Displacement Filter command allows the user to search and filter the data to be included in output reports by user specified deflection. Report filtering is enabled using the Apply Filter
Criteria (Result/Filter) option in the Output Report dialog. This feature allows users to automatically sort through volumes of output data in order to identify areas of interest.
Note: The points meeting the filter criteria are also highlighted by combining them with the selection set whenever the result filter dialog is accepted. You may use the following toolbar buttons before
entering the filter dialog to Add to or Remove from the highlighted selection. The toggle option is not available during filtering.
The result filter can work in combination with AutoPIPE’s graphical select options to provide even more powerful search and filter capabilities by enabling the Limit results to highlighted points field in
the Output Reports dialog.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Displacement Filter dialog:
Logical Method
Displacement Filters
Sign Type (Absolute Comparison)
Comparison Method
Lower and Upper Reference Value

Command Reference
Support Filter
The Result/Filter Criteria/Support Filter command allows the user to search and filter the supports to be included in output reports by user specified criteria. Report filtering is enabled using the Apply Filter
Note: The points meeting the filter criteria are also highlighted by combining them with the selection set whenever the result filter dialog is accepted. When multiple supports are located at the same
point, the point is selected if any support meets the filter criteria. You may use the following toolbar buttons before entering the filter dialog to Add to or Remove
i from the highlighted selection.
The toggle
i option is not available during filtering.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Support Filter dialog:
Logical Method
Select lift-off supports
Support Type
Support Filters
Rotational Support Filters
Comparison Method

Command Reference
Restraint Filter
The Result/Filter Criteria/Restraint Filter command allows the user to search and filter the restraints to be included in output reports by user specified criteria. Report filtering is enabled using the Apply Filter
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Restraint Filter dialog:
Logical Method
Restraint Filters
Comparison Method

Command Reference
Force and Moment Filter

The Result/Filter Criteria/Force and Moment Filter command allows the user to search and filter the points to be included in output reports by user specified forces and moments. Report filtering is enabled using
the Apply Filter Criteria (Result/Filter) option in the Output Report dialog. This feature allows users to automatically sort through volumes of output data in order to identify areas of interest.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Force and Moment Filter dialog:
Logical Method
Force and Moment Filters
Comparison Method

Command Reference
Code Stress Filter

The Result/Filter Criteria/Code Stress Filter command allows the user to search and filter the points to be included in output reports by user specified code compliance. Report filtering is enabled using the Apply
Filter Criteria (Result/Filter) option in the Output Report dialog. This feature allows users to automatically sort through volumes of output data in order to identify areas of interest.
The following fields/parameters are provided in the Code Stress Filter dialog:
Logical Method
Code Stress Filters
Comparison Method

Command Reference
Save Default Filters

The Result/Filter Criteria/Save Defaults command allows the user to save all customized filter criteria parameters in the current model as defaults for all newly created models using the File/New menu
option. Options which are saved in the defaults file (AUTOPIPE.FLT) include the Displacement, Support, Restraint, Forces and Moments, and Code Compliance Result/Filter Criteria dialogs.
Note: To revert to the original AutoPIPE defaults for a new model, delete the AUTOPIPE.FLT file from the AutoPIPE program directory.
Command Reference
Help Menu Overview
Select a topic from the Help menu for more information about AutoPIPE commands and procedures. Choices are as follows:
l Contents: Displays a tabbed dialog which aids in locating information within the help system. The Contents tab contains an expandable book-layout of the entire Help System. The Index tab
contains an index of help topics. Scroll through the list, then select an item to jump to that topic, or type an index entry in the field provided to search for it. The Find tab allows you to search the
entire help system for a user-defined text string. Topics which contain the search words are displayed. Select a topic from the filtered list to view it.
l Help Desk: Displays the online help.
l Toolbar: Contains a complete reference to the AutoPIPE toolbar buttons.
l Tutorial: Provides access to the printable PDF version of the Tutorial as well as the on-line demos of this Tutorials.
l Workbook: Jumps to the AutoPIPE Workbook, which contains various modeling examples and sample piping systems.
l AutoPIPE News: Displays the Bentley AutoPIPE News Feed
l Online Resources: Provides a list of online resources available that are related to AutoPIPE
l About: Contains information on the AutoPIPE version you are using, as well as contact information.
Command Reference
Product Info
This is a direct link to Bentley AutoPIPE's product homepage within the www.Bentley.com website.
Command Reference
Community
This is a direct link to Bentley AutoPIPE's Be Community webpage.
See Also:
AutoPIPE Be Community
Command Reference
Forum
This is a direct link to the sign-in page for access to Bentley AutoPIPE's Be Community Web Forum.
See Also:
AutoPIPE Be Community
Command Reference
OnDemand Seminars
This is a direct link to Bentley's OnDemand eSeminars for Structural software.

Command Reference
Upcoming Events
This is a direct link to Bentley's Current Events webpage. This includes Live Events, Online Events, and Training and Learning Events.
Command Reference
Training
This is a direct link to Bentley's Structural Team Training webpage.
Command Reference
Technotes FAQs
This is a direct link to the Bentley Technical Support Group's Structural Product Technotes and FAQs wiki page within the Be Community. Included are Technotes and FAQs for STAAD.Pro, RAM
Structural System, RAM Elements, RAM Connection, RAM Concept, and AutoPIPE.
Command Reference
Technical Support
This is a direct link to Bentley's Technical Support webpage.
Command Reference

This section of the Help file provides a reference to the toolbars and the commands associated with them. Select any toolbar button to view a general functional description of that icon.
Main Toolbar
File/New
File/Open
File /Open Recent Models
File/Save
File/Print [Output = Reports]
File/Print [Output = graphics]
File/Save Screen Plot
File/Structural Dashboard
Edit/Cut
Edit/Copy
Edit/Paste
Edit/Delete
Edit/Undo
Edit/Redo
Add to highlighted Selection
Remove from highlighted Selection
Toggle highlighted Selection
Select/Range (Select Points in Window or Range)
Select /Segment
Edit/Segment/Hide Selected
Edit/Segment/Hide Unselected
Edit/Segment/Show All
Edit/Beam/Hide Selected
Edit/Beam/Hide Unselected
Edit/Beam/Show All
Select/All Points
Select/Clear (Unselect all points)
Edit/Renumber All
View/Show/Point Names (Toggle Point Names)
View/Show/Support Tags (Toggle Support Tags)
View/Show/Point Symbol (Toggle Point Symbol)
View/Show/Beam Names
Toggle Cursor Size
Edit/Goto Point
View/Point Properties
File/Export/Nozzle Loads to AutoPIPE Nozzle
File/Save As/Stress Isometric
File/Insert Model/Autopipe Model (*.dat)
Modify/Convert Point to Bend
Modify/Convert Point to Tee
Modify/Convert Point to Run
Help/Contents
Edit/Grids (Input Grids)
Tools/Model Options/General
Tools /Model Input Listing
Analyze /Analyze All
Analyze /Hanger Selection
Tools/Flange Analysis
Analyze /Static
Analyze /Modal
Tools/Display Combinations
Result/Output Report
Result/Grid
Result /Restraint
Result/Support
Result/Displacement
Result /Forces & Moment
Result/Code Stresses
Result/Mode Shape
Result/Soil
Goto Least
Goto Previous
Goto Next
Goto Greatest
Component Toolbar
Insert/Modify/Delete Run Pipe
Insert/Modify/Delete Bend
Insert/Modify Tee
Insert/Modify/Delete Reducer
Insert/Modify/Delete Valve
Insert/Modify/Delete Rigid Options Over Range
Insert/Modify/Delete Flange
Insert/Modify/Delete Flexible Joint
Insert/Modify/Delete Nozzle
Insert/Modify/Delete Anchor
Insert/Modify/Delete Support
Insert/Modify/Delete Spring Variable Spring Hanger
Insert/Modify/Delete Constant Force Spring Hanger
Insert/Modify/Delete V-Stop
Insert/Modify/Delete Incline Support
Insert/Modify/Delete Line stop
Insert/Modify/Delete Guide
Insert/Modify/Delete Rotation Support
Insert/Modify/Delete Damper
Insert/Modify/Delete Tie-Link
Insert/Modify/Delete Pipe Properties
Insert/Modify/Delete Pressure/Temperature
Insert/Modify/Delete Concentrated Force
Insert/Modify/Delete Imposed Support Displacement
Insert/Modify/Delete Additional Weight
Insert/Modify/Delete Distributed Load
Insert/Delete Segment
Insert/Modify/Delete Soil Properties
Insert/Modify/Delete User SIF Flexibility
Insert/Modify/Delete Weld Efficiency Factor
Insert/Modify/Delete Cut Short
Insert/Modify/Delete Hydrodynamic
Insert/Modify/Delete Point Static Earthquake Scale Factor
Insert/Modify/Delete Member Static Earthquake Scale Factor
Insert/Modify/Delete Beam
Tools/Rotating Equipment
View Toolbar
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Pan
View/All
View/Former
View/Pan-Zoom-Rotate
View Default Iso View
View Top View
View Front View
View Right View
View 0 deg Iso View
View 90 deg Iso View
Rotate Left
Rotate Right
Rotate Up
Rotate Down
View/Single Line View
View/Wire-Frame View
View/Solid Model View
View/Single Viewport
View/Double Viewports
View/Quad Viewports
View/Show/Reset
View/Show/Pipe Properties
View/Show/Temperature
View/Show/Pressure
View/Show/Weight
View/Show/Concentrated Forces
View/Show/Imposed Displacements
View/Show/Thermal Anchor Movements
View/Show/Valve
View/Show/Flange
View/Show/Tee
View/Show/Soil Properties
View/Show/Length
Tools/Distance
View/Show/Joint Type
View/Show/Reference Point
View/Show/Pipe Insulation
Note: While in AutoPIPE, place the cursor over any toolbar icon and pause to display a "Tooltip" describing that button.

The Input Grids provide a spreadsheet interface to review and edit the model input data as an alternative to the modify menu functions or the graphic interface. These grids are dynamic with the graphic
and vice versa such that selections and modifications to the graphic are updated immediately in the relevant grids. Most of the menu/graphic functions can be performed in the input grids.
Modify Pipe ID (Input Grids)
Select Range (Input Grids)
Modify Pressure/Temperature (Input Grids)
The following input grid parameters can be reviewed and modified:
Pres/Temp/PipeID Pressure and Temperature data or change pipe identifier over a range of points
Pipe Properties Any of the pipe identifier properties.
Segment Hide or Select Segments and assign Line Numbers
Point Component lengths, point offsets, global coordinates or point names.
Design Pres/Temp Design Pressure and Temperature (ASME NB only)
Anchor Anchor Stiffnesses, hanger releases and option to transfer loads for local stress analysis using AutoPIPE Nozzle
Support Support identifier, Type, support stiffness, gaps, friction and support direction
Tee Tee type, additional tee parameters including automatic SIF's
Bend Bend point name, bend radius, Type, define bend midpoint.
Valve Length, Type, pressure rating, weight, weld connection type and weld SIF
Flange Type, pressure rating, weight, weld connection type, weld SIF, ANSI flange definition
Flex. Joint Length, flexible joint stiffnesses, weight and pressure area
Reducer Length, SIF, cone angle, weld mismatch.
Beam Beam offsets, section and material identifiers, Beta angle, rigid lengths and end releases
Section ID Beam section ID
Imposed Disp. Load case, translational and rotational displacements
Concentrated Force Load case, applied forces and moments.
Cut Short Load case, amount of cut short or cut long.
Joint Type, SIF In-plane and out-plane SIF, override option, flexibility factor
Weight Additional weight and offsets.
Thermal Anchor Movements Thermal anchor translational and rotational displacements
Soil Soil defined over range of points, length, max soil spacing and number of soil points
Soil Identifier Properties of any soil identifier
Gross Disc Gross point discontinuity (ASME NB only)
Out Of Roundness Out of roundness (ASME only)
Static EQ Static earthquake factors
Reference Point Properties of reference points
Hydrodynamic Data Hydrodynamic data defined on points
Distributed Loads Distributed load defined on a range of points
Rigid Options Rigid options defined on a range
Benefits:
l More efficient checking process of the input data.
l Duplicate and incorrect data can easily be identified e.g. multiple flanges or support displacements.
l Global changes can be made to the model e.g. change gaps or friction across multiple supports, edit all the valve or flange weights in one list, change pipe properties e.g. corrosion, insulation,
specific gravity across all pipe identifiers, change all beam section IDS, or select and apply soil properties.
l Review the updated data changes during model creation.
l Selections in the grid are dynamic with the graphic and vice versa.
l Accurate placement of components using the point grid either by offsets or global coordinates.
l Ability to 'slide' points e.g. supports along pipe to optimize support configuration (Apply Offset Option).
l Review Pressure and Temperature data for all thermal cases in one location.
l The Tee Input grid provides a very useful SIF design calculator Tool to achieve lower Tee SIF's and acceptable piping code stresses.
l Print complete grid to PDF file including useful custom page settings and 'Fit to page' option.
l Option for easier viewing of data without zeros.
l Ability to export data to MS Excel or MS Access.
Related Topics:
User Interface
Undo/Redo
Keyboard Controls
Right Mouse Menu
Input Grids Printing
Press Temp PipeID Grid
Grids Settings
Export Input and Results Reference
User Interface
General
l The grid input is a fully interactive and modeless during graphic model definition.
l The Input Grid dialog is displayed after opening a new or existing model and clears itself after closing the model.
l The grid input is organized into tab groups equivalent to the graphic dialogs.
l The input behavior of the fields in the grid is designed to be the same as the equivalent fields in the corresponding graphic dialog.
l The current row in the grid, i.e. as indicated by an arrow in the first column of the grid, corresponds to the current point in the model. Furthermore, when the current row is outside the range of the
grid view, the program automatically scrolls to the current row so that it is centered in the grid view.
l When there is a selected range in the model, the rows corresponding to the selected range should be highlighted in the grids.
l When segments are unselected under view/segment then the data in all input grids will not be shown for the hidden segments except for the pipe properties, beam, soil ID grids.
l On launching Autopipe, the saved size and position of the input grid window will be restored from the configuration file (Autoplan.cnf) similar to the results grids. The Default setting will have the
input grids window appear at bottom of the main program window.
Definitions:
l Disabled: field is read-only with gray background.
l Enabled: field is editable with white background
l Inactive: field is blank with gray background
l Lookup value: the value from either the library or from a calculation when the AUTO field is checked. The field is disabled for a lookup value.
l Editable: Always shown as an active cell with a white background. Drop-down list any item can be selected e.g. Support Type on support grid. Entry fields e.g. offsets on Point grid. Special drop-
down list - any item can be selected or a value can be entered e.g. Bend radius, support, anchor and flex joint stiffness fields.
Note: In the Point Grid, when the length, offsets and coordinates are modified, it updates the coordinates of all the points below the current point i.e. same function as Modify/Point and option "Apply
offset to following points" = checked.
A number of Grid options are available to control the format of the Grids.
Input Grids Synchronization

l The data in the input grids and the model are always synchronized, i.e. after editing the model graphically, the relevant input grids are updated automatically, and vice-versa.
l The data between all grids is always synchronized. After editing the data in one grid, the data in the other relevant grids is updated automatically, e.g. changing the valve length in the Valve Grid
automatically updates the graphic as well as the length & offset fields in the point grid.
l Selecting a range of points is possible from either the input grid or graphic such that the selected range is highlighted in both at the same time.
Grid Focus
l After editing a cell in the grid and committing the change, i.e. tabbing, Up/Dn arrows, etc., the focus remains on the grid.
l After clicking the mouse on the main AutoPIPE window, including the model, menu commands, toolbar icons, etc., the focus remains on the model.
l The Input Grid dialog will be disabled while a modal dialog is displayed.
l The Input Grid dialog will be hidden while running an analysis.
l The Input Grid dialog will be hidden while the Results Grid dialog is displayed.
l While the Results Grid dialog is displayed, no editing of the model will be allowed either graphically or with the Input Grid dialog.
l When a cell is edited, but not committed, as indicated by the pencil symbol in the first column of the grid, commit all changes in the grid before losing focus from the grid.
l Performing the delete operation (delete icon on toolbar or Delete key) when the grid has focus, deletes only the components corresponding to the current grid type but not delete the piping point.
For example, if the Support grid has focus, and the support point is highlighted (but not the support itself), then deleting the row in the Support grid should delete the support but not the point. It is
equivalent to selecting Delete/Support from the main menu.
Selection
l When applicable, the tab grids generally includes the same fields or at least the most useful fields from the corresponding graphic dialog. The input behavior of the fields in the grid should be the
same as the equivalent fields in the corresponding graphic dialog.
l Grid cells with gray background are not editable.
l Double-clicking a row in a grid displays the corresponding graphic dialog equivalent to the modify command.
l Selecting 1-point components (Tee, Flange, Anchor, Support and Xtra Data) will highlight the single points in the graphic model.
l Selecting 2-point components (Valve, Reducer, Flex joint, Nozzle or any row in the Point grid) will highlight the selected components in the graphic model.
l When applicable, input units are displayed in the header of each column in the grid.
l Edit/Grid opens the Input Grid dialog. All tab grids are displayed even if there are no rows in the tab grid. For the initial opening of the Input Grid dialog, the focus should be on the Point tab. On
successive opening of the Input Grid dialog, the tab from the previous Grid operation should be the focus for the current Input Grid dialog.
l The minimize icon on the title bar hides the Input Grid dialog.
l The close icon on the title bar closes the Input Grid dialog.
l Selecting the Grids icon in the toolbar opens or closes the Input Grid dialog which shows the toolbar pressed down or up respectively.
l When View/Show options are applied to a model, the model should not lose these View/Show options after editing the grids.
l Grid fields that are "editable" will have cells with white background. Grid fields that are "non-editable" will have cells with gray background.
Note: Any selection range can be made in either the Pres/Temp/PipeID or Point grids since these grids always show all the points in the model.
Only the Pres/Temp/PipeID grid shows all points including the bend near and far points.
Copy/Paste Operations
Four methods are provided for copy and paste operations. Each method has its own strengths and limitations.
l Copy/Paste
l Copy Down
l Drag Copy
l Ctrl + Enter
l While the Copy/Paste operation is most familiar, it is limited to cells in the same column within the grid only . However, there is no such restriction when copying data from the grid to another
spreadsheet application such as MS Excel or MS Access.
l The Copy Down copies the first value in the range down to each cell in the range. The range of cells is limited to one column only.
l The Drag Down operation is similar to the Copy Down operation. Instead of selecting a range of cells and then calling the Copy Down command, the entire operation can be performed by simply
clicking on a cell and dragging the lower right corner of the cell down to the desired range within the column. Again, the range of cells is limited to one column only.
l The Ctrl + Enter operation is the only method that can copy a specified value over multiple selected cells in any row or column. The selection set does not need to be contiguous. The program will
not perform any data type checking for this operation. The user is responsible for ensuring that the selected cells are of the same data type.
Sorting
l Any column in any grid TAB can be sorted by double-clicking the header title i.e. columns with numbered values are sorted highest to lowest and columns with alphanumeric data are sorted
alphabetically.
l Double-clicking the top left (i.e. 1st cell) cell of any grid TAB re-sorts the current grid to the default order i.e. 1st sort based on segment order followed by 2nd sort based on point name order.
Limitations
l Changes to the Grid properties, i.e. column width, column sort, etc., will not be saved.
l Option to move columns will not be supported.
Undo/Redo
Every grid input operation is equivalent to one Undo/Redo step i.e. editing a single cell or a range of cells is considered as one Undo/Redo step.
The grid input and graphic model share the same Undo/Redo operations using the Edit/Undo (Ctrl + Z) or Edit/Redo (Ctrl + Y) commands.
Note: The undo or redo toolbar icons also work in the input grids.
Copy/Paste, Copy Down, Ctrl +Enter or copy drag operations across multiple cells counts as one undo step.
The default number of Undo/Redo steps will be 99.
Keyboard Controls
The following keyboard shortcuts are available in the input grids.
Function Keyboard Description
Select/All Points Ctrl + A Select all rows in the current grid.

Select/Clear Ctrl + Q De-select all rows in the current grid.
Copy Cells Ctrl + C Copy value from single cell
Paste Cells Ctrl + V Paste value to single or multiple cells of like data
spanning multiple columns.
Copy Down Cells Ctrl + D Select a group of cells in the same column. Ctrl +
D will paste the value in the 1st selected cell to all
selected cells.
Undo Ctrl + Z Undo last operation
Redo Ctrl + Y Redo last operation
Ctrl + Enter Select a group of cells of like data spanning
multiple columns. Enter a new value in the last
selected cell then Ctrl +Enter will paste this value to
all selected cells.
Goes to 1st cell Home On the current row
Goes to last cell End On the current row
Zoom-In CTRL+mouse
scroll wheel back
Zoom-Out CTRL+mouse
scroll wheel
forward
Navigate to Next TAB CTRL + PGDN Move to the next TAB
Navigate to Previous CTRL + PGUP Move to the previous TAB
TAB
Right Mouse Menu

The following right mouse menu options are available
Applicable to all cells except header row and column1:
Right-Mouse Menu Shortcut Key Description

Options
Undo Ctrl + Z Undo last operation
Redo Ctrl + Y Redo last operation
Copy Cells Ctrl + C Copy value from single cell

Paste Cells Ctrl + V Paste value to single or multiple cells of like data spanning multiple columns.
Copy Down Ctrl + D Select a group of cells in the same column. Ctrl + D will paste the value in the 1st selected cell to all selected cells.
Apply Offset Toggle ON/OFF check mark equivalent to the "Apply offset to all following points" option on the following dialogs which have equivalent grids: Point,
Valve, Flexible joint, and Reducer.
This option is disabled (grayed out) for all other Input grids. All options will be OFF by default (same as dialogs) except the point grid which will be ON
by default.
Note: In the current session, this option can be ON/OFF for each of the applicable grids but these options are not saved when the program is closed.
This option is not available for Bend and Tee grids since no length fields exist in these grids.
Modify Display the modify dialog for the selected row.
Delete Not Available yet
Select All Ctrl + A Select all rows in the current grid.
Clear All Ctrl + Q De-select all rows in the current grid.
Printing
l Print Grid Print the complete grid

Ctrl + P
l Page Setup Options for margins , titles and gridlines, page order, and center orientation
l Header / Footer
Customized header and footer
l Fit to Page
Scales all columns to fit the page width
Applicable to header row only:

Options
Hide To Hide columns, select one or more columns then mouse right-click on the header row and select Hide.
Unhide To Unhide columns, select columns spanning across the hidden columns then mouse right-click on the header row and select Unhide.
Applicable to Press/Temp/PipeID Grid:

Options
Show/Hide Operating cases This option provides a Show/Hide Operating cases dialog. Specific operating cases along with the fields can be hidden using this option.
Show Pressure Only This option shows the pressure fields of all the operating cases. Other fields are hidden.
Show Temperature Only This option shows the temperature fields of all the operating cases. Other fields are hidden.
Show Pressure and This option shows the pressure and temperature fields of all the operating cases. Other fields are hidden.
Temperature Only
Show All This options shows all the fields and the columns which were hidden by any of the above mentioned operations.
Note: If all columns are hidden then either a) double-click right edge of the column #1 or b) select Unhide from Right click menu on left most upper cell to unhide all columns.
Input Grids Printing

The Input Grids provide a print button for printing any Input grid TAB. Different printing options are provided which include : print setup, page setup and header/Footer for customizing to company
standards for different projects. These options are applied to all Input grids with the page setup and Header/Footer settings saved to a Input.GPS file.
The following printing options are listed by selecting the drop-down arrow on the Print button.
l Print Grid Ctrl + P
l Page Setup
l Header /Footer
Print Grid Ctrl + P

The following standard print windows dialog is displayed
Page Setup
The following page setup dialog is displayed including preview screen with options for margins , titles and gridlines, page order, and center orientation on the page.
These options are similar to MS Excel.
l Margins : Enter Left/Right/Top/bottom margins to control the distance of the data from the edge of the printed page. Default values will be left = 0.5", right = 0.25", Top = 075" bottom = 0.5".
l Titles and Gridlines : Print options for showing row and/or column header titles, a solid border around the grid, vertical and/or horizontal lines and no shading to be printed. Default is all options
ON except "Row Headers" and "Only Black and White" check boxes.
l Page Order: To control the order in which the data is numbered and printed when it does not fit on one page. Default is "First Rows, then columns"
l Center on Page: Center the data on the page within the margins by selecting the vertical or horizontal or both check boxes. Default is both option = OFF.
Note: The page setup margins are used in conjunction with the header/footer margins.
The "Save settings to Profile" option is non functional.
Header / Footer
The header and footer can be customized with a company's own details and formatting
Default settings are provided in Input.GPS as a working template below and are similar to the AutoPIPE output reports.
Standard model and project information can be read from the Inputs MDB file using printing tokens e.g. $M, $H etc shown below.
Header:
Default Header settings are provided as follows:
Line Left Center Right

1 Model Name ($M) None Company Name ($C)
2 Proj ID 1 ($H) None Date/Time stamp (#DATE#{%x, %X})
3 Proj ID 2 ($I) None Model Revision: $X
4 Prepared By: $B None Checked By: $K
l "Proj ID 1" and "Proj ID 2" are recovered from "Header 1" and "Header 2" fields in the tools/model options/general dialog.
l "Prepared By" and "Checked By" are recovered from "PreparedBy" and "CheckedBy" fields in the tools/model options/general dialog.
l "Company Name" is recovered from "CompanyName" field in the tools/model options/general dialog.
l Model Revision is recovered from "ModelRev" field in the tools/model options/general dialog.
Footer:
Default Footer settings are provided as follows:

1 AutoPIPE : program version ($V) Inputs: Grid Tab Name ($T) Page # / Total # Pages (#P/#N)
l Distance to Frame : Distance of header and footer titles to the grid border.
l Page Numbering : Enter Auto or first page No.
l Font button : Change format of the header and footer Font.
Printing Tokens
Note: The Page Setup and Header/Footer settings are saved as a binary GPS file named Input.GPS. A default Input.GPS file is provided in the program directory. After accepting the Page Setup dialog or
the Header/Footer dialog, the printing options are automatically saved to the Input.GPS file. To initialize these two dialogs, the program will first check for the GPS file in the current folder. If the GPS
file is not found in the current folder (and the current folder is not the program folder), then the program will look for the GPS file in the program folder.
The GPS file will always be saved to the folder in which the current model is located. If the GPS file is not found in the current and program folders, then default values from the style sheets will be used
and saved to the current folder. This can provide unique printing settings stored in different GPS files for different projects.
The information matching the tokens shown in the header and footer are recovered from the program memory.
Fit to Page
This toggle option enables the complete grid to be scaled to fill the page width and use as much data as possible. This option is ON by default.
Note: This option adjusts the printed page to fit all the columns on the page.
Related Topics:
Inputs Grid Overview
Inputs Grid User Interface
Printing Tokens
Pressure/ Temperature/ PipeID Grid

From No Non-Scrollable
To No Non-Scrollable
Material No Non-Scrollable
Pipe ID Select pipe identifier from the list Yes This drop-down list also
shows the pipeID
material for reference.
Nominal, in Nominal pipe diameter No The actual outside pipe
diameter will be
displayed if 'NS' is
selected as the nominal
pipe size
Rows below are repeated for each
thermal case
Pres, psi Enter internal pipe pressure (psig) Yes
Temp., deg F Enter design or operating Yes
temperature
Expan., in/100ft Enter value Yes, No Editable when Auto
checkbox = OFF (or
grayed out) otherwise
library value shown as
non-editable.
Hot Mod., E6 Enter value Yes, No Editable when Auto
psi checkbox = OFF (or
grayed out) otherwise
library value shown as
non-editable
Delta T1 Enter the linear through wall Yes Only available for
thermal gradient ASME NB
Delta T2 Enter the non-linear through wall Yes Only available for
thermal gradient ASME NB
The piping codes will display the following stress/strain columns.
These fields will be editable when Auto checkbox = OFF (or grayed out) otherwise the library allowable stress value shown as non-editable.

Hot Allow, psi Enter hot allowable stress(Sh) Yes, No This column shown for all codes
except B31.4, B31.8 , BS7159
and General.
%Proof-Hot, psi Enter value Yes, No BS806 only
Design, psi Enter value Yes, No BS806 only
Ave. rupture, psi Enter value Yes, No BS806 only
Design (f) , psi Enter the design stress as required by the Stoomwezen Yes, No Stoomwezen only
code.
Design (fe) , psi Enter the design stress as required by the Stoomwezen Yes, No Stoomwezen only
code
Yield (Sy) , psi Enter hot yield stress Yes, No B31.3, MITI, ASME NC/ND,
and JSME PPC codes.
Note: Hot Yield displayed for ASME NC or ND
codes Level A or B but not used.
Ultimate , psi Enter the hot ultimate stress(Su) Yes, No MITI and JSME PPC codes only
Hot Design , psi Enter the hot design stress Yes, No Swedish Piping Code (SPC-2)
and the TBK Piping Code only.
Design Strain Enter value Yes, No BS7159 only
Temp. k-fac Enter value Yes, No BS7159 only, This value
is used to compensate for
the thermal effects of
process liquids or gases.
The k-factor is usually
taken to be 0.85 for
liquids and 0.80 for
gases. The default value
is 0.85.
Rp0.2t or ReHt Enter value Yes, No EN13480 only
Rp1.0t (A>=30) Enter value Yes, No EN13480 only
Tensile (Rmt) Enter value Yes, No EN13480 only
Creep (fcr) Enter value Yes, No EN13480 only
Hot allow. (fh) No EN13480 only, value updated
from other mechanical stresses.
Read-only.
Kh Enter value Yes, No Russian SNIP only
Notes:
AUTO checkboxes are always shown to the left of columns for Expansion , hot modulus and stress/strain columns. A few stress columns do not have associated AUTO checkboxes e.g. Rupture stress in
BS806 and hot allowable stress in EN13480.
The state of the AUTO checkbox is based on the material type as defined by the Pipe ID. The AUTO field is either enabled or disabled (grayed out. There are three material types: Standard or Non-code
(CS, HC, etc.), Code (A53-A, A106-C, etc.), and Non-standard (NS). For a Standard material, the AUTO checkboxes for Modulus and Expansion are enabled and all other AUTO checkboxes are grayed
out. For a Code material, all the AUTO checkboxes are enabled. For a Non-standard material, all the AUTO checkboxes are disabled.
The Pres/Temp/PipeID grid is updated automatically with changes in the Pipe Properties grid, i.e. Pipe identifier name, material name, pipe schedule or pipe wall thickness,etc.
If a midpoint is defined at a bend, it will not be shown in the Pres/Temp/PipeID grid e.g. for bend A01 the grid only shows 1 row for A01N to A01F. Therefore any midpoint cannot be selected from
input grids and can only be selected by Edit/Goto Point command or mouse click on the bend midpoint.
Note: Only the hot longitudinal modulus is displayed for BS7159
Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Pipe Properties Grid

The following input columns are available (English units shown) :

PipeID Enter pipe identifier name Yes Non-Scrollable
Tag No. Enter the tag no. for pipe Yes
identifier up to 36 characters
Nominal, inch Select nominal diameter Yes Selectable dropdown list
except BS7159.
Actual O.D., inch Enter outside diameter Yes, No Editable if Nominal = 'NS' ,
For BS7159, OD = same as
entered nominal.
Schedule Select pipe schedule Yes, No Editable if Nominal is not 'NS'
Wall Thick, inch Enter pipe thickness Yes, No Editable if Nominal or
schedule = 'NS'
Corrosion, inch Yes
Mill Tol, inch Yes Default = 12.5% of wall
thickness
Insul. Thick, inch Yes
Insul. Matl . Select insulation material Yes, No Editable when non-zero insulation thickness ,
otherwise grayed out.
Insul. Dens., Lbf/cu.ft Enter value to override library Yes, No Editable when non-zero insulation thickness ,
value
Clad thickness, inch Enter value Yes
Clad material Select cladding material Yes
Clad density, lb/cu.ft Enter value Yes
Lining Thick., Inch Enter Value Yes
Lining Dens., Lb/cu.ft Enter Value Yes, No Editable when non-zero lining thickness ,
Line Class Enter Value Yes

Long Weld. Factor Yes, No Grayed out for B31.3, B31.1
(2009 addenda only), and
JSME PPC only.
Circ Weld. Yes, No Grayed out for B31.3, B31.1
(2009 addenda only), and

JSME PPC only.
Spec. Grav. Yes
Pipe Matl Select pipe material Yes Selectable dropdown list,
select 'NS' allows mechanical
properties to be edited.
BS7159: Selectable list if

Laminate Ref is NS otherwise
disabled.
EN13480: Editable for

standard material source
otherwise set to NS
No LT Warnings Select of De-Select checkbox. Yes, No Disabled if 'NS' material
selected
Safety Factor K1 Enter Value Yes, No Available for Russian SNIP
piping code only
Safety Factor K2 Enter Value Yes, No Available for Russian SNIP
piping code only
Category Factor m Enter Value Yes, No Available for Russian SNIP

piping code only
Matl. Compos. Select Carbon, Austenitic, Yes, No This field is only active for
High Nickel Alloy, or Other SPC, TBK5-6, EN13480,
JSME PPC, ASME NB, and
ASME NC/ND (2007 only)
codes.
Ratchet C4 Enter value to override the Yes This field is only available for the ASME NB
1982 W Addenda edition or later.
default value based on the
composition.
Cold Allow. (Sc), Psi Enter value to override library Yes The cold allowable value is used in the
calculation of code stress ratios. A value must
value be entered if a code material is not used. If a
standard code material was selected, the cold
allowable is recovered from the library as the
default. The hot allowable stress, if required
by code, will be specified later.
%Proof-Room (SPFc), psi This field is displayed for the Yes, No

BS 806 code only.
The proof stress at room

(ambient) temperature is used
in the calculation of code
stress ratios.
Room Design (f), psi Enter room design stress Yes, No This field is active for the Stoomwezen code
only.
Min Yield (Sy), psi Enter minimum yield stress Yes, No This field is active for all
codes except MITI-3, KHK
level 1 & 2, BS7159,
EN13480 & BS806
The minimum yield value is

used in the calculation of code
stress ratios and Hydrotest
code combination allowable
stress.
A zero value is allowed for all

code options except B31.4,
B31.8, DNV, CSA-Z662.
Ultimate (Su), psi Enter ultimate stress Yes, No This field is active for the following codes
only: B31.3, Swedish SPC and TBK.
Long Mod E6, psi Yes, No Editable when material = ’NS’, otherwise
grayed out.
Hoop Mod. E6, psi Yes, No Editable when material = ’NS’, otherwise
grayed out. Always editable for BS7159
Laminate Type = 3 and ’Circ. Mod.’ instead
of ’Hoop Mod.’
Shear Mod. E6, psi Yes, No Editable when material = ’NS’, otherwise
Density, lb/cu.ft Yes, No Editable when material = ’NS’, otherwise

Poisson’s Yes, No Editable when material = ’NS’, otherwise

Additional Fields for ASME B31.1 and B31.3 Appendix P (2004 Only)
Range reduction factor Enter the range reduction factor Yes
Additional Fields for ASME B31.3 (except for 2004 Appendix P)

Stress range factor Enter the stress range factor Yes
Additional Fields for ASME B31.3 and B31.1 (2009 addenda only)
Weld E factor Select 1, 2 or 3 for the type of Yes
laminate construction.
Weld W factor Auto Yes
Select or De-Select checkbox.
Weld W factor Yes, No
Select a reference laminate.

Lam. Type Select 1, 2 or 3 for the type of Yes Selectable dropdown list
laminate construction.
Lam. Ref. Yes
Select a reference laminate. Will automatically recall the design thickness
from the AutoPIPE component library file
AUTOGRPP.LIB. If the reference laminate is
not in the library, an error message will be
displayed. New reference laminates may be
added to the library using the Tools/Library
command. If a non-standard reference
laminate is defined by entering NS, the actual
design thickness value must then be entered.
Actual I.D, inch Yes

Enter the actual inside The default is the nominal diameter.
diameter.
Design Thk, inch Enter actual design thickness Yes, No Editable If NS (non-standard) is entered in
the Laminate reference field, otherwise
grayed out.
Cold Des.Strain Enter cold design strain Yes This value is used for the calculation of the
flexibility and stress intensification factors.
The default value is 0.0009 which
corresponds to a strain class rating of 4.
Note: If the Laminate reference = NS, then the pipe material drop down list is available and for standard BS7159 laminates e.g. L25, L40 etc, the longitudinal, hoop and shear modulus values are
calculated from the Unit modulus (read from the material library) & design thickness entered - this assumes material has defined composition code = 0. For non-standard BS7159 FRP materials e.g.
Ameron , provided the composition code = 1 in defined in the material library then longitudinal, hoop and shear modulus values are read from library and inserted directly into the pipe properties dialog
or grid.

Product Select the product type from Yes
the following :
Seamless tube
Electric welded tube
Arc welded tube
Source Select the library source from Yes If NS is selected, the Pipe Material field will
be also set to NS and it will not be editable.
the following :
Note: The source and the product type are
NS Non-standard used to filter the selection list for the Pipe
Material field.
EURO List European
Standard code
materials only
BS List BS 806 code
materials only
ASME List ASME
BPVC, Section III -
Part D code materials
only
SPC List Swedish
Piping Code 1978
code materials only
MANN List
Mannesmannrohren-
Werke AG code
materials only
DIN List DIN
Standard code
materials only
PHYS List physical
property material
names from all sources
only, i.e. GRP_1-5.2,
CS, etc.
Elong. Al (%) Enter % longitudinal elongation Yes, No Editable for austenitic stainless steels only
(see Composition field) otherwise grayed out.
For Austenitic material, a value must be
entered if a code material is not used. If a
library code material was selected, the
longitudinal elongation is recovered from the
library as the default.
Elong. At (%) Enter % transverse elongation Yes,No ditto

Rp0.2 or ReH, psi Enter the minimum 0.2% Yes,No A value must be entered if a code material is
not used. If a library code material was
proof strength (Rp0.2) or selected, Rp0.2 at room (ambient)
minimum yield strength temperature is recovered from the library as
the default. Rp0.2 at elevated temperatures, if
(ReH) at room (ambient) required by code, will be specified later.
temperature.
Rp1.0 (A>=30) , psi Enter the minimum 1.0% Yes,No A value must be entered if a code material is
proof strength at room selected, Rp1.0 at room (ambient)
(ambient) temperature. temperature is recovered from the library as
the default. Rp1.0 at elevated temperatures, if
required by code, will be specified later.
Rm, psi Enter the minimum tensile Yes,No A value must be entered if a code material is
strength at room (ambient). selected, Rm at room (ambient) temperature
is recovered from the library as the default.
Rm at elevated temperatures, if required by
code, will be specified later.
Additional Fields for ASME NB, NC, and ND piping codes

Long. Weld Type Select the longitudinal weld Yes Seamless does not intensify the stress indices.
type used in the ASME NB,

NC and ND stress indices
Additional Fields for ASME NB piping code

Fatigue Curve Select the fatigue curve to be Yes For the 1982 W Addenda edition or earlier,
the default will be 'ASME III - ADLPIPE
used in the ASME NB fatigue (default)'.
evaluation
User-created *.FAT files are selectable in this
drop-down list.
Environmental Factor Enter the environmental factor Yes Set to 1.0 by default.
used for determining the usage

factor
Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Segment Grid
The following input columns are available:

Segment Displays the segment name No Non-Scrollable
Nominal Minimum nominal pipe diameter in the No The actual outside pipe
Minimum, in segment diameter will be

pipe diameter
Nominal Maximum nominal pipe diameter in the No The actual outside pipe
Maximum, in segment diameter will be
pipe diameter
First Point Displays the first point in the segment No Non-Scrollable
Last Point Displays the last point in the segment No Non-Scrollable
Line Number Enter line number up to 30 characters. Yes Line Numbers can only be assigned
per segment.
Show Display the segment on the plot Yes Toggle ON/OFF

Apply Wind Applies wind load cases to the segment Yes Toggle ON/OFF
corresponding with the selected row.
Apply Thermal Applies thermal bowing to the segment Yes Toggle ON/OFF
Bowing corresponding with the selected row.
Apply Applies buoyancy to the segment Yes Toggle ON/OFF
Buoyancy corresponding with the selected row.
Note:
1. Displaying segments ON/OFF the screen plot, also limits the results in the output report. The generated report will include
data for the visible segments only.
Hint:
1. Multiple Segments can be selected easily by highlighting the row
2. Selecting the Show column then CTRL + click on one checkbox then press the Enter key while still holding down the CTRL key will toggle all Show options OFF/ON.
3. To assign a different line number along the pipe. Use the Edit > Segment > Split command to create a new segment then assign a new line number.
Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Point Grid

To Enter point name (1 to 4 characters) Yes Non-Scrollable
Comp. Display component type :Point, Run, Bend, Tee, Valve, No Non-Scrollable
Expansion(Flex joint), Reducer, Nozzle.
"Point" is first point of a
segment or a junction
point.
Nominal, in Nominal pipe diameter No The actual outside pipe
diameter will be
pipe diameter
Length, ft Enter value Yes Changing the length will
update the point offsets
and global coordinates.
Segment Display segment name No
Offset DX, ft Yes
Offset DY, ft Yes
Offset DZ, ft Yes
Global X, ft Yes Global coordinates
Global Y, ft Yes ditto
Global Z, ft Yes ditto
The Point grid is designed to behave either as point-based or component-based mode.
The graphic component(s) is only highlighted if the row is highlighted and vice-versa or if the row is part of a selected range in the grid. Whether or not the current row is highlighted defines the mode in
which it is point-based or component-based.
When a row is highlighted
The Point grid behaves in a component-based mode. In this mode, the graphic cursor corresponds to the "From" point of the current row. This is consistent when a single component is highlighted
graphically, i.e. the model cursor is on the first or "From" point of the component, and vice-versa. The program currently handles the modify and delete operations properly in this component-based
mode.
When the row is not highlighted
The Point grid behaves in a point-based mode. In this mode, the graphic cursor should always correspond to the "To" point of the current row, and vice-versa. It is consistent with performing any graphic
modify, insert, delete operation on a single point (no highlighted range). Note that the "To" point in the graphic dialogs corresponds to the current point on the model.
Notes:
Offsets and Coordinates can be entered in feet-inches format e.g. 5’-2". The feet-inches display format can be shown using option "Use feet-inches display format" under Tools/model options/edit.
New segments or Tee points are shown as new row with ’From’ point = Origin , ’To’ point = Tee or junction point, Comp. = Tee or Point
Changing the length/offset/coordinates of a 2-point component in the Points Grid i.e. reducer, valve, Flex joint or nozzle will update the component length on the matching grid.
Editing an offset is equivalent to menu command Modify/Component and changing the offset with the option "apply offset to following points" = checked.
The cursor on the graphic model corresponds to the cursor on the grid row of the 'TO' point.
Changing the offset will update length and coordinates
Changing the coordinates will update length and offsets.
Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Design Press/ Temp Grid

This is only available for ASME III Class 1, 2, 3 (subsection NB, NC, ND)
Sm and Sy fields will be editable when Auto checkbox = OFF (or grayed out) otherwise the library allowable stress value shown as non-editable.

To No Non-Scrollable
Design Enter internal Design pipe pressure Yes
Pressure, psi
Peak Pressure, Enter the peak pressure Yes Only available for
psi ASME NC and ND
Design Enter design temperature Yes
Temperature,
deg F
Auto - Design None Yes, No Enabled only for
Sm specification materials
otherwise grayed out
Design Sm Enter design stress intensity Yes, No
Auto - Design None Yes, No Only available for

Sh ASME NB, enabled only
for specification
materials otherwise
grayed out
Design Sh Enter basic allowable stress Yes, No Only available for
ASME NC and ND
Auto - Design None Yes, No Only available for

Sy ASME NC and ND,
enabled only for
specification materials
otherwise grayed out
Design Sy Enter hot yield stress Yes, No
Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Anchor Grid

Point No Non-Scrollable
Nominal, in Nominal pipe diameter or No The actual outside pipe
the section ID if connected diameter will be
to a beam node displayed if 'NS' is
pipe diameter
Tag No. Enter Support Tag up to 36 Yes Non-Scrollable
characters
Type Rigid or Flexible Yes
X -Stiff. lb/in Select Rigid or enter a Yes, No Rigid = non-editable;
value if Type = Flexible Flexible = editable
If a value greater than

1.0E+30 in/lb is entered
this field will be set to
1.0E+30 in/lb
automatically.
Y -Stiff. lb/in Select Rigid or enter a Yes, No Rigid = non-editable;

1.0E+30 in/lb
automatically.
Z -Stiff. lb/in Select Rigid or enter a Yes, No Rigid = non-editable;

1.0E+30 in/lb
automatically.
RX -Stiff. Ft-Lb/deg Select Rigid or enter a Yes, No Rigid = non-editable;

1.0E+32 ft-lb/deg is
entered this field will
be set to 1.0E+32 ft-
lb/deg automatically.
RY -Stiff. Ft-Lb/deg Select Rigid or enter a Yes, No Rigid = non-editable;

RZ -Stiff. Ft-Lb/deg Select Rigid or enter a Yes, No Rigid = non-editable;

Releases for Hanger Select or Un-Select Yes
Selection Checkboxes
AutoPIPE Nozzle Select or Un-Select Yes
Checkbox
Component GUIDs Displays the GUID No Only included in the
associated with that point input grid when the
Show component guids
column in input grid
option is checked in the
Grids Settings dialog
(Tools > Settings >
Grids)
Note: Thermal anchor displacements are not available in Anchor grid.
Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Support Grid

Point Support point No Non-Scrollable
Nominal, in
Nominal pipe diameter or the section No The actual outside pipe
ID if connected to a beam node diameter will be displayed if
'NS' is selected as the
nominal pipe diameter
ID Enter Support ID up to 6 characters Yes Non-Scrollable
Tag No. Enter Support Tag up to 36 characters Yes Non-Scrollable
Attachment ID Enter the attachment ID up to 36 Yes

characters
Connect Select Ground or enter piping or beam Yes Connected to point.
point name.
Type Select support type from the list : Const, Yes
Spring, V-Stop, Guide, Linestop,
Damper, Tie Link, Rotational or Incline.
Symbol Select the type of V-Stop or Spring Yes, No Editable for V-Stop & Spring
symbol
Wind Select or De-Select "Activate damper for wind" checkbox. Yes, No Editable checkbox for damper only, grayed
out for all other supports.
Friction Enter value Yes, No Editable for Guide, V-stop, Incline, Tie-link
but grayed out for all other supports.
Direction Select from the list : Global X, Global Yes, No Editable for Rotational, Damper and Incline,
Y, Global Z, Inclined.
Undes. Select or De-Select Undesigned spring / Yes, Editable checkbox for Const and Spring,
grayed out for all other supports.
constant hanger checkbox. No
Rate/Stiff,. lb/in Select Rigid or enter stiffness or spring rate Yes, No Editable for all supports except grayed out
for V-stop and Const.
Cold load, lb Enter value Yes, No Editable for Const and Spring, and grayed
Size Enter value Yes, No Editable for Spring support only.
Figure Enter value Yes, No Editable for Spring support only.
Gap Back, inch Enter value Yes, No Editable for Linestop, Incline and Tie Link,
Gap Forw., Inch Enter value Yes, No Editable for Linestop, Incline and Tie Link,
Gap Down., Inch Enter value Yes, No Editable for Guide and V-stop, but grayed
Gap Up ,inch Enter value Yes, No Editable for Guide and V-stop, but grayed
Gap Left ,inch Enter value Yes, No Editable for Guide, but grayed out for all
other supports.
Gap Right, inch Enter value Yes, No Editable for Guide, but grayed out for all
other supports.
Gap Settings Select Weightless or As-Built from Yes, No Editable only for Guide, V-stop and Incline,
drop-down list
User X Enter Direction cosines or offsets - either Yes, No If Inclined direction is selected then this
field is editable otherwise grayed out.
actual dimensions or distances in any
consistent set of units must be entered.
User Y same as User X Yes, No ditto
User Z same as User X Yes, No ditto
Component Displays the GUID associated with that No Only included in the input
GUIDs point grid when the Show
component guids column in
input grid option is checked
in the Grids Settings dialog
(Tools > Settings > Grids)
Notes:
For guides on vertical legs (Y vertical ) segment direction = DOWN then dialog support gaps mapping to grid as follows: Gap down = Global -Z, Gap up = Global +Z, Gap right = Global -X, Gap left =
Global +X.
For guides on vertical legs (Y vertical ) segment direction = UP then dialog support gaps mapping to grid as follows: Gap down = Global -Z, Gap up = Global +Z, Gap right = Global +X, Gap left =
Global -X.
Also see help topic Support Forces for Guides and Line Stops without Gaps
Values in all fields can be entered as decimal numbers e.g. 123.45 or scientific format 1.2345E2.
The User directions are not normalized unlike saving the support dialog i.e. the resultant cosine = 1.0
Limitation: Units in the Stiffness (Rate/Stiff) field for Rotational support are not displayed correctly i.e. correct default units are English = ft-lb/deg, SI = N-m/deg, Metric = Kg-cm/deg
Related Topics:
Supports Overview
User Interface
Grids Settings
Tee Grid

Point Non-Scrollable
Nominal, in Nominal pipe diameter No The actual outside pipe diameter will
be displayed if 'NS' is selected as the
Tee Type Select the following tee type Note:
from the list.
a) BS7159 code shows drop-down
Welding, Reinforced , list : Fabricate, Moulded and Other
Branch, Unreinforced ,
Extruded, Contour, Fitting, b) SPC and TBK codes show drop-
Fabricate (BS7159 only), down list with all tee types except
Moulded (BS7159 only), Fabricate and Moulded.
Raised (SPC and TBK only),
Thickened (SPC and TBK c) All other piping codes show drop-
only), Other. down list with all tee types except
Fabricate, Moulded, Raised and
Thickened.
Pad Thickness, inch Enter value Yes, No Editable only for tee type is
Reinforced, but non-editable for all
other tee types.
The following fields are shown and editable for the appropriate piping codes
Consider Crotch Select or De-Select checkbox. Yes, No B31.3 or B31.1a-2005 and (Welding
or Contour) and all editions of
ASME NC/ND piping codes only
(Branch)
Pen. Weld Select or De-Select checkbox. Yes, No ASME NC/ND 2004 or later and NB
2007 piping codes only (Branch)
Config. Select A, B, C, D All editions of ASME NC/ND and
JSME PPC piping codes (Branch)
Crotch Radius, inch Yes, No Editable if Tee type is Extruded and piping code is B31.1
(except 2005) is NOT selected or ASME NC/ND piping
codes (Branch) and editable if "consider crotch"=checked
Yes, No B31.3 or B31.1a-2005 and (Welding or Contour)
(otherwise hidden) and Editable if "consider

Crotch thickness, inch crotch"=checked
Reinf. Length Yes, No All editions of ASME NC/ND and JSME PPC piping
codes (Branch)
Reinf. Thick. Yes, No All editions of ASME NC/ND and JSME PPC piping
codes (Branch)
The following fields are shown and editable when a Thickened tee is selected (otherwise hidden):
Effective wall thickness, inch Yes, No
Thickened length, inch Yes, No
The following fields are shown for the appropriate piping codes but editable only when Tee type = Other, otherwise the fields are grayed out and non-editable with
automatic SIF values shown.
SIF In-plane Yes, No All piping codes except ASME
NC/ND and JSME PPC.
SIF Out-plane Yes, No All piping codes except ASME
NC/ND and JSME PPC.
SIF Header Yes, No ASME NC/ND and JSME PPC
B1 Yes, No ASME NB/NC/ND and JSME PPC
C1 Yes, No ASME NB
K1 Yes, No ASME NB
B2r Yes, No ASME NB/NC/ND only
B2r' Yes, No ASME NB/NC/ND 2001 edition or

later only
C2r Yes, No ASME NB all editions, and NC/ND

1994 edition or later only
K2r Yes, No ASME NB
C3 Yes, No ASME NB
K3 Yes, No ASME NB
C3' Yes, No ASME NB/NC/ND and JSME PPC
SIF Branch Yes, No ASME NC/ND and JSME PPC
B2b Yes, No ASME NB/NC/ND only
B2b' Yes, No ASME NB/NC/ND 2001 edition or

later only
C2b Yes, No ASME NB all editions, and NC/ND

1994 edition or later only
K2b Yes, No ASME NB
Qualified Stress Enter Qualified Stress. Yes ISO 14692 Only
Biaxial Stress Ratio -r Enter Biaxial Stress Ratio. Yes ISO 14692 Only
Qualified Component Check this option to consider Yes ISO 14692 Only
this a 'qualified' component.
Component GUIDs Displays the GUID associated No Only included in the input grid when
with Tee the Show component guids column in
input grid option is checked in the
Grids Settings dialog (Tools > Settings
> Grids)
Automatic Tee SIF In-plane and SIF Out-plane

Hint: All tee SIF's are displayed and updated automatically in the Tee input grid when Tee parameters are changed such as:
tee type, pipe identifier, pipe diameter, pipe wall thickness, header-branch configuration, crotch wall thickness, etc.
Notes:
1. For the ASME ND-1982S piping code, the "B1 Header", "B2 Header", "B1 Branch", and "B2 Branch" fields will be blank and non-editable in the Tee Input Grid since the B1 and B2 stress indices are
not used in the stress equations for ASME ND-1982S.
2. The tee SIF values shown in the Tee input grid are also reported in the Tee Data Listing in the model input listing and the Code Compliance sub-report in the batch output report. This very useful
design Tool allows quick and easy evaluation of Tee SIF's to achieve lower SIF's and acceptable piping code stresses.
3. For piping codes that use single SIF (same value for both SIF In-plane and SIF Out-plane), the program uses SIF In-plane.
Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Bend Grid

Prev. Point Previous point before the bend No Non-Scrollable
point.
Bend Point Enter the point name (1 to 4 Yes Non-Scrollable
characters) for Bend tip point.
Next Point Next point after the bend No Non-Scrollable
point.
Nominal, in Nominal pipe diameter No The actual outside pipe diameter
will be displayed if 'NS' is
selected as the nominal pipe
diameter
Radius, inch Select Long or Short radius Yes
from the drop-down list or
Enter a non-standard radius.
Type Select bend type from the list : Yes Pulled Bend ignores any User
Elbow (default), Close Miter, SIF defined at the bend.
Wide Mite, and Pulled.
Cuts Enter integer 1 to 9 Yes, No IfType
Type = Elbow then grayed out and blank;
= Close Miter then editable, Type = Wide
Miter then grayed out, value = 1.
MidPoint Select or De-Select Checkbox. Yes
Mid. % Around Bend Enter % location around the Yes, No IF Midpoint checkbox = checked then editable
and default value shown = 50.00, otherwise
bend. grayed out.
Flexib. Factor Enter Automatic or flexibility Yes

factor.
Qualified Stress Enter Qualified Stress. Yes ISO 14692 Only
Biaxial Type Select Biaxial Type Yes ISO 14692 Only
Biaxial Ratio -r Enter Biaxial Ratio -r Yes ISO 14692 Only
Qualified Component Check this option to consider Yes ISO 14692 Only
this a 'qualified' component.
Component GUIDs Displays the GUID associated No Only included in the input grid
with Bend when the Show component
guids column in input grid
option is checked in the Grids
Settings dialog (Tools >
Settings > Grids)
Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Valve Grid

From Near (start) point No Non-scrollable
To Far (End) point No Non-scrollable
Tag No. Tag associated with valve Yes Maximum length of tag is 36 characters.
Nominal, in Nominal pipe diameter No The actual outside pipe diameter will be displayed if
'NS' is selected as the nominal pipe diameter
Length, ft Enter value to override library length. Yes Length shown to 2 decimal places. Valve length is
automatically updated in the Point grid and vice
versa.
Type Select a valve type from the list. Yes If a standard valve type was
Options include: GATE, GLOBE, selected then select a rating from
SCHECK, TCHECK, and NS (non- the list. The valve length, weight
standard). For each of the standard and surface area factor will be
types, two selections are available: those recalled automatically and written
followed by "-F" are flanged, while to the grid as defaults. If NS
those followed by "-B" are buttweld. (nonstandard) is selected the user
The default is GATE-F. may still select a standard pressure
rating from the selection list.
Rating Select the pressure rating from the drop- Yes Pressure ratings are dependant on
down list of ANSI, DIN or JIS ratings. the component library AUTOPIPE,
If a rating of NS is selected then valve AUTODIN or AUTOJIS selected
length, weight and surface area factor under Tools/model
will require user input. options/General.
Weight, lb Enter value to override library weight. Yes Weight is read from the component
library based on the valve type,

valve size and rating.
Joint End Type Joint End type. Drop-down list shows: Butt Weld,Butt Weld Yes Valve type with suffix = "-F" sets SIF = WN, suffix =
Transition, Weld Neck, Slip On, Socket Weld, Socket Weld "-B" sets SIF = BW.
(no undercut), Lap Joint, Threaded Joint, User-Defined.
Concave Toggle this option ON to specify that Yes, No Only available and editable for a
the socket or fillet weld is "concave". "double-welded slip-on" and
Otherwise, the socket or fillet weld will "socket or fillet weld" joint for
be considered as "convex" (default). JSME PPC piping code only.
This field is active for the JSME PPC Toggling ON this option enables
code option only. the "Weld Size" field.
Surface area factor Enter the surface area factor. Yes
Actuator Auto When this option is checked then the Yes Only the valve weight can be
actuator weight and offsets will be entered and acting on the valve
grayed out and set to zero. The valve
symbol will shown as a handwheel at a
fixed distance from the valve body same
as pre v9.1.
Symbol When this option is checked then the Yes, No This option is enabled when the
actuator symbol will change to a square Actuator Auto option is unchecked.
box with the actuator point (’D’) in the Default is unchecked i.e. a
middle of the box. handwheel symbol will be drawn at
the actuator offset 'D' location.
Actuator Weight Enter the weight of the actuator only. Yes, No This weight is the dry weight of the
actuator or handwheel as a point
load applied at actuator offsets
point 'D' from the valve midpoint.
Actuator DX, DY, DZ Enter offsets of the actuator from the Yes, No If 0,0,0 are entered then no
Offsets
valve center or mid point along the handwheel or actuator symbol will
global X, Y, Z directions. be plotted.
Offset-joint Enter weld joint offset Yes, No
Offset - Avg Enter average weld joint offset Yes, No
Offset - Max Enter maximum weld joint offset Yes, No
Weld Size Enter weld size Yes, No Sometimes referenced as Cx.
Disabled for convex "double-

welded slip-on" or "socket or fillet
weld" joint for JSME PPC only.
Socket welding type Select Flange or Fitting Yes, No
Joint SIF Grayed out except for connection type = Yes, No Selecting a joint end type updates
NS then Joint SIF can be entered. the joint SIF.
Component GUIDs Displays the GUID associated with No Only included in the input grid
Valve when the Show component guids
column in input grid option is
checked in the Grids Settings
dialog (Tools > Settings > Grids)
Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Flange Grid
Column Input Editable Comments

Field
Point Flange Point. No Non-scrollable
Nominal, in Nominal pipe diameter No The actual outside pipe diameter will be displayed if 'NS'
is selected as the nominal pipe diameter
Flange Type Select a standard flange type: Slip On, Yes If NS (nonstandard) is selected the
Weldneck, Lap Joint, Blind, Socket or user may still select a standard
NS. pressure rating from the selection list.
However the flange weight must be
entered in the Weight field.
Rating Select the pressure rating from the drop-down list of Yes Pressure ratings are dependant on the component library
ANSI, DIN or JIS ratings. AUTOPIPE, AUTODIN or AUTOJIS selected under
Tools/model options/General.
Series A/B No
Select either 'A' or 'B' Only editable in the Flange dialog (Insert > Flange)
Tag No. Enter the tag associated with the Yes

flange
Weight, lb Enter value to override library weight. Yes Weight is read from the component
library based on the flange type,
flange size and rating.
Bolt/Nut Weight Enter value to include additional Yes
weight from the bolt/nut.
Joint End Type Joint End type. Drop-down list shows: Yes Flange type with suffix = "-F" sets SIF = WN, suffix = "-
B" sets SIF = BW.
Butt Weld,Butt Weld Transition,
Weld Neck, Slip On, Socket Weld,
Socket Weld (no undercut), Lap Joint,
Threaded Joint, User-Defined.
Bolt/Nut factor Check this option to automatically Yes
calculate bolt/nut weight using the
bolt/nut weight factor in model edit
options
Concave Toggle this option ON to specify that Yes, No Only available and editable for a
the socket or fillet weld is "concave". "double-welded slip-on" and "socket
Otherwise, the socket or fillet weld or fillet weld" joint for JSME PPC
will be considered as piping code only. Toggling ON this
"convex" (default). This field is active option enables the "Weld Size" field.
for the JSME PPC code option only.

Offset-joint Enter weld joint offset Yes, No
Offset - Avg Enter average weld joint offset Yes, No
Offset - Max Enter maximum weld joint offset Yes, No
Weld Size Enter weld size Yes, No Sometimes referenced as Cx
Disabled for convex "double-welded

slip-on" or "socket or fillet weld" joint
for JSME PPC only.
Joint SIF Grayed out except for connection type Yes, No Selecting a joint end type updates the Joint SIF.
= NS then weld SIF can be entered.
Component GUIDs Displays the GUID associated with No Only included in the input grid when
that point the Show component guids column in
input grid option is checked in the
Grids Settings dialog (Tools >
Settings > Grids)
Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Flex Joint Grid


From Near (start) point No Non-Scrollable
To Far (End) point No Non-Scrollable
Nominal, in Nominal pipe diameter No The actual outside pipe diameter will be
displayed if 'NS' is selected as the
Length, ft Yes Length shown to 2 decimal places. Flex

Joint length is automatically updated in
the Point grid and vice versa.
Flanged Check box (Yes, No) Yes
Stiffnesses - Select Rigid or enter a value

Axial Stiff, lb/in Yes
Y-Shear Stiff, lb/in Yes
Z-Shear Stiff, lb/in Yes

Torsion Stiff, ft-Lb/deg Yes
Y-Bend Stiff, Ft-Lb/deg Yes
Z-Bend Stiff, Ft-Lb/deg Yes
Weight, lb Enter positive value. Yes
Pressure Area, sq in Enter positive value. Yes
Component GUIDs Displays the GUID No Only included in the input
associated with Flex grid when the Show
Joint component guids column in
input grid option is
checked in the Grids
Settings dialog (Tools >
Settings > Grids)
Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Reducer Grid

From Start point No Non-Scrollable
To End point No Non-Scrollable
Nominal Begin, in Nominal pipe diameter at the No The actual outside pipe diameter will be displayed if
beginning or 'Near' end of the
reducer
Nominal End, in Nominal pipe diameter at the No The actual outside pipe diameter will be displayed if
end or 'Far' end of the reducer
Length, ft Enter value Yes Length shown to 2 decimal places. Reducer length is
automatically updated in the Point grid and vice
versa.
Pipe-ID Begin Pipe identifier at start of the No

reducer
Pipe-ID End Pipe identifier at end of the No
reducer
With Knuckles Select or De-Select checkbox Yes Checkbox active for SPC or TBK
codes only otherwise grayed out.

Not available for Class 1.
Use SIF of 2.0 Select or De-Select checkbox Yes Checkbox active for B31.1 and
B31.8 codes only otherwise grayed
out. Not available for Class 1.
Use Maximum SIF Select or De-Select checkbox Yes Only available for Class 1.
Cone Angle , deg Enter angle between 0 and 60 Yes Editable if ’Use SIF of 2.0’ option
active and unchecked otherwise
grayed out. Default = 0.
Flare Radius Enter Large end, and Small end Yes, No Only available for Class 1.
Editable if 'Use Maximum SIF' is
unchecked.
Length of Cylindrical portion Enter Large end, and Small end Yes, No Only available for Class 1.
Editable if 'Use Maximum SIF' is
unchecked.
Weld Mismatch, inch Enter value Yes Editable if ’With knuckles" option is active and
unchecked otherwise grayed out. Default = 0. Not
available for Class 1.
Component GUIDs Displays the GUID associated No Only included in the input grid when the Show
component guids column in input grid option is
with reducer checked in the Grids Settings dialog (Tools >
Settings > Grids)
Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Beam Grid
Column Field Description Editable Comments

Beam ID Yes Enter up to 4 characters
Node I Yes
Node J Yes
From X, ft Yes X-Coordinate of Point I
From Y, ft Yes Y-Coordinate of Point I
From Z, ft Yes Z-Coordinate of Point I
Offset DX, ft Yes
Offset DY, ft Yes
Offset DZ, ft Yes
Show Checkbox Yes Checked by default

Section ID Drop down list Yes, No Non-editable for Rigid
table.
Note: Any 16 character

alpha-numeric can be
entered for a non-
standard (NS) table
name.
Section Shape Beam Section shape No
Material ID No Non-editable for Rigid
table

entered for a non-
standard material
Beta Angle, deg Yes
Offset Checkbox Yes
Rigid Length End-I, ft Yes
Rigid Length End-J, Yes
ft
Releases End-I 3 Checkboxes (Axial, Y-Y, Yes
Z-Z)
Releases End-J 3 Checkboxes (Axial, Y-Y, Yes
Z-Z)
Component GUIDs Displays the GUID No Only included in the
associated with that point input grid when the
Show component guids
column in input grid
option is checked in the
Grids Settings dialog
(Tools > Settings >
Grids)
Related Topics:
Section ID Grid
User Interface
Grids Settings
Section ID Grid
Note: Double click or right click > modify the Section ID row to modify standard section properties

Section ID Enter numeric ID (4 Yes, No Non-editable for Rigid
characters) table.

entered for a non-
standard (NS) table
name.
Type Standard or Non-Standard No
Section Shape Beam Section shape Yes, No Editable for non-
standard sections only.
NS, W-shape, channel,
Tee, angle, double
angle, Rect Tube, pipe,
solid rectangle, solid
pipe, zee, hat, double
channel.
Section Name The field shows the published Yes, No A warning will be
section name and will be displayed if an existing
editable for Non-Standard section name is re-used
section. The user can enter a for non-standard.
unique name for any non-
standard section.
Depth/OD, in Depth of Section (Outside Yes, No Editable for non-
Diameter for Pipe) standard section only.
Used for plotting only
Width, in Width of Section (Not Yes, No Editable for non-
available for Pipe) standard section only.
Thickness, in Thickness of Web for Section Yes, No Editable for non-
I, C and T sections. standard section only.
Otherwise Thickness for Pipe Used for plotting only
and tube. Disabled and blank
for solid round and solid tube
sections.
Flange thickness, in Thickness of Flange for I, C Yes, No Editable for non-
and T Sections. standard section only.
Not available for Pipe, Angle,
Tube, Solid round and solid
tube)
Spacing, in Spacing value used for Yes, No Editable for Double
double channels Angle, Double Channel,
Double Channel FR,
and Double Angle SD

only.
Axial Area, sq.in Yes, No
Y-Y Shear, sq.in Yes, No
Z-Z Shear, sq.in Yes, No
Torsion Inertia, in**4 Yes, No
Y-Y Bending, in**4 Yes, No
Z-Z Bending, in**4 Yes, No
Material Name Select from drop down Yes, No Non-editable for Rigid
list or enter a new table
name.
entered for a non-
standard material
Modulus, E6 psi Yes, No
Poisson Ratio Yes, No
Density, lb/cu.ft Yes, No
Related Topics:
Beam Grid
User Interface
Grids Settings
Imposed Displacement Grid


Point Support or Anchor point No Non-Scrollable
Restraint Restraint type No
Case Select load cases from the list Yes
e.g. GR, T1, T2… T100 etc.
Support Group No. Enter value from 1 to 20. Yes, No Editable if load case = S1..S10
Not available when
MITI, or JSME PPC
piping codes are selected

Direction (X/Z) Enter either X or Z for the Yes, No Editable if load case = S1..S10
earthquake direction Only available when MITI, or JSME
PPC (2005) piping codes are selected
Translation -X, in Enter value Yes Default value = 0.
Translation -Y, in Enter value Yes Default value = 0.
Translation -Z, in Enter value Yes Default value = 0.
Rotation-X, deg Enter value Yes Default value = 0.
Rotation-Y, deg Enter value Yes Default value = 0.
Rotation-Z, deg Enter value Yes Default value = 0.
Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Concentrated Force/Moment Grid


Point Piping point No Non-Scrollable
Case Select load cases from the list e.g. GR, T1, T2&ldots; Yes
T100 etc.
Forces -X, lb Enter value Yes Default value = 0.
Forces -Y, lb Enter value Yes Default value = 0.
Forces -Z, lb Enter value Yes Default value = 0.
Moments -X, ft-lb Enter value Yes Default value = 0.
Moments -Y, ft-lb Enter value Yes Default value = 0.
Moments -Z, ft-lb Enter value Yes Default value = 0.
Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Cut Short Grid


Case Select load cases from the list e.g. GR, T1, T2&ldots; Yes
T100 etc.
Length of Cut, inch Enter a length to be applied along the Yes
axial direction of the pipe. A cut-
long is specified by entering a
negative value.
Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Joint Type, SIF Grid


Point Piping point No Non-Scrollable
Segment Display segment name No
Joint End Type Select a Joint End type. Yes
Concave Select or De-Select checkbox. Yes, No Only available and editable for a
"double-welded slip-on" and
"socket or fillet weld" joint for
JSME PPC piping code only.
Toggling ON this option enables
the "Weld Size" field.
Weld Size Enter 0 or greater. Yes Only visible and editable for a
"double-welded slip-on" and
"socket or fillet weld" joint for
the ASME NB/NC/ND and JSME
PPC piping codes
Offset - joint Enter 0 or greater. Yes Only visible and editable for a
butt weld (BWT) with taper for
the B31.1 and B31.8 codes. It is

also visible and editable for butt
weld (BW) without taper or butt
weld (BWT) with tapered
transition for the EN13480 , SPC,
TBK, MITI, RCC-M, and JSME
PPC codes.
Offset - Avg Enter 0 or greater. Yes Only visible and editable for a
butt weld (BW) without taper for
the B31.1 and B31.8 codes.
Offset - Max Enter 0 or greater. Yes Only visible and editable for
input for a butt weld (BW)
without taper for the B31.1 and
B31.8 codes.
SIF Enter 1 or greater. Only visible and editable for
ASME NC and ND piping codes
SIF In-Plane Enter 1 or greater. Yes, No Longitudinal SIF for BS7159 and
ISO 14692
SIF Out-Plane Enter 1 or greater. Yes, No Longitudinal SIF for BS7159 and
ISO 14692
Circ. SIF In-Plane Enter 1 or greater. Yes Circumferential SIF
Visible for BS7159 only. Editable for bend points
only; blank and non-editable for all other point
types.
Circ. SIF Out-Plane Enter 1 or greater. Yes Circumferential SIF

Visible for BS7159 only. Editable for bend points
only; blank and non-editable for all other point
types.
SIF for Tee Component Enter 1 or greater Yes, No For ISO 14692 Tee points only
Override SIF Select or De-Select checkbox. Yes, No Default = unchecked
B1 Enter 0.5 or greater. Yes Only visible and editable for

ASME NB, NC and ND piping
codes
Override B1 Enable this option to use The default value will be 0.5
the B1 value specified in
grid. All other B1 values,
specified or computed, will
be ignored although they
may have a higher value.
B2 Enter 1 or greater. Yes Only visible and editable for
ASME NB, NC and ND piping
codes
Override B2 Enable this option to use the B2 value The default value will be 1.0
specified in grid. All other B2 values,
specified or computed, will be ignored
although they may have a higher value.
C1 Enter 1 or greater. Only visible and editable for
ASME NB piping code

K1 Enter 1 or greater. Only visible and editable for
ASME NB piping code
B2' Enter 1 or greater Yes, No Only visible and editable for
ASME NB, NC, and ND piping
codes, 2001 edition or later.
C2 Enter 1 or greater. Yes, No Only visible and editable for
ASME NB, NC, and ND piping
codes. For NC/ND must be 1994
or later
ASME NB piping code
C3 Enter 1 or greater. Only visible and editable for
ASME NB piping code
ASME NB piping code
C3' Enter 0.5 or greater. Only visible and editable for
ASME NB piping code
Set SIF Check this box to enable SIF In, SIF Yes ISO 14692 Only
Out, and Override SIF
Set Qualified Stress Check this box to enable Qualified Yes ISO 14692 Only
Stress and Override Qualified Stress
Qualified Stress Enter Qualified Stress Yes, No ISO 14692 Only
Override Qualified Stress Check to Override other Qualified Yes, No ISO 14692 Only
Stresses
Set Biaxial Ratio Check this box to enable Biaxial Ratio Yes ISO 14692 Only
and Override Biaxial Ratio
Biaxial Ratio Enter Biaxial Ratio Yes, No ISO 14692 Only
Override Biaxial Ratio Check to Override other Qualified Yes, No ISO 14692 Only
Stresses
Set Pressure Multiplier Check to enable Qualified Component Yes ISO 14692 Only
Check Box
Qualified Component Check this option to consider this a Yes, No ISO 14692 Only
'qualified' component.
Pressure Multiplier Enter Automatic or pressure multiplier. Yes Only Visible and editable for
BS7159 and ISO 14692
Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Added Weight Grid


Weight, lb Enter Value Yes Default value = 0.
Offset X, ft Enter Value Yes Default value = 0.

Offset Y, ft Enter Value Yes Default value = 0.
Offset Z, ft Enter Value Yes Default value = 0.
Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Thermal Anchor Movements Grid


Point Support or Anchor point No Non-Scrollable
Translation -X, in Enter value Yes Default value = 0.
Translation -Y, in Enter value Yes Default value = 0.
Translation -Z, in Enter value Yes Default value = 0.
Rotation-X, deg Enter value Yes Default value = 0.
Rotation-Y, deg Enter value Yes Default value = 0.
Rotation-Z, deg Enter value Yes Default value = 0.
Note: Displacements & rotations are shown for all load cases in separate columns e.g. GR, T1, T2&ldots; T100 etc.
Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Soil Grid

From No non-editable, grayed out
To No non-editable, grayed out
Length, ft Actual developed pipeline length. No If the length is changed in
the model then soil length
and # of soil points will
be updated automatically.
Soil ID Soil Identifier Yes Drop-down list of Soil
Identifiers - Blank = no
soil
Max. Soil Yes, No As shown in the
Spacing, inch component data listing
report. Changing the soil
spacing will
automatically update the
# soil points. Non-
editable if Soil ID =
Blank
# of Soil Points Calculated equally spaced number of No Non-editable, grayed out
soil springs on the element based on
the maximum soil spacing. As shown in component
data listing report.
Related Topics:
User Interface
Soil Point Spacing
Grids Settings
Soil ID Grid

Soil ID Soil Identifier Name Yes
Stiffness Combo Box, Soil Stiffness Yes All the stiffness
values in the grid
belong to this
selected stiffness
Pipe O.D, in Edit box, Outside diameter of pipe No
used for generating soil stiffness
Cover depth, in Edit box, Depth to pipe center line No
Auto Auto flag for transverse horizontal Yes,No Disabled for 'User'
initial soil stiffness method for soil
calculation
Horiz K1, lb/in/ft Transverse horizontal initial soil Yes
stiffness
Auto Auto flag for transverse ultimate Yes,No Disabled for 'User'
soil resistance method for soil
calculation
Horiz P1, lb/ft Transverse ultimate soil resistance Yes
Horiz K2, lb/in/ft Transverse horizontal final soil Yes
stiffness
Horiz Yld Disp.,inch Transverse horizontal yield No
displacement
Auto Auto flag for longitudinal or axial Yes,No Disabled for 'User'
initial soil stiffness method for soil
calculation
Longit K1, lb/in/ft Longitudinal or axial initial soil Yes
stiffness
Auto Auto flag for longitudinal or axial Yes,No Disabled for 'User'
ultimate soil resistance method for soil
calculation
Longit P1, lb/ft Longitudinal or axial ultimate soil Yes
resistance
Longit K2, lb/in/ft Longitudinal or axial final soil Yes
stiffness
Longit Yld Disp., inch Longitudinal or axial yield No
displacement
Auto Auto flag for vertical up initial soil Yes,No Disabled for 'User'
stiffness method for soil
calculation
Vert Up K1, lb/in/ft Vertical up initial soil stiffness Yes
Auto Auto flag for vertical up ultimate Yes,No Disabled for 'User'
soil resistance method for soil
calculation
Vert Up P1, lb/ft Vertical up ultimate soil resistance Yes

Vert Up K2, lb/in/ft Vertical up final soil stiffness Yes
Vert Up Yld Disp., inch Vertical up yield displacement No
Auto Auto flag for vertical down initial Yes,No Disabled for 'User'
soil stiffness method for soil
calculation
Vert Dn K1, lb/in/ft Vertical down initial soil stiffness Yes
Auto Auto flag for vertical down Yes,No Disabled for 'User'
ultimate soil resistance method for soil
calculation
Vert Dn P1, lb/ft Vertical down ultimate soil Yes
resistance
Vert Dn K2, lb/in/ft Vertical down final soil stiffness Yes
Vert Dn Yld Disp., inch Vertical down yield displacement No
Soil Type Combo box, soil type for SNIP data Yes Available for SNIP
only
Cs, in/sec Edit box, Seismic wave velocity Yes Available for SNIP
only
m0 Edit box, Soil restraint factor Yes Available for SNIP
only
EQ. Magnitude Edit box, earthquake magnitude Yes Available for SNIP
only
Auto Comb box, Auto Seismic Yes Available for SNIP
acceleration only
Seis. Acceleration in/s/s Edit box, Seismic acceleration Yes if Available for SNIP
not only
Auto
Seismic
acceleration
k0 Edit box, Pipeline responsibility Yes Available for SNIP
factor only
kr Edit box, Earthquake recurrence Yes Available for SNIP
factor only
T0, sec Edit box, soil period Yes Available for SNIP
only
Surface live load Combo Box, list of (*.sld) files Yes Available for B31.1-
2004 or higher piping
code year, ASME
NC/ND 2004 or
higher piping code
year only
Trench condition Combo Box, trench laying Yes Available for B31.1-
conditions 2004 or higher piping
code year, ASME
NC/ND 2004 or
higher piping code
year only
Pressure on pipe, psi Edit box, pressure on pipe due to Yes Available for B31.1-
surface load 2004 or higher piping
code year, ASME
NC/ND 2004 or
higher piping code
year only
Modulus E', psi Edit box, modulus passive soil fill Yes Available for B31.1-
reaction 2004 or higher piping
code year, ASME
NC/ND 2004 or
higher piping code
year only
kb Edit box, bending moment Yes Adams et. Al. only
coefficient kb
Available for B31.1-
code year, ASME
NC/ND 2004 or
higher piping code
year only
kx Edit box, deflection coefficient kx Yes Adams. et. Al. only

code year, ASME
NC/ND 2004 or
higher piping code
year only
DI Edit box, deflection lag factor DI Yes ASCE 2001 only

code year, ASME
NC/ND 2004 or
higher piping code
year only
Bedding K. Edit box, bedding constant K Yes ASCE 2001 only

code year, ASME
NC/ND 2004 or
higher piping code
year only
Seismic wave type Combo Box, seismic wave type Yes Available for B31.1-
code year, ASME
NC/ND 2004 or
higher piping code
year only
aw Edit box, seismic wave coefficient Yes Available for B31.1-
aw 2004 or higher piping
code year, ASME
NC/ND 2004 or
higher piping code
year only
ak Edit box, seismic wave curvature Yes Available for B31.1-
constant, ak 2004 or higher piping
code year, ASME
NC/ND 2004 or
higher piping code
year only
Seis. wave length, inch Edit box, wave length of seismic Yes Available for B31.1-
wave 2004 or higher piping
code year, ASME
NC/ND 2004 or
higher piping code
year only
Seis. wave velocity, Edit box, seismic wave velocity Yes Available for B31.1-
in/sec 2004 or higher piping
code year, ASME
NC/ND 2004 or
higher piping code
year only
PGA, in/s/s Edit box, seismic wave peak Yes Available for B31.1-
ground acceleration 2004 or higher piping
code year, ASME
NC/ND 2004 or
higher piping code
year only
PGV, in/sec Edit box, seismic wave peak Yes Available for B31.1-
ground velocity 2004 or higher piping
code year, ASME
NC/ND 2004 or
higher piping code
year only
Hint: The Soil ID grid allows the Soil Identifier name to be modified which is not permitted in the Soil properties dialog since it would create a new Soil ID name.
Related Topics:
User Interface
Soil Point Spacing
Grids Settings
Gross Discontinuity Grid
This is only available for ASME III Class 1 (subsection NB)

Point Point Name No Non-Scrollable
Select the thermal case to apply the
Thermal Case Yes Non-Scrollable
gross discontinuity stress.
Gross Enter the Gross discontinuity stress Yes Non-Scrollable
Discontinuity
Stress, psi
Note: For Tees gross discontinuity stress is only applied at the point and segment i.e. two GRD stresses are typically required to be applied at the header and branch points on different segments.
Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Out of Roundness Grid

This is only available for ASME III Class 1 (subsection NB)

Point Point Name No Non-Scrollable
Select one of the two options
Out of Roundness Type Yes Non-Scrollable
from the drop down list
(Dmax-Dmin)/t ratio Enter the non-zero out-of- Yes Non-Scrollable
roundness value for all
selected points
Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Static EQ Grid

From Name of first point No
To Name of last point No
Type Member or Point data No The data can either be
applied on a single point,
or on the member
X Enter value Yes
Y Enter value Yes
Z Enter value Yes
Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Point/Member Static Earthquake Scale Factor
Reference Point Grid


Reference ID Reference Identifier Yes
Tag No. Tag number Yes
Reference Side Upstream (before) or downstream No
(after) element
Point Point name No
Segment Displays the segment name No
Load Direction Select load direction Yes
Report Actual Check box for actual loads Yes

Loads
Load Select local or global coordinate Yes

Coordinate system
System
Report Check box for allowable loads Yes
Allowable
Loads
Force FX, lbf Enter the force in X-direction Yes
Force FY, lbf Enter the force in Y-direction Yes
Force FZ, lbf Enter the force in Z-direction Yes
Force FR, lbf Enter the force resultant Yes
Moment MX, Enter the moment in X-direction Yes

ft-lb
Moment MY, Enter the moment in Y-direction Yes

ft-lb
Moment MZ, ft- Enter the moment in Z-direction Yes

lb
Moment MR, ft- Enter the moment resultant Yes

lb
AutoPIPE Check box to include the loads at Yes

Nozzle this point when exporting loads to
AutoPIPE Nozzle
Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Hydrodynamic Data Grid


Point Point name No
Mass coefficient Enter Mass coefficient of type Yes
(Cm) 'Automatic'
Drag coefficient Enter Drag coefficient of type Yes
(Cd) 'Automatic'
Lift coefficient Enter Lift coefficient Yes
(Cl)
Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Distributed Loads Grid

The 'Distributed Loads' input grid can be used to modify and/or delete distributed loads inserted in the model.

From Start point No First point in load
distribution range
To End point No Last point in load
distribution range
ID Distributed Load Identifier No
Load Case Select the load case name to Yes

combine with
From Force X, Enter the force value in X-direction Yes

lbf from first point in range
From Force Y, Enter the force value in Y-direction Yes

From Force Z, Enter the force value in Z-direction Yes

To Force X, lbf Enter the force value in X-direction Yes

from last point in range
To Force Y, lbf Enter the force value in Y-direction Yes

To Force Z, lbf Enter the force value in Z-direction Yes

Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Rigid Options
The Rigid Options' input grid can be used to modify rigid options over a specified range.

From Start point No First point in range
To End point No Last point in range
Include Weight Checkbox Yes Select the option to
include the weight in
rigid options on the
range
Include Expansion Checkbox Yes Select the option to
include the expansion in
the rigid options on the
range
Related Topics:
User Interface
Grids Settings
Result Grids Reference

The Result Grids provide a spreadsheet interface to review the output results for the complete model as an alternative to the Result menu functions. These grids are dynamic with the graphic and vice
versa such that selecting a point in the graphic highlights the relevant row immediately in the displayed grid.
Review Code Stress Results (Result Grids)
The following result grids can be reviewed :
Displacement Global displacements and rotations

Force/Moment Global or local forces and moments
Anchor Global and local anchor forces and moments

Support Support identifier, type, load combination, both global and local forces and displacements, support stiffness, cold load, gaps, friction and global
coordinates.
Code Stresses Display of code combination, stress category, calculated and allowable stresses, bending moments and SIF's.
Frequency Display of mode number, frequency, period, participation factor (X, Y, Z), captured modal mass (X, Y, Z), and cumulative modal mass (X, Y, Z)
Mode Shapes Display of segment, point name, mode number, frequency, translation (X, Y, Z), and rotation (X, Y, Z)
Benefits:
l Interactive and synchronized with the graphical model.
l More result data can be viewed at one time.
l Can switch between displacement/anchor/forces/support/code stress/frequency/mode shape results without closing result dialog.
l Useful input data is provided with the support output results.
l More data can be shown than output report e.g. Code stress pressure & bending stresses and both global & local anchor forces.
l Hide any load combination results.
l Three(3) level sort available.
l Print any result grid.
l Ability to export data to Excel or Access.
Related Topics:
Result Grid User Interface
Result Grids Printing
User Interface
General
l The results grid is a fully interactive, modeless, and non-editable viewer for the results that have been saved earlier to an MS Access 97 MDB file. The results grid is organized into five tabs
equivalent to the interactive result menu options: Displacement, Force/Moment, Anchor, Support, and Code Stresses.
l All the cells in the result grid are read-only and cannot be edited.
l The Input Grid dialog is hidden when the result grid is open and cannot be edited.
l Results are stored to an MDB file with same filename as the model.
l To open the Result grid, select Result/ Grids. The result grid is not displayed if the Result menu options, e.g. Restraint Reaction, Support, etc. are selected.
l After opening the result grid, the F3-Text results dialog corresponding to the current tab can be displayed by toggling the F3-Text key or pressing OK in the command window. The F3-Text results
dialog will be automatically close after switching to a different tab.
l All result grid tabs are displayed even if there are no rows in the grid.
l The settings e.g. selected combinations in each grid tab should not change when changing between tabs.
l When applicable, result units shall be displayed in the column header.
l Pressing the window close icon on the title bar of the results grid or Cancel button in the Point Name (results) window closes the results grid and all other the post-processing activities.
l The Results Grid dialog will be automatically closed after selecting any menu options.
l The following View show toolbar buttons will be operational but all other toolbar icons will automatically close the Result grids dialog.
1. View Show Weight
2. View Show Concentrated Forces
3. View Show Imposed Displacement
4. View Show Valve
5. View Show Flange
6. View Show Length.
Note: In addition toggle point names and toggle point symbol toobar buttons will be operational while the Result grids dialog is open.
Any view show menu commands will reset the Result grids dialog.
Any View show option will be reset when the Result grids dialog is opened.
l Resize column width is available.

l Sort column values by double clicking column.
Result Grids Synchronization

l The current row in the grid, i.e. as indicated by an arrow in the first column of the grid, should be the same as the current point in the model, and vice-versa. Furthermore, when the current row is
outside the range of the grid, the program should automatically scroll to the current row so that it is displayed in the grid.
l The color-coded stress plot shall be always consistent with the selected code combinations in the "Combinations" panel and either ratio or stress criteria shown in the Code Stresses tab. For all other
tabs, the model shall be displayed in the default colors as defined in the color map file, AUTOPIPE.RGB.
l If the model revision number saved in the MDB file does not match the current model revision number, the program will automatically delete the MDB file. For example, changing the piping code
or output units for the model will cause the program to delete the MDB file.
l If any of the analysis revision numbers saved in the MDB file do not match the current analysis revision number or if the analysis results does not exist, the program will automatically delete the
MDB file. Hence, re-running any analyses will cause the program to delete the MDB file.
Style Format
The formatting of the result grids is controlled by the following style sheets:
l Displacement - stored in the "autopipe.diq" file.
l Force/Moment - stored in the "autopipe.fmq" file.
l Anchor - stored in the "autopipe.req" file.
l Support - stored in the "autopipe.suq" file.
l Stresses - stored in the "autopipe.st1" to "autopipe.st10" files.
For all grids, the Segment, Point, Combination and Type fields are not scrollable.
Copy/Paste Operation
Copy/Paste operation can be performed on any complete grid, one/multiple columns or selected cells within the grid. This data can be copied to another spreadsheet application such as MS Excel or MS
Access.
Combinations
Checkboxes in the right window pane allows the user to select the rows to be displayed in the grid based on the selected combinations.
Only the active combinations specified in the "Select Code Combinations" dialog or "Select Non-Code Combinations" dialog will be listed in the right window pane of the Result grids dialog.
To uncheck all the combinations click on the top combination name hold the Shift key down and click on the bottom combination name then uncheck any of the check boxes.
Sort
This option allows the user to specify the order of the rows in the grid in ascending or descending sequence using up to 3 column fields for sort criteria.
Note: Any column can be sorted by double clicking the column header.
The default order of any grid can be restored by double clicking the top of column 1.
Right Mouse Menu

The following right mouse menu options are available when right click the header of any column(s):
l Hide - Hide the selected column(s).
l Unhide - To display hidden columns, select the column to the left and in the column to the right of the hidden columns.
Grid Row Controls

The standard icons in the scroll bar of the grid dialog will be used to move up/down rows in the grid.
Move to the first row
Move to the previous row
Move to the next row
Move to the last row
Main Toolbar VCR Buttons

When the result grid is opened, the VCR buttons on the toolbar will be operational for the code stress TAB only and disabled for all other result grid TABS.
For the Code Stresses grid
Move to the row with the lowest stress ratio
Move to the row with next lowest stress ratio
Move to the row with next highest stress ratio
Move to the row with the highest stress ratio
Limitations
l Changes to the Grid properties, i.e. column width, column sort, etc., will not be saved.
l Option to move columns will not be supported.
Result Grids Printing

The Result Grids provide a print button for printing any result grid TAB. Different printing options are provided which include : print setup, page setup and header/Footer for customizing to company
standards for different projects. These options are applied to all result grids with the page setup and Header/Footer settings saved to a RESULT.GPS file.
The following printing options are listed by selecting the drop-down arrow on the Print button.
l Print Grid Ctrl + P
l Page Setup
l Header /Footer
l Fit to Page
Print Grid Ctrl + P

The following standard print windows dialog is displayed
Page Setup
The following page setup dialog is displayed including preview screen with options for margins , titles and gridlines, page order, and center orientation on the page.
These options are similar to MS Excel.
l Margins : Enter Left/Right/Top/bottom margins to control the distance of the data from the edge of the printed page. Default values will be left = 0.5", right = 0.25", Top = 075" bottom = 0.5".
l Titles and Gridlines : Print options for showing row and/or column header titles, a solid border around the grid, vertical and/or horizontal lines and no shading to be printed. Default is all options
ON except "Row Headers" and "Only Black and White" check boxes.
l Page Order: To control the order in which the data is numbered and printed when it does not fit on one page. Default is "First Rows, then columns"
l Center on Page: Center the data on the page within the margins by selecting the vertical or horizontal or both check boxes. Default is both option = OFF.
Note: The page setup margins are used in conjunction with the header/footer margins.
The "Save settings to Profile" option is non functional.
Header / Footer
The header and footer can be customized with a company's own details and formatting
Default settings are provided in RESULT.GPS as a working template below and are similar to the AutoPIPE output reports.
Standard model and project information can be read from the results MDB file using printing tokens e.g. $M, $H etc shown below.
Header:
Default Header settings are provided as follows:

1 Model Name ($M) None Company Name ($C)
2 Proj ID 1 ($H) None Date/Time stamp (#DATE#{%x, %X})
3 Proj ID 2 ($I) None Model Revision: $X
4 Prepared By: $B None Checked By: $K
l "Proj ID 1" and "Proj ID 2" are recovered from "Header 1" and "Header 2" fields in the ResultInfo table of the result MDB file.
l "Prepared By" and "Checked By" are recovered from "PreparedBy" and "CheckedBy" fields in the ResultInfo table of the result MDB file.
l "Company Name" is recovered from "CompanyName" field in the ResultInfo table of the result MDB file.
l Model Revision is recovered from "ModelRev" field in the ResultInfo table of the result MDB file.
Footer:
Default Footer settings are provided as follows:

1 AutoPIPE : program version ($V) Results: Grid Tab Name ($T) Page # / Total # Pages (#P/#N)
l Distance to Frame : Distance of header and footer titles to the grid border.
l Page Numbering : Enter Auto or first page No.
l Font button : Change format of the header and footer Font.
Printing Tokens
l The Page Setup and Header/Footer settings are saved as a binary GPS file named RESULT.GPS. A default RESULT.GPS file is provided in the program directory. After accepting the Page Setup
dialog or the Header/Footer dialog, the printing options are automatically saved to the RESULT.GPS file. To initialize these two dialogs, the program will first check for the GPS file in the current
folder. If the GPS file is not found in the current folder (and the current folder is not the program folder), then the program will look for the GPS file in the program folder. If not found the program
will read the print settings from the style sheet files.
l The GPS file will always be saved to the folder in which the current model is located. If the GPS file is not found in the current and program folders, then default values from the style sheets will
be used and saved to the current folder. This can provide unique printing settings stored in different GPS files for different projects.
l The information matching the tokens shown in the header and footer are recovered from the ResultInfo table in the result MDB file.
Fit to Page:
This toggle option enables the complete grid to be scaled to fill the page width and use as much data as possible. This option is ON by default.
Note: This option adjusts the printed page to fit all the columns on the page.
Related Topics:
Results Grid Overview
Results Grid User Interface
Printing Tokens
Displacement Grid
The Displacement Grid retrieves its values from the Displacement Table in the MDB file. For the format, it uses the style sheet defined in the "autopipe.diq" file.
Field Description MDB Field Comments

Seg Segment name Segment Fix
Point Point name Point Fix, merge
Comb Load combination name Combination Fix
DX Translation in the global X direction DX
DY Translation in the global Y direction DY
DZ Translation in the global Z direction DZ
DR Resultant translation DR
RX Rotation about the global X direction RX
RY Rotation about the global Y direction RY
RZ Rotation about the global Z direction RZ
RR Resultant rotation RR
l Fix: No scrolling allowed for the specified columns.
l Merge: Rows with the same value are merged into one block with the value centered vertically in the block.
Related Topics:

Anchor Grid
The Anchor Grid retrieves its values from the Restraint Table in the MDB file. For the format, it uses the style sheet defined in the "autopipe.req" file.

TagNo Anchor tag up to 36 characters TagNo Fix
Nominal Nominal pipe size Nominal
GlobalFX Force acting on the anchor in the global X GlobalFX
direction
GlobalFY Force acting on the anchor in the global Y GlobalFY
direction
GlobalFZ Force acting on the anchor in the global Z GlobalFZ
direction
GlobalRF Resultant force acting on the anchor GlobalRF
GlobalMX Moment acting on the anchor about the global GlobalMX
X direction
GlobalMY Moment acting on the anchor about the global GlobalMY
Y direction
GlobalMZ Moment acting on the anchor about the global GlobalMZ
Z direction
GlobalRM Resultant moment acting on the anchor GlobalRM
LocalFX Force acting on the anchor in the local X LocalFX
direction
LocalFY Force acting on the anchor in the local Y LocalFY
direction
LocalFZ Force acting on the anchor in the local Z LocalFZ
direction
LocalMX Moment acting on the anchor about the local X LocalMX
direction
LocalMY Moment acting on the anchor about the local Y LocalMY
direction
LocalMZ Moment acting on the anchor about the local Z LocalMZ

direction
Related Topics:
Local Pipe Forces and Moments

Force/Moment Grid
The Force/Moment Grid retrieves its values from the ForceMoment Table in the MDB file. For the format, it uses the style sheet defined in the "autopipe.fmq" file.
Description MDB Field Comments

Field
Comb Load Combination name Combination Fix
FX Force acting on the pipe cross section in the FX
global X direction
FY Force acting on the pipe cross section in the FY
global Y direction
FZ Force acting on the pipe cross section in the FZ
global Z direction
FR Resultant force acting on the pipe cross section FR
MX Moment acting on the pipe cross section about MX
the global X direction
MY Moment acting on the pipe cross section about MY
the global Y direction
MZ Moment acting on the pipe cross section about MZ
the global Z direction
MR Resultant moment acting on the pipe cross MR
section
Related Topics:

Support Grid
The Support Grid retrieves its values from the Support Table in the MDB file. For the format, it uses the style sheet defined in the "autopipe.suq" file.

ID Support ID Name Fix, merge
TagNo
Support tag up to 36 characters TagNo Fix
Type Support type Type Fix, merge
Nominal Nominal pipe size Nominal
GlobalFX Force acting on the support in the global X GlobalFX
direction
GlobalFY Force acting on the support in the global Y GlobalFY
direction
GlobalFZ Force acting on the support in the global Z GlobalFZ
direction
GlobalFR Resultant force acting on the support GlobalFR
GlobalDX Support deformation in the global X direction GlobalDX
GlobalDY Support deformation in the global Y direction GlobalDY
GlobalDZ Support deformation in the global Z direction GlobalDZ
GlobalDR Resultant support deformation GlobalDR
LocalDir1 Local direction LocalXLabel
Forc1 Force acting on the support in the local LocalFX
direction (LocalDir1)
Disp1 Support deformation in the local direction LocalDX
(LocalDir1)
Gap1 Gap size in the local direction (LocalDir1) GapX
LocalDir2 Local direction LocalYLabel
Forc2 Force acting on the support in the local LocalFY
Disp2 Support deformation in the local direction LocalDY
(LocalDir3)
Gap2 Gap size in the local direction (LocalDir2) GapY
LocalDir3 Local direction LocalZLabel
Forc3 Force acting on the support in the local LocalFZ
Disp3 Support deformation in the local direction LocalDZ

(LocalDir3)
Gap3 Gap size in the local direction (LocalDir2) GapZ
Rate/Stiff Support spring stiffness Stiffness
Friction Support friction Friction
Cold load Cold load (spring hanger only) ColdLoad
CoordX X-coordinate of support location CoordX
CoordY Y-coordinate of support location CoordY
CoordZ Z-coordinate of support location CoordZ
l For guides on vertical legs (Y vertical ) segment direction = DOWN then dialog support gaps mapping to grid as follows: Gap down = Global -Z, Gap up = Global +Z, Gap right = Global -X, Gap
left = Global +X.
For guides on vertical legs (Y vertical ) segment direction = UP then dialog support gaps mapping to grid as follows: Gap down = Global -Z, Gap up = Global +Z, Gap right = Global +X, Gap left
= Global -X.
Also see help topic Support Forces for Guides and Line Stops without Gaps
Related Topics:
Local Pipe Forces and Moments
Code Stress Grid

The piping code stress grid can display results for all piping codes in the following groups of common data:
Group 1 = ASME B31.1 (1967), B31.3, B31.4, DNV, SNCT, CSA-Z662, BS 806, EN13480 (2-SIF)
Group 2 = ASME B31.1, ASME B31.1 (1992), RCC-M, Stoomwezen, SPC, TBK, MITI, EN13480 (1-SIF), ASME ND (S 1982)
Group 4 = KHK 1, KHK 2
Group 5 = BS 7159
Group 6 = General Piping Code
Group 7 = CSA Z662 Offshore Code
Group 8 = B31.8, B31.4 Offshore Code
Group 9 = B31.8 Offshore Code
Group 10 = JSME PPC (2005)
Group 10 = JSME PPC (2008)
Group 11 = ASME NB/NC/ND
The code stress Grid retrieves its values from the Stress Table in the MDB file.
Combinations
In addition to displaying the selected combinations in the Code Stresses grid, the system plot will also be color-coded based on the selected combinations only.
Plot:
Selecting either "Ratio" or "Stress" changes the criteria for the color-coded system plot.
l Ratio: Displays the ratio of the computed stress to the code allowable (default).
l Stress: Displays the computed stress value for the specified code.
Note: The MDB file is derived from one of three template files - Tempres4.mdb, Tempres5.mdb, or Tempres6.mdb. The difference between these MDB files is the field definitions for the Stress Table
corresponding to three groups of piping codes. Tempres4.mdb will be used for all piping codes except BS 7159 and the General piping codes. Tempres5.mdb will be used for the BS 7159 piping code
only. Tempres6.mdb will be used for the General piping code only.
The Code Stresses Grid is formatted based on one of nine different style sheet files depending on the piping code - "autopipe.st1", to "autopipe.st10". The different style sheets are required because of
code dependent column titles and copied to the working code style sheet "autopipe.stq".
Related Topics:

Frequency Grid
The Frequency Grid retrieves its values from the Frequencies Table in the MDB file. For the format, it uses the style sheet defined in the "autopipe.frq" file.

Mode Mode number ModeNumber Fix
Number
Freq Frequency (in Hertz) FreqHertz Fix
Period Period (in sec) Period Fix

Perticip. Participation Factor (along X) PX
Factor X
Particip. Participation Factor (along Y) PY
Factor Y
Particip. Participation Factor (along Z) PZ
Factor Z
Capt. Modal Captured Modal Mass (Along X) CX
Mass X
Capt. Modal Captured Modal Mass (Along Y) CY
Mass Y
Capt. Modal Captured Modal Mass (Along Z) CZ
Mass Z
Capt. Percent Average PA
Average
Mass
Cumu. Cumulative Modal Mass (Along X) CMX
Modal Mass
X
Cumu. Cumulative Modal Mass (Along Y) CMY
Modal Mass
Y
Cumu. Cumulative Modal Mass (Along Z) CMZ
Modal Mass
Z
Cumu. Cumulative Average Mass CMA
Average
Mass
Note: Sorting is disabled on the Frequency result grid, since it would make the cumulative mass fields invalid, as they are computed when writing the results to *.MDB and are not recomputed during a
sort.
Related Topics:

Mode Shape Grid

The Mode Shape Grid retrieves its values from the ModeShapes Table in the MDB file. For the format, it uses the style sheet defined in the "autopipe.msq" file.
Seg Segment name Seg Fix

Point Point name Point Fix, Merge
Mode Mode number Mode Fix
Freq (Hertz) Frequency (in Hertz) FreqHertz Fix
X Translation (Along X) TX
Y Translation (Along Y) TY
Z Translation (Along Z) TZ
RX Rotation (Along X) RX
RY Rotation (Along Y) RY
RZ Rotation (Along Z) RZ
Related Topics:

The input and results grid data is stored in an MS Access 2002 - 2003 and 97 database MDB file respectively.
Input Grid
The input grid data is stored in an MS Access 2002 - 2003 database MDB file. The MDB file is organized into several database tables equivalent to the input grid Tabs of Press/Temp/PipeID, Pipe
Properties, Segment, Point, etc. An additional database table called Model Information stores general model information, company name, AutoPIPE edition and version, and model revision information.
To enable the user to save a "snap shot" of the current model inputs to a specified filename with file extension "MDB", a new option "Input Database (*.mdb)" has been added to the File > Export menu.
When this command is executed, the input data shall be written to the MDB file. The default file name in the Save As dialog shall be the current model name. The program shall automatically append the
file extension "_INPUT" to the filename after accepting the dialog. Saving the inputs to a different directory from the current directory should not change the current directory. The created MDB file will
always replace the current model MDB file (in the current directory), if the names are the same, to avoid creating the MDB inputs multiple times.
Result Grid
The results grid data is stored in an MS Access 97 database MDB file. The MDB file is organized into six database tables equivalent to the result grid Tabs of Displacement, Force/Moment, Anchor,
Support, and Code Stresses. An additional database table called Result Info stores company name, piping code and revision information.
To enable the user to save a "snap shot" of the current model results to a specified filename with file extension "MDB", an option "Results Database(*.mdb)" has been added to the File > Export menu.
When this command is executed, the result data for all five results types shall be written to the MDB file. Furthermore, the newly created MDB file shall replace the current model MDB file to avoid
creating the MDB results multiple times. The default file name in the Save Results dialog shall be the current model name. The program shall automatically append the file extension "MDB" to the
filename after accepting the dialog. Saving the results to a different directory from the current directory should not change the current directory.
Note: Saving the results to the current model name in the current directory is not recommended since the program dynamically updates the results in the MDB file with the current model name.
Result Info
Displacement
Force/Moment
Anchor
Support
Code Stresses
Frequency
Mode Shape
Related Topics:
Input Grid Overview
Input Grid User Interface

Result Info Table

This database table called ResultInfo stores company name, piping code and revision information.
Field Description Type Comments

ModelName Model name String[48]
Header1 First line of model title String[40]
Header2 Second line of model title String[40]
Code Piping code String[8]
ModelRev Model revision number Integer
Static Static analysis revision number String[20]
Modal Modal analysis revision number String[20]
Response Response spectrum revision number String[20]
Harmonic Harmonic analysis revision number String[20]
Sam SAM analysis revision number String[20]
Force Force spectrum analysis revision number String[20]
Time Time history analysis revision number String[20]
CompanyName Company name String[36]
ProgramVersion Program version String[12]
PreparedBy Prepared by String[16]
CheckedBy Checked by String[16]
Related Topics:

Displacement Table
This database table called Displacement stores displacement results for each non-code combination.

Internal1 Internal hash value 1 Integer
PointOrder Point order Integer
CombinationOrder Combination order Integer
SoilPointOrder Secondary node order Integer
Segment Segment name String[2]
Point Point name String[9]
Combination Load combination name String[24]
DX Translation in the global X direction Float
DY Translation in the global Y direction Float
DZ Translation in the global Z direction Float
DR Resultant translation Float
RX Rotation about the global X direction Float
RY Rotation about the global Y direction Float
RZ Rotation about the global Z direction Float
RR Resultant rotation Float
Related Topics:

Force and Moment Table
This database table called ForceMoment stores force and moment results for each non-code combination.

PlusSideOrder Plus or minus side order (1 = near, 2 = far) Integer
SoilPointOrder Secondary node order Integer
Combination Load Combination name String[24]
FX Force acting on the pipe cross section in the Float
global X direction
FY Force acting on the pipe cross section in the Float
global Y direction
FZ Force acting on the pipe cross section in the Float
global Z direction
FR Resultant force acting on the pipe cross Float
section
MX Moment acting on the pipe cross section Float
about the global X direction
MY Moment acting on the pipe cross section Float
about the global Y direction
MZ Moment acting on the pipe cross section Float
about the global Z direction
MR Resultant moment acting on the pipe cross Float
section
Related Topics:

Anchor Table
This database table called Restraint stores anchor results for each non-code combination.

IRF Reference direction (not used) Integer
Type Restraint type (not used) String[9]
Tag Tag number String[36]
Nominal Nominal pipe size Float
GlobalFX Force acting on the anchor in the global X Float
direction
GlobalFY Force acting on the anchor in the global Y Float
direction
GlobalFZ Force acting on the anchor in the global Z Float
direction
GlobalRF Resultant force acting on the anchor Float
GlobalMX Moment acting on the anchor about the Float
global X direction
GlobalMY Moment acting on the anchor about the Float
global Y direction
GlobalMZ Moment acting on the anchor about the Float
global Z direction
GlobalRM Resultant moment acting on the anchor Float
LocalFX Force acting on the anchor in the local X Float
direction
LocalFY Force acting on the anchor in the local Y Float
direction
LocalFZ Force acting on the anchor in the local Z Float
direction
LocalMX Moment acting on the anchor about the local Float
X direction
LocalMY Moment acting on the anchor about the local Float
Y direction
LocalMZ Moment acting on the anchor about the local Float
Z direction
Related Topics:

Support Table
This database table called Support stores support results for each non-code combination.

Name Support name String[6]
Tag Tag number String[36]
Type Support type String[8]
Nominal Nominal pipe size Float
GlobalFX Force acting on the support in the global X Float
direction
GlobalFY Force acting on the support in the global Y Float
direction
GlobalFZ Force acting on the support in the global Z Float
direction
GlobalFR Resultant force acting on the support Float
GlobalDX Support deformation in the global X Float
direction
GlobalDY Support deformation in the global Y Float
direction
GlobalDZ Support deformation in the global Z Float
direction
GlobalDR Resultant support deformation Float
LocalXLabel Local direction String[4]
LocalFX Force acting on the support in the local Float
LocalDX Support deformation in the local direction Float
(LocalDir1)
GapX Gap size in the local direction (LocalDir1) Float
LocalYLabel Local direction String[4]
LocalFY Force acting on the support in the local Float
LocalDY Support deformation in the local direction Float
(LocalDir3)
GapY Gap size in the local direction (LocalDir2) Float
LocalZLabel Local direction String[4]
LocalFZ Force acting on the support in the local Float
LocalDZ Support deformation in the local direction Float

(LocalDir3)
GapZ Gap size in the local direction (LocalDir2) Float
Stiffness Support spring stiffness Float
Friction Support friction Float
ColdLoad Cold Load (spring hanger only) Float
CoordX X-coordinate of support location Float
CoordY Y-coordinate of support location Float
CoordZ Z-coordinate of support location Float
Related Topics:

Code Stress Database Tables

This database table called Stress stores piping code stress results for each code combination organised in
the following groups of common data:
Group 1 = All piping codes except BS 7159 and General
Group 2 = BS7159 piping code.
Group 3 = General and B31.4 and B31.8 Offshore Piping Codes.
Related Topics:
MDB Definition Overview

Frequency Table
This database table called Frequencies stores frequency results for each non-code combination.

ModeNumber Mode Number Integer
FreqHertz Frequency (Hertz) Float
Period Period Float
PX Participation Factor (along X) Float
PY Participation Factor (along Y) Float
PZ Participation Factor (along Z) Float
CX Captured Modal Mass (along X) Float
CY Captured Modal Mass (along Y) Float
CZ Captured Modal Mass (along Z) Float
PA Captured Modal Mass Percent Average Float
CMX Cumulative Modal Mass (along X) Float
CMY Cumulative Modal Mass (along Y) Float
CMZ Cumulative Modal Mass (along Z) Float
CMA Cumulative Average Mass Float
Related Topics:

Mode Shape Table

This database table called ModeShapes stores mode shape results for each non-code combination.

Mode Mode Number Integer
Segment Segment Name String[2]

Point Point Name String[9]
FreqHertz Frequency (Hertz) Float
TX Translation (along X) Float
TY Translation (along Y) Float
TZ Translation (along Z) Float
RX Rotations (along X) Float
RY Rotations (along Y) Float
RZ Rotations (along Z) Float
Related Topics:

Batch Input Reference

AutoPIPE provides a comprehensive, keyword-oriented input format that allows users to specify the geometry of a piping system in ASCII text files. Models can be created outside AutoPIPE using a text
editor, then imported into AutoPIPE. Similarly, existing AutoPIPE models can be written as text files which can be read into other programs or modified and brought back into AutoPIPE. The batch input
format also includes directives for AutoPIPE that can automatically execute analysis and produce reports. This chapter describes the keywords and format that is used to produce batch input files.
The File/Open - Batch option in AutoPIPE reads the ASCII text file and generates an AutoPIPE database. Similarly, the File/Save As - Batch command generates an ASCII file in the batch input file format.
The extension of both files must be NTL.
The file name must adhere to standard Windows file naming conventions.
Note: It should be noted that the Automated System Processing approach can be used with Batch Input files so that AutoPIPE need not be entered manually.
Select from the following list of Batch Input topics:
Editing a Batch Input File
Reading the Card Format Table
Command Card Reference
Sample Batch Input File Listing

Editing a Batch Input File

The general form of a batch input file is designed for ease of input and readability. The first three input lines, or cards are used to input control data, such as the job title, input and output unit file names,
piping code, and so forth. Subsequent cards describe the system model, and these are followed by the load and analysis cards. The first MODEL card is SEG which indicates the first point of a new pipe
segment. This card should be followed by the PIPE card. All other data may be entered as it is encountered in the piping system. However, if a card is given which refers to a specific point, this card must
be entered after the point to which it refers has been defined.
A few of the cards require more than one line of input (including, but not limited to, PIPE, HED and FLEX). For all such cards, the additional lines of input are keyed by an asterisk (*) in column #5. The
asterisk tells the program that the current line is a continuation of the previous line. If the asterisk is used, columns #1 through #4 must be left blank. Conversely, if a card command identifier (e.g. SEG,
PIPE, or RUN) is entered in the first four columns, column #5 must be left blank.
The sample batch file shows the general order of the card commands as well as their format and use. What follows in the next few sections is a description of each card used in interpreting or creating a
batch input file. Included in each description is a list of all parameters associated with any given card. Also given for each card is a table showing the column number range within which the parameters
must be entered.
The English, Metric, and SI units for each parameter are designated by E, M, and S respectively. The units described in the following sections are the defaults as supplied on the program distribution
diskettes for the .UNT files with the same name. If the user creates his or her own unit file (see the CTL card description), the active units will be those defined in the specific unit file. Refer to the Unit
Files section of this help file for more information.
Reading the Card Format Table

The batch input file is an ASCII text file, where cards are organized on one (1) or more lines. In addition, variables associated with each line of a card are located in specific blocks of columns. Therefore,
a tabular format has been developed for the listings of proper variable position as illustrated in the sample batch file.
The purpose of each table row is identified to the left of the first column. A number indicates the line number for the current card. A block of three rows, each beginning with the letters E, M or S indicate
the units which are expected for the variable defined in the numbered row directly above. These letters correspond to the unit files (*.UNT) as follows:
l E: ENGLISH.UNT
l M: METRIC.UNT
l S: SI.UNT
The specific units shown in each table are the default units for each unit file as supplied on the program diskettes. Beware, since these files can be modified by any user. Refer to the Unit Files section of
this help file for more information.
Above the first row are the position numbers from 1 to 80, for the starting character position of the variable described within the vertical lines of each column. Thus, a matrix is formed where each
variable is contained in its own cell.
Sample Batch Input File Listing

The following text is a listing of the batch input file created by executing the File/Save As AutoPIPE batch (*.ntl) command on the TUTOR1 model created in the
AutoPIPE tutorial (refer to Chapter 3 of the Getting Started manual).
JOB EDA
HED AUTOPIPE WALK THROUGH EXAMPLE
CTL B31.3 Y1 70.00 ENGLISH ENGLISH AUTOPIPE AUTOB313
***
SEG A00 0.00 0.00 0.00
PIPE 8SCH40 8.000 S40 0.125
*CS 16000.000 0.2950E+020.0000E+00 489.000 0.2950E+02
* 2.0000 11.0000 1.0000
* 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000
ANC R 000000
TEMP A00 450.000 14500.000
* 0.2823E+02
PRES A00 300.000
BEND A01 0.00 0.00 -4.67 L
RUN A02 0.00 2.50 0.00
VALV A03 0.00 1.50 0.00 300 552.00 5.10
BEND A04 0.00 3.33 0.00 L
RUN A05 -3.50 0.00 0.00
TEE A05 W
BEND A06 -3.50 0.00 0.00 L
RUN A07 0.00 -3.33 0.00
VALV A08 0.00 -1.50 0.00 WN 300 552.00 5.10
BEND A09 0.00 -2.50 0.00 L
RUN A10 0.00 0.00 4.67
ANC A10 R 000000
***
SEG A05 -3.50 7.33 -4.67
RUN B01 0.00 0.00 -1.00
SPRG B01 N0 340.000 192.000
RUN B02 0.00 0.00 -3.33
FLA B02 NS 300 BW 73.00
BEND B03 0.00 0.00 -2.33 L
RUN B04 0.00 3.33 0.00
ANC B04 R 000000
*** NOTE: ALL SUPPORT NAMES GENERATED BY TRANSLATOR
***
***
WIND 1 WIND1 1.000000 0.000000 0.000000 1.0000 N
WPRS USER WIND1 -99999.00 30.000
SEIS 1 1.0000 0.0000 1.0000
MODE 6 0 33.000
SPEC F/A E1 1 0.0000
* 1.0000 1.0000
SPEC F/A E2 1 0.0000
* 1.0000 1.0000 2.0000 2.0000
SPEC F/A E3 1 0.0000
* 2.0000 2.0000 3.0000 3.0000
SPEC F/D NRCV05 2 0.5000
* 0.1000 75.0000 0.2500 75.0000 4.0000 4.0000
* 9.0000 0.6000 35.0000 0.0100
SPEC F/D NRCH05 2 0.5000
* 0.1000 120.0000 0.2500 120.0000 2.5000 10.0000
* 9.0000 0.6000 35.0000 0.0100
SPEC F/D NRCV05 2 0.5000
* 0.1000 75.0000 0.2500 75.0000 4.0000 4.0000
* 9.0000 0.6000 35.0000 0.0100
RESP S E1 1.0000
***
*** END OF FILE

This section provides a reference to the command cards formats available in AutoPIPE. Select a card from the alphabetical listing below for more information on the use of that card.
Click here to sort this list by function.
*** - Comments
ANC - Anchor
BEAM - Beam Member
BEND - Bend (Tangent Intersection) Point
BNAM - Rename Bend Points
BPOP - Buried Pipe Options
BSEF - Beam Member Static Earthquake Scale Factor
BUOY - Buoyancy Load Conditions
COMB - Load Combination
COMP - Rotating Equipment, Compressor
CONS - Constant Force Hanger Support
CTL - Control Data
CUT - Cut Short
DAMP - Vibration Damper (Snubber) Support
DESC - Model Description
DISP - Support Displacement
DIST - Distributed Load
DSGN - Design Pressure & Temperature
FLA - Pipe Flange
FLAA - Flange Analysis
FLEX - Flexible Joint
FOR - Concentrated Force/Moment
FSPC - Force Spectrum Load Case
GLOB - Global Coordinates
GUID - Guide Support
GRDS - Gross Discontinuity Stress
HARM - Harmonic Load Case
HED - Project ID
HLOD - Harmonic Load Data Set
HYDR - Hydrodynamic Factors
HYDT - Hydrotest Load Case Definition
INCL - Inclined Support
JOB - Job Description
JSIF - Joint Type User SIF
LFAC- Load Factors
LINE - Line Stop Support
LOCL - Local Coordinates
MATL - Beam Member Nonstandard Material
MINP - Model Input List Report Sub-report Types
MODE - Modal Analysis Options
MSEF - Pipe Member Static Earthquake Scale Factor
MSRS - Multiple Support Response Spectrum
NODE - Beam Member Node Point
NOZL - Vessel Nozzle
OPER - Operating Loads
PIPE - Pipe Data
PRES - Pressure Load Data
PRIN - Batch Report Options
PSEF - Pipe Member Static Earthquake Scale Factor
PUMP - Rotating Equipment, Pump
RED - Reducer
REFP - Reference Data Point
RESP - Response Spectrum Load Case
RIGD - Rigid Options
ROTA - Rotational Restraint Support
RSTF - Rigid Stiffness Factor
RUN - Run Point
RVER - Change NTL Version
SECT - Beam Member Nonstandard Cross Section
SEG - Pipe Segment
SEIS - Static Earthquake Load Case
SIF - Stress Intensification Factor
SLEV - Seismic Level
SOBL - Soil overburden loads
SOIL - Buried Pipe
SOLV - ALL: Analyze for All Defined Load Cases
SOLV - Execute An AutoPIPE Analysis
SOLV - FSPC: Force Spectrum Analysis
SOLV - HANG: Hanger Design Run
SOLV - HARM: Harmonic Analysis
SOLV - MODE: Modal Analysis
SOLV - RESP: Response Spectrum Analysis
SOLV - SAM: Seismic Anchor Movements
SOLV - STAT: Static Analysis
SPA1 - Soil parameters 1
SPEC - Spectrum Data
SPRG - Spring Hanger Support
SWAV - Seismic wave loads data
TBOW - Thermal bowing
TEE - Tee Connection
TEMP - Temperature Load Data
THST - Time History Load Case
TIE - Tie/link Support
TURB - Rotating Equipment, Turbine
UROT - User-defined Rotating Equipment
UUID - Universally Unique Identifier
VALV - Valve
VSTP - V-Stop Support
WAVE - Wave Loading
WELD - Weld Efficiency Factor
WGT - Concentrated Weight
WIND - Static Wind Load Case
WPRS - ANSI: Static Wind Load Per ASCE-98
WPRS - Static Wind Load Parameters
WPRS - UBC: Static Wind Load Per UBC-97
WPRS - USER: Static Wind Load Profile

The following is a list of Batch Input cards arranged by function.
Click here to sort this list alphabetically.
Control Cards Solve Cards

*** - Comments BUOY - Buoyancy Load Conditions
CTL - Control Data FSPC - Force Spectrum Load Case
DESC - Model Description HARM - Harmonic Load Case
HED - Project ID HLOD - Harmonic Load Data Set
JOB - Job Description HYDT - Hydrotest Load Case Definition
Model Cards MSRS - Multiple Support Response Spectrum
ANC - Anchor RESP - Response Spectrum Load Case
BEAM - Beam Member SEIS - Static Earthquake Load Case
BEND - Bend (Tangent Intersection) Point SOLV - Execute An AutoPIPE Analysis
BPOP - Buried Pipe Options SOLV - ALL: Analyze for All Defined Load
Cases
BSEF - Beam Member Static Earthquake Scale
Factor
CONS - Constant Force Hanger Support SOLV - FSPC: Force Spectrum Analysis
CUT - Cut Short SOLV - HANG: Hanger Design Run
DAMP - Vibration Damper (Snubber) Support SOLV - HARM: Harmonic Analysis
DISP - Support Displacement SOLV - MODE: Modal Analysis
DIST - Distributed Load SOLV - RESP: Response Spectrum Analysis
FLA - Pipe Flange SOLV - SAM: Seismic Anchor Movements
FLAA - Flange Analysis SOLV - STAT: Static Analysis
FLEX - Flexible Joint SPEC - Spectrum Data
FOR - Concentrated Force/Moment WAVE - Wave Loading
GLOB - Global Coordinates WIND - Static Wind Load Case
GUID - Guide Support WPRS - ANSI: Static Wind Load Per ASCE-98
HYDR - Hydrodynamic Factors WPRS - Static Wind Load Parameters
INCL - Inclined Support WPRS - UBC: Static Wind Load Per UBC-97
LFAC- Load Factors

LINE - Line Stop Support WPRS - USER: Static Wind Load Profile

MINP - Model Input List Report Sub-report
Types
MSEF - Pipe Member Static Earthquake Scale Result Cards
Factor
NODE - Beam Member Node Point COMB - Load Combination
NOZL - Vessel Nozzle COMP - Rotating Equipment, Compressor
OPER - Operating Loads PRIN - Batch Report Options
PIPE - Pipe Data PUMP - Rotating Equipment, Pump
PRES - Pressure Load Data SLEV - Seismic Level
PSEF - Pipe Member Static Earthquake Scale TURB - Rotating Equipment, Turbine
Factor
RED - Reducer UROT - User-defined Rotating Equipment
RUN - Run Point
SECT - Beam Member Nonstandard Cross
Section
SEG - Pipe Segment
SOBL - Soil overburden loads
SOIL - Buried Pipe
SWAV - Seismic wave loads data

VALV - Valve
ANC - Anchor
image\ebd_36.gif
Description
This card is used to define an anchor at an existing point. It may be entered any time after the point has been defined. For most anchors, the type will be rigid. AutoPIPE assumes a translational stiffness of
10 lb/in and 10 in×lb/rad rotational stiffness for a rigid anchor. No data other than the anchor type need be given for a rigid anchor. However, for a flexible anchor, the stiffness values must also be
given.
POINT 1-5 character name of point. The fifth character must be either N, F, M, or blank for near, far and midpoints of a bend and for a normal run point (respectively).
BLANK: If no name is given, the immediately preceding point is assumed.

TYP Anchor type. Valid entries are R = Rigid; F = Flexible (If R is entered, the stiffness data is not needed).
BLANK: Default is R.
REL Anchor releases for hanger selection in the X, Y, Z, XX, YY and ZZ directions respectively.
1 = Released
0 = Fixed
Thus, enter 001001 to release Z and ZZ directions only.
BLANK: Default is fixed (000000).

K-X Translational stiffness in X-direction.
K-Y Translational stiffness in Y-direction.
K-Z Translational stiffness in Z-direction.
K-XX Rotational stiffness in X-direction.
K-YY Rotational stiffness in Y-direction.
K-ZZ Rotational stiffness in Z-direction.
BLANK: All translation, and rotation stiffnesses default to rigid.
TAG
Batch NO.
Input 1-36 character tag number. A blank is valid if the tag number is not required.
Reference
BEAM - Beam Member Nonstandard Cross Section
1 6 14 22 30 35 51 57 63 71 76
1BEAM NAME FROM TO SECID SECNAME BETA RIGI RIGJ RELI RELJ
E deg ft ft
M deg mm mm
S deg mm mm
Description
This card is used to define a structural beam member. Previously defined end points, the material, and section type must be given. The section and material may be either standard or nonstandard.
However, if a nonstandard material or section is used, it must have been previously defined on a MATL and/or SECT card.
NAME 1-7 character name of the beam. May not be left blank.
FROM 1-5 character name of the point at end I. This point must have been previously defined using the NODE card or it must be a predefined piping system point. If the latter, it will be assumed
the beam is fully welded to the point. May not be left blank.
TO 1-5 character name of the point at end J. This point must have been previously defined using the NODE card or it must be a predefined piping system point. May not be left blank.
SECID Section ID, numeric (1-9999) left justified
First 15 characters of Section Name, not read, for info only. This is entered in SECT card
SECNAME
BETA Local coordinate system orientation angle relative to the global system.
RIGI Rigid length offset at end I.
RIGJ Rigid length offset at end J.
BLANK: Default for BETA, RIGI, and RIGJ is 0
RELI End release condition code at end I for Axial, Minor Bending, and MajorBending respectively (e.g. 001 = release Major Bending only).
1 = Released
0 = Fixed
BLANK: Default is fixed (000).
RELJ
Batch End release condition at end J. Same as for RELI.
Input Reference
1 5 6 11 16 21 31 41 51 61 71
1 BEND POINT TYPE CUTS DX DY DZ RAD MDPT FLEX
E ft ft ft in %
M mm mm mm mm %
S mm mm mm mm %
1 5 6 9 11 16 21 31 41 51 61 71
2 * QUCM BXT QS BXRT
E psi
M Kg/cm^2
S N/mm^2
Description
This card is used to enter the coordinates of a bend tangent intersection point (TIP). It may be entered anytime after the first SEG card has been given. Like the RUN card, the coordinates are actually
offsets from the previous point along the same run of pipe. A radius value is also required. This may be an actual value or an integer factor of the nominal pipe size.
POINT 1-4 character name of point (may not be left blank).

TYPE Type of bend. Valid options are (except for ISO
14692):
E = Elbow
C = Close Miter
W = Wide Miter
P = Pulled Bend
S = Smooth (for ISO 14692 only)
M = Miter (for ISO 14692 only)
BLANK: Default is E. For ISO 14692, default is S.
CUTS Number of miter cuts (only needed for TYPE = C)
BLANK: Default is 1.
DX Distance from the previous point to this TIP along the
X-direction.
DY Distance from the previous point to this TIP along the
Y-direction.
DZ Distance from the previous point to this TIP along the
Z-direction.
BLANK: Default for DX, DY, and DZ is 0.
RAD Radius of bend. The following are valid entries:
S 1.0 x nominal pipe diameter
L 1.5 x nominal pipe diameter
nD n x nominal diameter (where n is an integer, i.e. enter
5D). or enter the actual radius value.
BLANK: Default is L.
MDPT Percentage around bend from near to far tangent point
where an additional point is located. This midpoint is
automatically named by appending M to the TIP name.
FLEX Flexibility factor for bends used to calculate bend
stiffness.
BLANK: Default is Automatic. AutoPIPE will

automatically calculate the bend stiffness during
analysis.
QUCM Qualified Component (for ISO 14692 only)
BXT Biaxial Type - the component fitting description (for
ISO 14692 only):
U = User-Defined
F = Filament-Wound Unidirectional
D = Filament-Wound and Hand-Lay
H = 100% Hand-Lay
QS Qualified Stress (for ISO 14692 only)

BXRT Biaxial Stress Ratio (for ISO 14692 only)
BNAM - Rename Bend Points

1 6 16
BEND
1 BNAM NODE BEND POINT
Description
This card NTL card 'BNAM' that can be used to rename the near, far, or mid points of bends especially if the bend near, far, or mid points do not contain the conventional 'N', 'F', or 'M', respectively e.g.
for numeric numbering . BNAM is typically defined immediately after a BEND card and used with numeric point names in which 'N', 'F', or 'M' are not valid characters in a numeric point name. If the
conventional point names for the bend is desired, i.e. bend tangent intersection point name + 'N', 'F', or 'M', then BNAM is not required.
BEND Bend Node Near, Far , Mid point name e.g. A03 N
NODE 1-4 character name of point (may not be left blank).
BEND 1-4 character name of point (may not be left blank).
POINT
Example:
BEND 29 20.000 0.000 0.000 L
BNAM 29 N 28
BNAM 29 F 30
FOR 28 U1 25870.000
VSTP 30 .1000E+11 N
Note that point '29 N' has been renamed to '28' and point '29 F' has been renamed to '30'. The FOR and VSTP references the renamed near and far point names of the bend instead of the conventional
names to assign a concentrated force and V-stop respectively.
BPOP - Buried Pipe Options

This card is used for entering buried pipe results options data.
1 5 11 21 31 41 46 48 50 52 61 71
1 BPOP Therm SAM BuildS Cmethod Add.Circ AutoSus.Margin AutoRB RBFac Seis+ThAllow
1 5 6 10 12 14
2 * SPTYPE ReportCirc ReportSeisTH ReportBS
Description
Therm Thermal case for seismic load (T1, T2….)
0 – None
SAM SAM case combined with seismic wave (S1, S2…)
0 – None
BuildS Building settlement load case (U1, U2….)
0 – None
CMethod Calculation Method
Adams et.al= 1
AWWA C150= 2
ASCE 2001= 3
Add.Circ. Add Circ. Bending stress to Sustained (Y/N)
Blank: N
AutoSus.Margin Use min (Sh-SL, Sh-f) as sustained margin (Y/N)
Blank: N
AutoRB Auto – Ring buckling safety factor
Blank: N
RBFac Ring buckling allowable safety factor if AutoRB in N (Y/N)
Blank: 0.1
Seis+Th Allow Seismic + thermal allowable factor
Blank: 0.1
SPTYP Soil Parameters Type
0 – Low
1 – High
2 – Average
RerportCirc Report circ. Wall bending and ring buckling in code compliance (Y/N)
Blank: N
ReportSeisTH Report Seis+Therm Wall bending and ring buckling in code compliance
(Y/N)
Blank: N
ReportBS Report Building Settlement Wall bending and ring buckling in code
compliance (Y/N)
Blank: N
BSEF - Beam Member Static Earthquake Scale Factor
1 5 6 13 21 31 41
1 BSEF NAME EFX EFY EFZ
E ft ft ft
M mm mm mm
S mm mm mm
Description
This card is used to define member static earthquake scale factors at selected beam members that will be applied to the static earthquake loads defined in the SEIS card. The beam must be defined prior to
entering this card. Member scale factors EFX, EFY, and EFZ are applied to uniformly distributed gravity loads such as material weight along the member.
NAME Beam element name, maximum 7 characters (e.g. M1)

EFX Beam Element Static Earthquake factor (X direction)
BLANK: Default is 1.0
EFY Beam Element Static Earthquake factor (Y direction)
EFZ Beam Element Static Earthquake factor (Z direction)
Batch Input BLANK:
ReferenceDefault is 1.0
BUOY - Buoyancy Load Conditions
1 5 6 11 16 21 31 41 51 61 71
1 BUOY ELEV SPGRV MASS EXP
E ft
M mm
S mm
11 14 17 20 23 26 29 32 35 38 41 44 47 50 53 56 59 62 65 68 71 74 77
2 * S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19 S20 S21 S22 S23
Description
This card is used to enter the parameters necessary to define the buoyancy forces acting on the submerged piping system. This data need only be entered once. If this card is given more than once, the
values entered on the first BUOY card given will be used. Any additional BUOY cards will be ignored.
ELEV Water surface elevation.

SPGRV Specific gravity of water.
BLANK: Default is 0.0 (buoyancy has no effect).
MASS Added mass coefficient (Ca)
EXP Wind exposure factor. Needed only if system is only
partially submerged or for special modeling purposes.
S1, S2, etc. 1-2 character names of segments to be active for this
buoyancy card. Enter as many names as necessary, up
to 23 (tweny-three) segments per line.
BLANK: If these lines are omitted, all segments will
be active for the buoy case.
COMB - Load Combination
1 5 6 20 27 32 37 42 47 51
1 COMB NAME METH CAT ACT REV AFAC /
f2
2 * Description (40 characters)
1 5 6 20 27 32 39 42 68 75 79
3 * CS/CB FAC M/S CS/CB FAC M/S
* Repeat line 5 as required (max of 10 contributing cases/combs
Description
This card is used to enter load combination data for RESULT processing. This data is stored in an external file with the system name specified on the JOB card, and the DOS extension .CMB. This card
should be given after all geometry (MODEL) data has been listed. Up to 10 previously defined load cases and combinations may be entered on a COMB card.
NAME 1-24 character name of combination. May not be left blank.
METH Combination method. Valid options are as follows:

SUM Sum of all contributing
cases/combinations.
ASUM Sum of absolute values of
cases/combinations.
SRSS Square root of the sum of the squares of
cases/combinations.
MAX Look at each case/combination and use
the maximum value.
MIN Look at each case/combination and use
the minimum value.
AMAX Look at each case/combination and use
the absolute maximum value.
AMIN Look at each case/combination and use
the absolute minimum value.
RMAX Look at each case/combination,
compute the resultant quantities, and use
the quantities corresponding to the
maximum resultant.
SMAX Look at each case/combination and use
the absolute maximum value except the
sign of the value is retained.
MXST Look at each case/combination and use
the maximum stress value. This method
only applies to code combinations at the
stress level only.
BLANK: Default is SRSS
CAT Category for code compliance load set. Options are as
follows:
S = Sustained V = Von Mises N = Tensile
E = Expansion H = Hoop T = Hot
O = Occasional C = Combined OT = Other
For the MITI-3 code option only:

1 = 1A Primary 4 = 2B Pri+Sec 7 = 4AS Primary
2 = 2A Pri+Sec 5 = 3AS/BAS/CAS 8 = 4AS Pri+Sec

Primary
3 = 1B Primary 6 = 3AS/BAS/CAS
Pri+Sec
For the JSME PPC code option only:
1 = DC Primary 4 = ABO Pri+Sec 7 = DS2 Primary
2 = AB Pri+Sec 5 = CS1/CSB/CSC 8 = DS2 Pri+Sec

Primary
3 = DCO 6 = CS1/CSB/CSC
Primary Pri+Sec
For the KHK code option only:
S = Sustained H = Hoop L = L1 Long
E = Expansion D = L1 Disp
BLANK: Default is Other.

For the CAN-Z662 code only, the following options replace
Von Mises and Tensile, respectively:
Eq Tens 1 The code stress is calculated as a Tresca
stress assuming no bending stress and
no shear stress.
Eq. Tens 2 The code stress is calculated as a Tresca
stress considering all stress components.
For NC, ND, and NB codes only, 1994 or later, the "C"
category is used to calculate stresses due to reversing
dynamic loads.
For EURO code only, the "C" category is used to calculate
stresses due to a single non-repeated support movement and
the "T" category is used to calculate stresses due to operation
within the creep range.
ACT Yes/No activity flag to activate (Y) or deactivate (N) this load
combination. If this combination is not activated, it will not
be processed by AutoPIPE.
REV Yes/No activity flag to activate (Y) or deactivate (N) this load
combination to be considered for reversing dynamic.
AFAC/f2 Allowable (K) factor OR the part factor for loading, f2 (ISO
14692 piping code only)
CS/CB Name of previously defined standard load case, or
combination (up to 24 characters )to be included in this
combination. Standard load cases are as follows:
GR Gravity
T1 - T100 Thermal load cases 1 to 20
E1 - E10 Static earthquake load cases 1 to 10
W1 - W10 Static wind load cases 1 to 10
P1 - P100 Pressure load cases 1 to 100
S1 - S10 Seismic anchor movement cases 1 to 10

U1 - U140 User defined load cases 1 to 20
R1 - R50 Response spectrum load cases 1 to 50
F1 - F10 Force spectrum load cases 1 to 10
H1 - H10 Harmonic load cases 1 to 10
(LONG) Maximum longitudinal pressure stress
(SUS) Maximum sustained stress
(EXP) Maximum expansion stress
(OCC) Maximum occasional stress
(HOOP) Maximum hoop stress
For MITI-3 code option only:
(1A,I) Maximum stress according to equation 1A Primary
(2A,I+II) Maximum stress according to equation 2A Pri+Sec
(1B,I) Maximum stress according to equation 1B Primary
(2B,I+II) Maximum stress according to equation 2B Pri+Sec
(3AS,I) Maximum stress according to equation 3AS Primary
(3AS,I+II) Maximum stress according to equation 3AS Pri+Sec
(4AS,I) Maximum stress according to equation 4AS Primary
For JSME
PPC code
option
only:
(DC,P) Maximum stress according to equation DC Primary
(AB,P+S) Maximum stress according to equation AB Pri+Sec
(DCO,P) Maximum stress according to equation DCO Primary
(ABO,P+S) Maximum stress according to equation ABO Pri+Sec
(CS1,P) Maximum stress according to equation CS1 Primary
(CS1,P+S) Maximum stress according to equation CS1 Pri+Sec
(DS2,P) Maximum stress according to equation DS2 Primary
For seismic levels B and C, the equation number CS1 should be replaced by CSB and CSC, respectively.
FAC Factor to be multiplied to this load case or combination.
BLANK: Default is 1.0 (no factor).
M/S Level at which the contributing component is to be combined. This
option applies only to load combinations. It will be ignored for load
cases and stress maximums.
M: combine result quantities at the moment level
S: combine result quantities at the stress level

COMP - Rotating Equipment, Compressor
1 5 6 16 21 31 36 46 51 61 66
1 COMP EQPID IN SEG OUT SEG EXT1 SEG EXT2 SEG
1 5 11 16 21 31 41 51 61 71
2 * MMUL COSX COSY COSZ
E
M
S
3 * REFPT DXI DYI DZI DXO DYO DZO
E ft ft ft ft ft ft
M mm mm mm mm mm mm
S mm mm mm mm mm mm
4 * DX1 DY1 DZ1 DX2 DY2 DZ2
E ft ft ft ft ft ft
M mm mm mm mm mm mm
S mm mm mm mm mm mm
Description
This card is used to enter data for rotating equipment type compressor. The compressor is given a name and up to four nozzle points as well as the direction of the shaft axis. If a point is given at a tee or
continuation point, a segment name must also be given to clarify the compressor's location along the system.
1. All points must be previously defined.
2. Enter continuation rows 3 and 4 to override nozzle coordinates and specify nozzle offsets from a reference point instead.
EQPID 1-8 character name of compressor equipment identifier.

IN 1-5 character name of inlet point. Fifth character must be
either N, F, M, or blank for near, far and midpoints of a bend
and for a normal run point (respectively). May not be left
blank.
SEG If the point is at a tee or continuation point, enter the segment
name. Otherwise, leave blank.
OUT 1-5 character name of outlet point. The fifth character must be
either N, F, M, or blank for near, far and midpoints of a bend
and for a normal run point (respectively). May not be left
blank.
EXT1 1-5 character name of first extraction point. The fifth character
must be either N, F, M, or blank for near, far and midpoints of
a bend and for a normal run point (respectively).
BLANK: No extraction point.
EXT2 1-5 character name of second extraction point. The fifth
character must be either N, F, M, or blank for near, far and
midpoints of a bend and for a normal run point (respectively).
MMUL Enter the manufacturer allowable multiplier used to update the
already defined factors for the rotating equipment. The valid

values for this factor should be between 0.5 and 20.
BLANK: The default is 1.0
COSX, COSY, X-Direction, Y-Direction and Z-Direction cosines of the
COSZ compressor shaft axis.
BLANK: The default for COSX, COSY and COSZ is 0.
REFPT 1-5 character name of point. The reference point must be the
inlet point, outlet point, first extraction point, or second
extraction point.
DXI, DYI, DZI Enter the X, Y, and Z offsets of the inlet point from the
reference point. This input is required if the reference point is
not the inlet point.
BLANK: The default for DXI, DYI and DZI is 0.
DXO, DYO, DZO Enter the X, Y, and Z offsets of the outlet point from the
reference point. This input is required if the reference point is
not the outlet point.
BLANK: The default for DXO, DYO and DZO is 0.
DX1, DY1, DZ1 Enter the X, Y, and Z offsets of the first extraction point from
the reference point. This input is required if the reference point
is not the first extraction point.
BLANK: The default for DX1, DY1 and DZ1 is 0.
DX2, DY2, DZ2 Enter the X, Y, and Z offsets of the second extraction point
from the reference point. This input is required if the reference
point is not the second extraction point.
1 5 6 11 16 18 21 31 41 51 61 71
1 CONS PT1 PT2 U? NUM COLD SYMB
E lb
M kg
S N
1 5 6 11 51 61 71 81
2 * TAG No.
1 5 6 11 51 61 71
3 * ATTACHMENT ID
Description
This card is used to describe a constant force hanger in the vertical direction at a given point. This card may be input anytime after the point to which it applies has been defined.
PT1 1-5 character name of point. The fifth character must be

either N, F, M, or blank for near, far and midpoints of a
bend and for a normal run point (respectively).
BLANK: If no name is given, the immediately preceding
point is assumed.
PT2 1-5 character name of support connection point.
BLANK: If no name is given, the connection point is the
ground.
U? Undesigned status flag. Valid options are as follows:
Y This hanger is undesigned (COLD variable ignored)
N This hanger is user-designed (COLD value must follow)
BLANK: (per the following table)
NUM Number of hangers in parallel for this support.
COLD Cold load for a designed hanger.
BLANK: Hanger is undesigned.
Is the COLD variable Undesigned Flag (U?)
value given ? status
yes N
no Y
SYMB Support symbol setting. Valid options are as

follows:
H Hanger: constant hanger will be shown graphically
above pipe
C Can: constant hanger will be shown graphically
below pipe
TAG NO. BLANK: Default is hanger
1-36 character tag number. A blank is valid if the

tag number is not required.
Attachment ID associated with the support.
ATTACHMENT
ID
Note: For points which have multiple supports, unique support ID's are assigned by default, as described in Section 4.3.
CTL - Control Data
1 5 6 11 16 19 21 26 31 41 51 61 71
1 CTL CODE SIFCOD VAXIS SERV NO#T PSTIF AMB IUNT OUNT CLIB MLIB
E degF
M degC
S degC
1 5 6 16 17 19 26 32 41 51 61 71
1 CTL * LIFE MONI AP_P YEAR
E
M
S
Description
This card must be listed before any geometry (MODEL) data, and should be one of the first three cards entered (the others are JOB and HED). It is used to enter control information about the data to
follow. Only the first CTL card encountered will be recognized. Any additional CTL cards will be ignored. If this card is omitted, all parameters will assume their default values.
Note: If the edition is part of the code name, then the input in the edition field is ignored. i.e. 31104 is equivalent to Code = B31.1 and Edition = 2004
Note: If the code is specified and the edition is left blank, then it will default to the latest edition.
CODE Piping code. Valid values are as follows:

B31.1 - ASME B31.1
31104 - ASME B31.1 - 2004
31192 - ASME B31.1 - 1992
1967 - ASME B31.1 - 1967
B31.3 - ASME B31.3
B31.4 - ASME B31.4
O31.4 - ASME B31.4 Offshore, Chapter IX
B31.8 - ASME B31.8
O31.8 - ASME B31.8 Offshore, Chapter VIII
NB - ASME BPV-III-1, Subsection NB
NC - ASME BPV-III-1, Subsection NC
NC92 - ASME BPV-III-1, Subsection NC - 1992
ND - ASME BPV-III-1, Subsection ND
ND92 - ASME BPV-III-1, Subsection ND - 1992
BS806 - BS 806
SPC2 - Swedish Piping Code (SPC, Method 2)
TBK56 - Norwegian Piping Code (TBK 5-6)
STOOM - Dutch Piping Code (Stoomwezen D1101)
DNV - Norwegian Piping Code (DNV)
CZ662 - Canadian Oil & Gas Pipeline Code (CAN/CSA-Z662)
OZ662 - Canadian Code (CAN/CSA-Z662) Offshore, Section 11
MITI3 - Japanese Piping Code (MITI 501-Class 3 Piping)
KHK - Japanese Seismic Piping Code (KHK E 012)
JSMEC - Japanese Nuclear Class 2 Piping Code (JSME S NC1-

PPC)
EURO - European piping code (EN 13480)
RCCM - French piping code for Power Industry
SNCT - French piping code for Process Industry
B7159 - Design and Construction of Glass-Reinforced Plastics

(GRP) Piping Systems for Individual Plants or Sites
SNIP - Oil & Gas piping system Russian SNIP 2.05.06-85 Oil &
Gas
14692 - Petroleum and natural gas industries - Glass-reinforced

plastics (GRP) piping
GEN - General piping code
BLANK: Default is B31.1

SIFCOD For the General piping code only, specify the associated piping
code to be used for the calculation of stress intensification and
flexibility factors. For all other codes, this option will be ignored.
BLANK: Default is B31.1
VAXIS Global axis used as the vertical axis. Enter Y or Z.
BLANK: Default is Y
SERV For piping code KHK, enter seismic levels 1 or 2.
BLANK: Default is A
NO#T Number of thermal load cases (in the range 1-100).
BLANK: Default is one (1).
PSTIF Pressure stiffening case number (in the range 0-100). Must be less
than or equal to number of thermal load cases (NO#T).
BLANK: Default is zero (0).
AMB Ambient temperature of the system.
BLANK: Default is 70°F or 21.1°C (depending on the active
units). For BS 7159, the default is 32°F (0°C).
IUNT Input units file. Enter the name of the units file containing units for
all variables in the batch file. This file name should have a .UNT
extension; however, do not enter the extension.
BLANK: Default is AUTOPIPE.
OUNT Output units file. Enter the name of the units file containing units
for data to be output to reports and summaries from within
AutoPIPE. This file name should have a .UNT extension.
However, do not enter the extension.
CLIB Component library file. Enter the name of the component library
containing pipe sections, valves, and flanges. This file name should
have an .LIB extension. However, do not enter the extension.
MLIB Material library file. Enter the name of the material library
containing code dependent materials and their allowables stresses.
This file name should have an .LIB extension; however, do not
enter the extension.
BLANK: Default is dependent on the piping code entered.
LIFE Design lifetime of the piping system in hours (EURO code only). It
is used to calculate the design stress in the creep range static
loading. The minimum value allowed for lifetime is 10000 h.
There is no limit to the upper range value.
BLANK: Default is 200000 h.
MONI Lifetime monitoring system (EURO code only). It is used to
calculate the design stress in the creep range under static loading.
N : No monitoring system. (One character on Col. 17)
Y : A lifetime monitoring system is used.
BLANK: No monitoring system.

AP_P Use Appendix P of ASME B31.3 piping code (B31.3 only)
N : No (One character on Col. 19)
Y : Yes
BLANK (default): Do not use Appendix P.

Year (only ASME B31.1
specific
years are 1967
available
for 1986
specific
codes) 1992
2004
2005 Addenda
2007
2009 Addenda
2010
ASME B31.3
2004
2006
2008
2010
ASME B31.4
2006
ASME B31.4 Offshore, Chapter IX
2006
ASME B31.8
2003
2007
2010
ASME B31.8 Offshore, Chapter VIII
2003
2007
2010
ASME BPV-III-1, Subsection NB/NC/ND
1972 W Addenda
1975 W Addenda
1977
1980 S Addenda (NC and ND only)
1982 W Addenda (NB only)
1983 W Addenda
1988 Addenda
1989
1989 Addenda
1993 Addenda
1994 Addenda
1997 Addenda
1998
2001
2003 Addenda (NC and ND only)
2004
2007
BS 806
1993
Swedish Piping Code (SPC, Method 2)
1978
Norwegian Piping Code (TBK 5-6)
1990
Dutch Piping Code (Stoomwezen D1101)
1978
Norwegian Piping Code (DNV)
1981
Canadian Oil & Gas Pipeline Code (CAN/CSA-Z662)
1999
2007
Canadian Code (CAN/CSA-Z662) Offshore, Section 11
1999
2007
Japanese Piping Code (MITI 501-Class 3 Piping)
1980
Japanese Seismic Piping Code (KHK E 012)
Not Required
Japanese Nuclear Class 2 Piping Code (JSME S NC1-PPC)
2005
2008
European piping code (EN 13480)
2002
2010
French piping code for Power Industry (RCCM)
1985
French piping code for Process Industry (SNCT)
1985
Design and Construction of Glass-Reinforced Plastics (GRP)

Piping Systems for Individual Plants or Sites (BS 7159)
1989
SNIP Russian 2.05.06-85 Oil & Gas
1997
Petroleum and natural gas industries - Glass-reinforced plastics

(GRP) piping (ISO 14692)
2005
General piping code
Not Required
BLANK: Latest Edition of the specified code

CUT - Cut Short

image\ebd_47.gif
Description
This card is used to define the amount of cut-short, or cut-long (also known as cold spring) to be applied to the pipe preceding the current point. Its purpose is to pre-stress the piping under ambient
conditions so that a reduced state of stress results when the piping is subjected to operating temperature. The point to which the cut-short is applied must have been previously defined. In addition, a cut-
short cannot be specified at the first point of a segment, at a bend, or at the far end of a valve, flexible joint, reducer, and nozzle.

CASE Load case number. A cut cannot be defined in a SAM
(S1 - S3), or dynamic load case (e.g. R1, F1, H1, etc.).
Valid entries are as follows (may not be left blank):
GR Gravity
T1 - Thermal load cases 1 to 100
T100
W1 - Static wind load cases 1 to 10
W10
P1 - Pressure load cases 1 to 100
P100
U1 - User defined load cases 1 to 140
U140
LGTH The amount of cold spring. A positive value indicates a
cut-short (the specified length is removed so that the
pipe is stretched). Whereas, a negative value indicates a
cut-long (the specified length is inserted so that the pipe
is pre-compressed).
BLANK: no cut is applied.
1 5 6 11 16 21 31 41 51 61 71
1 DAMP PT1 PT2 RATE WIND
E lb/in
M kg/m
S N/mm
1 5 6 11 51 61 71
2 * TAG No. COSX COSY COSZ
1 5 6 11 51 61 71
3 * ATTACHMENT ID
Description
This card is used to describe a damper (snubber) at a specific point. This point must be previously defined. AutoPIPE assumes a stiffness of 10 lb/in for a rigid support. The direction the damper acts may
be along a global axis or a skewed axis. In either case, the direction cosines are required. Enter the direction cosines on the second line of input.
PT1 1-5 character name of point. The fifth

character must be either N, F, M, or blank
for near, far and midpoints of a bend and for
a normal run point (respectively).
BLANK: If no name is given, the
immediately preceding point is assumed.
PT2 1-5 character name of support connection
point.
BLANK: If no name is given, the connection
point is the ground.
RATE Spring stiffness rate.
BLANK: Default is rigid.
WIND Enter W to activate this damper for wind.
Default is BLANK : Damper is not active for

wind
COSX X-Direction cosine.
BLANK: The direction cosine is zero.
COSY Y-Direction cosine.
BLANK: The direction cosine is zero.
COSZ Z-Direction cosine.
TAG NO. BLANK: The direction cosine is zero.
1-36 character tag number. A blank is valid

if the tag number is not required.
ATTACHMENT ID
l For points which have multiple supports, unique support ID's are assigned by default as described in Section 4.3.
DESC - Model Description

image\ebd_50.gif
Description
This card should be given before any geometry data. This information is printed on the AutoPIPE System Information page of the AutoPIPE reports. Each line is limited to a 40-character data from
columns six to forty-five. Any text beyond column forty-five will be ignored. The DESC card is required even if the first line is blank. Define as many continuation cards as needed. Intermediate blank
lines must be explicitly defined up to the next non-blank line. If the remaining lines up to the 10th line are blank, then no cards are required for the remaining blank lines. If all 10 lines are blank, then the
DESC card is not required.
l When exporting a model to batch NTL (File/Save As/AutoPIPE Batch), the program will always explicitly write all 10 lines to the NTL file, even if the 10 lines are blank.
Any additional DESC cards will be ignored and the following note will be written to the message file (*.msg):
*** NOTE: USING PREVIOUS DESC DATA
Any continuation cards beyond 10 lines will be ignored and the following note will be written to the message file (*.msg):
*** NOTE: MODEL DESCRIPTION LINES > 10 IGNORED

1 5 6 11 16 21 31 41 51 61 71
1 DISP POINT CASE PHASE/DIR DX DY DZ DXX DYY DZZ
/SUPG
E in in in deg deg deg
M mm mm mm deg deg deg
S mm mm mm deg deg deg
Description
This card is used to enter displacement data for a specified point. It may be used anytime after that point has been entered. Note, unless the case type is a seismic anchor movement, the phase field will be
left blank.
POINT 1-5 character name of point. The fifth character

must be either N, F, M, or blank for near, far
and midpoints of a bend and for a normal run
point (respectively).
BLANK: If no name is given, the immediately
preceding point is assumed.
CASE Load case number. A support displacement
cannot be defined in a dynamic load case (e.g.,
R1, F1, H1, etc.). Valid entries are as follows
(may not be left blank):
GR Gravity
S1 - S10 Seismic anchor movement load cases 1 to 10
PHAS,DIR Phase number (only needed for case S1, S2, or
S3). If MITI-3 or JSME PPC 2005, earthquake
/SUPG direction corresponding to the seismic anchor
movements, where 1 = global X-direction and
2 = global Z-direction.
If not MITI-3 or JSME PPC 2005, enter the

support group number.
DX Translational displacement in the X-Direction.
BLANK: The default value is zero.
DY Translational displacement in the Y-direction.
DZ Translational displacement in the Z-direction.
DXX Rotational displacement about the X-axis.
DYY Rotational displacement about the Y-axis.
DZZ Rotational displacement about the Z-axis.
DIST - Distributed Load

image\ebd_52.gif
Description
This card is allows the specification of a distributed load between two points. Linear interpolation is used to distribute the load to all points between those given. This card should be listed after all points
have been defined.

for near, far and midpoints of a bend and
for a normal run point (respectively). May
not be left blank.
CASE Load case number. A distributed load
cannot be defined in a SAM (S1 - S10), or
dynamic load case (e.g. R1, F1, H1, etc.).
Valid entries are as follows (may not be left
blank):
GR Gravity
for a normal run point (respectively). May
not be left blank.
FX1 Force in the X-direction acting at the first
point (PT1).
FY1 Force in the Y-direction acting at the first
point (PT1).
FZ1 Force in the Z-direction acting at the first
point (PT1).
FX2 Force in the X-direction acting at the last
point (PT2).
FY2 Force in the Y-direction acting at the last
point (PT2).
FZ2 Force in the Z-direction acting at the last
point (PT2).
BLANK: If any force value is left blank it
Batch Input Reference is assumed to be zero.
DSGN - Design Pressure & Temperature

Class 1, 2, and 3 only
PRES Design Pressure (ASME NB, NC, ND)
PPRES Peak Pressure (ASME NC & ND only)
TEMP Design Temperature (ASME NB, NC, ND)
SM Stress Intensity at design temp
S ASME NC, ND hot allowable stress at design temp
SY Yield Stress at design temp (ASME NB, NC, ND)
AUTO Automatic update option for material values only. This option is ignored for non-standard materials.
A: Automatic update of value from material library
U: User-defined value
FLA - Pipe Flange

1 5 6 8 11 21 26 31 41 46 51 61
1 FLA POINT TYPE RATE WELD WGT SIF TAPER OFF MOFF
E lb in in
M kg mm mm
S N mm mm
2 * SERIES FMTRL GROUP GMTRL DIANI WIDTH BWGT
E in in lb
M mm mm kg
S mm mm N
3 * FLGFACT TAG FLGLEN
(44-
54)
E
M
S
Description
This card is entered to describe a point as a flange. To enter data on this card, first decide what capacity flange is needed in the Library Tables . Enter the desired flange rating. No data other than the weld
type is required. However, if the flange is not in the component library, enter nonstandard as the rating and then enter the weight. Please note that this card should be used after that point to which it refers
has been defined.
POINT 1-5 character name of point. The fifth character must be either N, F, M, or blank for near,
far and midpoints of a bend and for a normal run point (respectively).
TYPE Flange type; options are as follows:
BLIND
LAPJOINT
SLIP-ON
SOCKET
WELDNECK
NS
RATE Flange pressure rating (see Appendix A). If desired flange is not found, enter NS for
nonstandard, then define WGT and SIF values.
WELD Weld type of connection to pipe (the default SIF associated with each connection type is
also listed).
BW Butt Weld (1.0) (code dependent) As-Welded Butt
Weld
BWT Butt Weld (code dependent)
Transition
As-Welded Butt Weld NB 4250
Transition (Class NB)
ANSI B16.25, 30o tapered transition

ANSTT (Class NC)
FBWT Flush Butt ASME NB
Weld NB 4250
Transition
BT1:3 As-Welded ASME NB
Butt Weld 1:3
Transition
FT1:3 Flush Butt ASME NB
Weld 1:3
Transition
FBW Flush Butt ASME NB, NC, ND
Weld
SO slip on 1.2 (code dependent)
SW Socket/Fillet 2.1 (code dependent)
Weld
SWN Socket Weld 1.3
(no undercut)
LJ Lap Joint (1.6)
TJ Threaded Joint (2.3)
SWV socket or fillet JSME PPC only
weld
(concave)
SOV double-welded JSME PPC only
slip-on
(concave)
USER User Defined (see SIF below)
BLANK: Default is BW. For BS 7159, the default is NS.
Note: Only the weld type NS is recognized by the BS 7159 code. For B31.1-1967 code,
the SIF for socket weld connection is 1.3.
Weldneck, Double welded slip-on, Socket weld (no undercut), Lapjoint are no longer
available from v9.1 or later for ASME III class NC, ND. For older models weldneck
mapped to BW. Double welded slip-on mapped to user defined SIF = 1.2, Socket weld
(no undercut) mapped to user defined SIF = 1.3, lapjoint mapped to user defined SIF =
1.6.
SIF Stress intensification factor of flange. Only needed if the weld type is nonstandard (NS).
A value entered here will override the value obtained from the library if a standard rating
is specified for the RATE.
Note: The Weld SIF field is blank for SW & SO Connections for ASME NC-1992, ND-
1992, NC-2004, ND-2004 piping codes.
BLANK: Default for NS is 1.0.

WGT Weight of flange. This is only needed for a nonstandard flange. A value entered here will
override the value obtained from the library if a standard rating is specified for the
RATE.
OFF Joint offset for a butt weld with no taper transition. Average joint offset is available for a
butt weld (BW) with taper transition to the B31.1 and B31.8 codes. It is also available for
butt weld (BW) with or without taper transition for the EN13480 , SPC, TBK, RCC-M,
MITI and JSME PPC codes.
The weld size for Double-Welded Slip-On (SO) and Socket or Fillet Weld (SW)
connections can be entered for this field using NC92, ND92, NC, and ND codes. For
JSME PPC code, the weld size can be entered for this field when a Double-Welded Slip-
On (SOV) or Socket or Fillet Weld (SWV) connection is "concave" only.
MOFF Maximum joint offset for a butt weld with no taper transition. This input applies only if
TYPE is BW without taper and if the code option is B31.1 or B31.8.
SERIES A value in this field applies only to large diameter flanges (those governed by ANSI
B16.47). Its value can be either ’A’ or ’B’.
BLANK: Default is ’A’.
FMTRL Flange material code (12 characters) for the materials listed in ANSI B16.5 or ANSI
B16.47. Standard flange materials are defined in the EQUIP.LIB library file.
BLANK: Default is pipe material.
GROUP Flange material group per ANSI B16.5 or 16.47. This 4 character value must be specified
if a non-standard flange material is used.
GMTRL Gasket material code (10 characters) for the materials listed in ANSI B16.5 or ANSI
B16.47. Standard gasket materials are defined in the EQUIP.LIB library file.
DIANI Gasket inside diameter. Its value is automatically retrieved for standard flanges, but a
value entered here will override the standard value.
WIDTH Gasket contact width. This value is automatically retrieved for standard flanges, but a
value entered here will override the standard value.
BWGT Combined Bolt /Nut weight
FLGFACT Use flange weight factor for bolt/nut weight option (Y/N)
TAG Flange tag (36 characters)
FLGLEN The length of the flange (used for PXF/PCF import/export)
FLAA - Flange Analysis
1 5 6 9 17 20 23 25 35 42 52 55 57 66
1 FLAA ATTACHMENT Flange Material Analysis G. Seating Analyze Max. Ratio Notes Rigidity Factor Ring Type Reverse Pipe Bolt Spacing
Library Method Bolt Load Flag Material Correction
Library Factor
E
M
S
1 5 6 23 33 43 53 63 73
2 * Flange bolt Dimension Outside Inside Thickness Hub Length Large End Hub Small End Hub
diameter diameter Thickness Thickness
E in In in in In in
M Mm mm mm mm mm mm
S Mm mm mm mm mm mm
1 5 6 43 53 63 73
3 * Flange Material Allow. Stress at Allow. Stress at Density Flange ASME
Oper. Temp. Amb Temp Library
E ksi ksi Lb\cu.ft
M kg/cm2 kg/cm2 Kg/m3
S MPa MPa kg/m3
1 5 6 16 26 36 46 56 66 76
4 * Elastic Modulus at Elastic Modulus at Joint Eff. Lap Num. of Bolts Gasket Thickness Nubbin Width Elastic Modulus
Oper. Temp. Amb. Temp. Factor Contact. OD editable Flag
E ksi ksi in in in
M kg/cm2 kg/cm2 mm mm mm
S MPa MPa mm mm mm
1 5 6 23 33 43 53 63 73
5 * Bolt Material Allow. Allow. Nominal Diameter Effective Diameter Bolt Hole Thread Type
Stress at Stress at Diameter
Oper. Temp Amb . Temp
(Bolt) (Bolt)
E ksi ksi in in in
M kg/cm2 kg/cm2 mm mm mm
S MPa MPa mm mm mm
1 5 6 43 53 63 72
6 * Pipe Material Allow. Stress at Allow. Stress at Pipe ASME Lib Bolt Circle
Oper. Temp (Pipe) Amb. Temp (Pipe) Diameter
E ksi ksi in
M kg/cm2 kg/cm2 mm
S MPa MPa mm
1 5 6 10 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 76
7 * Gasket Type Gasket Configuration Width [N] Gasket Strength Factor Seating Stress Eff. Gasket Load Reaction Full Face
Inside Seating width Diameter Gasket
diameter
E in in psi in in
M mm mm Kg/cm2 mm mm
S mm mm N/mm2 mm mm
1 5 6 13 20 22 32 42 52 57 67 72 81
8 * LOAD COMB. OPER. CASE Apply B31.3 OPER. OPER.TEMP. Ext. PRES App. Force Axial Force App. Bending
PRES. Comb. Moment Moment
Comb.
E psi deg F psi lbf ft-lb
M Kg/cm2 deg C Kg/cm2 Kgf Kg-cm
S N/mm2 deg F N/mm2 N N.m
1 5 6 43 44
9 * User Defined Table Name User Defined Press. Use B16.5 1996
Temp. Flag Data Flag
E
M
S
Description
This card is used to define options related to the flange analysis input.
ATTACHMENT Attachment â€“ The type of flange attachment. Following are the possible values:
1: Integral
2: Loose
3: Optional
BLANK: Default is Integral (1).

Flange Material Library Flange material library. Enter any standard material Library Name ASMEDIV1, ASMEDIV2, ASME III etc.
(8 character string)
BLANK: Default is ASMEDIV1.

Analysis Method Analysis method
1: ASME Section VIII Div 1
2: ASME Section VIII Div 2
3: ANSI CHECK
4: APPENDIX XI
BLANK: Default is ASME Section VIII Div 1 (1).

G. Seating Bolt Load Gasket Seating Bolt Load
0: Code Required
1: Max Bolt Load
2: W = Wm2
3: Max of 1 and 3
4: Max of 1,2 and 3
BLANK: Default is Code Required (0).

Analyze Analyze
Y: Analyze the flange
N: Do not analyze the flange
BLANK: Default is do not analyze the flange (N).

Max. Ratio Max Ratio (Analysis Tab)
BLANK: Default is 0.0.

Notes 0:
1: Operating, Tangen. ST"
2: Operating, SH
3: Operating, SR
4: Operating, ST
5: Operating, (SH+SR)/2
6: Operating, (SH+ST)/2
7: Operating, Tangen.
8: Operating, Shearing
9: Operating, Bearing
10: Operating, Radial
11: Operating, Bolt Tensile
12: Operating, Flange Material
13: Gasket, Tangen. ST
14: Gasket, SH
15: Gasket, SR
16: Gasket, ST
17: Gasket, (SH+SR)/2
18: Gasket, (SH+ST)/2
19: Gasket, Tangen.
20: Gasket, Shearing
21: Gasket, Bearing
22: Gasket, Radial
23: Gasket, Bolt Tensile
24: Gasket, Flange Material
1000: Pass
1001: Fail
Rigidity Factor Rigidity factor

Ring Type Ring type configuration
0: none
1: single-split ring
2: double-split ring
BLANK: Default is none (0).

Reverse Flag Reverse
Y: Reverse the flange
N: Do not reverse the flange
BLANK: Default is do not reverse the flange (N).

Pipe Material Library Pipe material library. Enter any standard material Library Name ASMEDIV1, ASMEDIV2, ASME III etc. (8
character string)

Bolt Spacing Correction Use Bolt Spacing Correction flag (Y or N)
Factor
Y: Use Bolt Spacing Correction Factor Flag
N: Do not use Bolt Spacing Correction Factor
Note: This Flags does not affect ANSI Check
BLANK: Default is Y
Flange bolt Dimension Flange dimensions (16 characters string)
BLANK: Default is NS.

Outside diameter Outside flange diameter.

Inside diameter Inside flange diameter.

Thickness Thickness

Hub Length Hub length

Large End Hub Large End Hub Thickness
Thickness
Small End Hub Small End Hub Thickness
Thickness
Flange Material Flange Material (36 characters string)

Allow. Stress at Oper. Allowable stress at operating temperature.
Temp.
Allow. Stress at Amb Allowable stress at ambient temperature.
Temp
Density Density

Flange ASME Library Flange ASME library. This field is the name of the Database to pickup material values E.g ASME2010

Elastic Modulus at Elastic modulus at operating temperature
Oper. Temp.
Elastic Modulus at Amb. Elastic modulus at ambient temperature
Temp.
Joint Eff. Factor Joint efficiency factor for blind

Lap Contact. OD Lap flange contact OD
Num. of Bolts Number of bolts
Gasket Thickness Gasket Thickness

Nubbin Width Gasket nubbin width

Bolt Material Bolt material (16 characters string).
BLANK: Default is User

Elastic Modulus Elastic modulus Field should remain editable. Flag is used for material whose elastic modulus values are not
Editable Flag retrieved from the flange database.
Y: Keep the modulus Field editable
N: Do not Keep the modulus Field editable
BLANK: Default is N
Allow. Stress at Oper. Allowable stress at operating temperature for Bolt.
Temp (Bolt)
Allow. Stress at Amb . Allowable stress at ambient temperature for Bolt.
Temp (Bolt)
Nominal Diameter Nominal diameter for bolt.

Effective Diameter Effective diameter for bolt.

Bolt Hole Diameter Bolt hole diameter.

Thread Type Bolt Thread Type
0: COARSE
1: 8-THREAD
BLANK: Default is Coarse (0).

Pipe Material Pipe material (36 characters string).

Allow. Stress at Oper. Allowable stress at operating temperature for Pipe.
Temp (Pipe)
Allow. Stress at Amb. Allowable stress at ambient temperature for Pipe.
Temp (Pipe)
Pipe ASME Lib Names of Pipe ASME Library (8 characters string)
BLANK: Default is ASME2010.

Bolt Circle Diameter Bolt circle diameter

Gasket Type Index of gasket type (Gasket Tab)
0: USER
1: SELF ENERGIZING
2: ELASTOMERS W/O FABRIC; < 75A DUROMETER
3: ELASTOMERS W/O FABRIC; >= 75A DUROMETER
4: MINERAL FIBER WITH BINDER; 1/8 IN. THICK
7: ELASTOMERS WITH COTTON FABRIC INSERTION
8: ELASTOMERS WITH MINERAL FIBER; 3-PLY
11: VEGETABLE FIBER
12: SPIRAL-WOUND CARBON WITH MINERAL FIBER FILL
13: SPIRAL-WOUND ALLOY WITH MINERAL FIBER FILL
14: CORRUGATED ALUMINIUM WITH MINERAL FIBER FILL
15: CORRUGATED COPPER/BRASS + MINERAL FIBER FILL
16: CORRUGATED IRON/STEEL + MINERAL FIBER FILL
17: CORRUGATED MONEL/CHROME + MINERAL FIBER FILL
18: CORRUGATED STEEL/ALLOYS + MINERAL FIBER FILL
19: CORRUGATED SOFT ALUMINIUM
20: CORRUGATED SOFT COPPER OR BRASS
21: CORRUGATED IRON OR SOFT STEEL
22: CORRUGATED MONEL OR 4-6% CHROME
23: CORRUGATED STAINLESS STEEL OR NI ALLOYS
24: FLAT SOFT ALUMINIUM WITH MINERAL FIBER FILL
25: FLAT SOFT COPPER/BRASS + MINERAL FIBER FILL
26: FLAT IRON/SOFT STEEL + MINERAL FIBER FILL
27: FLAT MONEL WITH MINERAL FIBER FILL
28: FLAT 4-6% CHROME WITH MINERAL FIBER FILL
29: FLAT ST.STEEL/ALLOYS + MINERAL FIBER FILL
30: GROOVED SOFT ALUMINIUM
31: GROOVED SOFT COPPER OR BRASS
32: GROOVED IRON OR SOFT STEEL
33: GROOVED MONEL OR 4-6% CHROME
34: GROOVED STAINLESS STEEL OR NI ALLOYS
35: SOLID FLAT SOFT ALUMINIUM
36: SOLID FLAT SOFT COPPER OR BRASS
37: SOLID FLAT IRON OR SOFT STEEL
38: SOLID FLAT MONEL OR 4-6% CHROME
39: SOLID FLAT STAINLESS STEEL OR NI ALLOYS
40: RING JOINT IRON OR SOFT STEEL
41: RING JOINT MONEL OR 4-6% CHROME
42: RING JOINT STAINLESS STEEL OR NI ALLOYS
BLANK: Default is 13 which is SPIRAL-WOUND ALLOY WITH MINERAL FIBER FILL

Gasket Configuration Index of gasket configuration
1: for sketch 1a
2: for sketch 1b
3: for sketch 1c
4: for sketch 1d
5: for sketch 2
6: for sketch 3
7: for sketch 4
8: for sketch 5
9: for sketch 6
BLANK: Default is sketch 1a (1)

Width [N] Gasket contact width

Gasket Inside diameter Gasket inside diameter

Strength Factor Gasket strength factor.

Seating Stress Gasket seating stress

Eff. Gasket Seating Effective gasket seating width
width
Load Reaction Diameter Gasket load reaction diameter.

Full Face Gasket Full face gasket
Y: yes
N: no
BLANK: Default is no full face gasket (N).

LOAD COMB. Load combination
-1: None
0: User
1: to maximum valid load combination number
100000: Max Force/Moment
100001: Max Force
100002: Max Moment
BLANK: Default is None (-1).

OPER. CASE Operating case
100000:Max P, Max T
100001:Max P
100002:Max T
100003:Design
100004:User
1 to 100: Valid Operating Case Number
BLANK: Default is Max P, Max T (100000).
Apply B31.3 B31_3 uninsulated temperature option
Y: yes
N: no
BLANK: Default is N do not apply.

OPER. PRES. Operating pressure

OPER.TEMP. Operating temperature

Ext. PRES External pressure

App. Force Comb. Applied force load combination
0 to maximum number of load Combination number
-1: NONE
BLANK: Default is 0 load combinations.

Axial Force Axial force

App. Moment Comb. Applied moment load combination
0 to maximum number of load Combination number
-1: NONE
BLANK: Default is 0 load combinations.

Bending Moment Bending moment

User Defined Table User defined table name to pick the Pmax values. The table is available in file 'Flange_User_Data.mdb' (36
Name characters string)
User Defined Press. User defined Pressure/Temperature Flag
Temp. Flag
Y: Pick up values from the User defined Table for Pmax
N: Do not pick from user defined Table for Pmax.
BLANK: Default is N
Use B16.5 1996 Data flag Use B16.5 1996 Data
Y: Pick the the dimension for Gasket Inside diameter and gasket width from B16-5 1996 standard.
N: Pick Gasket inside diametere and Gasket width from Latest dimension standard.
BLANK: Default is N

image\ebd_54.gif
Description
This card is used to model a flexible joint in the pipe. AutoPIPE assumes translational and rotational stiffness values of 1010 lb/in and 1012 lb×in/rad for a rigid stiffness.
POINT 1-4 character point for far end of the joint (may
not be left blank).
DX Length of flexible joint along the X-direction.
or
DA Joint length along the local A-direction (refer to

the LOCL card).
DY Length of flexible joint along the Y-direction.
DZ Length of flexible joint along the Z-direction.
PAREA Cross section area of contained fluid.
WGT Weight of flexible joint.
K-AX Axial stiffness Kx
K-SHY Shear stiffness Ky
K-SHZ Shear stiffness Kz
K-TOR Torsional stiffness Kxx
K-BY Bending stiffness Kyy
K-BZ Bending stiffness Kzz
Any blank stiffness variable is assumed to be rigid.
l If the first point of the flexible joint is the first point of a new run: DX, DY, and DZ will be the actual coordinates if the point at the far end of the flex joint.
FOR - Concentrated Force/Moment
image\ebd_55.gif
Description
This card allows the specification of forces and/or moments in the global X, Y, Z directions at a specific point which must be previously defined. These forces can be specified to act with a specific load
case if desired.
POINT 1-5 character name of point. The fifth

for a normal run point (respectively).
CASE Load case and load case number. A force
(or moment) cannot be defined in a SAM
(S1 - S10), or dynamic load case (e.g. R1,
F1, H1, etc.). Valid entries are as follows
(may not be left blank):
GR Gravity
FX Force in X-direction.
FY Force in Y-direction.
FZ Force in Z-direction.
MX Moment about X-Axis.
MY Moment about Y-Axis.
MZ Moment about Z-Axis.
Any blank force or moment variable is assumed to be zero.

FSPC - Force Spectrum Load Case

image\ebd_56.gif
Description
This card is used to enter the load case data required for a force spectrum analysis. This data will be stored in an external file using the system name, and the DOS extension .FS* (where * is the case
number specified, in the range of 1 to 10). This card refers to force spectrum data sets and must, therefore, be given after all SPEC cards to which this card refers. After the first line of data is entered,
enter a line for each point to be included in the force spectrum analysis as shown.
CASE Force spectrum analysis case number (0-10). If

zero is entered, no other data is read (no load cases
are created).
BLANK: Default is zero.
ZPA Zero Period Acceleration correction flag, valid
options are:
0: do not include ZPA correction.
1:include ZPA correction.
BLANK: default is 0.
MASS Missing Mass correction flag, valid options are:
0: do not include Missing Mass correction.
1: include Missing Mass correction.
TITLE User description of the force spectrum load case
(up to 50 characters).
POINT 1-5 character name of point. The fifth character is
N, F, M or blank for near, far or mid tangent
points along a bend or for a normal run point
(respectively). May not be left blank.
SPEC 1-8 character name of previously defined spectrum
data set for this point (see the SPEC card for
details). May not be left blank.
SCALE Scale factor of spectrum values for this point.
BLANK: Default is 1.0 (no scale factor).
COSX X-Direction cosine of force spectrum.
COSY Y-Direction cosine of force spectrum.
COSZ Z-Direction cosine of force spectrum.
GLOB - Global Coordinates

image\ebd_57.gif
Description
This card switches back input of local offsets to input of global offsets. Once this card is given, it is assumed that all subsequent point data are global offsets from the previous point. This input form will
remain until a LOCL card is found. This card need only be given after a LOCL card has been given. If neither card is given at the beginning of the data set, global offsets are assumed. Thus, entering a
GLOB card before a LOCL card will have no effect.
1 5 6 11 16 21 31 41 51 61 71
1 GUID PT1 PT2 SET STIFF GAP-D GAP- GAP- GAP-R FRIC
U L
E lb/in in in in in
M kg/m mm mm mm mm
S N/mm mm mm mm mm
1 5 6 11 51 61 71
2 * TAG No.
1 5 6 11 51 61 71
3 * ATTACHMENT ID
Description
This card is used to input data describing a guide at a given point. The point must be previously defined in order to use this card properly. AutoPIPE assumes a stiffness of 10 lb/in for a rigid support. If the
guide is linear, only the gap setting type and stiffness value need be given. However, all parameters are needed for a nonlinear guide.
PT1 1-5 character name of point. The fifth character must be

either N, F, M, or blank for near, far and midpoints of a
BLANK: If no name is given, the connection point is
the ground.
SET Gaps setting. Valid options are:
A: As-built
W: Weightless
BLANK: Default is As-built
STIFF Stiffness value of the guide (assumed to be the same for
both bearing springs).
l If the guide is linear, the data listed below is not
needed.
GAP-D Gap below pipe.
GAP-U Gap above pipe.
GAP-L Gap left of pipe (looking along the forward
direction).
GAP-R Gap right of pipe (looking along the forward
direction).
FRIC Coefficient of friction between pipe and
support surface.
TAG NO.
1-36 character tag number. A blank is valid if

the tag number is not required.
ATTACHMENT ID Attachment ID associated with the support.
Any blank gap or friction variable assumes a zero value.
l For points which have multiple supports, unique support ID's are assigned by default.
GRDS - Gross Discontinuity Stress
1 5 6 12 16 26
1 GRDS POINT CASE STRESS
E lb/in^2
M kg/cm^2
S N/mm^2
POINT 1-5 character name of point. The fifth character must be N, F, M, or

blank for near, far and midpoints of a bend and for a normal run point
(respectively). If POINT is a branch point, temperature data will be
applied to the point along the last segment entered.
BLANK: If no name is given, the immediately preceding point is

assumed.
CASE Operating case thermal number, 1 to 100
STRESS Gross discontinuity stress
HARM - Harmonic Load Case
1 5 6 11 21 26 31 41 51 61 71
1 HARM CASE DATA COMB ZPA MASS
Description
This card is used to define a harmonic load case, and it refers to a specific harmonic load data set. This data set must have been previously defined (see the HLOD card). The DATA name given must
match that of the load set to which this refers.
CASE Harmonic case number (0-10). If 0 is entered, no

other data is read.
DATA 1-8 character name of previously defined
harmonic load data set (see the HLOD card for
details) May not be left blank.
COMB Combination method; used in combining
harmonics. Options are as follows:
MAX Use the largest point responses looking at each
harmonic.
RMS Use the root mean square method, or enter the
number of harmonics.
BLANK: Default is RMS.
options are:
0 do not include ZPA correction.
1 include ZPA correction.
0 do not include Missing Mass correction.
1 include Missing Mass correction.
HED - Project ID
image\ebd_61.gif
Description
This card should be given before any geometry data, and should be one of the first three cards entered (the others are JOB and CTL). This information is printed on the top of all AutoPIPE output report
pages.
Character data may be entered between columns six and eighty on line one and two. However, only the first 80 characters will be stored. It is best to enter 40 characters on each line, but if this is
inconvenient, fill line one to column 80 before continuing to line two. If data does not need to continue to line two, line two may be omitted. This card will only be recognized once. Any additional HED
cards will be ignored.
HLOD - Harmonic Load Data Set

image\ebd_62.gif
Description
This card is used to describe a harmonic load data set. All points affected by this load must be previously defined. As many points as necessary may be entered, but enter only one point per line following
the first two lines of data as shown. The data read from these cards will be stored in an external ASCII file. The name of this file is the DATA name given with the DOS extension .HMF added. This card
should be given after all geometry (MODEL) data has been entered, and this card must be given before the HARM card which refers to it.
DATA 1-8 character name of the harmonic load data set

(see the HARM card). This name must follow
DOS file naming conventions. May not be left
blank.
DAMP Damping ratio of the harmonic load set.
TITLE User description of harmonic load set (up to 75
characters).
POINT 1-5 character name of point. The fifth character is
N, F, M, or blank for near, far, or mid tangent
points along a bend or for a normal run point
FREQ Frequency of the harmonic load at this point.
PHASE Phase angle of the harmonic load at this point.
XFOR Peak force in X-direction.
YFOR Peak force in Y-direction.
ZFOR Peak force in Z-direction.
l One set of forces should be given for each point.
HYDR - Hydrodynamic Factors
image\ebd_63.gif
Description
This card is used to define the hydrodynamic factors at the specified point. This will override those factors defined on the WAVE card for this point only. Note, that the point specified must have already
been defined.

must be either N, F, M, or blank for near, far and
midpoints of a bend and for a normal run point
(respectively).
INERT Coefficient of inertia of the wave at this point.
BLANK: Default is 0. AutoPIPE will determine
inertia based on wave loading data entered.
DRAG Coefficient of drag of the wave at this point.
BLANK: Default is 0. AutoPIPE will determine
drag based on wave loading data entered.
LIFT Coefficient of lift of the wave at this point.
BLANK: Default is zero. No lift will be
considered.
HYDT - Hydrotest Load Case Definition

image\ebd_64.gif
Description
This card is used to define the hydrotest load case definitions.
INSL Enter N if the insulation weight is to be ignored in

the hydrotest load case. Enter Y to include the
insulation weight.
SPGR Specific gravity of the liquid used in the hydrotest.
BLANK: Default is 0 for water.
PRESS Enter 1,2, or 3 for the operating load case to be
used to specify hydrotest pressure.
For ASME NB, NC, and ND, enter -1 for 'Design'

pressure.
BLANK: Default is 1 (P1).

PFACT Enter the factor to be applied to the PRESS
operating load case to determine the hydrotest
pressure.
TEMP Enter 1,2, or 3 for the operating load case to be
used to specify the hydrotest temperature.
BLANK: Default is 0 for ambient temperature.
TFACT Enter the factor to be applied to the TEMP
operating load case to determine the hydrotest
temperatue.
HYDT - Hydrotest Load Cases

image\ebd_65.gif
image\ebd_66.gif
Description
This card is used to enter the data for the hydrotest load case. The second and subsequent lines contain the names of segments to be included in the hydrotest load case. If these lines are omitted, all
segments will be considered in the hydrotest load case.
1 5 6 11 16 21 31 41 51 61 71
1 INCL PT1 PT2 SET RATE GAP- GAP- FRIC
B F
E lb/in in in
M kg/m mm mm
S N/mm mm mm
1 5 6 11 51 61 71
1 5 6 11 51 61 71
3 * ATTACHMENT ID
Description
This card is used to input data describing an inclined support at a previously defined point. AutoPIPE assumes a stiffness of 10 lb/in for a rigid support. An inclined support exerts restraint along any
skewed direction. If the inclined support is nonlinear, gap values and/or a friction coefficient are required.
PT1 1-5 character name of point. The fifth character

point.
BLANK: If no name given, connection point is
the ground.
A As-built
W Weightless
RATE Spring rate
GAP-B Gap behind pipe.
GAP-F Gap in front of pipe.
FRIC Coefficient of friction between pipe & support
surface.
TAG NO. BLANK: Default is 0.

ATTACHMENT Attachment ID associated with the support.
ID
l For points which have multiple supports, unique support IDs are assigned by default.
JOB - Job Description
Description
This card is given before any geometry (MODEL) data can be given. It should be one of the first three cards entered (the others are HED and CTL). If this card is omitted, the analyst and checker values
will be left blank. This card will only be recognized once. Any additional JOB cards will be ignored.
PREP Name of AutoPIPE user (25 characters).

CHKR Name of person checking analysis results (25
characters).
APPD1
Name of the 1st Approver (25 characters)
APPD2
Name of the 2nd Approver (25 characters)
VERNO Batch NTL version number. (5 characters).
BLANK or 0 for pre Autopipe v8.5 models:

Default is 1.0 (equivalent to Autopipe v8.5).
Program version number (11 characters) e.g.

PROGV 08.06.00.12
JSIF - Joint Type & User SIF
This card applies to v8.9 or later.
1 5 6 11 21 31 41 51 54 57 60 70 80
1 JSIF POINT TYPE OFF MOFF FLEX SSIF SQST OQST QS BXR QUCM
E in in in psi
M mm mm mm Kg/cm^2
S mm mm mm N/mm^2
1 5 6 10 13 16 19 21 31 51 61 71
2 * SPRM OVER OVB1 OVB2 IPLN OPLN IPLN- OPLN- PMULT/B2'
L/B1 L/B2
E
M
S
1 5 6 11 21 31 41 51 61 71
3 * C1 C2 K1 K2 C3 K3 C3’
E
M
S
Description
This card is used as a means of entering standard joint types and nonstandard stress intensification factors (SIF's) and stress indices B1 and B2 (ASME NB/NC/ND, JSME PPC). It must be given after the
point at which it acts has been defined.
POINT 1-5 character name of point. The fifth character must be either N, F, M, or blank for near,
far and midpoints of a bend and for a normal run point (respectively).
TYPE Weld type of connection to pipe (the default SIF associated with each connection type is
also listed).
Name Joint Type Comments

BW As-Welded Butt Weld Available all
codes, code
dependent,
except ISO
14692
FBW Flush Butt Weld Class NB only
BWT As-Welded Butt Weld NB Class NB only
4250 Transition
ANSTT ANSI B16.25 30o Tapered All codes except
Transition Class NB, code
dependent, and
ISO 14692
FBWT Flush Butt Weld NB 4250 Class NB only
Transition
BT1:3 As-Welded Butt Weld 1:3 Class NB only
Transition
FT1:3 Flush Butt Weld 1:3 Class NB only
Transition
SW Socket/Fillet Weld Available all
codes, except
ISO 14692
SWN Socket Weld No undercut All codes except
Class NB, code
dependent, and
ISO 14692
SO Slip-On Double welded Fillet B31.1:67, B31.3,
B31.4, B31.8,
KHK, CSA
Z662 ,
stoomwezen
only
LJ Lap Joint All codes except
Class NB, NC,
ND, and ISO
14692
SPSK Spigot/socket - r ISO 14692 only
TJ Threaded Joint All codes except
Class NB, NC,
ND, and ISO
14692
FLNG Flange - r ISO 14692 only
LMND Laminated - r ISO 14692 only
SWV socket or fillet weld JSME PPC only
(concave)
SOV double-welded slip-on JSME PPC only
(concave)
User User-Defined Available all
codes
BLANK: Default is BW. For BS 7159, the default is NS. For ISO 14692, the default is
User.
Weldneck, Double welded slip-on, Socket weld (no undercut), Lapjoint are no longer
available from v9.1 or later for ASME III class NC, ND. For older models weldneck
mapped to BW. Double welded slip-on mapped to user defined SIF = 1.2, Socket weld
(no undercut) mapped to user defined SIF = 1.3, lapjoint mapped to user defined SIF =
1.6.
OFF Joint offset for a butt weld with no taper transition. Average joint offset is available for a
butt weld (BW) with taper transition to the B31.1 and B31.8 codes. It is also available for
butt weld (BW) with or without taper transition for the EN13480 , SPC, TBK, RCC-M,
MITI, and JSME PPC codes.
The weld size for Double-Welded Slip-On (SO) and Socket or Fillet Weld (SW)
connections can be entered for this field using NC92, ND92, NC, and ND codes. For
JSME PPC code, the weld size can be entered for this field when a Double-Welded Slip-
On (SOV) or Socket or Fillet Weld (SWV) connection is "concave" only.
MOFF Maximum joint offset for a butt weld with no taper transition. This input applies only if
TYPE is BW without taper and if the code option is B31.1 or B31.8.
SSIF Set SIF Values. Enter 1 for checked, or 0 for unchecked. (For ISO 14692 only)
SQSR Set Qualified Stress. Enter 1 for checked, or 0 for unchecked. (For ISO 14692 only)
OQST Override Qualified Stress. Enter 1 for checked, or 0 for unchecked. (For ISO 14692
only)
QS Qualified Stress. (For ISO 14692 only)
BLANK: Default is 0 psi.

BXR Biaxial Stress Ratio. (For ISO 14692 only)
BLANK: Default is 0. For bend points, the default is 1.9.

QUCM Qualified Component. Enter 1 for checked, or 0 for unchecked. (For ISO 14692 only)
SPRM Set Pressure Multiplier. Enter 1 for checked, or 0 for unchecked. (For ISO 14692 only)
OVER SIF override flag for all codes except ASME NB, NC, and ND. If this flag is set, this SIF
will override all others at this point. If not set, this SIF will be used only if it is the
maximum at this point. Options are as follows:
0: Use only if maximum
1: Override all other SIF's.
OVB1 B1 override flag for JSME PPC. If this flag is set, this B1 value will override all others at
this point. If not set, this B1 value will be used only if it is the maximum at this point.
Options are as follows:
1: Override all other B1 values
OVB2 B2 override flag for JSME PPC. If this flag is set, this B2 value will override all others at
this point. If not set, this B2 value will be used only if it is the maximum at this point.
IPLN In-plane SIF at this point. For the BS 7159 and ISO 14692 code options only, this input
applies to the circumferential direction of the pipe. For all editions of ASME NC/ND and
JSME PPC, this input applies to the SIF at this point.
OPLN Out-plane SIF at this point. For the BS 7159 and ISO 14692 code options only, this input
applies to the circumferential direction of the pipe. For all editions of ASME NC/ND and
JSME PPC, this input is not used.
IPLN-L In-plane circumferential SIF at this point. For the BS 7159 and ISO 14692 code options
only, this input applies to the longitudinal direction of the pipe. For all editions of ASME
NC & ND (except ND-1982S) and JSME PPC, this input applies to the B1 stress index at
this point.
BLANK: Default is 1.0. For all editions of ASME NC & ND (except ND-1982S) and
JSME PPC, default is 0.5.
OPLN-L Out-plane circumferential SIF at this point. For the BS 7159 and ISO 14692 code options
only, this input applies to the longitudinal direction of the pipe. For all editions of ASME
NC & ND (except ND-1982S) and JSME PPC, this input applies to the B2 stress index at
this point.
PMULT/B2' Pressure multiplier for BS 7159 code option only.
Or additional Class NB index used for reversing dynamic stress summaries. For ASME
NB 2001 editions or later.
BLANK: Default is Automatic. AutoPIPE will automatically calculate the pressure

multiplier during post-processing.
Or the default is 1.0 when ASME NB is selected.
C1, C2, K1, Class NB indices at this point. For all editions of ASME NB stress index at this point.
K2, C3, K3,
C3’ BLANK: Default is 1.0 except 0.5 for C3'. For all editions of ASME NB
1 5 6 11 16 21 31 41 51 61 71
1 LINE PT1 PT2 SET STIFF GAP-B GAP-F
E lb/in in in
M kg/m mm mm
S N/mm mm mm
1 5 6 11 51 61 71
2 * TAG No.
1 5 6 11 51 61 71
3 * ATTACHMENT ID
Description
This card is entered to describe a given point as having a line stop to restrict movement along the pipe axis. The point data should be entered prior to entering this card. AutoPIPE assumes a stiffness of 10
lb/in for a rigid support. If the line stop is linear, all that is required is the gap setting type, and the stiffness value. If the line stop is nonlinear, a nonzero gap (forward and/or backward) is required.

character must be either N, F, M, or blank for
near, far and midpoints of a bend and for a
normal run point (respectively).
point.
A As-built
W Weightless
STIFF Stiffness value of the line stop.
TAG NO. BLANK: Default is 0.0

ATTACHMENT ID Attachment ID associated with the support.

image\ebd_72.gif
Description
This card is used to switch input of global offset values to that of local offset values. If direction cosines are input on this card, they define the local A axis for subsequent input. If the direction cosines are
left blank, the local A axis is taken as the direction of the last component before this card. This allows a simple means of input in terms of the length for skewed pipe runs. This convention remains active
until a GLOB card is encountered, or until a new SEG is entered, or immediately following a bend point.
COSAX X-direction cosine for the A axis.

COSAY Y-direction cosine for the A axis.
COSAZ Z-direction cosine for the A axis.
BLANK: If any one of the cosine values is given,
then those that are not given have the default value
of 0.0. If none of the cosine values are given, the
current run direction becomes the A-direction.
1 5 6 21 31 41 51 61 71
1 MATL NAME Y-MOD POIS DENS YIELD ULTIM EXPN
E lb/in^2 lb/ft^3 lb/in^2 lb/in^2 E-6/degF
M kg/cm^2 kg/m^3 kg/cm^2 kg/cm^2 E-6/degC
S N/mm^2 kg/m^3 N/mm^2 N/mm^2 E-6/degC
Description
This card is used to define a nonstandard structural material. It is referred to when defining a beam member on the BEAM card. To adequately describe the material, all parameter values should be given.
The YIELD value must be given.
NAME 1-15 character name of material.

Y-MOD Cold modulus of nonstandard material.
POIS Poisson's ratio of material.
DENS Density of material.
YIELD Yield strength of material.
BLANK: may not be left blank.
ULTIM Ultimate strength of material.
EXPN Material coefficient of thermal expansion.
MINP - Model Input List Report Sub-report Types

image\ebd_74.gif
Description
This card is used to define the sub-report types to be printed in the model input data list report. Enter Y (Yes) for each sub-report to be included in the Model Input List Report.
Option Sub-Report Type

1 Use version 6.1 report
format
BLANK: Default is N
2 Limit results to highlighted
points
BLANK: Default is N
3 Extended Component
BLANK: Default is N
4 Coordinates
BLANK: Default is N
5 Pipe Properties
BLANK: Default is N
6 Material Properties
BLANK: Default is N
7 Material Allowable Stresses
BLANK: Default is N
8 Temperature & Pressure
BLANK: Default is N
9 Segment data.
BLANK: Default is N
10 Not used.
BLANK: Default is Blank
11 Not used
BLANK: Default is Blank
12 Beam
BLANK: Default is N
13 Forces & Displacements
BLANK: Default is N
14 Thermal Anchor Movements

BLANK: Default is N
15 Seismic Anchor Movements
BLANK: Default is N
16 Earthquake Scale Factors
BLANK: Default is N
17 Soil Properties
BLANK: Default is N
18 Load Summary
BLANK: Default is N
19 Support
BLANK: Default is N
20 Bend
BLANK: Default is N
21 Tee
BLANK: Default is N
22 Valve
BLANK: Default is N
23 Flange
BLANK: Default is N
24 User SIF
BLANK: Default is N
25 Reducer
BLANK: Default is N
26 Rigid Pipe
BLANK: Default is N
27 Reference points
BLANK: Default is N
28 Include description
BLANK: Default is N
29 Gross discontinuity stress
BLANK: Default is N
30 Design temperature &
pressure
BLANK: Default is N
31 Center of gravity
BLANK: Default is N
1 5 6 11 16 21 31 36 41 42 44 46 51 61
1 MODE NUM P-STF CONT CUT HOT ANL PRN FAV FDENSF
Description
This card is used to enter modal analysis option data. It should be entered after all geometry (MODEL) data has been listed and should only be entered once. If it is entered again, the new values will
overwrite the previous data given with this card. This data establishes the number of mode shapes (think of them as load cases), and the default analysis parameters. Once mode shapes are calculated
response and force spectrum analyses, and harmonic analyses can be performed.
NUM Maximum number of modes to calculate.

P-STF Pressure stiffening case number. Enter 0 for no
pressure stiffening, or 1, 2 or 3 to use pressures
associated with operating load conditions 1, 2 or 3.
CONT Yes/No flag which allows the mass of the pipe
contents to be included (Y), or excluded (N) from
the mode shape calculations.
BLANK: Default is Yes.
CUT Cut-off frequency.
BLANK: Default is 33 Hz.
HOTMOD Hot Modulus thermal case. Enter 0 for no hot
modulus case or one thermal loadcase i.e. 1 to 100.
ANL Yes/No flag which will override the number of
modes field and analyze the model until the cutoff
frequency is reached.
BLANK: Default is No.
PRN Yes/No flag which prints the frequency immediately
following the cutoff frequency when enabled.
FAV Yes/No flag which will make AutoPIPE select the
undefined modes to be along the global axes.
FDENSF Fluid density factor.
MSRS - Multiple Support Response Spectrum

1 5 6 16 21 26 31 41 51 53 55 57 59
1 MSRS COMB SAM SUPPGP GPCMB F1 F2 ANAL MASS TACC PRMOD CGR
E
M
S
6 11 16 26
2 * NGP DIR SCALE SPCNM
E
M
S
Description
This card is used to enter the data necessary to identify a multiple support response spectrum. This card should be written like a RESP card after all the spectrums have been written in the NTL file. Each
support group can have line number 2 repeated for every X/Y/Z spectrum. Up to fifty (50) MSRS cards may be given. The first MSRS card found will be associated with the first multiple support
response spectrum case, the second one read will be associated with the second case, and so on.
COMB Combination method; used in combining modes.

S SRSS, square root of the sum of squares
G Grouping method as described in USNRC
Regulatory Guide 1.92 (1976)
T Ten percent from Regulatory Guide 1.92
D Double sum from Regulatory Guide 1.92
M Single double sum
C Signed CQC
Q Absolute CQC
BLANK: default is SRSS
SAM SAM load case number
BLANK: default is S1.
SUPPGP Analyze support group Options are:
ALL Analyze all support groups
N Number of support group to analyze
BLANK:
MCMB Missing mass combination
M Modal
S SRSS
A Absolute Sum
BLANK: default is S.
GPCMB Combination across groups
S Sum
A Absolute sum
R SRSS
BLANK: default is R.
F1 Grouping factor or Damping Ratio
If COMB is G or T, enter grouping facotr. If COMB

is D/M/Q/C enter the damping ratio.
F2 Earth quake duration
If COMB is D/M enter the seismic duration

MASS Missing mass correction flag
0 Do not include missing mass correction flag
1 Include missing mass correction flag
TACC Total acceleration
0 Do not use total acceleration
1 Include missing mass correction flag
ANAL Analyze flag
0 Off
1 On
PRMOD Print modal reports
0 Off
1 On
CGR Combine groups before modes. Needed for SRSS
modal combination only.
0 Off
1 On
NGP Support group number
DIR Direction of the spectrum. Options are:
X X-direction
Y Y-direction
Z Z-direction
BLANK:
SCALE Scale factor to be applied on spectrum
BLANK: default is 1.00.
SPCNM Name of the spectrum
BLANK:
NODE - Beam Member Node Point

1 6 13 20 21 41 61
NODE OFFSET
1 NODE NAME POINT X or DX Y or DY Z or DZ
E ft ft ft ft
M mm mm mm mm
S mm mm mm mm
Description
This card is used to define a point on a structural beam. This point is referred to on the BEAM card as one of the beam ends.
Node 1-5 character name of beam node (must be unique).

NAME
BLANK: must not be left blank.
OFFSET 1-5 character name of coordinate offset reference point.
POINT
BLANK: no offset reference point; coordinates are
global.
X or DX Global X coordinate or X distance from offset point.
Y or DY Global Y coordinate or Y distance from offset point.
Z or DZ Global Z coordinate or Z distance from offset point.
BLANK: Default coordinate offsets are 0.
NOZL - Vessel Nozzle

image\ebd_79.gif
Description
This card is used to input the data required to model a vessel nozzle. This card may be given anytime after the control cards have been given. Of particular note is the nozzle type. The type determines the
second line format as outlined below. If the type is spherical, all data is entered exclusively on the first card.
POINT 1-4 character name of point at far end of nozzle

(may not be left blank).
TYPE Nozzle flexibility calculation type. Valid options
are:
A ASME Class I nozzle
B Bijlaard
P API-650 tank nozzle
S Spherical
W WRC-297
U User-defined
BLANK: Default is Spherical
DX X direction offset to far point of nozzle.
DY Y direction offset to far point of nozzle.
DZ Z direction offset to far point of nozzle.
VTHK Vessel thickness (may not be left blank).
VRAD Vessel radius (may not be left blank).

NDIA Nozzle diameter, for type S only.
BLANK: Default is the pipe diameter.
If the ASME option was chosen as the nozzle type, the options for the second card are as follows:
image\ebd_80.gif
CONF ASME nozzle configuration (A, B, C, or D).

BLANK: Default is &rsquoA’.
L1 Length of the nozzle reinforcement along the nozzle axis
BLANK: Default is 0
SLOFF Offset of the nozzle outside wall at the base of the
connection from that at the nozzle top.
SLANG The angle between branch pipe and slope.
COSX X direction cosine of vessel axis.
COSY Y direction cosine of vessel axis.
COSZ Z direction cosine of vessel axis.
If either the Bijllard or WRC option was chosen as the nozzle type, the options for the second card are as follows:
image\ebd_81.gif
L1 Length between pipe/nozzle centerline and nearest vessel

(shell) stiffener
BLANK: Default is 0
L2 Length between pipe/nozzle centerline and nearest vessel
(shell) stiffener in the opposite direction from L1
l Though the data required for Bijllard and WRC is the same, the flexibility values are calculated differently.
If the API 650 option was chosen as the nozzle type, the options for the second card are as follows:
image\ebd_82.gif
REIN Specify if the reinforcement is on the nozzle (N) or the

vessel shell (S).Radial stiffness of nozzle.
BLANK: Default is N.
VESEND Specify whether the vessel is at the Near (N) or Far (F)
end of the nozzle.
NZHT Height of the nozzle from the base of the tank.
FILLHT Height of the liquid from the base of the tank.
SPGR Specific gravity of the liquid.
If the User option was chosen as the nozzle type, the options for the second card are as follows:
image\ebd_83.gif
RADL Radial stiffness of the nozzle.

BLANK: Default is calculated by AutoPIPE using the
Global Consistency Check.
CIRC Circumferential stiffness of the nozzle.
LONG Longitudinal stiffness of the nozzle.
COSZ
Batch Z direction cosine of vessel axis.
Input Reference
OOR - Out-of-Roundness
1 5 6 12 16 26
1 OOR POINT TYPE RATIO
E
M
S
POINT 1-5 character name of point. The fifth character must be N, F, M, or blank for
near, far and midpoints of a bend and for a normal run point (respectively). If
POINT is a branch point, temperature data will be applied to the point along
the last segment entered.

TYPE ASME NB Out of roundness type (2 options)
1 No radial discontinuity, M = 0.0. The out of roundness multiplier is

calculated in accordance with NB-3683.2(b)-1
2 Radial discontinuity, M = 2.0. For ferritic steels and nonferrous

material, except nickel-chromium-iron alloys and nickel-iron-chromium
alloys, the out of roundness multiplier is calculated in accordance with NB-
3683.2(b)-2. M = 2.7. For austenitic steels, nickel-chromium-iron alloys and
nickel-iron-chromium alloys, the out of roundness multiplier is calculated in
accordance with NB-3683.2(b)-2
If Type = 2 then the composition type in the PIPE card i.e. MCMP determines
the assigned M value.
Carbon , M = 2.0
Austenitic, M = 2.7
High Nickel Alloy, M = 2.7
Other , M = 2.0
BLANK: Default is M= 0.0

RATIO ASME NB ovality or out-of-roundness (Dmax-Dmin)/t ratio
OPER - Operating Loads
1 56 11 16 21 31 36 46 51 61 66
1 OPER POINT CASE TEMP PRES AUTO EXP AUTO MOD
E deg F lb/in2 in/100 ft E6 lb/in2
M deg C kg/cm2 mm/m E6
kg/cm2
S deg C N/mm2 mm/m E6

N/mm2
2 * AUTO SH, AUTO PR, AUTO DES, AUTO RUPT,
DS, DR, Y, ULT, POISSON
PS, A1 YS, TEN, SM
KF,
KH
E lb/in2 lb/in2 lb/in2 lb/in2
M kg/cm2 kg/cm2 kg/cm2 kg/cm2
S N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2
3 * DT1 DT2
E deg F deg F
M deg C deg C
S deg C deg C
Description
This card is used to give load data for all operating load conditions for version 8.5 or later. This card may be listed anytime after the point to which it refers has been defined. All data on this card will
apply to that point, and all subsequent points until a change in data is encountered (another OPER card is listed). Default values for the parameters are the previous values, except for the first OPER card
listed.
Notes:
1. An NTL file normally propagates a value forward if the field is left blank in a card. This logic does not apply to temperature or material dependent library look-up values, for example hot modulus. For
this type of data a change in pipe-id or temperature applied to a code material will always cause the hot allowable to be re-computed. However if the hot allowable is to be assumed identical to the one
last defined for a code material, an OPER card with AUTO option set to ’U’ for the hot allowable should be included. Use of negative values to indicate user-defined values will no longer be supported.
2. If an operating load case is not defined, the data from the previous defined case will be assumed.
3. Any undefined BLANK variable on this page assumes a 0 value.
4. Importing PRES and TEMP cards from previous versions of AutoPIPE will be supported. These operating data for these cards are limited to 3 cases. If both the TEMP and OPER cards reference the
same case, then the operating load data from the last processed card will take precedent.
5. Operating load data will be exported using OPER cards. TEMP and PRES cards will not be supported in any batch NTL export.
POINT 1-5 character name of point. The fifth character must be N, F, M, or

blank for near, far and midpoints of a bend and for a normal run point
(respectively). If POINT is a branch point, temperature data will be
applied to the point along the last segment entered.

assumed.
CASE Operating case number
TEMP Design temperature
BLANK: Default is 70°F, or 21.1°C (depending on the active units).

PRES Internal pressure of pipe
AUTO Automatic update option for material thermal expansion value only. This
option is ignored for non-standard materials.
EXP Thermal expansion value
AUTO Automatic update option for material modulus value only. This option is
ignored for non-standard materials.
MOD Hot modulus value
AUTO Automatic update option for code material SH, DS, PS, or A1 values
only. This option is ignored for standard and non-standard materials.
SH, DS, PS, SH: Hot allowable stress
A1
DS: Design strain (unitless) if BS7159.
PS: 0.2% proof stress if EURO.
A1: Temp A1 Factor (unitless and for ISO 14692 only)
BLANK: Default is 15,000 lb/in² for the first OPER card, or 0.0009
(unitless) for BS7159 on the first OPER card.
AUTO Automatic update option for code material PR, DR, Y, YS, or KF values
PR, DR, Y, PR: 0.2% proof stress if BS806. 1.0% proof stress if EURO.
YS, KF, KH
DR: Design stress range if Stoomwezen.
Y: Yield stress if MITI 501 3-1980, KHK, or JSME PPC.
YS: Yield strength if NC, ND, NC92, or ND92.
KF: K-Factor (unitless) if BS7159 or ISO 14692.
KH: Safety factor Kh for Russian SNIP 2.05.06-85 Oil & Gas, default is
1.0.
The following data is needed for BS806, MITI-3, or EURO codes only:
AUTO Automatic update option for code material DES, ULT, or TEN values
DES, ULT, DES: Design stress if BS806
TEN, SM
ULT: Ultimate stress if MITI 501 3-1980 or JSME PPC.
TEN: Tensile strength if EURO.
SM: Stress Intensity for ASME NB/NC/ND

AUTO Automatic update option for code material RUPT values or POISSON
RUPT, POISSON Rupture stress if BS806. Allowable creep rupture stress if EURO. For
ISO 14692, this field is the Poisson's ratio Vh/a
DT1 Delta T1 (class NB only)

DT2 DeltaT2 (class NB only)
PIPE - Pipe Data
1 5 6 7 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 76 80
1 PIPE PIPID OD S, L CORA MTOL ID LAMT MCMP LTW
or T
E in (in) in in in
M mm (mm) mm mm mm
S mm (mm) mm mm mm
2 * Tag
No.
3 * MATL SC, MOD EXPN PDEN POIS HOOP

YS,
2%
or
DS, al
(0:1)
E (lb/in²) E6 E-6/°F lb/ft³ E6
lb/in² lb/in²
M (kg/cm²) E6 E-6/° kg/m³ E6
kg/cm² C kg/cm²
S (N/mm²) E6 E-6/° N/m³ E6
N/mm² C N/mm²
4 * PINS CLAD CLADTHK INTHK INDEN SPGRV LTHK LDEN ULTIM
MAT
E in lb/ft³ in lb/ft³ lb/in²
M mm kg/m³ mm kg/m³ kg/cm²
S mm N/m³ mm N/m³ N/mm²
5 * CLADDENS ZLONG/K1 ZCIRC/K2 SHMOD SYC C4/al ELONG/al ETRAN/hl
(1:1) (2:1) (2:1)
(units
are
for al
(1:1)
only)
E E6 lb/ft³ (lb/in^2) %/ %/
lb/in² (lb/in^2) (lb/in^2)

M E6 kg/m³ (Kg/cm^2) %/ %/
kg/cm² (Kg/cm^2) (Kg/cm^2)
S E6 N/m³ (N/mm^2) %/ %
N/mm² (N/mm^2) (N/mm^2)
1 5 6 21 31 36 41 51 61 71 76
6 * MDESC MSRC MPROD TCRP/hl TMIN TMAX LWELD
(1:1) (units (units
are are
for for
TMIN TMAX
only)/A2 only)/A3
Chem Cyc
Res Service
E degF/ degF degF
(lb/in^2)
M degC/ degC degC
(Kg/cm^2)
S degC/ degC degC
(N/mm^2)
1 5 6 14 31 79
7 * ENV LINE FATIGUE
FAC /CAT. CLASS CURVE
M
E
M
S
Description
This card is used to input data describing the type of pipe used. It may be entered anytime after the control cards. The pipe data is applied to the immediately preceding point and all subsequent points
until another PIPE card is encountered. The default value for any given pipe parameter is the previous value for that parameter, except on the first PIPE card if the material is non-standard. The default
values for that case are described below.
PIPID 1-8 character pipe type identifier. If an existing pipe ID is used, no more data is required. May not be left blank.
Tag No. Enter the tag no. for pipe identifier. The maximum length of this field is 36 characters
OD Outside diameter of pipe (not including insulation). If a schedule S is entered, or the piping code is BS7159, this value represents the
nominal pipe diameter. If a wall thickness T is entered, this value represents the nominal pipe diameter if it matches a standard nominal
pipe diameter defined in a component library (*.LIB); otherwise, this value represents the actual pipe diameter. If the OD matches a
standard OD defined in the component library, then the corresponding nominal pipe diameter will be assigned as well. If the OD does not
exist in the component library, the nominal pipe diameter will be set to 'NS'.
If a negative value is entered, this value represents a non-standard pipe size with the actual pipe diameter equal to its absolute value. This
format can be used to define tubing products in which the actual pipe diameter is the same as the nominal pipe size.
S, L or T Pipe schedule, laminate reference (for BS7159), or wall thickness value. To input a pipe schedule, choose the desired schedule from the
list of defined pipes. Input S followed by the schedule number. (e.g., Schedule 40 is input as S40). For BS7159 data, enter the laminate
reference preceded by L (e.g., Laminate Reference L40 would be entered as LL40). To input a thickness value, simply enter the value.
The schedule must be defined as non-standard.
CORA Corrosion allowance or corrosion barrier for BS7159.
BLANK: Default is 0 for first PIPE card.]
MTOL The manufacturer's wall thickness tolerance.
BLANK: Default is 12.5% of wall thickness except for BS 7159, which does not use MTOL.
ID Inside diameter of PIPE for BS7159 only. Must not be 0 or blank on first PIPE card.
LAMT Laminate construction type for BS7159 only. Enter 1, 2 or 3 for the indicated laminate type.
MCMP Material composition code for determining the allowable stress range. This input is applicable to the SPC2, TBK56, KHK, ASME NB,
ASME NC/ND (2007 only), and EURO codes only. For materials in the material library, this field need not be filled.
C Carbon steel, chromium steel, and low alloy steel for all applicable codes except EURO. Casting steel for EURO only.
A Austenitic stainless and high nickel alloy steel
L Aluminum alloy and 9% nickel steel (KHK only)
O Other steel materials. For EURO, typically non-austenitic steels.
BLANK: Default is O.
LTW Suppress Low Temperature Warnings option applies to all piping codes
Y Suppress all material warnings when the ambient or operating temperature is below the minimum material library temperature
N Print all material warnings

MATL Pipe material. Enter any standard material or NS (for nonstandard).
BLANK: Default is NS for the first PIPE card.
SC, YS, Cold allowable stress (Sc), minimum yield strength (for
2% or DS ANSI B31.4, B31.8, CSA Z662, DNV and General only), 0.2% proof stress at room temperature (for BS 806 and EURO only), or cold
design strain (for BS7159 only - unitless). For EURO code, this field need not be entered for library materials with allowable stresses.
al(0:1) Long term axial stress with a 1:1 stress ratio. (For ISO 14692 only)
BLANK: If material is NS, default SC and 2% is 15,000 lb/in² for first PIPE card. Default YS is 40,000 lb/in² for first PIPE card. Default
DS is a 0.0009 (unitless) for first PIPE card. Default al(0:1) is 0.
MOD Cold modulus (for nonstandard material only), or longitudinal modulus for BS 7159 and ISO 14692.
BLANK: Default is 27.9 ´ 106 lb/in² for first PIPE card. For BS7159, default is 805,765 lb/in2 for first PIPE card.
EXPN If the VERNO = 0 or blank (see JOB card), the coefficient of thermal expansion for nonstandard materials must be specified in this field.
If the VERNO = 1.0, this field is ignored and should be left blank.
BLANK: Default is 6.5 ´ 10-6 /°F for first PIPE card. For BS 7159, the default is 16.67 x 10-6/°F for first PIPE card.
PDEN Density of the pipe (for nonstandard material only).
BLANK: Default is 489.0 lb/ft³ for first PIPE card. For BS 7159, the default is 83.0 lb/ft3 for first PIPE card.
POIS Poisson's ratio for the material (for nonstandard material only).
BLANK: Default is 0.3 for first PIPE card.
HOOP Hoop modulus for the material (for nonstandard material only), or circumferential modulus for BS7159 and ISO 14692.
BLANK: Default is the MOD value for first PIPE card.
PINS Insulation Material Type. This is a 1 character field in column 6. Use the first letter of the "Menu Option" column in the Standard Pipe
Insulation table. This field is ignored if the insulation thickness (INTHK) is 0.0.
BLANK: Default is no insulation material.
CLADMAT
Cladding insulation material
Cladding insulation thickness

CLADTHK
INTHK Insulation thickness. Used to determine pipe surface area and insulation weight.
INDEN Insulation density. Used in determining insulation weight. This field is ignored if the insulation thickness (INTHK) is 0.0.
SPGRV Specific gravity of contents. Used to determine the weight of the pipe contents.
LTHK Thickness of the pipe lining. Used to determine the lining weight.
LDEN Density of the pipe lining. Used to determine lining weight.
ULTIM Ultimate tensile strength at room temperature for B31.3, B31.8, Swedish, Norwegian, Dutch, and DNV codes. Minimum tensile strength
at room temperature for EURO. For EURO code, this field need not be entered for library materials with allowable stresses.
ZLONG Longitudinal weld efficiency factor.
Safety factor K1 (Russian SNIP 2.05.06-85 Oil & Gas)
K1 BLANK: Default is 1.0.
Density of cladding material
CLADDENS
ZCIRC Circumferential weld efficiency factor.
K2 Safety Factor K2 ( Russian SNIP 2.05.06-85 Oil & Gas)
SHMOD Shear modulus for the material

BLANK: Default is calculated by AutoPIPE during analysis.
SYC 1.0% proof stress for EURO. Cold Yield stress for all other codes. Not used for B31.4, B31.8, DNV, CSA-Z662, BS806, BS7159, MITI3,
and GENERAL codes. For EURO code, this field need not be entered for library materials with allowable stresses.
BLANK: If material is NS, default SYC is 40,000 lb/in² for cold yield stress and 0 for 1.0% proof stress for first PIPE card.
C4 Thermal stress ratchet factor used in calculating the maximum delta T1 range. This field is only available for the ASME NB 1982 W
Addenda edition or later.
BLANK: Default is 1.1 for carbon steel or 'Other' material compositions, and 1.3 for austenitic steel, high nickel alloy, or nickel-copper
material compositions.
Long term axial stress at a 1:1 stress ratio. (For ISO 14692 only)
ELONG Euro Code: Percent longitudinal elongation after rupture. For materials in the material library, this field need not be filled.
B31.3 Code: Long. Weld E factor
Other codes: Not used

al(2:1) Long term axial stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. (For ISO 14692 only)
ETRAN Euro Code: Percent transverse elongation after rupture. For materials in the material library, this field need not be filled.
B31.3 code: Long. Weld W factor
Other codes: Not used

hl(2:1) Long term hoop stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. For (ISO 14692 only)
MDESC Full material name (EURO only). For materials in the material library, this field need not be filled.
BLANK: default is set to pipe material (MATL)
MSRC Source of material data (EURO only). For materials in the material library, this field need not be filled.
NS Non-standard
EURO European Standard code materials
BS BS 806 code materials
ASME ASME BPVC, Section III - Part D code materials
SPC Swedish Piping Code 1978 code materials
MANN Mannesmannrohren-Werke AG code materials
DIN DIN Standard code materials
PHYS Physical property material names from all sources, i.e. GRP_1-5.2, CS, etc.
BLANK default is ’NS’ for first PIPE card
MPROD Steel product type (EURO only). For materials in the material library, this field need not be filled.
1 Seamless tube
2 Electric welded tube
3 Arc welded tube
4 Fusion welded tube
5 Fitting
6 Casting
7 Plate & Strip
8 Rolled bar
9 Forging
BLANK default is 1 (seamless) for first PIPE card
TCRP Minimum temperature at which creep rupture stress is checked (EURO only). For materials in the material library, this field need not be
filled.
hl(1:1) Long term hoop stress at a 1:1 stress ratio. (For ISO 14692 only)
TMIN Minimum material temperature for the program to display a warning message when exceeded (EURO only). For materials in the material
library, this field need not be filled.

A2 Chem Res Partial factor for chemical resistance. (For ISO 14692 only)
TMAX Maximum material temperature for the program to display a warning message when exceeded (EURO only). For materials in the material
library, this field need not be filled.
A3 Cyc Service Partial factor for cyclic service. (For ISO 14692 only)
LWELD Only applies to ASME NB/NC/ND
1 Seamless
2 As Welded Butt
3 Flush Butt Weld
BLANK: Default is 1 for first PIPE card.

Environmental factor used for determining the usage factor in fatigue analysis (ASME NB only).
ENV FAC
CAT. M Category factor m (Russian SNIP 2.05.06-85 Oil & Gas)
LINE CLASS Line Class string (16 Characters)

1 - 48 character name of the fatigue curve to be used in the ASME NB Class 1 fatigue analysis (ASME NB only).
FATIGUE
CURVE
BLANK: Default is ASME III - ADLPIPE (default)
Note: The second, third, fourth, or fifth continuation cards may not be required if the data on the current card set remains unchanged. All previous continuation cards are required up to the last card
specified.
PRES - Pressure Load Data

image\ebd_84.gif
Description
This card is used to enter pressure values for up to three operating load conditions. This card may be given anytime after the point to which it is associated has been defined. All data given with this card
will apply to that point and all points that follow until a change in pressure is given. Default values for all parameters are their previous values, except for the first PRES card given, and those values are
given below.
l An NTL file normally propagates a value forward if the field is left blank in a card. This logic does not apply to temperature or material dependent library look-up values, for example hot modulus.
For this type of data a change in pipe-id or temperature applied to a code material will always cause the hot allowable to be re-computed. However if the hot allowable is to be assumed identical to
the one last defined for a code material, a temperature card with a NEGATIVE hot allowable should be included with a PIPE, PRES, or TEMP card.
l New card OPER introduced in v8.5 replaces both TEMP and PRES cards although these older cards can still be used for up to 3 operating cases. If an OPER and TEMP and/or PRES card are
entered on subsequent lines then the last card processed will be used.

(respectively). If POINT is a branch point, pressure
data will be applied to the point along the last
segment entered.
BLANK: If no point is given, the immediately
PRES1 Internal pressure of pipe for operating load
condition #1.
PRES2 Same as PRES1, but for operating load condition
#2.
PRES3 Same as PRES1, but for operating load condition
#3.
PRIN - Batch Report Options

image\ebd_85.gif
Description
This card is used to control the contents of theBatch Report output file (SYSNAME.OUT). The numbers listed above correspond to each of the available sections listed below. If the default is not desired,
enter Y to include, or N to exclude, the corresponding section in/from the .OUT file.
l APOUT does not write the PRIN card. This card must be included in the neutral file by the user if it is desired.
1 Displacement.
BLANK: Default is Y.
2 Support.
3 Restraint.
4 Forces & Moments.
5 Code Compliance.
6 Not Used.
7 Frequency.
8 Mode Shapes
9 Equipment.
10 Soil.
11 Beam forces.
12 General stress.
13 Accelerations.
14 Flange.
15 Model listing.
16 Result summary.
17 Analysis summary.
18 Sort Stresses.
19 Steam Relief.
20 Bend Angular Distortion
21 Reference loads
l If desired, a parameter switch may be used instead of the PRIN card to create the Batch Report output file.
PSEF - Point Static Earthquake Scale Factor
image\ebd_86.gif
Description
This card is used to define point static earthquake scale factors at selected points that will be applied to the static earthquake loads defined in the SEIS card. The point must be defined prior to entering
this card. The point can be either a piping point or a beam point. Point scale factors X, Y, and Z are applied to lumped gravity loads such as added weights and flange weights.
POINT 1-5 character name of point. For a piping point,

the fifth character must be either N, F, M or
blank for near, far, midpoints of a bend and for
a normal run point, respectively.
X X-Direction scale factor for a point
Y Y-Direction scale factor for a point
Z Z-Direction scale factor for a point
PUMP - Rotating Equipment, Pump
1 5 6 16 21 26 31 36 41 46
1 PUMP EQPID SUCT SEG LOC DISCH SEG LOC TAB2
1 5 11 16 21 31 41 51 61 71
2 * REFPT ORIENT DXC DYC DZC COSX COSY COSZ
E ft ft ft
M mm mm mm
S mm mm mm
3 * DXS DYS DZS DXD DYD DZD
E ft ft ft ft ft ft
M mm mm mm mm mm mm
S mm mm mm mm mm mm
4 * MMUL
E
M
S
Description
This card is used to enter data for rotating equipment, type pump. The pump is given a name; an inlet, outlet, and base point; the location of each point; and the direction of the shaft axis. If a point is
given at a tee or continuation point, a segment name must also be given to clarify the pump's location along the system.
2. Enter continuation row 3 to override nozzle coordinates and specify nozzle offsets from a reference point instead.
EQPID 1-8 character name of pump equipment

identifier.
SUCT 1-5 character name of inlet point. The fifth
normal run point (respectively). May not be left
blank.
SEG If the point is at a tee or continuation point,
enter the segment name. Otherwise, leave
blank.
LOC Nozzle point location. Options are as follows:
T Top
S Side
E End
BLANK: Default is Top
DISCH 1-5 character name of outlet point. The fifth
normal run point (respectively). May not be left
blank.
TAB2 Nozzle load to be applied to factor API 610,
Table 2 for the pump.
REFPT 1-5 character name of reference point from
which the center of the pump is defined.
ORIENT Enter H for Horizontal or V for Vertical.
DX, DY, DZ Enter the X, Y, and Z offsets of pump center
point from the reference point.
COSX, COSY, For a horizontal pump, enter the X-direction,
COSZ Y-direction and Z-direction cosines of the
pump shaft axis; for a vertical pump, enter the
X-direction, Y-direction and Z-direction
cosines of the pedestal axis.
DXS, DYS, DZS Enter the X, Y, and Z offsets of the suction
point from the reference point. This input is
required if the reference point is not the suction
point.
BLANK: The default for DXS, DYS and DZS
is 0.
DXD, DYD, DZD Enter the X, Y, and Z offsets of the discharge
point from the reference point. This input is
required if the reference point is not the
discharge point.
BLANK: The default for DXD, DYD and DZD

is 0.
MMUL Enter the manufacturer allowable multiplier
used to update the already defined factors for
the rotating equipment. The valid values for
this factor should be between 0.5 and 20.
BLANK: The default is 1.0
RED - Reducer
1 5 6 11 16 21 31 41 51 61 71
1 RED POINT KNUCK UMAX DX or DY DZ ANGLE WELD
DA
E ft ft ft deg in
M mm mm mm deg mm
S mm mm mm deg mm
2 * LR1 SR2 LL1 SL1
E ft ft ft ft
M mm mm mm mm
S mm mm mm mm
Description
This card is used to input data for a reducer in the piping system. All that is required on this card are the offsets from the previous point. However, it is required that a PIPE card, describing the pipe at the
end of the reducer, follow this card.
POINT 1-4 character name of point at end of reducer (may not be

left blank).
KNUCK Option to specify whether the reducer is defined with or
without knuckles. This input is applicable only for the
SPC2 and TBK56 code options.
0: with knuckles
1: without knuckles
UMAX Yes/No flag which allows the use of the maximum SIF of
2.0 (Y) for the reducer and override the calculated SIF. If
Yes is specified, the input values for the ANGLE and
WELD will be ignored. This input is applicable to all
code options except B31.3, B31.4, B7159, SNCT,
CZ183, and CZ184.
DX Length of reducer along the X-direction.
or
DA Length of the reducer along the local A-direction as
specified on the LOCL card.
DY Length of reducer along the Y-direction.
DZ Length of reducer along the Z-direction.
ANGLE Cone angle of reducer.
Enter the cone angle in degrees. It is ignored if the
UMAX is Yes. This input is applicable to all code
options except B31.3, B31.4, B7159, SNCT, CZ183, and
CZ184.
WELD Weld mismatch. It is ignored if UMAX is Yes and
required if KNUCK is 1. This input is applicable only for
the SPC-2 and TBK5-6 code options.
LR1 Large End (R1) Flare Radius for ASME NB
SR2 Small End (R2) Flare Radius for ASME NB
LL1 Large End (L1) Length of Cylindrical Portion for
ASME NB
SL2 Small End (L2) Length of Cylindrical Portion for
ASME NB
Note: If the first point of the reducer is the first point of a new run, DX, DY, and DZ will be actual coordinates of the point at the far end of the reducer.
REFP - Reference Data Point
Description
This card is used to define a reference data point at an existing point. It may be entered any time after the point has been defined. No data other than the ID need be given.
ID 1-8 character reference ID
TAG Tag number
SIDE Reference side
B = Before
A = After
BLANK: Default is &rsquoA’
ACT Report actual loads
N = No
Y = Yes
BLANK: Default is &rsquoN’
COOR Load Coordinate System
G = Global
L = Local
BLANK: Default is &rsquoG’
DIR Load Direction
B = Before
A = After
BLANK: Default is &rsquoB’
ALLW Report allowable loads
N = No
Y = Yes
BLANK: Default is &rsquoN’
FX Allowable force in X direction
BLANK: None
FY Allowable force in Y direction
BLANK: None
FZ Allowable force in Z direction
BLANK: None
FR Allowable resultant force
BLANK: None
MX Allowable moment about X direction
BLANK: None
MY Allowable moment about Y direction
BLANK: None
MZ Allowable moment about Z direction
BLANK: None
MR Allowable resultant moment
BLANK: None
RESP - Response Spectrum Load Case

1 5 6 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 76
1 RESP COMB XSPEC XFAC YSPEC YFAC ZSPEC ZFAC ZPA MASS
E
M
S
1 5 6 8 10 12 21 31
2 * ANAL TACC MMCMB PRMOD F1 F2
E
M
S
Description
This card is used to enter the data necessary to calculate dynamic earthquake forces and moments. This card must follow all SPEC cards used to build the spectra to which this card refers. All names
given with this card must match the name of a previously defined spectrum. Up to fifty (50) RESP cards may be given. The first RESP card found will be associated with the first response spectrum case,
the second one read will be associated with the second case, and so on.
COMB Combination method; used in combining modes.

S SRSS, square root of the sum of squares

G Grouping method as described in USNRC
Regulatory Guide 1.92 (1976)
T Ten percent from Regulatory Guide 1.92
D Double sum from Regulatory Guide 1.92
M Single double sum
C Signed CQC
Q Absolute CQC
BLANK: Default is SRSS
XSPEC 1-8 character name of spectrum to be used in the X
direction (see the SPEC card for details).
BLANK: No spectrum for this direction.
XFAC Scale factor of spectrum values for X-direction.
BLANK: Default is 1.0 (No scale factor).
YSPEC 1-8 character name of spectrum to be used in the Y-
YFAC Scale factor of spectrum values for Y-direction.
ZSPEC 1-8 character name of spectrum to be used in the Z-
ZFAC Scale factor of spectrum values for Z-direction.
options are:
0 do not include ZPA correction.
1 include ZPA correction.
0 do not include Missing Mass correction.
1 include Missing Mass correction.
ANAL
0 Off
1 On
TACC Total acceleration
0 Do not use total acceleration
1 Use total acceleration
MMCMB Missing mass combination
M Modal
S SRSS
A Absolute Sum
BLANK: default is S.
PRMOD Print modal reports
0 Off
1 On
F1 Grouping factor or earthquake duration. If COMB is
G or T, enter the grouping factor. If COMB is D,
enter the earthquake duration. If COMB is S, this
line is not needed.
F2 Damping ratio. This parameter is needed only if
COMB is D, M, C or Q.

image\ebd_91.gif
Description
This card allows the specification of rigid options for run, bend and reducer components. All other component types will be ignored and a warning message will be given. This card should be listed after
all points have been defined.
PT1 1-5 character name of the near point of the component. The fifth character must
either be N or F for the near and far points of a bend, respectively. If PT1 is not
the near point of a run, near or far point of a bend, near point of a reducer, tee
point, or junction point, this card will be ignored. This field cannot be left blank.
PT2 1-5 character name of the far point of the component. The fifth character must
either be N or F for the near and far points of a bend, respectively. If the name of
the far point of the component is invalid, it will be ignored and the correct far
point will be assumed. Except for tee and junction points, this field can be left
blank.
BLANK: If no name is given, the far point of the component is assumed. If PT1
is a tee or junction point, PT2 should not be blank. If left blank, the rigid options
will be arbitrarily assigned to the first leg of the tee or junction point.
WEIGHT Include weight
BLANK: Default is N
EXPANSION Include thermal expansion
BLANK: Default is N
1 5 6 11 16 21 31 41 51 61 71
1 ROTA PT1 PT2 RATE
E ft-lb/deg
M kg-cm/deg
S N-m/deg
1 5 6 11 51 61 71
1 5 6 11 51 61 71
3 * ATTACHMENT ID
Description
This card is used to describe a rotational support which restricts only rotations of the pipe. AutoPIPE assumes a rotational stiffness of 10 lb×in/deg for a rigid support. These rotational restraints may be
about a global axis or a skewed axis. The direction cosines are therefore required for this card. Like the other support cards, this card must be entered after the point to which it applies has been defined.

must be either N, F, M or blank for near, far and
(respectively).
RATE Spring rate
BLANK: Support is rigid.
TAG NO. BLANK: Default is 0.0

ATTACHMENT
ID

image\ebd_94.gif
Description
This card allows the specification of the rigid stiffness factor to multiply against the material elastic modulus for all components with Rigid Options. If this card is not specified, the default factor will be
1000.
FACTOR Rigid stiffness

factor
BLANK:
1000.0
RUN - Run Point

image\ebd_95.gif
Description
This card is used to enter the coordinates of a normal run point. It may be given anytime after the first SEG card. The actual coordinates of this point are not entered, but rather the offsets from the
previous point.

DX The distance from previous point along the X-
direction.
or
DA Offset along local A-dimension as specified on the
LOCL card.
DY The distance from the previous point along the Y-
direction.
DZ The distance from the previous point along the Z-
direction.
BLANK: If any or all of the delta fields are left
blank, their values are assumed to be 0.
RVER - Change NTL Version
This card is only written by the PCF translator.
1 5 6
1 RVER VERNO
E
M
S
Note: The purpose of this NTL card is to change the NTL version number temporarily. Certain data requires a newer version of NTL in order to be included in the translation. However, once that data
has been translated it is important to change the NTL version back so data that requires the original version is not lost. That is why the RVER card appears twice; once before and once after the card with
the affected data.
Description
This card is used to reset the version of NTL.
VERNO NTL version number
SECT - Beam Member Nonstandard Cross Section

1 6 14 51 56 61 65
1 SECT SECID SECNAME SHAPE CCODE STD MATERIAL
E
M
S
11 21 31 41 51 61
2 DEPTH WIDTH Web Thk Flg Thk Spacing
E in in in in in
M mm mm mm mm mm
S mm mm mm mm mm
11 21 31 41 51 61
3 AXIAL Y_SHR Z-SHR TORSION MAJBN MINBN
E in**2 in**2 in**2 in**4 in**4 in**4
M cm**2 cm**2 cm**2 mm**4 mm**4 mm**4
S cm**2 cm**2 cm**2 mm**4 mm**4 mm**4
Description
This card is used to define a doubly symmetric, nonstandard (structural member) cross section. To define the cross section, all parameters must be given; none of the data fields may be left blank.
If a section is not found in the MDB files, the program will look up the standard section from AUTOFRAM.LIB. Some of these sections are WT, P, XS, XXS and DL.
Program will lookup for section name in all tables (for all countries), if there are multiple sections, American or first section will be selected and a warning message will be displayed.
Note: Cold Formed and Timber sections are not available
Section ID, A number between 1 and 9999
SECID (Left justified)

SECNAME Section name up to 36 characters.
Section shape: Standard structural shape prefix.
NS=Nonstandard or General Section
I = For W, M, S and HP sections

SHAPE
C = Channel
WT = Tee or Tee from W section
L = Angle
DL = Double angle (Equal or Long Leg Back

to Back)
SD = Double angle (Short Leg Back to Back)
TU = Rect. Tube
P = Pipe
ST = Solid Rect. Tube
SP = Solid Pipe
ZE = Zee
HA = Hat
DC = Double Channel (Back to Back)
FR = Double Channel (Front to Front)
Country Code (2 letters, max of 2

characters):
For American enter US.
1 US American
2 AU Australian
3 GB British
4 CA Canadian
CCODE
5 CN Chinese
6 NL Dutch
7 EU European
8 FR French
9 DE German
10 IN Indian
11 JP Japanese
12 RU Russian
13 ZA SouthAfrican
14 ES Spanish
15 VE Venezuelan
16 KR Korean
17 AL Aluminum
18 AC AmericanColdFormed
19 IC IndianColdFormed
20 MX Mexican
21 AJ AmericanSteelJoist
22 AT AITCTimber
23 LC LysaghtColdFormed
24 GC BritishColdFormed
25 CT CanadianTimber
26 BC ButlerColdFormed
27 KC KingspanColdFormed
28 RC RCecoColdFormed
Cold formed, Timber and Joist sections are not
supported in AutoPIPE. Unsupported sections
will have" _???" added to the name and areas
will be assumed 1.0 in2 and inertias 1.0 in4.
STD (NS for Non standard, otherwise STD)
MATERIAL Material name (1 to 16 char). Enter material
previously defined on MATL card or AutoPIPE
standard material (see Appendix A for details).
DEPTH Section Depth (or diameter) - along Local Y
WIDTH Width (along Local Z)
WEBTHK Web thickness (or pipe thickness)
FLGTHK Flange thickness or spacing for Double Angle
SPACING Channel spacing
AXIAL Axial area of section.
Y-YSH Local Y-Y axis shear area.
Z-ZSH Local Z-Z axis shear area.
TORS Torsional inertia.
Z-ZBN Bending inertia about local Z-Z axis.
Y-YBN Bending inertia about local Y-Y axis.
SEG - Pipe Segment

image\ebd_97.gif
Description
This card is used to begin entering data for a new segment of piping and components, and it may be used anytime after the control cards have been entered. The point, which is to become the first point of
a new segment, need not have been entered previously. The X, Y, and Z fields are used as a means of entering the global coordinates of POINT. The first nonblank X, Y, Z entries for POINT found on a
SEG card will be used as POINT's coordinates. All subsequent nonblank entries will be used as a cross-check of coordinate calculations. However, if a segment is entered which is unconnected to the rest
of the system, the X, Y and Z fields are used to input the global coordinates of the starting point of this new segment.
POINT 1-4 character name of first point on the segment

(may not be left blank).
NM 1-2 character name of segment (optional).
BLANK: A default name is assigned based on the
highest segment name used previously.
XPT POINT's global X-coordinate. First nonblank entry
for POINT on a SEG card is used as coordinate.
Subsequent nonblank entries used for error
checking.
YPT POINT's global Y-coordinate. First nonblank entry
checking.
ZPT POINT's global Z-coordinate. First nonblank entry
checking.
SEIS - Static Earthquake Load Case

image\ebd_98.gif
Description
This card is used to define a static earthquake load as a multiple of the gravity load in the global X-Y-Z directions. This card may be entered anytime after the control cards have been given, but is
generally placed after all geometry (MODEL) data has been given. The data given will apply only to the case given. If more than one case is required, this card should be given for the other cases as well. If
a SEIS card has already been given for the case specified, the new data will overwrite the previous for that load case number.
CASE Earthquake load case number (0-3). If 0 is entered,

no other data is read.
XMULT X-Direction gravity load multiple.
YMULT Y-Direction gravity load multiple.
ZMULT Z-Direction gravity load multiple.

(Replaced by JSIF in v8.9 and later)
1 5 6 13 16 19 21 31 41 51 61 71
1 SIF POINT OVER OVB1 OVB2 IPLN OPLN FLEX IPLN-L OPLN-L PMULT/B2'
This applies to pre v8.9 models, if used in 8.9 or later then is interpreted as Joint End type = 'User'
It is recommended to use JSIF card for 8.9 or later versions.
Description
This card is used as a means of entering nonstandard stress intensification factors (SIF's) and stress indices B1 and B2 (ASME NC & ND). It must be given after the point at which it acts has been
defined.
POINT 1-5 character name of point. The fifth character must be either N, F, M,
or blank for near, far and midpoints of a bend and for a normal run point
(respectively).

assumed.
OVER SIF override flag. If this flag is set, this SIF will override all others at this
point. If not set, this SIF will be used only if it is the maximum at this
point. Options are as follows:
1: Override all other SIF's.
OVB1 B1 override flag for all editions of ASME NC & ND only except ND-
1982S. If this flag is set, this B1 value will override all others at this
point. If not set, this B1 value will be used only if it is the maximum at
this point. Options are as follows:
OVB2 B2 override flag for all editions of ASME NC & ND only except ND-
1982S. If this flag is set, this B2 value will override all others at this
point. If not set, this B2 value will be used only if it is the maximum at
this point. Options are as follows:
IPLN In-plane SIF at this point. For the BS 7159 code option only, this input
applies to the circumferential direction of the pipe. For all editions of
ASME NC & ND, this input applies to the SIF at this point.

OPLN Out-plane SIF at this point. For the BS 7159 code option only, this input
applies to the circumferential direction of the pipe. For all editions of
ASME NC & ND, this input is not used.

FLEX Flexibility factor for bends used to calculate bend stiffness.
BLANK: Default is Automatic. AutoPIPE will automatically calculate

the bend stiffness during analysis.
IPLN-L In-plane SIF at this point. For the BS 7159 code option only, this input
applies to the longitudinal direction of the pipe. For all editions of ASME
NC & ND except ND-1982S, this input applies to the B1 stress index at
this point.
BLANK: Default is 1.0. For all editions of ASME NC & ND except

ND-1982S, default is 0.5.
OPLN-L Out-plane SIF at this point. For the BS 7159 code option only, this input
applies to the longitudinal direction of the pipe. For all editions of ASME
NC & ND except ND-1982S, this input applies to the B2 stress index at
this point.
BLANK: Default is 1.0. For all editions of ASME NC & ND except

ND-1982S, default is 1.0.
PMULT/B2' Pressure multiplier for BS 7159 code option only.
Or additional Class NB index used for reversing dynamic stress

summaries. For ASME NB 2001 editions or later.
BLANK: Default is Automatic. AutoPIPE will automatically calculate

the pressure multiplier during post-processing.
Or the default is 1.0 when ASME NB is selected.
SLEV - Seismic Level
1 5 6 8 11 21 31 41 51 61 71
*S-Y(S1) *S-Y(S2)
*S-X(CI) *S-Z(CI) Factor1 Factor2
1 SLEV LEVEL OPT /*D-Y(S1) /*D-Y(S2)
/*S-X(xCi) /*S-Z(xCi) /KD1 /KD2
/*D-Y(Sd/SB) /*D-Y(Ss)
0
*D-X(S1) *D-Z(S1) *SAM-S1 *SAM-S2

2 * 3-dir Gravity
H/V /*D-X(S1/Sb) /*D-Z(S1/Sb) *D-X(S2) *D-Z(S2) /*SAM-X/Z(S1/Sb) /*SAM-X/Z(S2)
Comb /*D-X(Sd/SB) /*D-Z(Sd/SB) /*D-X(Ss) /*D-Z(Ss) /*SAM-X(Sd/SB/SC) /*SAM-X(Ss)
3 * Occasional *S-Y(xCv) KS Factor *SAM-Z(Sd/SB/SC) *SAM-Y(Sd/SB/SC) *SAM-Z(Ss) *SAM- Y(Ss)
*S-Static Seismic combination
*D-Dynamic Seismic combination
*SAM-Seismic Anchor Movement combination
Description
This card is used to define seismic level and the load cases for forming the default seismic load combinations for MITI-3 and JSME PPC code options only.
LEVEL Seismic level code options.
Valid options for MITI and JSME 2005: AS, A, B, C, or

NONE.
Valid options for JSME 2008: S, B, C or NONE
If NONE is specified, no default seismic load combinations

will be formed.
BLANK: Default is C.
OPT Option to use default seismic load cases to form the seismic
load combinations for the specified seismic level. If OPT is
set to 0 or blank, no further input is required for this card.
0: use default seismic load cases.
1: user load cases defined on this card.
X(CI)/X(xCi) Load case to be used for static seismic acting in the global
X-direction. Valid entries for JSME PPC are E1 to E10 and
NONE. Valid entries for MITI are E1 to E3 and NONE.
Available for seismic level: AS, S, A, B, C
BLANK: Default is E1.

Z(CI)/Z(xCi) Load case to be used for static seismic acting in the global Z-
direction. Valid entries for JSME PPC are E1 to E10 and

Y(S1)/Y(Sd/SB) Static or dynamic seismic load case to be used for S1 or
Sd/SB seismic acting in the global Y-direction. Valid entries
for JSME PPC are E1 to E10, R1-R50, M1-M50, and
Available for seismic level: AS, A for MITI and JSME 2005
code year
Available for seismic level: S, B for JSME 2008 code year
BLANK: Default is E3 for MITI and JSME 2005 code year.

Default is R3 for JSME 2008 code year.
Factor1/KD1 Load case factor to be used for S1 seismic acting in the
global Y-direction. The value must be ≥ 0.0. This value is
not used in JSME 2008 code year.
BLANK: Default is 1.0 for MITI and 0.5 for JSME PPC
Y(S2)/Y(Ss) Static or dynamic seismic load case to be used for S2 or Ss
seismic acting in the global Y-direction. Valid entries for
JSME PPC are E1 to E10, R1-R50, M1-M50, and NONE.
Valid entries for MITI are E1 to E3 and NONE.
Available for seismic level: AS, S, A, B
BLANK: Default is E3 for MITI and JSME 2005 code year.

Factor2/KD2 Load case factor to be used for S2 seismic acting in the
global Y-direction. The value must be ≥ 0.0. This value is
not used in JSME 2008 code year.

3-dir Apply 3 dir at the same time. Available in JSME 2008 code
year. For class C, this option is not available. Valid values
are 0: Not applied, 1: Applied

H/V Comb Available in JSME 2008 code year. Valid values are 1 -
SRSS, 2: ABS Sum
BLANK: Default is 1:SRSS

Gravity Gravity load cases. Available only in JSME 2008 code year.
Valid options are Gravity load cases.
BLANK: Default is GR{1} or GR

X(S1) Dynamic seismic load case to be used for S1 or S1/Sb or
Sd/SB seismic acting in the global X-direction. Valid entries
/X(S1/Sb) for JSME PPC 2005 are R1 to R50, M1 to M50, and NONE.
Valid entries for JSME PPC 2008 are E1 to E10, R1 to R50,
/X(Sd/SB) M1 to M50, and NONE. Valid entries for MITI are R1 to
R4, M1 to M3, and NONE.
BLANK: Default is R1.

Z(S1) Dynamic seismic load case to be used for S1 or S1/Sb or
Sd/SB seismic acting in the global Z-direction. . Valid
/Z(S1/Sb) entries for JSME PPC 2005 are R1 to R50, M1 to M50, and
NONE. Valid entries for JSME PPC 2008 are E1 to E10, R1
/Z(Sd/SB) to R50, M1 to M50, and NONE. Valid entries for MITI are
R1 to R4, M1 to M3, and NONE.
BLANK: Default is R2.

X(S2)/X(Ss) Dynamic seismic load case to be used for S2 or Ss seismic
acting in the global X-direction. . Valid entries for JSME
PPC 2005 are R1 to R50, M1 to M50, and NONE. Valid
entries for JSME PPC 2008 are E1 to E10, R1 to R50, M1 to
M50, and NONE. This input is applicable to seismic level
AS and S only. Valid entries for MITI are R1 to R4, M1 to
M3, and NONE.
Available for seismic level: AS, S
BLANK: Default is R3 for MITI and JSME 2005 code year.

Z(S2)/Z(Ss) Dynamic seismic load case to be used for S2 or Ss seismic
acting in the global Z-direction. . Valid entries for JSME
PPC 2005 are R1 to R50, M1 to M50, and NONE. Valid
entries for JSME PPC 2008 are E1 to E10, R1 to R50, M1 to
M50, and NONE. This input is applicable to seismic level
AS and S only. Valid entries for MITI are R1 to R4, M1 to
M3, and NONE.
BLANK: Default is R4 for MITI and JSME 2005 code year.

S1/ Load case to be used for seismic anchor movements due to
S1 or S1/Sb or Sd/SB/SC seismic. Valid entries for JSME
X/Z(S1/Sb)/ PPC are S1 to S10, U1 to U140, and NONE. Valid entries
for MITI are S1 to S3 and NONE.
X(Sd/SB/SC)
BLANK: Default is S1.

S2/ Load case to be used for seismic anchor movements due to
S2 or Ss seismic. Valid entries for JSME PPC are S1 to S10,
X/Z(S2)/ U1 to U140, and NONE. This input is applicable to seismic
level AS and S only. Valid entries for MITI are S1 to S3 and
X(Ss) NONE.

Occasional Occasional load cases. Available only in JSME 2008 code
year. Valid entries are MAX, U1 to U140, M1 to M50, F1 to
F110, W1 to W10 and NONE.
BLANK: Default is MAX.

Y(xCv) Load case to be used for static seismic acting in the global
Y-direction for JSME PPC only. Valid entries for JSME PPC
are E1 to E10 and NONE.
Available for seismic level: AS, S, A

KS Load case factor to be used for static seismic acting in the
global Y-direction for JSME PPC only. The value must be ≥
0.0. This value is not used in JSME 2008 code year.

Z(Sd/SB/SC) Load case to be used for seismic anchor movements due to
Sd/SB/SC seismic. Available only in JSME 2008 code year.
Valid entries for JSME PPC are S1 to S10, U1 to U140, and
NONE.
Available for seismic level: S, B, C

Y(Sd/SB/SC) Load case to be used for seismic anchor movements due to
Sd/SB/SC seismic. Available only in JSME 2008 code year.
Valid entries for JSME PPC are S1 to S10, U1 to U140, and
NONE.
Available for seismic level: S, B, C

Z(Ss) Load case to be used for seismic anchor movements due to
Ss seismic. Available only in JSME 2008 code year. Valid
entries for JSME PPC are S1 to S10, U1 to U140, and
NONE.
Available for seismic level: S

Y(Ss) Load case to be used for seismic anchor movements due to
Ss seismic. Available only in JSME 2008 code year. Valid
entries for JSME PPC are S1 to S10, U1 to U140, and
NONE.
Available for seismic level: S
BLANK: Default is S6
SOBL - Soil Overburden Loads

This card is used for entering the data regarding soil overburden loads associated with a soil identifier.
1 5 6 11 21 31 36 41 51 61 71
1 SOBL Name Pipe ID TrenchCond. Circ.Wbending Mod.Fill Kb Kx
E psi psi
M Kg/cm2 Kg/cm2
S N/mm2 N/mm2
2 * DI BeddingK SLD FileName PRESS
E psi
M Kg/cm2
S N/mm2
Description
Name Soil Identifier Name

PipeID Pipe ID used for calculating soil overburden data
TrenchCond. Conditions 1-5, 0 = User
Blank: User
Circ.WBending Circ. Wall bending f calculated value
Blank: 0.0
Mod.Fill Modulus of passive soil fill reaction
Blank: 0.0
Kb Bending moment coefficient Kb
Blank: 0.0
Kx Deflection coefficient Kx
Blank: 0.0
DI Deflection lag factor Dl
Blank: 0.1
BeddingK Bedding constant k
Blank: 0.1
SLD File Surface live load type file name e.g: Highway-H20, Cooper-E80, Airport-180k
Blank: None
PRESS Pressure on pipe due to surface load
Blank: 0.0
SOIL - Buried Pipe
Description
This card is used to define the buried portion of a piping system. This card should follow the first buried point. All the points after this card will also be assumed to be buried in the current soil property
set. The buried region may be terminated by specifying the SOIL card with END as the defined NAME. The properties of the buried region may be changed by specifying a new SOIL card without
terminating the previous region.
NAME 1 6 character soil name. If an existing soil name

is used, no more data is required.
END or BLANK: Terminate the existing soil
region.
SPACE Maximum spacing of soil points (generated
automatically).
The below mentioned fields are repeated for all

three stiffness types:
HZ K1 Initial soil stiffness in horizontal direction.
LG K1 Initial soil stiffness in longitudinal direction.
VU K1 Initial soil stiffness in upward direction.
VD K1 Initial soil stiffness in downward direction.
Auto HZ K1 Auto flag for initial soil stiffness in horizontal
direction.
Auto LG K1 Auto flag for initial soil stiffness in longitudinal
direction.
Auto VU K1 Auto flag for initial soil stiffness in upward
direction.
Auto VD K1 Auto flag for initial soil stiffness in downward
direction.
HZ P Yield strength of the horizontal soil.
LG P Yield strength of the longitudinal soil.
VU P Yield strength of the upward soil.
VD P Yield strength of the downward soil.
Auto HZ P Auto flag for yield strength of the horizontal
soil.
Auto LG P Auto flag for yield strength of the longitudinal
soil.
Auto VU P Auto flag for yield strength of the upward soil.
Auto VD P Auto flag for yield strength of the downward
soil.
HZ K2 Final soil stiffness in horizontal direction.
LG K2 Final soil stiffness in longitudinal direction.
VU K2 Final soil stiffness in upward direction.
VD K2 Final soil stiffness in downward direction.
The second and third soil continuation lines are required only if a new soil is being defined.
SOLV - ALL: Analyze for All Defined Load Cases

image\ebd_112.gif
Description
A SOLV card, with the ALL analysis type is used to define analysis options which correspond to each of the defined load cases. The ANAL field must be set to ALL. This card must be preceded by any
card which defines a load case to be analyzed.
1 Y/N for analysis execution

N = will not analyze
Time History load case is not supported and will not be executed.
SOLV - Execute an AutoPIPE Analysis

image\ebd_102.gif
Description
Each SOLV card is used to enter analysis options for the specified analysis type. Predefined load cases can be activated or deactivated individually, and options specific to the type of analysis can be set.
All SOLV cards should be organized after all geometry (MODEL) and load case data has been listed. The general format for the SOLV card is shown above. However, the specific information required
for column numbers sixteen (16) through eighty (80) on line 1, and whether line 2 or 3 is necessary, depends on the specific AutoPIPE analysis requested. The SOLV card is not written by AutoPIPE
during the File/Export.Batch command. It must be included in the neutral file by the user if it is to be considered by AutoPIPE when selecting the File/Import/Batch command. The following pages
describe each of the analysis options and their associated data requirements. The generic SOLV card variables are as follows:
ANAL Type of AutoPIPE analysis. Valid options are as

follows:
HANG: Hanger design run
STAT: Static analysis
MODE: Modal analysis
RESP: Response spectrum analysis
HARM: Harmonic analysis
FSPC: Force spectrum analysis
SAM: Seismic anchor movement analysis
ALL: Analyze for all referenced load cases
BLANK: Default is ALL. All load cases
previously referenced in this batch input file will

be considered, and all standard AutoPIPE
analysis defaults will be used.
DATA Specify active load cases, and define analysis
options.
Note: If desired, parameter switches may be used instead of the SOLV card to control the automatic execution of analyses. Refer to the Automated System Processing Appendix for further details.
In the topics that follow, where the various ANAL options are described, only the DATA variables specific to that analysis are discussed.
SOLV - FSPC: Force Spectrum Analysis

image\ebd_110.gif
Description
A SOLV card, with the FSPC analysis type is used to define analysis options for a force spectrum analysis. The ANAL field must be set to FSPC. This card must be preceded by at least one FSPC card, a
MODE card, and a SOLV (MODE) card in order to properly execute a force spectrum analysis.


CASES Force spectrum cases to be included in the analysis.
Separate each load case with a blank or comma.
Valid options are: F1, F2, F3...F10
SOLV - HANG: Hanger Design Run

1 5 6 11 16 21 31 41 51 61 71
1 SOLV 1 HANG MANF DISP LRAT
E in
M mm
S mm
5 6 11 18 21 31 41 51 61 72 74 76 78 79
2 * CONT CUT STIF ITER DTOL FTOL FRTOL SCALE E G S P IC
E
M
S
1 5 6
3 * Cases
Description
A SOLV card, with the HANG analysis type is used to define analysis options for a hanger design run. The ANAL field must be set to HANG. Lines two and three shown above are optional and allow
the user to specify such things as the number of iterations desired, displacement tolerance, and the load case sequencing for nonlinear effects.


MANF Spring hanger manufacturer. Valid options are as follows
1 = Anvil International (formerly 11 = Bergen-Power (BPCat2V)
Grinnell)
2 = Bergen-Patterson Pipe Support 12 = Witzenmann (HYDRA)
3 = Power Piping 13 = QPS (Quality Pipe Supports)
4 = Piping Technology & Products 14 = Mitsubishi Nagasaki
5 = NPS Industries 15 = NHK (Nihon Hatsujo)
6 = Basic Engineering 16 = Sanwa Tekki
7 = Lisega 17 = Yamashita Seisakusho
8 = Carpenter & Paterson 18 = Pihasa
9 = Comet (Pipe Supports, Ltd.) 19 = China NorthWest
10 = SSG 7051 Standard 20 = China HuaDong
BLANK: Default is Anvil 21 = Sarathi
22 = China Petrochemical
DISP Displacement criterion for rigid hanger selection.
BLANK: Default is 0.1 inches.
LRAT Permissible load variation ratio.
CONT Enter Y (yes) if the weight of the pipe contents are to be included in the
analysis. Otherwise, enter N (no).
CUT Enter Y (yes) if previously defined cut-short effects are to be considered

in the analysis. Otherwise, enter N (no).
STIF Pressure stiffening case number. Enter 0 for no pressure stiffening effects.
Otherwise, enter 1, 2...100 to use pressures associated with operating
load conditions 1, 2 ...100 respectively.
If the hanger design run is to be linear, no other data is needed.
ITER Maximum number of nonlinear analysis iterations per load case.

BLANK: Default is 0 if no soil, support gaps, or support friction is
defined in the system. If soil, gaps, or friction are present the default
is 5 iterations.
DTOL Support displacement error tolerance.
FTOL Support force error tolerance.
BLANK: Default is 100 lb.
FRTOL Friction force error tolerance ratio.
SCALE Friction scale factor.
E Ignore friction (E1 to E10). (Y/N, default=Y)
G Ignore friction for GR case. (Y/N, default=Y)
S Use default load sequence. (Y/N, default=Y)
P Use Pressure before temperature (Y/N, default=N)
IC Initial case for occasional loads (0=GR, 1=OP1, 20=OP20) &ldots;
up to OP99
Default is GR if blank.
CASES Thermal operating load conditions to be considered. At least one
defined operating load condition must be included. The gravity load
case (GR) is automatically included for analysis. Separate each load
case listed with a space or comma. Valid options are any
combination of T1 to T100.
BLANK: Default is T1 (only). In this case only gravity (GR) and the
first thermal operating load case (T1) will be considered.
SOLV - HARM: Harmonic Analysis

image\ebd_109.gif
Description
A SOLV card, with the HARM analysis type is used to define analysis options for a harmonic analysis. The ANAL field must be set to HARM. This card must be preceded by an HLOD card in order to
define at least one harmonic load case.


CASES Harmonic cases to be included. Separate each load
case with a blank, or comma.
Valid options are: H1, H2, H3...H10
SOLV - RESP: Response Spectrum Analysis

image\ebd_108.gif
Description
A SOLV card, with the RESP analysis type is used to define analysis options for a response spectrum analysis. The ANAL field must be set to RESP. This card must be preceded by at least one RESP
card, a MODE card, and a SOLV (MODE) card in order to properly execute a response spectrum analysis.

CASES Response spectrum cases to be included. Separate

each load case with a blank, or comma.
Valid options are: R1, R2, R3 and if available, R4 -
R50
Note: These load case numbers must be contiguous.

SOLV - SAM: Seismic Anchor Movements

image\ebd_111.gif
Description
A SOLV card, with the SAM analysis type is used to define analysis options for a seismic anchor movement analysis. The ANAL field must be set to SAM. This card must be preceded by a DISP card,
where a support displacement has been placed in one or more SAM load cases (S1 - S10).

CASES SAM cases to be included in the analysis. Separate

each load case with a blank, or comma.
Valid options are: S1, S2, S3...S10
SOLV - STAT: Static Analysis
1 5 6 11 16 21 31 41 51 61 72 74 76 78 79
1 SOLV EXEC STAT ASET HOTMOD OCC GFS FDENSF
2 * DESCRIPTION
3 * CONT CUT STIF ITER DTOL FTOL FRTOL SCALE E G S P IC
E in lb
M mm kg
S mm N
1 5 6 11 16 21 31 41 51 61 72 74 76 78 79
4 * CASES
5 *
6 *
7 *
.. *
.. *
18 *
EXEC Y/N for analysis option
ASET Analysis set number
BLANK: Default = 1, Enter one analysis set number 1 to 999
STAT Defines STATIC Analysis
HOTMOD Hot modulus thermal case
BLANK: Default = None, Enter one thermal loadcase i.e. 1 to 100,
OCC Occasional load analysis type. Valid options are as follows:
L: Linear
S: Secant
T: Tangent
N: Nonlinear
BLANK: Default is Nonlinear.
GFS Y/N for Gaps/ Friction /Soil analysis option
N = will linear
FDENSF Fluid density factor for contents for static analysis sets
DESCRIPTION : 40 character description
CONT Enter Y (yes) if contents are to be included in the

analysis. Otherwise, enter N (no).
CUT Enter Y (yes) if previously defined cut-short effects are
to be considered in the analysis. Otherwise, enter N (no).
STIF Pressure stiffening case number. Enter 0 for no pressure
stiffening effects. Otherwise, enter 1, 2, 3... 10 to use
pressures associated with operating load conditions 1, 2,
3... 10 respectively.
If the static analysis is to be linear, no other data is needed.
ITER Maximum number of nonlinear analysis iterations per

load case.
BLANK: Default is 0 if no soil, support gaps, or support
friction is defined in the system. If soil, gaps, or friction
are present the default is 5 iterations.
DTOL Support displacement error tolerance.
FTOL Support force error tolerance.
BLANK: Default is 100 lb.
FRTOL Friction force error tolerance ratio.
SCALE Friction scale factor.
E Ignore friction (E1 to E10). (Y/N, default=Y)
G Ignore friction for GR case. (Y/N, default=Y)
S Use default load sequence. (Y/N, default=Y)
P Use Pressure before temperature (Y/N, default=N)
IC Initial case for occasional loads (0=GR, 1=OP1,
20=OP20) … up to OP99
Default is GR if blank.
CASES Cases will be entered as follows (up to 15 rows and up

to including column 80):
In pairs (load case, initial case)

Non-Linear
GR, ,T1,GR,P1,T1,E1,P1,E2,P1,E3,GR etc
Case after 1st GR is always blank, initial case is the case

following. E.g. GR is initial case for T1, T1 is initial
case for P1, P1 is initial case for E1, etc
Linear
GR, ,T1, ,P1, ,E1, ,E2, ,E3, etc
2nd case is always blank since no initial case

If the static analysis is to be nonlinear, the HY load case
will not be included as part of the analysis.
SPA1-Soil Parameters 1
1 5 6 9 11 16 21 25 31 41 51 61 71
1 SPA1 * NAME CALC. MTHD STIFF. PIP. DIR SOIL TYPE OD DEPTH CTRLN, H
E in in
M mm mm
S mm mm
2 * EFF. WT ABOVE PIPE TOTAL/EFF. WT. BELOW PIPE Soil Cohesion. C Friction Angle Coating F. K0 Su
E lb/cu.ft lb/cu.ft psf deg psf

M Kg/m3 Kg/m3 Kg/m2 deg Kg/m2
S kg/m3 kg/m3 N/m2 deg N/m2
3 * ki dp dqu/y1u
dqd/y1d HeightW Adhesion Ca
dt/y1L
E lb/in3 in in in in in psf
M lb/in3 mm mm mm mm mm Kg/m2
S lb/in3 mm mm mm mm mm N/m2
4 * EFF. WT ABOVE PIPE TOTAL/EFF. WT. BELOW PIPE Soil Cohesion. C Friction Angle Coating F. K0 Su
E lb/cu.ft lb/cu.ft psf deg psf

M Kg/m3 Kg/m3 Kg/m2 deg Kg/m2
S kg/m3 kg/m3 N/m2 deg N/m2
5 * ki dp dt/y1L dqu/y1u dqd/y1d
E lb/in3 in in in in
M lb/in3 mm mm mm mm
S lb/in3 mm mm mm mm
6 * SNIP SOIL Auto SA. Cs m0 Eq. Mag k0 kr T0 Seis. Acceleration
E in/sec sec in/s/s
M mm/sec sec mm/s/s
S mm/sec s mm/s2
7 * PIPE ID POINT OP. CASE. LM LA LB
E
M
S
Description
This is the first card used to define the data regarding soil parameters for soil calculation.
Name Name of the soil indentifier

Soil Type Type of soil for calculation, following values in use
0: Soft Clay
1: Stiff Clay
2: Loose Sand
3: Medium Sand
4: Dense Sand
Calc. MTHD Calculation method used for soil.
0: American Lifeline Alliance ASCE 2001
1: Basic AutoPIPE
2: User
Stiff. Currently in use stiffness
0: Low
1: High
2: Average
PIP. DIR Pipe direction for calculation
0: Horizontal
1: Vertical
OD Outside diameter of pipe
Depth centerline Depth centerline (H) of pipe
Eff. Et. Above pipe Effective unit weight above pipe
Tota/Eff. Wt. below pipe Total unit weight (ASCE) and Effective unit weight (AutoPIPE) below pipe
Soil Cohesion c. Soil Cohesion value
Friction Angle Angle of friction for the pipe
Coating f. Coating factor for the pipe
K0 Coefficient of pressure at rest K0
Su Shear un drained strength for Clay
ki Horizontal stiffness parameter
Dp Horizontal yield parameter
dt/y1L Longitudinal yield displacement, dt for ASCE and y1L for AutoPIPE
dqu/y1u Vertical Up yield displacement, dqu for ASCE and y1u for AutoPIPE
dqd/y1d Vertical down yield displacement, dqd for ASCE and y1d for AutoPIPE
HeightW Height of water on top of pipe
Adhesion Ca Soil Adhesion
SNIP Soil Snip soil type
0. None
1. Filled-up earth or Loose sand
2. Low moist sandy
3. Moderate moist sandy
4. Water logged sandy
5. Sand loam and loam
6. Moist clayey or plastic
7. Clayey, semi-solid and solid
8. Loess and loess-type
9. Peat
10. Low temperature frozen
11. High temperature frozen
12. Gravel, broken stone and pebbles
13. Lime stone, shale and sandstone
14. Rock(monolith)
Auto SA Auto flag for seismic acceleration
Cs Seismic wave velocity
m0 Soil restraint factor
Eq. Mag Earthquake magnitude
k0 Pipeline responsibility factor
kr Earthquake recurrence factor
T0 Soil period
Seis. Acceleration Seismic acceleration
Pipe ID Pipe id for calculating virtual anchor length
POINT Name of the point for virtual anchor length
OP. Case. Operating case for virtual anchor length (1 for OP1, 2 for OP2….etc)
SPA2 - Soil Parameters 2
Description
This is the second card used to define the data regarding soil parameters and soil calculation.
The parameters are in two sets for low and high calculated stiffness values.
Alpha Alpha factor (long)

Delta Delta Factor (long)
Rc/Nch Rc (AutoPIPE) / Nch (ASCE) (horizontal)
Rs/Nqh Rs (AutoPIPE) / Nqh (ASCE) (horizontal)
Fc/Ncv Fc (AutoPIPE) / Ncv (ASCE) (vertical up)
Fq/Nqv Fq (AutoPIPE) / Nqv (ASCE) (vertical up)
Ws Ws soil weight (vertical up)
Nc Nc Factor (vertical down)
Nq Nq Factor (vertical down)
Ngamma Ngamma factor (vertical down)
SPEC - Spectrum Data

1 5 6 11 21 31
1 SPEC TYPE NAME INT DAMP
1 5 6 11 21 31 41 51 61 71
2 * F or P A, G, V, D, or FR F or P A, G, V, D, or FR F or P A, G, V, D, or FR
E Hz, s in/s^2, none, in/s, Hz, s in/s^2, none, in/s, Hz, s in/s^2, none, in/s,
in, lb in, lb in, lb
M Hz, s mm/s^2, none, Hz, s mm/s^2, none, Hz, s mm/s^2, none,
mm/s, mm, kg mm/s, mm, kg mm/s, mm, kg
S Hz, s mm/s^2, none, Hz, s mm/s^2, none, Hz, s mm/s^2, none,
mm/s, mm, N mm/s, mm, N mm/s, mm, N
3 * Repeat line 2 as required.
Description
This card is used to enter data for a spectrum to be used in response, and force spectrum analyses. This card may be listed anytime after the control cards have been given, but should also be placed after
all geometry (MODEL) cards have been entered. Note, also, that this card must be listed before the RESP, or FSPC card which refers to this spectrum. Once a blank field is reached, the data read will
cease. All data entered on this card will be stored in an external ASCII text file called SPECNAME.SPC (where SPECNAME is entered in columns 11-19). This file must be present in the current
working directory when a response, or force spectrum analysis is executed.
TYPE Type of data to be read on this card. Enter F or P

for frequency or period data respectively. This
first data type must be followed by / (used as a
separator between the two data type parameters).
Then, enter A, G, V, D, or FR for acceleration,
multiples of gravity acceleration, velocity,
displacement, or force data respectively (e.g. enter
F/A for frequency and acceleration data values).
May not be left blank.
NAME 1-8 character name of the spectrum data set
defined on this card. The name entered must
follow DOS file name rules. May not be left
blank.
INT Interpolation method. Valid options are as
follows:
1 Linear - Linear
2 Log - Log
3 Linear - Log
BLANK: Default is 1
DAMP Damping ratio for spectrum data listed on this
card.
BLANK: Default is 0 (%, i.e. 2 = 2.0%)
F or P If frequency data was specified in the TYPE field,
enter the value in Hertz units (regardless of
selected input/output units). Otherwise, enter the
value in seconds (again regardless of selected
units).
A, G, V, D, Enter a spectrum value which corresponds to the
or FR (data) TYPE field above:
A acceleration
G dimensionless multiple of gravity acceleration
V velocity
D displacement
FR force
BLANK: If a blank field is encountered, APIN
will stop reading the card.
l All data values must be of the same TYPE.
1 5 6 11 16 18 21 31 41 51 61 71
1 SPRG PT1 PT2 U? NUM COLD RATE SIZE FIGURE SYMB
E lb lb/in
M kg kg/m
S N N/mm
1 5 6 11 51 61 71 81
2 * TAG No.
1 5 6 11 51 61 71
3 * ATTACHMENT ID
Description
This card is used to describe a vertical spring hanger at a specified point. This card must be listed after the point at which the spring is located has been defined. AutoPIPE assumes the spring hanger to be
always rigid (stiffness of 10 lb/in).
PT1 1-5 character name of point. The fifth character must be either N, F,
M, or blank for near, far and midpoints of a bend and for a normal
run point (respectively).
assumed.
BLANK: If no name given, connection point is the ground.
U? Undesigned status flag. Valid options are as follows:
Y This hanger is undesigned (COLD and RATE variables are ignored)
N This hanger is user designed (COLD and RATE values must follow)
BLANK: (per the following table)
Are both the COLD and U? status
RATE variable values
given ?
yes N
no Y
NUM Number of hangers in parallel for this support.
COLD Cold load.
BLANK: Spring is undesigned.

RATE Spring rate.
BLANK: Spring is undesigned.
SIZE 1-4 character name of the size
FIGURE 1-12 character name of the figure
follows:
H Hanger: spring hanger will be shown graphically
above pipe
C Can: spring hanger will be shown graphically
below pipe
TAG NO. BLANK: Default is hanger

ATTACHMENT ID
SWAV - Seismic Wave Loads Data

This card is used for entering the data related to seismic wave loads related to a soil identifier.
1 5 6 11 16 21 31 41 51 61 71
1 SWAV Name ADDAX WTYPE WLENGTH SWVEL PGA PGV dT
E inch in/sec in/s/s in/sec deg F
M mm mm/sec mm/s/s mm/sec deg C
S mm mm/s mm/s2 mm/s deg C
2 * PIPEID SPTYP aw ak
Name Soil Identifier name

ADDAX Add axial and bending strain for calculation of temperature
0 - Do not add
1 - Add
Blank: 0
WTYPE Seismic wave type
0 – Compression
1 – Rayleigh
2 – Shear
Blank: Compression
WLENGTH Wave length of seismic wave
Blank: 0.1
SWVEL Seismic wave velocity at pipeline
Blank: 0.1
PGA Peak ground acceleration (PGA)
Blank: 0.1
PGV Peak ground velocity (PGV)
Blank: 0.1
dT dT Equivalent Seismic Thermal range
Blank: 0.0
PIPEID PIPE ID
Soil input parameters
0 - Low
SPTYP 1 - High
2 - Average
Blanks: Low
aw Seismic wave coefficient, aw
Blank: 0.0
ak Seismic wave curvature coefficient, ak
Blank: 0.0
TBOW - Thermal Bowing
1 10 12 22 31 41 55
1 TBOW ANAL DT PITCH BCASE TCASE ALPHA
E Deg.F E-6 /F
M Deg.C E-6 /C
S Deg.C E-6 /C
5 11 14 17 20 23 26 29 32 35 38 41 44 47 50 53 56 59 62 65 68 71 74 77
5 11 14 17 20 23 26 29 32 35 38 41 44 47 50 53 56 59 62 65 68 71 74 77
Description
This card is used to define the thermal bowing data.
ANAL Enter Y (yes) if thermal bowing effects are to be considered in

the static analysis. Otherwise, enter N (no) on column 10. A
blank field indicates N (no).
DT Enter the top of pipe minus bottom of pipe temperature. Default
is zero. A non-zero DELTA is needed if the TBOW card is to
be written in the NTL file using File/Save As/NTL.
PITCH Enter the maximum inclination limit |DY|/L for horizontal
pipes. A pipe with smaller inclination will be considered for
thermal bowing. Blank will default to 0.001 and maximum is
0.999999 (89.92 deg)
BCASE Enter the load case to add thermal bowing to. A blank field
denotes all thermal cases. Valid cases are U1 to U140 and T1
toT100.
TCASE Enter the thermal load case to read expansion coefficient from.
This is only needed if BCASE is a user case U1 to U140. Blank
field denotes T1.
ALPHA Enter instantaneous coefficient of expansion to use for non-
standard (NS) materials. For all other materials, the coefficient
of expansion is obtained from the materials library data.
S1, S2, (First TBOW card only) 1-2 character names of segments to be
etc. active for this and all subsequent TBOW cards. Enter as many
names as necessary, up to 23 (twenty-three) characters per line.
BLANK: If these lines are omitted, all segments will be active
for the thermal bowing load cases.
1 5 6 11 13 16 18 21 31 41 51 61 71
1 TEE POINT TYPE FIG INC PEN SIF- SIF- P- C- R- R-
or I O THK RAD LEN THK
or or F-
QC E- RAD
THK or T-
or LEN
L-
THK
E in in in in
M mm mm mm mm
S mm mm mm mm
2 * C1/QS B1/BR B2r B2r' B2b C2r C3
(Units
for
QS)
E psi
M Kg/cm^2
S N/mm^2
3 * K1 K2r K3 C3’ B2b' C2b K2b
E
M
S
Description
This card is used to describe a tee at a given point. This card should be listed after the point to which it refers.
POINT 1-5 character name of point. The fifth character must be

either N, F, M, or blank for near, far, and midpoints of a
BLANK: If no name is given, the immediately preceding
point is assumed.
TYPE Type of TEE connection. Connection options are:
Name Tee Type Comments
W Welding tee. ANSI B16.9

R Reinforced fabricated tee or BS 7159
fabricated tee.
U Unreinforced fabricated tee. Available for all
codes except BS
7159 and ISO
14692
B Branch connection. ASME NB, NC,
ND, & JSME
PPC
E Extruded welding tee or BS 7159
moulded tee.
C Weld-in contour insert. B31.1, B31.3,
B31.8 and
SNCT codes
F Branch welded-on fitting. B31.1, B31.3
and B31.8
A Tee with raised edges on the SPC and TBK
main pipe.
T Tee with branch on locally SPC and TBK
thickened main pipe.
L Fabricated-long, as welded. ASME NB
F Fabricated-long, flush weld. ASME NB
D Filament-Wound ISO 14692
O Any other type not listed.
BLANK: Default is W. For BS 7159, the default is

E. For ISO 14692, the default is D.
FIG Branch configuration for TYPE B tees only. This field

applies to all editions of ASME NC/ND and JSME PPC
only. Branch configuration options are:
A Uniform, < 45 deg
B Uniform, = 90 deg
C Sloped
D Unreinforced
INC Consider crotch radius (for TYPES B and E tees only).
This field is ignored for TYPE B tee for JSME PPC.
PEN Fillet & partial penetration welded option (for TYPE B
tees only). This field applies to ASME NC/ND 2004 or
later, and ASME NB 2007 only.
QC Qualified Component Flag (for ISO 14692 only)
SIF-I In-plane SIF (for TYPE O tees only).
SIF-O Out-of-plane SIF or Branch SIF (for TYPE O tees only).
The Branch SIF applies to all editions of ASME NC and

ND only.
P-THK Pad thickness (for TYPE R tees only).
C- Crotch radius (for TYPES B and E tees only). This field
RAD is ignored for TYPE B tee for JSME PPC.
E- Effective wall thickness (for TYPE A tees only)
THK
F- Fillet radius (for TYPE A tees only)
RAD
L- Local wall thickness of the main pipe (for TYPE T tees
THK only)
T-LEN Thickened length from the center of the hole (for TYPE T
tees only)
R-LEN Reinforcement length (for TYPE B tees only).
R- Reinforcement thickness (for TYPE B tees only).
THK
B1 B1 (for TYPE O tees only). This field applies to all
editions of ASME NB, NC and ND (except NC-1980S or
ND-1983W) and JSME PPC only.

BR Biaxial Stress Ratio (for ISO 14692 only)
B2r B2-Header (for TYPE O tees only). This field applies to
all editions of ASME NB, NC and ND (except NC-1980S
or ND-1983W) and JSME PPC only.

B2r' B2r' (for TYPE O tees only). This field applies to the
ASME NB, NC and ND 2001 edition or later only.

B2b B2- Branch (for TYPE O tees only). This field applies to
all editions of ASME NB, NC and ND (except NC-1980S
or ND-1983W) and JSME PPC only.

C1 C1 (for TYPE O tees only). This field applies to all
editions of ASME NB

QS Qualified Stress (for ISO 14692 only)
C2r C2-Header (for TYPE O tees only). This field applies to
all editions of ASME NB, and to the 1994 edition or later
of ASME NC and ND.

C3 C3 (for TYPE O tees only). This field applies to all
editions of ASME NB

B2b' B2b' (for TYPE O tees only). This field applies to the
ASME NB, NC, and ND 2001 editions or later.

C2b C2-Branch (for TYPE O tees only). This field applies to
all editions of ASME NB, and to the 1994 edition or later
of ASME NC and ND.

K1 K1 (for TYPE O tees only). This field applies to all
editions of ASME NB

K2r K2-Header (for TYPE O tees only). This field applies to
all editions of ASME NB

K2b K2-Branch (for TYPE O tees only). This field applies to
all editions of ASME NB
K3 K3 (for TYPE O tees only). This field applies to all
editions of ASME NB

C3' C3' (for TYPE O tees only). This field applies to all
editions of ASME NB

image\temp.gif
Description
This card is used to give temperature and hot allowable stress values for up to three thermal operating load conditions. This card may be listed anytime after the point to which it refers has been defined.
All data on this card will apply to that point, and all subsequent points until a change in temperature is encountered (another TEMP card is listed). Lines two and three shown above are only needed if the
BS 806 or EURO codes were selected on the CTL card. Default values for the parameters are the previous values, except for the first TEMP card listed. Those default values are given below.
l Note, an NTL file normally propagates a value forward if the field is left blank in a card. This logic does not apply to temperature or material dependent library look-up values, for example hot
modulus. For this type of data a change in pipe-id or temperature applied to a code material will always cause the hot allowable to be re-computed. However if the hot allowable is to be assumed
identical to the one last defined for a code material, a temperature card with a NEGATIVE hot allowable should be included with a PIPE, PRES, or TEMP card.
l New card OPER introduced in v8.5 replaces both TEMP and PRES cards although these older cards can still be used for up to 3 operating cases. If an OPER and TEMP and/or PRES card are
entered on subsequent lines then the last card processed will be used.
POINT 1-5 character name of point. The fifth character must be either
N, F, M, or blank for near, far and midpoints of a bend and for
a normal run point (respectively). If POINT is a branch point,
temperature data will be applied to the point along the last
segment entered.
BLANK: If no name is given, the immediately preceding point
is assumed.
T1 Design temperature for operating load condition #1.
BLANK: Default is 70°F, or 21.1°C (depending on the active
units).
SH1, DS1 or SH1: Hot allowable stress for case T1.
PS1
DS1: Design strain (unitless) if BS7159.
PS1: 0.2% proof stress if EURO.
Set to negative if user defined value and code material.

BLANK: Default is 15,000 lb/in² for the first TEMP card, or
0.0009 (unitless) for BS7159 on the first TEMP card.
T2 Same as T1, but for operating load condition #2.
SH2, DS2 or Same as SH1, DS1 or PS1, but for case T2.
PS2
T3 Same as T1, but for operating load condition #3.
SH3, DS3 or Same as SH1, DS1 or PS1, but for case T3.
PS3
HOT1 Hot modulus value for operating load condition #1.
PR1, DR1, Y1, PR1: 0.2% proof stress for case T1 if BS806. 1.0% proof stress
YS1, KF1 if EURO.
DR1: Design stress range if Stoomwezen.
Y1: Yield stress if MITI3 or KHK.
YS1: Yield strength if NC95 or ND95.
KF1: K-Factor (unitless) if BS7159.

HOT2 Same as HOT1, but for case T2.
PR2, DR2, Y2, Same as PR1, DR1, Y1, YS1 or KF1, but for case T2.
YS2 or KF2
HOT3 Same as HOT1, but for case T3.
PR3, DR3, Y3, Same as PR1, DR1, Y1, YS1 or KF1, but for case T3.
YS3 or KF3
The following data is needed for BS806, NC95, ND95, MITI-3, or EURO codes only:
RUPT1 Rupture stress for case T1 if BS806. Allowable creep rupture

stress if EURO. Set to negative if user defined value and code
material.
DES1, ULT1, DES1: Design stress for case T1 if BS806, NC95 or ND95.
DSI1 or TEN1
ULT1: Ultimate stress if MITI-3.
DSI1: Design stress intensity if NC95 or ND95.
TEN1: Tensile strength if EURO.

RUPT2 Same as RUPT1, but for case T2.
DES2, ULT2, Same as DES1, ULT1, DSI1 or TEN1 but for case T2.
DSI2 or TEN2
RUPT3 Same as RUPT1, but for case T3.
DES3, ULT3, Same as DES1, ULT1, DSI1 or TEN1 but for case T3.
DSI3 or TEN3
Any BLANK variable on this page assumes a 0 value.

1 5 7 9 11 21 31 41 51 61 71
1 THST ANL GM FILE 1 FILE 2 FILE 3 FILE 4 DUR. ANL. OUT. STEP
STEP
E
M
S
2 * ZPA C. DAMP TIME STEPS ALPHA BETA DAMP RATIO X-ACCL FILE X-ACCL X-ACCL
SCALE TIME
E
M
S
3 * Y-ACCL FILE Y-ACCL Y-ACCL Z-ACCL Z-ACCL Z-ACCL TIME
SCALE TIME FILE SCALE
E
M
S
4 * DESC
E
M
S
Description
This card is used to define a time history load case.
ANL Analysis flag
N = No
Y = Yes
GM Ground motion flag
N = No
Y = Yes
FILE 1 First file for time history load
FILE 2 Second file for time history load
FILE 3 Third file for time history load
FILE 4 Fourth file for time history load
DUR. Duration Steps (seconds)
ANL. STEP Analysis Step duration (seconds)
Out STEP Output Step duration (seconds)
ZPA Zero period acceleration flag
N = No
Y = Yes
C. DAMP Constant damping flag
N = No
Y = Yes
TIME STEPS Number of Time Steps
ALPHA Alpha value (if C. Damp not selected)
BETA Beta Value (if C. Damp not selected)
Below fields (except DESC) are applicable if Ground motion (GM) flag
is true.
The line can be left blank.
X-ACCL FILE
File name for X direction
X-SCALE
Scale factor for X direction
X-TIME Time (sec) for X direction
Y-ACCL FILE File name for X direction
Y-SCALE Scale factor for X direction
Y-TIME Time (sec) for X direction
Z-ACCL FILE File name for X direction
Z-SCALE Scale factor for X direction
Z-TIME Time (sec) for X direction
DESC Description of load case (40 characters Max.)

1 5 6 11 16 21 31 41 51 61 71
1 TIE PT1 PT2 SET STIFF GAP-B GAP-F FRIC
E lb/in in in
M kg/m mm mm
S N/mm mm mm
1 5 6 11 51 61 71
2 * TAG No.
1 5 6 11 51 61 71
3 * ATTACHMENT ID
Description
This card is given to describe a tie or link support at the given point. This point must have been defined previously. The tie/link must be connected to another point on the piping or framing system.
AutoPIPE assumes a stiffness of 10 lb/in for a RIGID support. If the tie is linear (no gaps or friction), all that is required is the stiffness value and the connection point names. If the tie is nonlinear, the
gaps forward and backward, and/or friction coefficient must also be given.

and midpoints of a bend and for normal run
point.
BLANK: A point name must be entered.
A As-built
W Weightless
STIFF Stiffness value of the tie/link.
FRIC Coefficient of friction between the pipe and
support surface.

ATTACHMENT
ID
l For points which have multiple supports, unique support ID's are assigned by default, as described in Section 4.3.
TURB - Rotating Equipment, Turbine
1 5 6 16 21 31 36 46 51 61 66
1 TURB EQPID IN SEG OUT SEG EXT1 SEG EXT2 SEG
1 5 11 16 21 31 41 51 61 71
2 * MMUL COSX COSY COSZ
E
M
S
3 * REFPT DXI DYI DZI DXO DYO DZO
E ft ft ft ft ft ft
M mm mm mm mm mm mm
S mm mm mm mm mm mm
4 * DX1 DY1 DZ1 DX2 DY2 DZ2
E ft ft ft ft ft ft
M mm mm mm mm mm mm
S mm mm mm mm mm mm
Description
This card is used to enter data for rotating equipment, type turbine. The turbine is given a name and up to four nozzle points as well as the direction of the shaft axis. If a point is given at a tee or
continuation point, a segment name must also be given to clarify the turbine's location along the system. All referenced points must be previously defined.
2. Enter continuation rows 3 and 4 to override nozzle coordinates and specify nozzle offsets from a reference point instead.
EQPID 1-8 character name of the turbine equipment identifier.

IN 1-5 character name of inlet point. The fifth character must be
either N, F, M, or blank for near, far and midpoints of a bend and
for a normal run point (respectively). May not be left blank.
SEG If the point is at a tee or continuation point, enter the segment
name. Otherwise, leave blank.
OUT 1-5 character name of outlet point. The fifth character must be
either N, F, M, or blank for near, far and midpoints of a bend and
for a normal run point (respectively). May not be left blank.
EXT1 1-5 character name of first extraction point. The fifth character
must be either N, F, M, or blank for near, far and midpoints of a
EXT2 1-5 character name of second extraction point. The fifth character
must be either N, F, M, or blank for near, far and midpoints of a
MMUL Enter the manufacturer allowable multiplier used to update the

already defined factors for the rotating equipment. The valid
values for this factor should be between 0.5 and 20.

BLANK: The default is 1.0.
COSX, COSY, X-Direction, Y-Direction and Z-Direction cosines of the turbine
COSZ shaft axis.
BLANK: The default for COSX, COSY and COSZ is 0.
REFPT 1-5 character name of point. The reference point must be the inlet
point, outlet point, first extraction point, or second extraction
point.
DXI, DYI, DZI Enter the X, Y, and Z offsets of the inlet point from the reference
point. This input is required if the reference point is not the inlet
point.
BLANK: The default for DXI, DYI and DZI is 0.
DXO, DYO, DZO Enter the X, Y, and Z offsets of the outlet point from the
reference point. This input is required if the reference point is not
the outlet point.
BLANK: The default for DXO, DYO and DZO is 0.
DX1, DY1, DZ1 Enter the X, Y, and Z offsets of the first extraction point from the
reference point. This input is required if the reference point is not
the first extraction point.
DX2, DY2, DZ2 Enter the X, Y, and Z offsets of the second extraction point from
the reference point. This input is required if the reference point is
not the second extraction point.
UROT - User-defined Rotating Equipment
1 5 6 16 21 31 41 51 56 61 66 71 76
1 UROT EQIPID REFPT XOFF YOFF ZOFF SCOSX SCOSY SCOSZ PCOSX PCOSY PCOSZ
E in in in
M mm mm mm
S mm mm mm
Two additional cards are provided for each nozzle point:
1 5 6 11 21 31 41 51
2 * NZPT SEG AXFOR AYFOR AZFOR ATFOR
E lb lb lb lb
M kg kg kg kg
S N N N N
1 5 6 11 21 31 41 51
3 * AXMOM AYMOM AZMOM ATMOM

E ft-lb ft-lb ft-lb ft-lb
M kg-cm kg-cm kg-cm kg-cm
S N-m N-m N-m N-m
Description
This card is provided to allow the user to create rotating equipment (and allowables on its nozzle) which is not properly described by one of the standard rotating equipment types (i.e., pumps, turbines,
etc.). The two additional cards are provided for each nozzle point.
EQPID 1-8 character equipment identifier.

REFPT 1-5 character name of the reference point from which
the resolution point is defined. May not be left blank.
XOFF X offset of the resolution point from reference point.
YOFF Y offset of the resolution point from reference point.
ZOFF Z offset of the resolution point from reference point.
SCOSX X-direction cosine of the shaft axis.
SCOSY Y-direction cosine of the shaft axis.
SCOSZ Z-direction cosine of the shaft axis.
PCOSX X-direction cosine of the pedestal axis.
PCOSY Y-direction cosine of the pedestal axis.
PCOSZ Z-direction cosine of the pedestal axis.
NZPT 1-5 character name for the nozzle point. The fifth
character must be N, F, M, or blank for near, far and
SEG If the point is at a tee or a continuation point, enter the
segment name; otherwise leave blank.
AXFOR Allowable force on the nozzle along the global X axis.
AYFOR Allowable force on the nozzle along the global Y axis.
AZFOR Allowable force on the nozzle along the global Z axis.
ATFOR Allowable resultant force on the nozzle.
AXMOM Allowable moment on the nozzle along the global X
axis.
AYMOM Allowable moment on the nozzle along the global Y
axis.
AZMOM Allowable moment on the nozzle along the global Z
axis.
ATMOM
Batch Allowable resultant moment on the nozzle.
Input Reference

UUID card is used for associating a universally unique identifier with a model component.
1 5 6 11 31 67
UUID CARD NAME ID VALUE
Following is the description of fields:
Card Name Name of the NTL card of the component, table in the end of section describes the possible values
ID Identifier for the component e.g Point name, beam ID etc.
VALUE GUID value for the component
Following are the names of the NTL cards and their IDs currently supported.
Card Names ID
RUN - Run Point POINT NAME
VALV - Valve
RED - Reducer
FLA - Pipe Flange - Point name will be used as ID
ANC - Anchor
NOZL - Nozzle
SEG - Pipe Segment FIRST POINT NAME
PIPE - Pipe Data PIPEID
BEAM - Beam Member NAME
NODE - Beam Member Node Point NODE NAME
MATL - Nonstandard Material NAME NAME
Note: In case of multiple components on a single point (e.g. multiple supports/flanges) on a single point, only the UUID of the first component will be imported.
VALV - Valve
1 5 6 8 11 13 21 31 41 51 56 61 71 76
VALV POINT TYPE DX DY DZ WELD RATE WGT SAF SIF
E in in In Lb
M mm mm mm Kg
S mm mm Mm Kg
* AC SY SW OFF MOFF WSIZE ADX ADY ADZ AWGT
E in in in in in in Lb
M mm mm mm mm mm mm Kg
S mm mm mm mm mm mm Kg
* VALVETAG
E
M
S
Description
This card is used to enter the parameters describing a valve. It may be used anytime after the control cards have been entered. If a standard valve (from the component library) is entered, all that is
required is the weld-type and ANSI rating, all other parameters may be left blank. If these parameters are entered, they will override the standard values from the AutoPIPE component library.
The component library contains valves which define the length only (weight and surface area factor are not specified). Refer to Section A.3 in Appendix A, Libraries, for a listing of the contents of the
standard valve library. If one of these valves is specified on this card and the WGT or SAF variable is left blank, unexpected results could occur within AutoPIPE.
POINT 1-4 character name of point at end of valve (may not be

left blank).
TYPE Valve type. The following types are supported in the
default AutoPIPE library (the "F" and "B" designations
represent "Flange" and "Buttweld," respectively:
GATE-F
GLOBE-F
SCHECK-F
TCHECK-F
GATE-B
GLOBE-B
SCHECK-B
TCHECK-B
NS
DX Length of valve along the X-direction.
DY Length of valve along the Y-direction.
DZ Length of valve along the Z-direction.
WELD Weld type of connection to pipe (the default SIF associated with each
connection type is also listed).
BW Butt Weld (1.0) (code dependent) As-Welded Butt
Weld
BWT Butt Weld (code dependent)
Transition
As-Welded Butt Weld NB 4250
Transition (Class NB)
ANSI B16.25, 30o tapered transition

ANSTT (Class NC)
FBWT Flush Butt ASME NB
Weld NB 4250
Transition
BT1:3 As-Welded ASME NB
Butt Weld 1:3
Transition
FT1:3 Flush Butt ASME NB
Weld 1:3
Transition
FBW Flush Butt ASME NB, NC, ND
Weld
SO slip on 1.2 (code dependent)
SW Socket/Fillet 2.1 (code dependent)
Weld
SWN Socket Weld 1.3
(no undercut)
LJ Lap Joint (1.6)
TJ Threaded Joint (2.3)
SWV socket or fillet JSME PPC only
weld
(concave)
SOV double-welded JSME PPC only
slip-on
(concave)
USER User Defined (see SIF below)
Weldneck, Double welded slip-on, Socket weld (no undercut), Lapjoint are
no longer available from v9.1 or later for ASME III class NC, ND. For older
models weldneck mapped to BW. Double welded slip-on mapped to user
defined SIF = 1.2, Socket weld (no undercut) mapped to user defined SIF =
1.3, lapjoint mapped to user defined SIF = 1.6.
BLANK: Default is BW. For BS 7159, the default is NS.
RATE ANSI standard valve rating. No other parameters need be entered unless they
differ from table values.
BLANK: Nonstandard (all following parameters must be input).
WGT Weight of valve. Only needed if the ANSI rating is nonstandard (NS), or if
the valve data taken from the library has no weight defined. A value entered
here will override the standard value obtained from the library.
SAF Surface area factor used in determining the weight of insulation or buoyant
force. This is the ratio of the insulation weight or buoyant force per unit
length of valve to the insulation weight or buoyant force per unit length of the
preceding pipe. Only needed if the ANSI rating is nonstandard (NS), or if the
valve data taken from the library has no surface area factor defined. A value
entered here will override the standard value obtained from the library.
SIF Stress intensification factor of valve. Only needed if weld type is nonstandard
(NS). A value entered here will override the value obtained from the library if
a standard rating is specified for the RATE.
Note: The Weld SIF field is blank for ASME NB, NC, and ND nuclear piping
codes.
BLANK: Default SIF for NS is 1.0.
AC Actuator Auto Option , enter Y or N

SY Actuator Symbol, enter Y or N
SW Valid values are '1' for flange and '2' for fitting. If blank, the default value is
'1', i.e. flange.
0 without taper
1 with taper
OFF Joint offset for a butt weld with no taper transition. Average joint offset is
available for a butt weld (BW) with taper transition to the B31.1 and B31.8
codes. It is also available for butt weld (BW) with or without taper transition
for the EN13480 , SPC, TBK, RCC-M, MITI and JSME PPC codes.
The weld size for Double-Welded Slip-On (SO) and Socket or Fillet Weld
(SW) connections can be entered for this field using NC92, ND92, NC, and
ND codes. For JSME PPC code, the weld size can be entered for this field
when a Double-Welded Slip-On (SOV) or Socket or Fillet Weld (SWV)
connection is "concave" only.
MOFF Joint offset for a butt weld with no taper transition. Average joint offset is
available for a butt weld (BW) with taper transition to the B31.1 and B31.8
codes. It is also available for butt weld (BW) with or without taper transition
for the EN13480 , SPC, TBK, MITI, and RCC-M codes.
The weld size for slip-on (SO) and socket weld (SW) connections can be
entered for this field using ASME NB, NC, and ND nuclear piping codes.
ADX Actuator weight offset along the X-direction.
ADY Actuator weight offset along the Y-direction.
ADZ Actuator weight offset along the Z-direction.
AWGT Actuator Weight
VALVETAG
Valve tag (36 characters)
ASME NB, NC, ND
Joint Type Symbol ASME NB ASME NC ASME ND

As-Welded Butt Weld BW Yes Yes Yes
Flush Butt Weld FBW Yes Yes Yes
As-Welded Butt Weld NB 4250 Transition BWT Yes No No
Flush Butt Weld NB 4250 Transition FBWT Yes No No
As-Welded Butt Weld 1:3 Transition BWT1:3 Yes No No
Flush Butt Weld 1:3 Transition FBWT1:3 Yes No No
ANSI B16.25 30o Tapered Transition BWT No Yes Yes
Threaded Joints TJ No Yes Yes
Socket/Fillet Weld SW Yes Yes Yes
User-Defined USER Yes Yes Yes
Notes:
1. If the first point of the valve is the first point of a run: DX, DY, and DZ will be actual coordinates of the point at the far end of the valve.
2. Only the weld type NS is recognized by the BS 7159 code.

1 5 6 11 16 21 31 41 51 61 71
1 VSTP PT1 PT2 SET GAP-D GAP-U SYMB FRIC
E in in
M mm mm
S mm mm
1 5 6 11 51 61 71
2 * TAG No.
1 5 6 11 51 61 71
3 * ATTACHMENT ID
Description
This card is used to define a (rigid) V-Stop support at a point. This point (PT1) must be previously defined. If the V-stop is linear, no other data is needed. If the V-stop is nonlinear, gap values, and a
coefficient of friction value must also be entered. The spring stiffness of a V-stop is always rigid (10 lb/in)

Note: If the V-stop is linear, no other data is
needed.
SET Gaps setting. Valid options are as follows:
A As-built
W Weightless
GAP-D Gap below pipe.
GAP-U Gap above pipe.
follows:
N Bi-Direction: v-stop will be shown graphically
above and below pipe
R Rod Hanger: v-stop will be shown graphically
above pipe
S Shoe: v-stop will be shown graphically below
pipe
BLANK: Default is Bi-Direction
FRIC Coefficient of friction.

ATTACHMENT Attachment ID associated with the support.
ID
WAVE - Wave Loading

image\ebd_128.gif
Description
This card is used to define wave loading data in order to model the effect of ocean waves acting on the piping system. The first two lines of data are required. The third line, which is used to establish a
current and marine growth profile, is optional. Up to five velocity and growth data lines may be included.
NAME 1-8 character name of wave load data set. May

not be left blank.
TYPE Wave load type. Valid options are:
1 Current
2 Airy (Linear)
3 Stokes (5th order)
4 Stream
BLANK: Default is Current.
CASE Load case to which this wave load data will be
assigned. A wave load cannot be defined in a
SAM (S1 - S10), or dynamic load case (e.g. R1,
F1, H1, etc.). Valid entries are as follows:
GR Gravity
T1-T100 Thermal load cases 1 to 100
E1-E10 Seismic load cases 1 to 10
W1-W10 Wind load cases 1 to 10
P1-P100 Pressure load cases 1 to 100
U1-U140 User defined load cases 1 to 140
BLANK: Default is GR.
ELEV Still water elevation.
DEPTH Depth of water.
DENS Density of water in which pipe is submerged.
PHASE Phase angle of the wave crest relative to the
origin of the global coordinate system.
W-HGT Wave height (trough to crest).
PER Period of incoming waves.
DRAG Coefficient of drag of the wave along pipe
structure.
INERT Coefficient of inertia of the wave along pipe
structure.
COSX X-Direction cosine of wave propagation.
COSY Y-Direction cosine of wave propagation.
COSZ Z-Direction cosine of wave propagation.
The following data is used to describe a current and marine growth profile. This data is optional. Up to five sets of data (lines) may be entered.
GDPTH Water depth for corresponding current and growth

data.
VEL Velocity of current.
GRWTH Amount of marine growth attached to submerged
structure.

image\ebd_129.gif
Description
This card is used as a means of entering nonstandard weld efficiency factors. It must be given after the point at which it acts has been defined.
POINT 1-5 character name of point. The fifth

normal run point (respectively).
OVER Override flag. If this flag is set, this weld
efficiency factor will override all others at
this point. If not set, this factor will be used
only if it is the minimum at this point.
0 Use only if minimum
1 Override all other weld efficiency factors.
ZLONG Longitudinal weld efficiency factor.
ZCIRC Circumferential weld efficiency factor.
WCIRC Circumferential weld joint strength reduction
factor (w) used in sustained stress
calculations for B31.3 piping code. Leave
blank or enter a negative value for automatic
calculations based on temperature.
BLANK: Default is Auto.

image\ebd_130.gif
Description
This card is used to define a concentrated weight at any point. This point must be defined prior to entering this card. A concentrated weight is always assumed to act vertically downward.

(respectively).
WEIGH Magnitude of the concentrated weight.
BLANK: The default value for the weight is 0.
DX X-coordinate offset from POINT to the actual
location of the weight.
DY Y-coordinate offset from POINT to the actual
DZ Z-coordinate offset from POINT to the actual
WIND - Static Wind Load Case

image\ebd_131.gif
image\ebd_132.gif
Description
This card is used to enter data for a wind load case. It may be entered anytime after the control data has been entered, but is generally entered after all geometry (MODEL) data has been listed. The
second and subsequent lines are for the first WIND card only and contain the names of segments to be included in all wind load cases. If these lines are omitted, all segments will be considered in all
wind load cases. This card is closely linked with the WPRS card which contains all of the wind region data associated with this wind load case. The WIND card should be given before the WPRS card,
and both cards should have the same NAME for the wind region.
CASE Wind load case number (0-10). If 0 is entered,

no other data is read.
NAME 1-8 character name of wind load case. Note,
this name must be consistent with the NAME
given on the WPRS card associated with this
wind load case. May not be left blank.
COSX X-Direction cosine of the wind direction.
COSY Y-Direction cosine of the wind direction.
COSZ Z-Direction cosine of the wind direction.
SHPE Wind shape factor. This is the factor to be
multiplied which will convert the wind pressure
to the pressure on a cylindrical object. Enter 0.6
for stagnation pressure input, or 1.0 if input
pressures are already adjusted for the wind
shape factor.
BLANK: Default value is 1.0.
SOIL Wind exposure factor for soils. This value
detemines the extent to which buried pipes are
exposed to wind. In most cases, buried pipes
are not exposed to wind and this factor is

specified as 0.0 (the default). However, pipes
lying on flat land or shallow open trenches may
be exposed to the effects of wind. In such
cases, enter 1.0. This will assume that all buried
pipes are exposed to full intensity of the wind
in all directions. For partially exposed buried
pipe systems, use this factor in conjunction
with the active segment data (S1, S2, etc.).
METHOD Wind application method. Enter the application
method to be performed for the wind pressure
on the pipe:
N The normal force method. In this method, the
component of the wind pressure normal to the
pipe is considered and the longitudinal
component is ignored.
P The projected area method. In this method, the
projected area of the pipe perpendicular to the
direction of the wind is used to determine the
magnitude wind force. The wind force is then
applied to the pipe in the direction of the wind.
ELEV Ground Elevation for wind. BLANK: Default
is 0.
S1, S2, (First WIND card only) 1-2 character names of
etc. segments to be active for this and all
subsequent WIND cards. Enter as many names
as necessary, up to 23 (twenty-three) characters
per line.
BLANK: If these lines are omitted, all
segments will be active for the wind load cases.
WPRS - ANSI: Static Wind Load Per ASCE-98

image\ebd_135.gif
Description
This card is used to generate a wind load which acts on the system per the requirements of the ASCE-98 code. The type field for this data must be set to ASCE.
NAME 1-8 character name of wind load case.

Note, this name must be consistent with the
NAME given on the WIND card associated
with this wind load case number. May not
be left blank.
SPEED Basic wind speed.
CAT Exposure category. Options are as follows:
A Exposure Category A.
B Exposure Category B.
C Exposure Category C.
D Exposure Category D.
BLANK: Default is A.
GUST Gust effect factor. This value is typically
0.85 for all exposure categories.
IKZ Exposure case for Kz. This value should be
1 or 2
CF Force coefficient as specified in Tables 6-
10 of the ASCE-98 Code.
I-FAC Importance factor to scale wind speed as
specified in Table 6-1 of the ASCE-98
Batch Input Reference Code.
WPRS - Static Wind Load Parameters

image\ebd_133.gif
Description
Each WPRS card is used to complete the definition of a static wind load case (thus, a WIND card must precede the listing of the associated WPRS card). The general format for the WPRS card is shown
above. However, the specific information required for column numbers twenty one (21) through eighty (80) on line 1, and whether line 2 or 3 is necessary, depends on the specific type of wind load case
to be defined. The following pages describe each of the wind load options and their associated data requirements. The generic WPRS card variables are as follows:
TYPE Enter the type of static wind load to be generated.

Valid options are as follows:
USER Create a user defined height vs. pressure wind
profile.
ASCE Generate wind loads per the ASCE-98 code.
UBC Generate wind loads per the UBC-97 code.
BLANK: Default is USER.
NAME 1-8 character name for this wind load case. Note,
this name must be consistent with the name given
on the WIND card associated with this wind load
case number. May not be left blank.
DATA Specify wind load parameters specific to the
TYPE selected above.
WPRS - UBC: Static Wind Load Per UBC-97
1 5 6 11 21 31 41 51 61 71
1 WPRS UBC NAME SPEED EXP Ce Cp PRESS I-FAC
E mph lb/ft^2
M kmph kg/m^2
S kmph N/m^2
Description
This card is used to generate a wind load which acts on the system per the requirements of the UBC-97 Code (Uniform Building Code, Section 2311). The type field for this data must be set to UBC.
NAME 1-8 character name of wind load case. Note, this name
must be consistent with the NAME given on the WIND
card associated with this wind load case number. May
not be left blank.
SPEED Basic wind speed at 33 ft (10 m).
EXP Exposure category. Options are as follows:
B Exposure Category B.
C Exposure Category C.
D Exposure Category D.
BLANK: Default is B.
Ce Ce factor from UBC-97 Code tables.
BLANK: Default is 0. AutoPIPE will automatically
determine this factor based on the exposure category
given.
Cp Pressure coefficient from UBC-97 code tables.
PRESS Wind pressure at 30 ft.
I-FAC Importance factor to scale wind speed as specified in
UBC-97 Code tables.
WPRS - USER: Static Wind Load Profile

image\ebd_134.gif
Description
This card is used to enter data for a static wind load case. This card must be entered after the associated WIND card has been listed. This card must have the same NAME for the wind load as its
associated WIND card. The information required for this card is dependent on the TYPE field data entered. The above data is for type USER, or user wind profile.
For a user-defined wind load, height and pressure data may continue as shown to give up to ten height/pressure data sets. Although not necessary, it is best to give height values in ascending order. The
pressure value which immediately follows a given height is the pressure at that height. There should be an equal number of height and pressure values given.
NAME 1-8 character name of wind load case. Note, this

name must be consistent with the name given on
the WIND card associated with this wind load
case number. May not be left blank.
HGT Height of wind pressure region. The first value
should be the height above ground. Subsequent
heights should be from the previous to the
following height value. The last height value will
be treated as infinite. A maximum of ten height
values will be accepted.
BLANK: At the first blank height field, data read
will stop.
PRESS Pressure at the given height of the wind region.
Last pressure value is assumed to act from the
previous height to infinity. There should be one
File Reference pressure value for every height value given.
AutoPIPE File Reference

Select from the following list of topics:
l File Management Overview
l Working Directory Files
l Program Directory Files
File Reference
File Management Overview

A number of permanent and temporary files may be produced while working in AutoPIPE. All file names conform to Windows file naming convention. These files are created both in the current working
and the program directory (e.g. C:\Bentley\AutoPIPE). This section lists each of these files (sorted by file name, and file extension), and gives a brief description of their purpose. The name used for most
of the database related files is the model’s file name , with an unique file extension dependent on the purpose of that file. All files can be grouped into two general categories: formatted, and unformatted.
This distinction is described below.
Formatted Files
The formatted files are ASCII text files which can be read or modified using any text editor software. Most of these files are created to hold information related to a piping system database (e.g.,
geometry, loadings, pipe displacements, pipe stresses, etc.) for viewing on the screen or printing. Other formatted files are used to store dynamic loads, and general information which can be useful.
Unformatted Files
The unformatted files are binary files which constitute the AutoPIPE system database files. These files cannot be viewed on the screen or printed like the formatted files (they contain unprintable
characters which can't be interpreted by your computer at this level). A set of binary files is created by AutoPIPE for each piping system database. When processing of a system is complete, these files
should be archived, and then deleted from the current working directory in order to save space.
Most temporary files are created during the execution of an analysis. These temporary analysis files are automatically deleted by AutoPIPE once the analysis has finished. However, in the event of an
abnormal exit from the program during analysis, some of these files may not have been deleted.
If any such files remain in the program directory they may be erased since they are of no use to AutoPIPE, and they will just be taking up disk space (they will be overwritten, and then deleted by
AutoPIPE when the next analysis is completed).
Permanent files are usually described as those system database files which cannot be reconstructed without a concerted effort. With this definition as a guideline, all input files (.DAT, .CMB,.C**, .SPC,
.HMF, .FS*, .TIH and .THL) related to a piping system should receive the highest level of care. Next come output files (analysis, and report files). However, the need to archive these files depends on the
procedure required by your company, and the length of time required to generate any one file.
File Reference
Program Directory Files

Each of the files listed in this subsection are stored in the program directory. These files are created by AutoPIPE at different stages of execution in order to hold data, temporarily, for later use by the
program. The information contained in these files is not required after the AutoPIPE session is terminated. The one exception to this is the configuration file AUTOPLAN.CNF. If this file is deleted
AutoPIPE will force hardware re-specification before execution is allowed.
Unformatted Program Directory Files

File Extension Description
Name
User-defined LIB Library files. These files can be any user modified library of piping components, materials, or beam member cross sections.
Formatted Program Directory Files

File Name Extension Description
AUTOPLAN CNF The configuration file for AutoPIPE, which contains hardware information. If this file is erased, or renamed, the configuration program APCONFIG will automatically execute. If the environment variable API386 is
set, AutoPIPE will look for this file in the directory specified by this environment variable; this directory is called the configuration directory. If API386 is not set, AutoPIPE will look for the configuration file in the
program directory.
Autopipe RGB All the component color settings are stored in the program directory file AUTOPIPE.RGB. When the user makes changes in the Color dialog (Tools/settings/colors), these files are overwritten. Any changes made
become the default settings for the current and future modeling sessions until changed again.
Autopipe BLK The Tools/Settings/Black Background command resets the displayed screen background color for AutoPIPE to black as well as setting the default component and data colors for a white background i.e. updates
AUTOPIPE.RGB. The settings stored in AUTOPIPE.BLK cannot be modified from the program.
Autopipe WHT The Tools/Settings/White Background command resets the displayed screen background color for AutoPIPE to white as well as setting the default component and data colors for a white background i.e. updates
AUTOPIPE.RGB. The settings stored in AUTOPIPE.WHT cannot be modified from the program.
Autopipe BLD This file stores a setting of '0' or '1' to plot a full color or transparency respectively for each component.
Autopipe VIS This file stores a setting of '0' or '1' to hide or make visible respectively for each component.
User-defined UNT Unit conversion files. These files are for translating from any customized input/output unit set to the internal program units.
Autopipe MRU The most recently used AutoPIPE models are saved in this file. It includes the model and path names. If this file does not exist AutoPIPE will
create it automatically.
File Reference
Working Directory Files

Each of the files listed in this subsection are stored in the current working directory. The working directory is established from the directory where the file was created/opened using either the File/New or
File/Open commands. Otherwise, AutoPIPE places each of them in the program directory. The file name for all permanent, unformatted files is the same as the name of the model. Other file names are as
noted.
l Unformatted Working Directory Files
l Formatted Working Directory Files
File Reference
Unformatted Working Directory Files

SYSTEM NAME _AN Temporary files used by AutoPIPE during any analysis. All of these files are deleted at the end of each analysis run, unless the program exits the analysis abnormally. These files may be
deleted if one or more appears in the directory. However, AutoPIPE will overwrite these files the next time an analysis is performed.
_BI
_DI
_NO
_PI
_RE
_ST
_SU
_T1
_T2
_T3
_T4
_T5
_NOD
_PIP
_ANC
_SUP
_BIM
_RED
_STF
_DIS
AUTOPIPE TM1 These files hold the Display Window contents while a form is being displayed on the screen.
TM2
TM3
AUTOPIPE CLB These are temporary files created during Cut, Copy, and Paste operations, and are deleted automatically at the end of an AutoPIPE session.
AUTOTMP
BAK This is a backup of the system database file (.DAT). It is created, and subsequently updated, every twenty (20) minutes. Use the [File]/[Recover] command in order to recreate a lost system
database.
CMB This file contains the load case combinations (CODE and OTHER) which are created, or updated from the Result menu.
User-specified system DAT The system database file. Almost all other output files related to a system database can be generated from this file. Do NOT delete this file without archiving it first !
database name
EIG The modal analysis (or Eigenvalue) result file.
FSP The force spectra analysis result file.
HRM The harmonic analysis result file.
LIN The static analysis result file.
RSP The response spectra analysis result file.
SAM The seismic anchor movement analysis result file.
TIM The time history analysis result file.
UND Undo/Redo index file.
U** Undo/redo files.
C** Each file contains a pre-defined load combination (Code and Non-code) which is created during the equivalent linear analysis (KHK Seismic Level 2 code only). For example, C01 contains
PW+X+Y, C09 contains +X+Y+DX, etc. There is a maximum of 25 files.
L** Each file contains the equivalent linear analysis results for a pre-defined load combination (KHK Seismic Level 2 code only). For example, L01 contains results for PW+X+Y, L09 contains results
for +X+Y+DX, etc. There is a maximum of 25 files. For odes others than KHK seismic level 2, the files represent the results of static analysis.
GPS This file contains the settings related to the printing options for grids. The name of the file specifies the grid whose setting is stored.
FAT The files contain fatigue curves data related to the material described in the file name.
FLX This file contains bend angular distortion results for all combinations (KHK Seismic Level 2 code only).
File Reference
Formatted Working Directory Files

APIN ERR Error file generated by APIN.
APIN MSG Message file generated by APIN.
AUTOLIB OUT The pipe material and piping component library report file. This file contains the most up-to-date library information created for
printing or scanning. The file is not actually the library, and can be deleted once printed or scanned.
AUTOPIPE ACT The accounting information file created with the Tools/Accounting command. This file contains a list of all database files
located in the current directory, and indicates the amount of AutoPIPE execution time accrued for each system.
AUTOPIPE DBG The debugging file used by Bentley.

AUTOPIPE DIR This file lists all database files located in the current working directory.
AUTOPIPE OUT A file which contains any error messages which may have been generated during the last AutoPIPE session.
CHK Global consistency check message file generated with the Tools/Model Consistency Check command, or upon recovery of an old
system.
DXF The AutoCAD-compatible plot
FS1 The force spectrum load case information. Each file extension corresponds to load cases F1, F2, F3 ... F10 respectively.
FS2
FS3...FS10
HGR The automatic spring hanger selection result file created with the Analyze/Hanger Selection command. This file contains a
summary of each spring investigated for each undesigned spring hanger support.
LOG The analysis summary report. This file is created when an analysis is performed.
MSG A message file which is generated to confirm the status of operations performed on the system including reporting errors when
importing a PXF file.
XML The file contains stress summary properties. It is generated on creating a stress summary using the Tools/Stress Summary
command (ASME NB, NC and ND only) in the model directory.
SUM Stress Summary consistency check message file generated on generating the results batch report from the command Results/Output Report.
LPipeLink Local exchange file for Pipelink (STAAD Integration). Generated during the export process of Pipelink export using command
File/Export/Model to STAAD using Pipelink (*.Pipelink).
LCK This file is generated on opening a model and removed on closing the model file. This file contains the information regarding model being in use by some user.
PWS ProjectWise settings are stored in this file. This file is generated on opening any model in the program. The file contains
information for documents used from the ProjectWise server.
User - NTL The file generated when File/Export/Batch is selected, creating an output of the system which is compatible with AutoPIPE’s batch
specified language (refer to Chapter 9 of the User Reference manual for more details).
system
database
name
OUT The BATCH REPORT file created with the Result/Output Report command. This file contains the analysis sub-report sections
specified by the user.
PLT The file generated when a plot of system graphics is directed to a file rather than an output device such as a printer or a plotter.
NMP This file is created when importing an Autoplant PXF file using File/Open/Autoplant(*.PXF) and is a temporary file for debugging
and has node mapping which is later saved in PXD (binary file).
PXG Same as PXF file, but with PXF ID numbers replaced with descriptive text
PXH This file is created when importing an Autoplant PXF file using File/Open/Autoplant(*.PXF) and is a backup copy of the PXF file.
PXD This binary file is created when importing an Autoplant PXF file using File/Open/Autoplant(*.PXF) and contains node mapping
between AutoPLANT components and AutoPIPE nodes including line number and support data. It is updated when modifying the
AutoPIPE model.
PXI File displayed when View/AutoPLANT PXF is selected.
PXF The output file created when File/Save As/Autoplant(*.PXF) is selected, generating a file compatible with the AutoPLANT series.
This file format can also be imported using File/Open/Autoplant(*.PXF).
RPT The system geometry and operating load condition report file. It contains summary lists of the piping system components as
currently defined.
User-defined HMF Harmonic load data files. These files are assigned to each harmonic load case (H1 - H10) at the time a harmonic analysis is
performed.
User-defined SPC Response and force spectrum data files. These files are assigned to each response (R1 - R50) and force spectrum (F1 - F10) load
case at the time a respective analysis is performed.
User-defined TIH Time history data files. These files are assigned to each time history load case (M1 - M50) at the time a time history analysis is
performed.
User-defined THL Time history load application data.
User-defined UNT Unit conversion files. These files are for translating from any customized input/output unit set to the internal program units.
SUNT The files are used for unit conversion when a model is exchanged through Pipelink.
User-defined Pipelink Pipelink exchange file for STAAD Integration. Generated using command File/Export/Model to STAAD using Pipelink (*.Pipelink).

A stress isometric is used by engineers as a visual record of the pipe stress analysis model and summary of the design information used to model a safe piping system. This process provides an electronic
workflow and exchange of engineering information in a common recognizable file format between Plant 3D CAD (and/or Engineering disciplines) and CAE analysis in particular for the CAD designer,
consultant, structural engineer or equipment manufacturer.
The customizable Stress Isometric plot is created using the Alias ISOGEN Engine and shows a) fully dimensioned isometric plot b) tables of important summary design data including model information,
pipe properties, valve and flange data, maximum stresses, design support data, design spring and constant hanger data, design load data for vessels, structures and equipment.
The ability to generate stress isometric drawings is an add-on feature to AutoPIPE requiring an additional license. This feature is dependent on the completion of the Isogen PCF format File. The stress
analysis model will be first exported as a PCF file from AutoPIPE to ISOGEN. The pcfout.map file is used to map Autopipe components to PCF components. ISOGEN will read the PCF file to create a
stress plot but also read the filename.STS text file to create the Data tables on the plot. The input data and stress analysis results from AutoPIPE will be exported as a STS text file. Finally, the Isogen
generated DXF or DWG file can be opened automatically into either MicroStation or Redline or AutoCAD or 3rd Party program for review and markup.
Note: The default ISO Viewer solution is Bentley Redline which is available free of charge for all Bentley SELECT customers and allows review, mark-ups, adding MS Word or Excel notes and records
history of changes as well as read/write to all popular file formats: DXF, DWG and DGN. Bentley Redline can be downloaded at Bentley website http://www.bentley.com/en-
US/Products/Bentley+Redline/
Note: Markup comments using annotation with leader arrows, draw circles to highlight areas or copy/paste project word notes, tables or excel sheets as pictures or embedded into the drawing.
The File/Save Stress Isometric command starts this process.
1. Stress Isometric Model: DAT (AutoPIPE) -> PCF + STS (input and result data text file) ->(ISOGEN) ->DXF, DWG (Stress plot and tables)
2. Input Data: DAT (AutoPIPE) ->STS (Geometry & Pipe properties)
3. Stress Isometric Results: MDB (AutoPIPE) ->STS (Results)
4. View & Markup Stress Isometric Drawing: DXF, DWG (Stress plot) ->Open in Bentley Redline, AutoCAD or equivalent CAD program ->Review, make changes and/or copy/paste template notes -
>Save to DXF, DWG or DGN
StressISO Plot Options Dialog
StressISO Tables Options Dialog
Personal ISOGEN Directory Structure

Isogen has the following directory structure for storing border, debug log, error, configuration and PCF output files
See also : Personal Isogen files
AutoPIPE directory - "Root" AutoPIPE program directory, e.g. location of default border dxf and dwg files
-->PISOGEN
--> BORDERS - The location of the default border dxf and dwg files
--> PROGRAMS - The location of the Isogen debug log files
--> PROJECTS
--> APIPEPROJ
--> FINAL - The location of configuration files: final.alt, final.pos, final.mld, final.ddf, support.bin, isogen.fls, final.sts
--> OUTPUT - The location of output files is controlled by Style settings. is ISOGEN error file is Final.mes
--> PCF - The location of output PCF files
---> TEMFILES - The PCF file is copied to the TEMFILES directory of the current project with extension filename.fal
See Also :

Personal ISOGEN Files

Isogen has a predefined directory structure for storing border, debug log, error, configuration and PCF output files.
These files are listed below:
Personal Isogen configuration Files
Filename Description
Isogen.fls Isogen required files and pathname used to create the PCF file and isometric
plot.
Final.alt ALTERNATIVE-TEXT file is used to suppress annotation types on the plot
Final.pos POSITIONED-TEXT file used to position and output Pipeline Attribute text
values into their required locations on the Isometric
Final.ddf DRAWING-DEFINITION file used to control line thickness, scale, colors,
layers and user symbols on the plot
Final.mld MATERIAL-LIST-DEFINITION file which has 3 types of format for the
Material List
Support.bin BINARY-SYMBOLS file containing support symbols with and without gaps
and connected to ground or pipe/beam point
Final.sts USER-SPECIFIED-MATERIAL-FILE file is created to store the AutoPIPE
input and result data to be placed on the plot as a material list
Apipe.opl OPTION-SWITCHES-LONG file which stores all the plot and material list
option switches which control the format of the plot dimensioning,
annotation, elevations, font size etc.
dbord.dxf DRAWING-FRAME file - i.e. drawing border to be plotted around the
isometric
Sample Isogen.fls
PLOTFILE-PREFIX D:\ap\models_webex\
MESSAGE D:\autopipe\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\APIPEPROJ\FINAL\OUTPUT\FINAL.MES
OPTION-SWITCHES-LONG D:\autopipe\Apipe.opl
BINARY-SYMBOLS D:\autopipe\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\APIPEPROJ\FINAL\SUPPORT.BIN
DRAWING-DEFINITION D:\autopipe\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\APIPEPROJ\FINAL\FINAL.DDF
ALTERNATIVE-TEXT D:\autopipe\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\APIPEPROJ\FINAL\FINAL.ALT
POSITIONED-TEXT D:\autopipe\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\APIPEPROJ\FINAL\FINAL.POS
USER-SPECIFIED-MATERIAL-FILE D:\autopipe\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\APIPEPROJ\FINAL\FINAL.STS
MATERIAL-LIST-DEFINITION D:\autopipe\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\APIPEPROJ\FINAL\FINAL.MLD
DRAWING-FRAME d:\autopipe\pisogen\borders\dbord.dxf
Stress Isometric Options - Plot

The File/Save Stress Isometric command displays the Save Stress Isometric dialog. Pressing 'OK' on the Save Stress Isometric dialog displays a dialog with the following Plot and Table Data
preferences.
Note:
2. When Click OK on the Stress Isometric Options dialog, all of the PLOT and TABLE options (except noted below with OPT values) are saved into the StressIso global settings file (default =
"stressiso.ini").
See Also :
General [Plot]

Browse button. Filename read from
the autopipe.ini which stores all
stress isometric options. If browse
Path and filename to stressiso
Settings Yes, No and select another valid ini file
settings file
then this file will be read and
option settings will be updated for
both Plot and Table Tabs.

21 Opt 21 = 0 to plot the iso, opt 21 =
Isometric Hide/Show plot on the stressiso Yes, No
16 i.e. no iso plot
23 Uncheck this option will disable the
Hide/Show Data tables on the Table TAB and not plot any Table
Data Tables Yes, No
stressiso data i.e. opt 23 = 200, plot the table
opt 23 = 201
Unchecked will export the
complete model. If no range is
selected i.e. single points then the
following message will appear. Yes
to export complete model , No &
cancel to exit back to main
Autopipe screen and no iso created.
Check this option to use
Use Selected
highlighted points only in the Yes, No
Range Note: All Only the table input and
model
result data for the selected range
will be shown.
Note: Hidden segments will not be

plotted
User defined break points defined

in the PCF file will override
number of drawings and automatic
split (0). Note: For multiple sheets
Split Control - No. Enter 0 for automatic split or
Yes 7 Isogen generates automatic file
Drawings required: number of drawings required
numbering filename.sheet.DXF
where sheet = I01, I02 etc
Max. number of drawings = 99

Ignore Break
Used with option above Yes, No 7 Ignore user defined break points
Points
Checking this option provides the
Edit data tables Edit the date which is printed with
Yes user with an STS editor dialog to
(STS file) the isometrics
modify the contents of data table
Print this entry onto the plot .
Enter drawing number to be
Drawing No. No Written into the DDF file. Future
placed on the plot
Enhancement
Use Selected Range warning message
Flange & Valve [Plot]
Option Description Editable Comments

Flange Rating Flange rating on plot Yes, No
Valve Rating Valve rating on plot Yes, No
Flange Tag Flange Tag on plot Yes, No
Valve Tag Valve Tag on plot Yes, No
Line Number [Plot]

Plot at the 2nd point
Line Number Line number on plot Yes, No name on each new
segment
Show Flow Arrows [Plot]

Show Flow Arrows Pipe flow arrows on plot Yes
Points [Plot]

Point Name Show point name on the plot Yes, No
If both point name and
Tee name checked then
Tee Name Show Tee name only on the plot Yes, No
only 1 name printed at
tees.
Grayed out if point
Draw Box on Name Draw Box around the Point Name Yes, No
name is unchecked
Show any non-blank annotation notes
Annotation Yes, No See Annotation dialog
on the plot which has been selected
The property can be set

Show the pipe tag associated with the
Pipe Tag Yes, No in pipe properties
pipe properties
dialog/grid
Options include Long,
Short, 3D and 5D.
Shows the bend radius diameter type
Bend Information Yes, No Incase of override, a
on the plot
user defined value will
be shown
Supports [Plot]

Support Location Show support type and location on plot Yes, No
Autopipe support tag (support id) on
plot e.g. PSG-01 (A01 1). Also shows Grayed out if 'Support
Support & Anchor Tag Yes, No
anchor tags (point name) e.g. TK101 Location' is unchecked
(A00) on the plot.
Grayed out if 'Support
Location' or 'Support &
Draw Box on Tag Draw Box around the Support tag Yes, No
Anchor Tag' is
unchecked
Shows the support attachment ID on
Support Attachment ID Yes, No
the plot
Stress Isometric Options - Table

The File/Save Stress Isometric command displays the Save Stress Isometric dialog. Pressing 'OK' on the Save Stress Isometric dialog displays a dialog with the following Plot and Table Data
preferences.
Note:
2. When Click OK on the Stress Isometric Options dialog, all of the PLOT and TABLE options (except noted below with OPT values) are saved into the StressIso global settings file (default =
"stressiso.ini").
See Also :
General [Table]
Description Editable Comments
Option
Show Ambient temperature in the
Ambient Temperature Yes, No Data table
Model Info table
Show temperature and pressure
conditions in table, similar to model
Operating and Design
input listing for the 2 selected Yes, No Data table
Conditions
temperature cases for operating and
design.
Editable when
Analyzed Temperature cases for conditions checked,
Design Case Yes
design. selectable drop-down
list
Editable when
Analyzed Temperature cases for conditions checked,
Operating Case Yes
operating selectable drop-down
list
Pipe identifier data from the input
Pipeline Data Yes, No Data table
listing.
All support and anchor imposed Data table
External Displacement Yes, No
displacements
Applied Forces and Data table
All applied forces and moments Yes, No
Moments
Flange & Valve [Table]

Valve Data Valve size, type, rating and weight Yes, No Data table
Flange Data Flange size, type, rating and weight Yes, No Data table
Point, segment side, pipe OD,
Tee Data thickness, material, tee type, crotch Yes, No Data table
radius, crotch thickness, SIFin, SIFout
Point, point type, SIFin, SIFout, weld
User SIF Data size, joint OFF, size/avg, type/max, Yes, No Data table
B1, B2
Springs and Constants [Table]

Spring & Constant Show spring table with hot, cold load
Yes, No Data table
Hangers Table etc
Editable when hangers
Analyzed Temperature case used to option checked,
Thermal Case Yes
evaluate hangers selectable drop-down
list
Results [Table]

Show the list of all support id’s with types
(excluding springs and constant hangers)
Support Data Yes, No Data table
with gaps, support stiffness and friction
similar to input listing.
Show all combinations with maximum
directional force and moment at supports. Yes, No
Support Loads Data table
Decimal Load & Displacement - Enter 0 to Yes
3
Yes, No
directional force and moment at anchors.
Anchor Loads Data table
Yes
Decimal Load - Enter 0 to 3
Show maximum stress for each code stress
Yes, No
category
Stress Summary Data table
Yes
Decimal Stress - Enter 0 to 3
Local Forces & directional force and moment at supports in
Yes, No Data table
Displacements local support directions, down/up, left/right,
FWD/back
Note: All support and anchor maximum loads are always shown for gravity and for every non-code combination which gives a maximum load or displacement in the 3 different directions. Hence a
possible maximum of 6 combinations per support will be printed.
Design Factors [Table]

Design factor multiplier for all loads
Support Design
(forces only) in the Support Loads table. Yes, No Data table
Factor
Default = 1.0
Design factor multiplier for all loads
Anchor Design
(forces and moments) in the Anchor Loads Yes, No Data table
Factor
table. Default = 1.0
ISOGEN Options - OverFlow

Note: OPT = Isogen Options switch number located in the OPL file.
Overflow
Automatic This creates a wider non-
overflow onto the standard drawing size. Default.
Radio button option #1 Yes, No 30
2nd Data table
alongside the 1st.
Gives 2nd blank
isometric with
Data table
Radio button option #2 Yes, No 30 No graphic plot on 2nd sheet
overflow. Uses
next drawing
number.
Gives 2nd blank
isometric with
No graphic plot on 2nd sheet
Data table
overflow. Same
drawing number
with suffix 'A'.
Add 'DRG 1 of 1' Yes, No
Checkbox works with either "DRG 1 OF 1" is added to any single sheet
to single Iso 30
option 1, 2 or 3 isometric for identification.
sheets
Normal file
extensions e.g.
Radio button option #1 Yes, No 71 Switch Position 7 = 0
filenameA.dxf,
filenameB.dxf
Switch Position 7 = 1
Append i01, I02
extension to the Radio button option #2 Yes, No 71 Note: This option is not
plotfile extension supported using DWG file
format
Append the
Switch Position 7 = 2
plotfile extension
to i01, I02
extension
ISOGEN Options - Dimensioning/Text

Note:
2. Only positive integer values are permitted in the "Pipe size change from inches to Ft-in (in)", "Table text line spacing" fields.
Dimensioning/Text

4 options:
"Overall Support dims on

same side (Overall support
same side as normal dims"
dimensioning)
"Overall Support dims on
opposite side (Overall support
opposite side as normal dims"
dimensioning)
Support dimensions Yes 40
"Continuous Support dims on
same side (continuous support
same side as normal dims"
dimensioning)
"Continuous Support dims on
opposite side (continuous
opposite side as normal dims"
support dimensioning)
Same side or opposite side of
normal dimensions
100 - USA Dimensioning style.
+ dimensions
101 - USA Dimensioning style +

dimensions suppressed
Uncheck to suppress plotting
Plot all dimensions Yes, No 9
dimensions
0 - regular Dimensioning style +
dimensions
1 - regular Dimensioning style +

dimensions suppressed
Two options to controls basic
Dimension Location Yes 9
dimensioning on plot
Various combinations of
English/Metric
english & metric bore and Yes 41 3 options
Dims
dimensional units
Dimension Format architectural or metric Yes 41 Default = Standard ft-in format
dimensioning
Coordinates Format Yes 41 Default = Metric cords in mm
metric coordinates format
Pipe size change
Enter pipe size in inches, 12
from inches to Ft-in Yes,No 41 Default = 24".
or greater
(in)
All dimensions in Various combinations of bore, Checkbox, if selected will gray
Yes 41
inches dimensional units and styles out "pipe size change .." textbox
Vertical dimensions 3 options to select Yes 119 Radio Button
Select User defined then enables
Text Size: textbox. Enter 1 to 9.9mm. Note:
Stored in Isogen opl file as 10 to
Table font size 99. Default = 2.4
Metric sizes shown above
Plot font size Yes 27 Select User defined then enables
Metric sizes shown above textbox. Enter 1 to 9.9mm. Note:
Stored in Isogen opl file as 10 to
Yes 4 99 Default = 2.4

Select font from drop down
Plot User Font list to apply to the text on the Yes, No 4 Editable
plot
Select font from drop down Editable only if Test Size = user
Table User Font Yes, No 27
list specified, otherwise grayed out
Limits unknown. But suggest
Table text line Enter % value. 90% will
Yes 29 10% to 300% as valid values.
spacing reduce line spacing
Default = 0
Table User Font

When no default drawing border or frame is selected then the data tables may not be column aligned using the default Isogen font. To use a different font (recommend a fixed spaced font like Autodesk
Monotxt) set the Text Size = "User Specified" then select font from the drop down list. The following line is written to the isogen.fls file.
FONT-INFORMATION-FILE D:\CAE\86_source1\exe\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\APIPEPROJ\FINAL\FONTSTD.FIF
Table text size = user defined > font list is enabled otherwise font list is grayed out then FONT-INFORMATION-FILE is not written into isogen.fls
Examples:
if Font list = "Font Not Set" and text size entered = 2.4 then write opl 27 as then FONT-INFORMATION-FILE is not written into isogen.fls and opt switch 27 is:
27 24 ! Material List Text Size control
if Font list = Autodesk Monotxt and enter 2.4mm size then FONT-INFORMATION-FILE is written into isogen.fls and opt switch 27 is:
27 10000024 ! Material List Text Size control
ISOGEN limitation - The Table and/or Plot User Font is only applied if a drawing border is defined which has the embedded font defined in it as selected from the font drop down list.
Isogen Options - Positioning

Note: OPT = Isogen Options switch number located in the OPL file.
Positioning
The X and Y coordinate fields are
only editable when the 'Relocate
Enter the X and Y North arrow' option is checked. The
Relocate North
coordinates to relocate Yes, No 'Relocate North arrow' option is
arrow
the north arrow. unchecked by default. If this option
is unchecked, AutoPIPE uses 0, 0 for
the X and Y coordinates.
The X and Y coordinate fields are
only editable when the 'Relocate
drawing no' option is checked. The
'Relocate drawing no' option is
unchecked by default. If this option
Enter the X and Y
is unchecked, AutoPIPE uses 0, 0 for
coordinates to relocate
Relocate drawing no Yes, No the X and Y coordinates.
the drawing page
number.
If this option is checked, then the
'Add DRG 1 of 1 to single ISO
Sheets' option on the "Overflow" tab
will be checked automatically, and a
warning message will be delivered.
Reference Items
This provides a convenient manual method to insert reference dimensions to the centerline of equipment e.g. Vessels, structural members, buildings etc. Click the Ref. Items command button to display
the following Reference Items dialog.
Reference Point
Enter a valid point name (upper or lowercase). Up to 50 reference points can be entered in one model.
Item Type
Select from the drop down list:
l Building
l Equipment
l Floor Level
l Grid Line
l Horiz. Steel
l Pipeline
l Vert. Steel
l Wall
Item Start Offsets: [input units shown]

Enter the global offset values DX, DY, and DZ from the reference point to define the location of the resolution point of the equipment.
Item Direction Offset: [input units shown]

Enter the direction of the item type centerline e.g. 0, 0, 1000
Note:
Enter a description or comment (up to 40 characters) of the item. This will be printed alongside the item centerline
See Also :

Break Points
Break Points provide a convenient user-controlled method to split the isometric onto different sheets at the specified points in the AutoPIPE model. Click the Break Points command button on the Stress
Isometric Options dialog to display the StressISO Break Points dialog.
l Up to 50 break points can be entered to enable the user to manually split the iso drawing generation at the locations specified. These breakpoints are written into the PCF file as ISO-SPLIT-POINT
with the pipe coordinates.
l See also 3.1.2.1 for options on split control and to ignore break points. The program will validate the point names when Tab to another field or click Ok to the dialog. Any point names (piping or
beam points) not found will be blocked.
l The break points are stored with the model.
l All blank point names will be ignored.
See Also :
Annotation
This provides a convenient manual method to insert Engineers comments on the Stress Isometric at any node. This provides valuable instructions for the CAD Designer or Structural Engineer to
complete their CAD or structural design respectively. Click the Annotation command button to display the following Annotation dialog.
Notes:
1. Multiple notes can be inserted at the same node.
2. A rounded rectangle box is automatically placed around the note.
3. The date and revision number are not plotted on the isometric.
Point
Enter a valid point name (upper or lowercase). If the point name is blank with a non-blank note then the note cannot be placed on the isometric
Note
Enter up to 80 characters.
If more than 80 characters required then enter a 2nd note for the same point name on the next row.
Special characters:
The $ character may be used in any TEXT data to signal a newline. (i.e. for a Message to be output over two lines).
A single @ character may be used at the start or end of any TEXT data to obtain leading or trailing blanks.
Date
The Date / Time stamp is automatically updated when any field on the current row is changed. This field cannot be edited.
Rev
Enter any two numeric or alpha-numeric characters
Plot
Select the box to plot the note on the same row.
See Also :

Stress Isometric INI file
The stress isometric ini file is called the StressIso global settings file. When Click OK on the Stress Isometric Options dialog, all of the PLOT and TABLE options (except noted below) are saved into the
StressIso global settings file (default = "stressiso.ini").
Note:
1. For every new stressISO created the program creates a new date/time stamp for the LIN file and the stressISO mdb file is then created as outlined in Section 10.0.
2. On the Plot Tab , the following options are saved to the apipe.opl file: Isometric, Data tables, Split control and ignore break points.
The path & filename of the StressIso global settings file is stored in the Autopipe.ini file under StressIso section as shown below:
AutoPIPE.ini
[Main]
UseOpenGL=1
UseCOMDlg=0
UseGrids=1
UseStrait=0
UsePCF=0
Language=0
[StressIso]
d:\autopipe\stressiso.ini
STRESSISO.INI file
[Options]
PointName=1
AmbientTemperature=1
SupportTag=1
SupportLocation=1
SpringAndHangers=1
FlangeRating=1
FlangeData=1
ValveRating=1
ValveData=1
SupportLoad=1
AnchorLoad=1
StressSummary=1
PipelineData=1
ExternalDisp=1
ForcesAndMoments=1
OpAndDesign=1
MiscDrawBox=1
SSDrawBox=1
SupportData=1
UseSelectedRange=1
DesignTemp=T1
OperatingTemp=T1
HangerTemp=T1
[NorthArrow]
Axis=-X
[DrawingFrame]
PlotFrame=1
UserDefinedFramePlot=0
DrawingFrame=d:\autopipe\pisogen\borders\dbord.dxf
[GlobalAxis]
PlotGlobalAxis=1
UserDefinedGlobalAxis=0
XCoordinate=170
YCoordinate=37
Scale=200
[Isoviewer]
Selection=0
ViewerPath=C:\Program Files\acad.exe
[Isogen]
OptionsFile=D:\autopipe\exe\Apipe.opl
[ScaleFactor]
Support=1.213000
Anchor=1.234500
STS File Format

The StressISO process uses a STS file (text file) to store both the model input and result data. This data is read by ISOGEN as user defined material data tables and inserted on the isometric plot.
The STS filename will be created with the same filename and directory as the StressISO filename. Only the selected tables of data from the Stress Isometric Options dialog are written into the STS file.
See also STS File Example
Note: For Use Selected Range Option, only model data for the selected points in the model are written to the STS file
MODEL INFO
Line
1 : Title ="MODEL INFO" , Autopipe version (right justified)
2 : Autopipe model name,
3 : Current Model revision (Left justified), Ambient temperature (right justified)
4 : Spring manufacturer (left justified) [if the spring hanger selected is performed]
PIPE DATA - units

List of all pipe identifiers : Pipe identifier data from model input listing "Pipe data listing" without weight data & ZL/Zc factors.
Header for all other piping codes
Pipe ID Material Nom Sch O.D. W.Th Corr.Mill Insul SG
Note: For BS7159 piping code only the OD is calculated for the ID defined in the model
VALVE
List of all valves : Point name, valve size, valve type, pressure rating and weight (unit)
Note: valve length is shown on the plot
FLANGE
List of all flanges : Point name, flange size, flange type, pressure rating and weight (unit)
FORCE / MOMENT DATA (force unit , moment unit)

List of all applied force/moment data defined in the stress model.
Point name, loadcase, force and moments (Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My, Mz)
IMPOSED DISPLACEMENT (displacement unit , rotation unit)

List of all applied displacements defined in the stress model.
Point name, loadcase, displacements and rotations (Dx, Dy, Dz, Rx, Ry, Rz)
OPERATING CONDITIONS
Pressure & temperature data from the model input listing for the selected operating thermal case in 3.1.2
Segment name is not shown since not identified on the stress plot.
DESIGN CONDITIONS
Pressure & temperature data from the model input listing for the selected design thermal case in 3.1.2
SPRING & CONSTANT HANGERS (displacement unit, force unit, spring stiffness unit)
List of all springs and constant hangers
Support identifier, vertical thermal movement for the selected thermal case (stress options 3.1.2), Hot load ( HL = Cold preload + K * Thermal Disp), Cold preload (Defined on the spring support
dialog) , spring rate (K), spring variation (calculated), Hanger size (if reported from hanger selection report), spring model number (if reported from hanger selection report), number of hangers.
The thermal displacement for the selected thermal case in 3.1.2.7 is recovered from the ThermalDisplacement Table in the stressISO mdb file. See section 10.0
Examples: e.g walkthru
----- -------- ------- ------ ------- --------- ------ ----------- -------
B01 0.204 2135.0 2318.2 900.0 8.58 12 FIG 82 1*
0.204 2135.0 2226.6 450.0 4.29 12 FIG B-268 1
0.204 2135.0 2180.8 225.0 2.15 12 FIG 98 1
0.204 2135.0 2165.5 150.0 1.43 12 Triple 1
0.204 2135.0 2158.0 113.0 1.08 12 Quadruple 1
SUPPORT FORCES
( Force - lb , Moment - ft-lb , Tran. - in , Rot. - deg )
Point/ Connect/ Load LOCAL GLOBAL
Supp. ID Type Combination Dirn Force Deform Dirn Force Deform
-------- -------- ----------- ---- -------- -------- ---- -------- --------
B01 GR down 2316 -0.002 X 0.000
B01 1 Spring Y -2316 0.002
Stiff : 900 [spring rate] Z 0.001
Preload : 2318 T1 up 181 0.201 X 0.000
[Cold preload] Y 181 0.201
Z 0.190
E1 up 6 0.007 X 0.086
Y 6 0.007
Z 0.014
Spring hanger operating temperature case = T1
Hot load = cold preload - spring rate * vertical thermal disp
= 2318 lb - 900 lb/in * 0.201
= 2318 - 180.9
= 2137.1 [Reported value on Stressiso spring hanger table]
Note: If thermal displ = -ve then Hot load will be > cold load and if +ve (like above) then hot load < cold load.
Load Variation (Var %) = vertical thermal displacement * spring rate / Hot Load
= 180.9 / 2137.1
= 0.085
= 8.5% [Reported value on Stressiso spring hanger table]
Note:
1. If a spring is undesigned and no hanger selection is run then all fields are blank except the TDISP and e.g. B01
2. If a spring is undesigned and hanger selection performed then all fields will show non-zero values.
3. If a spring is designed i.e. overwritten cold preload and spring rate then these values will appear under Cold and Rate fields, The Hot, Var %, No. and TDISP fields will be shown but Size, Range ID
fields will be blank.
SPRING & CONSTANT HANGER (inch, lb, lb/in)
Supp ID TDisp Hot Cold Rate Var.% Size Range ID No.
B01 0.120
A07 F1 0.149 400.00 400.00
A08 N1 0.394 1093.89 1227.75 340.00 12.24
SUPPORT DATA (displacement unit , translation stiffness , rotational stiffness)

List of all support types (excluding springs and constant hangers) with gaps, support stiffness and friction.
This data is shown and extracted from the model input listing /support sub report.
Support ID, Support Type, Connection to or direction cosine, Support Stiffness, Gap 1, Gap 2, Friction
Note: Gaps are shown relative to the segment or pipeline direction as shown by the pipe arrow on the plot
Gap1: Vstp,Guide-V=down, Lstop,Incl,Tielink=back, Guide-H=Left
Gap2: Vstp,Guide-V=Up , Lstop,Incl,Tielink=frwd, Guide-H=Right
Gap 3 & 4 : Guides (Guide-H) only
SUPPORT LOADS (Max) - (force unit , displacement unit)

List of all maximum support loads and displacements at the defined load combination. Max Fx, Max Fy, Max Fz, Dx, Dy, Dz. Displacements are printed for each maximum combination.
All load combinations with maximum components of load & displacement are listed.
Note:
1. Loads from any selected non-code combination (tools/combinations) hence possible maximum of 3 combinations. This provides the user the flexibility of limiting which combinations are reported.
2. GR (gravity) loads are always shown if selected under tools/combinations.
3. The following note always shown at bottom of the report where the units are shown when match the Autopipe input units
"For Rotational Supports: Loads are moments (N-m) and movements are rotations (deg) "
ANCHOR LOADS (Max) - force unit, moment unit

List of all maximum Anchor loads, Max Fx, Max Fy, Max Fz, Max Mx, Max My, Max Mz.
All load combinations with maximum components of load are listed. Print maximum of 6 DOF loads from any selected non-code combination.
Note:
1. Loads are only shown from any selected non-code combination (tools/combinations) hence possible maximum of 6 combinations. This provides the user the flexibility of limiting which combinations
are reported.
2. GR (gravity) loads are always shown if selected under tools/combinations.
PIPING CODE STRESS SUMMARY - stress unit

As shown in Autopipe result summary.
Stress category, point name, calculated stress, allowable stress, stress ratio, if >= 1.0 (show "*" ), code combination.
STS File Example
See also the STS file format
Example STS file

The "===" denotes a line delimiter on the Isogen Stress Plot
MODEL INFO AutoPIPE Ver: 08.05.00.16
System: QA323_2
Model Rev: 11 Ambient: 70.0deg F
Spring manufacturer : Anvil/Grinnell
===
PIPE DATA - inch
6STD A106-A 6.000 STD 6.625 0.280 0.01 0.05 1.00 0
2S40 A106-A 2.000 40 2.375 0.154 0.01 0.02 0.00 0
1S10S A312-TP304 1.000 10S 1.315 0.109 0 0.01 0.50 0
===
VALVE
Point Size Type Rating Weight(lb)
B01 2 GATE-F 300 75
===
FLANGE
Point Size Type Rating Weight(lb)
A09 2 WELDNECK 300 9
===
FORCE / MOMENT DATA (lb , ft-lb)
Point Load Fx Fy Fz Mx My Mz
A10 T1 0 1000 0 1800 0 0
===
IMPOSED DISPLACEMENT (in , deg)
Point Load Dx Dy Dz Rx Ry Rz
A00 GR 1.000 1.000 -1.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
===
OPERATING CONDITIONS
POINT PRESS. TEMPER EXPAN. MODULUS ALLOW
NAME CASE psi deg F in/100ft E6 psi STRESS
A00 T1 250 350 2.260 28.000 16000
A21 Same as previous point.
A12 T1 250 350 3.200 26.750 19350
B05 Same as previous point.
===
DESIGN CONDITIONS
POINT PRESS. TEMPER EXPAN. MODULUS ALLOW
NAME CASE psi deg F in/100ft E6 psi STRESS
A00 T2 300 400 2.700 27.700 16000
A21 Same as previous point.
A12 T2 300 400 3.800 26.500 18700
B05 Same as previous point.
===
SPRING & CONSTANT HANGERS (in, lb, lb/in)
A07 F1 0.083 400 400 0 1
A08 N1 -0.176 676 500 1000 26 4 FIG 98 1
===
SUPPORT DATA (mm, N/mm , N-m/deg)
Supp ID Type Conn.to Stiff. Gap 1 Gap 2 Friction
A03 N1 Linestop Ground 1234.000 0.10 0.00
A43 1 V-stop Ground Rigid 0.00 0.00 0.00
A14 1 Incline Ground Rigid 0.00 0.00 0.00
Inclined (DX= -0.707 DY= 0.000 DZ= 0.707)
A15 1 Rotation Ground 1200.000
Inclined (DX= 0.000 DY= 1.000 DZ= 0.000)
A18 1 Damper Ground 2000.000
Inclined (DX= 0.000 DY= 0.000 DZ= 1.000)
A20 1 Guide-V Ground 2000.000 0.10 0.20 0.50
A20 1 Guide-H Ground 2000.000 0.30 0.40 0.50
===
SUPPORT LOADS (Max) - lb , inch
Supp ID Fx Fy Fz Dx Dy Dz Combination
A03 N1 0 501 0 -3.820 0.410 1.260 T1
A07 F1 0 0 -800 -5.460 9.860 1.450 GR
A08 N1 0 0 -176 -5.490 11.650 0.580 T1
A43 1 0 0 336 1.510 12.740 0.000 T1
A14 1 243 0 -243 0.330 11.520 0.330 T1
A15 1 0 -268 0 1.880 -2.680 -7.170 T1
A18 1 0 0 43 -2.620 16.620 -1.050 E1
A20 1 77 0 -105 0.040 18.030 -0.050 T1
===
ANCHOR LOADS (Max) - lb , ft-lb
Point Fx Fy Fz Mx My Mz Combination
A00 -49 -6 106 -549 -318 -667 T1
B05 -271 498 -185 0 -289 -2068 T1
===
B31.3 STRESS SUMMARY - psi
Category Point Stress Allowable Ratio >1 Combination
Sustained A11 N 40377 16000 2.52 * GR + MaxP
Expansion B04 190169 29838 6.37 * Amb to T1
Occasional A12 61015 25736 2.37 * Sus + E1
Hoop A00 3424 16000 0.21 Max P
===
3.1.6 MODEL INFO
Line
1 : Title ="MODEL INFO" , Autopipe version (right justified)
2 : Autopipe model name,
3 : Current Model revision (Left justified), Ambient temperature (right justified)
4 : Spring manufacturer (left justified)
3.1.7 PIPE DATA - units
List of all pipe identifiers : Pipe identifier data from model input listing "Pipe data listing" without weight data & ZL/Zc factors.
Header for all other piping codes
Note: For BS7159 piping code only the OD is calculated for the ID defined in the model
3.1.8 VALVE
List of all valves : Point name, valve size, valve type, pressure rating and weight (unit)
Note: valve length is shown on the plot
Future: Valve TAG name will be shown on the table
3.1.9 FLANGE
List of all flanges : Point name, flange size, flange type, pressure rating and weight (unit)
3.1.10 FORCE / MOMENT DATA (force unit , moment unit)
List of all applied force/moment data defined in the stress model.
Point name, loadcase, force and moments (Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My, Mz)
3.1.11 IMPOSED DISPLACEMENT (displacement unit , rotation unit)
List of all applied displacements defined in the stress model.
Point name, loadcase, displacements and rotations (Dx, Dy, Dz, Rx, Ry, Rz)
3.1.12 OPERATING CONDITIONS
Pressure & temperature data from the model input listing for the selected operating thermal case in 3.1.2
3.1.13 DESIGN CONDITIONS
Pressure & temperature data from the model input listing for the selected design thermal case in 3.1.2
3.1.14 SPRING & CONSTANT HANGERS (displacement unit, force unit, spring stiffness unit)
List of all springs and constant hangers
Support identifier, vertical thermal movement for the selected thermal case (stress options 3.1.2), Hot load ( HL = Cold preload + K * Thermal Disp), Cold preload (Defined on the spring support
dialog) , spring rate (K), spring variation (calculated), Hanger size (if reported from hanger selection report), spring model number (if reported from hanger selection report), number of hangers.
Future: Support TAG name will be shown on the table and plot instead of the support id
The thermal displacement for the selected thermal case in 3.1.2.7 is recovered from the ThermalDisplacement Table in the stressISO mdb file. See section 10.0
Examples: e.g walkthru
----- -------- ------- ------ ------- --------- ------ ----------- -------
B01 0.204 2135.0 2318.2 900.0 8.58 12 FIG 82 1*
0.204 2135.0 2226.6 450.0 4.29 12 FIG B-268 1
0.204 2135.0 2180.8 225.0 2.15 12 FIG 98 1
0.204 2135.0 2165.5 150.0 1.43 12 Triple 1
0.204 2135.0 2158.0 113.0 1.08 12 Quadruple 1
SUPPORT FORCES
( Force - lb , Moment - ft-lb , Tran. - in , Rot. - deg )
Point/ Connect/ Load LOCAL GLOBAL
Supp. ID Type Combination Dirn Force Deform Dirn Force Deform
-------- -------- ----------- ---- -------- -------- ---- -------- --------
B01 GR down 2316 -0.002 X 0.000
B01 1 Spring Y -2316 0.002
Stiff : 900 [spring rate] Z 0.001
Preload : 2318 T1 up 181 0.201 X 0.000
[Cold preload] Y 181 0.201
Z 0.190
E1 up 6 0.007 X 0.086
Y 6 0.007
Z 0.014
Spring hanger operating temperature case = T1
Hot load = cold preload - spring rate * vertical thermal disp
= 2318 lb - 900 lb/in * 0.201
= 2318 - 180.9
= 2137.1 [Reported value on Stressiso spring hanger table]
Note: If thermal displ = -ve then Hot load will be > cold load and if +ve (like above) then hot load < cold load.
Load Variation (Var %) = vertical thermal displacement * spring rate / Hot Load
= 180.9 / 2137.1
= 0.085
= 8.5% [Reported value on Stressiso spring hanger table]
• If a spring is undesigned and no hanger selection is run then all fields are blank except the TDISP and e.g. B01
• If a spring is undesigned and hanger selection performed then all fields will show non-zero values
• If a spring is designed i.e. overwritten cold preload and spring rate then these values will appear under Cold and Rate fields, The Hot, Var %, No. and TDISP fields will be shown but Size, Range ID
fields will be blank.
SPRING & CONSTANT HANGER (inch, lb, lb/in)
B01 0.120
A07 F1 0.149 400.00 400.00
A08 N1 0.394 1093.89 1227.75 340.00 12.24
3.1.15 SUPPORT DATA (displacement unit , translation stiffness , rotational stiffness)
List of all support types (excluding springs and constant hangers) with gaps, support stiffness and friction.
This data is shown and extracted from the model input listing /support sub report.
Support ID, Support Type, Connection to or direction cosine, Support Stiffness, Gap 1, Gap 2, Friction
Note: Gaps are shown relative to the segment direction.
Gap 3 & 4 : Guides (Guide-H) only
3.1.16 SUPPORT LOADS (Max) - (force unit , displacement unit)
List of all maximum support loads and displacements at the defined load combination. Max Fx, Max Fy, Max Fz, Dx, Dy, Dz. Loads from any selected non-code combination (tools/non-code
comb/select) hence possible maximum of 3 combinations. Displacements are printed for each maximum combination.
All load combinations with maximum components of load & displacement are listed.
Note: This provides the user the flexibility of limiting which combinations are reported.
Future: Support TAG name will be shown on the table and plot instead of the support id
Note: The following note always shown at bottom of the report where the units are shown when match the Autopipe input units
"For Rotational Supports: Loads are moments (N-m) and movements are rotations (deg) "
3.1.17 ANCHOR LOADS (Max) - force unit, moment unit
List of all maximum Anchor loads, Max Fx, Max Fy, Max Fz, Max Mx, Max My, Max Mz.
All load combinations with maximum components of load are listed. Print maximum of 6 DOF loads from any selected non-code combination (tools/non-code comb/select) hence possible max 6
combinations.
Future: Anchor TAG name will be shown on the plot.
3.1.18 PIPING CODE STRESS SUMMARY - stress unit
As shown in Autopipe result summary.
Stress category, point name, calculated stress, allowable stress, stress ratio, if >= 1.0 (show "*" ), code combination.
Stress Isometric Warning Messages
The following modeless dialog appears. Click the Suspend/Resume button to pause running the Isogen process or press the Kill button to stop Isogen process and return to the main AutoPIPE main
screen.
When File Save As Isogen (*.PCF) is selected, then the following message is displayed when the PCF file is created. This message is not displayed when creating a stress isometric.
When the StressISO dxf or dwg file is created then following message is displayed. Click ok to continue.
When errors are found in the ISOGEN error file called FINAL.MES in the pisogen\projects\apipeproj\final\output folder then the following message will appear.
If select Yes then these Isogen error messages will be displayed in apipview.exe.
StressISO Troubleshooting
ISOGEN problems can be due to limitations or many combinations of option switches and settings therefore sometimes difficult to diagnose. When troubleshooting, the ISOGEN message file
(FINAL.MES found in folder &ldots;\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\APIPEPROJ\FINAL\OUTPUT\) provides diagnostic information.
One of the most common problems is "Disconnected Pipeline" shown on the resulting Stress isometric. Please see StressISO troubleshooting guide for workaround.
If you cannot solve the problem with stress isometric generated please send the following files to support@bentley.com
...\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\APIPEPROJ\FINAL\OUTPUT\FINAL.MES
...\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\APIPEPROJ\FINAL\
...\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\APIPEPROJ\FINAL\FINAL.ALT
...\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\APIPEPROJ\FINAL\FINAL.DDF
...\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\APIPEPROJ\FINAL\FINAL.MLD
...\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\APIPEPROJ\FINAL\FINAL.POS
...\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\APIPEPROJ\FINAL\FINAL.STS
...\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\APIPEPROJ\FINAL\FONTSTD.FIF
...\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\APIPEPROJ\FINAL\ISOGEN.fls
...\PISOGEN\PROJECTS\APIPEPROJ\FINAL\SUPPORT.BIN
In program folder
apipe.opl
In the Working folder
filename.pcf
filename.sts
filename.dxf or filename.dwg (isometric created)
filename.dat
For further information please click the link to view the StressISO troubleshooting guide
Edit STS File

On selecting the option "Edit data tables (STS file)", after the process of generating Isometrics has been started, an edit dialog box is provided to the user. The user can review/modify any changes to the
data to be printed with the isometric drawing.
See Also :

AutoPIPE Report Viewer

AutoPIPE report viewer is an external text viewing utility shipped with AutoPIPE to load and display analysis results, input listing reports, errors and warnings.
See Also:
Command Reference
Saved Preferences
Saved Preferences
There are several different settings available for a user to configure, therefore the AutoPIPE Report Viewer will retain certain common settings for the user so that once set, these settings will be used in
all subsequent uses of the viewer. Following is a list of settings options that will be retained:
l AutoPIPE Report Viewer window size, location, type
l Line number: If the user has scrolled to a particular line in the viewer, and closed the AutoPIPE Report Viewer, the next time any other text file is opened, it will try to scroll to the same line, if
available.
l Page Source, i.e. Manual Paper Feed or Automatically Select
l Page Type, i.e. Letter
l Page Orientation, i.e. Portrait
l Page Margins, i.e. Left, Right, Top, Bottom
l Font, i.e. Type and Size
l View State, i.e. Dashed or Solid
l Zoom, i.e. % Magnified
The default preferences are as follows:
Line Number 0 - top of the file

Page Source Automatically Select
Page Type Letter
Page Orientation Portrait
Page Margins Left = 0.25, Right = 0.25, Top = 0.25, Bottom = 0.25
(All values are in inches)

Font 'Courier New'; size = 7.0
View State Solid
Zoom 100%
Report Viewer: Command Reference
Command Reference
This area of the help is organized similar to the structure of the main AutoPIPE Report Viewer menu to enable you to quickly locate help on a particular command or function set. A special Report
Viewer Toolbar Command Reference topic is also provided to enable you to quickly locate within this Viewer Command Reference for that toolbar item.
File Commands
Edit Commands
Format Commands
Help Menu

File Commands
The following File menu options are provided:
Opening an Existing Report
Save As
Page Setup
Print Preview
Printing a Report
Recent Files
Exiting AutoPIPE Report Viewer

Opening an Existing File

Select File/Open from the pull-down menu to open a previously saved system output report.
The Open dialog can be used to open all text files.
The default file types displayed will be set to "Report Files", i.e. *.RPT, *.OUT, *.HGR. Other file types such as "Consistency check Files" (*.SUM, *.CHK) and "Message Files" (*.MSG) can be
displayed. Or "All Files" (*.*) can be displayed.
To open a file, first select the drive and directory where the file is located, then select the desired File Name from the files listed. To open a file, either double-click on it in the file list area, or highlight its
name then press the OK button.
Save As
Select File/Save As to open the Save File dialog. The Save File dialog can be used to save a copy of the report currently opened in the AutoPIPE Report Viewer.
Page Setup
Select File/Page Setup to open the Page Setup dialog. The Page Setup dialog allows the user to modify the page preferences for printing, i.e. Paper Size and Source, Orientation, and the Margins.
Print Preview
Select File/Print Preview to open the Print Preview dialog. Print preview allows you to preview the pages before printing.
See Related:
Printing a Report
Report Viewer Toolbar Command Reference

Printing a Report
Reports can be sent for printing to an attached printer using the procedure outlined below.
1. Select File/Print to open the Print dialog.
2. Select the printer.
3. Select from the following printing options:
l Print All
l Print Selection (Highlighted text)
l Print Current Page
l Print Range
l Number of Copies
4. Press the 'Print' button.

Recent Files
Select File/Recent Files to view the list of files recently opened in this report viewer.
Exiting AutoPIPE Report Viewer

To close AutoPIPE Report Viewer, select File/Exit.
Edit Commands
The following Edit commands are provided:
Undo
Redo
Copy
Select All
Find
Find Next
Undo
This command will "undo" the previous command.
Use the Edit/Redo command to reverse the effects of an Undo.
Formatting updates made to the text for printing, i.e. font type, color, size, style, etc., can be undone/redone.
Redo
The Redo command reverses the effect of one or more Undo commands.
Formatting updates made to the text for printing, i.e. font type, color, size, style, etc., can be undone/redone.
Note: A Redo can only be performed immediately following an Undo.

Copy
The Edit/Copy command enables the user to copy a selection of text to the clipboard.
Select All
Selects all of the text in the report currently opened in the AutoPIPE Report Viewer.
Find
The Edit/Find command enables the user to search for a keyword in the currently opened file. There is an option to select whether the search works on an exact case or not, i.e. exactly matches the
keyword or just has the keyword in it. The search direction can be changed to search upwards from the location of the cursor or downwards from the cursor.
Find Next
Allows the user to find the next occurrence of the keyword. The exact match and search direction will still apply for this option.
Find Next
Allows the user to find the next occurrence of the keyword. The exact match and search direction will still apply for this option.
See Related:
Viewer Find
Format Commands
The following Format commands are provided:
Font
Font Color
Font
Select Format/Font to open the Font dialog. The Font dialog can be used to change the font of the text in the AutoPIPE Report Viewer. The Font dialog also provides the user with an option to set a
particular font as default font for the viewer. Once a font is set as a default font for the viewer, it will be used every time you open the viewer. You can also choose at any time to restore the factory
default by clicking the Reset to default font button.
Font Color
Select Format/Font Color to open the Color dialog. The Color dialog can be used to change the color of the font in the AutoPIPE Report Viewer.
Help Menu Overview
Select a topic from the Help menu for more information about the AutoPIPE Report Viewer. Choices are as follows:
l About: Contains information about the AutoPIPE Report Viewer version you are using, as well as the copyright information:
This section of the Help file provides a reference to the AutoPIPE Report Viewer toolbar and the commands associated with it. Select any toolbar button to view a general functional description of that
icon.
Main Toolbar
File/Open
File/Save As
File/Page Setup
File/Print Preview
File/Print
Edit/Undo
Edit/Redo
Format/Font
Format/Font Color
Edit/Find
Dashed or Solid Line
Zoom Out
Zoom In
Print Preview Toolbar

Print
Zoom
1 Page
2 Pages
3 Pages
4 Pages
6 Pages
Page Direct Select
First Page
Previous Page
Next Page
Last Page
Page Setup
Subject: AutoPIPE FAQ
Platform: Windows XP Pro, Windows Vista Business
Purpose
The purpose of this document is to answer frequently asked questions regarding AutoPIPE.
Index:
1. Can I add a new code material to my existing ASME B31.1 library so the program will update the hot allowable stresses for different temperatures?
2. How do I interpret the elevation of ground relative to the piping model for wind loading?
3. What does [??%] mean in the code compliance report?
4. What is an appropriate way to model a offshore riser?
5 When do I use the Xtra hydrodynamic data ?
6 What is the significance of Cm to buoyancy?
7 How do I model Seabed piping with concrete mattresses?
8. My buried piping system is showing large Displacements in the gravity case.
9. A consistency check shows near-zero elements reported in the model, will this affect my model?
10. A consistency check finds many all of the following warning messages: * * * W A R N I N G - MODEL * * * W726-7: Pipe diameter change without a reducer at point B02.
Why?
11. My piping model with gaps and friction does not converge after five iterations, can I continue?
12. When will the thermal expansion rates be updated for my code materials defined in the piping model?
13. When are my material code allowable stresses updated?
14. My ANSI flange check shows several flanges have increased from class 600 to 900, what does this mean?
15. How do I model code compliance cases in accordance with the DNV code?
16. Some of my segments have been deleted from the model and using RE-NUMBER/ALL in AutoPIPE 6.0 some of the the point names do not match the segment names
e.g. a AB01, AB02 may be on segment V, how can I correct this?
17. Why is my non-linear analysis giving unexpected results i.e large movements in the pressure case across my bellows when my tielink should restrain the pressure
movement?
18. Why is displacement showing 10mm in the E1 case when my guide gaps are 5mm?
19: When I perform a static analysis it stops giving the error message "E801-1 Fatal error unstable system. Need support at node A01 Dir X" also if perform a modal analysis
"E801-16 Fatal error zero energy modes"
20: What is the warning message W90-24 'current model does not match the analysis'
21: What are modeling techniques for special valves and loads like ice/snow loading
22: When I see the Lift-off warning message after the static analysis how can I find out where the lift-off is occurring?
23: For the pipe with the lowest point is at elevation -2 000 mm in the vertical coordinate but actually it is located 10 000 mm above ground, is it correct to specify the "Ground
Elevation for Wind" at -12 000 mm ?
24: In the wind profile, if I specify "Global X" , does it mean +X or -X or the highest value of the two cases?
25: How I can determine if a flange in the piping system is under tension or compression with AutoPIPE?
26: How do I model socket weld fittings?
27: Are there any changes I need to make after I rotate my model about the vertical axis?
28: Do I need to change the weld factors defined in the pipe properties screen?
29: How do I model the offshore code compliance to B31.4, B31.8, BS8010 or CSAZ662 section 11?
30: Why are spring or rigid hangers on vertical legs showing large reaction loads in the Hydrotest (Hy) case compared to the Gravity (Gr) case?
31: I am performing a steam hammer analysis but when should I use ZPA correction method under Time History analysis?
32: How I can be sure I have correctly modeled my fluid transient?
33. Is marine growth thickness included for buoyancy loads?
34: It is optional to include corroded wall thickness, axial force and torsion in the DNV stress calculations, what should I use?
35: Can AutoPIPE open an Caesar input file?
36: How do I calculate the DNV 2000 tension terms?
37: How do I capture marine growth weight?
38: I am carrying out a modal analysis on my offshore riser and what value of Cm should I use on the buoyancy screen?
39: How do I model a rigid anchor in the local pipe direction?
40: How do I model a large sweep bend with radius = 50ft?
41: Do I need to run a static analysis after my hanger selection?
42: What are the +/- points displayed in code compliance and forces/moments reports?
43: Does AutoPIPE include axial stress for ASME B31.1 and B31.3
44: Can I apply local displacements to my guides?
45: Which side of the pipe at a run point are the forces and moments are reported?
46: How does AutoPIPE calculate the Pressure Extension & Pressure Thrust forces?
47: How can I simulate soil settlement on part of my piping system
48: Can I model a Sway Brace?
49: Can I model my pipe shoe supported on a spring can with friction?
50: Why are all my dynamic results positive?
51: Can I create a isometric model to use in AutoCAD or Autoplant?
52: Why does the legend for the interactive code scan show a maximum value = 1.0 for stresses?
53: My B31.3 code stress is showing an overstress in the hoop stress (Max P) case?
54: I open my archived model and it appears blank.
55: Sometimes my Autoplant valves imported from the PXF neutral file have zero weight.
56: How can I change my Y-vertical axis model to Z-vertical?
57: Why does my bend look disconnected from the pipe on the screen?
58: How can I define a branch SIF using B31.1 Fig D-1 sketch d)?
59: Does my expansion joint include contents weight?
60: I keep getting a warning message "W831-1, Combinations include cases not analyzed".
61: How do I make a mirror copy of a section of piping?
62: How do I define the coefficient of lift for wave loading?
63: Can you provide any references for buried pipe design?
64: How do I model the discharge piping accurately relative to my suction Piping?
65: How do I model different parts of the piping system inside and outside a building for wind loads?
66: What does LOC mean in the General Stress Report?
67: How can I determine axial (tension or compression) and bending stress in the pipe?
68: How do I model a ball joint with high inertial moment stiffness?
69: Please confirm the recommended value of the added mass coefficient, Cm for a circular cylinder according to DNV Rules for Submarine Pipeline Systems - 1981 - Fig. A.7
70: How do I define one constant Hydrotest pressure over the whole model?
71: What are the Participation Factors and the Captured Modal Mass in the frequency report?
72: When should I perform a pressure analysis?
73: The AutoPIPE help states "When the rise time several times larger than the 2L/a time, the calculated pressure rise in AutoPIPE might be conservative. For this special case,
the use of a fluid simulation software is recommended if P2 case is critical." What does this mean?
74: My seabed piping shows a large unexpected displacement. Can you please explain.
75. How do I enter cold spring into my main steam model?
76. Given that point A11 is the TIP of a long-radius bend, how are the near and far points related to A11 N-, A11 N+, A11 F-, and A11 F+?
77. When I insert a midpoint there is a big difference in the natural frequencies, can you please explain.
78: When performing seismic analysis, can AutoPIPE do multi support excitation?
79: How can I print an echo of the input response spectra (load)?
80: Where do I input stress range reduction factor?
81: How can I look up the units for a flexible anchor for translational and rotational stiffness?
82: I have been working with AutoPIPE 8.05.01.11 and need to know how to print in version 6.3 when there are no grids.
83: Can AutoPIPE run a flange check. If so, how?
84: I am looking at a tutorial for water hammer called apham1. I have noticed that between A06 and C00 there is, essentially, a split between the supply and discharge lines of
the imaginary pump (each is anchored and flanged). I was not aware this could be done. Could you help me out in getting this same type of arrangement set up for a similar
project I am working on?
85: When coding a tie/link for an expansion joint what is considered gap forward and what is considered gap backward?
86: User needs to know how to close a loop.
87: I am working on a system which a two phase liquid. For the stress analysis, which specific gravity should I use? Should I consider the true representative by getting the
average or just use the higher specific gravity?
88: Does AutoPIPE assume the contents of the pipes are full of water? If so, is there a setting available to modify the specific gravity (or other item) to model a different fluid?
89: Is there a way to easily modify the allowable stress for the custom piping I have put into the model? I am using Code B-7159.
90: Please explain the $T1 and $T2 load case data?
91: Seismic load needs to be run with friction. How do I turn it on?
92: How do I change a temperature over a range?
93: In the Hanger Selection Analysis dialog, it is displaying V-Stop as supports whereas the user has spring hangers. What criteria does it use to determine the supports?
94: If the modal displacements are a unitless number, what is their value based on?
95: How do I hide node numbers?
96: How do I print to AutoCAD DXF?
97: How to increment point numbers by 5 instead of the default increment of 1?
98: I am looking for a quick way of changing the piping orientation and I do not want to start to input the model again. I would like to change the orientation of the horizontal leg to
start from the X and Z plane at 45 degrees.
99: What is the method for stress analysis of pipe settlement when loading traffic?
100: Is there an easy way to change temperatures over a range using the input grids?
101: I am running 12 thermal loadcases (Code B31.1). I noticed in the code combinations that the range from ambient to T1....T12 are considered, however, the total range for all
twelve cases are not shown. For example only "T1 to T2" "T1 to T3" and "T2 to T3" are shown.
102: Where can I find a sample for a pressure balanced expansion joint?
103: How does AutoPIPE decide the allowable stresses on pipes?
104: How do you know if the axial forces on a flange are in compression, simply by looking at the forces and moments report?
105: For Hanger Selection what is considered for spring sizing, cold setting or hot setting?
106: What is Weightless or As-built when considering gapped supports?
107: In the output report why does the Results Summary reflect two different Occasional Cases?
108: Why does the code compliance report show an SIF = 1 for the Sustained Case and 1.3 for all other cases?
109: If a user hasn't saved his model in a while (old bak file) and lost his model by accident, can he use his U0x file and change it to a dat?
110: Does AutoPIPE display "Von Mises" as well as "Tresca" stresses on the output report?
111: How do you set up AutoPIPE Nozzle to work with AutoPIPE?
112: On the support output report, the GR's load is not equal to the spring Preload. Why?
113: How do you model Cryogenic piping?
114: My AutoPIPE application runs slowly on my computer, what can I do?
Question 1: Can I add a new code material to my existing ASME B31.1 library so the program will update the hot allowable stresses for different temperatures?
Answer: Yes, a Word document has been prepared to describe this process. Download it now by clicking HERE.
Back to top
Question 2: How do I interpret the elevation of ground relative to the piping model for wind loading?
ANSWER. For pre AutoPIPE 6.2X , both wind design codes ASCE-7 and UBC ground is always taken as the global vertical axis coordinate = 0. For the ASCE-7 wind code, when
elevations in the piping model are < 15 feet, the program defaults to an elevation = 15 feet to determine the automatic code factors. For the UBC wind code, if elevations in the piping
model are negative, the automatic code factors may become very small resulting in a small calculated wind Pressure. In this case, the piping system should be moved vertically to
correctly position the ground elevations relative to the global vertical axis coordinate = 0. Use Modify/coordinate and enter the appropriate vertical movement. Note: For UBC code
elevations > 400ft are considered with no wind.
User wind profile: The first height field entered references the ground level of the piping/framing system, located at the point in the model with the lowest global vertical axis
coordinate value. Specific height values are the global vertical axis coordinates of points in the model, which means that negative heights (or 0) are possible. Highest = point in the
model with the highest global vertical axis coordinate value.
In AutoPIPE 6.20 or later the ground elevation field should be used to define the location (positive or negative value) where ground is located relative to the global vertical origin e.g Y
= 0 if vertical axis is Y.
Note: UBC:1997 and ASCE-7:1998 codes were updated in V6.2 and now UBC Table 16-G is interpolated for intermediate values and uses values at 400 ft for higher elevations.
Back to top
Question 3: What does [??%] mean in the code compliance report?
Intermediate stress points
A [%??}in code compliance report refers to % location of a point of the higher stress
found than the adjacent run points e.g. AutoPIPE 5.03 default = 19, i.e. 19 intermediate stress points evaluated between any 2 adjacent run points or around a bend from the near to the
far points.
Note: In AutoPIPE 6.0 the default for Intermediate stress points = 0 i.e. turned off.
Intermediate stress points can be important to capture points of highest stress e.g. a simply-supported
Pipe with defined supports at either end has a maximum moment/stress at the mid-span but typically only the support points are defined in the pipe stress model and hence only the
stresses at these points are calculated and reported.
Back to top
Question 4: What is an appropriate way to model a offshore riser?
ANSWER. It is important to add many points along the riser section of pipe e.g. at approximately every 8 to 10 feet to provide adequate mass discretization so the program can capture
the distributed wave loading accurately across the riser pipe. Riser pipes are typically sloped at 10 to 15 deg and guide supports on the riser will be normal to the pipe axis and the
reaction loads normal to the pipe can be seen in the a support forces report which shows Local and global displacement's and reactions. Note: Platform wave displacements should be
applied at the platform anchor and riser guides.
Back to top
Question 5: When do I use the Xtra hydrodynamic data ?
ANSWER. When the pipeline does not experience the wave or current effects then under xtra/hydro data set Cm=0, Cd =0 and CL = 0 across the range of pipe selected e.g the pipe is
in a J-tube, seabed pipe is buried or when concrete mattresses are applied to the seabed piping. These Hydrodynamic coefficients will over-ride the ones defined under Load/Wave.
Back to top
Question 6: What is the significance of Cm to buoyancy?
ANSWER. Cm under buoyancy is only used to compute added mass effects during a modal analysis.
Back to top
Question 7: How do I model Seabed piping with concrete mattresses?
ANSWER. Either i) calculate "equivalent" soil properties for the concrete mattresses then insert these soil properties over this range ii) Model vstops over this section of seabed piping
and use high value of friction e.g 1.5 to 2.0 plus additional distributed weight loading from the concrete mass.
Back to top
Question 8: My buried piping system is showing large Displacement's in the gravity case?
ANSWER. Soil supports are specified for most models with a final stiffness K2 = 0, although AutoPIPE can still solve this problem the results may be invalid if the nonlinear system goes
a large deformation.
The soil should still have some stiffness after yield to restrain the pipe, this is accomplished by specifying a nonzero K2 value (e.g. K2= 0.01) or to include more restraints in the system
or reduce the soil span in the soil identifier. Note that may also be possible that the K1 values for the soil are not providing enough stiffness to the system.
Back to top
Question 9: A consistency check shows near-zero elements reported in the model, will this affect my model?
ANSWER. Try to avoid near-zero elements in a model, particularly with defined soil properties. Generally near-zero elements can be deleted without affecting the model for example if
a run point is defined at the same coordinates as the near or far point of a bend then delete the run point.
Back to top
Question 10: A consistency check finds many all of the following warning messages.
* * * W A R N I N G - MODEL * * *
W726-7: Pipe diameter change without a reducer at point B02
ANSWER. These warning messages can generally be ignored and will be displayed also where two pipe identifiers are connected with the same pipe nominal diameter but with
different wall thicknesses.
Back to top
Question 11: My piping model with gaps and friction does not converge after five iterations, can I continue?
ANSWER. Yes, generally the default number of nonlinear iterations = 5 (in version 6.0 or earlier) is adequate for most models but for models with large gaps and friction it is not
uncommon for convergence to occur after 20-30 iterations particularly with the thermal, wind and earthquake cases being analyzed in one model.
Generally if the model doesn't converge after 50 iterations, a solution cannot be found and reviewing the Model.log file will show bearing force and Displacement convergence errors at
a particular support which may be the reason for the non-convergence.
Note: Default number of nonlinear iterations has been increased to 30 in version 6.10
Back to top
Question 12: When will the thermal expansion rates be updated for my code materials defined in the piping model.
ANSWER. Thermal expansion rates will be updated under the following operations:
Â· Export to a batch file (*.NTL) then importing the same batch file.
Â· Modifying the ambient temperature in the Tools/Model Options/General
Â· Modifying the Pressure temperature across the range or complete model.
Â· Change the number of temperature Pressure cases under edit/system (5.03) or tools/model options/General
Back to top
Question 13: When are my material code allowable stresses updated?
ANSWER. Material code allowable stresses (temperature dependent) are updated under the following operations:
Â· Changing the code material under a pipe identifier.
Â· Modifying the Pressure and temperature across a range.
Back to top
Question 14: My ANSI flange check shows several flanges have increased from class 600 to 900, what does this mean?
ANSWER. The ANSI flange check calculations are recommending increasing the Pressure rating from class 600 to 900 based on the combination of the design Pressure, axial force
and bending moment across the flange, these calculations are shown in appendix O as based on ASME B31.7 nuclear piping code Para 1 704.5 (a). These flange checks are known to
be conservative, and using the calculated effective Pressure in ASME VIII Div I appendix 2 for flange design, a more accurate design check can be completed.
Back to top
Question 15: How do I model code compliance cases in accordance with the DNV code?
ANSWER. The only relevant code compliance categories in the DNV code are functional and environmental as defined in AutoPIPE 6.0 as follows:
"Max Equiv." Represents "load case a - Functional loads". (Von-Mises code category)
"Equiv.+U1" Represents "load case b - Design environmental loads and simultaneously acting functional loads". (combined code category)"
"Hoop" Represents hoop pressure stress only (hoop code category)
Notice the default code combinations under sustained, occasional and expansion have brackets around these cases such that they are not required by the DNV code and have been
de-selected to not print out by default in AutoPIPE 6.0. Also refer to code compliance calculations in the AutoPIPE Reference Information for DNV'81 code calculations.
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR CODE COMPLIANCE CASES FOR DNV CODE
Step1
Start with the default DNV code compliance cases.
Tools/code combinations/reset all
Step 2
If you wish to create user code combinations
a) Functional user code case
e.g. Gr+T1+P1
see below
b) Functional + environmental code case
e.g. Gr+T1+U1+E1
Note: the forces and moments for all load cases are combined at the moment level
then an effective stress calculated and the allowable stress includes a factor =1.33
Back to top
Question 16: Some of my segments have been deleted from the model and using RE-NUMBER/ALL in AutoPIPE 6.x some of the point names do not match the segment names e.g. a
AB01, AB02 may be on segment V, how can I correct this?
Answer. Currently in AutoPIPE 6.0 or 5.0x , the only workaround is or perform an Edit/Cut then Edit/Paste operation.
Select the complete model using Ctrl A or Select/All points such that all points are highlighted red, then select edit/Cut (ctrl X), clicked on or type the name of a base point for typically
the first anchor in the system e.g. A00 then click OK. Click yes to delete all points and the model will disappear from the screen. Select Edit/Paste (ctrl V) from menu, uncheck the box
"connect two selected points", then click OK. The complete model will reappear on the screen
Back to top
Question 17: Why is my non-linear analysis giving unexpected results i.e large movements in the pressure case across my bellows when my tielink should restrain the pressure
movement?
Answer. The tie-link has a large forward gap which under the default load sequence i.e default is "Use default sequence" is checked . Or to change the intial states i.e different load
sequence then uncheck this option.
The following Initial states dialog shows the default load sequence.
i.e GR then thermal then Pressure case.
Since P1 follows the thermal case T1, the bellows moves across the gap under T1
providing "lift-off" or the gap is open then the pressure load causes the
bellows to expand and moves back to take up the tie-link gap.
Further discussion on load sequencing is found in 5.0 appendices pg 190 or AutoPIPE 6.0
AutoPIPE reference information under analysis considerations\static analysis\non-linear analysis\solution sequence
Note: The liftoff can be verified by checking the restraint loads for the tielink reveals
Gr= -64500 and T1= 64500 confirming after the T1 case (gr+t1) no reaction occurs
on the tielink hence tielink gap is open.s
A more expected result i.e pressure occuring before the thermal expansion thus the
load sequence of Pressure after gravity as follows:
giving very small movements in the vertical direction = 0.002mm across the tielink (i.e A02-A01)probably due
to any rigid anchor or support does have a very large finite
stiffness in the finite element analysis within AutoPIPE
Back to top
Question 18: Why is displacement showing 10mm in the E1 case when my guide gaps are 5mm?
Your model is run as a non-linear analysis with the default load sequence ie. Gr then T1 then P1
as seen below in the initial states dialog
Under a non-linear analysis the loads reported in the support and restraint reports
are incremental not absolute total loads.
To observe the resultant loads on supports it is important to create load combinations.
Note: There is a new option under tools/model options/result "Add Def non-code comb" when checked will automatically create many non-code combinations eg Gr+T1+P1
eg at C23 Gr FY = -436 T1 FY= 210 i.e pipe is tending to lift off under the thermal case.
but Gr+t1= -226 which means after T1 the pipe is still sitting on the support and hence
0 upward movement. If Gr Fy equal and opposite of T1(FY) then the total vertical
reaction is 0 and expect to see +ve DY movement in the T1 case
See Also:
Suggest refer to online sections
Extracts from online help AutoPIPE 6.0
Total vs. Incremental Loading
A load case (e.g. gravity, thermal, wind, etc.) represents an increment of load, not a total load (except for gravity). Hence, pipe forces, displacements, support forces, etc. calculated for
a load case represent the increments produced by that case regardless of the type of static analysis performed (linear, or nonlinear). In particular, the results for a thermal case define
the changes in the forces and displacements due to thermal expansion, not the total effects due to combined gravity and thermal. In order to obtain total load effects, combinations must
be defined which include the load cases that have been used to hold the specific loads of interest. "Superposition" of load cases is a commonly accepted principle for a static linear
analysis. However, it is not so straight forward for a nonlinear analysis.
For a linear analysis, the results for each load case are obtained all at once. However, for a nonlinear analysis the results are obtained sequentially. There are two reasons for this.
First, the analysis of a nonlinear system requires iteration (successive trials), and different load cases will usually require different numbers of iterations. Second, (and more important)
the result for any AutoPIPE load case will generally depend on the initial state for that case. For example, the result for a thermal expansion load will generally depend on the state of
the system after gravity load is applied (e.g. which gaps are open and which are closed). The solution for the gravity case must thus be obtained first, and used as the initial state for the
thermal expansion case.
For a nonlinear analysis, the user has the option of selecting a default load sequence or of specifying a user defined sequence. It is important to note that in an AutoPIPE analysis, each
load case is an increment of load, not a total load. To illustrate the difference, consider two alternative procedures for obtaining thermal expansion effects.
If analyses are performed for total loads, the steps are:
1. analyze for gravity;
2. analyze for gravity plus thermal; then
3. subtract Step 1 from Step 2 to get thermal.
If analyses are performed for load increments, the steps are:
1. analyze for gravity; then
2. analyze for thermal, specifying gravity as the initial state.
AutoPIPE uses the second of these procedures. Thus, to obtain the results for gravity plus thermal, a load combination must be defined in using the commands in the Result menu.
Preferred load sequence for correct loads on restraints.
A: You may wish to run a load sequence as follows which considers the earthquake cases after the operating i.e case of GR+P1+T1 and set T1 as the initial state of the E1 case.
This equally applies to wind cases also.
B: If more than one thermal case exists then the user may wish to set T1 as being the initial state for E2, E3 instead of T2 which may not be a operating case.
Regarding your Dx= 10mm in the E1 case since E1 follows Gr case in the load sequence
and Dx = -5mm in Gr case the resultant position Gr+E1 is Dx= +5mm i.e hitting the gap
hence the reaction in E1 case Fx = 179
Back to top
Question 19: When I perform a static analysis it stops giving the error message "E801-1 Fatal error unstable system. Need support at node A01 Dir X" also if perform a modal analysis
"E801-16 Fatal error zero energy modes"
Answer. Possible Solutions are:
a) A segment is not connected to the rest of the model (Check the consistency check warning messages)
b) Tee is not connected correctly
e.g Notice the point names are overlapped (point name is not clearly seen on the screen) at 2 points A and B.
and/or the tee arrowhead is floating in space.
Place cursor on point A and select modify/point , change point name A to B and click ok
Modify convert point to run, then Modify convert point to tee, view/redraw.
c) A beam is not connected to the rest of the piping model with no anchor.
d) A beam is too 'soft' e.g shear area is too small
e) Flexible joint has some stiffness values = 0
f) Nozzle element has very low stiffness.
g) No anchors (rigid or flexible) in the piping system.
If beams are only used to model dummy leg supports.
Then one useful tip in the future to find disconnected beam points is to batch the model
i.e. file save as /NTL (batch) and scroll to the bottom of the NTL file.
There is a section called BEAM NODES as seen below. This section should be empty if dummy legs are modeled correctly i.e beam from bend midpoint to dummy pipe segment.
*** -------BEAM NODES-------
NODE EZ00 -354.306 -0.909 -108.189
NODE FD01 -379.407 -0.914 -108.190
NODE FE01 -381.309 -0.915 -108.190
NODE FF00 -387.104 -0.909 -108.189
NODE FJ00 -445.009 -0.904 -108.190
A model has to be statically determinate which means an anchor can be traced back on every segment of pipe. In some cases the anchor does not have to be rigid but can only have 3
non-zero translational stiffnesses to prevent the pipe "floating off into space". You can also use rigid beam elements to connect pipes together which will also maintain a stable piping
system.
Back to top
Question 20: What is the warning message W90-24 'current model does not match the analysis'?
Answer. This message is displayed when the model has been changed but either one or both of the static and dynamic analysis has not been re-run.
If not wishing to re-run the dynamic analysis then suggest you delete the LIN & EIG files and re-run the static analysis only.
This message does not affect the results.
Note that AutoPIPE 6.2 and later will prompt you for deleting these files.
Back to top
Question 21: What are the modeling techniques for special valves and loads like ice/snow loading?
Answer.
Angle Valve
Refer to online Help topic /AutoPIPE Workbook/AutoPIPE Modeling Approaches/Valves/Relief and Angle Valves
3 way Valve
Insert a tee (set tee component = tee, tee type = Other and SIF =1.0), insert very small run pipe then a valve from the each leg of the tee.
Select the tee and run points up to each valve but not including the valve (highlighed red) and Insert/Rigid options over range (include weight = OFF, include thermal expansion = ON)
4 way Valve
Insert a tee (set tee component = cross, tee type = Other and SIF =1.0), insert very small run pipe the a valve from the each of 4 legs of the cross.
Select the tee and run points up to each valve but not including the valve (highlighed red) and Insert/Rigid options over range (include weight = OFF, include thermal expansion = ON)
Prestressed springs
Define the cold preload and spring rate for the spring hanger when Insert /support/spring instead of "Undesigned".
Snow and/or ice loading
Apply either :
a) Select the range of pipe and apply distributed load (Insert/Distributed load) in the vertical down direction equivalent to snow or ice loading in the U1 case
This is a uniform distributed load therefore enter as below:
b) If all the model experiences the snow loading and same pipe size then can use a user-profile wind case in the -vertical direction if calculate the equivalent snow pressure to be
applied i.e snow loading in lb/in divided by the projected pipe diameter (including insulation). Note: Wind pressure default units = lb/sq.ft
Back to top
Question 22: When I see the V-stop Lift-off warning message after the static analysis how can I find out where the lift-off is occurring?
Answer.
To verify lift-off has occurred first examine the Restraint report as below :
Point Load FORCES (lb ) MOMENTS (ft-lb )
name combination X Y Z Result X Y Z Result
C02 V - Stop [ID: C02 1]
GR 0 -1649 0 1649 0 0 0 0
T1 0 1649 0 1649 0 0 0 0
Where the thermal or occasional (e.g. wind, seismic or user) vertical load is equal and opposite to the Gravity (GR) load (-ve vertical load) then lift-off has occurred i.e. GR+T1 vertical
load = 0.
This can ALSO be confirmed in the displacement or support forces report by a +ve vertical displacement in the thermal or occasional (e.g wind, seismic or user) load case as seen
below :
Point Load TRANSLATIONS (in ) ROTATIONS (deg )
name combination X Y Z X Y Z
C02 GR 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 -0.004
T1 0.060 0.117 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.011
LIFT -OFF procedure to find all the supports which are lifting off.
1. Run non-linear analysis and lift-off warning msg is displayed.

2. Clear the selection set i.e Ctrl Q or Select/clear.
3. Select Result/filter criteria /support.
4. Select the logical method = "OR"
5. Check the supports which could be lifting off i.e v-stops and guides.
Note: springs can always move up or down.
6. Check Dy = on , abs = off, and "greater than" , "0.001"
Note: no quotes on the values entered.
Note: This assumes Y = vertical axis change to Dz if Z= vertical axis
All the support points that match this criteria will be highlighted red on the screen or
can be printed in a support forces report provided the batch report option "apply filter criteria " = yes
Note: This procedure also highlights guides on vertical lines which can be ignored
Also supports with gaps in the downward direction
Modeling Options if Lift-off occurs
a) Remove the support and re-run the analysis
b) Use "gap above pipe" and accept pipe will lift off in hot condition
c) Restrain the pipe from moving up e.g 0 gap above the pipe.
d) Replace the support with a spring.
e) Move the support to prevent lift-off.
f) Re-arrange the pipe route to prevent lift-off.
Back to top
Question 23: For the pipe with the lowest point is at elevation -2 000 mm in the vertical coordinate but actually it is located 10 000 mm above ground, is it correct to specify the
"Ground Elevation for Wind" at -12 000 mm ?
Answer: Yes
Back to top
Question 24: In the wind profile, if I specify "Global X" , does it mean +X or -X or the highest value of the two cases?
Answer: Global X = +X only
Back to top
Question 25: How I can determine if a flange in the piping system is under tension or compression with AutoPIPE?
Answer: If you check the box for ANSI flange check then print the Flanges report it will only show tensile axial load. If the ANSI flange report shows axial load = 0 then flange under
compression.
Back to top
Question 26: How do I model socket weld fittings?
Answer: It is recommended based on the intent on many ASME codes to use conservatively an SIF value = 2.1
ASME Codes state the following regarding socket welds:
B31.1 use 1.3 for socket welds with no undercut, and 2.1 for all others.
B31.3 states "2.1 Max or 2.1 T/Cx but not less than 1.3. Cx is the fillet weld leg length"
B31.8 states "2.1 Max or 2.1 T/Cx but not less than 1.3. "
To apply this SIF to all bends and Tees perform the following:
Select/Bends to highlight all bends in the model, then Select/Tees to highlight all bends in the model, then Insert/xtra data/User SIF, Inplane SIF =2.1, Outplane SIF =2.1, Override all
other SIFs at this point = unchecked (i.e maximum SIF used if automatic SIF > 2.1), Flexibility Factor = 1.0 (no flexibility)
Back to top
Question 27: Are there any changes I need to make after I rotate my model about the vertical axis?
Answer: Yes update the following to reflect the new model orientation.
l All imposed support and anchor displacements.

l Forces and moments are applied in a global direction and may also need updating.
l Supports other than springs, constants, guides and v-stops e.g inclined may need to be modified so the restraint direction relative to the pipe is maintained.
Back to top
Question 28: Do I need to change the weld factors defined in the pipe properties screen?
Answer: These are only used for the TDK and SPC piping codes and should be left as the default value = 1.0 for all other codes. Refer to the AutoPIPE help "Weld Factors" for more
in-depth discussion.
Back to top
Question 29: How do I model the offshore code compliance to B31.4, B31.8, BS8010 or CSAZ662 section 11?
Answer: A word document has been prepared to describe this process. Download it now by clicking HERE
Note: In AutoPIPE 2004 edition (v8.50) offhsore codes B31.4 chapter IX, B31.8 Chapter VIII and CSA Z662 section 11 codes were added.
Back to top
Question 30: Why are spring or rigid hangers on vertical legs showing large reaction loads in the Hydrotest (Hy) case compared to the Gravity (Gr) case?
Answer: The vertical leg in the piping effectively becomes a restrained piping system between the hanger and an anchor or another vertical support above or below the current hanger
support. Therefore the large reaction on the vertical leg support in the Hy case is due to the combined effects of pressure extension, any hydrotest thermal effects(usually taken at
ambient) and deadweight under hydrotest case and fluid+pipe weight loads under the GR case. The pipe wants to expand due to pressure but is restrained by the locked spring hanger
therefore generating a large pressure reaction.
Currently, the hydrotest load case in AutoPIPE is only a static linear solution. In other words, support gaps are considered closed and support friction is ignored. In the hydrotest load
case, AutoPIPE automatically converts all designed and undesigned spring and constant hangers to a rigid hanger (V-stop) to simulate locked hangers. Gravity, pressure, and thermal
loads (if any) are combined to simulate hydrotest loads.
As mentioned the Hydrotest includes rigorous pressure analysis which for high pressure systems causes significant pressure extension in the pipe e.g if remove the v-stop at A03N and
run the hydrotest shows upward displacement of 0.005". i.e with the system pumped up with 4950 psi pressure.
With the v-stop at A03N it is assumed locked and generates this upward load = 27482lb trying to resist the pressure extension.
Note: If it is considered that the hanger rod assembly is not rigid in compression (i.e. some slack which is not unreasonable) then it would better to use a separate model with GR, P1
(Pressure Analysis = Checked)and T1 as hydrotest loads, and enter upward gaps for the v-stops then run the analysis as non-linear. This will allow the pipe to move up and not be
restrained.
Note: To include the axial stress due to the pressure analysis cases (P1 - P3) in the calculation of longitudinal pressure stress (may be significant for high pressure systems), under
tools/code combinations/longitudinal pressure, option "Include rigorous pressure stress" = checked. By default this option is OFF.
Back to top
Question 31: I am performing a steam hammer analysis but when should I use ZPA correction method under Time History analysis?
Answer: We recommend to perform two analyses, one with ZPA and one without. For flexible legs (legs with flexible or no axial supports) use no ZPA correction. If the system has
pipe legs with rigid axial supports, use ZPA correction to determine realistic loads on these axial supports. Note: ZPA can be very conservative for flexible legs.
Back to top
Question 32: How I can be sure I have correctly modeled my fluid transient?
Answer: Some key points to check modeling a fluid transient :
l Define the flow rate with correct sign. Flow rate is positive for negative pressure rise.
Note: When a pump is shutdown, there are two shock waves generated. A positive pressure wave on the suction end and a negative pressure wave on the discharge end are
generated. The maximum possible negative pressure wave is equal in magnitude to the pump discharge pressure(Ps) less the liquid vapor pressure (Pv). The pressure wave amplitude
is calculated in AutoPIPE using the Joukowski formula.
DP = Fluid density*Fluid velocity*speed_of_sound
This pressure wave = dP should be less than Ps-Pv to avoid cavitation. This condition should be avoided since the AutoPIPE results will be invalid. Similarly the pressure rise will
be positive upstream of a closed valve and negative downstream of an open valve.
l Typically use default SINE rise function

l Define time history duration as 1st period (1/first modal frequency, hz) + transient duration (as shown in the THL file).
l When click ok to the fluid transient check the red highlighted sections of piping are correct.
l Run the modal analysis with cut-off frequency at least 100 to 150hz. Recommended to perform modal followed by time history analysis at both cut-off frequencies to confirm the
solution has converge i.e. time history results are similar.
l Run time history with and without ZPA correction. See Q31.
Note: Recommend to set under tools/model options/Edit "Mass points per span" = A to allow the program to automatically perform mass discretization on your model for improved
accuracy for the dynamic analysis.
Support solution
Flexible is better. The restraint should only be stiff enough to sufficiently attenuate the low frequency gross deformation.
Back to top
Question 33: Is marine growth thickness included for buoyancy loads?
Answer: No AutoPIPE does not consider marine growth thickness (under load/wave) in the calculation of buoyancy loads but it does consider insulation around the pipe in the
buoyancy load which can be used to simulate marine growth over a section of pipe and also capture additional weight of the marine growth.
Back to top
Question 34: It is optional to include corroded wall thickness, axial force and torsion in the DNV stress calculations, what should I use?
Answer: Yes for the DNV code, the program defaults to Use nominal thickness = checked, since this code explicitly uses nominal thickness for stress calculations. However other
codes default to use corroded thickness for stress calculations which is more conservative. i.e for longitudinal pressure stress and corroded section modulus used in bending stress
calculations.
Refer to the following help topic for code calculations.
AutoPIPE 6.X "Online help topic AutoPIPE Reference information / Code Compliance Calculations/ DNV
By default axial force and torsion effects are NOT included for DNV but it is recommended to include
them for offshore risers especially when the line pressure is high e.g > 500psi.
To include axial force and torsion check the following options.
a) Pressure Analysis = checked (under static/analyze)
b) Include rigorous pressure stress =checked (under Tools/code combinations /longitudinal pressure) to include axial pressure stress in the longitudinal pressure stress
c) Under Tools/model options/results:
l Include axial force = checked

l Include Torsion = checked
Back to top
Question 35: Can AutoPIPE open a Caesar input file?
Answer: AutoPIPE can only open a Caesar neutral file (*.cii), In Caesar convert the caesar model file to a neutral file from the main menu , Tools/external interfaces/Caesar II neutral
file.
Back to top
Question 36: How do I calculate the DNV 2000 tension terms?
Answer: In accordance with DNV 2000, AutoPIPE currently can output the following Local Forces and Moments results:
Note: Local forces convention
-ve = tension
+ve = compression
With buoyancy defined under Load/buoyancy the hydrostatic forces are calculated and automatically included in the GR case.
1. GR = N + PeAe
2. P1 = internal pressure forces in pipe wall not including PiAi (capped pressure term).
3. GR + P1- PiAi = S = N + PeAe - PiAi
Since the sign conventions for S (Effective axial force) , N (True axial force in the pipe wall) , PeAe is consistent with respect to tension or compression i.e signs are automatically
calculated by the program and included in the GR and P1 load cases.
Back to top
Question 37: How do I capture marine growth weight?
Answer: Marine growth thickness usually varies with depth therefore it is recommended to add a distributed load down the riser which can be triangular profile to simulate the varying
thickness vs depth.
Note: There is no marine growth above mean water level, i.e., marine growth is assumed zero above water level for drag and inertia wave calculations.
Back to top
Question 38: I am carrying out a modal analysis on my offshore riser and what value of Cm should I use on the buoyancy screen?
Answer: Referring to the On-line Help a "value of Cm (coefficient of inertia) for cylindrical bodies in a incompressible, frictionless fluid is 2.0".
Also refer to DNV 1981 A.3.2 and fig A.7 which shows added mass coefficient as a function of M/D where M is distance from a fixed boundary. If no influence from a fixed boundary
then use Cm = 1.0 otherwise Cm = 2.29 to 1.0. Most of offshore users use default value = 2.0
Back to top
Question 39: How do I model a rigid anchor in the local pipe direction?
Answer: Enter 3 translational and 3 rotational stiffnesses in local direction for a horizontal pipe, add 1 rotational support about global Y direction (i.e local Y = Global Y), 2 inclined
rotational supports (calculate the cosine restraint direction with respect to the pipe direction), linestop (forward and backward gaps = 0) and guide (left, right, up and down gaps = 0)
Back to top
Question 40: How do I model a large sweep bend with radius = 50ft?
Answer: Assuming the bend has supports along it then model the bend as series of straight pipe run sections with offsets calculated as a segmented miter bend. Alternatively enter the
bend with radius = 50x12 = 600 inches (for ENGLISH units, by overriding the word Long or Short in the radius field. Radius units is displayed in the lower right of the main AutoPIPE
window) and insert soil over the large bend with large value of downward soil stiffness, vertical up and lateral stiffness = 0, longitudinal stiffness = 0 (or some nominal value to include
some frictional resistance).
Back to top
Question 41: Do I need to run a static analysis after my hanger selection?
Answer: Yes since the hanger selection only does a free thermal loading whereas the static analysis considers the spring hanger preload and stiffness.
Back to top
Question 42: What are the +/- points displayed in code compliance and forces/moments reports?
Answer:
+/- points are displayed in the code compliance report :
l pressure or temperature change

l Pipe identifier change
+/- points displayed in forces and moments report:
l Flange points, supports, additional weight, concentrated force, tee point and uniform distributed load.
Back to top
Question 43: Does AutoPIPE include axial stress for ASME B31.1 and B31.3 codes?
Answer: Both ASME B31.1 and B31.3 codes do not give explicit stress calculations for axial stress but for some cases e.g buried pipe, low modulus systems like FRP and high
pressure systems it is recommended to consider axial stress. To include axial stress for all loadcases except pressure then use the option Tools model options /Results "include axial
force" = checked. The sign is ignored when adding axial stress to the code stress calculation since this stress calculation is a gross longitudinal stress in the pipe. This is consistent with
other pipe stress programs.
Note: To include the axial stress due to the pressure analysis cases (P1 - P3) in the calculation of longitudinal pressure stress (may be significant for high pressure systems), under
tools/code combinations/longitudinal pressure, option "Include rigorous pressure stress" = checked. By default this option is OFF.
Back to top
Question 44: Can I apply local displacements to my guides?
Answer: Only the component of the global displacements in the local restraint direction i.e normal to the pipe for a guide is applied to the restraint. Hence for a skewed pipe, a local
displacement can be resolved into global components and applied to the guide.
Back to top
Question 45: Which side of the pipe at a run point are the forces and moments are reported?
Answer: Global Forces and moments convention
Refer to online help topic Figure H-3 on AutoPIPE 6.0 reference information/ results interpretation/ Pipe Forces and Moments: Global Option
Check the forward direction of the pipe and imagine all the pipe upstream of the reported run point is removed then local or global forces and moments reported (-ve point) will be those
acting on the downstream pipe to keep it in equilibrium.
For bend and tees and support points and - and + points are reported by the program i.e Loads before /after the point
For example: To resolve the actual forces and moments at a tee defined with 3 segments. The branch segment direction is into the Tee and both the header segments are created
away from the Tee. Then the global forces and moments at the tee can be read directly for the branch point but the sign must be reversed for the global forces and moments reported
on the two header tee points.
Note: For skewed piping connecting equipment, you will generally consider the local forces and moments
acting on the run point if the run direction is not aligned to the global axes. Enter option Tools model options /Results "Force (Global/Local)" = L for local forces and moments.
Back to top
Question 46: How does AutoPIPE calculate the Pressure Extension & Pressure Thrust forces?
Answer: AutoPIPE calculates the pressure thrust based on cap pressure force - poissons effect i.e using inside diameter for the poissons term. This term is at the analysis level
acting on the inside diameter and not a code compliance hoop stress term which uses outside diameter.
1. Pressure thrust reaction at anchor
Rpressure = p.Ai - v.p.Di/2t x As
where Ai is the internal pipe area and As is the X-area of the pipe, t is the wall thickness
2. Pressure extension
Ext = (p.Ai/As/Elong - v.p.Ri/t/Ehoop)*tangent length
Note: AutoPIPE does not report the cap internal pressure load at an anchor unless it is unbalance thrust across a flexible joint with the pressure analysis option checked when
performing a static analysis.
Note: The program calculates displacements then back-calculates forces and moments
from the stiffness matrix equations which many times can be difficult to manually re-produce.
Back to top
Question 47: How can I simulate soil settlement on part of my piping system?
Answer: If the piping system is above ground, at the v-stop and guide supports, we recommend applying ground settlement using imposed support displacement assigned to a user
case (e.g U1). This will allow the soil settlement to be observed as a unique loading. Then add a code case combination "SUS + U1" in the SUSTAINED category (i.e. the settlement U1
load is added to the sustained stresses).
Defined as SUS+U1: Combination method = SUM, Category = Sustain, Case/Comb1 = GR+MaxP, Case/Comb1 = U1
To consider settlement for hanger selection, the following is recommended (since only thermal cases can be considered for hanger selection):
1. Using model A, assign the settlement displacement in the T1 case and run the hanger selection to size the spring.
2. Save Model A to Model B (the only purpose of Model A was to evaluate hanger selection with settlement).
3. Using model B, change the imposed displacements assignments from load case T1 to load case U1, and create user code combinations using "Sus + U1" as defined above.
4. Using additional non-code combinations (e.g. GR+T1+U1) the combined settlement movement and load on the supports, including any spring hangers, can be evaluated.
If the piping system is buried, then the imposed displacement at defined node points (with soil) would give the soil settlement profile. In other words, the base of each soil spring is
subject to a displacement interpolated from adjacent nodes with imposed displacements. Therefore, select the range of points to apply soil settlement, Insert/xtra data/imposed support
displacement, load case to combine with = U1, enter the amount of soil settlement displacement.
Back to top
Question 48: Can I model a Sway Brace?
Answer: You could use an inclined support in the direction of restraint and enter the stiffness corresponding to the sway brace spring stiffness. Add xtra data/conc force (i.e sway brace
preload ) in the direction of restraint in the GR case such that non-code combination Gr + E1 will still have the preload.
Back to top
Question 49: Can I model my pipe shoe supported on a spring can with friction?
Answer: Please refer to Modeling Examples: Supports > Model 7: Spring Can with Friction. This uses a spring, v-stop (with friction) and flexible joint to connect the pipe shoe with the
top plate of the spring can..
Back to top
Question 50: Why are all my dynamic results positive?
Answer: All results from any dynamic analysis are always signless That is positive displacements, forces and moments, support loads etc i.e. although dynamic loads are signed
during the analysis phase of the solution, the results are without sign. The reason is that the results are maximum values over time and represent an envelop of maximum
values. Hence in many piping configurations applied loads - whether +ve or -ve in direction will give an identical result.
Although all dynamic results are always reported as positive including time history, support loads should always be considered +/- for design but be aware that the restraint load will
always be in the direction of the restraint and therefore has a vector direction (therefore signed) not shown in the reported restraint report for dynamic loads (always positive).
Hence it is also not recommended to create user non-code combinations of static + dynamic loads. All stress programs have this limitation.
Also refer to online help - AutoPIPE reference information/Results Interpretation click on Dynamic Support Forces Results.
Note: The Dynamic load analyses including time history are always linear i.e non-linear features such as friction, gaps, soil yielding are ignored.
Back to top
Question 51: Can I create a isometric model to use in AutoCAD or Autoplant?
Answer: Yes there are 3 possible DXF formats which can be exported from AutoPIPE.
DXF file export in either 3D or 2D format and import to Autocad R14 or later.
a. TRUE 3D DXF model (File save as DXF/ Tools/Settings/DXF Drawing Border + include 3D model = yes )
b. 3D LINE ISOMETRIC DXF model (File save as DXF/ Tools/Settings/DXF Drawing Border + include 3D model = no)
c. 2D DXF model (Set the view mode = line then select Print graphics As Autocad DXF)
In the 3D formats a) & b) when the DXF file is first opened in Autocad the view is a plan view by default with the drawing sheet orientated to this plan view which is consistent with 3D
CAD drawings. We recommend use the 2D DXF format for a 'flat' 2 1/2D Isometric view - unfortunately no drawing border but can be copy/pasted from standard CAD drawing. OR
Create a drawing border in paper space to frame all the views you want on the 3D model.
Dimensions and node numbers can be sized under tools/settings/DXF export drawing border e.g change text height = 4 inches. AutoPIPE does not support dimensioning lines only
length offsets shown on the pipe centerline.
Back to top
Question 52: Why does the legend for the interactive code scan show a maximum value = 1.0 for stresses?
Answer: When the stress criteria (not ratio) is selected in the Result/code scan, the color coding is based on the ratio of the calculated stress divided by the largest stress value in the
model. The element is colored based on the highest stress ratio at either end of the element.
Back to top
Question 53: My B31.3 code stress is showing an overstress in the hoop stress (Max P) case?
Answer: Suggest check the mill tolerance, corrosion allowance and pressure at the points of overstress.
Note: Miter bends have a different hoop stress calculation to straight pipe. AutoPIPE is based on the more conservative B31.3 equation 3a.
Note: AutoPIPE always defaults to Y factor = 0.4 (i.e carbon steel <=900F), for different materials and/or higher temperatures change the Y-factor under Tools model options /Results
"Y Factor". Default weld efficiency factor = 1.0.
AutoPIPE 6.X "Online help topic AutoPIPE Reference information / Code Compliance Calculations/ASME B31.1 hoop stress calculation.
Back to top
Question 54: I open my archived model and it appears blank.
Answer: When files are archived to read only media like CD-R they are assigned a file attribute = R (read only) but
AutoPIPE requires the model file (*.DAT) to have a file attribute = A (archive).
Back to top
Question 55: Sometimes my Autoplant valves imported from the PXF neutral file have zero weight.
Answer: Valve weights are read from the Autoplant PXF fil. If no weights are available in the AutoPLANT model then AutoPIPE will attempt to set the weight based on its own valve
library using the valve size, valve type e.g. gate, globe etc and pressure rating e.g 150, 300 etc. If any of these three criteria do not exist e.g ball valves are not in the default valve
library then the weight will be set = 0.
Back to top
Question 56: How can I change my Y-vertical axis model to Z-vertical?
Answer: AutoPIPE was not designed to change the vertical axis for an existing model since
coordinates and supports (except springs, v-stops and guides) may be messed up.
However the model can be saved as a AutoPIPE neutral NTL file (File/save as batch NTL). Open this NTL file in Notepad.exe then change Y-vertical model to Z-vertical model by
changing the Y to Z in the CTL line below
Save the NTL file and in AutoPIPE select File open/ batch NTL
CTL B31.3 Y 1 21.10 SI SI AutoPIPE AUTOB313
to
CTL B31.3 Z 1 21.10 SI SI AutoPIPE AUTOB313
When the model is imported back into AutoPIPE it will have to be rotated (possibly other transformations) to orientate the model as it was before and then check all the supports are
correctly orientated.
Back to top
Question 57: Why does my bend look disconnected from the pipe on the screen?
Answer: Bends may appear disconnected but this is only a plotting limitation and to check bend connectivity with the piping system, use the keyboard left/right arrow keys to move
the cursor along the pipe and around the bend.
Back to top
Question 58: How can I define a branch SIF using B31.1 Fig D-1 sketch d)?
Answer: AutoPIPE currently does not calculate to Fig D-1 B31.1 but the SIF can manually be calculated then applied using insert/xtra data/user SIF on the branch side of the Tee
only. The B31.1 branch effective section modulus is calculated by AutoPIPE = pi rm^2 te since rm is same as rb on Fig D-1 B31.1 (d) then suggest insert a small run with different pipe
identifier having a thickness when used in the section modulus calculation will be equivalent to tb. Where te = smaller of tn or i.tb hence equivalent branch thk = actual tb/ SIF calculated
from Fig D-1 B31.1 assuming i.tb is smaller than tn.
Back to top
Question 59: Does my expansion joint include contents weight?
Answer: AutoPIPE does not automatically include the contents weight across a flexible joint therefore this weight must be included in the total component weight. Also valves and
reducers do include contents weight but nozzle elements do not.
Back to top
Question 60: I keep getting a warning message "W831-1, Combinations include cases not analyzed".
Answer: This warning message means"W831-1" message means either a user non-code or code combination has been created but a load case defined in that combination has not
been analyzed.Note: When a user combination is defined both the non-code and code combination list is fixed i.e. if additional loads cases are analyzed then default code and non-
code combinations are not created. To have the program create the new default combinations then select Tools/code combinations/reset all or Tools/non-code combinations/reset all,
this will remove any user combinations.
Back to top
Question 61: How do I make a mirror copy of a section of piping?
Answer: To make a mirror copy :
a) Select the pipe section to mirror copy.
b) Edit / copy and select appropriate base point.
c) Edit /paste to and paste the copied section to the new location.
d) Select the copied section
e) Edit/scale Enter -1 to mirror those offsets
e.g of mirror about the Z-axis then enter -1,1,1 i.e reverses all the -ve X offsets
Back to top
Question 62: How do I define the coefficient of lift for wave loading?
Answer: The lift coefficient (CL) is typically applied only to the seabed piping and is only defined under Insert/xtra data/hydrodynamic data. By default CL = 0.
Back to top
Question 63: Can you provide any references for buried pipe design?
Answer:
Buried Pipe Design by A.P. Moser
Publisher: McGraw-Hill
Reference: Guidelines for the Seismic Design of Oil and Gas Pipeline Systems - ASCE Committee on Gas and Liquid Fuel Lifelines -1984
Soil Properties : Testing,Measurement and evaluation by Cheng Liu and Jack Evett
ISBN 0-13-0200069-7
Publisher : Prentice Hall
Soil Mechanics in Engineering Practice by Karl Terzaghi
Publisher : John Wiley & Sons
Essence of soil Soil Mechanics and Foundations : Basic Geotechnics by David F Mc Carthy .
Publisher : Prentice Hall.
Guidelines for the Design of Buried Steel Pipe - July 2001 by ASCE Click the following link.
http://www.americanlifelinesalliance.org/pdf/buried_pipe.pdf
Back to top
Question 64: How do I model the discharge piping accurately relative to my suction Piping?
Answer: To model the discharge piping accurately follow the steps below:
1. Place the cursor on the suction point

2. Insert / Segment (see screen bitmap below)
3. Enter New first point name e.g CY00
4. Enter suction point in the "Offset from which point" e.g A07
5. Enter offsets DX, DY, DZ
6. Enter or select pipe identifier for the discharge piping
7. Click Ok
8. Then continue building the new discharge segment
Back to top
Question 65: How do I model different parts of the piping system inside and outside a building for wind loads?
Answer: You will need to model the section of pipe inside the building as a different segment to the outside piping.
On the main wind dialog, uncheck the option "All segments exposed to wind" and after all the wind loads have been defined, a segment dialog will appear which you can select or de-
select the segments which will have wind loading
applied to them.
Back to top
Question 66: What does LOC mean in the General Stress Report?
Answer: General Stress location
Total stress is calculated every 15 deg and the zero degree axis for the total stress location angle in a clockwise direction around the pipe.
The 0 degree axis is the local axis of the pipe cross-section, i.e. perpendicular to the pipe axis, corresponding to the resultant in-plane bending moment. For example, if the local
bending moments are my and mz, then arctan (my/mz) is the location of the 0 degree reference axis for the general stress location relative to the local y axis.
Note: For straight pipe in-plane bending is arbitrary since no plane of bending like an elbow.
Axial stress: fx/A
in-plane bending stress: my/Z
out-plane bending stress: mz/Z
where,
fx = local axial force
my = local in-plane bending moment
mz = local out-plane bending moment
Back to top
Question 67: How can I determine axial (tension or compression) and bending stress in the pipe?
Answer: Refer to the general stress report .
Axial stress = 1/2 x(sum of the longitudinal Max and min stresses)
Stress convention
+ve = tension
-ve = compression
Note: Local forces convention
-ve = tension
+ve = compression
Note: P1 force does not include the capped internal pressure force. However this pressure force PiAi can be manually subtracted from the Local-X P1 force to give a true P1 axial force
i.e Total P1 = P1 - PiAi
Resultant Bending stress = 1/2 x(longitudinal Max - longitudinal min stresses) (always +ve stress since using resultant bending moment)
Question 68: How do I model a ball joint with high inertial moment stiffness?
Answer: The conservative approach would be to add a constant moment at one end of the flexible joint.
Back to top
Question 69: Please confirm the recommended value of the added mass
coefficient, Cm for a circular cylinder according to DNV Rules for Submarine
Pipeline Systems - 1981 - Fig. A.7
Answer: Sorry for the confusion Cm and Ci are inter-changeable in AutoPIPE i.e mass (inertia) coefficient in Buoyancy, Wave Load Hydrodynamic Data dialogs.
So AutoPIPE (Cm)is inertia coefficient but DNV 81 (Cm) is the added mass coefficient.
Where AutoPIPE Mass coefficient (Cm) is the inertia coefficient(i.e. 1 + added mass coeff) [where added mass coeff = Range 2.29 to 1.0 (no fixed boundary) as per DNV'81 Figure
A.7), hence AutoPIPE Cm(Ci) = 3.29 to 2.0]
We will be updating the program and help in v7.0 to clarify the definition of these coefficients.
The only Cm (inertia) used in the modal analysis is the Cm value in the buoyancy loading dialog.
Back to top
Question 70: How do I define one constant Hydrotest pressure over the whole model?
Answer: The hydrotest pressure defined under Load/hydrotest dialog is taken as the pressure (usually case 1) multiplied by the factor e.g. 1.5 at each point hence for case 1 if different
pressures in the system e.g branch line then the hydrotest pressure will be different for the branch.
A workaround if on hydrotest pressure for all points then define a dummy temperature and pressure case 2 which has one constant pressure for the whole model and no temperature
loading i.e ambient and define the hydrotest pressure based on case 2.
Back to top
Question 71: What are the Participation Factors and the Captured Modal Mass in the frequency report?
Answer: The participation factor is a measure of the importance of the mode in earthquake type load. The captured modal mass is another way of quantifying the importance of the
mode and the two are related. The captured modal mass percentage tells how much of the response is atributed to a particular mode and also tells on the mode orientation (X,Y or Z).
The sum of modal masses should be 100% if all modes are counted. But since many modes are not counted, the sum is less than 100 and hence the importance of the ZPA and
missing mass options for dynamic analysis. Please refer to the topic "Missing Mass and ZPA Correction" in the online help for more information.
The participation factors are calculated from the product of the mode shape, the mass matrix and a vector of ones. For mode i the participation factor is calculated as:
Participation_Factor_i= Transpose(ModeShape_i) * MassMatrix * {1}
The mode shape is mass normalized. The above equation is used three times for X, Y and Z directions.
The mass participation report illustrates how sensitive each of the piping system’s modes are to the dynamic loading. High modal participation factors indicate that the mode is easily
excited by the applied dynamic forces. If subsequent displacement reports indicate high dynamic responses then the modes having high participation factors must be dampened or
eliminated. Once a particular mode is targeted as being a problem, it may be viewed in the mode shape report, or graphically via the animated mode shape plots.
Back to top
Question 72: When should I perform a pressure analysis?
Answer: Some guidelines are a pressure analysis should be performed when some significant strain due to pressure can result for example :
a) Systems with expansion joints.
b) Low modulus piping e.g plastic or FRP
c) Large pressure on steel piping systems e.g >500psi
d) Large diameter e.g >=30" diameter with moderate pressure.
Back to top
Question 73: The AutoPIPE help states "When the rise time several times larger than the 2L/a time, the calculated pressure rise in AutoPIPE might
be conservative. For this special case, the use of a fluid simulation software is recommended if P2 case is critical."What does this mean?
Answer: Check for maximum surge pressure (static (362)+ rise (228) =590 psi). This should be added as a second pressure case (P2). Use Tools/Model Options/General and set
number of operating cases to 2. Use Select/All Points and follow by Modify/Pressure & Temperature and set design pressure for P2 to 590 psi. When the rise time several times larger
than the 2L/a time, the calculated pressure rise in AutoPIPE might be conservative. For this special case, the use of a fluid simulation software is recommended if P2 case is critical and
causes an overstress condition in the pipework
If P2=590 psi governs the design, that is critical, the use of fluid simulation software is recommended since AutoPIPE value would be too conservative.
Back to top
Question 74: My seabed piping shows a large unexpected displacement. Can you please explain.
Answer: When the 2nd soil stiffness (K2) is set to zero, the pipe displacement can be large or can cause instability as the soil yields. Most soils especially sand have a parabolic force-
displacement shape and a larger K2 value is justified but it is conservative to assume a small K2 value. It is advisable with a model so sensitive to changing the K2 value, to examine
the soil displacements and forces for more detailed evaluation of yielding e.g. as seen in the soil forces report the horizontal soil force is about 176 kg/m at A78 compared to the P1
value is only 145.8 kg/m hence the soil does not have enough lateral resistance to support this pipe.
Back to top
Question 75: How do I enter cold spring into my main steam model?
Answer: Cold Spring or Cut short in pipe stress programs can only be applied as a fixed displacement value not a percentage of thermal expansion since the amount of cold spring it is
unknown until the completion of the static analysis. This cut short value is equivalent to removing this amount of pipe from the overall length. Therefore a previous static analysis run
should have been performed
The maximum thermal expansion in all 3 global directions is found from a static analysis between 2 anchored points
then the cutshort is calculated in the 3 global directions and applied generally at one location. To apply cutshort in
3 directions it is necessary to insert a small pipe in the direction of these 3 global cut short values e.g. Dx = 3", Dy = 4" , DZ = 5" then apply the cutshort as a resultant value e.g. 7.07" at
the end of this short pipe run.
Important Note: Piping codes do NOT permit reducing sustained or thermal stress range using cold spring. Therefore it
is recommended to apply the cut short in AutoPIPE using the User load case = U1.
Create user Non-code combinations = Gr+P1+T1+U1 and GR+U1 to examine the resultant loads on equipment and supports.
Back to top
Question 76: Given that point A11 is the TIP of a long-radius bend, how are the near and far points related to A11 N-, A11 N+, A11 F-, and A11 F+?
Answer:
A11 N- = on the straight pipe adjacent to near point
A11 N+ = on the bend side adjacent to near point
A11 F- = on the bend side adjacent to far point
A11 F+ = on the straight pipe adjacent to far point
Where the bend near point is the start of the bend and the Far point is the end of the bend.
Back to top
Question 77: When I insert a midpoint there is a big difference in the natural frequencies, can you please explain.
Answer:
It is important you perform all modal and dynamic analyses with automatic mass discretization to capture the dynamic mass in the system.
Recommend you set under tools/model options/Edit "Mass points per span" = A to allow the program to automatically perform mass discretization on your model for improved accuracy
for the dynamic analysis.
Back to top
Question 78: When performing seismic analysis, can AutoPIPE do multi support excitation?
Answer: No but it is common to envelope spectrums to provide a maximum response. This feature is available in AutoPIPE 2004 (v8.6)
Back to top
Question 79: How can I print an echo of the input response spectra (load)?
Answer: AutoPIPE cannot at this time print an echo of the input response spectra. You can, however, manually send the spectrum files (.spc) to the printer.
Back to top
Question 80: Where do I input stress range reduction factor?
Answer: Tools/Model Options/Results...right hand column, second line down.
Back to top
Question 81: How can I look up the units for a flexible anchor for translational and rotational stiffness?
Answer: Select unit in question and read units designation in lower right hand corner of screen.
Back to top
Question 82: I have been working with AutoPIPE 8.05.01.11 and need to know how to print in version 6.3 when there are no grids.
Answer: Go to Results/Output Report and select which items you want to print. Then in the Output Report go to File/Print
Question 83: Can AutoPIPE run a flange check. If so, how?
Answer: Yes, AutoPIPE can run a flange check. In the flange dialog box check "ANSI Check", select the flange class and material and select the gasket material. AutoPIPE
automatically runs the flange check.
Back to top
Question 84: I am looking at the tutorial for water hammer called "Apham1". I have noticed that between A06 and C00 there is, essentially, a split
between the supply and discharge lines of the imaginary pump (each is anchored and flanged). I was notaware this could be done. Could you
help me out in getting this same type of arrangement set up for a similar project I am working on?
Answer: Select the suction nozzle where you want to add a discharge nozzle. Press F3 and note the coordinates. Using your pump drawing calculate the coordinates of your
discharge nozzle. Go to Insert/Segment and set the first point number (i.e if new segment is C then first point would be named C00), and input the discharge nozzle coordinates. Insert
you anchor and proceed.
Note: If the pump is changed or if you need to adjust the position of the discharge then Select the discharge segment and use the Edit/Move command.
Back to top
Question 85: When coding a tie/link for an expansion joint what is considered gap forward and what is considered gap backward?
Answer: The gap forward will allow the near end of the joint to move forward (compress the joint). The gap backward will allow extension of the joint.
Back to top
Question 86: How do I close a loop i.e. cannot a branch back to my header?
Answer: Go to Insert/Run. The dialog box will show you the existing point (from) and the next point (to). Change the "to" point to the one you want to close with. Enter "OK" and the
loop will close.
Note: A segment cannot be connected back on itself e.g. to form Ring manifold a 2nd small segment is required to close the ’Ring’ using Insert /Segment.
Back to top
Question 87: For the stress analysis, which specific gravity should I use for a
two phase flow system? Should I consider the true representative by getting the
average or just use the higher specific gravity?
Answer: For slugging flow induced by the two phase flow, the SG of the liquid should be used.
Back to top
Question 88: Does AutoPIPE assume the contents of the pipes are full of water? If so, is there a setting available to modify the specific gravity (or
other item) to model a different fluid?
Answer: Go to Modify/Properties of a Pipe Identifier to enter the fluid Specific Gravity.
Back to top
Question 89: Is there a way to easily modify the allowable stress for the custom piping I have put into the model? I am using FRP piping code
BS7159.
Answer: For Code BS7159 the Allowable Stress is not entered. The Design Strain is. The Design Strain value is used for the calculation of the allowable design stress corresponding
to the operating load condition. The default value is set to the cold design strain as defined in the Pipe dialog. If a load combination does not include any operating loads, then the
smallest design strain of all the operating loads will be used. Go to Modify/Pressure & Temperature for the operating design strain and Modify/Properties of a Pipe Identifier for the cold
design strain
Back to top
Question 90: Please explain the $T1 and $T2 load case data?
Answer: Loadcases T1 and T2 already existed under a linear analysis and AutoPIPE could not create duplicate loadcases with the same name. So, it renamed the cases as $T1 and
$T2. Please note that when you ran a non-linear analysis and established user cases T1 and T2 the other T1 and T2 cases did not exist. But when you ran a linear analysis, and T1
and T2 were created. AutoPIPE renamed your existing user T1 and T2 cases to avoid a programming conflict.
Back to top
Question 91: Seismic load needs to be run with friction. How do I turn it on?
Answer: Go to Analyze/Static and turn on Gaps/Friction/Soil. Select OK. Uncheck the Ignore Friction for E1 to E10 box and select OK again.
Back to top
Question 92: How do I change a temperature over a range?
Answer: Select the starting point of your range and, while holding down the Shift key, select the end point of your range. Go to Modify/Pressure and Temperature and type in the new
temperatures. To view go to View/Show/Temperature.
Note: Modify/Operating Load by value allows any temperature or pressure in the complete model to be changed to a different value.
Back to top
Question 93: In the Hanger Selection Analysis dialog, it is displaying V-Stop as supports whereas the user has spring hangers. What criteria does
it use to determine the supports?
Answer: If the movement at the location where you want the spring is less than the value in the Rigid Hanger Criterion box, the program will enter a V-stop. The default value is 0.1
inch. To always have a spring selected then change this value to 0.
Back to top
Question 94: If the modal displacements are a unitless number, what is their valuebased on?
Answer: The modal displacements are mass normalized which means they divided by the the following matrix transformation.
Back to top
Question 95: How do I hide node numbers?
Answer: There are three ways to Hide/Show node points.
1. Hold down Ctrl and depress N.
2. Click the toolbar icon with E-15 on it.
3. Go to View/Show/Point Names
Back to top
Question 96: How do I print to AutoCAD DXF?
Answer: Go to File/Save As/DXF
Note: Tools/Settings/DXF Export Drawing border provides many options to change the drawing sheet size, units, text size, line thickness and drawing margins.
Back to top
Question 97: How to increment point numbers by 5 instead of the default incrementof 1?
Answer: Tools/Model Options/Edit and change "Default point name offset" to 5.
Back to top
Question 98: I am looking for a quick way of changing the piping orientation and I do not want to start to input the model again. I would like to
change the orientation of the horizontal leg to start from the X and Z plane at 45 degrees.
Answer: Highlight the area in question by selecting the first point and holding the shift button down while selecting the second point. Go to Edit/Rotate and input the base point (the
point that you want to rotate about) and enter OK. Input the number of degrees rotation desired and the axis of rotation and enter OK.
Back to top
Question 99: What is the method for stress analysis of pipe settlement when loading traffic?
Answer: After modeling soil points, use support displacements at piping points which have soil defined over them to simulate the soil settlement and then apply a uniform load to
simulate the traffic loading.
Note: If no Soil is defined then insert V-stops with applied support displacement = soil settlement.
Back to top
Question 100: Is there an easy way to change temperatures over a range using the input grids?
Answer:
1. Using the Pres/Temp/Pipe ID tab of the Input Grid enter the temperature at the first point that you want to change.
2. Hold down the Shift key, select the last point in the temperature range. This will highlight the range of cells.
3. Hold down the CTRL key, press Enter, and the temperatures over that range will be updated.
Note: Using the CTRL key can do multiple unconnected selection ranges like EXCEL. The new temperature can be entered after the range is selected also.
Back to top
Question 101: I am running 12 thermal loadcases (Code B31.1). I noticed in the code combinations that the range from ambient to T1....T12 are
considered, however, the total range for all twelve cases are not shown. For example only "T1 to T2" "T1 to T3" and "T2 to T3" are shown.
Answer:
Go to Tools/Model Options/Results and enter 2 to 20 in the No. of thermal ranges option. Note: v8.5 has a new Include Max Range comb option which automatically shows only
the maximum thermal stress and the corresponding combination it is occuring at every point including both ambient to all hot cases and all the thermal ranges. This is very useful to
quickly find the maximum thermal stress and not have review and print all the ambient to hot and thermal range cases.
Back to top
Question 102: Where can I find a sample for a pressure balanced expansion joint?
Answer: Go to Help/Contents/Modeling Approaches/Modeling Approaches/Flexible Joints/Pressure Balanced Expansion Joints.
Back to top
Question 103: How does AutoPIPE decide the allowable stresses on pipes?
Answer: Material allowable stresses are per code. The default values for weld efficiency factors are 1, but these values can be adjusted by going to Insert/Xtra Data/User Weld
Efficiency Factors and inputting a lower value when warranted.
Back to top
Question 104: How do you know if the axial forces on a flange are in compression, simply by looking at the forces and moments report?
Answer: Go to Tools/Model Options/Results and set Force (Global/Local) to L for local. That will set X as axial to the pipe regardless of its global orientation. Now if you examine your
Forces_Moments and Flange Reports, you will see that a negative value will show a tensile force. Also see Q67.
Back to top
Question 105: For Hanger Selection what is considered for spring sizing, cold
setting or hot setting?
Answer: The current default hanger selection method uses hot setting or hot load design. There is no automatic option at this time to use cold setting or cold load design.
To perform a cold load design:
Method A.
1. Tools/Model Options/General , add one more temperature case for the model and define at ambient temperature.
2. Set rigid displacement critera = 0 (so springs are automatically selected even though no thermal displacement)
3. Run the hanger selection with variation = 0.25 at the new ambient temperature case only.
4. Springs are all designed now at cold load, change number of temperature cases in Tools/Model Options/General to the original number before step 1 or ignore analyzing this thermal case.
Method B.
1. Set rigid displacement critera = 100"

2. Run hanger selection with variation = 0.25
3. Save hanger report
4. Re-run hanger selection with rigid displacement critera = 0.1"
5. Edit all hangers and replace the cold load value by the V-stop reaction found in step 3.
Method A is simpler to execute but all springs selected are the stiffest lowest range hence if design load variation is low e.g. 10% then the spring rates for many springs will need to be
updated.
Method B requires all cold loads to be updated manually on all springs. The load variation on all springs also needs to be checked and some spring rates may need to be changed.
l Now run a static analysis and confirm vertical displacement = 0 under GR at each spring hanger point.
l Also recalculate the load variation ratio as [(GR+T1)-GR]/GR = T1/GR
l Confirm that both hot and cold reactions can be satisfied by the selected hanger
Advantages of cold load design:
1. Hanger stops are easier to remove
2. GR displacement small
3. Spring loads can be adjusted before system is brought up to temperature
4. Some consider that cold load approach yields a more dependable design
5. In some system configurations, operating loads on connected equipment are lower. A typical configuration resulting in this load reduction is one where a hot vertical riser, anchored at
the bottom, turns horizontally into a nozzle connection.
Disadvantages of cold load design:
1. In some systems, in the hot condition the loads on rotating equipment may be increased by a value proportional to spring rate times the travel.
2. Most installations are done on a hot load design basis since the piping system is operating in the hot condition for most of its project lifecycle.
Back to top
Question 106: What is Weightless or As-built when considering gapped supports?
Answer: Gaps may be specified to be set either As- built (weighted) or weightless. If a gap is As- built, it is assumed to be open (i.e. no support) for the gravity load case, then it is set to
the specified gap AFTER the gravity load is applied. The stop will then engage only if the pipe displacement due to thermal expansion or any other loads exceeds the gap. In effect, a
support with an As- built gap moves with the pipe for gravity load, then remains stationary for thermal and other loads. On the other hand, if the gap is specified in the weightless
condition, the gap can change when the gravity load is applied, and the stop may engage. There is one important exception. If a value of zero is specified for any gap, it is always
assumed that this zero gap is of the weightless type (i.e., the corresponding stop may engage under gravity load). This is done because we have found that users will generally assume
that a zero-gap support acts in this way. If a gap is required to be zero and to be set in the As- built condition (i.e. just closed under gravity load, with zero support load) specify a small,
nonzero value (e.g., 0.002 inches).
Back to top
Question 107: In the output report why does the Results Summary reflect two different Occasional Cases?
Answer: The first summary lists the Maximum Occasional Stress and the second lists the Maximum Occasional Stress Ratio. These are very often the same but not always Max
Ratio=Stress/Allowable Stress.
Back to top
Question 108: Why does the code compliance report show an SIF = 1 for the Sustained Case and 1.3 for all other cases?
Answer: See tools/Model Options/ Results/Set Sustained SIF to 1. This field is only active for the B31.1-1967, B31.3, B31.4, B31.8, DNV, SNCT, CAN-Z662, and KHK level1 codes (it
is closed for all others). These codes define stress intensification factors (SIF's) for the expansion stress category only. This option has been provided since no guidelines are presented
for the sustained and occasional stress categories. If disabled, AutoPIPE will apply the expansion category SIF's to all other stress categories. When it is enabled, an SIF of 1.00 is
used for the sustained category at all points except bends, and the expansion category SIF's are applied to the occasional category. By default this field is disabled for all applicable
codes except B31.1-1967.
Back to top
Question 109: If a user hasn't saved his model in a while (old bak file) and lost his model by accident, can he use his U0x file and change it to a
dat?
Answer: U01, U02 etc up to U99 are actually DAT files. Rename any of the U0x files to DAT and you can retrieve the latest model.
Back to top
Question 110: Does AutoPIPE display "Von Mises" as well as "Tresca" stresses on the output report?
Answer: Yes, select Tools>Model Options>Results>Total Stresses (Oct/Max). 'O' represents the maximum octahedral shear (Von Mises) stress, and M represents Max Shear Stress
(where Max Shear Stress = Tresca stress/2).
Create 2 output reports in order to display the stresses in the General Stress Calculation section or uncheck the "Overwrite output file" option on the Tools>Model Options>Results
dialog.
Also, these stresses could be displayed as a Code Combination, select Help>Contents>Command Reference>User-Defined Code Combinations Category>For all code options...
Back to top
Question 111: How do you set up AutoPIPE Nozzle to work with AutoPIPE?
Install AutoPIPE Nozzle to the default installation directory. Move the entire AutoPIPE Nozzle folder/directory to become a subfolder/directory of AutoPIPE, i.e. C:\Program Files\Bentley\AutoPIPE\AutoPIPE Nozzle.
Update any desktop icons and Start>Program folder icons as necessary.
Back to top
Question 112: On the support output report, the GR's load is not equal to the spring Preload. Why?
The output report GR reaction is calculated and may not be the same as the design Preload. The Preload (cold load) is extracted from the Hanger analysis report. Using the calculated
hot load and the travel distance from the design operating case, the cold load is extracted from the spring manufacturers tables.
Back to top
Question 113: How do you model Cryogenic piping?
Companies like Air Products and York Refrigerant use B31.3 for all their refrigerant or cryogenic piping using AutoPIPE. It is not necessary to use B31.5
Please follow the suggested steps below:
B31.3 code compliance case to figure 323.2.2B to avoid Impact Testing for carbon steels.
Combined longitudinal stress due to pressure, dead weight, and displacement strain (stress intensification factors are not included in this calculation) divided by S, at the design
minimum temperature. In calculating longitudinal stress, the forces and moments in the piping system shall be calculated using nominal dimensions and the stresses calculated using
section properties based on the nominal dimensions less corrosion, erosion and mechanical allowances.
S = nominal design stress at low temperature
AutoPIPE Modeling:
Create a model with one(1) T1, P1 case, with low temp and pressure, so the sustained case (SUS) and (LONG) are based on correct pressure.
Analyze with GR, T1, pressure analysis = ON
Create a user defined code combination as follows:
method = abs sum
category = occasional
combination = (LONG) + GR + cold to T1(s) + P1
The automatic Allowable = K. SH (i.e. S at low temp)
Set the K factor = 1.0 under tools/ code combinations/ occasional load factor.
This combination does add GR, and P1 at the moment level (abs sum) before calculating its stress, which is reasonably conservative, i.e. no moment cancellation in summing the load
cases. Less conservative method is to use SUM combination method. Also adding thermal stress separately is conservative.
Select all Tees and Bends and Insert>Xtra Data>User SIF = 1.0 (both in-plane and out-plane).
Tools>Model Options>Results, "Use Nominal Thickness" = unchecked
The calculated stress ratio can be used to evaluate the temperature reduction below the minimum design metal temperature for carbon steel to clause 323.2.2d(1) and Fig 323.2.2B.
Back to top
Question 114: My AutoPIPE application runs slowly on my computer, what can I do?
One or more of the following suggestions should help a slow computer using AutoPIPE:
1. Does the computer meet the minimum requirements? See Help>Contents>Bentley AutoPIPE>Getting Started>Installation and Authorization>Installation>System Requirements.
2. Change hardware acceleration inside AutoPIPE, View>Settings, uncheck Enable hardware acceleration.
3. In AutoPIPE, View>Level of Detail, check the option to switch to line mode (and may be also try 3 other options).
4. Change computer display properties: Control Panel>Disply>Settings tab>Advanced button>Troubleshoot tab, select a lower hardware acceleration. This may be an iterative process.
5. Control Panel>Display>Appearance?>Effects, the 'Use transition effects for menus and tool tips' option should be unchecked.
6. Update computer's OPENGL display drivers.
7. Check to verify that model size has a limitation of < 10,000 points: Tools>Model Input Listing>Extended Components>Number of Points in the System.
8. Also, you may want to consider defragmenting your hard drive. This can be done (in XP) by going to Programs/Accessories/System Tools/Disk Defragmenter. If your hard drive is very fragmented, the program
has to write data in a lot of different locations, and it slows down considerably.
9. If that does not work, suggest updating the video card, increasing the systems memory, and/or updating the CPU.
10. Check out a license from the Select Server and unplug the network/internet connection. Reboot the system and start AutoPIPE.
If none of these suggestions have helped, please submit a help desk request to support@bentley.com. Please include the computer's system information. Start>Programs>Accessories>System Tools>System
Information. After the program has been opened, select File>Export, then save the file and send a copy for inspection.
Back to top

Autoipe PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Autoipe PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AutoPIPE Help Desk Page 1 of 770

Bentley AutoPIPE V8i SELECTseries 4 Edition

The following help categories are available:

Getting Started with AutoPIPE

Features Contains a partial list of AutoPIPE features.

Properties And Component Libraries

Structural Modeling In Autopipe

Bi-Directional Integration Between STAAD & AutoPIPE

Non-Linear Analysis Options

Local Stress Calculations

Finite Element Theory

Equivalent Linear Analysis

Piping Code Compliance

l ASME B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, B31.8

l ASME Section III Class 1, 2 & 3

l Canadian CAN/CSA - Z662

l British Standards BS 806 and BS 7159 (GRP Piping Code)

l Swedish Piping Code (SPC), Method 2

l Norwegian Det Norske Veritas (DNV) and TBK 5-6

l Dutch Stoomwezen D1101

l French RCC-M and SNCT

l European piping code standard EN 13480

l B31.4 Offshore, B31.8 Offshore & CSA_Z662 Offshore codes

l SNiP Russian 2.05.06-85 Oil & Gas

l International Standard ISO 14692 (GRP Piping Code)

Advanced Capabilities For Varied Piping Environments

New Features In AutoPIPE V8i (SELECTseries 4) v9.5.0

n Displacement time history analysis

n Piecewise exact integration option to time history

n Fluid density factor to each static analysis set

n Fluid density for SAM and Modal Analysis

n Add button to convert period to frequency or vice versa in spectrum files

n Add NPS, rating, and notation to flange report

n Selected flange highlighted on plot

n Double-click first column of row to open the "Flange" dialog

n "Restore sort order" option to hide missing data flanges

n Default "Material Library" based on "Analysis method selected

n "Hide Incomplete Flanges" option to hide flanges with missing data

n Option "Highlight Incomplete Flanges" in the options menu

n Ability to user-define Pmax for ANSI Check

n "Consider Bolt Spacing Correction" option to Analysis TAB

n Update the FLAA card in ntl to write all data

n Improve the loading time of the "Select Material" dialog

n Support attachment ID to Support Grid/dialog

n Input grid for RIGID options element

n Allow entering polar/cylindrical coordinates using radius, angle and elevation

n Limit buoyancy to select segments

n Time History dialog updates

n Pipe Identifier Tag

n Convert dialogs for Response/Force Spectrum dialogs to grid input

n View/Show color options using 256 colors

n More color plots for pipe properties

n View/Show all segments with different colors on the model

n Update displacement and modal plots when result dialog shown

n Add an option to show/hide connected segments

n Show Reference Point tag on Plot

n Option to plot modal frequency as function of mode number

n New NTL card RVER to change ntl version

n Intelligent mapping of Caesar RIGID 'flanges'

n Retain PXF/PCF flange length

n New import menu option "AutoDesk Plant 3D (*.pcf)

n PCF Translator: Add support to import Flex Joint Component

n Export model data, graphics, results and deflected plot to DGN